「根本法门品」显示巴利原文
1. Mūlapariyāyavaggo
「根本法门经释」显示巴利原文
1. Mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
内因缘的注释显示巴利原文
Abbhantaranidānavaṇṇanā
1 如是略示外因缘所应说之内容后,今为从初注释内因缘,而说“然而这是……”等语。在此,作注释者于所注释的法,应先显示词句分解与词义,再以义理汇集等方式作注释,故先为展示词句,而说“‘如是’是不变词”等语。此中,“词句分解”是指词句的差别,并非词句拆分。或应知:依省略一法的语法规则,将“词与词句分解”、“词拆分与词句分解”,皆用“词句分解”一词表达。其中,词拆分应对复合词作如是观:“吉祥树林,故名‘吉祥林’”;“诸娑罗树中之王”,或说“既是娑罗树又是王,故名‘娑罗树王’”。显示巴利原文
1. Evaṃ bāhiranidāne vattabbaṃ atidisitvā idāni abhantaranidānaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya saṃvaṇṇetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ paneta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karontena saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme padavibhāgaṃ padatthañca dassetvā tato paraṃ piṇḍattādidassanavasena saṃvaṇṇanā kātabbā, tasmā padāni tāva dassento ‘‘evanti nipātapada’’ntiādimāha. Tattha padavibhāgoti padānaṃ viseso, na padaviggaho. Atha vā padāni ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgo, padaviggaho ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgoti vā ekasesavasena padapadaviggahā padavibhāgasaddena vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha padaviggaho ‘‘subhagañca taṃ vanañcāti subhagavanaṃ, sālānaṃ rājā, sālo ca so rājā ca itipi sālarājā’’tiādivasena samāsapadesu daṭṭhabbo.
所谓“以义”,即就词义而言。显示彼词义时,依提取义理之方式,为首先阐明“如是”之义,而说:“首先是‘如是’一词……”等语。“决定等义”:此处“等”字,当知含摄“此为询问”、“此为衡量”等义。如于“如是所趣诸技艺处”、“如是类、如是相”等句中,“如是”一词即含有“此”义。盖“已趣”为“方式”的同义词,同样,“类”、“相”等词亦是。以世间人将“类”、“相应”、“已趣”等词皆用于方式义故。于“汝等是否如是善沐浴、善涂香,理须发,佩戴摩尼、璎珞等严具,着白衣,具足圆满五种欲功德,如汝今者,有师否?”“乔达摩先生,非如是。”等问答中,“如是”用于询问。于“有如是速转”、“有如是寿量”等句中,则用于衡量。显示巴利原文
Atthatoti padatthato. Taṃ pana padatthaṃ atthuddhārakkamena paṭhamaṃ evaṃsaddassa dassento ‘‘evaṃ-saddo tāvā’’tiādimāha. Avadhāraṇādīti ettha ādi-saddena idamatthapucchāparimāṇādiatthānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi ‘‘evaṃgatāni puthusippāyatanāni (dī. ni. 1.163), evavidho evamākāro’’ti ca ādīsu idaṃ-saddassa atthe evaṃ-saddo. Gata-saddo hi pakārapariyāyo, tathā vidhākāra-saddā ca. Tathā hi vidhayuttagata-sadde lokiyā pakāratthe vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalābharaṇā odātavatthavasanā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārenti, seyyathāpi tvaṃ etarahi sācariyakoti. No hidaṃ, bho gotamā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.286) pucchāyaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃlahuparivattaṃ (a. ni. 1.48) evamāyupariyanto’’ti (pārā. 12) ca ādīsu parimāṇe.
如果问:在“你们是否这样善沐浴、善涂香”、“有如是寿限”这些场合,由于“如是”一词已经表达了询问的相状、衡量的相状等,那么“如是”一词是否就只有相状的意思呢?并非如此,因为它是在表达特定的差别。实际上,“如是”一词只是笼统地表示相状,就像在“如是说已”等处那样,所以才说它有“相状之义”,而并非指某一特定的相状。正因为如此理解,“如是生之人”等譬喻之类的例证才能合理地成立。就像在“犹如……众多”中,宣说了从犹如花堆所在之处、人身转生、亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、财富成就,以及布施等种种福行因缘的总集,又从容色、妙香等功德结合的角度,说明了与花鬘功德相似的众多福行,应当被有死之有情所造作。因此,花堆与花鬘功德只是譬喻;它们所譬喻的相状,虽然是用“犹如”一词不特定地说出,但因此说“如是”一词是用来归结譬喻的相状,这也是合理的。然而,当那个譬喻的相状被特定化时,从义理上来说,它本身就是譬喻,所以论中说“用于譬喻时”。同样,在教导与沙门相应的威仪成就时,比如说“应以这样的相状显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā, evamāyupariyanto’’ti ettha evaṃ-saddena pucchanākāraparimāṇākārānaṃ vuttattā ākārattho eva evaṃ-saddoti? Na, visesasabbhāvato. Ākāramattavācako hi evaṃ-saddo ākāratthoti adhippeto yathā ‘‘evaṃ byā kho’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.234, 396), na pana ākāravisesavācako. Evañca katvā ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccenā’’tiādīni upamādiudāharaṇāni upapannāni honti. Tathā hi ‘‘yathāpi…pe… bahu’’nti (dha. pa. 53) ettha puppharāsiṭṭhāniyato manussūpapatti-sappurisūpanissaya-saddhammassavana-yonisomanasikāra- bhogasampatti-ādidānādi-puññakiriyahetusamudāyato sobhā-sugandhatādiguṇayogato mālāguṇasadisiyo pahūtā puññakiriyā maritabbasabhāvatāya maccena sattena kattabbāti jotitattā puppharāsimālāguṇāva upamā, tesaṃ upamākāro yathā-saddena aniyamato vuttoti ‘‘evaṃ-saddo upamākāranigamanattho’’ti vattuṃ yuttaṃ. So pana upamākāro niyamiyamāno atthato upamāva hotīti āha ‘‘upamāyaṃ āgato’’ti. Tathā ‘‘evaṃ iminā ākārena abhikkamitabba’’ntiādinā upadisiyamānāya samaṇasāruppāya ākappasampattiyā yo tattha upadisanākāro, so atthato upadeso evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ te…pe… upadese’’ti. Tathā ‘‘evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’ti ettha ca bhagavatā yathāvuttamatthaṃ aviparītato jānantehi kataṃ tattha saṃvijjamānaguṇānaṃ pakārehi haṃsanaṃ udaggatākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsanaṃ. Yo tattha sampahaṃsanākāroti yojetabbaṃ.
而在“此女人真是如此而来”一句中,应当理解为“含有呵责的相状”。而这呵责的相状,正是由于靠近了“贱婢”等叱骂之词,才得知在此由“如是”一词所显示。正如在此处,由于靠近譬喻等而知道有“譬喻的相状”一样,其他如“譬喻的相状”等,也应当根据所说的“花堆”等词的邻近来理解。然而,在“是的,尊者”这句话中,是比丘们在善巧地听闻、如理地作意于法而受到激励后,以承认自身安住于彼状态中的方式而说出的。所以,这里的“如是”一词是表示接受话语的意思。由此,这句话便包含了“是的,尊者”、“说得好,尊者”、“太好了,尊者”的含义。而在“你应当这样对沙门阿难陀说:‘如我所说’”中,那个即将说出的“如此宣说”的相状,是由“如是”一词所指示的,因此说它用于“指示”。在“是这样吗,不是吗?”等句子中,那些比丘为了对所述诸法会带来无义和痛苦这件事做出决断,便以征求同意的方式问道:“它们会导致呢,还是不导致?你们在此作何见解?”对方回答:“我们在此认为:不是这样。”因此,那种通过如此相状产生的决断,显示巴利原文
Evamevaṃ panāyanti ettha garahaṇākāroti yojetabbaṃ, so ca garahaṇākāro ‘‘vasalī’’tiādikhuṃsanasaddasannidhānato idha evaṃ-saddena pakāsitoti viññāyati. Yathā cettha, evaṃ upamākārādayopi upamādivasena vuttānaṃ puppharāsiādisaddānaṃ sannidhānato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ, bhanteti pana dhammassa sādhukaṃ savanamanasikāre sanniyojitehi bhikkhūhi attano tattha ṭhitabhāvassa paṭijānanavasena vuttattā ettha evaṃ-saddo vacanasampaṭicchanattho vutto. Tena evaṃ, bhante sādhu, bhante, suṭṭhu, bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Evañca vadehīti ‘‘yathāhaṃ vadāmi, evaṃ samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ vadehī’’ti yo evaṃ vadanākāro idāni vattabbo. So evaṃsaddena nidassīyatīti ‘‘nidassane’’ti vuttoti. Evaṃ noti etthāpi tesaṃ yathāvuttadhammānaṃ ahitadukkhāvahabhāve sanniṭṭhānajananatthaṃ anumatigahaṇavasena ‘‘saṃvattanti vā no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotī’’ti pucchāya katāya ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotī’’ti vuttattā tadākārasanniṭṭhānaṃ evaṃ-saddena vibhāvitanti viññāyati. So pana tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanākāro niyamiyamāno avadhāraṇattho hotīti āha ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotītiādīsu avadhāraṇe’’ti.
“种种理趣而微细”:所谓“种种理趣”,是指由一性与异性、无杂事、如是法性所构成的,或者是指依所依等差别,如同钩索、狮子嬉戏、大象游荡般的观察眼目所构成的各种理趣。或者说,“理趣”即巴利圣典的种种流派,这些流派由于施设与随施设等、杂染部分等、世间等、厌逆与无厌逆两者及混合等、善等、蕴等、摄等、时解脱与非时解脱等、安立等、善根等、三法发趣等而有种种差别,所以称为“种种理趣”。由这些理趣而微细、柔和、极为精妙,因此说为“种种理趣而微细”。“以种种志趣为起源”:“意乐”也就是“志趣”,这些志趣因常见等而有种种不同,在此又因尘垢少等而有多类差别;或者说,自己内心的志趣等即是它生起的根源、生起的因,所以称为“以种种志趣为起源”。“义理与文句圆满”:指义理与文句完全圆满,已无需要再补充的;或者应这样理解其义理:以宣说、开显、揭示、分别、阐明、施设六种义句而为圆满,以及以字母、词句、文句、行相、语法、论说六种文句而为具足。显示巴利原文
Nānānayanipuṇanti ekattanānattaabyāpāraevaṃdhammatāsaṅkhātā, nandiyāvattatipukkhalasīhavikkīḷitaaṅkusadisālocanasaṅkhātā vā ādhārādibhedavasena nānāvidhā nayā nānānayā, nayā vā pāḷigatiyo, tā ca paññattianupaññattiādivasena saṃkilesabhāgiyādilokiyāditadubhayavomissakādivasena kusalādivasena khandhādivasena saṅgahādivasena samayavimuttādivasena ṭhapanādivasena kusalamūlādivasena tikappaṭṭhānādivasena ca nānappakārāti nānānayā. Tehi nipuṇaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumanti nānānayanipuṇaṃ. Āsayova ajjhāsayo, te ca sassatādibhedena, tattha ca apparajakkhatādibhedena aneke, attajjhāsayādayo eva vā samuṭṭhānaṃ uppattihetu etassāti anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthabyañjanasampannanti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇaṃ upanetabbābhāvato, saṅkāsanapakāsana-vivaraṇa-vibhajana-uttānīkaraṇa-paññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkhara-padabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatanti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
「种种神变」:在此解释「神变」一词的词义。《优陀那注》《如是语注》《相应部注·天众相应》等处说:「由排除敌对、断除贪等烦恼,故称神变。」然而,世尊并无须排除的贪等敌对烦恼。即使是凡夫,在远离随眠、具足八种功德的心中,也能生起排除了敌对的神通变化,因此不能仅凭凡夫中生起的世俗言说,便将此处称为「神变」。但是,若以大悲世尊所度化众生的烦恼为敌对,由排除这些烦恼而说为「神变」,此说便合理。或者,世尊及其教法的敌对是外道,由排除他们而称为神变。因为通过排除其邪见,以及令其无法彰显邪见,以神通、记说、教诫将他们排除、驱离。又或者,「paṭi」一词在「tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo」等句中,有「之后」之义。因此,在心得定、远离随眠之后,由所作已办者随后应排除、应令生起,故为「神变」;或者,在自己的随眠烦恼被第四禅与道排除之后,再行排除,即为「神变」。而神通、记说、教诫,也是由远离随眠、所作已办者为了利益众生而再次令其生起,并排除自身显示巴利原文
Vividhapāṭihāriyanti ettha pāṭihāriyapadassa vacanatthaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. 1; itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1 devatāsaṃyutta) ‘‘paṭipakkhaharaṇato, rāgādikilesāpanayanato ca pāṭihāriya’’nti vadanti, bhagavato pana paṭipakkhā rāgādayo na santi, ye haritabbā. Puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ pavattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇato ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ca sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena diṭṭhipakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā hontīti . ‘‘Paṭī’’ti vā ayaṃ saddo ‘‘pacchā’’ti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 985; cūḷani. 4) viya, tasmā samāhite citte vigatūpakkilese ca katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti pāṭihāriyaṃ, attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ, iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo ca vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena ca sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upakkilesesu parasattānaṃ upakilesaharaṇāni hontīti pāṭihāriyāni bhavanti. Pāṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ, pāṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanisamudāye bhavaṃ ekamekaṃ pāṭihāriyanti vuccati. Pāṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato, tattha jātaṃ, tasmiṃ vā nimittabhūte, tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyaṃ. Tassa pana iddhiādibhedena visayabhedena ca bahuvidhassa bhagavato desanāyaṃ labbhamānattā āha ‘‘vividhapāṭihāriya’’nti.
「非别异」:意为并非区别于从世尊面前听闻的形态,而不是指与世尊所宣说的形态有差别。因为世尊的教法有不可思议的威力。如此一来,「以一切方式,谁能了知」这句话便得以成立,同时显示忆持之力也并不相违,因其意趣在于不偏离所听闻的形态。在此,并非舍弃义理的另一方面,因为两种义理同属一个领域。否则,长老对于世尊的教法,便会既完全能够领受,又不能完全领受,陷入矛盾。显示巴利原文
Na aññathāti bhagavato sammukhā sutākārato na aññathāti attho, na pana bhagavato desitākārato. Acinteyyānubhāvā hi bhagavato desanā. Evañca katvā ‘‘sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātu’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ bhavati, dhāraṇabaladassanañca na virujjhati sutākārāvirajjhanassa adhippetattā. Na hettha atthantaratāparihāro dvinnampi atthānaṃ ekavisayattā. Itarathā thero bhagavato desanāya sabbathā paṭiggahaṇe samattho asamattho cāti āpajjeyyāti.
「那个其他者不存在,那即是自己」——依此说法,在称为「自身内」的有情相续流转中,三种格位的「我」字(me-sadda)看似只表一种意义,但因可通过工具格、与格、属格等方式显示其中的差别,故说「我字见于三种意义中」(me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissati)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo paro na hoti, so attā’’ti evaṃ vuttāya niyakajjhattasaṅkhātāya sasantatiyā vattanato tividhopi me-saddo kiñcāpi ekasmiṃyeva atthe dissati, karaṇasampadānasāminiddesavasena pana vijjamānaṃ bhedaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissatī’’ti.
尽管前缀能对动词作用加以限定,但由于它本身具有阐明作用,即使带有前缀,「听闻」(suta)一词依然各自表达不同的意义;为了显示在提取无前缀「听闻」的词义时,将带前缀者一并纳入并不矛盾,才说了「有前缀者与无前缀者」等。「Assā」指的是「听闻」(suta)一词。在此,就「听闻」一词可能存在的业格、状态格等衍生含义,所以说「其意义是:已持守,或正在持守」。若取「我」(mayā)义,即是以作者的方式表工具格说明时的意义;若取「我的」(mamā)义,即是以所属的方式表属格说明时的意义。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi upasaggo kiriyaṃ viseseti, jotakabhāvato pana satipi tasmiṃ sutasaddo eva taṃ tamatthaṃ vadatīti anupasaggassa sutasaddassa atthuddhāre saupasaggassa gahaṇaṃ na virujjhatīti dassento ‘‘saupasaggo ca anupasaggo cā’’tiādimāha. Assāti sutasaddassa. Kammabhāvasādhanāni idha sutasadde sambhavantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upadhāritanti vā upadhāraṇanti vā attho’’ti. Mayāti atthe satīti yadā me-saddassa kattuvasena karaṇaniddeso, tadāti attho. Mamāti atthe satīti yadā sambandhavasena sāminiddeso, tadā.
因为紧接在「听闻」(suta)一词后使用的「如是」(evaṃ)应当是指示听闻行为的,所以说:「‘如是’是对耳识等识之作用的指示」。这里「等」字应理解为包含了领受等五种依五门转起的识,以及由这些识所引生的、依意门转起的识。由于一切语句都带有「唯」的意义,因此「听闻」的这一意义即是「唯是所闻」;为阐明此义而说「由于排除了非听闻的状态」。通过这一强调,显示出没有疑虑。并且,正如应当确立「所闻唯是所闻」那样,那才是正确的听闻,故说「无减、无增、无颠倒的领受的指示」。或者,通过排除其他词义的方式,词就表达意义,因此「听闻」即意味著「不是未闻」,这就是它的意义,从而说「由于排除了非听闻的状态」。由此便遮除了「所见」等。这也就是说:「这不是我所见的,不是由自生智所实证的,而是所听闻的,并且是正确的听闻」。因此说:「无减、无增、无颠倒的领受的指示」。或者,当「如是」一词取强调义时,建立起此词义的关联,与之相关的「听闻」一词便说出了这个意义,即「由于排除了非听闻的状态」。显示巴利原文
Suta-saddasannidhāne payuttena evaṃ-saddena savanakiriyājotakena bhavitabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassana’’nti. Ādi-saddena sampaṭicchanādīnaṃ pañcadvārikaviññāṇānaṃ tadabhinīhaṭānañca manodvārikaviññāṇānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sabbesampi vākyānaṃ eva-kāratthasahitattā ‘‘suta’’nti etassa sutamevāti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Etena avadhāraṇena nirāsaṅkataṃ dasseti. Yathā ca sutaṃ sutamevāti niyametabbaṃ, taṃ sammā sutaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Atha vā saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadatīti sutanti asutaṃ na hotīti ayametassa atthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti . Iminā diṭṭhādivinivattanaṃ karoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘na idaṃ mayā diṭṭhaṃ, na sayambhuñāṇena sacchikataṃ, atha kho sutaṃ, tañca kho sammadevā’’ti. Tenevāha – ‘‘anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Avadhāraṇatthe vā evaṃ-sadde ayamatthayojanā karīyatīti tadapekkhassa suta-saddassa ayamattho vutto ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Savanasaddo cettha kammattho veditabbo ‘‘suyyatī’’ti.
如此,通过听闻的因、听闻的人、听闻的特殊性,以一种方式显示了三个词的意义关联之后,现在为了再以其他方式显示,而说出「同样地,如是」(tathā eva)等。其中,「它的」(tassā)指的是那个在世尊面前以听法形式生起的意门识路。因为该识路能以种种方式于所缘上转起。同样地,说「随顺耳门」。「以种种方式」是指后面即将提到的、对于各种音节与义理的领会,是以多样的方式进行的。由此表明,在这一关联中,「如是」一词被取为「行相」的意义。「转起的有性令明了」意思是揭示转起的实际存在。「‘听闻’是法的令明了」意思是:在那所缘当中,所说的识路以种种方式转起,由于所缘是法,所以才这样说,而不是因为「听闻」一词本身有「法」的意义。为使前述的意义更加明晰,而有「此中,如此」等。其中,「以识路」是表工具格意义的工具格词。「我」是作者的意义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ savanahetusuṇantapuggalasavanavisesavasena padattayassa ekena pakārena atthayojanaṃ dassetvā idāni pakārantarehipi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tassāti yā sā bhagavato sammukhā dhammassavanākārena pavattā manodvāraviññāṇavīthi, tassā. Sā hi nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattituṃ samatthā. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘sotadvārānusārenā’’ti. Nānappakārenāti vakkhamānānaṃ anekavihitānaṃ byañjanatthaggahaṇānaṃ nānākārena. Etena imissā yojanāya ākārattho evaṃ-saddo gahitoti dīpeti. Pavattibhāvappakāsananti pavattiyā atthibhāvappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsananti yasmiṃ ārammaṇe vuttappakārā viññāṇavīthi nānappakārena pavattā, tassa dhammattā vuttaṃ, na sutasaddassa dhammatthattā. Vuttassevatthassa pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ ‘‘ayañhetthā’’tiādi. Tattha viññāṇavīthiyāti karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Mayāti kattuatthe.
“如是”一词,意在阐明所应指示的对象——这是取其指示意义而说的,因为所指示的对象并非没有“被指示”的状态。由此表明,用“如是”一词,完整地回顾了整部经。“听闻”是表示动作的词,而听闻行为又与共通的识相续相连,并且此处有“补特伽罗”的称谓,所以这样说:“听闻”是说明补特伽罗的作用。因为在没有补特伽罗称谓的法相续中,是找不到听闻行为的。显示巴利原文
Evanti niddisitabbappakāsananti nidassanatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ nidassetabbassa niddisitabbattābhāvābhāvato. Tena evaṃ-saddena sakalampi suttaṃ paccāmaṭṭhanti dasseti. Suta-saddassa kiriyāsaddattā savanakiriyāya ca sādhāraṇaviññāṇapabandhapaṭibaddhattā tattha ca puggalavohāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘sutanti puggalakiccappakāsana’’nti. Na hi puggalavohārarahite dhammapabandhe savanakiriyā labbhatīti.
“某心相续的”等语,也是取了“如是”一词的行相意义,为显示不同于前一种连接的意义连接方式而说的。其中,“行相的施设”,即依诸法的转起行相而安立的假名施设,因此才这么说。“‘听闻’是对境的说明”,意思是:可听闻的法,经由听闻行为的作者——亦即那位补特伽罗——的听闻行为而成为转起处,故如是说。然而,在胜义上并无任何作者,因为离开了心相续便不可得。但依语言的惯用,凭借内心构思的差别来表达意愿,将心相续视作另一回事,并赋予它拥有那个法,所以说出了“以心相续而具有它”。可听闻的法同时亦是听闻行为的境;因为在此,通过听闻行为而转起的心相续,在胜义上就是作者,或者仅以听闻为形式的心转起本身就是听闻行为,而该行为的作者也有境,所以说“在具有它的作者的境上”。又由于长老对所闻行相有善加决断的状态,故说“领受的决断”。或者应知,这是取了“如是”一词的强调意义,而作此意义连接。显示巴利原文
Yassa cittasantānassātiādipi ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā purimayojanāya aññathā atthayojanaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ākārapaññattīti upādāpaññatti eva dhammānaṃ pavattiākārūpādānavasena tathā vuttā. Sutanti visayaniddesoti sotabbabhūto dhammo savanakiriyākattupuggalassa savanakiriyāvasena pavattiṭṭhānanti katvā vuttaṃ. Cittasantānavinimuttassa paramatthato kassaci kattu abhāvepi saddavohārena buddhiparikappitabhedavacanicchāya cittasantānato aññaṃ viya taṃsamaṅgiṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘cittasantānenataṃsamaṅgino’’ti. Savanakiriyāvisayopi sotabbadhammo savanakiriyāvasena pavattacittasantānassa idha paramatthato kattubhāvato, savanavasena cittappavattiyā eva vā savanakiriyābhāvato taṃkiriyākattu ca visayo hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃsamaṅgino kattuvisaye’’ti. Sutākārassa ca therassa sammānicchitabhāvato āha ‘‘gahaṇasanniṭṭhāna’’nti. Etena vā avadhāraṇatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā ayamatthayojanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
对于先前所听闻的、种种不同的、被称为经的义理与文句,已持取其行相者,为了指示或确定那个行相,而具有令明了的作用,这就是‘如是’一词的体性;因为对彼行相等的持取,是补特伽罗这一施设的所依——即法相续——的作用,所以说:‘“如是”是补特伽罗作用的说明’。然而,听闻行为,即使对主张有补特伽罗的人来说,也离不开识,因此特别指明它是识的作用,而说:‘“听闻”是识作用的说明’。而‘我’(me)一词,因为词语的运用必然涉及有情的领域,同时识的作用也正应该归到那里,所以说:‘“我”是与两种作用相连结的补特伽罗的说明’。为了显示‘不存在之施设’和‘存在之施设’的自性依次是‘如是’词与‘听闻’词的意义,也为了显示它们正是以那样的施设为所依的法相续的作用,而说:‘“如是”是补特伽罗作用的说明,“听闻”是识作用的说明’。在这里应该知道,通过工具、行为、作者、业的差别令明了,通过补特伽罗的作用、境、补特伽罗的作用的指示,通过领受行相、能领受者、境的差别的说明,以及通过作者、工具、作用、作者的说明,显示了后续的四种意义连接。显示巴利原文
Pubbe sutānaṃ nānāvihitānaṃ suttasaṅkhātānaṃ atthabyañjanānaṃ upadhāritarūpassa ākārassa nidassanassa, avadhāraṇassa vā pakāsanasabhāvo evaṃ-saddoti tadākārādiupadhāraṇassa puggalapaññattiyā upādānabhūtadhammapabandhabyāpāratāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso’’ti. Savanakiriyā pana puggalavādinopi viññāṇanirapekkhā natthīti visesato viññāṇabyāpāroti āha ‘‘sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. ‘‘Me’’ti saddappavattiyā ekanteneva sattavisayattā viññāṇakiccassa ca tattheva samodahitabbato ‘‘meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjamānapaññattivijjamānapaññattisabhāvā yathākkamaṃ evaṃ-sadda – suta-saddānaṃ atthāti te tathārūpa-paññatti-upādānabhūta-dhammapabandhabyāpārabhāvena dassento āha – ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso, sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Ettha ca karaṇakiriyākattukammavisesappakāsanavasena puggalabyāpāravisayapuggalabyāpāranidassanavasena gahaṇākāragāhakatabbisayavisesaniddesavasena kattukaraṇabyāpārakattuniddesavasena ca dutiyādayo catasso atthayojanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
因为一切可通过言词而获知的意义,都必须经由“施设”这一门径来解了,而一切施设本身又都含摄于存在等六种施设的分别之中,所以,为了从中抉择出“如是”、“我”等施设的自相,便说:“‘如是’(evaṃ)和‘我’(me)”等。其中,被称为“如是”和“我”的意义,即是行相等诸法;由于它们没有可被执取的实性,因此是“不存在之施设”,故而说:“依真实胜义,是不存在之施设”。此处“依真实胜义”,即依于真实义、依于最上义。意思是:这不象幻、阳焰等那样是不真实义,也不像那些应依传闻等而信受的意义那样并非最上义;唯有色、声等自性,或可被损害、可被领受等自性的意义,才被称为真实义、胜义,而“如是”、“我”等词的意义并非如此。为使这一道理更浅显,才说了“于此,什么是”等。至于“听闻”(sutaṃ),则是针对声处而说“是存在之施设”。正是因此,才说“凡于此由耳所得”;而如果说“随顺耳门所得”,就将义理与文句等一切都包括进来了。显示巴利原文
Sabbassapi saddādhigamanīyassa atthassa paññattimukheneva paṭipajjitabbattā sabbapaññattīnañca vijjamānādivasena chasu paññattibhedesu antogadhattā tesu ‘‘eva’’ntiādīnaṃ paññattīnaṃ sarūpaṃ niddhārento āha – ‘‘evanti ca meti cā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘eva’’nti ca ‘‘me’’ti ca vuccamānassatthassa ākārādino dhammānaṃ asallakkhaṇabhāvato avijjamānapaññattibhāvoti āha – ‘‘saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Tattha saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasenāti bhūtatthauttamatthavasena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo māyāmarīciādayo viya abhūtattho, anussavādīhi gahetabbo viya anuttamattho ca na hoti, so rūpasaddādisabhāvo, ruppanānubhavanādisabhāvo vā attho saccikaṭṭho paramattho cāti vuccati, na tathā ‘‘evaṃ me’’ti padānaṃ atthoti. Etamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘kiñhettha ta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sutanti pana saddāyatanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘yañhi taṃ ettha sotena upaladdha’’nti vuttaṃ, ‘‘sotadvārānusārena upaladdha’’nti pana vutte atthabyañjanādisabbaṃ labbhati.
“依彼彼而应说”的意思是:对于进入耳门范围的法,回顾那些所执取的行相等,而应说为“如是”;对于含摄于有情相续中的诸蕴,而应说为“我”,这就是它的含义。“听闻”这一称谓,虽是在没有“所见”等自性的声处上转起,但如同“第二”“第三”等称谓是相对于“第一”等而转起那样,它也是相对于所见、所觉、所识而转起的,因此说“依于对所见等的对照而应说”——因为没有听闻,“并非未闻”便无意义,这正是在说明“听闻”所彰显的意义。长老运用“如是”来回顾自己所通达的经典各方面的特点,因而说“显示不迷乱”。能通达种种方面,这既显示了将要被解释的这部经典种类之多,也显示了其难以通达的特性。说“显示对所闻的不忘失”,是因为如实显示了所听闻的行相。“以不迷乱”即是通过不迷乱,换言之,唯独由听闻时所生的智慧,来成就其后之时的智慧。同样,在“如是,以不迷乱”之处,也应当这样理解。对于那些需要通达的文句行相,如果并非甚深,只要按照听闻的那样去受持便可,因此在那里“念”的作用更为增强,而“慧”则成为次要的。显示巴利原文
Taṃtaṃ upādāya vattabbatoti sotapathamāgate dhamme upādāya tesaṃ upadhāritākārādino paccāmasanavasena ‘‘eva’’nti, sasantatipariyāpanne khandhe upādāya ‘‘me’’ti vattabbattāti attho. Diṭṭhādisabhāvarahite saddāyatane pavattamānopi sutavohāro ‘‘dutiyaṃ tatiya’’ntiādiko viya paṭhamādīni diṭṭhamutaviññāte apekkhitvāva pavattoti āha ‘‘diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato’’ti asutaṃ na hotīti hi sutanti pakāsitoyamatthoti. Attanā paṭividdhā suttassa pakāravisesā ‘‘eva’’nti therena paccāmaṭṭhāti āha ‘‘asammohaṃ dīpetī’’ti. Nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hotīti etena vakkhamānassa suttassa nānappakārataṃ duppaṭivijjhatañca dasseti. Sutassa asammosaṃ dīpetīti sutākārassa yāthāvato dassiyamānattā vuttaṃ. Asammohenāti sammohābhāvena, paññāya eva vā savanakālasambhūtāya taduttarakālapaññāsiddhi. Evaṃ asammosenāti etthāpi vattabbaṃ. Byañjanānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro nātigambhīro, yathāsutadhāraṇameva tattha karaṇīyanti satiyā byāpāro adhiko, paññā tattha guṇībhūtāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpubbaṅgamāyā’’tiādi ‘‘paññāya pubbaṅgamā’’ti katvā. Pubbaṅgamatā cettha padhānatā ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 1, 2) viya. Pubbaṅgamatāya vā cakkhuviññāṇādīsu āvajjanādīnaṃ viya appadhānatte paññā pubbaṅgamā etissāti ayampi attho yujjati. Evaṃ satipubbaṅgamāyāti etthāpi vuttanayānusārena yathāsambhavamattho veditabbo. Atthabyañjanasampannassāti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇassa, saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatassāti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
“显示如理作意”的意思是:因为“如是”一词所指示、所强调的行相,其所缘是不颠倒的正法。“显示不散乱”的原因是:通过“根本说处,于何处说”等提问,对于将要讲解的属于本论的这部经,若没有心的等持,听闻便不可能发生,因此这样说。而“心散乱者……”等语句,正是为了证成这一道理而说。“一切成就”是指义理、文句、说法者、目的等各方面的圆满成就。正如以不颠倒的正法为所缘而指示、强调行相,便能成就如理作意;同样,通过听闻正法,便能成就心不散乱。就像将如理作意作为果,从而推断出它必不可少的因——自己正确的誓愿与前世所作的福德,二者不可分离一样;同样,以不散乱这个果,也应当能显示出它的因——即听闻正法与亲近善士的成就,因为没有听闻、没有亲近善士的人,是不会有这些的。然而,通过“心散乱者……”等证明性语句,并非是以不散乱为因、以亲近善士为因,来显示作为果的听闻正法的成就。不过,在这里也许可以合理地这样理解其意图:听闻正法与亲近善士,并非不散乱的唯一原因,因为它们都属于外缘;而不散乱则是内在的,与等持共通。显示巴利原文
Yonisomanasikāraṃ dīpeti evaṃ-saddena vuccamānānaṃ ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthānaṃ aviparītasaddhammavisayattāti adhippāyo. Avikkhepaṃ dīpetīti ‘‘mūlapariyāyaṃ kattha bhāsita’’ntiādipucchāvasena pakaraṇappattassa vakkhamānassa suttassa savanaṃ samādhānamantarena na sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Vikkhittacittassātiādi tassevatthassa samatthanavasena vuttaṃ. Sabbasampattiyāti atthabyañjanadesakapayojanādisampattiyā. Aviparītasaddhammavisayehi viya ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthehi yonisomanasikārassa, saddhammassavanena viya ca avikkhepassa yathā yonisomanasikārena phalabhūtena attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatānaṃ siddhi vuttā tadavinābhāvato, evaṃ avikkhepena phalabhūtena kāraṇabhūtānaṃ saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayānaṃ siddhi dassetabbā siyā assutavato sappurisūpanissayarahitassa ca tadabhāvato. Na hi vikkhittacittotiādinā samatthanavacanena pana avikkhepena kāraṇabhūtena sappurisūpanissayena ca phalabhūtassa saddhammassavanassa siddhi dassitā. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo yutto siyā – saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayā na ekantena avikkhepassa kāraṇaṃ bāhiraṅgattā, avikkhepo pana sappurisūpanissayo viya saddhammassavanassa ekantakāraṇanti. Evampi avikkhepena sappurisūpanissayasiddhijotanā na samatthitāva, no na samatthitā vikkhittacittānaṃ sappurisapayirupāsanābhāvassa atthasiddhattā. Ettha ca purimaṃ phalena kāraṇassa siddhidassanaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhisabbhāvassa, dutiyaṃ kāraṇena phalassa siddhidassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ekantavassinā viya meghavuṭṭhānena vuṭṭhippavattiyā.
藉由对世尊语言中义理、文句、分类与判别,能全部契入一切教法的成就,成为圆满无余利乐有情的因,因此说「这是如此善妙的行相」。此与「因为不存在」一句相连。所谓「后二轮成就」,即指「自正愿」与「宿世善业」这二种功德。在此处,「轮」有辗转相续而运作之义;或者说,有情依此四轮运转于成就的有中。正是针对这些,《增支部》中说道:「比丘们!有这四种轮,具足它们的天与人,便有四轮在运行。」(《增支部》4.31)而此处的前后次第,应按说法顺序来理解。「以后二轮成就」意思是后二轮的现前。因为一个自建正愿、过去又曾造作善业的人,自然会有清净的意乐;那些令意乐不净的烦恼,已被远远隔离,所以论师说:「意乐清净便得以成立」。正如所说:「善所安立的心,能使人由此变得更好」(《法句》43),又如:「阿难!你已作善业,当勤精进,不久便成无漏者」(《长部·大品》2.207)。正因为如此,才说:「由意乐清净,获得证悟与通晓便得成立」。所谓「由加行清净」,是指以如理作意为前导的闻法加行变得明净;因此又说:「显示巴利原文
Bhagavato vacanassa atthabyañjanapabhedaparicchedavasena sakalasāsanasampattiogāhanākāro niravasesaparahitapāripūrikāraṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhaddako ākāro’’ti. Yasmā na hotīti sambandho. Pacchimacakkadvayasampattinti attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatāsaṅkhātaṃ guṇadvayaṃ. Aparāparavuttiyā cettha cakkabhāvo, caranti etehi sattā sampattibhavesūti vā. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.31). Purimapacchimabhāvo cettha desanākkamavasena daṭṭhabbo. Pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyāti pacchimacakkadvayassa atthitāya. Sammāpaṇihitatto pubbe ca katapuñño suddhāsayo hoti tadasuddhihetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ dūrībhāvatoti āha – ‘‘āsayasuddhi siddhā hotī’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sammāpaṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, seyyaso naṃ tato kare’’ti (dha. pa. 43), ‘‘katapuññosi tvaṃ ānanda, padhānamanuyuñja, khippaṃ hohisi anāsavo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.207) ca. Tenevāha ‘‘āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhī’’ti. Payogasuddhiyāti yonisomanasikārapubbaṅgamassa dhammassavanapayogassa visadabhāvena. Tathā cāha ‘‘āgamabyattisiddhī’’ti. Sabbassa vā kāyavacīpayogassa niddosabhāvena. Parisuddhakāyavacīpayogo hi vippaṭisārābhāvato avikkhittacitto pariyattiyaṃ visārado hotīti.
「能显示种种通达」等语句,是论师就义理与文句,借由阐明长老对「如是」一词、「闻」一词不迷惑、不忘失,以四无碍解来显示义理连结。其中,「能显示所应闻的差别之通达」这句话,显示「闻」这一词因紧邻「如是」一词,或为随顺下文,以总说的方式指摄所闻法的种种差别。由于审察疏通,「以意观察而善通达」的教法特系于作意,因此如前面所说,将它们与能显示如理作意的「如是」一词相连结;而教法在听闻、忆持、口诵习熟方面,特系于倾耳,因此,将它们与能显示不散乱的「闻」一词相连结而显示,如此便能策励于成就教法的闻法生起精勤。这里所说的「法」,即指教法。「以意一一观察」的意思是:以「此处讲戒,此处讲定,此处讲慧,这当中有如此种种连结」等方式,用意识一一审察。「以见而善通达」的意思是:以已成办的审察忍可,或依名为遍知的知见,对彼彼处所举的色、无色等诸法,以「这是色,色有这许多」等方式,善作决断而通达。显示巴利原文
Nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakenātiādinā atthabyañjanesu therassa evaṃsaddasuta-saddānaṃ asammohāsammosadīpanato catupaṭisambhidāvasena atthayojanaṃ dasseti. Tattha sotabbabhedapaṭivedhadīpakenāti etena ayaṃ suta-saddo evaṃ-saddasannidhānato, vakkhamānāpekkhāya vā sāmaññeneva sotabbadhammavisesaṃ āmasatīti dasseti. Manodiṭṭhikaraṇā pariyattidhammānaṃ anupekkhanasuppaṭivedhā visesato manasikārapaṭibaddhāti te vuttanayena yonisomanasikāradīpakena evaṃsaddena yojetvā, savanadhāraṇavacīparicayā pariyattidhammānaṃ visesena sotāvadhānapaṭibaddhāti te avikkhepadīpakena suta-saddena yojetvā dassento sāsanasampattiyā dhammassavane ussāhaṃ janeti. Tattha dhammāti pariyattidhammā. Manasānupekkhitāti ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā, ettakā ettha anusandhiyo’’tiādinā nayena manasā anu anu pekkhitā. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti nijjhānakkhantibhūtāya, ñātapariññāsaṅkhātāya vā diṭṭhiyā tattha tattha vuttarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā paṭividdhā.
「用整个语句」这句话,是因前面已对三句分别作连结而说的。「将不属于自己的,执持为是自己所有」,就是把「这是我的」之想安立于自身。「非善士地」是指不知恩;正如《律藏·经分别》所说:「于此,有一类恶比丘,学习了如来所宣说的法与律之后,便把它执持为是自己的」(《律藏》195),此即所谓非圣言所依之处;而这非圣言所依之处,就是非正法。难道阿难尊者会有「这是我的教言」这样的增上慢吗?而大迦叶尊者等在当时也没有那样的疑惑啊?既然如此,那么「超越非善士地」等话不就没有意义了吗?并非如此,因为说「如是我闻」这句话时,正是要显示这一层含义。此外,还有人说:「说这句话,是基于当时诸天内心的遍寻;因此,这样的质疑没有生起的机会。」据说,在那个时候,有部分诸天心中生起了这样的遍寻:「世尊已经般涅槃了,而这位尊者善于说法,现在正宣说教法,他出身释迦族,是如来的兄弟,是如来小叔的儿子。他所宣说的,到底是他自己亲自证得的法呢?还是仅仅随闻于世的世尊之语而已?」显示巴利原文
Sakalena vacanenāti pubbe tīhi padehi visuṃ visuṃ yojitattā vuttaṃ. Attano adahantoti ‘‘mameda’’nti attani aṭṭhapento. Asappurisabhūminti akataññutaṃ ‘‘idhekacco pāpabhikkhu tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’’ti (pārā. 195) evaṃ vuttaṃ anariyavohārāvatthaṃ, sā eva anariyavohārāvatthā asaddhammo. Nanu ca ānandattherassa ‘‘mamedaṃ vacana’’nti adhimānassa, mahākassapattherādīnañca tadāsaṅkāya abhāvato asappurisabhūmisamatikkamādivacanaṃ niratthakanti? Nayidamevaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vadantena ayampi attho vibhāvitoti dassanato. Keci pana ‘‘devatānaṃ parivitakkāpekkhaṃ tathāvacananti edisī codanā anavakāsāvā’’ti vadanti. Tasmiṃ kira khaṇe ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi ‘‘bhagavā ca parinibbuto, ayañca āyasmā desanākusalo, idāni dhammaṃ deseti sakyakulappasuto tathāgatassa bhātā cūḷapituputto, kiṃ nu kho sayaṃ sacchikataṃ dhammaṃ deseti, udāhu bhagavatoyeva vacanaṃ yathāsuta’’nti. Evaṃ tadāsaṅkitappakārato asappurisabhūmisamokkamādito atikkamādi vibhāvitanti. Appetīti nidasseti. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthesu yathārahaṃ satte netīti netti, dhammoyeva netti dhammanetti.
根深蒂固的疑,称为「疑」。未过度徘徊,只是慧见有所差别,称为「犹豫」。它能破除不信,因是世尊亲自宣说故,因当面从世尊处领受故,因其中没有可被执取的过失、恶语等过失故。在此应知:前三种义理连结,是就“如是”一词的行相等义,仅取其未被强调的差别而显示;随后四种连结,则专就“如是”一词的“行相”义而作说明;最后三种连结,依序就“如是”一词的“行相”义、“例证”义与“决断”义,分别配合说明。显示巴利原文
Daḷhataraniviṭṭhā vicikicchā kaṅkhā. Nātisaṃsappanā matibhedamattā vimati. Assaddhiyaṃ vināseti bhagavatā desitattā, sammukhāvassa paṭiggahitattā, khalitaduruttādigahaṇadosābhāvato ca. Ettha ca paṭhamādayo tisso atthayojanā ākārādiatthesu aggahitavisesameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā dassitā, tato parā catasso ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vibhāvitā, pacchimā pana tisso yathākkamaṃ ākāratthaṃ nidassanatthaṃ avadhāraṇatthañca evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā yojitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“eka”一词,在经典中有“其他”、“最胜”、“无伴”、“数目”等多种用法。例如:“我及世间是常,唯此真实,余皆虚妄”——有些论者这么说(《中部》3.27)等处,用的是“其他”义;在“心一境性”(《长部》1.228)等处,用的是“最胜”义;在“独处宴坐”(《长部》1.405)等处,用的是“无伴”义;在“比丘们,梵行生活的机会与时节唯仅一刹那”等处,用的是“数目”义。在此处,它也表示数目。为显示此义,故说「eka」是对计数的限定。所谓“正确的时机与机会”:合适的时节、因缘和合,称为「刹那」,亦即机会。因为如来出世等,正是修行道梵行的机会,也是获得彼机会之因。而此刹那也就是「时」。也就是说,被称为「刹那」与「时」的那个,它本身即是独一的——此即其义。「mahāsamaya(大集会)」是指大集合。「samayo pi kho」也是指圆满学处的因。「samayappavādaka」是指宣说各自宗义者,即宣说邪见的人。因为外显示巴利原文
Eka-saddo aññaseṭṭhāsahāyasaṅkhyādīsu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27) aññatthe dissati , ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.228) seṭṭhatthe, ‘‘eko vūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.405) asahāye, ‘‘ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu saṅkhyāyaṃ. Idhāpi saṅkhyāyanti dassento āha ‘‘ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso’’ti. Kālañca samayañcāti yuttakālañca paccayasāmaggiñca khaṇoti okāso. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayapaṭilābhahetuttā. Khaṇo eva ca samayo. Yo ‘‘khaṇo’’ti ca ‘‘samayo’’ti ca vuccati, so ekovāti hi attho mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Samayopi khoti sikkhāpadapūraṇassa hetupi. Samayappavādaketi diṭṭhippavādake. Tattha hi nisinnā titthiyā attano attano samayaṃ pavadantīti. Atthābhisamayāti hitapaṭilābhā. Abhisametabboti abhisamayo, abhisamayo attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti pīḷanādīni abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvaṃ upanetvā vuttāni. Abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa visayabhūto attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti. Tāneva tathā ekattena vuttāni. Tattha pīḷanaṃ dukkhasaccassa taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Santāpo dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ.
在此,辅助因汇集一处、一同进入,故称为samaya,即和合、集合。道梵行与彼时之依止人于此会合、聚集,故称为samaya,即刹那。有情或自性法于此会合,或借此与俱生法等以生起等而会合,故称为samaya,即时间。因为时间虽在究竟义上并不存在,仅凭法的转起而被视为法的所依与工具,唯依假名而说。诸部分的运行、转起、安住平等或共同地进行,故称为samaya,即聚集,如说“集”。所谓聚集,即诸部分一同安住。果从余缘的和合中依此而生起、转起,故称为samaya,即因,如说“集”。以结缚的状态而结合,于自己的所缘中转起,或以坚固执取的状态,有情们随各自的执著而被结合、系缚而转起,故称为samaya,即邪见;因为众生被见结极度地系缚。和合、相遇、融合,故称为samaya,即获得。缓慢地运行,或正确地运行、离去,故称为samaya,即断除。应以智现前地、正确地趣入、现观,故称为abhisamaya,即诸法不颠倒的自性。以现前的方式正确地到达、通晓、觉悟,故称为abhisamaya,即显示巴利原文
Tattha sahakārīkāraṇaṃ sannijjhaṃ sameti samavetīti samayo, samavāyo. Sameti samāgacchati maggabrahmacariyaṃ ettha tadādhārapuggalehīti samayo, khaṇo. Sameti ettha, etena vā saṃgacchati satto, sabhāvadhammo vā sahajātādīhi uppādādīhi vāti samayo, kālo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ karaṇaṃ viya ca kappanāmattasiddhena rūpena voharīyatīti. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samayo, samūho yathā ‘‘samudāyo’’ti. Avayavasahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūhoti. Avasesapaccayānaṃ samāgame eti phalaṃ etasmā uppajjati pavattati cāti samayo, hetu yathā ‘‘samudayo’’ti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggahaṇabhāvato vā saṃyuttā ayanti pavattanti sattā yathābhinivesaṃ etenāti samayo, diṭṭhi; diṭṭhisaññojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhantīti. Samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo, paṭilābho. Samayanaṃ, sammā vā ayanaṃ apagamoti samayo, pahānaṃ. Abhimukhaṃ ñāṇena sammā etabbo abhisametabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparīto sabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvāvabodho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samaya-saddassa pavatti veditabbā. Samayasaddassa atthuddhāre abhisamayasaddassa udāharaṇaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Assāti samayasaddassa . Kālo attho samavāyādīnaṃ atthānaṃ idha asambhavato, desadesakaparisānaṃ viya suttassa nidānabhāvena kālassa apadisitabbato ca.
然而,为何此处只是笼统地标举时间,而不具体限定为季节、年份等呢?回答是:“在此虽亦……”等。为了显示即便未限定为季节、年份等,单凭“时(samaya)”一词的表述也已具备这一殊胜之处,故说“或这些……”。因为通名即能涵盖具体差别。其中,现法乐住之时,是指每日藉由禅那与果等至而度过的时分,特指那七个七日。祥瑞昭著之时,是指以震动、放大光明遍照一万世界等而彰显的时分。为了以另一种方式统摄前述各类差别中的一部分而示之,故说“又如……”。事实确是如此:智作用时与自利行道时即是正等觉时;圣默然时即是现法乐住时;悲悯作用、利他行道、法谈时即是说法时本身。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha aniyamitavaseneva kālo niddiṭṭho, na utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyametvāti? Āha – ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyamaṃ akatvā samayasaddassa vacanena ayampi guṇo laddho hotīti dassento ‘‘ye vā ime’’tiādimāha. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhatīti. Tattha diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo devasikaṃ jhānaphalasamāpattīhi vītināmanakālo, visesato sattasattāhāni. Suppakāsāti dasasahassilokadhātusaṃkampanaobhāsapātubhāvādīhi pākaṭā. Yathāvuttabhedesu eva samayesu ekadesaṃ pakārantarehi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yo cāya’’ntiādimāha. Tathā hi ñāṇakiccasamayo attahitapaṭipattisamayo ca abhisambodhisamayo, ariyatuṇhībhāvasamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo, karuṇākiccaparahitapaṭipattidhammikathāsamayo desanāsamayo eva.
以工具格所作的说明,这是关联。于此,是指在阿毗达摩等其他经文的句与律中。如此,是指以处格和工具格。增上缘义即所依义。所谓有(bhāva),即是作用(kiriya);以作用差别为特征,即是以有来标示有。在此,如同时间虽由自性法所限定,在究竟意义上并不存在,却以所依的状态被认知,因为它仅于彼刹那转起,此前此后皆无,如说“午前生,午后去”等;又如“聚集”,虽离诸部分并不存在,唯依假名成立,却以诸部分为所依而被认知,如说“树有枝”、“麦堆中所生”等。为了显示此处也是如此,故说:“作为增上缘故……诸法。”在某一时间或某一法聚中,若有欲界善心生起,则于同一时间、同一法聚中,触等亦存在,这便是此处之义。又如“牛于挤奶时去,于挤毕时回来”,是以挤奶作用来标示去、来作用;同样地,这里虽言“在某个时候,在那个时候”,但“有”这一意义,因其句义不脱离存在性,故自然被领会,从而以时间之有作用来标示心的生起作用,以触等之有作用来标示。所谓在某个时候,即是在第九刹那,或是于如理作意等因、因缘和合具足时,欲界善心生起;即是在彼刹那、彼因、彼因缘和合当中,触等亦存在。为显明二显示巴利原文
Karaṇavacanena niddeso katoti sambandho. Tatthāti abhidhammatadaññasuttapadavinayesu. Tathāti bhummakaraṇehi. Adhikaraṇattho ādhārattho. Bhāvo nāma kiriyā, tāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Tattha yathā kālo sabhāvadhammaparicchinno sayaṃ paramatthato avijjamānopi ādhārabhāvena paññāto taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe parato ca abhāvato ‘‘pubbaṇhe jāto, sāyanhe gacchatī’’ti ca ādīsu, samūho ca avayavavinimutto avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddho avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññāpīyati ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavarāsiyaṃ sambhūto’’tiādīsu, evaṃ idhāpīti dassento āha ‘‘adhikaraṇañhi…pe… dhammāna’’nti. Yasmiṃ kāle dhammapuñje vā kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ eva kāle dhammapuñje ca phassādayopi hontīti ayañhi tattha attho. Yathā ca ‘‘gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgato’’ti dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evaṃ idhāpi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, tasmiṃ samaye’’ti ca vutte ‘‘satī’’ti ayamattho viññāyamāno eva hoti padatthassa sattāvirahābhāvatoti samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā phassādīnaṃ bhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyati. Yasmiṃ samayeti yasmiṃ navame khaṇe, yasmiṃ yonisomanasikārādihetumhi, paccayasamavāye vā sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe, hetumhi, paccayasamavāye vā phassādayopi hontīti ubhayattha samayasadde bhummaniddeso kato lakkhaṇabhūtabhāvayuttoti dassento āha ‘‘khaṇa…pe… lakkhīyatī’’ti.
因义与工具义亦可成立,如“依食而活,依乞食而活,以斧砍断,以锄挖掘”等。因为世尊在闻知违犯之后,即召集比丘僧团,诘问当事之人,予以呵责,且不放过事发之时,就于彼时制定学处,也顾及制定学处的因由,如于第三波罗夷等中那样。显示巴利原文
Hetuatthokaraṇattho ca sambhavati ‘‘annena vasati, ajjhenena vasati, pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya. Vītikkamañhi sutvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthukaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ otiṇṇakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena sikkhāpadāni paññapento bhagavā viharati sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno tatiyapārājikādīsu viya.
即从起始直至说法结束,始终以名为利他行道的悲愍住而完全安住。「为了表明那个意义」,即为了表明彻底相续的意义。此处以「对格」加以说明,正如说「学习一个月」那样。显示巴利原文
Accantameva ārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva desanāniṭṭhānaṃ parahitapaṭipattisaṅkhātena karuṇāvihārena. Tadatthajotanatthanti accantasaṃyogatthajotanatthaṃ. Upayogavacananiddeso kato yathā ‘‘māsaṃ ajjhetī’’ti.
「古代的」指注释书老师们。「仅是言辞上的差别」,意为差别只存在于语言表达上。以此显示,在经与律中作了语法格上的区分。显示巴利原文
Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Abhilāpamattabhedoti vacanamattena viseso. Tena suttavinayesu vibhattibyattayo katoti dasseti.
「Seṭṭha」是表示最胜的词,因与最胜功德相伴而行,故说「最胜」。对「Uttama」也应如此理解。「Gāravayutto」指应受尊重者,或因与可尊重之功德相应,或因堪受尊敬而应受尊重。此事前面已经说过,此处不应再议,因为本文属于《清净道论》注释的一部分,用意即在此。显示巴利原文
Seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘seṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato. Tathā uttamanti etthāpi. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato, garukaraṇārahatāya vā gāravayutto. Vuttoyeva, na pana idha vattabbo visuddhimaggassa imissā aṭṭhakathāya ekadesabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
又一种解释(《相应部注疏》等引用)——“bhāgavā”即“bhagavā”;“bhatavā”即“bhagavā”;“bhāge vanī”即“bhagavā”;“bhage vanī”即“bhagavā”;“bhattavā”即“bhagavā”;“bhage vamī”即“bhagavā”;“bhāge vamī”即“bhagavā”。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; sārattha. ṭī. 1.vinayānisaṃsakathāvaṇṇanā; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.144; itivu. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) – bhāgavāti bhagavā, bhatavāti bhagavā, bhāge vanīti bhagavā, bhage vanīti bhagavā, bhattavāti bhagavā, bhage vamīti bhagavā, bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
世尊是“bhagavā”,即“bhatavā”;于“bhāge”与“bhage”中为“vanī”;又是“bhattavā”;
于“bhage”中为“vami”,同样于“bhāge”中为“vamī”;因此胜利者世尊即是“bhagavā”。
显示巴利原文 Bhagavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino.
其中,为何说“bhāgavā”即是“bhagavā”呢?那些以戒为首的诸法蕴,名为功德之分、功德之聚。唯如来独有、不共一切众生、最极殊胜,且真实不虚、可以证得。如来的这些功德包括:戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见;惭、愧、信、精进、念与正知;戒清净、见清净、止、观;三善根、三善行、三正思惟、三无过失想、三界;四念处、四正勤、四神足、四圣道、四圣果、四无碍解、四生遮断智、四圣种、四自信智;五勤支、五支具足正定、五智具足正定、五根、五力、五出离界、五解脱处智、五熟解脱想;六随念处、六尊敬、六出离界、六恒住、六无上、六抉择分想、六神通、六不共智;七不退法、七圣法、七圣财、七觉支、七善士法、七弃舍事、七想、七应供者品说、七诸漏尽者力说;八慧获得因说、八正性、八世法超越、八发勤事、八非时说、八大人之思惟、八胜处说、八解脱;九如理作意根法、九遍净勤支、九有情居说、九害舍遣、九想、九种种、九次第住;十庇护法、十遍处、十善业道、十正性、十圣居、十无学法、十如来力;十一慈功德;十二法轮相;十三头陀功德。显示巴利原文
Tattha kathaṃ bhāgavāti bhagavā? Ye te sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā, te anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā tathāgatassa atthi upalabbhanti. Tathā hissa sīlaṃ, samādhi, paññā, vimutti, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ, hirī, ottappaṃ, saddhā, vīriyaṃ, sati sampajaññaṃ, sīlavisuddhi, diṭṭhivisuddhi, samatho, vipassanā, tīṇi kusalamūlāni, tīṇi sucaritāni, tayo sammāvitakkā, tisso anavajjasaññā, tisso dhātuyo, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, cattāro ariyamaggā, cattāri ariyaphalāni, catasso paṭisambhidā, catuyonipaṭicchedakañāṇaṃ, cattāro ariyavaṃsā, cattāri vesārajjañāṇāni, pañca padhāniyaṅgāni, pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi, pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, pañca nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, pañca vimuttāyatanañāṇāni, pañca vimuttiparipācanīyā saññā, cha anussatiṭṭhānāni, cha gāravā, cha nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, cha satatavihārā, cha anuttariyāni, cha nibbedhabhāgiyā saññā, cha abhiññā, cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni, satta aparihāniyā dhammā, satta ariyadhammā, satta ariyadhanāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, satta sappurisadhammā, satta nijjaravatthūni, satta saññā, satta dakkhiṇeyyapuggaladesanā, satta khīṇāsavabaladesanā, aṭṭha paññāpaṭilābhahetudesanā, aṭṭha sammattāni, aṭṭha lokadhammātikkamā, aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni, aṭṭha akkhaṇadesanā, aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakkā, aṭṭha abhibhāyatanadesanā, aṭṭha vimokkhā, nava yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā, nava pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgāni, nava sattāvāsadesanā, nava āghātapaṭivinayā, nava saññā, nava nānattā, nava anupubbavihārā, dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā, dasa kasiṇāyatanāni, dasa kusalakammapathā, dasa sammattāni, dasa ariyavāsā, dasa asekkhadhammā, dasa tathāgatabalāni, ekādasa mettānisaṃsā, dvādasa dhammacakkākārā, terasa dhutaguṇā, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, pañcadasa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, soḷasavidhā ānāpānassati, soḷasa aparantapanīyā dhammā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, catucattālīsa ñāṇavatthūni, paññāsa udayabbayañāṇāni, paropaṇṇāsa kusaladhammā, sattasattati ñāṇavatthūni, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhāsamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇaṃ, anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānapavicayapaccavekkhaṇadesanāñāṇāni tathā anantāsu lokadhātūsu anantānaṃ sattānaṃ āsayādivibhāvanañāṇāni cāti evamādayo anantāparimāṇabhedā anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti, tasmā yathāvuttavibhāgā guṇabhāgā assa atthīti ‘‘bhāgavā’’ti vattabbe ā-kārassa rassattaṃ katvā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto. Evaṃ tāva bhāgavāti bhagavā.
因为以戒为首的一切功德分,无有遗漏,
皆存在于善逝之中,因此称为“bhagavā”。
显示巴利原文 Yasmā sīlādayo sabbe, guṇabhāgā asesato; Vijjanti sugate tasmā, bhagavāti pavuccatīti.
何以“bhatavā”即是“bhagavā”?那些为了利益一切世间而发起精勤的大菩萨,将人身等八法聚合之后,为证得正等觉而发起了大誓愿。他们所应圆满的,是布施巴拉密、戒波罗蜜、出离巴拉密、慧波罗蜜、精进巴拉密、忍耐巴拉密、真实巴拉密、决意波罗蜜、慈爱巴拉密、舍巴拉密,此十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十究竟波罗蜜,合共三十波罗蜜;布施等四摄事,真实等四决意;肢节施、眼施、财富施、王国施、妻子儿女施等五种大舍;前方便、前导行、说法、知亲行、利世间行、利慧行等。简而言之,这一切福德与智慧资粮——也就是成就佛陀之法,从大誓愿开始,历经四个阿僧祇又十万劫,在此期间,它们不会成为退减分、杂染分或停滞分,唯是次第增上的殊胜分。如此,以恭敬、无间、无余的方式,已修习、已积集了这些法,因此,在应说“bhatavā”时,依语源学规则,将t变为g,而说为“bhagavā”。或者说,“bhatavā”的意思,即是以所说的方法,承载、积集、圆满了那些成就佛陀之法。如此,“bhatavā”即是“bhagavā”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhatavāti bhagavā? Ye te sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannehi manussattādike aṭṭha dhamme samodhānetvā sammāsambodhiyā katamahābhinīhārehi mahābodhisattehi paripūritabbā dānapāramī, sīla, nekkhamma, paññā, vīriya, khanti, sacca, adhiṭṭhāna, mettā, upekkhāpāramīti dasa pāramiyo dasa upapāramiyo dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo, dānādīni cattāri saṅgahavatthūni, saccādīni cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni, aṅgapariccāgo nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāgoti pañca mahāparicāgā, pubbayogo, pubbacariyā, dhammakkhānaṃ, ñātatthacariyā, lokatthacariyā, buddhicariyāti evamādayo, saṅkhepato vā sabbe puññañāṇasambhārā buddhakaradhammā, te mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya kappānaṃ satasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni yathā hānabhāgiyā saṃkilesabhāgiyā ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na honti, atha kho uttaruttari visesabhāgiyāva honti, evaṃ sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ anavasesato bhatā sambhatā assa atthīti ‘‘bhatavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto niruttinayena ta-kārassa ga-kāraṃ katvā. Atha vā bhatavāti teyeva yathāvutte buddhakaradhamme vuttanayeneva bhari sambhari, paripūresīti attho. Evampi bhatavāti bhagavā.
为证正等觉,所有布施巴拉密等资粮,
已修集资粮的庇护者,故而也称为“世尊”。
显示巴利原文 Sammāsambodhiyā sabbe, dānapāramiādike; Sambhāre bhatavā nātho, tenāpi bhagavā matoti.
为何说“分享份额者”即是世尊?每日所行等至的份额,达二十四俱胝十万之数;为利益世间及自己的现法乐住,他恒常、无遗地渴求、分享、亲近、修习这些份额,因此世尊是“分享份额者”。又或在应证知之法——如善等、蕴等——中,依应遍知等方式,可略分为四种现观份额;广说则如“眼应遍知,耳……老死应遍知”等,有无量应遍知的份额;如“眼之集应断……老死之集应断”等,是应断的份额;如“眼之灭……老死之灭应作证”等,是应作证的份额;如“眼之灭道行道”“四念住”等,有种种差别的应修习份额。对于这一切法,他以适合的方式,通过所缘修习与亲近修习而渴求、分享、修习它们;如此,世尊也是“分享份额者”。又或他作是念:“那些戒蕴等法蕴,是弟子们共有的功德份额、功德部分,如何能将它们植立于应调伏众生的相续中呢?”他以大悲心渴求、期盼,而此期盼如愿成就;如此,世尊也是“分享份额者”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhāge vanīti bhagavā? Ye te catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattibhāgā, te anavasesato lokahitatthaṃ attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ niccakappaṃ vani bhaji sevi bahulamakāsīti bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā abhiññeyyadhammesu kusalādīsu khandhādīsu ca ye te pariññeyyādivasena saṅkhepato vā catubbidhā abhisamayabhāgā, vitthārato pana ‘‘cakkhu pariññeyyaṃ sotaṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ pariññeyya’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.21) aneke pariññeyyabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa samudayo pahātabbo…pe… jarāmaraṇassa samudayo pahātabbo’’tiādinā pahātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodho…pe… jarāmaraṇassa nirodho sacchikātabbo’’tiādinā sacchikātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’tiādinā, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā ca anekabhedā bhāvetabbabhāgā ca dhammā, te sabbe vani bhaji yathārahaṃ gocarabhāvanāsevanānaṃ vasena sevi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā ‘‘ye ime sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā sāvakehi sādhāraṇā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā, kinti nu kho te vineyyasantānesu patiṭṭhapeyya’’nti mahākaruṇāya vani abhipatthayi, sā cassa abhipatthanā yathādhippetaphalāvahā ahosi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā.
因为他无遗余地向众生分享、希求所知、等至与功德的份额,
为利益众生,故他是世尊。
显示巴利原文 Yasmā ñeyyasamāpattiguṇabhāge asesato; Bhaji patthayi sattānaṃ, hitāya bhagavā tatoti.
为何说“分享吉祥者”(bhage vanī)即是世尊?简而言之:具足精勤的造福者们,随其所能而分享的世间与出世间成就,即称为“吉祥”。其中,就世间而言:如来在成正觉之前,身为菩萨,已达最殊胜之境,他便渴望、亲近、修习这些吉祥,并由此安住其中,无余地具足成佛之法,圆满了佛德;成正觉之后,对于那些无过患、带来安乐、不共世间诸人的出世间吉祥,他同样渴望、亲近、修习。广而言之,包括一方统治权、转轮王成就、天王成就等,以及禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见、道修习、果作证等种种不共凡夫的过人法——所有这些品类众多的吉祥,他都曾渴望、亲近、修习。如此,也即“分享吉祥者”为世尊的含义。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā? Samāsato tāva katapuññehi payogasampannehi yathāvibhavaṃ bhajīyantīti bhagā, lokiyalokuttarā sampattiyo. Tattha lokiye tāva tathāgato sambodhito pubbe bodhisattabhūto paramukkaṃsagate vani bhaji sevi, yattha patiṭṭhāya niravasesato buddhakaradhamme samannānento buddhadhamme paripācesi, buddhabhūto pana te niravajjasukhūpasaṃhite anaññasādhāraṇe lokuttarepi vani bhaji sevi, vitthārato pana padesarajjaissariyacakkavattisampatti-devarajjasampattiādivasena- jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattiñāṇadassana-maggabhāvanāphalasacchi- kiriyādi-uttarimanussadhammavasena ca anekavihite anaññasādhāraṇe bhage vani bhaji sevi. Evampi bhage vanīti bhagavā.
世间所有成就,以及种种出世间成就,
正自觉者分享这一切,因此也被称为“世尊”。
显示巴利原文 Yā tā sampattiyo loke, yā ca lokuttarā puthu; Sabbā tā bhaji sambuddho, tasmāpi bhagavā matoti.
世尊如何是“拥有恭敬者”(bhattavā)?“bhattavā”意为:他拥有众多坚定恭敬之人,故名拥有恭敬者。如来具足大悲、一切知智等无量、无与伦比的威德功德特相,于一切众生中最为尊上。他以先行除遣一切不利、施设无余利益安乐,以无上精勤成就,为含摄天人在内的众生作究竟饶益。他具足三十二大人相、八十随形好、一寻身光等不共他人的殊胜庄严身相。他的功德如实成就,因此“彼世尊即是如此”等赞叹之音遍满三界,广大而极清净。又因他在少欲知足等方面达到极致,并具足十力、四无畏等无上功德特相,所以,在这个依据四种标准衡量的众生世间中——有人依形色生净信,有人依音声生净信,有人依简朴生净信,有人依法生净信——他在一切时中都能令人产生净信,故称“一切善见”。他是无量众生与天人的恭敬、尊重、敬仰之处,是殊胜爱敬与坚固信仰的所在。凡是安住于他的教诫、具有不坏净信的人,他们的净信与恭敬不会被任何沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵所动摇。确实,他们即使舍弃生命,也不会舍弃对世尊的净信。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā? Bhattā daḷhabhattikā assa bahū atthīti bhattavā. Tathāgato hi mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimitanirupamapabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgibhāvato sabbasattuttamo, sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantūpakāritāya dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇa-asītianubyañjana-byāmappabhādianaññasādhāraṇa- visesapaṭimaṇḍita-rūpakāyatāya yathābhucca-guṇādhigatena ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinayappavattena lokattayabyāpinā suvipulena suvisuddhena ca thutighosena samannāgatattā ukkaṃsapāramippattāsu appicchatāsantuṭṭhiādīsu suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato dasabalacatuvesārajjādiniratisayaguṇavisesa-samaṅgibhāvato ca rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno, ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno, lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno, dhammappamāṇo dhammappasannoti evaṃ catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse sabbathāpi pasādāvahabhāvena samantapāsādikattā aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ sadevamanussānaṃ ādarabahumānagāravāyatanatāya paramapemasambhattiṭṭhānaṃ. Ye tassa ovāde patiṭṭhitā aveccappasādena samannāgatā honti, kenaci asaṃhāriyā tesaṃ pasādabhatti samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā. Tathā hi te attano jīvitapariccāgepi tattha pasādaṃ na pariccajanti, tassa vā āṇaṃ daḷhabhattibhāvato. Tenevāha –
确实,那知恩、感恩的智者,
拥有善知识,且具足坚固恭敬的人。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro; Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
比丘们,譬如大海的本性稳固安住,不越过海岸线;同样地,比丘们,凡是我为弟子们制定的学处,我的弟子们哪怕是为了活命也不会违越。显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahāsamuddo ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātivattati, evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (a. ni. 8.20; udā. 45; cūḷava. 385) ca.
如是,世尊以词源学的规则来解释“具恭敬者”一词:省略其中一个“t”音,再将另一个“t”音转为“g”音,而成“bhagavā”一语。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā niruttinayena ekassa ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā itarassa ga-kāraṃ katvā.
因为他是殊胜功德的具足者,于世间利益而行者,
许多众生已对导师生起坚固的恭敬,因此他被称为“世尊”。
显示巴利原文 Guṇātisayayuttassa, yasmā lokahitesino; Sambhattā bahavo satthu, bhagavā tena vuccatīti.
为何名为“已吐出诸祥瑞者”而称世尊?因为如来尚在菩萨位时,于过去许多生中修习诸波罗蜜圆满,便将名为“祥瑞”的祥瑞、自在与名誉——犹如吐出一口痰那样呕出、吐出,毫不恋着地舍弃了;在最后一生,对已到手的转轮王祥瑞——那等同于天界主宰、统治四大洲的自在、依于转轮王成就、闪耀七宝的荣耀,也视若草芥,毫无恋着地舍去,出家而证得正觉。因此,他吐出了这些祥瑞等,故称“已吐出诸祥瑞者”。又或,有一种名为“bhā”的星宿,与他们一同运转的存在称为“bhagā”——即依止于须弥山、持双山、郁单越、雪山等殊胜器世间处的光辉,因住劫而存续;如来也吐出了这些“bhaga”,因为他超越了住于其中的众生界,以断除对它们的欲贪而舍弃。如此,他亦是“已吐出诸有光辉处者”,故称世尊。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhage vamīti bhagavā? Yasmā tathāgato bodhisattabhūtopi purimāsu jātīsu pāramiyo pūrento bhagasaṅkhātaṃ siriṃ issariyaṃ yasañca vami, uggiri, kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaḍḍayi; pacchimattabhāvepi hatthāgataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ devalokādhipaccasadisaṃ catudīpissariyaṃ cakkavattisampattisannissayaṃ sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasañca tiṇāyapi amaññamāno nirapekkho pahāya abhinikkhamitvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tasmā ime siriādike bhage vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā, sineruyugandharauttarakuruhimavantādibhājanalokavisesasannissayā sobhā kappaṭṭhiyabhāvato, tepi bhage vami tannivāsisattāvāsasamatikkamanato, tappaṭibaddhachandarāgapahānena pajahīti. Evampi bhage vamīti bhagavā.
因为转轮王的吉祥、名誉、自在与快乐,
世尊”:因为善逝已舍弃转轮王的吉祥、名誉、自在、快乐以及世间心,故称世尊。
显示巴利原文 Cakkavattisiriṃ yasmā, yasaṃ issariyaṃ sukhaṃ; Pahāsi lokacittañca, sugato bhagavā tatoti.
何以称世尊为“已吐出诸部分者”?“诸部分”,是指具有共同性质的法聚,即依蕴、处、界等所分;于此之中,又依色、受等,地界等,以及过去等种种方式,而有千差万别。世尊断尽了一切戏论、一切轭、一切结缚、一切结,证得不死界,因而如同吐出、呕出一般,毫不贪恋地舍弃,不再退转。正因如此,他由“不取着”而一一分别诸法,毫无剩余地吐出、呕出了一切法聚,以无贪的舍离将其弃舍,即:一切处之地界、水界、火界、风界,眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意,色、声、香、味、触、法,眼识……乃至意识,眼触……乃至意触,眼触所生受……乃至意触所生受,眼触所生想……乃至意触所生想,眼触所生思……乃至意触所生思,色渴爱……乃至法渴爱,色寻……乃至法寻,色伺……乃至法伺。正如确实所说:“阿难,任何已被舍弃、吐出、释放、断除、遣除的事物,如来都绝不可能再回转,绝无此理。”由此,亦可称为“已吐出诸部分者”,故是世尊。此外,所谓“吐出诸部分者”,也可指通过圣道智之门。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhāge vamīti bhagavā? Bhāgā nāma sabhāgadhammakoṭṭhāsā, te khandhāyatanadhātādivasena, tatthāpi rūpavedanādivasena, pathaviyādiatītādivasena ca anekavidhā. Te bhagavā sabbaṃ papañcaṃ sabbaṃ yogaṃ sabbaṃ ganthaṃ sabbaṃ saṃyojanaṃ samucchinditvā amataṃ dhātuṃ samadhigacchanto vami uggiri, anapekkho chaḍḍayi na paccāgami. Tathā hesa ‘‘sabbatthameva pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ, cakkhuṃ sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhaṃ kāyaṃ manaṃ, rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ, cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ saññaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ saññaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ, rūpataṇhaṃ…pe… dhammataṇhaṃ, rūpavitakkaṃ…pe… dhammavitakkaṃ, rūpavicāraṃ…pe… dhammavicāra’’ntiādinā anupadadhammavibhāgavasenapi sabbeva dhammakoṭṭhāse anavasesato vami uggiri, anapekkhapariccāgena chaḍḍayi. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ taṃ, ānanda, cattaṃ vantaṃ muttaṃ pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tathāgato puna paccāgamissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.183). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāge vamīti sabbepi kusalākusale sāvajjānavajje hīnapaṇīte kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge dhamme ariyamaggañāṇamukhena vami uggiri anapekkho pariccaji pajahi, paresañca tathattāya dhammaṃ desesi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dhammāpi vo, bhikkhave, pahātabbā, pageva adhammā (ma. ni. 1.240), kullūpamaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.240). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
大仙(佛陀)已将蕴、处、界等一切法分悉皆吐出;
又因他已吐弃黑(不善)与白(善),故也称为「世尊」。
显示巴利原文 Khandhāyatanadhātādi-dhammabhāgāmahesinā; Kaṇhasukkā yato vantā, tatopi bhagavā matoti.
「Bhāgavā」意为具分者,「bhatavā」意为受用分者;对于「分」与「福运」,他既是远离者,又是受用者。
因为他吐出了“幸运”,同样也吐出了“部分”,因此称为“吐出者”,即世尊、胜者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino’’ti.
他能使法身现前,因此依据“阿难,我为你们所开示、所制定的法与律,在我去世后就是你们的导师”(《长部》2.216)这一教示,可知“法”具有导师地位这一同义语的存在,故如此说。又因为他那如同金刚聚合而成的身体不可为他人所破坏,意思是:没有人能对世尊的色身制造障碍。显示巴利原文
Dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karotīti ‘‘yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.216) vacanato dhammassa satthubhāvapariyāyo vijjatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo parehi abhejjasarīrattā. Na hi bhagavato rūpakāye kenaci sakkā antarāyo kātunti.
“开示成就”:以“如”字指示整部即将宣说的经文,故表明开示之圆满成就。“声闻成就”:由于(我)是证得无碍解、在五处被世尊置于最上首的大声闻,故说“我所听闻”;而且这确实是我亲自听闻,不是道听途说,不是辗转传来——以此显示此义。“时成就”:当“世尊”一词出现时,所用的“一时”即显示那个时间具足佛陀出世所庄严的特质。最殊胜的时成就,正是佛陀出世,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Desanāsampattiṃ niddisati vakkhamānassa sakalassa suttassa ‘‘eva’’nti nidassanato. Sāvakasampattiṃ niddisati paṭisambhidāppattena pañcasu ṭhānesu bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitena mayā mahāsāvakena sutaṃ, tañca kho mayāva sutaṃ, na anussutikaṃ, na paramparābhatanti imassa atthassa dīpanato. Kālasampattiṃ niddisati bhagavā-saddasannidhāne payuttassa samaya-saddassa kālassa buddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitabhāvadīpanato. Buddhuppādaparamā hi kālasampadā. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
在劫浊与斗诤坚固的时期,佛陀出现于世——啊,这真是极为稀有!
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kappakasāye kaliyuge, buddhuppādo aho mahacchariyaṃ; Hutāvahamajjhe jātaṃ, samuditamakarandamaravinda’’nti. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.1; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1 rūpādivaggavaṇṇanā);
“世尊”一词,是指说法者的成就,因为这是对具足功德、为众生之最上者、应受尊崇与敬重之人的尊称。显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ niddisati guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacanabhāvato.
“吉祥日、好时刻、好星宿”:意思是今天是吉祥日,因此是好星宿,而在这个吉祥日当中,这个时刻就是好时刻。“莫虚度”:意即不要不知不觉地让夜晚流逝,应当这样来理解其中的关联。“Ukkāsu ṭhitāsu ṭhitā”(立于诸火炬中而住立),因此称为“显著”。这是说在闪耀的诸火炬中安住、立足;应当依波你尼句法(3.2.5)等规则来了解该词的语源成就。或者依词源学的方式,ukkaṭṭhā 意为“立于诸火炬中而住立”。另有一说:“因为那座城市具足了地段的成就、人的成就和资具的成就,由于具有显著功德的关系,所以获得‘显著城’的名称。”显示巴利原文
Maṅgaladivaso sukhaṇo sunakkhattanti ajja maṅgaladivaso, tasmā sunakkhattaṃ, tatthāpi ayaṃ sukhaṇo. Mā atikkamīti mā rattivibhāyanaṃ anudikkhantānaṃ ratti atikkamīti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Ukkāsu ṭhitāsu ṭhitāti ukkaṭṭhā (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.255; a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.36). Ukkāsu vijjotalantīsu ṭhitā patiṭṭhitāti mūlavibhūjādipakkhepena (pāṇini 3.2.5) saddasiddhi veditabbā. Niruttinayena vā ukkāsu ṭhitāsu ṭhitā āsīti ukkaṭṭhā. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘bhūmibhāgasampattiyā manussasampattiyā upakaraṇasampattiyā ca sā nagarī ukkaṭṭhaguṇayogato ‘ukkaṭṭhā’ti nāmaṃ labhī’’ti.
“非特殊地”:并非特殊地,而是从“住”的共通性来说的。“在……威仪住等四种住当中”:即在威仪住、天住、梵住、圣住这四种住之中。“具足者显示”:这是对具足状态的显示。“此句”:指“他住”这个词。正如该词在经文中所见:“在此,某人与在家众交往杂处而住,同喜同忧”(相应部4.241)——这是指威仪住;“诸比丘,那时,比丘远离诸欲……证得初禅而安住”(法集论160;分别论624)等——这是指天住;“他以慈俱行之心遍满一方而安住”(长部1.556;3.308;中部1.77;2.309;3.230)等——这是指梵住;“火种居士!我在那番谈话结束时,就在那个先前的定相中,将心向内安置、令之平静、使之专一、入定,我如此恒常地安住”(中部1.387)等——这是指圣住。显示巴利原文
Avisesenāti na visesena, vihārabhāvasāmaññenāti attho. Iriyāpatha…pe… vihāresūti iriyāpathavihāro dibbavihāro brahmavihāro ariyavihāroti etesu catūsu vihāresu. Samaṅgiparidīpananti samaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Etanti ‘‘viharatī’’ti etaṃ padaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘idhekacco gihīhi saṃsaṭṭho viharati sahanandī sahasokī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) iriyāpathavihāre āgataṃ; ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 160; vibha. 624) dibbavihāre; ‘‘so mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.556; 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77; 2.309; 3.230) brahmavihāre; ‘‘so kho ahaṃ aggivessana tassāyeva kathāya pariyosāne tasmiṃ eva purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapemi sannisādemi ekodiṃ karomi samādahāmi, yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) ariyavihāre.
其中,“活动、转动”即是“威仪”,指身体的动作。因为它是威仪活动的途径,所以站立等姿势称为“威仪路”。因为具有站立姿势者,可用身体做某些事,或具有行走等任一种姿势。或者说,有身依此而活动,或身体的工作依此而进行,所以叫作“威仪”;对于威仪的运作而言,它作为途径,故称“路”,合起来即是“威仪路”,所指正是站立等姿势本身。而它在究竟意义上,则是由去除行走等形态方式而转起的、以四种微细元素为因的色法相续。
“住处”:因之而住,故称“住”;威仪路本身即是住,所以称为“威仪住”。
“天”:因为存在于梵众天等天界中,所以称为“天”。这里的意思是,由于在该处多有转起,所以其义指在梵众天等天界中有。在那里,属于天威神力,或者为了达成那个目的而带来的,称为“天”;或者依神通、神变的力量而有广大的去处,所以称为“天”。既是天,又是住,故称“天住”,指四种色界禅那。无色界禅那也被含摄于此。
“梵住”:诸梵天的住,或梵天的住,指四种无量心。
“圣住”:诸圣者的住,或圣者的住,指四种沙门果。
虽然世尊即……显示巴利原文
Tattha iriyanaṃ vattanaṃ iriyā, kāyappayogo. Tassā pavattanupāyabhāvato ṭhānādi iriyāpatho. Ṭhānasamaṅgī vā hi kāyena kiñci kareyya gamanādīsu aññatarasamaṅgī vā. Atha vā iriyati pavattati etena attabhāvo, kāyakiccaṃ vāti iriyā, tassā pavattiyā upāyabhāvato pathoti iriyāpatho, ṭhānādi eva. So ca atthato gatinivattiādiākārena pavatto catusantatirūpapabandho eva. Viharaṇaṃ, viharati etenāti vā vihāro, iriyāpatho eva vihāro iriyāpathavihāro. Divi bhavoti dibbo. Tattha bahulappavattiyā brahmapārisajjādidevaloke bhavoti attho. Tattha yo dibbānubhāvo, tadatthāya saṃvattatīti vā dibbo, abhiññābhinīhāravasena mahāgatikattā vā dibbo, dibbo ca so vihāro cāti dibbavihāro, catasso rūpāvacarasamāpattiyo. Āruppasamāpattiyopi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Brahmūnaṃ, brahmāno vā vihārā brahmavihārā, catasso appamaññāyo. Ariyānaṃ, ariyā vā vihārā ariyavihārā, cattāri sāmaññaphalāni. So hi bhagavā ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanantiādi yadipi bhagavā ekenapi iriyāpathena cirataraṃ kālaṃ attabhāvaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkoti, tathāpi ‘‘upādinnakasarīrassa nāma ayaṃ sabhāvo’’ti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā vā bhagavā yattha katthaci vasanto veneyyānaṃ dhammaṃ desento, nānāsamāpattīhi ca kālaṃ vītināmento vasatīti veneyyasattānaṃ attano ca vividhaṃ hitasukhaṃ harati upaneti uppādeti, tasmā vividhaṃ haratīti evamettha attho veditabbo.
「Subhagattā」:因对吉祥与欲乐的希求而具有的美好性。因此他说:「因有美好的吉祥,及因有美好的欲乐之故。」关于「节庆、集会、庆典」:此处,「节庆」是指在颇求那月等月份中,以望日等为标志的日子里,人们与眷属一起举行的吉祥活动。「集会」是指舞者集会等。「庆典」是指星宿节。在那里,村镇居民宣告星宿节庆连续三天或七天,然后依各自的财力装饰、准备好,享用财物,进行星宿游戏。「对于他们,那件事确如所想」:对于那些人,他们的那个愿望,借由居住当地的天神的威力,大多确实会那样实现,也就是愿望成就的意思。通过「为多数众人所喜爱故」这一句,他以另一种方式阐明「因有美好的欲乐」这一词的含义。在此,词源解释是:因为可爱,所以被很好地亲近,故称「subhaga」;或者这里有美好、不朽的树木,故称「subhaga」;又或者因为与美好的声誉相关联,故称「subhaga」——他们这样解释此处的意义。不过,有些人读作「subhāgavane」,并解释为「在美好地界的树林」。另一些人说,那是一位名叫善……显示巴利原文
Subhagattāti sirīkāmānavasena sobhanattā. Tenevāha ‘‘sundarasirikattā sundarakāmattā cā’’ti. Chaṇasamajjaussaveti ettha chaṇaṃ nāma phaggunamāsādīsu uttaraphaggunādi-abhilakkhitadivasesu saparijanānaṃ manussānaṃ maṅgalakaraṇaṃ. Samajjaṃ nāma naṭasamajjādi. Ussavo nakkhattaṃ. Yattha gāmanigamavāsino tayo satta vā divase nakkhattaghosanaṃ katvā yathāvibhavaṃ alaṅkatapaṭiyattā bhoge paribhuñjantā nakkhattakīḷanaṃ kīḷanti. Tesaṃ taṃ tatheva hotīti tesaṃ manussānaṃ taṃ patthanaṃ tannivāsidevatānubhāvena yebhuyyena tatheva hoti, patthanā samijjhatīti attho. Bahujanakantatāyāti iminā ‘‘sundarakāmattā’’ti etasseva padassa pakārantarena atthaṃ vibhāveti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – kamanīyaṭṭhena suṭṭhu bhajīyatīti subhagaṃ, subhā agā rukkhā etthāti vā subhagaṃ, sundarakittiyogato vā ‘‘subhaga’’nti evampettha atthaṃ vaṇṇenti. Keci pana ‘‘subhāgavane’’ti paṭhanti, ‘‘sundarabhūmibhāge vane’’ti cassa atthaṃ vadanti. Subhagassa nāma yakkhassa vanaṃ tena pariggahitattāti ‘‘subhagavana’’nti aññe. Vananaṃ bhattītiatthe taṃ vananaṃ kāretīti etasmiṃ atthe vanayatīti padasiddhi veditabbā. Tenevāha ‘‘attani sinehaṃ uppādetī’’ti. Yācanatthe vanute iti vananti upacārakappanāvasena vana-saddo veditabbo.
「Ujuvaṃsā」:指有正直枝干的树。「Mahāsālā」:指大树。「Aññatarasmiṃ sālamūleti」:指在某棵树的根部。「Vanappatijeṭṭhakarukkho」:指处于林栖状态中的最胜树。「Tameva jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ」:指由林栖状态所带来的最胜状态、殊胜状态。正因为如此,它才被称为「沙罗树王」。因为能取悦前来亲近的众生,所以称为王;为了表明其它类似的大树也有「王」的称呼,才说了「善安住」等词。其中,「婆罗门,如法的」是呼唤语。「Mūla」一词,在毫不迂曲地论证包括树枝等聚合体的「善安住状态」时,是运用在殊胜部分上的。由于随顺习惯用法,它也会以迂曲的方式,在与彼相似以及依止于彼的地方运用,所以在「应拔出根」这句中,所指的是不迂曲的根。为了区分,而说「以一个根字」,进而指出「于根本之根本可见」,就如同「苦苦」「色色」这样的说法一样。在「不共因」上,也就是在不共的原因上。意思就是说:对于这些贪俱生心,在那些以根的意义而成为其各自善安住状态的资助缘法中,可以……显示巴利原文
Ujuvaṃsāti ujubhūtaviṭapā. Mahāsālāti mahārukkhā. Aññatarasmiṃ sālamūleti aññatarassa rukkhassa mūle. Vanappatijeṭṭhakarukkhoti vanappatibhūto jeṭṭhakarukkho. Tameva jeṭṭhakabhāvanti vanappatibhāvenāgataṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ padhānabhāvaṃ. Tena hi so ‘‘sālarājā’’ti vutto. Upagatānaṃ rañjanaṭṭhena rājā, aññasmimpi tādise rukkhe rājavohāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘supatiṭṭhitassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha brāhmaṇa dhammikāti ālapanaṃ. Nippariyāyena sākhādimato saṅghātassa suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhane avayavavisese pavattamāno mūla-saddo. Yasmā taṃsadisesu tannissaye padese ca ruḷhīvasena pariyāyato pavattati, tasmā ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyyā’’ti ettha nippariyāyamūlaṃ adhippetanti ekena mūla-saddena visesetvā āha ‘‘mūlamūle dissatī’’ti yathā ‘‘dukkhadukkhaṃ (saṃ. ni. 4.327), rūparūpa’’nti (visuddhi. 2.449) ca. Asādhāraṇahetumhīti asādhāraṇakāraṇe. Lobhasahagatacittuppādānaṃ eva āveṇike nesaṃ suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanato mūlaṭṭhena upakārake paccayadhamme dissatīti attho.
「Tattha」:指「一时,世尊住在郁伽吒镇的善梵园沙罗树王树下」这句话。「Siyā」:有的人可能会这样想,或者按照下文将要说出的方式,有时会这样质难。「Atha tattha viharatī」:如果世尊住在善梵园的沙罗树王树下。「Na vattabbaṃ」:不应这样说,因为郁伽吒镇与善梵园是不同的地点,而且经文已经说了「一时」——这暗含了这层意思。现在,质难者以「确实不能」等来阐明自己的用意。另一位解经者为了说明「这一切都是因为不理解没有颠倒的义理而说的」,便说:「然而,这确实不应该被这样理解。」其中,「etaṃ」指「住在郁伽吒镇的善梵园沙罗树王树下」这句话。「Evaṃ」的意思是:世尊您之前以「如果说世尊」等方式所质难的内容,从意义上说确实不应这样理解,不应被理解为世尊在两地没有先后地示现住处。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti ‘‘ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati subhagavane sālarājamūle’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ vākyaṃ, tatta. Siyāti kassaci evaṃ parivitakko siyā, vakkhamānākārena kadāci codeyya vāti attho. Atha tattha viharatīti yadi subhagavane sālarājamūle viharati. Na vattabbanti nānāṭhānabhūtattā ukkaṭṭhāsubhagavanānaṃ, ekaṃ samayanti ca vuttattāti adhippāyo. Idāni codako tameva attano adhippāyaṃ ‘‘na hi sakkā’’tiādinā vivarati. Itaro sabbametaṃ aviparītaṃ atthaṃ ajānantena vuttanti dassento ‘‘na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabba’’nti āha. Tattha etanti ‘‘ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati subhagavane sālarājamūle’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Evanti ‘‘yadi tāva bhagavā’’tiādinā yaṃ taṃ bhavatā coditaṃ, taṃ atthato evaṃ na kho pana daṭṭhabbaṃ, na ubhayattha apubbaacarimaṃ vihāradassanatthanti attho.
现在,为了阐明自己所认可而无颠倒的意义,以及此义其实早已被说出、而问难者却未能通达,注释者便说:“我们不是说过……世尊在善梵园沙罗王树下”等。即便如此,仍出现了这样的问难:“应当只说‘住在善梵园沙罗王树下’,而不应说‘在郁伽吒镇’。”心中存着这问难,注释者才说了“为了指示行境的村落”等。显示巴利原文
Idāni attano yathādhippetaṃ aviparītaṃ atthaṃ, tassa ca paṭikacceva vuttabhāvaṃ, tena ca appaṭividdhattaṃ pakāsento ‘‘nanu avocumha…pe… sālarājamūle’’ti āha. Evampi ‘‘subhagavane sālarājamūle viharatī’’cceva vattabbaṃ, na ‘‘ukkaṭṭhāya’’nti codanaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘gocaragāmanidassanattha’’ntiādi.
在此,必定要记述行境的村落。确实,正如记述善梵园等有着摄受出家者等多种利益一样,记述郁伽吒镇也有摄受在家者等多种多样的利益。为了显示这个道理,他说了“由于记述了郁伽吒镇”等。其中,摄受在家者应当这样理解:通过接受资具,通过给予亲近、承事的机会,通过说法让在家者住立于皈依和戒中,以及随着他们的根基,令他们获得更殊胜的证悟。而摄受出家者应当这样理解:在这里,通过接纳适宜学习、遍问以及从事禅修业处的住处。 “以悲悯而来,不是为了利养等目的;以智慧而离去,不是为了冲突等原因”——这是为了阐明来去都是没有烦恼的。如法乐就是无过失之乐。诸天多饶益是因为这个地方远离人烟。确实,天神们认为应当去亲近那些人烟稀少的地方。成就彼义就是成就世间的利益,也就是完成佛陀应作的事业。以如是等:通过“等”字,表示由记述郁伽吒镇,显示了色身受到摄护;由记述善梵园等,显示了法身受到摄护。同样地,前一种记述表示依止于他人所作的事业,后一种表示依止于自己所作的事业。或者,前一种表示悲悯的作用,后一种表示智慧的作用。又或者,通过前一种记述,彰显世尊具足至上的慈悯;通过后一种记述,彰显世尊具足至上的舍。确实,世尊以至上的慈悯悲悯一切众生,同时因为住于极上的舍状态,所以不会随顺贪爱和嫌厌的随眠烦恼;而他虽然安住于舍,却因为具有大悲悯者的本性,所以在做利益他人、安乐他人的事业上,从不懈怠。显示巴利原文
Avassaṃ cettha gocaragāmakittanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ yathā subhagavanādikittanaṃ pabbajitānuggahakaraṇādianekappayojanaṃ, evaṃ gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇādivividhappayojananti dassento ‘‘ukkaṭṭhākittanenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha paccayaggahaṇena upasaṅkamanapayirupāsanānaṃ okāsadānena dhammadesanāya saraṇesu sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpanena yathūpanissayaṃ uparivisesādhigamāvahanena ca gahaṭṭhānaggahakaraṇaṃ, uggahaparipucchānaṃ kammaṭṭhānānuyogassa ca anurūpavasanaṭṭhānapariggahenettha pabbajitānuggahakaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Karuṇāya upagamanaṃ, na lābhādinimittaṃ, paññāya apagamanaṃ, na virodhādinimittanti upagamanāpagamanānaṃ nirupakkilesataṃ vibhāveti. Dhammikasukhaṃ nāma anavajjasukhaṃ. Devānaṃ upakārabahulatā janavivittatāya. Pacurajanavivittaṃ hi ṭhānaṃ devā upasaṅkamitabbaṃ maññanti. Tadatthaparinipphādananti lokatthanipphādanaṃ, buddhakiccasampādananti attho. Evamādināti ādi-saddena ukkaṭṭhākittanato rūpakāyassa anuggaṇhanaṃ dasseti, subhagavanādikittanato dhammakāyassa. Tathā purimena parādhīnakiriyākaraṇaṃ, dutiyena attādhīnakiriyākaraṇaṃ. Purimena vā karuṇākiccaṃ, itarena paññākiccaṃ. Purimena cassa paramāya anukampāya samannāgamaṃ, pacchimena paramāya upekkhāya samannāgamaṃ dīpeti. Bhagavā hi sabbasatte paramāya anukampāya anukampati, na ca tattha sinehadosānupatito paramupekkhakabhāvato, upekkhako ca na ca parahitasukhakaraṇe apposukko mahākāruṇikabhāvato.
他由于具足大悲悯,而成为世间导师;由于具足舍,而成为自己的依止。同样地,这位世尊在身为菩萨的时候,心被大悲悯所策励,为了利益一切世间而发奋精进,从发大誓愿开始,为了成就那个目标,累积福德与智慧资粮,在无量时间里承受了不少的苦;而因为具足舍,对于那些如理遭受的苦,他的心毫不动摇。同样地,由于大悲悯,他面向轮回;由于舍,他对轮回生起厌离。由于舍,他面向涅槃;由于大悲悯,他证得了涅槃。同样地,由于大悲悯,他令他人无畏;由于舍,他自己对他人无所畏惧。大悲悯者,在守护他人时,也守护了自己;具足舍者,在守护自己时,也守护了他人。因此,他作为“自他两利之行者”等第四种人的状态便得以成就。同样地,由于大悲悯,他圆满了以真谛为依止和以施舍为依止的波罗蜜;由于舍,他圆满了以寂静为依止和以智慧为依止的波罗蜜。如此,这位志向与精进都极为清净的世尊,由于大悲悯,只是为了世间的利益,才去亲近王位成就等种种有情的生存状态;而由于舍,他看待这些就像看待杂草一样,然后远离。这样,这位来去都极为清净的世尊,由于大悲悯,只是为了世间利益,才以布施的方式舍掉一切成就;而由于舍,他对自己应得的果报也毫不期待。就这样,从积累资粮开始,他就具备稀有、未曾有的功德,由于大悲悯,为了他人的利益与安乐,他做了极其难行的事情;而由于舍,即使以身承受,他也毫不在意。显示巴利原文
Tassa mahākāruṇikatāya lokanāthatā, upekkhakatāya attanāthatā. Tathā hesa bodhisattabhūto mahākaruṇāya sañcoditamānaso sakalalokahitāya ussukkamāpanno mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya tadatthanipphādanatthaṃ puññañāṇasambhāre sampādento aparimitaṃ kālaṃ anappakaṃ dukkhamanubhosi, upekkhakatāya sammā patitehi dukkhehi na vikampi. Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya saṃsārābhimukhatā, upekkhakatāya tato nibbindanā. Tathā upekkhakatāya nibbānābhimukhatā, mahākāruṇikatāya tadadhigamo. Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya paresaṃ abhiṃsāpanaṃ, upekkhakatāya sayaṃ parehi abhāyanaṃ. Mahākāruṇikatāya paraṃ rakkhato attano rakkhaṇaṃ, upekkhakatāya attānaṃ rakkhato paresaṃ rakkhaṇaṃ. Tenassa attahitāya paṭipannādīsu catutthapuggalabhāvo siddho hoti. Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya saccādhiṭṭhānassa cāgādhiṭṭhānassa ca pāripūri, upekkhakatāya upasamādhiṭṭhānassa paññādhiṭṭhānassa ca pāripūri. Evaṃ parisuddhāsayapayogassa mahākāruṇikatāya lokahitatthameva rajjasampadādibhavasampattiyā upagamanaṃ, upekkhakatāya tiṇāyapi amaññamānassa tato apagamanaṃ. Iti suvisuddhaupagamāpagamassa mahākāruṇikatāya lokahitatthameva dānavasena sampattīnaṃ pariccajanā, upekkhakatāya cassa phalassa attano apaccāsīsanā. Evaṃ samudāgamanato paṭṭhāya acchariyabbhutaguṇasamannāgatassa mahākāruṇikatāya paresaṃ hitasukhatthaṃ atidukkarakāritā, upekkhakatāya kāyampi analaṃkāritā.
同样地,由于大悲悯,他在最后有身时,目睹老、病、死相而心生悚惧;由于舍,他对于如天乐般的妙欲毫无期求,作出了伟大的出家。同样地,由于大悲悯,他以悲悯为入口——“这世间确实陷于苦难了”——如此开始观照;由于舍,成佛之后,他便七日复七日地安住于远离之乐。由于大悲悯,他审察法的甚深性后,虽曾于说法生起“不作何为”之心,却借着大梵天劝请的时机而说法;由于舍,对于五群比丘等应教化者,即便其行未顺,他亦不动摇心意。由于大悲悯,他于一切处无瞋,故于一切处不生起“此是敌人”之想;由于舍,他于一切处无贪顺,故于一切处无喜爱与亲昵。大悲悯者虽住于村落等附近,然因具足舍,唯住阿兰若处。因此说:“由前一者,彰显世尊具足无上慈悯;由后一者,彰显世尊具足无上舍”。显示巴利原文
Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya carimattabhāve jiṇṇāturamatadassanena sañjātasaṃvego, upekkhakatāya uḷāresu devabhogasadisesu bhogesu nirapekkho mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhami. Tathā mahākāruṇikatāya ‘‘kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4, 10) karuṇāmukheneva vipassanārambho , upekkhakatāya buddhabhūtassa satta sattāhāni vivekasukheneva vītināmanaṃ. Mahākāruṇikatāya dhammagambhīrataṃ paccavekkhitvā dhammadesanāya apposukkataṃ āpajjitvāpi mahābrahmuno ajjhesanāpadesena okāsakaraṇaṃ, upekkhakatāya pañcavaggiyādi veneyyānaṃ ananurūpasamudācārepi anaññathābhāvo. Mahākāruṇikatāya katthaci paṭighātābhāvenassa sabbattha amittasaññāya abhāvo, upekkhakatāya katthacipi anurodhābhāvena sabbattha sinehasanthavābhāvo. Mahākāruṇikatāya gāmādīnaṃ āsannaṭṭhāne vasantassapi upekkhakatāya araññaṭṭhāne eva viharaṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘purimena cassa paramāya annukampāya samannāgamaṃ, pacchimena paramāya upekkhāya samannāgamaṃ dīpetī’’ti.
“Tanti”指“tattha”一词。“阐明方所与时间”,即对在此作为“住”这一动作的简别而被说出的方所与时间,进行阐明。为显此义,乃说:“那个时刻……阐明”。因为“taṃ”一词是对已说内容的指称,故在此处,它应成为对时间或方所的指称,而不应指称其他。以上是当“tatra”一词作为指称时,其意义的阐明。然而,由于在此类情形中,“tatra”一词是在阐明与说法相关的方所与时间,故又云:“或者,它是在阐明应宣说的、合宜的方所与时间”。因此,“tattha”之义即为:世尊为说法,于彼适宜之方所,或于彼适宜之时间,召唤比丘众、进行言说。通过“确实不”等来证成此义。或问:世尊岂非曾于路上站立,对拔希亚说“今非其时”等而拒绝说法,随后又恰于彼路中央站立为彼说法耶?此是事实,然这正是于不适宜说法之时不说法之例证。故彼言:“今确实非时”。而彼处所说“我等已入村落间”等,亦为间接显示当时……显示巴利原文
Tanti ‘‘tatrā’’ti padaṃ. Desakālaparidīpananti ye desakālā idha viharaṇakiriyāvisesanabhāvena vuttā, tesaṃ paridīpananti dassento ‘‘yaṃ samayaṃ…pe… dīpetī’’ti āha. Taṃ-saddo hi vuttassa atthassa paṭiniddeso, tasmā idha kālassa, desassa vā paṭiniddeso bhavituṃ arahati, na aññassa. Ayaṃ tāva tatra-saddassa paṭiniddesabhāve atthavibhāvanā. Yasmā pana īdisesu ṭhānesu tatra-saddo dhammadesanāvisiṭṭhaṃ desaṃ kālañca vibhāveti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāsitabbayutte vā desakāle dīpetī’’ti. Tena tatrāti yattha bhagavā dhammadesanatthaṃ bhikkhū ālapi abhāsi, tādise dese, kāle vāti attho. Na hītiādinā tamevatthaṃ samattheti. Nanu ca yattha ṭhito bhagavā ‘‘akālo kho tāvā’’tiādinā bāhiyassa dhammadesanaṃ paṭikkhipi, tattheva antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhito tassa dhammaṃ desetīti? Saccametaṃ, adesetabbakāle adesanāya idaṃ udāharaṇaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘akālo kho tāvā’’ti. Yaṃ pana tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhamhā’’ti (udā. 10), tampi tassa akālabhāvasseva pariyāyena dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa hi tadā addhānaparissamena rūpakāye akammaññatā ahosi, balavapītivegena nāmakāye, tadubhayassa vūpasamaṃ āgamento papañcaparihāratthaṃ bhagavā ‘‘akālo kho’’ti pariyāyena paṭikkhipi. Adesetabbadese adesanāya pana udāharaṇaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi (saṃ. ni. 2.154), vihārato nikkhamitvā vihārapacchāyāyaṃ paññatte āsane nisīdī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.363) ca evamādikaṃ idha ādi-saddena saṅgahitaṃ.
在“诸比丘,那时,那个愚人曾在此尝味,在此造作恶业”等语境中,“kho”字只用作填充词;在“无恭敬、不顺从而住,实为苦”等语境中,“kho”字表示决定;在“贤友,当导师远离而住时,声闻弟子们为何不学远离呢”等语境中,“kho”字表示起始时间,即语句的开端。其中,用作填充词纯粹是为了言辞庄严;用作起始时间义,仅仅是为了发起语句;而用作决定义,则显示了确定性。因此,“他呼唤”这句话的意思,即于呼唤中显示确定性。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho so, bhikkhave, bālo idha pubbe rasādo idha pāpāni kammāni karitvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.251) padapūraṇamatte kho-saddo, ‘‘dukkhaṃ kho agāravo viharati appatisso’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.21) avadhāraṇe, ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.31) ādikālatthe. Vākyārambheti attho. Tattha padapūraṇena vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ kataṃ hoti, ādikālatthena vākyassa upaññāsamattaṃ, avadhāratthena pana niyamadassanaṃ, tasmā āmantesi evāti āmantane niyamo dassito hotīti.
问:“‘Bhagavāti lokagarudīpanaṃ’(世尊是世间尊重的表达)为何这样说?前面不是已经解释过‘bhagavā’(世尊)一词的含义了吗?”答:“虽然前面已经解释过,但那是在描述住立行为之处,为了显示行为主体的殊胜而作,并非针对称呼行为本身;而此处是为了表示称呼行为,因此经文中才再次出现‘bhagavā’一语。”为了阐明这个意义,便说了“Bhagavāti lokagarudīpanaṃ”。所谓“适合听闻者的言词”,是指与即将开示的《根本法门经》法义相应、契合听闻者的言语。在四众弟子中,唯有比丘才是此法最相应的当机者。因此,为了显示他们是此殊胜教法的领受者,这里特别举出“比丘”。先说明了这个道理之后,如今为了进一步显示字面含义,便开示了“再说……”等内容。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhagavāti lokagarudīpana’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu pubbepi bhagavā-saddassa attho vuttoti? Yadipi pubbe vutto, taṃ panassa yathāvutte ṭhāne viharaṇakiriyāya kattuvisesadassanatthaṃ kataṃ, na āmantanakiriyāya, idha pana āmantanakiriyāya, tasmā tadatthaṃ puna ‘‘bhagavā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti tassatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavāti lokagarudīpana’’nti āha. Kathāsavanayuttapuggalavacananti vakkhamānāya mūlapariyāyadesanāya savanayogyapuggalavacanaṃ. Catūsupi parisāsu bhikkhū eva edisānaṃ desanānaṃ visesena bhājanabhūtā, iti sātisayasāsanasampaṭiggāhakabhāvadassanatthaṃ idha bhikkhugahaṇanti dassetvā idāni saddatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“bhikkhako”(乞食者)之所以称为“bhikkhu”(比丘),是因为他具有乞食的性质,故名比丘。由于他已受持了乞食行——也就是佛陀等圣者也同样受持的托钵维生方式——并努力奉行,因此,比丘是因受持与践行乞食行而得名的。无论什么人,只要舍下或大或小的财富,离俗出家而为非家生活,他便舍弃了靠种田、牧牛等谋生的方式,单凭接受外在的形相,便已受持了乞食行,故为比丘;或者说,由于他依赖他人维生,即使是在僧院中食用他人供养的饭团,也算受持了乞食行,故为比丘;又或者说,他依止团食而出家,并生起了精进力,同样可说是因受持乞食行而为比丘——应当这样来理解此处所说的含义。所谓的“依‘开头的方法’等”,即是依《分别论》(Vibh. 510)中所述的方式,例如:“穿着破旧衣者为比丘,能破坏恶不善法者为比丘,因已破坏恶不善法而称为比丘”等等。“ñāpana”的意思是令了知、传达含义。显示巴利原文
Tattha bhikkhakoti bhikkhūti bhikkhanadhammatāya bhikkhūti attho. Bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti buddhādīhipi ajjhupagataṃ bhikkhācariyaṃ uñchācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā anuṭṭhitattā bhikkhū. Yo hi koci appaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito, so kasigorakkhādīhi jīvikākappanaṃ hitvā liṅgasampaṭicchaneneva bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā bhikkhu, parapaṭibaddhajīvikattā vā vihāramajjhe kājabhattaṃ bhuñjamānopi bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu, piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāya pabbajjāya ussāhajātattā vā bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhūti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ādinā nayenāti ‘‘bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu, bhindati pāpake akusale dhammeti bhikkhu, bhinnattā pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 510) āgatanayena. Ñāpaneti avabodhane, paṭivedaneti attho.
在“乞食的德行”等词中,“乞食的德行”是指以乞食维生的戒行,而非靠种田、经商等方式维生的戒行。“乞食的法性”是指如同“圣者们依此而住”(《无碍解道》153;《弥兰陀问经》4.5.9)这样所说的、具有乞食本性的性质,而非臆测或骄慢的本性。“于乞食中善行”是指忆念“应当奋起,不应放逸”(《法句经》168)的教导,并在其中精勤而不放逸。或者,所谓“戒”是指本来的习性,但在这里是以此为依止处;“法”是指誓愿。另有一些注释师解释说:“所谓‘戒’是受持的誓愿,‘法’是传统沿袭下来的操守,‘善行’则是恭敬、郑重的行为。”所谓“卑劣之人与殊胜之人所依止的”,应这样理解:对那些虽然身在比丘位,却凭藉出身慢等高举傲慢的人,以及那些在在家时因从未亲近过他人,反而将乞食行视为最下贱之事的人,针对这两种人,依次通过“比丘们”这一称呼,宣说他们所依止的活命方式——也就是,让那些卑劣、贫穷、把乞食行视为最下贱的人,必须依靠在他人家中乞食维生,借由阐明这种行持,来折伏他们内心的傲慢;同时,也宣说那些殊胜之人……显示巴利原文
Bhikkhanasīlatātiādīsu bhikkhanasīlatā bhikkhanena ājīvanasīlatā, na kasivaṇijjādīhi ājīvanasīlatā. Bhikkhanadhammatā ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 153; mi. pa. 4.5.9) evaṃ vuttabhikkhanasabhāvatā, na sambhāvanākohaññasabhāvatā. Bhikkhane sādhukāritā ‘‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’’ti (dha. pa. 168) vacanaṃ anussaritvā tattha appamajjanā. Atha vā sīlaṃ nāma pakatisabhāvo, idha pana tadadhiṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammoti vataṃ. Apare pana ‘‘sīlaṃ nāma vatasamādānaṃ, dhammo nāma paveṇīāgataṃ cārittaṃ, sādhukāritāti sakkaccakāritā ādarakiriyā’’ti vaṇṇenti. Hīnādhikajanasevitanti ye bhikkhubhāve ṭhitāpi jātimadādivasena uddhatā unnaḷā. Ye ca gihibhāve paresu atthikabhāvampi anupagatatāya bhikkhācariyaṃ paramakāpaññataṃ maññanti, tesaṃ ubhayesampi yathākkamaṃ ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vacanena hīnajanehi daliddehi paramakāpaññataṃ pattehi parakulesu bhikkhācariyāya jīvikaṃ kappentehi sevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti, adhikajanehi uḷārabhogakhattiyakulādito pabbajitehi buddhādīhi ājīvavisodhanatthaṃ sevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento dīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karotīti yojetabbaṃ. Yasmā ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vacanaṃ āmantanabhāvato abhimukhīkaraṇaṃ, pakaraṇato sāmatthiyato ca sussūsājananaṃ sakkaccasavanamanasikāraniyojanañca hoti. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhavoti iminā’’tiādimāha.
其中,“善听、如理作意”即指在善听和如理作意这两方面。那么,怎样的听闻等才算是运作完善呢?这即是以恭敬尊重之心——“凭借这正确的行道,必定能将整个教法的成就掌握在手”,以及在听法等时不起轻慢等心态。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,具足五法者听闻正法,便能证入正性决定,于善法中得至正确。哪五种呢?不轻慢所说之法,不轻慢说法之人,不轻慢自己,以不散乱之心、一意专注而听法,并且如理作意。诸比丘,具足这五法者听闻正法,便能证入正性决定,于善法中得至正确。”(《增支部》5.151)正因如此,他才说:“教法的成就,确实取决于善听与如理作意。”所谓“教法成就”,即指戒等功德的圆满达成。显示巴利原文
Tattha sādhukasavanamanasikāreti sādhukasavane sādhukamanasikāre ca. Kathaṃ pana pavattitā savanādayo sādhukaṃ pavattitā hontīti? ‘‘Addhā imāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sakalasāsanasampatti hatthagatā bhavissatī’’ti ādaragāravayogena, kathādīsu aparibhavanādinā ca. Vuttaṃ hi ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato suṇanto saddhammaṃ bhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ. Katamehi pañcahi? Na kathaṃ paribhoti, na kathikaṃ paribhoti, na attānaṃ paribhoti, avikkhittacitto dhammaṃ suṇāti ekaggacitto, yoniso ca manasi karoti. Imehi kho, bhikkhave , pañcahi dhammehi samannāgato suṇanto saddhammaṃ bhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammatta’’nti (a. ni. 5.151). Tenevāha ‘‘sādhukasavanamanasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampattī’’ti. Sāsanasampatti nāma sīlādinipphatti.
“首先生起”是就证得而言的;“随顺师行”是就依循戒等功德而修习而言的;“因为三种乘都具备随法行道,所以能总摄受持全部教法”;“亲近”是说处于近处;“常于近处行”是说一切时中皆处于相应的状态。所谓“依所教诫”,即如理遵从教诫,毫无遗漏地受持。这些都是针对那一部分比丘而说的,也就是经末所说的“那些比丘对世尊的言说欢喜信受”,所指的正是那五百位从婆罗门种姓出家的比丘。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaṃ uppannattā adhigamavasena. Satthucariyānuvidhāyakattā sīlādiguṇānuṭṭhānena. Tiṇṇaṃ yānānaṃ vasena anudhammapaṭipattisabbhāvato sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā. Santikattāti samīpabhāvato. Santikāvacarattāti sabbakālaṃ sampayuttabhāvato. Yathānusiṭṭhanti anusāsanianurūpaṃ, anusāsaniṃ anavasesato paṭiggahetvāti attho. Ekacce bhikkhūyeva sandhāyāti ye suttapariyosāne ‘‘te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandu’’nti vuttā pañcasatā brāhmaṇapabbajitā, te sandhāya.
虽然此前世尊说法是普对一切大众的,但是在说明了以“最尊、最胜”等语唯独称呼比丘的理由之后,现在为了进一步显示先召唤比丘再说法的用意,便提出了这个问难:“那么,世尊又是为了什么目的……”等等。这其中,“心在别处”是说心思转求其他对象。“散乱之心”是说心没有入定一境。“正在省察法”是说那时正在心中反复回味当时、昨天,或是其他日子所听闻到的法。如果世尊先召唤比丘,再对说法开示,他们就会从一开始便用心注意所说的法;为了反过来显示这个道理,所以说了“若不呼召他们……”等语。显示巴利原文
Pubbe sabbaparisasādhāraṇattepi bhagavato dhammadesanāya ‘‘jeṭṭhaseṭṭhā’’tiādinā bhikkhūnaṃ eva āmantane kāraṇaṃ dassetvā idāni bhikkhū āmantetvāva dhammadesanāya payojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kimatthaṃ pana bhagavā’’ti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi. Tattha aññaṃ cintentāti aññavihitā. Vikkhittacittāti asamāhitacittā. Dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāti tadā hiyyo tato paradivasesu vā sutadhammaṃ pati pati manasā avekkhantā. Bhikkhū āmantetvā dhamme desiyamāne ādito paṭṭhāya desanaṃ sallakkhetuṃ sakkontīti imamevatthaṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘te anāmantetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“bhikkhavo”一词,应视为因连声而有 i 字母的脱落,即“bhikkhavo iti”。此 iti 词具多种含义:原因、总结、词义转换、方式、确定、例示等。例如,在“ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘rūpa’nti vuccati”(诸比丘,它被破坏,故称为‘色’)等句中,用作原因义;在“tasmā tiha me, bhikkhave, dhammadāyādā bhavatha…”(是故诸比丘,汝等应为法之继承者……)等句中,用作总结义;在“iti vā, iti evarūpā naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato”(或以如是种种,远离观听歌舞等戏乐)等句中,表示‘等等’义;在“māgaṇṭhiyoti tassa brāhmaṇassa saṅkhā samaññā paññatti…”(所谓‘摩犍提耶’者,乃是彼婆罗门的称呼、名称、施设……)等句中,显示巴利原文
Bhikkhavotīti ca sandhivasena i-kāralopo daṭṭhabbo ‘‘bhikkhavo itī’’ti. Ayaṃ hi iti-saddo hetu-parisamāpanādipadatthavipariyāya-pakārāvadhāraṇanidassanādianekatthappabhedo. Tathā hesa ‘‘ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘rūpa’nti vuccatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.79) hetuatthe dissati; ‘‘tasmā tiha me, bhikkhave, dhammadāyādā bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā, atthi me tumhesu anukampā ‘kinti me sāvakā dhammadāyādā bhaveyyuṃ, no āmisadāyādā’ti’’ādīsu parisamāpane; ‘‘iti vā, iti evarūpā naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.13) ādiatthe; ‘‘māgaṇṭhiyoti tassa brāhmaṇassa saṅkhā samaññā paññatti vohāro nāmaṃ nāmakammaṃ nāmadheyyaṃ nirutti byañjanamabhilāpo’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 73) padatthavipariyāye; ‘‘iti kho, bhikkhave, sappaṭibhayo bālo, appaṭibhayo paṇḍito, saupaddavo bālo, anupaddavo paṇḍito, saupasaggo bālo, anupasaggo paṇḍito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.124) pakāre; ‘‘atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṃ, kiṃ paccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti ce vadeyya, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iccassa vacanīya’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.96) avadhāraṇe; ‘‘sabbamatthīti kho, kaccāna, ayameko anto, sabbaṃ natthīti kho, kaccāna, ayaṃ dutiyo anto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.15) nidassane. Idhāpi nidassaneva daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhavoti hi āmantitākāro, tamesa iti-saddo nidasseti ‘‘bhikkhavoti āmantesī’’ti. Iminā nayena ‘‘bhaddante’’tiādīsupi yathārahaṃ iti-saddassa attho veditabbo. Pubbe ‘‘bhagavā āmantesī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘bhagavato paccassosu’’nti idha ‘‘bhagavato’’ti sāmivacanaṃ āmantanameva sambandhīantaraṃ apekkhatīti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘bhagavato āmantanaṃ paṭiassosu’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavato’’ti pana idaṃ paṭissavasambandhanena sampadānavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘devadattassa paṭissuṇotī’’ti.
“所说的那因缘”是关联句。于此有问:“当结集法与律时,为何要说因缘之语?难道不是只应结集世尊所说之语吗?”答:“是为了成就教法的久住、不被遗忘及令人信受。”因为,将说法的时间、地点、说法者、因缘、当机众等背景交代清楚而安立的教法,才能长久住世、不被遗忘,并且令人信受,如同世间裁判依时间、地点、当事人、证人、事由等而确立一样。正因如此,当大迦叶尊者问:“贤友阿难,《根本法门经》是在何处所说?”等问题时,这位司掌法藏的阿难尊者在回答这些问题时,便以“如是我闻”等语,说出了此经的因缘。再者,说因缘之语也是为了彰显师的成就。因为对于如来、世尊而言,没有事先准备、推测、逻辑推理等,这就成就了他正自觉者的真实性。确实,正自觉者不需要事先准备等,因为他的智慧能在一切处无碍运行,且对于所知诸法皆以同一量智通达。同样,因为他完全没有师长、懈怠、法悭、以及对教法和弟子的牵挂顾虑,这就成就了他漏尽者的真实性。对于彻底断尽烦恼的圣者,这些烦恼是绝不会出现的,因此他能以极其清净的心去利益他人。如此,通过彰显那些能污染戒与见之成就的——即无明与渴爱的彻底断除,以及彰显其智慧成就与断德成就的“正自觉”与“清净”状态,前两种无畏便得以成立;而正因如此,又成就了对障碍法与出离法毫无迷惑,后两种无畏也得以成立。因此,世尊具足四种无畏,以及自利利他的行道,都通过因缘之语而彰显出来,这是因为他能在各处,随顺时机与众生的意乐,以应机而发的辩才开示法义。而在此处,则是为了针对地等所缘,为凡夫分别确立不同的行道而开演教法,应当如此理解。因此才说:“说因缘之语,是为了彰显师的成就”。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitanti sambandho. Etthāha – kimatthaṃ pana dhammavinayasaṅgahe kariyamāne nidānavacanaṃ, nanu bhagavatā bhāsitavacanasseva saṅgaho kātabboti? Vuccate – desanāya ṭhitiasammosasaddheyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakanimittaparisāpadesehi upanibandhitvā ṭhapitā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti asammosadhammā saddheyyā ca, desakālakattusotunimittehi upanibaddho viya vohāravinicchayo. Teneva ca āyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘mūlapariyāyasuttaṃ āvuso, ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā desādipucchāsu katāsu tāsaṃ vissajjanaṃ karontena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādinā imassa suttassa nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ. Apica satthusampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi bhagavato pubbaracanānumānāgamatakkābhāvato sammāsambuddhabhāvasiddhi . Na hi sammāsambuddhassa pubbaracanādīhi attho atthi sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya ekappamāṇattā ca ñeyyadhammesu. Tathā ācariyamuṭṭhidhammamacchariyasāsanasāvakānurodhābhāvato khīṇāsavabhāvasiddhi. Na hi sabbaso khīṇāsavassa te sambhavantīti suvisuddhassa parānuggahappavatti. Evaṃ desakasaṃkilesabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhisīlasampadādūsakānaṃ avijjātaṇhānaṃ accantābhāvasaṃsūcakehi ñāṇasampadāpahānasampadābhibyañjakehi ca sambuddhavisuddhabhāvehi purimavesārajjadvayasiddhi, tato eva ca antarāyikaniyyānikadhammesu sammohābhāvasiddhito pacchimavesārajjadvayasiddhīti bhagavato catuvesārajjasamannāgamo attahitaparahitapaṭipatti ca nidānavacanena pakāsitā hoti tattha tattha sampattapariyāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānena dhammadesanādīpanato, idha pana pathavīādīsu vatthūsu puthujjanānaṃ paṭipattivibhāgavavatthāpakadesanādīpanatoti yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthusampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
同样地,这段「缘起语」是为了阐明教法的成就而说的。因为世尊的一切行为都由智与悲所统摄,既不会有毫无意义的运作,也不是为了自利。所以,作为正自觉者,他的一切行为都纯粹是为了利益他人而展开。他全部的身、语、意业,依照其实际发生的情况如实宣说出来,便能够根据众生的需要,在「现法利益」「后世利益」和「究竟义」上如理地成为对众生的教诫,这就称为「教法」,而不是诗歌创作。而这位大师的行谊,连同时间、地点、说法者、在场众会、所依之处等,在各处经典中,都通过缘起语被恰当地彰显出来;而在这里,就是指‘在地等事物中’等内容,与前面所说的完全相同。因此说:‘为了阐明教法的成就而说缘起语。’进一步来说,通过彰显大师是‘量’,从而显示教法也是‘量’,这也是讲说缘起语的目的;而这个显示大师是量的义理,应该知道已经通过前面讲过的路子——也就是用「世尊」这个词——阐明清楚了。因为「世尊」这个词,揭示了如来断除了贪、嗔、痴等一切烦恼的垢染,以及恶行等所有过失;阐明了如来不与其他人共的、极为清净的智与悲等功德殊胜结合;并由此彰显了他是一切众生中最上的存在。这个意义,已经通过「世尊」一词全然地开显了。以上是对这段缘起语作用的一点提示。显示巴利原文
Tathā sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthikā paṭipatti, attahitatthā vā. Tasmā paresaṃ eva atthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ yathāpavattaṃ vuccamānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ sattānaṃ anusāsanaṭṭhena sāsanaṃ, na kabyaracanā, tayidaṃ satthucaritaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesehi saddhiṃ tattha tattha nidānavacanehi yathārahaṃ pakāsīyati, idha pana ‘‘pathaviyādīsu vatthūsū’’ti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti. Apica satthuno pamāṇabhāvappakāsanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ, tañca desakappamāṇabhāvadassanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti ca iminā padena vibhāvitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti iminā tathāgatassa rāgadosamohādisabbakilesamaladuccaritādidosappahānadīpanena vacanena anaññasādhāraṇasuparisuddhañāṇakaruṇādiguṇavisesayogaparidīpanena tato eva sabbasattuttamabhāvadīpanena ayamattho sabbathā pakāsito hotīti idamettha nidānavacanappayojanassa mukhamattadassanaṃ.
经的安放方式之解说显示巴利原文
Suttanikkhepavaṇṇanā
「已被安放的」(Nikkhittassa)即「已开示的」。开示之所以也被称为「安放」(nikkhepa),是因为将所应开示的戒等义理安放于应受教化者的心相续中。为了令解说易于理解,先总体展示世尊教法的生起类别,若说「这段教法是以如是方式生起的」,那么在展示了教法的生起之后,透过正确了知这部经的因缘,注释便变得极为易懂。如此一来,例如以「诸比丘,未听闻的凡夫……」「诸比丘,那位比丘是阿拉汉、诸漏尽者……」「诸比丘,如来亦是阿拉汉、正自觉者……」这些方式所展开的教法,因为显示了其中的「连结」,也就变得容易理解了。在这里,正如虽有成百上千种分类的诸经,亦不超出以「杂染分」等为纲的十六种类型,同样,依于「自意乐」等的经安放方式,也有四种。所以论中说「因为经的安放有四种」。显示巴利原文
Nikkhittassāti desitassa. Desanāpi hi desetabbassa sīlādiatthassa vineyyasantānesu nikkhipanato ‘‘nikkhepo’’ti vuccati. Suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hotīti sāmaññato bhagavato desanāsamuṭṭhānassa vibhāgaṃ dassetvā ‘‘etthāyaṃ desanā evaṃsamuṭṭhānā’’ti desanāya samuṭṭhāne dassite suttassa sammadeva nidānaparijānanena vaṇṇanāya suviññeyyattā vuttaṃ. Evañhi ‘‘assutavā bhikkhave puthujjano’’tiādinā, ‘‘yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṃ khīṇāsavo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.8), ‘‘tathāgatopi kho, bhikkhave, arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.12) ca pavattadesanā anusandhidassanasukhatāya suviññeyyā hoti. Tattha yathā anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttantāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādipadhānanayavasena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhabhāvanti āha ‘‘cattāro hi suttanikkhepā’’ti.
在这里,正如「自意乐」与「事起」,以及和「对他意乐」「问」之间可以有这样的组合差别——「自意乐与对他意乐」「自意乐与问依」「事起与对他意乐」「事起与问依」,这是因为在意乐与问之间存在连结;同样地,虽然「事起」与「自意乐」的组合差别也是可能存在的,但是当以「自意乐」等为首要时,它们与「事起」就不会再构成组合了。正因为在此并不存在穷尽一切细节的广说方式,所以只说「经的安放有四种」。或者说,是将可能出现的其余安放方式都收摄于此,仅以根本安放方式显示为四种。这里所说的这些组合差别,应当如此去理解。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yathā attajjhāsayassa aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāhi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati ‘‘attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca, attajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca pucchāvasiko cā’’ti ajjhāsayapucchānusandhisabbhāvato, evaṃ yadipi aṭṭhuppattiyā attajjhāsayenapi saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati, attajjhāsayādīhi pana purato ṭhitehi aṭṭhuppattiyā saṃsaggo natthīti nayidha niravaseso vitthāranayo sambhavatīti ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’ti vuttaṃ, tadantogadhattā vā sambhavantānaṃ sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattārova dassitā. Tathādassanañcettha ayaṃ saṃsaggabhedo gahetabboti.
在此,词义如下:被安放(nikkhipīyati),故称为「安放」(nikkhepo);经本身就是安放,所以叫作「经的安放」。或者,安放这个动作即是「安放」,对经的安放即是「经的安放」,意思就是指经开示。自己的意乐称为「自意乐」,以此为生起之因的,便是「具有自意乐」。或者说,此经以自己之意乐为因,便称为「自意乐」。对「对他意乐」一语,也遵循同样的语法规则。由提问所支配的,叫作「问依」,具有此特性的,便是「具有问依」。作为经开示之事的意义生起,这叫作「事起」(atthuppatti),将‘ttha’音变为‘ṭṭha’音,即成为「aṭṭhuppatti」。具有此特性的,便是「具有事起」。或者换一种说法:经是依此而被安放的,所以叫作「经的安放」,所指即是「自意乐」等。在这种自立的分别中,自己的意乐即是「自意乐」;他人的意乐即是「对他意乐」。被询问的称为「问」(pucchā),也就是应被询问的义理。依据提问而展开的、领受法义者的话语,即是「问依」。由于「安放」这个词显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – nikkhipīyatīti nikkhepo, suttaṃ eva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Atha vā nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi kāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo. Attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayepi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vaso pucchāvaso, so etassa atthīti pucchāvasiko. Suttadesanāvatthubhūtassa atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, atthuppattiyeva aṭṭhuppatti ttha-kārassa ṭṭha-kāraṃ katvā. Sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti suttanikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana attavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo. Paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo. Pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitabbo attho. Pucchanavasena pavattaṃ dhammapaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasikaṃ, tadeva nikkhepa-saddāpekkhāya pulliṅgavasena ‘‘pucchāvasiko’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā aṭṭhuppatti eva aṭṭhuppattikoti evampettha attho veditabbo.
在此,自意乐不待他人根机成熟等因缘,单独立为一类经的安立方式,这是合理的,因为它纯粹是由自己的意乐出发,为安立法轨而展开的教说。然而,依他意乐和依问者是以他人的意乐和提问作为教说之因,它们仅在这些因缘生起时才展开,那么为何不与事起相混淆呢?或者说,依他意乐而展开的依问者和事起者,为何不与依他意乐相混淆呢?对此不应责难。因为事起被理解为,排除他人意乐、反复提问等,仅仅作为经典教说之因缘而生起的事件;因此,才将依他意乐和依问者与它区分开来。确实,像《梵网经》《法嗣经》那样,以称赞、不称赞、染着生起等作为教说的因缘,这些便称为‘事起’。不以他人提问为缘,纯粹以他之意乐为因缘而说的,是依他意乐;随问而说的,是依问者。此义甚明。显示巴利原文
Apicettha paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhattā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ suttanikkhepabhāvo yutto kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva dhammatantiṭhapanatthaṃ pavattitadesanattā. Parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanāpavattihetubhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathamaṭṭhuppattiyaṃ anavarodho, pucchāvasikaaṭṭhuppattikānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattikānaṃ kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti? Na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinimuttasseva suttadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi brahmajāla (dī. ni. 1.1) dhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ (ma. ni. 1.29) vaṇṇāvaṇṇaāmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhuppattī’’ti vuccati. Paresaṃ pucchaṃ vinā ajjhāsayaṃ eva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭoyamatthoti.
应理解为:他唯以自意乐说法,旨在安立法轨。所谓‘《正勤经》带出者’,是指《相应部》中按次第安立的、与正勤相关的一系列经典。同样,亦有‘神足带出者’等。显示巴利原文
Attanoajjhāsayeneva kathesi dhammatantiṭhapanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sammappadhānasuttantahārakoti anupubbena nikkhittānaṃ saṃyuttake sammappadhānapaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ suttānaṃ āvaḷi. Tathā iddhipādahārakādayo.
‘解脱成熟法’指信根等。ajjhāsaya是‘意乐’,即志趣。khanti是‘忍’,指对见的审察忍可。man是‘意’,即心。abhinihāra是‘志求’,即愿。bujjhanabhāva是‘觉的状态’,意思是觉的本性,或通达的行相。显示巴利原文
Vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā saddhindriyādayo. Ajjhāsayanti adhimuttiṃ. Khantinti diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiṃ. Mananti cittaṃ. Abhinihāranti paṇidhānaṃ. Bujjhanabhāvanti bujjhanasabhāvaṃ, paṭivijjhanākāraṃ vā.
“于生起的慢中安置”表示这样的关联。阴性等三种性。名等四种词。第一格等七种格。“除……之外不说任何”,意思是依自性语如实转起,所以不说任何。“结节句”:如同树的结节处难以穿透、难以砍伐,同样地,任何句子若从意义上无法开解,便称为“结节句”。“不破坏”即“不取出”。显示巴利原文
Uppanne māne nikkhittanti sambandho. Itthiliṅgādīni tīṇi liṅgāni. Nāmādīni cattāri padāni. Paṭhamādayo satta vibhattiyo. Muñcitvā na kiñci katheti sabhāvaniruttiyā tatheva pavattanato. Gaṇṭhibhūtaṃ padaṃ. Yathā hi rukkhassa gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ dubbinibbedhaṃ duttacchitañca hoti, evamevaṃ yaṃ padaṃ atthato vivarituṃ na sakkā, taṃ ‘‘gaṇṭhipada’’nti vuccati. Anupahaccāti anuddharitvā.
“凡以种种关联而结合,即显示彼种种的无余”,此句表明这里的“一切”一词是“有余”(部分)之义。的确,“一切”一词见于四种语境:全分一切、部分一切、处一切、自身一切。例如,在“一切法以一切行相显现于世尊佛陀的智门前”等经文中,出现的是“全分一切”。在“舍利弗,以某种方式,一切皆是善说……”等中,出现的是“部分一切”。在“诸比丘,我将为你们开示一切……即眼与色……乃至意与法”中,出现的是“处一切”。在“一切于一切处想”等中,出现的是“自身一切”。这其中,在“全分一切”中出现的是“无余”,在其余三种中出现的是“有余”,但此处应当知道是在“自身一切”中出现。正如下文将说:“然而,属于自身的三地诸法,应知为无余。”显示巴利原文
Yena yena sambandhaṃ gacchati, tassa tassa anavasesataṃ dīpetīti iminā imassa sabba-saddassa sappadesataṃ dasseti. Sabba-saddo hi sabbasabbaṃ padesasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbanti catūsu visayesu diṭṭhappayogo. Tathā hesa ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthamāgacchantī’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.6) sabbasabbasmiṃ āgato. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsitaṃ pariyāyenā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) padesasabbasmiṃ. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi…pe… cakkhuñceva rūpā ca…pe… mano ceva dhammā cā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.23) ettha āyatanasabbasmiṃ. ‘‘Sabbaṃ sabbato sañjānātī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.5) sakkāyasabbasmiṃ. Tattha sabbasabbasmiṃ āgato nippadeso, itaresu tīsupi āgato sappadeso, idha pana sakkāyasabbasmiṃ veditabbo. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sakkāyapariyāpannā pana tebhūmakadhammāva anavasesato veditabbā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1 suttanikkhepavaṇṇanā).
“于诸谛中”指在圣谛当中。现在所说的“这四个法”,是指接下来要说的谛等四个法。其中,“谛”指语谛。“住”指精进,或读作“dhiti”,意思相同。“舍”指无贪。“他超越所见”:若某人具备了这些谛等法,他便能超越自己所见到的敌人;他不被所见到的敌人制伏,而能制伏敌人。此义即自性成立——自性本自成就,不须由因所生起。因为无自性的法,不可能有任何生起之因。无自相者,不能成为任何事物的能生者。“任持自相”:虽然不存在离相的法,但那些由邪见和渴爱构想出来的、仅为行相的自我、净、乐、常等,以及本性、实体、命、身等,仅是随顺世间名言而成立,如同虚空花一般,在胜义中并不存在。然而这些谛等法则不然,它们在胜义中是真实存在的。因此,为了显示这些法离于众生等差别、唯是具自性的法,故说“任持自相”。虽然胜义中并无差别,但为了便于理解,有时亦以假立差别的方式来阐明,犹如说“石女儿的身体”。又或者,“持”可理解为:依其自性而被执持、被了知,故名为法,比如硬、触等。显示巴利原文
Saccesūti ariyasaccesu. Ete caturo dhammāti idāni vuccamāne saccādike cattāro dhamme sandhāya vadati. Tattha saccanti vacīsaccaṃ. Ṭhitīti vīriyaṃ, ‘‘dhitī’’ti vā pāṭho, so evattho. Cāgoti alobho. Diṭṭhaṃ so ativattatīti yasmiṃ ete saccādayo dhammā upalabbhanti, so diṭṭhaṃ attano amittaṃ atikkamati, na tassa hatthataṃ gacchati, atha kho naṃ abhibhavati evāti attho. Sabhāve vattati asabhāvadhammassa kāraṇāsambhavato. Na hi nissabhāvā dhammā kenaci nibbattīyanti. Attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti yadipi lakkhaṇavinimuttā dhammā nāma natthi, tathāpi yathā diṭṭhitaṇhāparikappitākāramattā attasubhasukhasassatādayo, pakatiyādayo, dabbādayo, jīvādayo, kāyādayo lokavohāramattasiddhā gagaṇakusumādayova saccikaṭṭhaparamatthato na upalabbhanti, na evamete, ete pana saccikaṭṭhaparamatthabhūtā upalabbhanti, tato eva sattādivisesavirahato dhammamattā sabhāvavantoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentī’’ti vuttaṃ . Bhavati hi bhedābhāvepi sukhāvabodhanatthaṃ upacāramattasiddhena bhedena niddeso yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti. Dhārīyanti vā yathāsabhāvato avadhārīyanti ñāyantīti dhammā, kakkhaḷaphusanādayo.
asādhāraṇahetumhīti 意指“在不共因中”,即对于有身见诸法,作为它们各自不共的缘。那么,“那”是指什么呢?就是指渴爱、慢、邪见,或者无明等。犹如依于地等妄想基处而生起的渴爱等妄想,是那些妄想的根本因,无明等也是如此。的确,通过随顺门,如“无闻凡夫……我说他未遍知彼”(中部1.2)及“喜是苦的根源”(中部1.13),以及通过遮遣门,如“由于贪的灭尽……由于离痴”,这就彰显了它们作为根本因的性质。显示巴利原文
Asādhāraṇahetumhīti asādhāraṇakāraṇe, sakkāyadhammesu tassa tassa āveṇikapaccayeti attho. Kiṃ pana tanti? Taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo, avijjādayopi vā. Yatheva hi pathavīādīsu maññanāvatthūsu uppajjamānā taṇhādayo maññanā tesaṃ pavattiyā mūlakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ avijjādayopi. Tathā hi ‘‘assutavā puthujjano’’tiādinā ‘‘apariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.2) ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūla’’nti (ma. ni. 1.13) ca anvayato, ‘‘khayā rāgassa…pe… vītamohattā’’ti byatirekato ca tesaṃ mūlakāraṇabhāvo vibhāvito.
Pariyāyeti 的意思是:使应开示的意义得以知晓、令人觉悟,故称 pariyāya,也就是教说。或者,它执取自己的果而转起,或成为果之因,故称 pariyāya,也就是因。或者,它辗转相续地流转,故称 pariyāya,也就是次第。如此,当知 pariyāya 一词可用于教说、因、次第等义。不随字面意思而取、须经抉择方能把握的意义,称为“应导义”(neyyattha)。唯有三界之法才应被无遗余地了知,因为这里意指一切成为妄想基处的地等法。显示巴利原文
Pariyāyeti desetabbamatthaṃ avagameti bodhayatīti pariyāyo, desanā. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā vattati tassa vā kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇaṃ. Pariyāyati aparāparaṃ parivattatīti pariyāyo, vāro. Evaṃ pariyāyasaddassa desanākāraṇavāresu pavatti veditabbā. Yathārutavasena aggahetvā niddhāretvā gahetabbatthaṃ neyyatthaṃ. Tebhūmakā dhammāva anavasesato veditabbā maññanāvatthubhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃ pathavīādidhammānaṃ adhippetattā.
kāraṇadesananti 意思是“让人知道因的教导”。Taṃ atthanti 意思是那个意义,也就是被称为一切法根本因的意义,或者被称为因之教导的意义。因此他说“那个因,那个教导”。Ekatthametanti 意思是这两个词意义相同。实际上,“sādhu”一词通过加上“ka”音而被扩充成“sādhuka”。也正是因此,在解说“sādhu”的词义时,以引义的方式举出了“sādhuka”一词。Dhammarucīti 意思是“喜欢法的人”,也就是希求功德者。Paññāṇavāti 意思是“有慧的人”。Addubbhoti 意思是“不害的人”,也就是不恼害者。Idhāpīti 意思是“在这篇《根本法门经》中也”。Ayanti 指的是这个“sādhuka”词。Ettheva daḷhīkammeti 意思是“在这里表示恭敬而作”。Āṇattiyanti 意思是“表示教令”。因为当说“善听!善作意!”时,“sādhuka”一词既表示了恭敬地听受和作意,同时也表达了那种教令。应当知道,这个词就像具有祈请的意思一样,也具有教令的意思。显示巴利原文
Kāraṇadesananti kāraṇañāpanaṃ desanaṃ. Taṃ atthanti taṃ sabbadhammānaṃ mūlakāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ, kāraṇadesanāsaṅkhātaṃ vā atthaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘taṃ kāraṇaṃ taṃ desana’’nti. Ekatthametanti etaṃ padadvayaṃ ekatthaṃ. Sādhu-saddo eva hi ka-kārena vaḍḍhetvā ‘‘sādhuka’’nti vutto. Teneva hi sādhusaddassa atthaṃ vadantena atthuddhāravasena sādhukasaddo udāhaṭo. Dhammarucīti puññakāmo. Paññāṇavāti paññavā. Addubbhoti adūsako, anupaghātakoti attho. Idhāpīti imasmiṃ mūlapariyāyasuttepi. Ayanti sādhukasaddo. Ettheva daḷhīkammeti sakkaccakiriyāyaṃ. Āṇattiyanti āṇāpane. ‘‘Suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti hi vutte sādhukasaddena savanamanasikārānaṃ sakkaccakiriyā viya tadāṇāpanampi vuttaṃ hoti. Āyācanatthatā viya cassa āṇāpanatthatā veditabbā.
于此,应如此理解其中的连接:防护耳根散乱,即是令其专注于听闻而遮止其他行为,故为“倾耳而听”之义。防护意根散乱,即是遮止其他的思虑。“purimanti”指前面的“suṇātha”一词。“etthāti”指“suṇātha, manasi karotha”这两个词,或指此范围。防护执取音节颠倒,能对治耳门的散乱,因为如实听闻者,不会对声音生起颠倒执取。防护执取义理颠倒,能对治意根的散乱,因为恭敬持法者,不会对义理生起颠倒执取。“dhammassavane niyojeti”指“suṇātha”(谛听)这一句,令人专注于听法。“dhāraṇūpaparikkhāsūti”通过包含“upaparikkhā”(审察),将衡量、简择等以及见的善通达都涵盖在内。显示巴利原文
Idānettha evaṃ yojanā veditabbāti sambandho. Sotindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ savane niyojanavasena kiriyantarapaṭisedhanabhāvato, sotaṃ odahathāti attho. Manindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ aññacintāpaṭisedhanato. Purimanti ‘‘suṇāthā’’ti padaṃ. Etthāti suṇātha, manasi karothā’’ti padadvaye, etasmiṃ vā adhikāre. Byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ sotadvāre vikkhepapaṭibāhakattā. Na hi yāthāvato suṇantassa saddato vipallāsaggāho hoti. Atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ manindriyavikkhepapaṭibāhakattā. Na hi sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ upadhārentassa atthato vipallāsaggāho hoti. Dhammassavane niyojeti suṇāthāti vidahanato. Dhāraṇūpaparikkhāsūti upaparikkhaggahaṇena tulanatīraṇādike diṭṭhiyā ca suppaṭivedhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“sabyañjanoti”:此处,“byañjana”(文句)是指能明确表达所表意义者,即自性语言。与文句俱者,即“sabyañjana”,意为文句具足。“araṇīyato upagandhabbato anuṭṭhātabbato attho”:指应当记持、应当亲近、应当实践的义,即四遍清净戒等。与义俱者,即“sāttha”,意为义理具足。在“dhammagambhīroti”等之中,“法”指圣典(tanti)。“开示”是指由心意决定的圣典而进行的宣说。“义”是圣典所表达的意义。“通达”是对圣典及其意义的如实了知。这些法、开示、义、通达,犹如大海,对于智慧下劣者,难以深入,无法立足,故为深奥。因此有言:“缘此法……善听!善作意!”于此应如此了知:由于通达本身甚难,对于法与义的开示之智亦甚难,故开示甚难。显示巴利原文
Sabyañjanoti ettha yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjayatīti byañjanaṃ, sabhāvanirutti. Saha byañjanenāti sabyañjano, byañjanasampannoti attho. Araṇīyato upagandhabbato anuṭṭhātabbato attho, catupārisuddhisīlādiko. Saha atthenāti sāttho, atthasampannoti attho. Dhammagambhīrotiādīsu dhammo nāma tanti. Desanā nāma tassā manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Attho nāma tantiyā attho. Paṭivedho nāma tantiyā tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Yasmā cete dhammadesanāatthapaṭivedhā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāḷhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā ayaṃ dhammo…pe… sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti. Ettha ca paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya dukkhogāhatā, paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā tabbisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā.
“开示”(desanā)即列出所教导的内容。为其作解说,即是“言说”(bhāsana),此处特指“我将从广说方面也来说它”。清晰而透彻的讲说,或称为“言说”。“如鹩哥之音声”:犹如鹩哥的鸣声,甜美、悦耳、令人喜爱。这里的“辩才”(paṭibhāna)是指音声。“宣说”:即被发出,或说是被说出。显示巴利原文
Desanaṃ nāma uddisanaṃ. Tassa niddisanaṃ bhāsananti idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘vitthāratopi naṃ bhāsissāmīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Paribyattaṃ kathanaṃ vā bhāsanaṃ. Sāḷikāyiva nigghosoti sāḷikāya ālāpo viya madhuro kaṇṇasukho pemanīyo. Paṭibhānanti saddo. Udīrayīti uccārīyati, vuccati vā.
「如是说已,生起踊跃者」:当听到‘善听!善作意!我将说’这样的话后,心想:‘看来导师不只是简略地宣说,还会详细地开演’,于是内心便生起了踊跃,变得欢喜雀跃。「Idhāti」指由这里所说之事所成的那位人物的生起之处,因此释为‘表示处所与指示的介词’。「loka」指器世间。‘此处如来于世间’指出生之处,在这里特指我们这个轮围世界。「Samaṇoti」指须陀洹。第二沙门指斯陀含。正如经中所说:‘诸比丘!何等为沙门?诸比丘!于此,比丘断除三结,即成为须陀洹……’(增支部4.241)‘诸比丘!何等为第二沙门?诸比丘!于此,比丘断除三结,薄贪嗔痴,即成为一来者……’(增支部4.241)。「Idheva tiṭṭhamānassāti」即指此安住于这因陀娑罗窟中的人。显示巴利原文
Evaṃvutte ussāhajātāti evaṃ ‘‘suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karotha bhāsissāmī’’ti vutte na kira satthā saṅkhepeneva desessati, vitthārenapi bhāsissatīti sañjātussāhā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā. Idhāti iminā vuccamānaadhikaraṇaṃ tassa puggalassa uppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘desāpadese nipāto’’ti. Lokanti okāsalokaṃ. Idha tathāgato loketi hi jātikhettaṃ, tatthāpi ayaṃ cakkavāḷo adhippeto. Samaṇoti sotāpanno. Dutiyo samaṇoti sakadāgāmī. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘katamo ca, bhikkhave, samaṇo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.241) ‘‘katamo ca, bhikkhave, dutiyo samaṇo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hotī’’ti ca (a. ni. 4.241). Idheva tiṭṭhamānassāti imissā eva indasālaguhāyaṃ tiṭṭhamānassa.
2 2.「Assutavāti」于此(《增支部注释》1.1.51)作如是释:「闻」(suta)指依耳门而领受者,或领受本身;拥有闻者即为「有闻者」(sutavā)。盖因‘vā’音节有存有等多种含义。例如,在‘此世间为有边、周圆’等(长部1.54,《无碍解道》1.140)文句中,‘vā’表存有。在‘有财者、有财富者、获得食物者’等语句中,表众多。在‘成为病者、为病所征服者’等语句中,表身体生病。在‘麻风病者、着麻风衣者’等语句中,表讥嫌;在‘有妒者、有悭者、诈伪者、谄曲者、诳惑者’等中,表常习于此。在‘执杖者、持伞者、持衣者’等(《清净道论》1.142)中,表随身携带。在‘或者以此而智者亦如此’等(《法句》63)中,表譬喻,即相似的性质。在‘贤哲说彼为牟尼’等(《经集》213)中,表合集。在‘这些是谁的?属于谁?’等(《律藏·巴拉基嘎》296)中,表疑惑。在‘这位在这些沙门婆罗门中,是一切愚者、一切痴者’等(《长部》1.181显示巴利原文
2.Assutavāti ettha (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.51) sutanti sotadvārānusārena upadhāritaṃ, upadhāraṇaṃ vā, sutaṃ assatthīti sutavā. Vā-saddassa hi attho atthitāmattādivasena anekavidho. Tathā hi ‘‘antavā ayaṃ loko parivaṭumo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.54; paṭi. ma. 1.140) atthitāmattaṃ attho. ‘‘Dhanavā bhogavā, lābhī annassā’’ti ca ādīsu bahubhāvo. ‘‘Rogavā hoti rogābhibhūto’’tiādīsu kāyābādho. ‘‘Kuṭṭhī kuṭṭhacīvarenā’’tiādīsu nindā, ‘‘issukī maccharī saṭho māyāvino keṭubhino’’tiādīsu abhiṇhayogo. ‘‘Daṇḍī chattī alambarī’’tiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.142) saṃsaggo. ‘‘Paṇḍito vāpi tena so’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 63) upamānaṃ, sadisabhāvoti attho. ‘‘Taṃ vāpi dhīrā muniṃ vedayantī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 213) samuccayo. ‘‘Ke vā ime kassa vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 296) saṃsayo. ‘‘Ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.181) vibhāvano. ‘‘Na vāyaṃ kumāro mattamaññāsī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.154) padapūraṇaṃ. ‘‘Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.170) vikappo. ‘‘Sakyaputtassa sirīmato (dī. ni. 3.277), sīlavato sīlasampattiyā kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.150; 3.316; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 285) ca ādīsu pasaṃsā. ‘‘Paññavā hoti udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.317, 355) atisayo. Idhāpi atisayo, pasaṃsā vā attho, tasmā yassa pasaṃsitaṃ, atisayena vā sutaṃ atthi, so sutavāti saṃkilesaviddhaṃsanasamatthaṃ pariyattidhammassavanaṃ, taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipatti ca ‘‘sutavā’’ti iminā saddena pakāsitā. Atha vā sotabbayuttaṃ sutvā kattabbanipphattivasena suṇīti sutavā, tappaṭikkhepena na sutavāti assutavā.
此「a」音节,于‘无因法’(《法集论》·二法本母)、‘无比丘的住处’等(《律藏·波逸提》1046,1047)中,所欲否定的是与之共存的状态。于‘非缘法’(《法集论》·二法本母)中,所欲否定的是与缘相关联的状态。因为缘所生法即与缘相关联;非缘所生,故于此显示出不相关联的性质。于‘无对碍法’(《法集论》·二法本母)中,否定的是事物自身的某种本性。因为对碍即是可被看见之性。或者说,能见者即为对碍,即眼识;在此否定的,即是那能执取自性。如同于‘无漏法’(《法集论》·二法本母)、‘无对碍法’、‘非所缘法’(《法集论》·二法本母)中,否定的是它的作用;于‘无色法’(《法集论》·二法本母)、‘非心所法’中,否定的是那种存在状态。在这些地方,则是以其他方式来显示的。‘非人’(amanussa)一词,否定的是仅仅是人,即无人性,而是其他相等的存在;此处暗示的是相似性。‘非沙门却自称沙门,非圣者’(《增支部》3.13),否定的是应被敬重的功德;此处可理解为呵责。‘Kacci显示巴利原文
Ayañhi a-kāro ‘‘ahetukā dhammā (dha. sa. 2.dukamātikā), abhikkhuko āvāso’’tiādīsu (pāci. 1046, 1047) taṃsahayoganivattiyaṃ icchito. ‘‘Apaccayā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 7.dukamātikā) taṃsambandhībhāvanivattiyaṃ. Paccayuppannañhi paccayasambandhīti appaccayuppannattā ataṃsambandhitā ettha jotitā. ‘‘Anidassanā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 9.dukamātikā) taṃsabhāvanivattiyaṃ. Nidassanañhi daṭṭhabbatā. Atha vā passatīti nidassanaṃ, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, taggahetabbabhāvanivattiyaṃ yathā ‘‘anāsavā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 15.dukamātikā), ‘‘appaṭighā dhammā (dha. sa. 10.dukamātikā), anārammaṇā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 55.dukamātikā) taṃkiccanivattiyaṃ, ‘‘arūpino dhammā (dha. sa. 11.dukamātikā) acetasikā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 57.dukamātikā) tabbhāvanivattiyaṃ. Tadaññathā hi ettha pakāsitā. ‘‘Amanusso’’ti tabbhāvamattanivattiyaṃ. Manussamattaṃ natthi, aññaṃ samānanti. Sadisatā hi ettha sūcitā. ‘‘Assamaṇo samaṇapaṭiñño, anariyo’’ti (a. ni. 3.13) ca taṃsambhāvanīyaguṇanivattiyaṃ. Garahā hi idha ñāyati. ‘‘Kacci bhoto anāmayaṃ, anudarā kaññā’’ti (jā. 2.20.129) tadanappabhāvanivattiyaṃ, ‘‘anuppannā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 17.tikamātikā) taṃsadisabhāvanivattiyaṃ. Atītānañhi uppannapubbattā uppādidhammānañca paccayekadesanipphattiyā āraddhuppādibhāvato kālavimuttassa ca vijjamānattā uppannānukūlatā pageva paccuppannānanti tabbidūratāva ettha viññāyati ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 11.tikamātikā) tadapariyosānanivattiyaṃ. Tanniṭṭhānañhi ettha pakāsitanti. Evamanekesaṃ atthānaṃ jotako. Idha pana ‘‘arūpino dhammā acetasikā dhammā’’tiādīsu viya tabbhāvanivattiyaṃ daṭṭhabbo, aññattheti attho. Etenassa sutādiñāṇavirahataṃ dasseti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo assutavā itī’’ti.
现在阐明其义:因为仅凭对蕴、界、处等的善巧,就能成就足以遮止妄执的多闻。正如经中所说:‘尊者!怎样才算是多闻者呢?比丘若善巧于蕴,善巧于界,善巧于处,善巧于缘起,便堪称多闻者。’因此,这样说:‘若人于蕴、界、处、谛、缘相、念处等……’其中,令法义熟练地呈现于语言,称为‘诵习’(uggaha);普遍地询问义理,称为‘遍问’(paripucchā);与善士一同,通过提醒、回避等方式作出决断,称为‘决择’(vinicchaya);道、果、涅槃,则称为‘证得’(adhigama)。显示巴利原文
Idāni tassa atthaṃ vivaranto yasmā khandhadhātvādikosallenapi maññanāpaṭisedhanasamatthaṃ bāhusaccaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, bahussuto hoti? Yato kho bhikkhu khandhakusalo hoti dhātu, āyatana, paṭiccasamuppādakusalo hoti, ettāvatā kho bhikkhu bahussuto hotī’’ti, tasmā ‘‘yassa hi khandhadhātuāyatanasaccapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānādīsūtiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho. Atthaparipucchanaṃ paripucchā. Kusalehi saha codanāpariharaṇavasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ vinicchayo. Maggaphalanibbānāni adhigamo.
凡夫(puthujjanā):由于他们众多的、各种各样的烦恼和有身见未被破坏,所以它们能产生凡夫,或者说凡夫是由它们所生,因此称为‘凡夫’。或者也可以把‘jana’(生)这个词直接理解为‘未被破坏’。在‘仰赖众多导师之面者’这个解释中,众多(puthu)的‘生’(janā)是指那些自称导师的人,而对于他们来说,这些人是依附者,所以称为‘凡夫’(puthujjanā),这是词义解释。在‘从一切趣中未出离者’这个解释里,所谓‘生’(janā),是指有情得以出生或应被出生的地方,即种种不同的趣,这些趣对于他们来说是众多的,所以称为‘凡夫’。在‘从此以后更生者’这个解释里,‘生’(janā)是指以他们为因而再次出生这件事,也就是诸行等,这些诸行对他们而言是众多地存在的,所以称为‘凡夫’。或者,‘jana’这个词,就应该看作有‘造作’等含义。暴流,就是指欲暴流等。热恼,是指贪火等带来的逼迫。那些本身就是,或者说一切的烦恼都叫做煎熬。在‘对五种欲乐功德染着众多者’这个解释中,会生起的东西叫做‘生’(jana),就是指像贪、贪求等这一类的烦恼,而对于他们来说,这些‘生’是很众多的,所以称为‘凡夫’。或者说,‘在众多中生起、染着的众生’,这样看,‘jana’一词应该被理解为具有‘贪’等意义。‘染着’(rattā):就像布被染料染上颜色一样,心被导致变异的欲贪所染污,成为极染着的状态。‘贪婪’(giddhā):以渴望为本性的贪欲而变得贪婪,陷入了强烈的贪求。‘粘着’(gadhitā):如同被捆绑住一样,因为难以解脱的特性而系缚在那里。‘昏昧’(mucchitā):如同因烦恼的力量而失去知觉,不做别的事情,陷入了昏迷和愚痴的状态。‘沈溺’(ajjhosannā):好像把那件事当成完全占为己有,吞下去消化了以后安住下来一样。‘附着’(laggā):就像东西钩在弯曲的杆子上一样附着,或者像陷入大泥沼直到鼻子那么深的人一样,由于无法拔出的性质而沉没其中;又有‘系着’(lagitā)的意思:就像一只猴子被猴胶粘住后拼命挣扎,由于攀缘五根而被系着一样。‘障碍’(palibuddhā):就是说被束缚了,或者被逼恼了。‘覆盖’(āvuṭā):就是被遮盖起来了;‘遮蔽’(nivutā):就是被阻挡住了。‘包裹’(ovutā):就是被缠绕起来了,或者说被完全地裹住了。‘盖覆’(pihitā):就是被关闭起来了;‘隐蔽’(paṭicchannā):就是被隐藏起来了。‘覆藏’(paṭikujjitā):就是变成了面朝下的、被盖住的状态。或者,通过‘众多的、超越计算路径的’等文字,来显示这众多的‘生’就是凡夫。显示巴利原文
Bahūnaṃ (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 1007) nānappakārānaṃ kilesasakkāyadiṭṭhīnaṃ avihatattā tā janenti, tāhi vā janitāti puthujjanā. Avighātameva vā jana-saddo vadati. Puthu satthārānaṃ mukhamullokikāti ettha puthu janā satthupaṭiññā etesanti puthujjanāti vacanattho. Puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti ettha janetabbā, jāyanti vā ettha sattāti janā, nānāgatiyo, tā puthū etesanti puthujjanā. Ito pare jāyanti etehīti janā, abhisaṅkhārādayo, te etesaṃ puthū vijjantīti puthujjanā. Abhisaṅkharaṇādiattho eva vā jana-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Oghā kāmoghādayo. Rāgaggiādayo santāpā. Te eva, sabbepi vā kilesā pariḷāhā. Puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattāti ettha jāyatīti jano, rāgo gedhoti evamādiko, puthu jano etesanti puthujjanā. Puthūsu vā janā jātā rattāti evaṃ rāgādiattho eva vā janasaddo daṭṭhabbo. Rattāti vatthaṃ viya raṅgajātena cittassa vipariṇāmakarena chandarāgena rattā sārattā. Giddhāti abhikaṅkhanasabhāvena abhijjhānena giddhā gedhaṃ āpannā. Gadhitāti ganthitā viya dummocanīyabhāvena tattha paṭibaddhā. Mucchitāti kilesavasena visaññībhūtā viya anaññakiccā mucchaṃ mohamāpannā. Ajjhosannāti anaññasādhāraṇe viya katvā gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā ṭhitā. Laggāti vaṅkadaṇḍake viya āsattā mahāpalipe vā yāva nāsikaggā palipannapuriso viya uddharituṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvena nimuggā , lagitāti makkaṭālepe ālaggabhāvena paccuḍḍito viya makkaṭo pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena ālaggitā. Palibuddhāti baddhā, upaddutā vā. Āvuṭāti āvunitā, nivutāti nivāritā. Ovutāti paliguṇṭhitā, pariyonaddhā vā. Pihitāti pidahitā, paṭicchannāti paṭicchāditā. Paṭikujjitāti heṭṭhāmukhajātā. Puthūnaṃ vā gaṇanapathamatītānantiādinā puthu jano puthujjanoti dasseti.
‘无闻’(assutavā)这一表述,指明了被无明所覆盖的状态,故说‘被称为盲目凡夫’。因为远离:指由于以圣道断除,故远离烦恼。在‘非趣’中,即非增长,以非义利为义;或者,‘非趣’即不善巧的途径。这是因为它不引导、不回转。‘趣’是指增长、义利,或善巧的途径。所谓‘应被亲近’:由于应当被侍奉和亲近的缘故。对于前面几类义理的分别,应通过词源学的理路来理解词句的成立方式。而对于最后一种,则可依声明学来理解。虽然‘圣’一词,在‘诸圣者,他们有清净身业’等语境中,也能用于那些具有清净心志与加行的凡夫。然而此处,正因证得圣道,并以具足一切出世间性而成就‘圣’的本质,才是这里所侧重表达的意义,为显示此义,论中才说‘诸佛’等。其中,‘独觉佛、如来声闻是善士’这句话,是为了不混淆地说明此处‘圣者’、‘善士’这些词的确切含义。又因为从究竟、非抽象的意义而言,圣者性与善士性乃是他们不共的特质,因此才说‘或者一切’等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Assutavā’’ti etena avijjandhatā vuttāti āha ‘‘andhaputhujjano vutto hotī’’ti. Ārakattā (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.3.1) kilesehi maggena samucchinnattā. Anayeti avaḍḍhiyaṃ, anattheti attho. Anaye vā anupāye. Nairiyanato avattanato. Ayeti vaḍḍhiyaṃ, atthe, upāye vā. Araṇīyatoti payirupāsitabbato. Niruttinayena padasiddhi veditabbā purimesu atthavikappesu. Pacchime pana saddasatthavasenapi. Yadipi ariya-saddo ‘‘ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35) visuddhāsayapayogesu puthujjanesupi vattati. Idha pana ariyamaggādhigamena sabbalokuttarabhāvena ca ariyabhāvo adhippetoti dassento āha ‘‘buddhā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘paccekabuddhā tathāgatasāvakā ca sappurisā’’ti idaṃ ariyā sappurisāti idha vuttapadānaṃ atthaṃ asaṅkarato dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana nippariyāyato ariyasappurisabhāvā abhinnasabhāvā. Tasmā ‘‘sabbeva vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
至此,已说明了佛弟子。对佛弟子而言,善知识是决然必须寻求的,因为若没有从他闻得的法音,第一圣道便不会生起。尤其殊胜的是,对他而言,世尊本人即是善知识。经中即说:“阿难,的确,正是以我为善知识,那些有生法的众生,才得以从生中解脱出来。”等等。而且,他由于获得了不坏净信,故被称为具有坚固忠诚者。对此,经中也说:“我为弟子们所制定的学处,我的弟子们即使为了活命也不会违犯。”在“以知恩等,独觉佛、诸佛”这段文中,“知恩者”是指了知他人所施恩德的人。“知所作”是指令此已施之恩德为人所知、得以显明。因为即便是在百劫、千劫之久的无量时间中所作的饶益,独觉佛们也能了知,并通过令众生生起信向、接受供养等方式将其显现;同样,对于饱受轮回之苦的有情,他们也殷重地奉行自己所应做、所能做之事。然而,正自觉者不仅能了知在不可计数的千万劫中一切所作饶益,以及众生证得道果的亲依止缘,还能令其显了,并且,犹如狮子一般,在一切情况下都殷重地宣说佛法,履行佛陀应尽的义务。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatāhi buddhasāvako vutto. Tassa hi ekantena kalyāṇamitto icchitabbo paratoghosamantarena paṭhamamaggassa anuppajjanato. Visesato cassa bhagavāva kalyāṇamitto adhippeto. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘mamañhi, ānanda, kalyāṇamittaṃ āgamma jātidhammā sattā jātiyā parimuccantī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.2). So eva ca aveccapasādādhigamena daḷhabhatti nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (udā. 45). Kataññutādīhi paccekabuddhā buddhāti ettha kataṃ jānātīti kataññū. Kataṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karotīti katavedī. Anekesupi hi kappasatasahassesu kataṃ upakāraṃ jānanti paccekabuddhā pākaṭañca karonti satijananaāmisapaṭiggahaṇādinā , tathā saṃsāradukkhadukkhitassa sakkaccaṃ karonti kiccaṃ, yaṃ attanā kātuṃ sakkā. Sammāsambuddho pana kappānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyasahassesupi kataṃ upakāraṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayañca jānāti, pākaṭañca karoti, sīho viya ca evaṃ sabbattha sakkaccameva dhammadesanaṃ karonto buddhakiccaṃ karoti. Yāya paṭipattiyā diṭṭhā nāma honti, tassā appaṭipajjanabhāvo, tattha ca ādarābhāvo ariyānaṃ adassanasīlatā ca, na ca dassane sādhukāritā ca veditabbā. Cakkhunā adassāvīti etta cakkhu nāma na maṃsacakkhu eva, atha kho dibbacakkhupīti āha ‘‘dibbacakkhunā vā’’ti. Ariyabhāvoti yehi yogato ‘‘ariyā’’ti vuccanti. Te maggaphaladhammā daṭṭhabbā.
“在那里”:指如实知见本身即具足见的本质这一点。“所依”:指能令人明了所诠之义的根据或原因。“即使是通过这样的譬喻引用于自身而说”:这是说,即使是通过其他譬喻,将其转为对自身的教诫而加以宣说。“法”:指出世间法,或四圣谛法。“圣者所作法”:指无常随观等正在被观照的法,亦即无常等法,或说为四圣谛。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti ñāṇadassanasseva dassanabhāve. Vatthūti adhippetatthañāpanakāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ vuttepīti evaṃ aññāpadesena attūpanāyikaṃ katvā vuttepi. Dhammanti lokuttaradhammaṃ, catusaccadhammaṃ vā. Ariyakaradhammā aniccānupassanādayo vipassiyamānā aniccādayo, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni.
“未调伏者”:即未受调伏,未依增上戒学等加以训练的人。为了说明是由于缺乏哪些律仪,此人才被称为未调伏者,所以先提出“律仪有两种”等。其中,“戒律仪”应知即是巴帝摩卡律仪,在体性上,是指避免身与语的违犯。“念律仪”即守护诸根,也就是正确现起的正念。“智律仪”:由于在“我说,对流有防护”之后,紧接着说“以慧,这些被关闭”,因此应知,智律仪是指能防护、关闭耳等诸“流”的贪、邪见、恶行、无明以及其余烦恼的断除之智。“忍律仪”指安忍,也就是正确现起的安忍蕴,或无瞋心。若说忍律仪是“慧”,则与注疏的解释相违。“精进律仪”是指以排除欲贪寻等的方式而转起的精进本身。依某一功德分而断除对应的过失分,这称为“彼分断”。依镇伏而断除,则称为“镇伏断”。对其余词句的意义,也应以此理类推。显示巴利原文
Avinītoti na vinīto, adhisīlasikkhādivasena na sikkhito. Yesaṃ saṃvaravinayādīnaṃ abhāvena ayaṃ avinītoti vuccati, te tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘duvidho vinayo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sīlasaṃvaroti pātimokkhasaṃvaro veditabbo, so ca atthato kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. Satisaṃvaroti indriyarakkhā, sā ca tathāpavattā sati eva. Ñāṇasaṃvaroti ‘‘sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmī’’ti (su. ni. 1040) vatvā ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vacanato sotasaṅkhātānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritaavijjāavasiṭṭhakilesānaṃ saṃvaro pidahanaṃ samucchedañāṇanti veditabbaṃ. Khantisaṃvaroti adhivāsanā, sā ca tathāpavattā khandhā, adoso vā. Paññāti eke, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati. Vīriyasaṃvaro kāmavitakkādīnaṃ vinodanavasena pavattaṃ vīriyameva. Tena tena guṇaṅgena tassa tassa aguṇaṅgassa pahānaṃ tadaṅgapahānaṃ. Vikkhambhanena pahānaṃ vikkhambhanapahānaṃ. Sesapadatthayepi eseva nayo.
以“以此巴帝摩卡律仪”等开头的内容,是对戒律仪等的详细解说。其中,“具足”一词中的“iti”表示“等”的意思。由此,显示了《分别论》中所说“同行、同趣”等关于律仪的分别。对其余的律仪,也同理可知。至于此处尚需说明的内容,在紧随其后的经文中将会明了。显示巴利原文
Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarenātiādi sīlasaṃvarādīnaṃ vivaraṇaṃ. Tattha samupetoti ettha iti-saddo ādisattho. Tena ‘‘sahagato samupagato’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 511) āgataṃ saṃvaravibhaṅgaṃ dasseti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ anantarasutte āvi bhavissati.
“身恶行等”:指名为恶戒的身恶行、语恶行等,名为失念的放逸,或贪等,以及不忍、无智、懈怠。
“防护义”:即关闭、遮蔽。
“调伏义”:即从身、语、意的不善转起中调伏、移除;或从身恶行等中调伏;或截断身等邪曲的转起而导向正直。
应知:对于依众缘和合而应生的身恶行等,以种种方便令其不生,此即是防护与调伏。显示巴利原文
Kāyaduccaritādīnanti dussīlyasaṅkhātānaṃ kāyavacīduccaritādīnaṃ muṭṭhassaccasaṅkhātassa pamādassa abhijjhādīnaṃ vā akkhantiaññāṇakosajjānañca. Saṃvaraṇatoti pidahanato thakanato. Vinayanatoti kāyavācācittānaṃ virūpappavattiyā vinayanato apanayanato, kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ vā vinayanato, kāyādīnaṃ vā jimhappavattiṃ vicchinditvā ujukaṃ nayanatoti attho. Paccayasamavāye uppajjanārahānaṃ kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ tathā tathā anuppādanameva saṃvaraṇaṃ vinayanañca veditabbaṃ.
这是与“所断”的关联。为何说“在名色分别等观智中”?难道名色分别、把握缘、度疑不是观智吗?因为它们不以遍察的方式转起。确实如此,但因为它们是观智的依止处,故如此说。
“名色确定”:即生起“此唯名色,其中无我、无我所”之智。
“有身见”:当由五蕴所成的身存在时,或念住于彼身时,于彼身所生的见,也就是依“观色是我”等而转起的邪见。
“把握缘”:即了知彼色与非色乃从业、无明等缘而生的智。
“无因见”:即持“无因无缘,众生被污染”之类开端的见。
“不平等因见”:即持“世间由自在天、人、生主、本性、微尘、时间等而转起、还灭”的见。
“度疑”:即依“如同现在,名色从业等缘而生,过去、未来亦复如是”之理,于三时中去除疑的智。
“疑惑”:指以“我于过去存在否?”等开端的疑之转起。
“遍察”:即通过“任何色,无论过去、未来、现在……”等方式转起的智。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pahānanti sambandho. ‘‘Nāmarūpaparicchedādīsu vipassanāñāṇesū’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu nāmarūpaparicchedapaccayapariggahakaṅkhāvitaraṇāni na vipassanāñāṇāni sammasanākārena appavattanato? Saccametaṃ. Vipassanāñāṇassa pana adhiṭṭhānabhāvato evaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nāmarūpamattamidaṃ, natthi ettha attā vā attaniyaṃ vā’’ti evaṃ pavattañāṇaṃ nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ. Sati vijjamāne khandhapañcakasaṅkhāte kāye, sayaṃ vā satī tasmiṃ kāye diṭṭhīti sakkāyadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.81; 4.345) evaṃ pavattā micchādiṭṭhi. Tasseva rūpārūpassa kammāvijjādipaccayapariggaṇhanañāṇaṃ paccayapariggaho. ‘‘Natthi hetu natthi paccayo sattānaṃ saṃkilesāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168) ādinayappavattā ahetukadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Issarapurisapajāpatipakatiaṇukālādīhi loko pavattati nivattati cā’’ti pavattā visamahetudiṭṭhi. Tassevāti paccayapariggahasseva. Kaṅkhāvitaraṇenāti yathā etarahi nāmarūpassa kammādipaccayato uppatti, evaṃ atītānāgatesupīti tīsupi kālesu vicikicchāpanayanañāṇena. Kathaṃkathībhāvassāti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) ādinayappavattāya saṃsayappavattiyā. Kalāpasammasanenāti ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.361; 2.113; 3.86, 89) khandhapañcakaṃ ekādasasu okāsesu pakkhipitvā sammasanavasena pavattena nayavipassanāñāṇena . Ahaṃ mamāti gāhassāti attattaniyagahaṇassa. Maggāmaggavavatthānenāti maggāmaggañāṇavisuddhiyā. Amagge maggasaññāyāti obhāsādike amagge ‘‘maggo’’ti uppannasaññāya.
「以见生而断断见」:由于如实见到诸行的生起,他认识到“诸行正是由相应的因而生起,并非断绝”,因此这样说。
「以见灭而断常见」:又,当见到诸行的坏灭时,他观察到:“如果这些行无间断地转起,但在不断生起之后,它们便无结生地灭去”,如此见到的人,又怎会执取常见?因此这样说。
「见怖畏」:即怖畏现起智。
「有怖畏处」:指五取蕴,因为它是一切怖畏的来源,又是与完全苦寂灭的无上安稳相对立者。
「无怖畏想」:指生起“无怖畏、安稳”的想法。
「味想」:指在五取蕴中依味而转起的想,这也称为“阿赖耶著”。
「悦意想」:指在那里依悦意而转起的想,这也称为“喜”。
「执取」:指不欲出离。
「平庸」:指对诸行无厌离,也就是住著的意思。
「违逆」:在法住、缘起中,“违逆”是执著断灭或恒常,或者是覆蔽缘相的无明;在涅槃中,“违逆”是对诸行的喜爱,或者是覆蔽涅槃的无明。
「执取行相」:指由于某种烦恼尚未断除,观智因此不能舍弃行相,那个烦恼即称为“执取行相”,亦名“结著”。或者,超越执取行相本身就是断。显示巴利原文
Yasmā sammadeva saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ passanto ‘‘evameva saṅkhārā anurūpakāraṇato uppajjanti, na pana ucchijjantī’’ti gaṇhāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā’’ti. Yasmā pana saṅkhārānaṃ vayaṃ passanto ‘‘yadipime saṅkhārā avicchinnā vattanti, uppannuppannā pana appaṭisandhikā nirujjhante vā’’ti passati, tassevaṃ passato kuto sassataggāho, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā’’ti. Bhayadassanenāti bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇena. Sabhayeti sabbabhayānaṃ ākarabhāvato sakaladukkhavūpasamasaṅkhātassa paramassāsassa paṭipakkhabhāvato ca sabhaye khandhapañcake. Abhayasaññāyāti ‘‘abhayaṃ khema’’nti uppannasaññāya. Assādasaññā nāma pañcupādānakkhandhesu assādavasena pavattasaññā, yā ‘‘ālayābhiniveso’’tipi vuccati. Abhiratisaññā tattheva abhirativasena pavattasaññā, yā ‘‘nandī’’tipi vuccati. Amuccitukamyatā ādānaṃ. Anupekkhā saṅkhārehi anibbindanaṃ, sālayatāti attho. Dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ paṭiccasamuppāde paṭilomabhāvo sassatucchedaggāho, paccayākārapaṭicchādakamoho vā, nibbāne paṭilomabhāvo saṅkhāresu rati, nibbānapaṭicchādakamoho vā. Saṅkhāranimittaggāhoti yādisassa kilesassa appahīnattā vipassanā saṅkhāranimittaṃ na muñcati, so kileso, yo ‘‘saṃyogābhiniveso’’tipi vuccati. Saṅkhāranimittaggahaṇassa atikkamanameva vā pahānaṃ.
「转起」:即转起的状态,也就是缠缚的意思。
「盖等法」:此处的“等”字,包含了属于盖的烦恼,以及与盖俱起的寻、伺等。显示巴利原文
Pavatti eva pavattibhāvo, pariyuṭṭhānanti attho. Nīvaraṇādidhammānanti ettha ādi-saddena nīvaraṇapakkhiyā kilesā vitakkavicārādayo ca gayhanti.
“那所断”:由于四圣道已修习,以完全止息的缘故而成为那所断。以何而断?即由圣道本身——此义已明,因为已说到它们修习而止息。
「集谛所属者」:在此,四道也是四圣谛的现观,因此它们所要断的各别集谛便与它们一同被断;由于与集同类,且在谛的分别中,一切烦恼皆属集谛,故将邪见等称为“集谛所属者”。
「止息性」:即已寂静。
「出离有为」:即没有有为之自性。
「已舍一切有为」:即远离一切有为,也就是无行的意思。
「舍离调伏」:前一义是“舍即是调伏”,后一义是“被舍断之物称为舍,它的调伏”,应如此连结。显示巴利原文
Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā accantaṃ appavattibhāvena yaṃ pahānanti sambandho. Kena pahānanti? Ariyamaggehevāti viññāyamānoyamattho tesaṃ bhāvitattā appavattivacanato. Samudayapakkhikassāti ettha cattāropi maggā catusaccābhisamayāti katvā tehi pahātabbena tena tena samudayena saha pahātabbattā samudayasabhāgattā, saccavibhaṅge ca sabbakilesānaṃ samudayabhāvassa vuttattā ‘‘samudayapakkhikā’’ti diṭṭhiādayo vuccanti. Paṭippassaddhattaṃ vupasantatā. Saṅkhatanissaṭatā saṅkhārasabhāvābhāvo. Pahīnasabbasaṅkhatanti virahitasabbasaṅkhataṃ, visaṅkhāranti attho. Pahānañca taṃ vinayo cāti pahānavinayo purimena atthena, dutiyena pana pahīyatīti pahānaṃ, tassa vinayoti yojetabbaṃ.
「已坏失律仪」:即律仪已失坏,也就是律仪缺失之意。由此也涵盖了未受持律仪者。因为律仪须由受持始得成就,若无受持,则无律仪。世间常有这样的说法:「我等的大财富,就这样失坏了,因为没有去造作。」「圣者」:ariyo即圣者,此为反身语。「这就是」:即「这就是那个」,两者并无差别。「具有该自性」:即具有该自性,善士具有圣者的自性,圣者具有善士的自性。显示巴利原文
Bhinnasaṃvarattāti naṭṭhasaṃvarattā, saṃvarābhāvatoti attho. Tena asamādinnasaṃvaropi saṅgahito hoti. Samādānena hi sampādetabbo saṃvaro tadabhāve na hotīti. Evañhi loke vattāro honti ‘‘mahā vata no bhogo, so naṭṭho tathā akatattā’’ti. Ariyeti ariyo. Paccattavacanañhetaṃ. Eseseti eso so eva, atthato anaññoti attho. Tajjāteti atthato taṃsabhāvo, sappuriso ariyasabhāvo, ariyo ca sappurisasabhāvoti attho.
「此义」:指「一切法根本说示」这一意义。为什么此处以人为依止而开示呢?此处应说的,将在「因为凡夫未遍知根基」等句中自行阐明。「法依止」:指以法为依止的教说,即依于自性法而展开的教说。第一部经完全依法展开,第三部经则从人开始、依人结束,其余诸经皆为法与人的混合。为何世尊以如此差别的方式说法呢?这是基于被教化者的意乐与说法自在。对于借助以法为依止的教导而容易通达义理的被教化者,他便那样为之说法。此理适用于一切处。又因世尊善巧通达法界,从而获得说法自在,此法界已被他善巧通达;因此,获得说法自在的法主、法王,随其所欲而说法。如是,当知由被教化者的意乐与说法自在,世尊方以这些差别方式说法。显示巴利原文
Taṃ atthanti ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti evaṃ vuttamatthaṃ. Kasmā panettha puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katāti? Yadettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘yasmā puthujjano apariññātavatthuko’’tiādinā (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2) sayameva vakkhati. Dhammo adhiṭṭhānaṃ etissāti dhammādhiṭṭhānā, sabhāvadhamme nissāya pavattitadesanā. Dhammavaseneva pavattā paṭhamā, puggalavasena uṭṭhahitvā puggalavaseneva gatā tatiyā, itarā dhammapuggalānaṃ vomissakavasena. Kasmā pana bhagavā evaṃ vibhāgena dhammaṃ desetīti? Veneyyajjhāsayena desanāvilāsena ca. Ye hi veneyyā dhammādhiṭṭhānāya dhammadesanāya sukhena atthaṃ paṭivijjhanti, tesaṃ tathā dhammaṃ deseti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yassā ca dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā desanāvilāsappatto hoti, sāyaṃ suppaṭividdhā, tasmā desanāvilāsappatto dhammissaro dhammarājā yathā yathā icchati, tathā tathā dhammaṃ desetīti evaṃ iminā veneyyajjhāsayena desanāvilāsena ca evaṃ vibhāgena dhammaṃ desetīti veditabbo.
「六界者」:即依地界、水界、火界、风界、空界、识界此六界,而称为六界者。「十八意行」:即依「眼见色后,窜游于能生喜之色」等方式所说的六喜近行、六忧近行、六舍近行,合为十八意行。「四依止」:依谛依止等而有四依止。「盲者」:指以慧眼不见现法利益与后世利益之人。「一眼者」:指仅见现法利益之人。「双眼者」:指能见两种利益之人,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Chadhāturoti pathavidhātu āpo-tejo-vāyo-ākāsadhātu viññāṇadhātūti imesaṃ channaṃ dhātūnaṃ vasena chadhāturo. ‘‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā somanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicaratī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.324) vuttānaṃ channaṃ somanassūpavicārānaṃ, channaṃ domanassaupekkhūpavicārānañca vasena aṭṭhārasamanopavicāro. Saccādhiṭṭhānādivasena caturādhiṭṭhāno. Paññācakkhunā diṭṭhadhammikassa samparāyikassa ca atthassa adassanato andho, diṭṭhadhammikasseva dassanato ekacakkhu, dvinnampi dassanato dvicakkhu, veditabbo.
“Svāyaṃ niddisīti”是连接词,意为“他如此说明”。其中的“Svāyaṃ”指“那位”,即如前所说善于分别教法的世尊。“Apariññātavatthuko”指“未遍知根基者”,即由三种遍知尚未了知的蕴,因为蕴正是遍知的根基。“Apariññāmūlikā”意为“以未遍知为根源”,即因遍知缺失而存在的状态。因为无明等烦恼与遍知对立,而这些烦恼正是一切妄想执著的根源。在“不见圣者”这一句中,“iti”表示“等”,以此涵盖了“对圣法不熟练”等内容。这些作为凡夫特征的表述出现在其余经文中,因为这里正是在说明凡夫。所以说“如此说明了凡夫”。显示巴利原文
Svāyaṃ niddisīti sambandho. Svāyanti ca so ayaṃ, yathāvuttadesanāvibhāgakusalo bhagavāti attho. Apariññātavatthukoti tīhi pariññāhi apariññātakkhandho. Khandhā hi pariññātavatthu. Apariññāmūlikāti parijānanābhāvanimittā tasmiṃ sati bhāvato. Pariññānañhi avijjādayo kilesā paṭipakkhā tammūlikā ca sabbamaññanāti. Ariyānaṃ adassāvīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena ‘‘ariyadhammassa akovido’’tiādikaṃ puthujanassa visesanabhāvena pavattaṃ pāḷisesaṃ gaṇhāti puthujjananiddesabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ puthujjanaṃ niddisī’’ti.
地之解说显示巴利原文
Pathavīvāravaṇṇanā
“Tassāti”中的“他的”指凡夫。“依处”由于作为所缘而成为心识活动之处,即转起的立足处,故经文说“在地等依处中”。对于自性法,虽也能经由所缘等途径成为妄想之因,但尤其因其依妄想而生,故经文说“一切由自性法所产生的妄想”。此处地界相较于其他界,虽有附带物有无之别,分量彼此平等,而作用力则有超越与不及的差别。“Sambhārā”指附带物,即眷属。在各个色聚中,作为特相的地与其余诸法,以缘和眷属的身份相应转起。因此论中说:“它与颜色等附属物一起被称为地,也就是附带物的地”。“Pathavitoti”:这里“普地”以“广博”的意义来说,“普地”就是地。地虽在有限范围内活动,但因作为一切色聚生起的依持而转起,故可称广大、扩展、宽阔;水等则不能如此渗透而转起。至于附带物的地的广大性,则更无可言说。在所缘地中,应以“增长”、“遍满”之义来理解“广大”;其余情况只是沿用惯用语。所缘地,显示巴利原文
Tassāti puthujjanassa. Vasati ettha ārammaṇakaraṇavasenāti ārammaṇampi vatthūti vuccati pavattiṭṭhānabhāvatoti āha ‘‘pathavīādīsu vatthūsū’’ti. Sakkāyadhammānampi ārammaṇādinā satipi maññanāhetubhāve maññanāhetukatteneva tesaṃ nibbattitoti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasakkāyadhammajanitaṃ maññana’’nti. Ettha ca pathavīdhātu sesadhātūnaṃ sasambhārāsambhārabhāvā satipi pamāṇato samabhāve sāmatthiyato adhikānadhikabhāvena veditabbā. Sambhārantīti sambhārā, parivārā. Taṃtaṃkalāpehi lakkhaṇapathaviyā sesadhammā yathārahaṃ paccayabhāvena parivārabhāvena ca pavattanti. Tenāha ‘‘sā hi vaṇṇādīhi sambhārehi saddhiṃ pathavīti sasambhārapathavī’’ti. Pathavitoti ettha puthulaṭṭhena puthuvī, puthuvī eva pathavī. Sā hi satipi paricchinnavuttiyaṃ sabbesaṃ sakalāpabhāvānaṃ ādhārabhāvena pavattamānā puthulā patthaṭā vitthiṇṇāti vattabbataṃ arahati, na pana taṃ anupavisitvā pavattamānā āpādayo. Sasambhārapathaviyā pana puthulabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Ārammaṇapathaviyaṃ vaḍḍhanapharaṇaṭṭhehi puthulaṭṭho, itarasmiṃ ruḷhiyāva daṭṭhabbo. Ārammaṇapathavīti jhānassa ārammaṇabhūtaṃ pathavīsaṅkhātaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nimittapathavītipi vuccatī’’ti. Āgamanavasenāti pathavīkasiṇabhāvanāgamanavasena. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘āpo ca devā pathavī, tejo vāyo tadāgamu’’nti (dī. ni. 2.340).
“Sabbāpīti”:此“一切”包括四种地。仅凭传闻等方式获得的想,也确实成为其生起的所依。例如,通过“坚硬”、“粗糙”等表述,作为特相的地也会被提及。然而,有些人说:“若观察特相,则无妄想;所谓‘认知’的想,是执取见的基础,是一种整体执取,这在特相上无法成立,因此作为特相的地不应被采纳。”这种说法并不合理,因为此处意不在通达特相。故论中说“随顺世间名言”。并非所有想都是整体执取,也不是只有执取见才为其基础。因此,作为特相的地,通过身门等途径,或以其他方式呈现时,妄想仍会转起。正因如此,论中说“仅凭传闻等方式获得”。为说明“Pathavitoti”是离格,表示“从地”,而说“认知为地”。因为无论认知四种地中的哪一种为“地”,他都仅从地的成分来认知,而非从水等成分来认知,所以说“以地的成分而认知”。“随顺世间名言”是指不摒弃世间的共许名称。以此表明,即使是作为特相的地,其活动也是通过世间名称之门而发生。显示巴利原文
Sabbāpīti catubbidhā pathavīpi. Anussavādimattaladdhā maññanā vatthu hotiyeva. Tathā hi ‘‘kakkhaḷaṃ kharigata’’ntiādinā (vibha. 173) lakkhaṇapathavīpi uddharīyati. Yaṃ paneke vadanti ‘‘lakkhaṇe diṭṭhe maññanā natthi, sañjānātīti vuttasaññā ca diṭṭhiggāhassa mūlabhūtā piṇḍaggāhitā, sā lakkhaṇe nakkhamati, tasmā lakkhaṇapathavī na gahetabbā’’ti, tadayuttaṃ lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa idha anadhippetattā. Tenāha ‘‘lokavohāraṃ gahetvā’’ti. Na ca sabbasaññā piṇḍaggāhikā , nāpi diṭṭhiggāhasseva mūlabhūtā, tasmā lakkhaṇapathaviyāpi kāyadvārānusārena aññathā ca upaṭṭhitāya maññanā pavattateva. Teneva ca ‘‘anussavādimattaladdhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pathavitoti paccate nissakkavacananti dassento ‘‘pathavīti sañjānātī’’ti āha. Yasmā catubbidhampi pathaviṃ ‘‘pathavī’ti sañjānanto tena tena nayena pathavīkoṭṭhāseneva sañjānātīti vuccati, na āpādikoṭṭhāsena, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pathavibhāgena sañjānātī’’ti. Lokavohāraṃ gahetvāti lokasamaññaṃ avijahitvā. Etena lakkhaṇapathaviyampi vohāramukhenevassā pavattīti dasseti.
如果仅仅依于世间的名言而活动,那有什么过失呢?圣者们不也依于世间的名言而活动吗?例如他们会说:“尊者,这大地……”等等。但这里并非指仅仅停留在名称上,而是指出以世间名言为门径,却产生了错误的执著。为了显示这一点,所以说“以想颠倒而认知”。意思是:由不如理作意所引生的、以“净”等种种方式转起的颠倒想而认知。由此,应当了知这里展现了微细的爱、慢、见的妄想。若如此,为何这里只提到了“想”呢?因为“想”较为显著。就好比钻木取火时,当烟冒出来的时候,虽然那时火也确实存在——因为二者不相离,但由于烟更显著,所以我们说“烟产生了”,而不说“火产生了”;这个例子应当这样来理解。虽然在那里也存在着妄想的作用,但并不突出,因为它不明显;唯有想的作用是突出的。而且这个想的作用是随顺妄想、与妄想相伴的。因此论中说“以想颠倒而认知”。这样一来,它与“不舍离地的成分而认知”的意思就衔接起来了。也就是说,对于前面所说的那类地,如果有人完全不放弃、不离开地的成分,就像一个人对一头团产生黄金想那样,将显示巴利原文
Yadi lokavohārena tattha pavatti, ko ettha doso, nanu ariyāpi ‘‘ayañhi bhante mahāpathavī’’tiādinā lokavohārena pavattantīti? Na ettha vohāramatte avaṭṭhānaṃ adhippetaṃ, atha kho vohāramukhena micchābhinivesoti dassento ‘‘saññāvipallāsena sañjānātī’’ti āha. Tassattho – ayonisomanasikārasambhūtāya ‘‘subha’’ntiādinayappavattāya viparītasaññāya sañjānātīti. Etena dubbalā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhimaññanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā saññā gahitāti? Pākaṭabhāvato. Yathā nāma aggimhi mathiyamāne yadā dhūmo upalabbhati, kiñcāpi tadā vijjateva pāvako avinābhāvato, pākaṭabhāvato pana dhūmo jātoti vuccati, na aggi jātoti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yadipi tattha maññanākiccaṃ atthi, na pana vibhūtaṃ apākaṭabhāvato saññākiccameva vibhūtaṃ, taṃ pana maññanānukūlaṃ maññanāsahitaṃ cāti āha ‘‘saññāvipallāsena sañjānātī’’ti. Evaṃ pathavībhāgaṃ amuñcantoyeva vā sañjānātīti sambandho. Yo hi vuttappabhedāya pathaviyā pathavibhāgaṃ amuñcantoyeva avijahantoyeva sīsapiṇḍe suvaṇṇasaññī viya anattādisabhāvaṃyeva taṃ attādivasena sañjānāti, tassa vasena vuttaṃ ‘‘pathavī’’tiādi. Na vattabbaṃ puthujjanaggāhassa yuttimaggananivāraṇatoti dassento āha ‘‘ummattako viya…pe… gaṇhātī’’ti . Ariyānaṃ adassāvitādibhedanti ariyānaṃ adassāvitādivisesaṃ vadantena bhagavatāva ettha yathāvuttasañjānane kāraṇaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
“如此”,指的是以“他以地的构成部分来认知”等方式所说的途径。“认知之后”,这是对先前动作完成的表述,所以解释说:“之后……他执取”。“戏论的部分”,就是戏论的构成元素。所谓“戏论”,因为众生借此在轮回中长久流转,故称戏论;所谓“认为”,因为众生借此思量“这是我的”等,故称“认为”。这两种解说方式,指的都是贪等烦恼本身,所以论师说:“凭借此处的贪、慢、见等戏论,而被赋予了‘认为’这个名称。”“错误地执取”,就像把不是骏马的当作骏马,把不是殊胜的当作殊胜来执取一样,这和见所产生的执取类似,贪和慢所产生的执取也同样是一种颠倒的执取。应当明白,“认为”是指:虽然贪、慢、见各有其紧抓不放、高傲自举、执取对象的个别特性,但它们共同以思量、构想所缘的方式来运作——这好比寻、伺等虽然在安立所缘等功用上显示巴利原文
Evanti ‘‘pathavibhāgena sañjānātī’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Sañjānitvāti pubbakālakiriyāniddesoti āha ‘‘aparabhāge…pe… gaṇhātī’’ti. Papañcasaṅkhāti papañcakoṭṭhāsā. Papañcanti sattā saṃsāre cirāyanti etehīti papañcā, maññanti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā parikappenti etāhīti maññanāti dvīhipi pariyāyehi taṇhādayova vuttāti āha ‘‘taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcehi idha maññanānāmena vuttehī’’ti. Ajaññassa jaññato, aseyyādikassa seyyādito gahaṇato diṭṭhimaññanā viya taṇhāmānamaññanāpi aññathā gāho evāti āha ‘‘aññathā gaṇhātī’’ti. Ārammaṇābhiniropanādinā bhinnasabhāvānampi vitakkādīnaṃ sādhāraṇo upanijjhāyanasabhāvo viya anugijjhanuṇṇatiparāmasanasabhāvānampi taṇhādīnaṃ sādhāraṇena ārammaṇaparikappanākārena pavatti maññanāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tīhi maññanāhi maññatī’’tiādi. Assāti puthujjanassa, udayabbayānupassanādīsu viya sukhumanayenapi maññanāpavatti atthīti vibhāvanasukhatāya thūlaṃyeva taṃ dassetukāmo ‘‘oḷārikanayenā’’tiāha. Oḷārike hi vibhāge dassite sukhumavibhāvanā sukarāti dassetuṃ ayamatthayojanā vuccatīti sambandho. Ajjhattikāti indriyabaddhā sattasantānapariyāpannā niyakajjhattā vuttā vibhaṅge paṭisambhidāmagge ca.
《分别》,指《界分别》(《分别》173)。“外”,指不与根相连、属于行相续的。“硬”,即坚硬的。“粗”,即粗糙的。“硬性”,即硬的状态。“硬性”,即硬的本质。“外在地”,指相对于与根相连者而成为外在的。“非执受”,即非执受的。“铁”,指黑铁。“金属”有四类:天然金属、凡夫金属、人造金属和毗舍遮金属。其中,铁、银、金、锡、铅、铜、钻石金属,这七种称为天然金属。龙鼻金属,称为凡夫金属。青铜、圆金属、黄铜,这三种称为人造金属。孔雀颈金属、薄金属、污金属、易动金属、碎片金属、赤色金属、食物金属、劣金属,这八种称为毗舍遮金属。在这些金属中,所谓的钻石金属,是一种能切断一切金属的种类。正因它能切割、能斩断,故被称为“能切割者”。“能切割者”即显示巴利原文
Vibhaṅgeti dhātuvibhaṅge (vibha. 173). Bāhirāti anindriyabaddhā saṅkhārasantānapariyāpannā. Kakkhaḷanti thaddhaṃ. Kharigatanti pharusaṃ. Kakkhaḷabhāvo kakkhaḷattaṃ. Kakkhaḷabhāvoti kakkhaḷasabhāvo. Bahiddhāti indriyabaddhato bahiddhābhūtaṃ. Anupādinnanti na upādinnaṃ. Ayoti kāḷalohaṃ. Lohanti jātilohaṃ vijātilohaṃ kittimalohaṃ pisācalohanti catubbidhaṃ. Tattha ayo sajjhu suvaṇṇaṃ tipu sīsaṃ tambalohaṃ vekantakalohanti imāni satta jātilohāni nāma. Nāganāsikālohaṃ vijātilohaṃ nāma. Kaṃsalohaṃ vaṭṭalohaṃ ārakuṭanti tīṇi kittimalohāni nāma. Morakkhakaṃ puthukaṃ malinakaṃ capalakaṃ salakaṃ āṭalaṃ bhattakaṃ dusilohanti aṭṭha pisācalohāni nāma. Tesu vekantakalohaṃ nāma sabbalohacchedanasamatthā ekā lohajāti. Tathā hi taṃ vikantati chindatīti vikantakanti vuccati. Vikantakameva vekantakaṃ. Nāganāsikālohaṃ lohasadisaṃ lohavijāti haliddādivijāti viya. Tathā hi taṃ lohākāraṃ lohamalaṃ viya ghanasaṃhataṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati, tāpetvā tāḷitaṃ pana bhinnaṃ bhinnaṃ hutvā visarati mudu maṭṭhaṃ kammaniyaṃ vā na hoti. Tiputambe missetvā kataṃ kaṃsalohaṃ. Sīsatambe missetvā kataṃ vaṭṭalohaṃ. Jasatambe missetvā kataṃ ārakuṭaṃ. Teneva taṃ karaṇena nibbattattā kittimalohanti vuccati. Yaṃ pana kevalaṃ rasakadhātu viniggataṃ, taṃ ‘‘pittala’’ntipi vadanti. Taṃ idha nādhippetaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ missakameva katvā yojitaṃ kittimanti vuttaṃ. Morakkhakādīni evaṃnāmānevetāni. Tesu yasmā pañca jātilohāni pāḷiyaṃ visuṃ vuttāneva, tasmā vekantakalohena saddhiṃ vuttāvasesaṃ sabbaṃ idha lohanti veditabbaṃ.
「锡」即白锡。「铅」即黑锡。「银」即白银。「珍珠」有八种,如象额所生等。即:象额、猪牙、蛇头、雨云之巅、竹、鱼头、螺、贝,此为珍珠八种来源。其中,象额所生者色黄无光。猪牙所生者,色如其牙。蛇头所生者,呈蓝等色,极为纯净,且形圆。雨云所生者,光辉闪耀,难辨其形,夜能破暗,唯天享用。竹所生者,色如冰粒,无光,且其竹唯生于非人处。鱼头所生者,色如叉尾鲇鱼之背,形圆轻巧而无光,且其鱼唯住大海中央。螺所生者,色如螺腹内皮,大小或如枣核,亦无光。贝所生者,则有种种殊特光彩,形状亦各异。如是,就来源而言,此八种珍珠中,鱼、螺、贝所生者为海产;蛇所生者,亦有部分海产;余者非海产。世间常见珍珠多为海产,其中又以贝所生者为主,其余仅偶现,故《破除迷惑》注疏云:‘珍珠……’显示巴利原文
Tipūti setatipu. Sīsanti kāḷatipu. Sajjhanti rajataṃ. Muttāti hatthikumbhajādikā aṭṭhavidhāpi muttā. Tathā hi hatthikumbhaṃ varāhadāṭhā bhūjaṅgasīsaṃ valāhakūṭaṃ veḷū macchasīro saṅkho sippīti aṭṭha muttāyoniyo. Tattha hatthikumbhajā pītavaṇṇā pabhāhīnā. Varāhadāṭhā varāhadāṭhavaṇṇāva. Bhujaṅgasīsajā nīlādivaṇṇā suvisuddhā vaṭṭalā ca. Valāhakajā bhāsurā dubbibhāgarūpā rattibhāge andhakāraṃ vidhamantiyo tiṭṭhanti, devūpabhogā eva ca honti. Veḷujā karakupalasamānavaṇṇā na bhāsurā, te ca veḷū amanussagocare eva padese jāyanti. Macchasīrajā pāṭhīnapiṭṭhisamānavaṇṇā vaṭṭalā laghavo ca honti pabhāvihīnā, te ca macchā samuddamajjhe eva jāyanti. Saṅkhajā saṅkhodaracchavivaṇṇā kolappamāṇāpi honti pabhāvihīnāva. Sippijā pabhāvisesayuttā honti nānāsaṇṭhānā. Evaṃ jātito aṭṭhavidhāsupi muttāsu yā macchasaṅkhasippijā, tā sāmuddikā honti, bhujaṅgajāpi kāci sāmuddikā honti, itarā asāmuddikā. Yasmā bahulaṃ sāmuddikāva muttā loke dissanti, tatthāpi sippijāva, itarā kādācikā. Tasmā sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 173) ‘‘muttāti sāmuddikā muttā’’ti vuttaṃ.
「宝石」:除经中已提及的琉璃等外,其余如发光宝石等各类,皆为宝石。「琉璃」:色如竹子的宝石。「螺」:海螺。「石」:有黑石、黄石、白石等别,共八种石。「银」:货币等,以及其余公认之银。「金」:即黄金。「红宝石」:红色宝石。「猫眼石」:有斑纹之杂色宝石。棕榈、椰子等,一如草类从外承载者,亦名为「草」。金合欢树等内具坚实木质者,乃至一块木料,亦名为「木」。小如绿豆、大至一把之石子,称为「砂砾」。小于绿豆者,称为「沙」。「陶片」:陶器破片。「地」:承载万物之大地。「石头」:自不可握于手中之大小,乃至如大象之大者,称为石头;逾此以上,则名为山。以上为对铁等类别的详释。「相之地」……显示巴利原文
Maṇīti ṭhapetvā pāḷiāgate veḷuriyādike seso jotirasādibhedo sabbopi maṇi. Veḷuriyanti vaṃsavaṇṇamaṇi. Saṅkhoti sāmuddikasaṅkho. Silāti kāḷasilā paṇḍusilā setasilādibhedā aṭṭhapi silā. Rajatanti kahāpaṇādikaṃ vuttāvasesaṃ rajatasammataṃ. Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Lohitaṅgoti rattamaṇi. Masāragallanti kabaramaṇi tiṇādīsu bahibhārā tālanāḷikerādayopi tiṇaṃ nāma. Antosāraṃ khadirādi antamaso dārukhaṇḍampi kaṭṭhaṃ nāma. Muggamattato yāva muṭṭhippamāṇā marumbā sakkharā nāma. Muggamattato paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā vālikā nāma. Kaṭhalanti kapālakhaṇḍaṃ. Bhūmīti sasambhārapathavī. Pāsāṇoti antomuṭṭhiyaṃ asaṇṭhahanato paṭṭhāya yāva hatthippamāṇaṃ pāsāṇaṃ, hatthippamāṇato pana paṭṭhāya upari pabbatoti. Ayaṃ ayoādīsu vibhāganiddeso. Nimittapathavīti paṭibhāganimittabhūtaṃ pathavikasiṇaṃ. Tampi hi ‘‘rūpāvacaratikacatukkajjhānaṃ kusalato ca vipākato ca kiriyato ca catutthassa jhānassa vipāko ime dhammā bahiddhārammaṇā’’ti vacanato ‘‘bāhirā pathavī’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yā ca ajjhattārammaṇattike nimittapathavī, taṃ gahetvā’’ti. Uggahanimittañcettha taṃgatikameva daṭṭhabbaṃ, nimittuppattito pana pubbe bhūmiggahaṇeneva gahitanti.
所谓“以三种认为”,为简要说明这三种认为于自他相续中的对应,故说“我是地”等。其中,“我是地”等言,就内在所缘,显示「见之认为」与「慢之认为」,因其表明执取自我及生起我慢。而“地是我的”一句,则显示「贪之认为」,或亦含摄「慢之认为」,因为对于所执取之地,亦可从“殊胜”等角度生起慢心。余下两句,可依此理了知其中之认为差别。在此,若有一人证得地遍禅那,以禅那眼执取禅相,坚执其为“我”,复于内心中认定其为殊胜等,义理上即名为有“我是地”之认为。反之,若执取为“此即我之我”,则名为有“地是我的”之认为。同样,若将该所缘视为“他人”或“天神”,或依某理论执取为“此即是他人之我”,则名为有“地是他人”、“地是他人所有”之认为。依此方式,对其余地诸相,亦应相应分别此四种认为。显示巴利原文
Tīhi maññanāhīti vuttaṃ maññanāttayaṃ saparasantānesu saṅkhepato yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ahaṃ pathavī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ahaṃ pathavītiādīnā ajjhattavisayaṃ diṭṭhimaññanaṃ mānamaññanañca dasseti attābhinivesāhaṃkāradīpanato. Mama pathavīti iminā taṇhāmaññanaṃ mānamaññanampi vā pariggahabhūtāyapi pathaviyā seyyādito mānajappanato. Sesapadadvayepi iminānayena maññanāvibhāgo veditabbo. Tattha pathavikasiṇajjhānalābhī jhānacakkhunā gahitajhānārammaṇaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti abhinivisanto tañca seyyādito dahanto atthato ‘‘ahaṃ pathavī’’ti maññati nāma, tameva ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ attā’’ti gahaṇe pana ‘‘mama pathavī’’ti maññati nāma. Tathā taṃ ‘‘parapuriso’’ti vā ‘‘devo’’ti vā vādavasena ‘‘ayameva paresaṃ attā’’ti vā abhinivisanto ‘‘paro pathavī, parassa pathavī’’ti maññati nāma. Iminā nayena sesapathavīsupi yathārahaṃ catukkaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ.
这样,在以四组方式说明了“认为地”(pathaviṃ maññatīti)中的“认为”之后,现在为了区分认为之所依与认为本身,并显示它的种种认为之相,便接着说“或者(atha vā)……”等。其中,“此(ayanti)”即如前所说的凡夫。“欲贪(chandarāganti)”即深重的贪染。“他爱乐(assādetīti)”即乐住其中、品味其味,譬如心想:“这些头发多么柔软、光滑、卷曲、乌黑亮丽啊!”,从而受用其味。“他欢喜(abhinandatīti)”即带着喜悦的贪爱,当面欢喜雀跃。“他赞叹(abhivadatīti)”即因心中生起贪爱与欢喜而不能自制,脱口说出“啊,我的头发真好啊!”之类的话。“他执取而住(ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatīti)”即以强力的贪爱执取,犹如吞没,确定之后便安住其中。或者,于“某一可染著的事物(aññataraṃ vā pana rajjanīyavatthunti)”而言,是指显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti ettha catukkavasena maññanaṃ dassetvā idāni maññanāvatthuṃ maññanāyo ca vibhajitvā anekavihitaṃ tassa maññanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ayanti yathāvutto puthujjano. Chandarāganti bahalarāgaṃ. Assādetīti nikāmeti, ‘‘ime kesā mudusiniddhakuñcitanīlobhāsā’’tiādinā tattha rasaṃ vindati. Abhinandatīti sappītikāya taṇhāya abhimukho nandati pamodati. Abhivadatīti uppannaṃ taṇhābhinandanāvegaṃ hadayena sandhāretuṃ asakkonto ‘‘aho me kesā’’ti vācaṃ nicchāreti. Ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatīti balavataṇhābhinivesena gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvā tiṭṭhati. Aññataraṃ vā pana rajjanīyavatthunti kesādito aññataraṃ vā karacaraṇādippabhedaṃ niyakajjhattapariyāpannaṃ rāguppattihetubhūtaṃ vatthuṃ. Itīti iminā siniddhādippakārenāti patthayitabbākāraṃ parāmasati. Tattha nandiṃ samannānetīti tesu bhāvīsu kesādīsu siddhaṃ viya katvā nandiṃ taṇhaṃ samannāharati samupacāreti. Paṇidahatīti patthanaṃ ṭhapeti.
“成就”:即依成就而生起“我是优胜者”的慢;“过失”:即依过失而生起“我是卑劣者”的慢,这便是其中的关联。头发等作为地界之分,依这些部分的成就与过失而生起的慢,就是对地的认为。因此说:“如是,对于内在地界,以慢之认为而认为。”若离部分则无整体,故对整体“命”的执著,也会发生在部分上。为了显示此义而说:“然而,依据‘彼命彼身’的经句,有人执著头发是‘命’。”而于“这些头发是主宰者所造、依附于生主、是微尘积聚、是本性转变”等见,当知此即是见之认为。显示巴利原文
Sampattiṃ nissāya ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’ti, vipattiṃ nissāya ‘‘hīnohamasmī’’ti mānaṃ janetīti yojanā. Pathavīkoṭṭhāsabhūtānaṃ kesādīnaṃ sampattivipattīhi mānajappanā pathaviyā maññanā hotīti āha ‘‘evaṃ ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ mānamaññanāya maññatī’’ti. Avayavabyatirekena samudāyassa abhāvato samudāyo jīvābhiniveso avayavepi hotīti dassento ‘‘taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti āgatanayena pana kesaṃ ‘jīvo’ti abhinivisatī’’ti āha. ‘‘Kesā nāmete issaravihitā pajāpatinissitā aṇusañcayo pakatipariṇāmo’’tiādinā nayenapettha diṭṭhimaññanā veditabbā.
“此转起”:指对于欲爱、慢与见的遍尽与断除之转起。虽然通过“这是我的”等也显示了三种认为的生起可能,但由于贪与慢的认为前面已经说过,故此处应知是特别地举出了见的认为。因此说:“亦如是,对于内在地界,以见之认为而认为。”显示巴利原文
Imissā pavattiyāti nikantimānadiṭṭhīnaṃ pariyādānasamugghāṭappavattiyā. ‘‘Etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā yadipi tissannampi maññanānaṃ sambhavo dassito. Taṇhāmānamaññanānaṃ pana heṭṭhā dassitattā diṭṭhimaññanā evettha visesato uddhaṭāti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evampi ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatī’’ti.
对于外界的地界,也同样以三种认为而认为,这是其中的关联。为了显示那种认为的方式,便问:“如何?”其含义应依前面所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Bāhirampi pathaviṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññatīti yojanā. Taṃ pana maññanāvidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’nti āha. Tassattho heṭṭhā vuttanayena veditabbo.
“此即是命”:有人执取这块黑铁为“命、我”,就如某些尼乾陀一样。如此,对于外界的地界,以见的认为而认为——这里也应当依“凡内部的地界及外部的地界”等理路,连带说明。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃjīvoti ayaṃ kāḷalohaṃ ‘‘jīvo attā’’ti abhinivisati ekacce nigaṇṭhā viya. Evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti etthāpi ‘‘yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu, yā ca bāhirā pathavīdhātū’’tiādinā nayena ānetvā vattabbo.
在“把地遍视为我”等处所应说明的内容,前文已经说过了。这个解释理路,也应视为含摄在“把色视为我”这一句中,因为“遍”也属于假名为“色”的范畴。在“认为地”这里,既然关于认为之基与认为的详细解释方法前文已说,此后也将依相同的方法来说明,因此说“此后我们将简略地说明”,意思是:虽然简略,但将依前文已有的详说。显示巴利原文
Pathavīkasiṇaṃ attato samanupassatītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Ayampi ca nayo ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti ettheva antogadhoti daṭṭhabbo kasiṇānampi rūpasamaññāsambhāvato. Pathaviṃ maññatīti ettha yādiso maññanāvatthumaññanānaṃ vitthāranayo vutto, tādiso ito paraṃ vuttanayovāti āha ‘‘ito paraṃ saṅkhepeneva kathayissāmā’’ti, atādiso pana vitthāratopi kathayissatīti attho.
“Tasmāti”:因为“pathaviyā”是处格,意思是:他将自身、他人及这两者的资具视为所依而安立,从而构想出那个妄想的所依。因此论中说“我以地”等。由根所系缚与非根所系缚的种种法相续,以及带有附属物的地,难道不是其依处的依止,而所缘地则是以彼为所缘的心的所缘依止,这二者之间并无冲突吗?并非如此,因为他是以“依止”的方式来构想这妄想所依的。也就是说,此人将基于“我”的见妄想和慢妄想所成立的自身,以地作为亲近依止,而计执为“我以地”;又将基于爱妄想所成立的资具,以地作为亲近依止,而计执为“我的所有物、我的系缚是在地上”。对于“他人”等处,也应依此理路来理解其义。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā ‘‘pathaviyā’’ti idaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, tasmā, so attaparattadupakaraṇānaṃ ādhārabhāvena taṃ maññanāvatthuṃ kappetīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ahaṃ pathaviyā’’tiādi. Nanu ca indriyabaddhānindriyabaddhapabhedassa dhammappabandhassa sasambhārapathavī ca ādhāranissayo, itarā ārammaṇanissayo tadārammaṇassāti ettha nibbirodhoti? Na, maññanāvatthuṃ nissayabhāvena parikappanato. Ayañhi ‘‘aha’’nti diṭṭhimaññanāya mānamaññanāya ca vatthubhūtassa attano pathavisannissayaṃ katvā ‘‘ahaṃ pathaviyā’’ti maññati, taṇhāmaññanāya vatthubhūtassa upakaraṇassa pathaviṃ sannissayaṃ katvā ‘‘mayhaṃ kiñcanaṃ palibodho pathaviyā’’ti maññati. Parotiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
“此是义之理路”是关联。《无碍解道》中已说。“由此理路”,是指如同“而彼我于此色”那样,显示整体作为依处等的义理路子,就循着这个理路。因为没有离开部分的整体,所以在整体中所说的理则,在部分中也能成立,这便是其意。因此说“而彼此我于此地认为等”。在“即于彼为我所”中,“于彼”指凡夫。于彼为我所,便是对于内在和外在之地所依止处,执其为“我所”。这是对“认为地”一句的注释。这样,在“认为地”处,先就自我方面显示了见、慢、渴爱的认为之后,现在为就他人方面显示,故说“然而若……”等。这里的“于彼”指他人,“此时”即依据于他人的认为。于此处会生起常等倾向,所以唯有“见认为”才相应。由此限定词,排除了慢和渴爱的认为。因为以“我胜”等方式为特征的慢,与以“我的”为转起特征的渴爱,在他人被执为他人所有物时也会转起,这便是其意。“其余的也一样”,指的是慢和渴爱的认为也是如此。“诸注疏师这样意欲”,也就是注疏师们如此认为。因为他人也会依地的所依,对成就、自在等加以安立并希求,将“胜”等性质置于自心,显示巴利原文
Yvāyaṃ atthanayoti sambandho. Vutto paṭisambhidāmagge. Eteneva nayenāti yvāyaṃ ‘‘so kho pana me attā imasmiṃ rūpe’’ti samudāyassa ādhārabhāvadīpano atthanayo vutto, eteneva nayena. Na hi avayavabyatirekena samudāyo labbhati, tasmā samudāye vuttavidhi avayavepi labbhatīti adhippāyo. Tenāha so kho pana me ayaṃ attā imissā pathaviyāti maññantoti. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attanīti ettha assāti puthujjanassa. Tasmiṃyeva attanīti ajjhattikabāhirapathavīsannissaye attani. ‘‘Pathaviyā maññatī’’ti padassāyaṃ vaṇṇanā. Evaṃ ‘‘pathaviyā maññatī’’ti ettha attavasena diṭṭhimānataṇhāmaññanaṃ dassetvā idāni paravasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yadā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha assāti parassa. Tadāti paravasena maññanāyaṃ. Diṭṭhimaññanā eva yujjati tattha niccābhinivesādayo sambhavantīti katvā. Avadhāraṇena mānataṇhāmaññanā nivatteti. Na hi ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā, ‘‘mayha’’nti ca pavattalakkhaṇā mānataṇhā parasmiṃ parassa santakabhāvena gahite ca pavattantīti adhippāyo. Itarāyopīti mānataṇhāmaññanāyopi. Icchanti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Parassapi hi pathavīsannissayena sampattiissariyādikassa vasena attani seyyādibhāvaṃ dahato paṇidahato ca cittaṃ tathābhāvāya mānataṇhāmaññanā sambhavantīti ācariyānaṃ adhippāyo. ‘‘Paro pathavī parassa pathavī’’ti etthāpi ime dve pakārā sādhippāyā niddhāretabbā.
对于“从地而知”和“从最初”等处,虽非表示离开的格,但“to”音节被视为离格,故说“pathavīto是离格语”。“具资具的”,是指属于金银的,以及伴有奴仆等资具的,或是自己或他人的那些资具,这便是其意。“如所说之分类”,即是依相、内等已说类别而做的区分。“或者生起,或者流出”:即依据“彼卵为金所成,梵天从中自然生起”的梵世说,或依据“二微尘合成双微尘”这般转起的微尘说,执持从地生起;又或依据“一切世间皆从自在天流出”的自在天说,执持从自在天的创造中流出了地,应作如此配列;或者执持从地而有其他能作之我,这便是其意。在此中,前一种义释的离格具有作者的特征,后一种义释则应视为具有从句的特征。对于从自所受用的地中获得快乐,并由此安立己胜于他人者,当知是渴爱与慢的认为。“其他”,是指那些根本略说的论师们。“执取其他无量的我”,即依先前修习而生起无量遍的方式,或依迦毗罗等见地,执取一个无量、周遍的我。“从地”,是指后来未加修习、未得增长的地遍所谓之地。“于外亦有我”,即由此显示巴利原文
‘‘Pathavito sañjānātī’’ti, ‘‘ādito’’ti ca ādīsu anissakkavacanepi to-saddo diṭṭhoti āha ‘‘pathavitoti nissakkavacana’’nti. Saupakaraṇassāti hiraññasuvaṇṇagatassa dāsaporisādinā vittupakaraṇena saupakaraṇassa, attano vā parassa vā tesaṃ upakaraṇassa vāti attho. Yathāvuttappabhedatoti lakkhaṇādiajjhattikādivuttappakāravibhāgato. Uppattiṃ vā niggamanaṃ vāti ‘‘taṃ aṇḍaṃ ahosi hemamayaṃ, tasmiṃ sayaṃ brahmā uppanno’’ti brahmaṇḍavādavasena vā ‘‘dvīhi aṇūhi dviaṇuka’’nti evaṃ pavattaaṇukavādavasena vā pathavito uppattiṃ vā ‘‘sabboyaṃ loko issarato viniggato’’ti issaravādavasena issarakuttato pathavito niggamanaṃ vā maññamānoti yojanā. Pathavito vā añño āpādiko attāti adhippāyo. Ettha ca purimasmiṃ atthavikappe kārakalakkhaṇaṃ nissakkavacanaṃ, dutiyasmiṃ upapadalakkhaṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Attano pariggahabhūtapathavito sukhappattiṃ tato eva ca parehi seyyādibhāvaṃ kappentassa vasenapettha taṇhāmānamaññanā veditabbā. Apareti sārasamāsācariyā. Tato aññaṃ appamāṇaṃ attānaṃ gahetvāti pubbe bhāvitaāpādiappamāṇakasiṇavasena vā kāpilakāṇādadiṭṭhivasena vā appamāṇaṃ byāpinaṃ attānaṃ gahetvā. Pathavitoti pacchā abhāvitaavaḍḍhitapathavīkasiṇasaṅkhātapathavito. Bahiddhāpi me attāti ito pathavito bahipi me attāti adhippāyo.
“完全”即毫无剩余。以渴爱执取大地,此理同样适用于住在四洲的转轮王,以及地方王、大臣、长者等,因为他们也会依各自执取的范围,毫无剩余地生起认为。对于“如此是我的”的执取,由于它远离了“此是我、此是我所”的执取,故说“唯有一种渴爱之认为可得”。为了阐明所示之理,于是说“而此……”等。其中,“而此”是指应将这种渴爱之认为结合起来。正如由于见之认为对它认为的所缘生起爱和慢,从而生起渴爱与慢的认为;同样地,由于渴爱之认为对它认为的所缘,将自己安立为殊胜等,并执取它为我所、为常,以及执取它为拥有者而分别自身,其余的认为也会生起,这便可了知。因为通过“我的”这一意义的执取门,便显示了我所的关联。显示巴利原文
Kevalanti anavasesaṃ. Mahāpathaviṃ taṇhāvasena mamāyati, ayañca nayo catudīpissariye ṭhitassa dīpacakkavattino ca labbheyya, maṇḍalikarājamahāmattakuṭumbikānampi vasena labbhateva tesampi yathāpariggahaṃ anavasesetvā maññanāya sambhavato. ‘‘Evaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa ‘‘esohamasmiṃ, eso me attā’’ti gāhavidhūratāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ekā taṇhāmaññanā eva labbhatī’’ti . Iminā nayenāti vuttamatidesaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘sā cāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sā cāyanti sā ca ayaṃ taṇhāmaññanā yojetabbāti sambandho. Yathā pana diṭṭhimaññanāmaññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanā sambhavanti, evaṃ taṇhāmaññanāmaññitena vatthunā attānaṃ seyyādito dahato tañca attaniyaṃ niccaṃ tathā taṃsāmibhūtaṃ attānañca parikappentassa itaramaññanāpi sambhavantīti sakkā viññātuṃ. ‘‘Me’’ti hi iminā atthaggahaṇamukheneva attaniyasambandho pakāsīyatīti.
“欢喜”:此词摄括了渴爱、见与执著,为显示此三者,故说“且喜贪、执取”。应知,此二者(渴爱与见)的转起,是依与见不相应的心生起而不混杂的;或者,即使在同一心生起时,也如增上法一般,依过去加行之力,由各自强力的方式转起。“于此义”:即依渴爱与见而欢喜之义。“此”:即“欢喜地”这一句。对某些应调伏者,若以某些分类差别阐明诸法能令获得殊胜证悟,便为那些人以这些分类差别阐明法。对某些仅需以一种分类阐明法即能获得殊胜证悟者,则在为说该种分类之后,由法之自在性,也阐明其余一切无余的分类,这是说法之善巧。因此说:“先依认为显示烦恼生起,现在依欢喜来显示”。“法界”:指正等觉。因为正等觉依自性持受、审察一切所知法,并持受一切名为应调伏众生的法相续,令不堕入恶趣苦与轮回苦,自身又以不错乱转起之行相为“界”,故此处“法界”意指正等觉。因为一切智智以道智为足处,道智以一切智智为足处,这就是正等觉。“由于善通达”:即善通达之状态,意为正确证得。依欲求、执取、执著的作用,于所缘上起计度分别,这……显示巴利原文
Abhinandatīti iminā taṇhādiṭṭhābhinivesānaṃ saṅgahitattā te dassento ‘‘assādeti parāmasati cā’’ti āha. Diṭṭhivippayuttacittuppādavasena cetassa dvayassa asaṅkarato pavatti veditabbā, ekacittuppādepi vā adhipatidhammānaṃ viya pubbābhisaṅkhāravasena tassa tassa balavabhāvena pavatti. Etasmiṃ attheti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena abhinandanatthe. Etanti ‘‘pathaviṃ abhinandatī’’ti etaṃ padaṃ. Yesaṃ vineyyānaṃ yehi pakāravisesehi dhammānaṃ vibhāvane kate visesādhigamo hoti, tesaṃ tehi pakāravisesehi dhammavibhāvanaṃ. Yesaṃ pana yena ekeneva pakārena dhammavibhāvane kate visesādhigamo hoti, tesampi taṃ vatvā dhammissaratāya tadaññaniravasesappakāravibhāvanañca desanāvilāso. Tenāha ‘‘pubbe maññanāvasena kilesuppattiṃ dassetvā idāni abhinandanāvasena dassento’’ti. Dhammadhātuyāti sammāsambodhiyā. Sā hi sabbañeyyadhammaṃ yathāsabhāvato dhāreti upadhāreti, sakalañca vineyyasattasaṅkhātadhammappabandhaṃ apāyadukkhasaṃsāradukkhapatanato dhāreti, sayañca aviparītapavattiākārā dhātūti dhammadhātūti idhādhippetā. Sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi maggañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ sammāsambodhīti. Suppaṭividdhattāti suṭṭhu paṭividdhabhāvato, sammā adhigatattāti attho. Abhikaṅkhanasampaggahaparāmasanānaṃ vasena ārammaṇe parikappanāpavatti maññanā. Tattha ‘‘mamaṃ, aha’’nti ca abhinivesanaṃ parikappanaṃ. Yena ajjhosānaṃ hoti, ayaṃ abhinandanāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Suttādiaviruddhāyeva attanomati icchitabbā, na itarāti suttena tassā saṅgahaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttañceta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Desanāvilāsavibhāvanassa pana sahetukahetusampayuttadukādidesanāya nibaddhatā niddhāretabbā.
“Tassā”:即“由彼”。因与已知词相关联,此是作者格的主格语尾。“因此”:即由于未遍知。“未遍知”是以遮止的方式而说的遍知,在义理上,遍知有三种。为显示其自相与转起之相,故说“若……”等。显示巴利原文
Tassāti tena. Ñātasaddasambandhena hetaṃ kattari sāmivacanaṃ. Tasmāti apariññātattā. ‘‘Apariññāta’’nti paṭikkhepamukhena yaṃ parijānanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ atthato tividhā pariññā hotīti taṃ sarūpato pavattiākārato ca vibhāvento ‘‘yo hī’’tiādimāha.
其中,以某种智慧遍知并决断观的领域,这种智慧即是「知遍知」。因为它将三界所生、以“这是观的领域”而知、明、了了分明的法,依相、味等及内在等区分,决断而了知。但在此处,应依地界来理解,故说“遍知地界”等。「度遍知」:即通过审度方式遍知的智慧。因为它是通过对无常等自性的五取蕴,以无常等伴随的行相,依审度与思惟而决断、了知。「以最上道」:即依阿罗汉道。因此道无余断尽欲贪。或“以最上道”即是以最殊胜的道,也就是出世间道的意思。无论哪种方式,都显示作断除断的智慧即是无余的「断遍知」。显示巴利原文
Tattha yāya paññāya vipassanābhūmiṃ parijānāti paricchindati, sā parijānanapaññā ñātapariññā. Sā hi tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ vipassanābhūmī’’ti ñātaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karontīyeva lakkhaṇarasādito ajjhattikādivibhāgato ca paricchijja jānāti. Idha pana pathavīdhātuvasena veditabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pathavīdhātuṃ parijānātī’’tiādi. Tīraṇapariññāti kīraṇavasena parijānanakapaññā. Sā hi parivārehi aniccatādiākārehi aniccatādisabhāvassa upādānakkhandhapañcakassa tīraṇavasena sammasanavasena taṃ paricchijja jānāti. Aggamaggenāti arahattamaggena. So hi anavasesato chandarāgaṃ pajahati. Aggamaggenāti vā aggabhūtena maggena, lokuttaramaggenāti attho. Ubhayathāpi hi samucchedapahānakārī eva paññā nippariyāyena pahānapariññāti dasseti.
「名色的确定」:以此也包含了缘的把握。应知,这是因为确定了名色的因。因为那也是通过因和缘的门来确定名色。以观察聚等方式,由于是以无常等来观察,故是「度遍知」。「因此」:即因为没有那些遍知,所以。或者,因为未遍知,即因为地未被遍知,所以由于未遍知地,便执取该地并欢喜它。显示巴利原文
Nāmarūpavavatthānanti etena paccayapariggahopi saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo nāmarūpassa hetuvavatthānabhāvato. Sopi hi hetupaccayamukhena nāmarūpassa vavatthānamevāti. Kalāpasammasanādivasena tīraṇapariññā aniccādivasena sammasanabhāvato. Tasmāti yasmā tā pariññāyo natthi, tasmā. Atha vā tasmā apariññātattāti yasmā apariññātā pathavī, tasmā apariññātattā pathaviyā taṃ pathaviṃ maññati ca abhinandati cāti.
水界等释义显示巴利原文
Āpovārādivaṇṇanā
「于水知水」:此处,“水”(āpo)意为“到达”或“使增长”;在某个聚集物中,水以自身存在,并以黏结的方式遍满而安住,或者有“滋养”的意思。「内」(ajjhattaṃ):指对于自身;「各别」(paccattaṃ):即各各对于自我。这两者都只是指属于有情相续中的水。在“水、水所成”等表述中,“水”即黏结作用本身;而因为具备了水的自性,故称为“水所成”(āpogata),即达到水的自性状态。“润”(sineha):即润滑之义;因为具有润滑的自性,故称为“润所成”(sinehagata)。“色的结缚性”:即不可分离的色的结缚状态,意思是以不散开的方式而聚合。「取相者」:如在有边界的水曼陀罗中获得取相那样,如此取着于相。「已说的」:指在“于水”等句中所说的水;那是具有积聚物的水,并非“水遍处”中所说的水。「其余的」:即阐明所缘假立水的自相,以及解说“于水”等句中未完成的内容。显示巴利原文
Āpaṃāpatoti ettha appoti, appāyatīti vā āpo, yasmiṃ saṅghāte sayaṃ atthi, taṃ ābandhanavasena byāpetvā tiṭṭhati, paribrūhetīti vā attho. Atthānaṃ adhi ajjhattaṃ. Pati pati attānanti paccattaṃ. Ubhayenapi sattasantānapariyāpannameva vadati. Āpo āpogatantiādīsu ābandhanameva āpo, tadeva āposabhāvaṃ gatattā āpogataṃ, sabhāveneva āpabhāvaṃ pattanti attho. Sinehanavasena sineho, soyeva sinehanasabhāvaṃ gatattā sinehagataṃ. Bandhanattaṃ rūpassāti avinibbhogarūpassa bandhanabhāvo, avippakiraṇavasena sampiṇḍananti attho. Uggaṇhantoti yathāparicchinne āpomaṇḍale yathā uggahanimittaṃ upalabbhati, tathā nimittaṃ gaṇhanto. Vuttoti ‘‘āpasmi’’nti ettha vuttaāpo. So hi sasambhāraāpo, na ‘‘āpokasiṇa’’nti ettha vuttaāpo. Sesanti ārammaṇasammutiāpānaṃ sarūpavibhāvanaṃ. ‘‘Āpaṃ āpato pajānātī’’tiādipāḷiyā atthavibhāvanañceva tattha tattha maññanāvibhāgadassanañca pathaviyaṃ vuttasadisamevāti. Tattha ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānātī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.360; a. ni. 10.25) vuttaṃ, idha ‘‘āpokasiṇameko sañjānātī’’tiādinā vattabbaṃ. Tattha ca ‘‘pathavīti sañjānātī’’ti vuttaṃ, idha pana ‘‘āpoti sañjānātī’’tiādinā vattabbanti evamādi eva viseso. Sesaṃ tādisameva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pathaviyaṃ vuttasadisamevā’’ti. Yo panettha viseso, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kevala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha mūlarasoti mūlaṃ paṭicca nibbattaraso. Khandharasādīsupi eseva nayo. Khīrādīni pākaṭāneva. Yathā pana bhesajjasikkhāpade (pārā. 618-625), na evamidha niyamo atthi. Yaṃ kiñci khīraṃ khīrameva. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Bhummānīti āvāṭādīsu ṭhitaudakāni. Antalikkhānīti pathaviṃ appattāni vassodakāni, pattāni pana bhummāneva. Evaṃ vuttā cāti ca-saddena himodakakappavināsakaudakapathaviyāantoudakapathavīsandhārakaudakādiṃ pubbe avuttampi samuccinoti.
「Tejaṃ tejato」(于火知火):此处,依燃烧之义(tejanatthena)称为火(tejo)。所谓燃烧,即能胜任焚烧、烹煮等事的犀利(nisāna),也就是所谓的暖热(uṇhatta)。「由彼」(yena cāti):指由那扰动而生起的热火(tejogata)。「而变热」(santappatīti):这个身体周遍变热,生起如日疟等种种热恼(usumajāta)。「由彼而老化」(yena ca jīrīyatīti):依靠那火,这个身体衰老,直至诸根残缺(indriyavekallata)、体力衰竭(balaparikkhaya)、皱纹遍布等。「由彼而遍烧」(yena ca pariḍayhatīti):由那被扰动的火,这个身体遍体焚烧,此人便想“我遍烧!”,进而渴求百炼酥油、牛乳、清凉的檀香等涂敷之物以及扇风。「由彼而令所食、所饮、所嚼、所尝得以完全消化」(yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ sammā)显示巴利原文
Tejaṃ tejatoti ettha tejanaṭṭhena tejo, tejanaṃ nāma dahanapacanādisamatthaṃ nisānaṃ, yaṃ uṇhattanti vuccati. Yena cāti yena tejogatena kupitena. Santappatīti ayaṃ kāyo samantato tappati ekāhikajarādibhāvena usumajāto hoti. Yena ca jīrīyatīti yena ayaṃ kāyo jīrīyati, indriyavekallataṃ balaparikkhayaṃ valitādibhāvañca pāpuṇāti. Yena ca pariḍayhatīti yena kupitena ayaṃ kāyo parito ḍayhati, so ca puggalo ḍayhāmīti satadhotasappigosītacandanādilepañceva tālavaṇṭavātañca paccāsīsati. Yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ sammā pariṇāmaṃ gacchatīti yena asitaṃ vā odanādi, pītaṃ vā pānakādi, khāyitaṃ vā piṭhakhajjakādi, sāyitaṃ vā ambapakkamadhuphāṇitādi sammadeva paripākaṃ gacchati, rasādibhāvena vivekaṃ gacchatīti attho. Ettha ca sarīrassa pakatiusumaṃ atikkamitvā uṇhabhāvo santāpo, sarīradahanavasena pavatto mahādāho paridāho, satavāraṃ tāpetvā udake pakkhipitvā uddhaṭasappi satadhotasappi, rasarudhiramaṃsamedaaṭṭhiaṭṭhimiñjasukkā rasādayo. Tattha purimā tayo tejā catusamuṭṭhānā, pacchimo kammasamuṭṭhānova.
因为具有了火性(tejobhāva),故称为「tejogataṃ」(火所成)。「usmā」:指温热的状态(uṇhākāra)。同样,因为具有了温热性(usmābhāva),故称为「usmāgataṃ」(暖所成)。「usumaṃ」:指猛烈的温热(caṇḍausumaṃ)。它本身就是「usumagataṃ」,即依其本性达到温热状态的意思。「薪火」(kaṭṭhaggī):以薪木为燃料的火。对于「木片火」等也是同理。「尘堆火」(saṅkāraggī):依靠垃圾而生的火。「雷火」(indaggī):即闪电火。「热」(santāpo):指火焰,或已离火焰的炭火之热。「日热」(sūriyasantāpo):即阳光。「薪聚热」(kaṭṭhasannicayasantāpo):依靠薪堆而生的热。对于其余的热也是同理。「如是所说,以ca字」(Evaṃ vuttā cāti):此中的「ca」字,是将未提及的鬼火(petaggi)、劫坏火(kappavināsakaggi)、地狱火(nirayaggi)等种种火一并含摄。显示巴利原文
Tejobhāvaṃ gatattā tejogataṃ. Usmāti uṇhākāro. Usmāva usmābhāvaṃ gatattā usmāgataṃ. Usumanti caṇḍausumaṃ. Tadeva usumagataṃ, sabhāveneva usumabhāvaṃ pattanti attho. Kaṭṭhaggīti kaṭṭhupādāno aggi. Sakalikaggīādīsupi eseva nayo. Saṅkāraggīti kacavaraṃ paṭicca uppannaaggi. Indaggīti asaniaggi. Santāpoti jālāya vā vītaccitaṅgārānaṃ vā santāpo . Sūriyasantāpoti ātapo. Kaṭṭhasannicayasantāpoti kaṭṭharāsiṃ paṭicca uppannasantāpo. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ vuttā cāti. Ca-saddena petaggikappavināsakagginirayaggiādike avuttepi samuccinoti.
「Vāyaṃ vāyato」(于风知风):此处,依推动义(vāyanaṭṭhena)称为风(vāyo)。此推动为何义?即支撑(vitthambhanaṃ),或鼓动(samudīraṇaṃ);亦有说推动就是移动(gamanaṃ)。「上行风」(uddhaṅgamā vātā):即引起打嗝等而向上运行的风。「下行风」(adhogamā vātā):即排出大小便等而向下运行的风。「腹外风」(kucchisayā vātā):即肠外的风。「腹内风」(koṭṭhāsayā vātā):即肠内的风。「遍行肢节风」(aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātā):即沿着脉络网遍行于全身一切肢节、引发屈伸等动作的风。「刀风」(satthakavātā):即如同用刀切开关节连接那样运作的风。「剃刀风」(khurakavātā):即如同用剃刀削、劈开心脏之肉般运作的风。「拔莲风」(uppalakavātā):即能将心脏之肉拔起的风。「入息」(assāso):即进入体内的鼻风。「出息」(passāso):即排出体外的鼻风。在此,前面所有的风都是四因所生,而入息显示巴利原文
Vāyaṃ vāyatoti ettha vāyanaṭṭhena vāyo. Kimidaṃ vāyanaṃ nāma? Vitthambhanaṃ, samudīraṇaṃ vā, vāyanaṃ gamananti eke. Uddhaṅgamā vātāti uggārahikkādipavattakā uddhaṃ ārohanavātā. Adhogamā vātāti uccārapassāvādinīharaṇatā adho orohanavātā. Kucchisayā vātāti antānaṃ bahivātā. Koṭṭhāsayā vātāti antānaṃ antovātā. Aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātāti dhamanījālānusārena sakalasarīre aṅgamaṅgāni anusaṭā samiñjanapasāraṇādinibbattakā vātā . Satthakavātāti sandhibandhanāni kattariyā chindantā viya pavattavātā. Khurakavātāti khurena viya hadayamaṃsachedanaphālanakavātā. Uppalakavātāti hadayamaṃsassa samuppāṭanakavātā. Assāsoti antopavisanakanāsikāvāto. Passāsoti bahinikkhamananāsikāvāto. Ettha ca purimā sabbe catusamuṭṭhānā, assāsapassāsā cittasamuṭṭhānāva.
「vāyogataṃ」(风所成):即风本身;依自性达到风的状态(vāyobhāva)的意思。「Thambhitattaṃ rūpassa」(色的坚固性):即不可分离之色(avinibbhogarūpa)的坚固状态。「东方风」(puratthimā vātā):来自东方的风。对「西方风」等也是同样的道理。在有尘等中,夹杂灰尘的称为「有尘风」(sarajā);脱离灰尘、清净的称为「无尘风」(arajā)。由寒季所生或在寒云中产生的风是「寒风」(sītā)。由热季所生或在热云中产生的风是「热风」(uṇhā)。「小风」(parittā):微弱、细薄的风。「大风」(adhimattā):强劲有力的风。「黑风」(kāḷā):从黑云中产生的风。也有一些人说,那种吹拂而使人肤色变黑的风,就用这个名称。「对风」(verambhavātā):在一由旬以上吹动的风。「翅风」(pakkhavātā):乃至苍蝇等翼膀鼓动的风。「金翅鸟风」(supaṇṇavātā):由金翅鸟鼓动的风。虽然这些也属于翅风,但因为其力量格外强盛(ussada),所以另外列出。「扇子风」(tālavaṇṭavātā):用棕叶或其他材料制成的圆形物煽起的风。「摇扇风」(vidhūpanavātā):由扇叶煽起的风。这些扇子和摇扇能令未生起的风产生,也能让已生起的风回转。在此,以「ca」字,也摄入了未提到的持水风、劫坏风、助火蔓延风等等。在此,在「认为水(āpaṃ maññati)」等中,因为可以通过三种思量(maññanā)的方式——即「认为“我是水”」、「认为“水是我的”」等,如同在地界章(pathavīvāra)中所说的方法来明了思量的分析,所以说“其余如同前述”。因此,应根据那里所说的方法,在这三个章节中随其所应地明辨思量的分类。显示巴利原文
Vāyogatanti vāyova vāyogataṃ, sabhāveneva vāyobhāvaṃ pattanti attho. Thambhitattaṃ rūpassāti avinibbhogarūpassa thambhitabhāvo. Puratthimā vātāti puratthimadisato āgatā vātā. Pacchimādīsupi eseva nayo. Sarajādīsu saha rajena sarajā, rajavirahitā suddhā arajā. Sītautusamuṭṭhānā, sītavalāhakantare vā jātā sītā. Uṇhautusamuṭṭhānā, uṇhavalāhakantare vā jātā uṇhā. Parittāti mandā tanukavātā. Adhimattāti balavavātā. Kāḷāti kāḷavalāhakantare samuṭṭhitā. Yehi abbhāhato chavivaṇṇo kāḷako hoti, tesaṃ etaṃ adhivacanantipi eke. Verambhavātāti yojanato upari vāyanavātā. Pakkhavātāti antamaso makkhikāyapi pakkhāyūhanavātā. Supaṇṇavātāti garuḷavātā. Kāmaṃ cetepi pakkhavātāva, ussadavasena pana visuṃ gahitā. Tālavaṇṭavātāti tālavaṇṇehi katena, aññehi vā katena kenaci maṇḍalasaṇṭhānena samuṭṭhāpitavātā. Vidhūpanavātāti bījanapattakena samuṭṭhāpitavātā. Imāni ca tālavaṇṭavidhūpanāni anuppannampi vātaṃ uppādenti, uppannampi parivattenti. Idhāpi ca-saddo udakasandhārakavātakappavināsakavātajālāpellanakavātādike avuttepi samuccinoti. Ettha ca ‘‘āpaṃ maññatī’’tiādīsu yasmā tīhi maññanāhi – ‘‘ahaṃ āpoti maññati, mama āpoti maññatī’’tiādinā pathavīvāre vuttanayena sakkā maññanāvibhāgo vibhāvetunti vuttaṃ ‘‘sesaṃ vuttanayamevā’’ti. Tasmā tattha vuttanayānusārena imesu tīsu vāresu yathārahaṃ maññanāvibhāgo vibhāvetabbo.
「至此」:以此量,以此四章为限的教示差别。「ca」字在此作转折义,以显明后文将要说的差别。「那个称为相之摄髁」:即所谓名为“相之摄髁”者。为说明这相摄髁在经中所谈的内容,而有「vuttamhi」等语。「在经中,于所说的一法」:即在善法等或蕴等中,随某一法在经中以自性简别的方式被说时,任何那些与彼所述之法具有相同相的一切法——即以善性、色蕴性等而与所说之法具有相同相的一切法——无论是否在经中被明确说出,都应当视为已被说到。意思是,即使经中没有明确提到的那些法,因为具有相同的相,也应引来予以解释。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatāti ettakena iminā catuvāraparimāṇena desanāvisesena. Ca-saddo byatireko. Tena vakkhamānaṃyeva visesaṃ joteti. Yvāyanti yo ayaṃ lakkhaṇo nāma hāro vuttoti sambandho. So pana lakkhaṇahāro yaṃlakkhaṇo tattha vutto, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttamhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vuttamhi ekadhammeti kusalādīsu khandhādīsu vā yasmiṃ kasmiñci ekadhamme sutte sarūpato niddhāraṇavasena vā kathite. Ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā tenāti ye keci dhammā kusalādibhāvena, rūpakkhandhādibhāvena vā tena vuttadhammena samānalakkhaṇā. Vuttā bhavanti sabbeti sabbepi kusalādisabhāvā, khandhādisabhāvā vā dhammā sutte avuttāpi tāya samānalakkhaṇatāya vuttā bhavanti, ānetvā saṃvaṇṇanavasenāti adhippāyo.
在此,「同一相」即是说相同的相。由此,即使未被说到的法,也可凭藉其与所述之法共同存在、具有相同的作用、相同的因、相同的果、相同的所缘等而被识别,如同已被说到一样。「如是」:依此方式。因此他说:「在《导论》中,如是说名为“相之摄髁”。」然而,《导论》原文中有“ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā keci so hāro lakkhaṇo nāmā”这一文句。依此相摄髁的道理,世尊说明了色之相不可免——即无法脱离那坏灭的自性。「这些」:即“以色为我而随观”等所说的邪见。在此,通过显示有身见的思量,也就呈现了以色为所依的一切爱、慢的思量。正如所说:「对于那……』显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ekalakkhaṇāti samānalakkhaṇā vuttā. Tena sahacaritā samānakiccatā samānahetutā samānaphalatā samānārammaṇatāti evamādīhipi avuttānaṃ vuttānaṃ viya niddhāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Itīti iminā pakārena. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ nettiyaṃ lakkhaṇo nāma hāro vutto’’ti, nettipāḷiyaṃ (netti. 23) pana ‘‘ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā keci so hāro lakkhaṇo nāmā’’ti pāṭho āgato. Tassa vasenāti tassa lakkhaṇahārassa vasena. Rūpalakkhaṇaṃ anatītattāti ruppanasabhāvena samānasabhāvattā. Vadantena bhagavatā. Etāti ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti evaṃ vuttadiṭṭhī. Ettha ca sakkāyadiṭṭhimaññanādassaneneva sakalarūpavatthukā taṇhāmānamaññanāpi dassitā evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiṃyeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā’’ti. Atha vā pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ meti maññati abhinandatīti ca vadantena vuttanayeneva sakalarūpavatthukā taṇhāmaññanā tadanusārena mānamaññanāpi vuttāva hotīti evampettha itaramaññanāpi niddhāretabbā.
大种品等释义。显示巴利原文
Bhūtavārādivaṇṇanā
3 由“认为地,从地认为”等词句,因这些词句厘定了“以色为我而观见,于色中观见自我”等有身见,故说“如此以色门宣说了以行为所依的妄想”。其中,“在行中”及“在众生中”,即指在那些执取的众生中。“在界中”,即指在地等四界中。bhūta一词有“生起”义;带前缀时,在“pabhūtamariyo pakaroti puñña”等句中为“广大”义;在“yebhuyyena bhikkhūnaṃ paribhūtarūpo”等句中为“毁坏”义;在“sambhūto sāṇavāsī”等句中为“施设”义;在“abhibhūto māro vijito saṅgāmo”等句中为“摧伏”义;在“parābhūtarūpo kho ayaṃ acelo pāthikaputto”等句中为“败北”义;在“anubhūtaṃ sukhadukkha”等句中为“感受”义;在“vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ pa…”等句中则有“明”等义。显示巴利原文
3. ‘‘Pathaviṃ maññati, pathaviyā maññatī’’tiādīhi padehi ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ samanupassatī’’tiādīnaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhīnaṃ niddhāritattā vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ rūpamukhena saṅkhāravatthukaṃ maññanaṃ vatvā’’ti . Tesu saṅkhāresu sattesupīti tadupādānesupi sattesu . Dhātūsūti pathavīādīsu catūsu dhātūsu. ‘‘Jātaṃ bhūtaṃ saṅkhata’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.207; saṃ. ni. 5.379) bhūta-saddo uppāde dissati, saupasaggo pana ‘‘pabhūtamariyo pakaroti puñña’’ntiādīsu vipule, ‘‘yebhuyyena bhikkhūnaṃ paribhūtarūpo’’tiādīsu hiṃsane, ‘‘sambhūto sāṇavāsī’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 450) paññattiyaṃ, ‘‘abhibhūto māro vijito saṅgāmo’’tiādīsu vimathane, ‘‘parābhūtarūpo kho ayaṃ acelo pāthikaputto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.23, 25, 31, 32) parājaye, ‘‘anubhūtaṃ sukhadukkha’’ntiādīsu vediyane, ‘‘vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ paññāyā’’tiādīsu pākaṭīkaraṇe dissati. Te sabbe rukkhādīsūti. Ādi-saddena saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Kālo ghasati bhūtānīti (jā. 1.2.190), bhūtā loke samussaya’’nti (dī. ni. 2.220; saṃ. ni. 1.186) ca ādīsu avisesena sattavācakopi bhūtasaddo, upari devādipadehi sattavisesānaṃ gahitattā idha tadavasiṭṭhā bhūtasaddena gayhantīti āha ‘‘no ca kho avisesenā’’ti. Tenevāha – ‘‘cātumahārājikānañhi heṭṭhā sattā idha bhūtāti adhippetā’’ti. Yo hi sattanikāyo paripuṇṇayoniko catūhipi yonīhi nibbattanāraho, tatthāyaṃ bhūtasamaññā aṇḍajādivasena bhavanato.
“bhūta”即指前文所说明的那些bhūta。而“从bhūta而想”一句,是取“bhūta”这一世间通称,以此表示:如同在那里有渴爱等妄想生起,此处是以颠倒想的方式去认知。此义正与前面“从地想”处所释之理相同,可依前文之说了知,故说“即如前所说之理”。正如净居天因永不存在而不被此教说所摄,地狱有情也因非一切妄想的所依而不被摄;由此可知,一部分饿鬼等亦不摄于此。然而,另有论师说:“以见妄想为所依故,他们亦应被摄。”这是依“具足而受用”等经文所说之理。
“染著”:因以“这是清净、这是快乐”的颠倒执取,而对彼所缘生起贪爱。而且,此处的染著不仅于眼见时,也于耳闻等时发生,因此说“见已……乃至……觉已”。其中,依嗅等方式的染著,应知地是通过回忆那些曾被领受的香、花鬘等,以及对不合己意之物的受用方式,随所感受而忆念的方式生起的。
如此,依于bhūta的渴爱妄想而“认为”,即依前文所说之理,缘取……显示巴利原文
Bhūteti vuttadesaādesite bhūte. Bhūtato sañjānātīti iminā ‘‘bhūtā’’ti lokavohāraṃ gahetvā yathā tattha taṇhādimaññanā sambhavanti, evaṃ viparītasaññāya sañjānanaṃ pakāsīyati. Svāyamattho heṭṭhā ‘‘pathavito sañjānātī’’ti ettha vuttanayānusārena sakkā jānitunti āha ‘‘vuttanayamevā’’ti. Yathā suddhāvāsā sabbadā abhāvato imaṃ desanaṃ nāruḷhā, evaṃ nerayikāpi sabbamaññanānadhiṭṭhānato. Eteneva ekaccapetānampettha asaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Apare pana ‘‘diṭṭhimaññanādhiṭṭhānato tesampettha saṅgaho icchitoyevā’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Samaṅgibhūtaṃ paricārenta’’ntiādinā sutte vuttanayena. Rajjatīti ‘‘subhā sukhitā’’ti vipallāsaggāhena tattha rāgaṃ janeti. Evamettha rajjanto ca na kevalaṃ dassanavaseneva, savanādivasenapi rajjatevāti dassento ‘‘disvāpi…pe… utvāpī’’ti āha. Tattha ghāyanādivasena rajjanaṃ tehi anubhūtagandhamālādivasena ceva visabhāgavatthubhūtānaṃ tesaṃ paribhogavasena ca yathānubhavaṃ anussaraṇavasena ca veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ bhūte taṇhāmaññanāya maññatīti vuttanayena bhūte paṭicca chandarāgaṃ janento tesaṃ paṭipattiṃ assādento abhinandanto abhivadanto ajjhosāya tiṭṭhanto ‘‘īdisī avatthā mama anāgatamaddhānaṃ siyā’’tiādinā vā pana nayena tattha nandiṃ samannānento bhūte taṇhāmaññanāya maññatīti attho. Appaṭiladdhassa khattiyamahāsālādibhāvassa, sampattiṃ vipattinti jātivasena ukkaṭṭanihīnataṃ. Dahatīti ṭhapeti. Yoevarūpo mānoti yo eso ‘‘ayaṃ pubbe mayā sadiso, idāni ayaṃ seṭṭho ayaṃ hīnataro’’ti uppanno māno. Ayaṃ vuccati mānātimānoti ayaṃ bhārātibhāro viya purimaṃ sadisamānaṃ upādāya mānātimāno nāmāti attho.
于“常”等中:因无生起,故为“常”;因无死亡,故为“恒久”;因一切时存有,故为“永续”。或从与无常相反的角度而认为是常,从坚固状而认为是恒久,从等同于永续的意义而认为是永续,因无老等变易,故认为是“不变易法”。
“一切有情”:指牛、山羊、驴等无一例外,以有情识而得名有情。
“一切有息者”:指所谓“一根有息者、二根有息者”等所说的一切,以有呼吸而得名有息者。
“一切已生者”:指无一例外,从卵壳等中已生、已产生者,故称已生者。
“一切命者”:指稻、大麦、小麦等无一例外,以有生命而得名命者,因彼对他们以生长之状而执有命想。
“无自在、无力、无精进”:即表示他们没有属于自己的自在、力或精进。
“由决定性、聚会、自性所成熟”:其中,“决定性”即决定性,如被不可断的线贯穿、不可破的摩尼珠,不舍本然之态。“聚会”指六种姓在此处的会合。“自性”即本质,如芒刺的尖锐、迦毗咤果等的圆状、兽与鸟等的斑驳色彩等。如此,由决定性、聚会和自性所成熟。显示巴利原文
Niccātiādīsu uppādābhāvato niccā, maraṇābhāvato dhuvā, sabbadā bhāvato sassatā. Aniccapaṭipakkhato vā niccā, thirabhāvato dhuvā, sassatisamatāya sassatā, jarādivasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato avipariṇāmadhammāti maññati. Sabbe sattāti oṭṭhagoṇagadrabhādayo anavasesā sañjanaṭṭhena sattā. Sabbe pāṇāti ‘‘ekindriyo pāṇo dvindriyo pāṇo’’tiādivasena vuttā anavasesā pāṇanaṭṭhena pāṇā. Sabbe bhūtāti anavasesā aṇḍakosādīsu bhūtā sañjātāti bhūtā. Sabbe jīvāti sāliyavagodhūmādayo anavasesā jīvanaṭṭhena jīvā. Tesu hi so virūhabhāvena jīvasaññī. Avasā abalā avīriyāti tesaṃ attano vaso vā balaṃ vā vīriyaṃ vā natthīti dasseti. Niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatāti ettha niyatīti. Niyatatā, acchejjasuttāvutaabhejjamaṇi viya avijahitapakatitā. Saṅgatīti channaṃ abhijātīnaṃ tattha saṅgamo. Bhāvoti sabhāvoyeva, kaṇḍakānaṃ tikhiṇatā, kapiṭṭhaphalādīnaṃ parimaṇḍalāditā, migapakkhīnaṃ vicittavaṇṇāditāti evamādiko. Evaṃ niyatiyā ca saṅgatiyā ca bhāve ca pariṇatā nānappakārataṃ pattā. Yena hi yathā bhavitabbaṃ, so tatheva bhavati. Yena na bhavitabbaṃ, so na bhavatīti dasseti. Chasvevābhijātīsūti kaṇhābhijātiādīsu chasu eva abhijātīsu ṭhatvā sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedenti, aññā sukhadukkhabhūmi natthīti dasseti. Vā-saddena antādibhede diṭṭhābhinivese saṅgaṇhāti.
「再生」:以此表示希望与各各有情聚中的已生者同住。「乐再生」:以此表示在彼处再生后,获得安乐。借由「有一部分已生者是常」等语,显示了「一分恒常见」。而以「我也是那些已生者中的一种」,则显示了第四种一分恒常论。显示巴利原文
Upapattinti iminā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sattanikāye bhūtānaṃ sahabyataṃ ākaṅkhatīti dasseti. Sukhuppattinti iminā pana tattha tattha uppannassa sukhuppattiṃ. Ekacce bhūte niccātiādinā ekaccasassatikadiṭṭhiṃ dasseti. Ahampi bhūtesu aññatarosmīti iminā pana catutthaṃ ekaccasassatikavādaṃ dasseti.
「从何处……」:指从自在天、人等不同类别中,无论从何处。「唯独有一种渴爱妄执可得」:此处也当依前文所说道理,厘定其他妄执的存在。因为对于所说的那类「已生者」,应以渴爱、邪见而欢喜等来表述,故说「即如前文所说之理」。应作连接:即「谁完全了知那些作为『已生者』这一施设所执取的诸蕴,他便以三种遍知而了知」等,应这样连接。此外,有些论师将植物聚也含摄在「已生者」一词中,因此也依树木等分别来连接并显示妄执的分类;同样也依大种作连接,但这在义注中并未记载。显示巴利原文
Yato kutocīti issarapurisādibhedato yato kutoci. Ekā taṇhāmaññanāva labbhatīti idhāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayena itaramaññanānampi sambhavo niddhāretabbo. Vuttappakāreyeva bhūte taṇhādiṭṭhīhi abhinandatītiādinā vattabbattā āha ‘‘vuttanayamevā’’ti. Yojanā kātabbāti ‘‘yo bhūtapaññattiyā upādānabhūte khandhe parijānāti, so tīhi pariññāhi parijānātī’’tiādinā yojanā kātabbā. Apare panettha bhūtagāmopi bhūta-saddena saṅgahitoti rukkhādivasenapi maññanāvibhāgaṃ yojetvā dassenti, tathā mahābhūtavasenapi, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ natthi.
「以地的差异等而分别」:指依地的差别、再生处的差别等所作的区分。「以神通」:指由殊胜福业所生的威力。虽然「天」一词在「晴朗云散,天」等句中指晴空,在「天又微微触之」等句中指云,在「这位王子,天啊」等句中指刹帝利,而在如「具足五种欲功德,似乎天人受乐」等句中指再生天,然而为了从一切可用「天」指称的有情中,无遗漏地特举出此处所指的天,所以说「天有三种」等。其余的六欲天在此处才被意指为天,因为其他词句已将别处排除了——这是它的意图。「已生者天」:对于所包含的有情,渴爱等妄执现起的状态也有三种相,所以说「应依已生者节所说的道理来理解」。显示巴利原文
Bhūmivisesādinā bhedenāti bhūmivisesaupapattivisesādivibhāgena. Iddhiyāti puññavisesanibbattena ānubhāvena. Kiñcāpi deva-saddo ‘‘viddhe vigatavalāhake deve’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.110; 3.102; 5.146-148; ma. ni. 1.486; a. ni. 10.15; itivu. 27) ajaṭākāse āgato, ‘‘devo ca thokaṃ thokaṃ phusāyatī’’tiādīsu meghe, ‘‘ayañhi deva kumāro’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.34, 35, 36) khattiye āgato, ‘‘pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgibhūto paricāreti devo maññe’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.183; ma. ni. 2.211) viya idha upapattidevesu āgato, deva-saddena pana vattabbasatte anavasesato uddharitvā tato idhādhippete dassetuṃ ‘‘te tividhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesā cha kāmāvacarā idha devāti adhippetā itaresaṃ padantarehi nivattitattāti adhippāyo. Bhūtā devāti gahitesu sattesu taṇhādimaññanānaṃ pavattākārenapi tividhalakkhaṇanti āha ‘‘bhūtavāre vuttanayena veditabbā’’ti.
「某近事男的妻子端正美丽」等经文中,妻子一词用于家庭主妇;在「生主,赐欲者,金色者,愿我子孙繁衍」等句中,是邪见行者所构思出来的;在「你们当仰望生主、天王的幢顶」等句中,用于天众中的最殊胜者;然而此处说为「主宰」,那只是那些论师自己的见解,因为下文将摄取梵天。
「诸天」是指四大天王天等天。
「大王等」:由「等」字摄取了帝释天、夜摩天、兜率天、化乐天、他化自在天。
「他们」就是指大王等天。
「在所谓有情的欲界地中」:在欲界地的有情之中。
「生主身份」:意思是生主的状态。正因为他以生主身份而宣扬慢,所以说他以慢妄想而认为生主。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aññatarassa upāsakassa pajāpati abhirūpā hotī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 168) pajāpati-saddo gharaṇiyaṃ āgato, ‘‘pajāpati kāmadāyī suvaṇṇavaṇṇā me pajā hotū’’tiādīsu diṭṭhigatikaparikappite, ‘‘pajāpatissa devarājassa dhajaggaṃ ullokeyyāthā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.249) devajeṭṭhake, idha pana adhipatīti vadanti, taṃ upari brahmuno gayhamānattā tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Devānanti cātumahārājikādidevānaṃ. Mahārājādīnanti ādi-saddena sakkasuyāmasantussitasunimmitavasavattino gahitā. Tesanti mahārājādīnaṃ. Sattasaṅkhātāyāti kāmabhūmiyaṃ sattasaṅkhātāya. Pajāpatinti pajāpatibhāvaṃ. Pajāpatibhāvena hi mānaṃ jappento pajāpatiṃ mānamaññanāya maññatīti vutto.
虽说“唯独有一种见妄想相应”,但若有人期望生于生主的附近或同界,或将心倾向那样的状态,或认为自己能得到那样的成就而生起“胜劣”等想,则可知也会有渴爱妄想与慢妄想生起。
「那些法」指寿命、容貌等法。
在此处,对于“生主”,也当如前述之理,知道存在其他的妄想。显示巴利原文
Ekā diṭṭhimaññanāva yujjatīti vuttaṃ, pajāpatino pana samipataṃ salokataṃ vā ākaṅkhato, tathābhāvāya cittaṃ paṇidahato, tathāladdhabbāya sampattiyā attano seyyādibhāvaṃ dahato ca taṇhāmānamaññanāpi sambhavantīti sakkā viññātuṃ. Ye ca dhammāti āyuvaṇṇādike vadati. Pajāpatinti etthāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayena itaramaññanānampi sambhavo veditabbo.
「已修习」指已增长广大。
「以殊胜功德」指以禅那等殊胜功德而成就上人法。
梵天一词,虽通称一般梵天,亦特指殊胜者,但为显示其于何处、以何种功德殊胜之相而现起,故说“再者”等。
「千」指主宰一千个小千世界。
「最初生起者」指由殊胜的初禅而化生,或在初禅地最早化生。
「已摄」应知:因取主要者,次要者亦以某种方式而被含摄。
这里,梵天指大梵天,因其容貌端严、寿命极长,较梵众天等更为殊胜,故称大梵天;立于他国师位置的是梵辅天;作为他集会中近侍的则是梵众天,应如此了知。
由于这是殊胜个体的状态,对梵天的妄想便如同对生主那样现起,因此说“应如生主节所讲的方法来了解”。同样,由于那是多众共性的状态,发光者等节即说为与“已成”节相似。显示巴利原文
Brūhitoti parivuddho. Guṇavisesehīti jhānādīhi visiṭṭhehi guṇehi uttarimanussadhammatāya. Brahma-saddassa satipi avisesato visiṭṭhavācakatte yattha yattha panassa guṇavisesayuttādirūpā pavatti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sahassoti sahassiyā lokadhātuyā adhipatibhūto. Paṭhamābhinibbattoti paṇītena paṭhamajhānena nibbatto, paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ vā paṭhamaṃ abhinibbatto. Gahitāti veditabbā padhānaggahaṇena appadhānānampi kenaci sambandhena gahitabhāvasiddhito. Ettha ca brahmāti mahābrahmā adhippeto. So hi vaṇṇavantatāya ceva dīghāyukatāya ca brahmapārisajjādīhi mahanto brahmāti mahābrahmā, tassa pana purohitaṭṭhāne ṭhitāti brahmapurohitā, parisāyaṃ bhavā paricārakāti brahmapārisajjāti veditabbā. Ukkaṭṭhekapuggalabhāvato pajāpatismiṃ viya brahmani maññanā vattatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pajāpativāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā’’ti. Tathā hi bahupuggalabhāvasāmaññato ābhassaravārādīnaṃ bhūtavārasadisatā vuttā.
“发光者”是指具有依前述光辉而放光的习性者。“同层而住者”这一说法,是因为不像各禅那地那样有上下层级,所以如此称说;然而他们的处所各自有别。“少光天”因比起发光者,其光较少,故称少光天。“无量光天”因具有无量的光,故称无量光天。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttapabhāya ābhāsanasīlā vā ābhassarā. Ekatalavāsinoti idaṃ jhānantarabhūmīnaṃ viya heṭṭhuparibhāvābhāvato vuttaṃ, ṭhānāni pana nesaṃ paricchinnāneva. Ābhassarehi parittā ābhā etesanti parittābhā. Appamāṇā ābhā etesanti appamāṇābhā.
“清净”指美丽的光辉。如同金块般具有祥瑞,故称“金块具祥瑞”。其中,本当说“以美丽光辉遍满故,为遍净”时,将“bhā”音缩短,并把末尾的“ṇa”音转为“ha”音,便说成了“遍净”。而“清净”是指单一、坚固、不动的光辉。“少净天”指其光辉有限,“无量净天”指其光辉无量。显示巴利原文
Subhāti sobhanā pabhā. Kañcanapiṇḍo viya sassirikā kañcanapiṇḍasassirikā. Tattha sobhanāya pabhāya kiṇṇā subhākiṇṇāti vattabbe bhā-saddassa rassattaṃ, antima-ṇa-kārassa ha-kārañca katvā ‘‘subhakiṇhā’’ti vuttā. Subhāti ca ekagghanā niccalā pabhā vuccati, parittā subhā etesanti parittasubhā. Appamāṇā subhā etesanti appamāṇasubhā.
「广大果」指广大、寂静、安乐、长寿、美貌等果。显示巴利原文
Vipulaphalāti vipulasantasukhāyuvaṇṇādiphalā.
虽然诸天、梵天等也藉由福德果与禅那果战胜对立者,但因为在无想有情中,对凡夫而言「胜者」之称谓显著而常用,故依止于他们而宣说此教法,由此说:「这是无想有的同义语」。如同在「生主」品中,以「在此,有一类人对生主……」等方式显示了种种计执的生起,在此也应如此显示,故说:「其余如同生主品中所说的方法」。显示巴利原文
Satipi devabrahmādīnaṃ puññaphalena jhānaphalena ca paṭipakkhābhibhave yesaṃ pana puthujjanaasaññasattesu abhibhūvohāro pākaṭo niruḷho ca, tesaṃ vasenāyaṃ desanā pavattāti dassento āha ‘‘asaññabhavassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Yathā pajāpativāre ‘‘idhekacco pajāpatismiṃyevā’’tiādinā maññanāpavatti dassitā, tathā idhāpi taṃ dassetuṃ sakkāti āha ‘‘sesaṃ pajāpativāre vuttanayamevā’’ti.
「空无边处」等品的注释。显示巴利原文
Ākāsānañcāyatanavārādivaṇṇanā
4 4. 如此,依众生类别显示地之次第时,为阐明不取净居天的原因,而说「如是,世尊」等语。其中,「不还者与诸漏尽者」指不还者和漏尽者。虽然净居天确实有数百千劫的寿命,但从最高限度而言,仅有一万六千劫的寿命,不会超过此,故说「仅数千劫的寿命」。空无边处等法虽也流转于欲有、色有,但由于它们属于无色界,故不获得该地之名,因此特为强调说「唯生于彼处者」。此处的意旨是:应如「胜者品」中所说的方法而正解。因为这里没有容貌殊胜等事。在「如同生主品中所说的方法」一句中,应当理解为以「我是无色者,已断除色想、嗔想」等方式生起慢与计执。显示巴利原文
4. Evaṃ sattavasena bhūmikkamadassane suddhāvāsānaṃ aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ niddhārento ‘‘evaṃ bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Tattha anāgāmikhīṇāsavāti anāgāmino ca khīṇāsavā ca. Kiñcāpi suddhāvāsā attheva anekakappasahassāyukā, ukkaṃsaparicchedato pana soḷasakappasahassāyukāva, na tato paranti āha ‘‘katipayakappasahassāyukā’’ti. Kāmarūpabhavesu pavattamānāpi ākāsānañcāyatanādidhammā arūpāvacarabhāvato taṃbhūmikavohāraṃ na labhantīti ‘‘tatrūpapannāyevā’’ti avadhāretvā vuttaṃ. Abhibhūvāre vuttanayena veditabbā yathārahanti adhippāyo. Na hettha vaṇṇavantatādi sambhavatīti. Pajāpativārevuttanayenāti ettha ‘‘ahamasmi arūpo pahīnarūpapaṭighasañño’’tiādinā mānamaññanā veditabbā.
「所见所闻」等品的注释显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhasutavārādivaṇṇanā
5 5. 以「色」为门显示计执事,是就概要而说,故注释说:「就广说而言亦……」。因为那也如同「其处无地、无水、无火、无风,亦无空无边处……」等表述一样,是概要地显示「五蕴有」。显示巴利原文
5. Rūpamukhena maññanāvatthudassanaṃ saṅkhepoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘vitthāratopī’’ti. Tampi hi ‘‘yattha neva pathavī, na āpo, na tejo, na vāyo, na ākāsānañcāyatana’’ntiādiggahaṇaṃ viya saṅkhepato pañcavokārabhavadassanaṃ hotīti.
“所见”(diṭṭha):指由眼门完成见的作用所成就者,以及两眼已见、将见、若条件具足可能见者——由于并无表达特定时间区隔的意图,故一概称为“所见”,如同“已饮”(duddha)的用例。因此注释说:“这是色处(rūpāyatana)的同义语。”此理亦应套用于“所闻”等项目。“众生”(sattā):指于色等境界中执取、被系缚者,故称众生。此“众生”一词虽为通称,然依“执著”之义,且此处以“于女色中”等所缘差别来限定范围,故应视为在此表达男子之词。“染著”(rattā):如同布匹被染料浸染,被那种能令心变质的欲贪所染,便深深染著。“贪求”(giddhā):以渴仰为本,表现为极度贪婪,陷入贪求(gedha)的状态。“被缚”(gadhitā):犹如被绳结所缚,因贪而难以脱离,被捆绑在所缘上。“迷醉”(mucchitā):由于烦恼的作用,仿佛失去知觉,不再有他事可为,陷入迷醉、愚痴(moha)之中。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhanti yaṃ cakkhudvārena katadassanakiriyāsamāpanaṃ, yañca cakkhu dvayaṃ passati passissati sati sambhave passeyya, taṃ sabbakālanti visesavacanicchāya abhāvato diṭṭhanteva vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘duddha’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘rūpāyatanassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Ayañca nayo sutādīsupi yojetabbo. Sattāti rūpādīsu sattā visattāti sattā. Sañjanaṭṭhena sāmaññasaddopi cesa satta-saddo ‘‘itthirūpe’’ti visayavisesitattā idha purisavācako daṭṭhabbo. Rattāti vatthaṃ viya raṅgajātena cittassa vipariṇāmakārakena chandarāgena rattā sārattā. Giddhāti abhikaṅkhanasabhāvena abhigijjhanena giddhā gedhaṃ āpannā. Gadhitāti ganthitā viya lobhena dummocanīyabhāvena ārammaṇe paṭibaddhā. Mucchitāti kilesavasena visaññībhūtā viya anaññakiccā mucchaṃ mohaṃ āpannā. Ajjhosannāti visaye aññasādhāraṇe viya katvā gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvā viya ṭhitā. Imināti suvaṇṇavaṇṇādiākārena. Maṅgalaṃ amaṅgalanti īdisaṃ diṭṭhaṃ maṅgalaṃ, īdisaṃ amaṅgalanti . Rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ samanupassananayenāti idaṃ vedanādiarūpadhamme, rūpāyatanavinimuttasabbadhamme vā attato gahetvā tato ajjhattikaṃ, bāhiraṃ vā rūpāyatanaṃ tassokāsabhāvena parikappetvā ‘‘so kho pana me ayaṃ attā imasmiṃ rūpāyatane’’ti maññanto diṭṭhasmiṃ maññatīti imaṃ nayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pathavito maññatī’’tiādīsu yathā ‘‘saupakaraṇassa attano vā parassa vā’’tiādimaññanāpavatti dassitā, evaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhato maññatī’’tiādīsu sakkā taṃ dassetunti āha ‘‘tesaṃ pathavīvāre vuttanayeneva veditabba’’nti.
“切近地”(āhaccā):意为随顺外境、到达(patvā)。因此注释用“靠近后”(upagantvā)来解释。所谓“相互黏着”(aññamaññasaṃsilesa),即如眼与色、耳与声的关系——并非相隔遥远,而是彼此依附。显示巴利原文
Āhaccāti visayaṃ anvāya, patvāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘upagantvā’’ti. Aññamaññasaṃsileseti cakkhurūpasotasaddā viya dure ahutvā aññamaññaṃ alliyane.
“唯以意识了知”(manasā viññātaṃ kevalaṃ)即是此义。因为其余那些亦为意识所了知。为显示其余七处所不能涵盖的“施设”(paññatti),故将其一并纳入,而说“或法所缘的”(dhammārammaṇassa vā)。在这两种情形中,由于也包含了出世间法,所以注释说:“但在此处,唯可得属于有身(sakkāya)者。”“广说”指这些计度生起方式的详细展开。“在此”指在“所闻”等章节当中。显示巴利原文
Manasā viññātaṃ kevalanti attho. Itarānipi hi manasā viññāyantīti. Sesehi sattahi āyatanehi paññattiyā asaṅgahitattā tampi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammārammaṇassa vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dvīsupi vikappesu lokuttarānampi saṅgaho āpannoti āha ‘‘idha pana sakkāyapariyāpannameva labbhatī’’ti. Vitthāroti maññanānaṃ pavattanākāravitthāro. Etthāti etesu sutavārādīsu.
「单一身」等章节的注释显示巴利原文
Ekattavārādivaṇṇanā
6 「等至者节」是指入等至者的心相续,即色界与无色界禅那的现起。此禅那只于同一所缘、以单一方式转起,故称「单一」;由此应知,果报禅那的现起,也已包含在此「等至者节」的说法中。「非等至者节」是指欲界诸法的心相续。因为即便近行禅那生起,心仍未正确进入那种「单一」的状态,故如此说。显示巴利原文
6.Samāpannakavārenāti samāpannakappavattiyā, rūpāvacarārūpāvacarajhānappavattiyāti attho. Sā hi ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe ekākārena pavattatīti katvā ‘‘ekatta’’nti vuccati, evañca katvā vipākajjhānappavattipi idha samāpannakavāraggahaṇeneva gahitāti daṭṭhabbā. Asamāpannakavārenāti kāmāvacaradhammappavattiyā. Upacārajjhānenapi hi cittaṃ na sammā ekattaṃ gatanti vuccatīti.
「连结」是指以妄想而连结。「分解」则是分别晓了。所谓「依教说的方法」,即依巴利圣典的理则。此中,「认为单一」等句,应依「视受为我」等经中所说之理趣而了知;「认为种种」等句,则应依「视色为我」等经中所说之理趣,随顺该规则以了知他们妄想。显示巴利原文
Yojanāti maññanāyojanā. Bhinditvāti vibhajitvā. Sāsananayenāti pāḷinayena. Tattha ‘‘ekattaṃ maññatī’’tiādīsu ‘‘vedanaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā nayena, ‘‘nānattaṃ maññatī’’tiādīsu pana ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā nayena vuttavidhiṃ anugantvā maññanā veditabbā.
又,依地节等所述之注释方法,意为:依「我是受」「受是我所」等,以及「我是色」「色是我所」等注释理趣而了知。因此,经中说「应随宜审察」,意即:对于单一与种种这两种状态,应随其可能发生妄想连结的方式,分别作恰当的辨别与审察。此处所说「有些人」是指无畏山寺派的住众;「其他一些」是指《精要略义》的教师们。他们所宣说的是「见的固执执取」,这是文句之间的关联。因为凡夫的妄想,是在剖析「有身」之后,唯依当时所现之缘而现起,故其妄想生起之处,并非以「此是执取单一的方式、此是执取种种的方式」这般清晰分别而转起。而于「成为以单一为想之我」等经文中,所述仅是假名有情生起「认为单一」「认为种种」之想,并非指「此物是单一、彼物是种种」——如此而转的见的固执执取本身具有单一性或种种性。是故应知,「厌逆与无厌逆两者」,于此并非经文的真实意趣。显示巴利原文
Pathavīvārādīsu vuttena ca aṭṭhakathānayenāti ‘‘ahaṃ vedanāti maññati, mama vedanāti maññatī’’tiādinā, ‘‘ahaṃ rūpanti maññati, mama rūpanti maññatī’’tiādinā cāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yathānurūpaṃvīmaṃsitvā’’ti, ekattanānattabhāvesu yo yojanānayo sambhavati, tadanurūpaṃ vicāretvāti attho. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Apareti sārasamāsācariyā. Diṭṭhābhinivesaṃ vadantīti sambandho. Puthujjanassa maññanā nāma sakkāyaṃ bhinditvāva yathāupaṭṭhitavisayavaseneva pavattatīti na tattha ayamekattanayo ayaṃ nānattanayoti vibhāgavaseneva, ekattasaññī attā hotītiādīsu ca attano ekattanānattasaññitā vuttā, na pana ekattaṃ nānattanti evaṃ pavattassa diṭṭhābhinivesassa ekattanānattabhāvoti evamettha tadubhayassa idha anadhippetabhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
为了说明:前面所说的凡夫在彻底执取时所能执取的那个,正是由于它‘应当被彻底执取’而被称为‘一切’,注释便说‘就只是那个’,意思是‘有身’这一‘一切’。若对一切三界诸法不见过患,便无厌离;以乐味随观故,渴爱只会增长,因此说‘于一切乐味者,以渴爱的妄想而妄想一切’。此即世尊所说:‘比丘们,于可结缚的法以乐味随观而住者,渴爱增长。’(《相应部》2.53, 57)认为‘这一切是我所化作’的人,以‘这是我所化作’的妄想,将自己安立于‘更胜’等,由此慢而妄想所化作;若无‘这是我所化作’的妄想,那样的慢便不可能生起,所以说‘妄想一切是自己所化作者,以慢的妄想而妄想一切’。以‘一切无’等理趣为例,‘等’字包含了宿命论等。‘我的大我’这一句,显示的是主张自我在一切方面辗转殊胜。为了显示:在‘一切于一切处’等见的基础上,此中也可能生起‘我在一切中,我的任何系缚在一切中;其他人在一切中,其他人的任何系缚在一切中’等理趣的妄想,因此注释说‘其余的可依地节中所说的方法了知’。此外,持有显示巴利原文
Yaṃ yathāvuttaputhujjano anavasesato gaṇhanto gahetuṃ sakkoti, taṃ tassa anavasesato gahetabbataṃ upādāya ‘‘sabba’’nti vuccatīti dassento ‘‘tamevā’’ti āha, sakkāyasabbanti attho. Sabbasmimpi tebhūmakadhamme ādīnavadassane asati nibbidābhāvato assādānupassanāya taṇhā vaḍḍhatevāti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ assādento sabbaṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññatī’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino viharato taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.53, 57). ‘‘Sabbamidaṃ mayā nimmita’’nti tena nimmitamaññanāya attānaṃ seyyādito dahanto tena mānena nimmitaṃ maññatiyeva nāma nimmitamaññanāya vinā tathāmānuppattiyā abhāvatoti āha ‘‘attanā nimmitaṃ maññanto sabbaṃ mānamaññanāya maññatī’’ti. Sabbaṃ natthītiādinā nayenāti ādi-saddena niyativādādike saṅgaṇhāti. Mahā me attāti iminā sabbato attano vibhūtipavattivādaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sabbaṃ sabbatthaka’’nti diṭṭhivasena – ‘‘ahaṃ sabbasmiṃ mayhaṃ kiñcanaṃ palibodho sabbasmiṃ, paro sabbasmiṃ parassa kiñcanaṃ palibodho sabbasmi’’ntiādinā nayenapettha maññanā sambhavatīti dassento āha ‘‘sesaṃ pathavīvāre vuttanayena veditabba’’nti. Apica ‘‘sabboyaṃ loko purisamayo’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhiko purisasaṅkhātato sabbato, attano uppattiṃ vā niggamanaṃ vā maññanto diṭṭhimaññanāya sabbato maññati, tasmiṃyeva pana diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmaññanā mānamaññanā ca veditabbā. Taṃyeva pana sabbaṃ mayhaṃ attā kattā sāmīti vā maññanto ‘‘sabbaṃ me’’ti maññati, tathāyaṃ diṭṭhitaṇhābhinandanāhi abhinandanto sabbaṃ abhinandatīti evampettha maññanānaṃ pavatti veditabbā.
‘它’指有身。持‘见法涅槃’论者,把伴随最胜乐的五蕴执为涅槃,而就实质而言,那只是有身而已。‘以一种方式’:虽然这五种蕴不同,但在将它们当作涅槃这一点上,合而为一地说。‘因为’:由于这个原因。‘以五种欲功德’:通过可爱、可意色等五种欲的部分,或通过这些束缚。‘被赋予’:很好地投入、黏着,安住于其中。‘成为具足者’:具足。‘享受’:在这些欲功德、这些欲的部分中,随顺快乐地使诸根游走、流连,从这里到那里去执取。或者也可解释为嬉戏、娱乐、游戏。在这里,欲功德有两种:人类的和天界的。人类的欲功德,如同曼陀多王所享受的欲功德;天界的欲功德,如同他化自在天王所享受的欲功德。对于那些追求这类欲乐的人,他们便安立所谓的‘见法涅槃成就’。因此说‘到此为止……就成为’。‘见法’:指现前可见的法,是‘有身’的异名。‘见法涅槃’:即在此有身中苦的止息。‘最上见法涅槃’:最上的、无上的见法涅槃,意思是已到达那最殊胜的见法涅槃。‘以五种出现’:依据上面所说的欲功德乐,以及四种色界禅那的乐,在圣显示巴利原文
Tanti sakkāyaṃ. Ukkaṃsagatasukhasahitañhi khandhapañcakaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādī nibbānanti maññati, taṃ panatthato sakkāyoyevāti. Ekadhāti pañcavidhampi nibbānabhāvena ekajjhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Yatoti yasmā. Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti manāpiyarūpādīhi pañcahi kāmakoṭṭhāsehi, bandhanehi vā. Samappito suṭṭhu appito allīno hutvā ṭhito. Samaṅgibhūtoti samannāgato. Paricāretīti tesu kāmaguṇesu kāmakoṭṭhāsesu yathāsukhaṃ indriyāni cāreti sañcāreti ito cito ca upaneti. Atha vā laḷati ramati kīḷati. Ettha dvidhā kāmaguṇā mānusakā ceva dibbā ca. Mānusakā ca mandhātukāmaguṇasadisā, dibbā paranimmitavasavattidevarājassa kāmaguṇasadisā. Evarūpe kāme upagatānañhi te diṭṭhadhammanibbānasampattiṃ paññapenti. Tenāha ‘‘ettāvatā kho…pe… hotī’’ti. Diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkhadhammo vuccati, tattha tattha paṭiladdhattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, diṭṭhadhamme nibbānaṃ imasmiṃyeva attabhāve dukkhavūpasamanaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ. Paramaṃ uttamaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānanti paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ, taṃ patto hotīti attho. Pañcadhā āgatanti yathāvuttakāmaguṇasukhassa ceva catubbidharūpāvacarajjhānasukhassa ca vasena pāḷiyaṃ pañcappakārena āgataṃ. Nibbānaṃ assādentoti paramaṃ sukhaṃ nissaraṇanti maññanāya assādento.
如果认为‘在这个已证得的涅槃中,不再出生,不再衰老,不再死亡’,这便是在‘对涅槃’妄想。如果执取说‘除此之外,再也没有更高的、能作为殊胜依怙的事物了’,那就是‘从涅槃’妄想。而认为‘这个涅槃是我所证得的’,因而觉得‘涅槃是我的’,这就是‘涅槃是我的’而妄想。正是由于这个,他以‘见的欢喜’而对那个涅槃欢喜。以上这些,在此处是指‘见的妄想’。然而,对于那个以见的妄想所妄想的事物,当他对之生起爱着和慢时,这里也应当能辨别出‘渴爱的妄想’和‘慢的妄想’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Imasmiṃ nibbāne patte na jāyati, na jīrati, na mīyatī’’ti evampi nibbānasmiṃ maññati. ‘‘Ito paraṃ paramassāsabhūtaṃ natthī’’ti gaṇhanto nibbānato maññati. Tayidaṃ nibbānaṃ mayā adhigataṃ, tasmā ‘‘nibbānaṃ me’’ti maññati. Tatoyeva taṃ nibbānaṃ diṭṭhābhinandanāya abhinandati. Ayaṃ tāvettha diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva pana diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi niddhāretabbā.
‘如同那样’:即应当通过可厌等性质去观察的样子。‘这个’:即此。由此,他说明了这个道理对自己和听法者来说,都是现量成立的。‘与不净等性质一起存在的色等诸法的身体合集’即是‘有身’,也就是‘取蕴’。‘如是’:以它实际存在的可厌等状态。‘一切妄想’:指在地等自性确定等种种差别不同的境上,所生起的各种各样、所有的渴爱妄想。显示巴利原文
Yādisoti yathārūpo, yehi jegucchādisabhāvehi passitabboti attho. Esāti ayaṃ. Tenassa attano suṇantānañca paccakkhasiddhatamāha. Asubhādisabhāvena saha vijjamānānaṃ rūpādidhammānaṃ kāyo samūhoti sakkāyo, upādānakkhandhā. Tathāti tassa bhāvabhūtena paṭikūlatādippakārena. Sabbamaññanāti pathavīādike sarūpāvadhāraṇādivibhāgabhinne visaye pavattiyā anekavihitā sabbā taṇhāmaññanā.
“可厌”(Jeguccho):意指应被厌恶的。此词显示了它(有身)不净、生厌、恶臭、违逆的那一面。“易破”(Siduro):指刹那刹那坏灭的性质。此词显示了它无常、不坚固、灭尽、衰败、脆弱的那一面。“这个”(Ayaṃ):指有身。“苦”(Dukkho):即非乐。此词显示了它困苦、艰难、受疾病扰、被称为苦的存在状态。“无导师”(Apariṇāyako):意为缺乏引导者。此词显示了它无我、无实质的存在状态。“那个”(Taṃ):指有身。“从对立面”(Paccanīkato):是从自性相反的角度来看,也就是作为净、常、乐、我等见解的对立面。“执取”(Gaṇhanti):指正在执取的人,他们是以执持净等特相的方式,深深耽溺于其中。显示巴利原文
Jegucchoti jigucchanīyo. Tenassa asubhājaññaduggandhapaṭikūlabhāvaṃ dasseti. Siduroti khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanasabhāvo. Tenassa aniccaaddhuvakhayavayapabhaṅgurasabhāvaṃ dasseti. Ayanti sakkāyo. Dukkhoti na sukho. Tenassa kicchakasirābādhadukkhavuttitaṃ dasseti. Apariṇāyakoti pariṇāyakarahito. Tenassa attasuññaasāravuttitaṃ dasseti. Tanti sakkāyaṃ. Paccanīkatoti sabhāvapaṭipakkhato, subhaniccasukhaattāditoti attho. Gaṇhanti gaṇhanto, tattha subhādigāhavasena abhinivisantoti attho.
现在,为以譬喻阐明这三种妄想,而说“subhato…pe… taṇhāya maññanā”等语。在此,犹如在带来巨大热恼与无尽过患的火焰上,飞蛾因净想与乐想而扑落;同样地,面对如是的“有身”,飞蛾的渴爱妄想也是如此。此句“subhato…pe… taṇhāya maññanā”正是为了显示这一意义。显示巴利原文
Idāni tissopi maññanā upamāhi vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘subhato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā mahāpariḷāhe vipulānatthāvahe ca aggimhi salabhassa patanaṃ subhasukhasaññāya, evaṃ tādise sakkāye salabhassa taṇhāmaññanāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘subhato…pe… taṇhāya maññanā’’ti iminā.
如同食粪虫得到粪堆,即使那粪堆并不圆满,它也会摆出圆满的姿态,自我吹嘘;同样地,对于充满种种过患、必然坏灭的有身,愚者生起“常”想后,便因成就而骄慢,于其中生起慢心——此即“niccasaññaṃ…pe… mānena maññanā”所要说明的意涵。显示巴利原文
Gūthādī kīṭako gūtharāsiṃ laddhā asampannepi tasmiṃ sampannākāraṃ pavattayamāno attānaṃ ukkaṃseti, evamanekādīnave ekantabhedini sakkāye niccasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā sampattimadena tattha bālo mānaṃ jappetīti imamatthamāha ‘‘niccasaññaṃ…pe… mānena maññanā’’ti.
譬如有一个愚钝、心智迷乱的愚人,在镜中看到自己的影像后,心想:“我猜这是镜子的主人,如果我抓着他,他可能会伤害我。”于是便抛弃影像而逃跑,把根本不存在的东西当作存在来执取。以此作为譬喻,说明这个愚者就是这样在有身上执取我与我所有——此即“attā…pe… diṭṭhiyā hoti maññanā”所阐明的含义。显示巴利原文
Yathā bālo muddhadhātuko sammūḷho koci ādāse attano paṭibimbaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ maññe ādāsasāmiko, yadi ahamimaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭheyyaṃ, anatthampi me kareyyā’’ti chaḍḍetvā palāyanto tattha avijjamānameva kiñci vijjamānaṃ katvā gaṇhi, tathūpamo ayaṃ bālo sakkāye attattaniyagāhaṃ gaṇhantoti imamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘attā…pe… diṭṭhiyā hoti maññanā’’ti iminā.
魔缚微细,因其较之韦巴吉帝的束缚更为微细。因此世尊说:“比丘们,这魔缚实在是更加微细啊!”显示巴利原文
Sukhumaṃ mārabandhanaṃ vepacittibandhanatopi sukhumatarattā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘aho sukhumataraṃ kho, bhikkhave, mārabandhana’’nti.
Bahuṃ(多)指极多,或多次。即便挣扎,亦因不能超越轮回,而不能超越有身。正如世尊所说:“比丘们,那些主张有情断灭、消亡、非有的沙门,他们只是围绕着有身流转,犹如那条被项圈拴住的狗”等。因为在七种断灭论中,舍弃作为轮回导引的渴爱与邪见尚属可能,常见中也是如此;然而见行者又怎么可能从有中解脱呢?因此说“不能超越有身”。显示巴利原文
Bahunti ativiya, anekakkhattuṃ vā. Vipphandamānopi sakkāyaṃ nātivattati saṃsāraṃ nātivattanato. Yathāha ‘‘ye te, bhikkhave, samaṇā sato sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapenti, te, sakkāyaṃyeva anuparidhāvanti seyyathāpi sā gaddulabandhano’’tiādi. Yathā hi sattasupi ucchedavikappesu saṃsāranāyikānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhīnaṃ pahānaṃ sambhavati, evaṃ sassatavikappesupīti kathañci pana diṭṭhigatikassa bhavavippamokkho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkāyaṃ nātivattatī’’ti.
So(他)即指那个凡夫。Niccaṃ(常)即一切时、任何时候。显示巴利原文
Sasoti so eso puthujjano. Niccanti sabbakālaṃ.
Taṃ(因此)意指:因有身染污者不能超越生等之故。Asātato(从不乐)即从苦而言。显示巴利原文
Tanti tasmā sakkāyamalīnassa jātiyādīnamanativattanato. Asātatoti dukkhato.
“这样观见它”(Passaṃ evamimaṃ)是指,以如上所述的方式,用与如实观智相应的道智,去观照那个有身的不净、无常、苦、无我自性。“断除”(Pahāya)是指,以彻底断尽的方式,舍弃一切妄想。“从一切苦解脱”(Sabbadukkhā pamuccati)是指,从整个轮回之苦中解脱。显示巴利原文
Passaṃ evamimanti asubhāniccadukkhānattasabhāvaṃ taṃ sakkāyaṃ vuttappakārena yathābhūtavipassanāpaññāsahitāya maggapaññāya passanto. Pahāyāti samucchedavasena sabbā maññanāyo pajahitvā. Sabbadukkhā pamuccatīti sakalasmāpi vaṭṭadukkhato pamuccatīti.
有学章节第二种方法的注释显示巴利原文
Sekkhavāradutiyanayavaṇṇanā
7 对所诠之义不加限定而陈述,名为“总说”;加以限定而陈述,则名为“详说”。因此说:“‘ye’是总说之词,‘so’是详说之词”。“总括之义”即是合集之义。而总括是基于同类性而成立的,故说“依所缘同类性”,意思是依所缘的同类性、相似性。它开示“有学”,是通过共相来显示并确立于别相,同时也是因为那些说法是以有学为范围的。显示巴利原文
7. Adhippetassa atthassa aniyametvā vacanaṃ uddeso, niyametvā vacanaṃ niddesoti āha ‘‘yoti uddesavacanaṃ, soti niddesavacana’’nti. Sampiṇḍanatthoti samuccayattho. Sampiṇḍanañca sabhāgatāvasena hotīti āha – ‘‘ārammaṇasabhāgenā’’ti, ārammaṇassa sabhāgatāya sadisatāyāti attho. Sekkhaṃ dasseti sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato, sekkhavisayattā ca tassa vacanassa.
在什么意义上称为有学呢?凡以智应被通达者,其义即是自性。因此,这句话是在问:以什么意义、以什么自性、以什么特征而被称为有学?然而,由于是在证得有学法之后,于补特伽罗上才施设了“有学”这一称谓,故说“由获得有学法故,为有学”。有学法,即是在四圣道中,以及在较低的三果(初果、二果、三果)中的正见等法。因此他说:“凭借有学的正见……比丘仅以此,便成为有学”。如是依阿毗达摩教理开示了有学的特征之后,现在为依经教教理加以开示,而宣说“再者”等语。在此,“他学习”一语,是显示具足三学、但学业尚未完成者为有学。因此他说“他学习”等。此处,“他学习、他学习”的重复,是为了显示与诸学恒常相应。或者,“学习”本身即是“学”,他以学为习性,故称有学。因其学业未竟,且心已倾向于此,所以唯独以学为习性。他不像无学者那样,学业已成,于学处已止息功用、心得轻安;也不像众多弃学的凡夫那样,于学处尚未生起倾向。或者,依圣种姓而生于三学之中,或存在于其中,故称有学。显示巴利原文
Kenaṭṭhenāti yasmā ñāṇena araṇīyato attho sabhāvo, tasmā kenaṭṭhena kena sabhāvena kena lakkhaṇena sekkho nāma hotīti attho. Yasmā pana sekkhadhammādhigamena puggale sekkhavohārappavatti, tasmā ‘‘sekkhadhammapaṭilābhato sekkho’’ti vuttaṃ. Sekkhadhammā nāma catūsu maggesu, heṭṭhimesu ca tīsu phalesu sammādiṭṭhiādayo. Tenāha ‘‘sekkhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā…pe… ettāvatā kho bhikkhu sekkho hotī’’ti. Evaṃ abhidhammapariyāyena sekkhalakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā idāni suttantikapariyāyenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sikkhatīti iminā sikkhāttayasamaṅgī apariniṭṭhitasikkho sekkhoti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘sikkhatī’’tiādi . Sikkhāhi niccasamāyogadīpanatthañcettha ‘‘sikkhati sikkhatī’’ti āmeḍitavacanaṃ. Atha vā sikkhanaṃ sikkhā, sā etassa sīlanti sekkho. So hi apariyositasikkhattā tadadhimuttattā ca ekantena sikkhanasīlo, na asekkho viya pariniṭṭhitasikkho tattha paṭippassaddhussukko, nāpi vissaṭṭhasikkho pacurajano viya tattha anadhimutto. Atha vā ariyāya jātiyā tīsu sikkhāsu jāto, tattha vā bhavoti sekkho. Atha vā ikkhati etāyāti ikkhā, maggaphalasammādiṭṭhi. Saha ikkhāyāti sekkho.
「顺随行道的圆满行者」:那条以戒等为起点、以观为终点,通往苦灭的出世间道,因其随顺之故,称为顺随行道;此人由于成就了此道,所以是圆满行者。如今,为了以补特伽罗为切入点来显示此道,故说「戒具足」等语。其中,「戒具足」指具足巴帝摩卡律仪戒。「于诸根守护根门者」:面对色等所缘时,通过那名为防护贪欲等生起的、对意根在内的诸根加以防护,而成为守护根门的人。「于食知量者」:在寻求资具等场合中,对食物能了知适当的限量。「专修警寤」:去除惛眠后,能够于日夜中投入业处作意,故为专修警寤者。然而,怎样才算专修警寤呢?为了说明这一点,而说了「初夜……乃至……而住」。正如所说:「怎样是于初夜后夜专修警寤者呢?在此,比丘于白天经由经行与禅坐,令心从种种障碍法中清净;于夜初分,也经由经行……乃至……令心得净。比丘,这便是于初夜后夜专修警寤者。」然而,在「认为,或不认为」这句话所涉及的应阐明之事上,所指的并非凡夫,因为前面已……显示巴利原文
Anulomapaṭipadāya paripūrakārīti yā sā sīlādikā vipassanantā dukkhanirodhagāminiyā lokuttarāya paṭipadāya anulomanato anulomapaṭipadā, tassā sampādanena paripūrakārīti. Idāni taṃ paṭipadaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlasampanno’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sīlasampannoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlena samannāgato, paripuṇṇapātimokkhasīlo vā. Pātimokkhasīlañhi idha ‘‘sīla’’nti adhippetaṃ padhānabhāvato. Rūpādiārammaṇesu abhijjhādīnaṃ pavattinivāraṇasaṅkhātena manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ pidhānena indriyesu guttadvāro. Pariyesanādivasena bhojane pamāṇajānanena bhojane mattaññū. Vigatathinamiddho hutvā rattindivaṃ kammaṭṭhānamanasikāre yuttatāya jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto. Kathaṃ pana jāgariyānuyogo hotīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pubbarattā…pe… viharatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘kathañca pubbarattāpararattaṃ jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto hoti? Idha bhikkhu divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi cittaṃ parisodheti, rattiyā paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ caṅkamena…pe… sodheti, evaṃ kho bhikkhu pubbarattāpararattaṃ jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto hotī’’ti (vibha. 519). Imasmiṃ panattheti ‘‘maññati, na maññatī’’ti ca vattabbabhāvasaṅkhāte atthe. No puthujjano adhippeto ‘‘appattamānaso, anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ patthayamāno’’ti ca vuttattā.
因为与心相应、存在于意中,所以贪爱是「意所生的」。或者将心意本身当作「意所」,如此则心即为意所。再者,能无余地将慢系缚、断除,所以最上道称为「能断慢者」。然而,由于它产生了阿拉汉果,故应知此阿拉汉果也具有「意所」的意义。「于众人中」的意思是:在众人、在一切众生世间中声名远播、享有盛誉。显示巴利原文
Sampayuttattā manasi bhavoti rāgo mānaso, mano eva mānasanti katvā cittaṃ mānasaṃ, anavasesato mānaṃ sīyati samucchindatīti aggamaggo mānasaṃ, tannibbattattā pana arahattassa mānasatā daṭṭhabbā. Janesutāti jane sakalasattaloke vissutā, patthaṭayasāti attho.
没有比此更上的,故为「无上」。而那最为殊胜者,必定是绝对独特、无可比拟的,因此说:「无上即是最胜、无比」。「希求者」:即正在渴爱的人。「虚妄愿求」:指由慢所生的种种虚妄意愿。其用意是:无论在哪种对象上生起了爱著、渴望与虚妄计度,就在那同一个对象上,便会生起「我胜于他」等慢的虚妄愿求。「已被动摇的」:即被极度左右。「于虚妄构造的诸境」:指对经由爱与邪见虚构出来的种种所缘。「流」:指烦恼流。因为当那烦恼流被切断时,其他的流转也随之被切断了。「已破灭的」:指已被破坏。为了强调即使是微细的动摇也已被彻底清除,所以说「已化为坏灭」,意思是使其毫无剩余。在这里,所要表达的意愿在「倾向」一词中更为显著,所以才说「心倾向彼」等等,这并非指善法的欲求本身即为倾向的状态。「促使倾向」:即产生信受与理解。显示巴利原文
Natthi ito uttaranti anuttaraṃ. Taṃ pana sabbaseṭṭhaṃ hontaṃ ekantato sadisarahitameva hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ,asadisanti attho’’ti. Patthayamānassāti taṇhāyantassa. Pajappitānīti mānajappanāni. Yasmiñhi vatthusmiṃ taṇhāyanā patthayamānamaññanā sambhavati, tasmiṃyeva ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādīni pajappitāni sambhavantīti adhippāyo. Pavedhītanti parivāsitaṃ. Pakappitesūti taṇhādiṭṭhikappehi parikappitesu ārammaṇesu. Sotanti kilesasotaṃ . Tasmiñhi chinne itarasotaṃ chinnamevāti. Viddhastanti vināsitaṃ. Tañca kho lomahaṃsamattampi asesetvāti dassento āha ‘‘vinaḷīkata’’nti, vigatāvasesaṃ katanti attho. Adhimuttiyā idhādhippetapatthanā pākaṭā hotīti ‘‘tanninno’’tiādi vuttaṃ, na pana kusalacchandassa adhimuttibhāvato. Adhimuccantoti okappento.
「于一切行相反转」:是指对于'净、乐、常'等一切应被执取的行相,由于它们全都呈现相反的面貌,即毫无遗漏地执取与诸法自性相反的行相,这就是它的意思。「以殊胜的智」:不像非正知与邪智那样,既未触及法之自性,也未超越它,而是以不偏离、直接面对法之自性的方式成就的殊胜智慧,也就是以'知遍知'为基础,包含部分的'度遍知'和部分的'断遍知'。因此他说:'地……乃至……已说'。「地之状态」:指于地中应被了知的状态。此处所指为'相地'。然而,它应以'无常'等方式来遍知。「已了知后」:即以知遍知、度遍知、断遍知及下位的世间道智,如此了知之后。「认为我」:其中,由未断除的妄想而执取'是我'的,称为'mā';由已断除的妄想而不再执取的,称为'amaññī'。他兼具'mā'与'amaññī',故称为'māmaññī'。这是从词的分拆来了解意义。在此,由于'不执取'的一面,不能说他是'执取'显示巴利原文
Sabbākāraviparītāyāti ‘‘subhaṃ sukhaṃ nicca’’ntiādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ attanā gahetabbākārānaṃ vasena tabbiparītatāya, anavasesato dhammasabhāvaviparītākāragāhiniyāti attho. Abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇenāti asampajānanamicchājānanāni viya na dhammasabhāvaṃ appatvā nāpi atikkamitvā, atha kho avirajjhitvā dhammasabhāvassa abhimukhabhāvappattiyā abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena, ñātapariññādhiṭṭhānāya tīraṇapariññāya pahānapariññekadesena cāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘pathavīti…pe… vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Pathavībhāvanti pathaviyaṃ abhiññeyyabhāvaṃ. Lakkhaṇapathavī hi idhādhippetā, pariññeyyabhāvo panassā ‘‘aniccātipī’’tiādinā gahitoti. Abhiññatvāti ñātatīraṇapahānapariññāhi heṭṭhimamaggañāṇehi ca abhijānitvā. Māmaññīti appahīnānaṃ maññanānaṃ vasena māti maññatīti mā, pahīnānaṃ pana vasena na maññatīti amaññī, mā ca so amaññī ca māmaññīti evamettha padavibhāgato attho veditabbo. Tattha yena bhāgena amaññī, tena maññīti na vattabbo. Yena pana bhāgena maññī, tena amaññīti na vattabboti. Evaṃ paṭikkhepappadhānaṃ atthaṃ dassetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘maññī ca na maññī ca na vattabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭikkhepappadhānatā cettha labbhamānānampi maññanānaṃ dubbalabhāvato veditabbā. Tenevāha – ‘‘itarā pana tanubhāvaṃ gatā’’ti. Māti ca nipātapadametaṃ, anekatthā ca nipātāti adhippāyena ‘‘etasmiñhi atthe imaṃ padaṃ nipātetvā vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Nipātetvāti ca pakatiādivibhāganiddhāraṇe anumānanayaṃ muñcitvā yathāvutte atthe paccakkhatova dassetvāti attho. Puthujjano viyāti etenassa uparimaggavajjhataṇhāmānavasena maññanā na paṭikkhittāti dīpeti.
或者,「莫认为」:这是遮止虚妄分别的语句,如同在「莫伤害、莫衰老」等句子中一样,意思是「不应认为」。确实,凡夫因为一切妄想都未断除,只能说「认为」;而漏尽者因为一切妄想已断除,完全不「认为」;但有学则不是这样。对他而言,一部分妄想已断除,另一部分未断除,因此由于具备双重状态,他既不可被说为「认为」,也不可被说为「不认为」。难道不因其双重状态,便可从两方面说吗?答:不可。因为即使是那些未断除的妄想,在他身上也已变得微薄,由于更显著的妄想已缺失,仅凭那些微薄的妄想,他也不应被称为「认为」,更不必说已断除的了。因此,世尊说:「莫认为」。由此,论中说:「'莫认为'是遮止虚妄分别的语句,如同在'莫伤害、莫衰老'等句子中一样,意思是'不应认为'。」然而,有学的这种'不认为',是因为所依的对象仍属应被遍知,而不像无学那样,因已遍知而然。因为当某事物决定性地必须被遍知且能够被遍知时,于其上,凡夫式的认为便不可能生起,正如在相反的情形中一样。因此他说:「我说那是应被遍」显示巴利原文
Atha vā mā maññīti parikappakiriyāpaṭikkhepavacanametaṃ ‘‘mā randhayuṃ, mā jīrī’’tiādīsu viya, na maññeyyāti vuttañhoti. Yathā hi puthujjano sabbaso appahīnamaññanattā ‘‘maññati’’cceva vattabbo, yathā ca khīṇāsavo sabbaso pahīnamaññanattā na maññati eva, na evaṃ sekkho. Tassa hi ekaccā maññanā pahīnā, ekaccā appahīnā, tasmā ubhayabhāvato ubhayathāpi na vattabbo. Nanu ca ubhayabhāvato ubhayathāpi vattabboti? Na. Yā hi appahīnā, tāpissa tanubhāvaṃ gatāti tāhipi so na maññeyya vibhūtatarāya maññanāya abhāvato, pageva itarāhi. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘mā maññī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mā maññīti parikappakiriyāpaṭikkhepavacanametaṃ ‘mā randhayuṃ, mā jīrī’tiādīsu viya, na maññeyyāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Ayañcassa amaññanā vatthuno pariññeyyattā, na asekkhassa viya pariññātattā. Yañhi ekantato parijānitabbaṃ parijānituṃ sakkā, na tattha tabbidhure viya puthujjanassa maññanā sambhavanti. Tenāha ‘‘pariññeyyaṃ tassāti vadāmī’’ti.
「已入决定者」:指已进入正性决定,即已入道流之意。「以菩提为归趣者」:指以上层道菩提为皈依处,即为了证得它而倾向、低垂、朝向的状态。两者合起来,显示他必将证得剩余的遍知。「应遍知者」:指处于应被遍知的状态,或是能被遍知的。与此相对的是不应遍知。「如同凡夫」一词表明,此处的凡夫对于应遍知的状态毫无疑虑,因为他们没有资格。对于「莫欢喜」一词,也应按同样的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Okkantaniyāmattāti anupaviṭṭhasammattaniyāmattā, otiṇṇamaggasotattāti attho. Sambodhiparāyaṇattāti uparimaggasambodhipaṭisaraṇattā, tadadhigamāya ninnapoṇapabbhārabhāvatoti attho. Ubhayenapi tassa avassaṃbhāvinī sesapariññāti dasseti. Pariññeyyanti parijānitabbabhāvena ṭhitaṃ, pariññātuṃ vā sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Tappaṭipakkhato apariññeyyaṃ. Puthujjanassa viyāti etena idhādhippetaputhujjanassa pariññeyyabhāvāsaṅkā eva natthi anadhikāratoti dasseti. ‘‘Mābhinandī’’ti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
漏尽者品第三等理趣的解释。显示巴利原文
Khīṇāsavavāratatiyādinayavaṇṇanā
8 「同类」:因见谛等共同性而称为同类。在依词源学方式解释了“由远离烦恼故称为阿拉汉”之后,为使说明与经文一致,才说“此亦已说”等。其中,“恶”:因低劣义及导致恶趣义,故名为恶。“不善”:因有过失义及由不善巧所生义,故名为不善。“有染污”:能导致染污,或系着于染污,故名为有染污。“再有”:有造作后有之习性,或能获得后有之果,故名为再有。“有恼”:与恼害、热恼俱起,故名为有恼。“苦异熟”:因这些异熟是苦、辛辣的,或是苦即为异熟,故名为苦异熟。“生老死法”:因这些法令未来生及老死增长,故名为生老死法。应当如此理解这些词的涵义。虽然这是经的注释,但阿毗达摩的理趣毫无遗漏,为显示此点而说“四漏”等。“已断已安息”:不仅彻底断尽,且亦已安息,这是为了指出果的作用与道的作用相似。显示巴利原文
8.Sabhāgo diṭṭhasaccatādisāmaññena. Ārakā kilesehi arahanti padassa niruttinayena atthaṃ vatvā taṃ pāḷiyā samānento ‘‘vuttañceta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha pāpakāti lāmakaṭṭhena duggatisampāpanaṭṭhena ca pāpakā. Sāvajjaṭṭhena akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena ca akusalā. Saṃkilesaṃ arahanti, tattha vā niyuttāti saṃkilesikā. Punabbhavassa karaṇasīlā, punabbhavaphalaṃ arahantīti vā ponobhavikā. Saha darathena pariḷāhena pavattantīti sadarā. Dukkho kaṭuko, dukkhamo vā vipāko etesanti dukkhavipākā. Anāgate jātiyā ceva jarāmaraṇānañca vaḍḍhanena jātijarāmaraṇiyāti. Evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo. Kāmañcāyaṃ suttantavaṇṇanā, abhidhammanayo pana nippariyāyoti tena dassento ‘‘cattāro āsavā’’tiādimāha. Samucchinnā paṭippassaddhāti na kevalaṃ samucchinnā eva, atha kho paṭippassaddhāpīti maggakiccena sadisaṃ phalakiccampi niddhāreti.
「尊长共住」(garusaṃvāso):依止净戒等,随学尊长们的行为,是为尊长共住。圣道的修行本身即是「圣道共住」(ariyamaggasaṃvāso)。所谓「十种圣居」(dasa ariyāvāsā),即五分已断等。对此,曾这样说:显示巴利原文
Sīlavisodhanādinā garūnaṃ paṭipattiyā anukaraṇaṃ garusaṃvāso. Ariyamaggapaṭipatti eva ariyamaggasaṃvāso. Dasa ariyāvāsā nāma pañcaṅgavippahīnatādayo. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ –
比丘们,有十种圣居,圣者们过去曾居住,现在正居住,或将居住。哪十种呢?比丘们,这里,比丘已断五支,具足六支,有一护,有四依,已舍离个别净信,已完全摒弃追求,思惟澄净,身行轻安,心善解脱,慧善解脱。比丘们,这就是十种圣居。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dasayime, bhikkhave, ariyāvāsā, ye ariyā āvasiṃsu vā āvasanti vā āvasissanti vā. Katame dasa? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti chaḷaṅgasamannāgato, ekārakkho, caturāpasseno, panuṇṇapaccekasacco, samavayasaṭṭhesano, anāvilasaṅkappo, passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro, suvimuttacitto, suvimuttapañño. Ime kho, bhikkhave, dasa ariyāvāsā’’ti (a. ni. 10.19).
「已住」:即圣道与圣果。阿拉汉因具足此诸法,依增语之方式,故被称为「住已成就者」。「所应作者」:指遍知、断、修、作证。而此应作,由于需以四圣道于四圣谛而成办,故知为十六种。因此说「以四道所应作」。「正解脱者」:由最上道果之智,以断尽、止息的方式而得完全解脱。「心寂静者」:由此,一切烦恼的逼迫与热恼皆已寂止的心。「已破烦恼的漏尽比丘」:因遍知等应作已办,更无造作,故说应作之事不复存在,无处可寻。显示巴利原文
Vussatīti vā vusitaṃ, ariyamaggo, ariyaphalañca, taṃ etassa atthīti atisayavacanicchāvasena arahā ‘‘vusitavā’’ti vutto. Karaṇīyanti pariññāpahānabhāvanāsacchikiriyamāha. Taṃ pana yasmā catūhi maggehi catūsu saccesu kattabbattā soḷasavidhanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catūhi maggehikaraṇīya’’nti. Sammāvimuttassāti aggamaggaphalapaññāhi samucchedapaṭippassaddhīnaṃ vasena suṭṭhu vimuttassa. Santacittassāti tato eva sabbakilesadarathapariḷāhānaṃ vūpasantacittassa. Bhinnakilesassa khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno. Katassa pariññādikiccassa paṭicayo puna karaṇaṃ natthi, tato eva karaṇīyaṃ na vijjati na upalabbhati.
「重担」:因具有令人下沉之义,如同重担,故称为重担。正如所说:「五蕴即是重担」等。「依自己如理作意」:系属于己,因属于自身相续之故,而不离于己。此性质虽于一切无过失法中皆有可能,然于不动性、不退法中最胜之阿拉汉果方为究竟,非余处所能及。为显此义,故说「或以自之第一义」,亦即最殊胜之状态。显示巴利原文
Bhārāti osīdāpanaṭṭhena bhārā viyāti bhārā. Vuttañhi ‘‘bhārā have pañcakkhandhā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.22). Attano yonisomanasikārāyattanti attupanibandhaṃ, sasantānapariyāpannattā attānaṃ avijahanaṃ. Tayidaṃ yadipi sabbasmiṃ anavajjadhamme sambhavati, akuppasabhāvāparihānadhammesu pana aggabhūte arahatte sātisayaṃ, netaresūti dassento āha ‘‘attano paramatthaṭṭhena vā’’ti, uttamaṭṭhabhāvenāti attho.
所谓「经说理趣」是指方便说;而「无余说理趣」则是以非方便说的方式显示诸结,所以说「有爱、慢、悭结」,而不说「色爱」等。「于诸有中结缚」的意思是:成为烦恼、业与异熟轮转的缘,以不给脱离的方式而加以系缚。因为即使其他法有作为彼缘的情况,但若没有结,那些法就不能成为他们的缘。被下分结和上分结所摄的那些结,会使各个有的结生业得以决定,并使有得以决定。而且,已经断除结的人,过去所作的业也不会再有产生。因此,只有这些才是「结」的意义,应当这样了解。显示巴利原文
Suttantanayo nāma pariyāyanayoti nippariyāyanayena saṃyojanāni dassento ‘‘bhavarāgaissāmacchariyasaṃyojana’’nti āha, na pana ‘‘rūparāgo’’tiādinā. Bhavesu saṃyojantīti kilesakammavipākavaṭṭānaṃ paccayo hutvā nissarituṃ appadānavasena bandhanti. Satipi hi aññesaṃ tappaccayabhāve na vinā saṃyojanāni tesaṃ tappaccayabhāvo atthi, orambhāgiyauddhambhāgiyasaṅgahitehi ca tehi taṃtaṃbhavanibbattakakammaniyamo bhavaniyamo ca hoti , na ca upacchinnasaṃyojanassa katānipi kammāni bhavaṃ nibbattentīti tesaṃyeva saṃyojanaṭṭho daṭṭhabbo.
「正胜智」:即依能了知的最上道慧,如实了知于苦等中应如何了知,并依此了知之后。「心解脱」:即一切心染污的舍离。「涅槃胜解」:即于涅槃胜解,向之倾向、低垂、朝向。「彼」:指地等一切。「已遍知」:并非如凡夫那样未遍知,亦非如有学那样仍应遍知。是故,“因此”即是因已遍知之义。显示巴利原文
Sammā aññāyāti ājānanabhūtāya aggamaggapaññāya sammā yathābhūtaṃ dukkhādīsu yo yathā jānitabbo, taṃ tathā jānitvā. Cittavimutti sabbassa cittasaṃkilesassa vissaggo. Nibbānādhimutti nibbāne adhimuccanaṃ tattha ninnapoṇapabbhāratā. Tanti pathavīādikaṃ. Pariññātaṃ, na puthujjanassa viya apariññātaṃ, sekkhassa viya pariññeyyaṃ vā. Tasmāti pariññātattā.
第四、第五、第六回,因在诸处通过烦恼与涅槃的陈述而展开,故称“涅槃回”。其中,由于遍知地等,故不妄想;而此遍知乃由贪等灭尽而成就。为阐明此义,经文如此展开:应将“遍知了彼”与一切词相连接,再连至“由贪灭尽而离贪”,其余二者亦应如是连接。若实如此,为何经文中未见此连接?对此他说:“因于一处所说之教法,于一切处即等于已说,故为略说。”其中,“其余二者”指第五与第六回。显示巴利原文
Catutthapañcamachaṭṭhavārā tattha tattha kilesanibbānakittanavasena pavattattā nibbānavārā nāma. Tattha pathavīādīnaṃ pariññātattā amaññanā, sā pana pariññā rāgādīnaṃ khayena siddhāti imassa atthassa dīpanavasena pāḷi pavattāti dassento ‘‘pariññātaṃ tassāti sabbapadehi yojetvāpunakhayā rāgassa vītarāgattāti yojetabbaṃ. Esa nayo itaresū’’ti āha. Tattha itaresūti pañcamachaṭṭhavāresu. Yadi evaṃ kasmā pāḷi evaṃ na dissatīti āha ‘‘desanā pana ekattha vuttaṃ sabbattha vuttameva hotīti saṃkhittā’’ti.
“非由贪灭尽而离贪”,这是因为贪尚未完全断除,此处指已镇伏贪者。而且,此处特别提及外道,乃因他们可获得此种状态,并非唯于那些处有此状态可获。现在,为显示涅槃回的意义连接,即使未如前将“遍知了彼”与一切词相连,也说了“正如……”等。其中,“于妄想而不妄想”是指妄想不再转起。虽可缘取妄想,但在此,由于他们所妄想的事物已含于所缘中,故应如此理解此义。显示巴利原文
Na khayā rāgassa vītarāgo sabbaso appahīnarāgattā. Vikkhambhitarāgo hi soti. Bāhirakaggahaṇañcettha tathābhāvasseva tesu labbhanato, na tesu eva tathābhāvassa labbhanato. Idāni yā sā ‘‘pariññātaṃ tassā’’ti sabbapadehi yojanā vuttā, taṃ vināpi nibbānavāraatthayojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha maññanaṃ na maññatīti maññanā nappavattatīti attho. Maññanāya maññitabbattepi tassā vatthuantogadhattāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
虽然有关涅槃的开示并未直接使用“遍知”一词,但通过“灭尽”等词,遍知的成就也已被显示出来。因此,面对“它们之间有何差别”的质问,才说“而在此……”等。这是为了显示道修习的圆满,因为道的功用之终极即是遍知。其余(……)应知是对离贪等的陈述。或者,通过前面所说的两种原因,来说明这位漏尽者的差别。虽然漏尽者绝对是离贪、离嗔、离痴的,但为了显示他们是依于何种前行道而被称为有差别的离贪者等,才说了“在三者中……”等。观察贪的过患,如“染著者不了知义”等,并认识到:“所谓贪,是由乐著而生,乐则因变易而成为苦,其他更不必说”,这种对有因的贪观察过患,便成为苦随观的征相;苦随观由于是与之对立的誓愿,故能圆满无愿解脱,因此说:“于贪……成为离贪者。”同样,观察嗔的过患,如“嗔怒者不了知义”等,并认识到:“所谓嗔,是缘苦而生,此二者皆不稳固、短暂、会坏灭”,这种对有因的嗔观察过患,便成为无常随观的征相;无常随观由于是与之对立的常相等,故能圆满无相解脱。显示巴利原文
Yadipi pariññātapadaṃ aggahetvā nibbānavāradesanā pavattā, evampi ‘‘khayā’’tiādipadehi pariññāsiddhi eva pakāsīyatīti ko tesaṃ visesoti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Maggabhāvanāpāripūridassanatthaṃ vutto, maggakiccantā hi pariññāyoti adhippāyo. Itare…pe… veditabbā vītarāgādikittanatoti. Dvīhi vā kāraṇehīti yathāvuttakāraṇadvayena. Assāti khīṇāsavassa. Ayaṃ visesoti idāni vuccamāno viseso. Yadipi khīṇāsavo ekantena vītarāgo vītadoso vītamoho eva ca hoti, yāya pana pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya vītarāgatādayo savisesāti vattabbataṃ labhanti, taṃ dassento ‘‘tīsu hī’’tiādimāha . ‘‘Ratto atthaṃ na jānātī’’tiādinā (netti. 11) rāge ādīnavaṃ passato ‘‘rāgo ca nāma sukhābhisaṅgena uppajjati, sukhañca vipariṇāmato dukkhaṃ. Pageva itara’’nti sahetuke rāge ādīnavadassanaṃ dukkhānupassanāya nimittaṃ, dukkhānupassanā ca paṇidhiyā paṭipakkhabhāvato appaṇihitavimokkhaṃ paripuretīti āha ‘‘rāge…pe… vītarāgo hotī’’ti. Tathā ‘‘duṭṭho atthaṃ na jānātī’’tiādinā (itivu. 88) dose ādīnavaṃ passato ‘‘doso ca nāma dukkhaṃ paṭicca uppajjati, tañca ubhayaṃ anavaṭṭhitaṃ ittaraṃ pabhaṅgū’’ti sahetuke dose ādīnavadassanaṃ aniccānupassanāya nimittaṃ, aniccānupassanā ca niccanimittādīnaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato animittavimokkhaṃ paripūretīti āha ‘‘dose…pe… hotī’’ti. Tathā ‘‘mūḷho atthaṃ na jānātī’’tiādinā (itivu. 88) mohe ādīnavaṃ passato ‘‘moho nāma yathāsabhāvaggahaṇassa paribbhamanto’’ti mohassa vikkhambhanaṃ anattānupassanāya nimittaṃ, anattānupassanāya ca attābhinivesassa paṭipakkhabhāvato suññataṃ vimokkhaṃ paripūretīti āha ‘‘mohe…pe… vītamoho hotī’’ti.
若如此:若离贪等是依解脱的差别而说,则如此。因此:由于并未依解脱门与解脱而作定说,所以才说:“凡阿拉汉之任何可能,皆分别而说。”——也就是作了三次开示。为了显示此义,而说了“阿拉汉的……”等。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ santeti yadi vītarāgatādayo vimokkhavibhāgena vuttā, evaṃ sante. Tasmāti yasmā vimokkhamukhavimokkhānaṃ vasena niyametvā na vuttaṃ, tasmā. Yaṃ kiñci arahato sambhavantaṃ vibhajitvā vuccatīti vārattayadesanā katāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yaṃ arahato’’tiādinā.
这样,依解脱的差别显示了漏尽者的差别,并关联到三次开示之后,现在为了显示在未作差别的情况下,遍知的范围与随眠的范围仍有差别及其关联,于是说“以无差别……”等。其中,特别说到:在“诸行是苦”之中,舍受是愚痴的所依,故说“诸行……愚痴”。其余部分,依前已说明的道理,便容易了知。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vimuttivibhāgena khīṇāsavassa vibhāgaṃ vārattayadesanānibandhanaṃ dassetvā idāni avibhāgenapi tattha pariññāvisayassa anusayavisayassa ca vibhāgaṃ tassa nibandhanaṃ dassento ‘‘avisesenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha upekkhāvedanā visesato saṅkhāradukkhaṃ sammohādhiṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāra…pe… moho’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva.
关于如来的“第七理”的注释。显示巴利原文
Tathāgatavārasattamanayavaṇṇanā
12 为了显示那些作为殊胜功德之相、令世尊得以称为“如来”的功德差别,而说“世尊由八种原因而为如来”等语。实则世尊所有名称,皆以功德为其特征。正如所说:显示巴利原文
12. Yehi (dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 1.7.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.170) guṇavisesehi nimittabhūtehi bhagavati ‘‘tathāgato’’ti ayaṃ samaññā pavattā, taṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Guṇanemittakāneva hi bhagavato sabbāni nāmāni. Yathāha –
“大仙之名号无量,悉随功德而立;
纵有上千种名号,我所举者,唯取自功德之名。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāmasahassato’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1313; udā. aṭṭha. 53; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.76; dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 1.7.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.170) –
在“Tathā āgato”(如来)一词中,此处的“tathā”(如)是通过确定特征来设立比喻的;“āgata”(来)一词,因为共相的说明可安立于殊胜处,所以是指依修行道而“来”,并非像“tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgato”(已来入如来之相)等句中那样指智通达的意思,也不是像“大沙门已来到摩揭陀国的耆利跋耆族”等句中那样指身体行来等意思。在这里,当“如”一词的用意是通过确定特征来设立比喻时,因为以悲悯为上首,故由大悲门,将过去诸佛的来路作为范例,从共相上显示。由于关系代词(yaṃ, taṃ)之间有必然关联,所以先以普遍的方式说:“如同一切世间……都已到来”;接着,为了依据《大品经》等处多次详细宣说、广为人知且与我们邻近的毗婆尸等六位正自觉者,而将此道显示得更为清晰,于是说:“如同世尊毗婆尸……”等等。这里的“以何种发愿”,是指具足人身、性别成就、因缘、见导师、出家、神通等功德成就、管理、意欲这八个条件的“身决定”与“大决定”。因为一切正自觉显示巴利原文
Tathā āgatoti ettha ākāraniyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhatīti paṭipādagamanattho āgata-saddo, na ñāṇagamanattho ‘‘tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.12; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.78; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170; udā. aṭṭha. 18; itivu. aṭṭha. 38; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.1.3; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 2.bāhiranidāna; mahāni. aṭṭha. 14) viya, nāpi kāyagamanādiattho ‘‘āgato kho mahāsamaṇo, māgadhānaṃ giribbaja’’ntiādīsu (mahāva. 63) viya. Tattha yadākāraniyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo, taṃ karuṇāppadhānattā mahākaruṇāmukhena purimabuddhānaṃ āgamanapaṭipadaṃ udāharaṇavasena sāmaññato dassento yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ ekantasambandhabhāvato ‘‘yathā sabbaloka…pe… āgatā’’ti sādhāraṇato vatvā puna taṃ paṭipadaṃ mahāpadānasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 2.4) sambahulaniddesena supākaṭānaṃ āsannānañca vipassīādīnaṃ channaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ vasena dassento ‘‘yathā vipassī bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yena abhinīhārenāti manussatta-liṅgasampatti-hetu-satthāradassana-pabbajjā-abhiññādiguṇasampatti-adhikāra-chandānaṃ vasena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena kāyapaṇidhānamahāpaṇidhānena. Sabbesañhi sammāsambuddhānaṃ kāyapaṇidhānaṃ imināva nīhārena samijjhatīti.
如此,依大誓愿解释了“如来”一词的意义之后,现在为了依波罗蜜圆满来显示其义,又说:“或者,如同世尊毗婆尸……如同世尊迦叶,圆满了布施巴拉密后……”等等。在此处,为了使经师们对大菩提乘的修行生起善巧,本应讲述波罗蜜论;但这部分义理在《所行藏经注》(所行藏·杂集论)中已详尽无遗地解说,因此有意了解者,应依彼处所说的方法去理解。正如过去的毗婆尸等正自觉者,立足于誓愿成就,以极清净的修行无遗地圆满了一切波罗蜜,我们的世尊也同样圆满了。为阐明此义,才说“圆满了三十种波罗蜜”。虽然舍弃肢节等行为本属布施巴拉密,但为显示其殊胜的施舍特征与极难行处,特单独举出“五种大舍弃”;同样,为显示与舍弃肢节不同的特征,也特举出“施舍眼睛”;虽同属放弃对事物的执著,却仍别别举出区别于舍财物、舍王位的“施舍妻子”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ mahābhinīhāravasena ‘‘tathāgato’’ti padassa atthaṃ vatvā idāni pāramīpūraṇavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā dānapāramiṃ pūretvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne suttantikānaṃ mahābodhiyānapaṭipadāya kosallajananatthaṃ pāramīkathā vattabbā, sā pana sabbākārasampannā cariyāpiṭakavaṇṇanāya (cariyā. pakiṇṇakakathā) vitthārato niddiṭṭhā, tasmā atthikehi tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Yathā pana pubbe vipassīādayo sammāsambuddhā abhinīhārasampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhāya suvisuddhāya paṭipadāya anavasesato sammadeva sabbā pāramiyo paripūresuṃ, evaṃ amhākampi bhagavā paripūresīti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘samattiṃ sapāramiyo pūretvā’’ti. Satipi aṅgapariccāgādīnaṃ dānapāramibhāve pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca ‘‘pañca mahāpariccāge’’ti visuṃ gahaṇaṃ, tatoyeva ca aṅgapariccāgato visuṃ nayanapariccāgaggahaṇampi kataṃ, pariggahapariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi dhanarajjapariccāgato puttadārapariccāgaggahaṇañca kataṃ.
成就神通与等至,并圆满往来等仪轨的那部分前行道,称为前瑜伽。在布施等本身之中,成就极为殊胜的修行,称为前行道,此行道被收录于《所行藏经》中。有些人则认为:发愿是前瑜伽,布施等实践,或以依身远离的独处修行为前行道。为阐明布施等、少欲等,以及轮回与涅槃的过患与利益,为安立、成熟众生于三种菩提而进行的说法,即是法开示。为利益亲属而行的善事,即是利益亲属行,那也全然出于悲悯。“等”字包含了利益世间行等。依业自有之智而运作,通过对无过失的职业、技艺、学问的熟悉,通过对蕴、处、界等的熟悉,以及对三相的推察,这样的智慧运作即是智慧行。然而,其实质就是智慧巴拉密,只是为了显示智慧资粮才单独列出。“俱胝”的意思是边际、极限,即“最高”之义。显示巴利原文
Gatapaccāgatikavattapūraṇādikāya pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya saddhiṃ abhiññāsamāpattinipphādanaṃ pubbayogo, dānādīsuyeva sātisayapaṭipattinipphādanaṃ pubbacariyā, sā cariyāpiṭakasaṅgahitā. Abhinīhāro pubbayogo, dānādipaṭipatti, kāyavivekavasena ekacariyā vā pubbacariyāti keci. Dānādīnañceva appicchatādīnañca saṃsāranibbānesu ādīnavānisaṃsānañca vibhāvanavasena sattānaṃ bodhittaye patiṭṭhāpanaparipācanavasena ca pavattā kathā dhammakkhānaṃ, ñātīnaṃ atthacariyā ñātatthacariyā, sāpi karuṇāya vaseneva. Ādi-saddena lokatthacariyādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Kammassakatañāṇavasena, anavajjakammāyatanasippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānaparicayavasena khandhāyatanādiparicayavasena, lakkhaṇattayatīraṇavasena ca ñāṇacāro buddhicariyā, sā pana atthato paññāpāramīyeva, ñāṇasambhāradassanatthaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Koṭīti pariyanto, ukkaṃsoti attho.
“修习、增广四念处”——这是句子的联结。其中,“修习”是指令其生起;“增广”是指令其增长。举出四念处等,是为了显示将修行之道推向究竟。或者,应将这些四念处等,视为本身就与观相应。在此,以“以何种发愿”等开示修行之道的起始,以“布施巴拉密”等开示中段,以“四念处”等开示终归。显示巴利原文
Cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāvetvā brūhetvāti sambandho. Tattha bhāvetvāti uppādetvā. Brūhetvāti vaḍḍhetvā. Satipaṭṭhānādiggahaṇena āgamanapaṭipadaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dasseti. Vipassanāsahagatā eva vā satipaṭṭhānādayo daṭṭhabbā. Ettha ca ‘‘yena abhinīhārenā’’tiādinā āgamanapaṭipadāya ādiṃ dasseti, ‘‘dānapāramī’’tiādinā majjhaṃ, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhāne’’tiādinā pariyosānanti veditabbaṃ.
“刚出生”是指:出生仅一瞬间,刚从承接过他的人手中脱出,而非刚刚离开母胎。因为这位大人刚出胎时,先由梵天们以金网承接;从梵天手中,四大天王又以羚羊皮垫承接;从四大天王手中,人们再用细布卷承接。从人们手中脱出后,他便站立于大地上。这正如世尊在《大本经》的开示中所说。
“白色伞盖”是指天界的白色宝盖。“被持举着”是指正在为人执持。在此须知,仅凭“伞盖”一词,实际上也已包含了宝刀等五种标帜物。因为在当时,剑、拂尘、孔雀翎扇、椰子叶扇、头巾等,皆与宝伞一并显现,不过当时只显现伞盖等物,并未显现执持伞盖等物的人。
“一切方”是指十方。这遍观一切方的行为,不应理解为发生在行走七步之后。因为,这位大人从人们手中脱出、站立于大地后,便望向东方。那里的天人们以香、花等供养,说道:“大人,此处无人能与您相等,更遑论胜过您!”他如此遍观了四方、四维、下方与上方的一切方向,于一切处皆不见有能与己等者,于是说出:“这是北方的最好…”显示巴利原文
Sampatijātoti muhuttajāto manussānaṃ hatthato muttamatto, na mātukucchito nikkhantamatto. Nikkhantamattañhi mahāsattaṃ paṭhamaṃ brahmāno suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tesaṃ hatthato cattāro mahārājāno ajinappaveṇiyā, tesaṃ hatthato manussā dukūlacumbaṭakena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitoti. Yathāha bhagavā mahāpadānadesanāyaṃ. Setamhi chatteti dibbasetacchatte. Anudhārīyamāneti dhārīyamāne. Ettha ca chattaggahaṇeneva khaggādīni pañca kakudhabhaṇṭānipi vuttānevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Khaggatālavaṇṭamorahatthakavālabījanīuṇhīsapaṭṭāpi hi chattena saha tadā upaṭṭhitā ahesuṃ, chattādīniyeva ca tadā paññāyiṃsu, na chattādiggāhakā. Sabbā ca disāti dasapi disā. Nayidaṃ sabbadisāvilokanaṃ sattapadavītihāruttarakālaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahāsatto hi manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā puratthimadisaṃ olokesi. Tattha devamanussā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā ‘‘mahāpurisa idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Evaṃ catasso disā, catasso anudisā; heṭṭhā, uparīti sabbā disā anuviloketvā sabbattha attanā sadisaṃ adisvā ‘‘ayaṃ uttarā disā’’ti tattha sattapadavītihārena agamāsi. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ. Aggoti sabbapaṭhamo. Jeṭṭho seṭṭhoti ca tasseva vevacanaṃ. Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavoti imasmiṃ attabhāve pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ byākāsi.
为了详细阐明“作为种种殊胜证得之前兆”这一略说的义理,现在以“凡…”等语进行广释。其中,“于此”的意思是——显示巴利原文
Anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvenāti saṃkhittena vuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yañhī’’tiādinā vitthārato dasseti. Tattha etthāti –
千辐千辋,
天众于虚空中持伞盖;
金柄拂尘拂扬不息,
却不见持拂尘与伞盖之人。 ——《经集》第693颂
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Anekasākhañca sahassamaṇḍalaṃ, Chattaṃ marū dhārayumantalikkhe; Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā, Na dissare cāmarachattagāhakā’’ti. (su. ni. 693);
对于此偈颂,一切知智于一切处无滞碍而行,故称“无碍智”;因此说“获得一切知无碍智”。同样,这位世尊也已去……作为前兆;这表明,降生时依自然法性而生起的殊胜,为一切菩萨所共通。因为这些是波罗蜜的果报。显示巴利原文
Imissā gāthāya. Sabbaññutaññāṇameva sabbattha appaṭihatacāratāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti āha ‘‘sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassā’’ti. Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato…pe… pubbanimittabhāvenāti etena abhijātiyaṃ dhammatāvasena uppajjanakavisesā sabbabodhisattānaṃ sādhāraṇāti dasseti. Pāramitānissandā hi teti.
“行走”(vikkamī)意为前行。“天神”(marū)指诸天。“平等、适合”(samā):因观察的平等而相同、相似。因为大士观察一方时,亦以同样方式观察其余各方,他的观察毫无障碍。或者,“samā”意为适合观察,无有偏斜。因为那时,菩萨面前的各方并未显现出丑陋、可怖、不适宜观察的不均衡之相。显示巴利原文
Vikkamīti agamāsi. Marūti devā. Samāti vilokanasamatāya samā sadisiyo. Mahāpuriso hi yathā ekaṃ disaṃ vilokesi, evaṃ sesadisāpi, na katthaci vilokane vibandho tassa ahosīti. Samāti vā viloketuṃ yuttā, visamarahitāti attho. Na hi tadā bodhisattassa virūpabībhacchavisamarūpāni viloketuṃ ayuttāni disāsu upaṭṭhahantīti.
如此,先以身体行走的含义,用“去”这个词解释了“如来”一词;接着,为从智慧行走的含义来显示它,便说“或者”等。其中,“以出离”是指以无贪为主的善心生起。因为在此,善法被称为出离,而非指出家等;他们所说的也是“初禅”。“舍离”即舍弃。“去”指证得、行道于更上的殊胜,这是它的含义。或者,“舍离”是因舍离的缘故,或以舍离为特征。因为这个“舍离”一词具有因与相的意义。由于舍离了爱欲等,故说为“去”,此处的“去”是通达,或仅是行道,并以舍离爱欲等为其特征。对于“破开”等,也应如此理解。“以无嗔”即依于慈。“以光明想”即通过令光明显著后作意,及令光明想现起。“以无散乱”即依于定。“以法抉择”即对善等诸法作如实确定。他们也说:“以有因有缘的名色抉择。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘tathā gato’’ti kāyagamanaṭṭhena gata-saddena tathāgata-saddaṃ niddisitvā idāni ñāṇagamanaṭṭhena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha nekkhammenāti alobhappadhānena kusalacittuppādena . Kusalā hi dhammā idha nekkhammaṃ, na pabbajjādayo, ‘‘paṭhamajjhāna’’nti (dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 1.7.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.170) ca vadanti. Pahāyāti pajahitvā. Gato adhigato, paṭipanno uttarivisesanti attho. Pahāyāti vā pahānahetu, pahānalakkhaṇaṃ vā. Hetulakkhaṇattho hi ayaṃ pahāya-saddo. Kāmacchandādippahānahetukaṃ ‘‘gato’’ti hettha vuttaṃ gamanaṃ avabodho, paṭipatti eva vā kāmacchandādippahānena ca lakkhīyatīti. Esa nayo padāletvātiādīsupi. Abyāpādenāti mettāya. Ālokasaññāyāti vibhūtaṃ katvā manasikaraṇena (dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 1.7.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā) upaṭṭhitaālokasañcānanena. Avikkhepenāti samādhinā. Dhammavavatthānenāti kusalādidhammānaṃ yāthāvanicchayena. ‘‘Sappaccayanāmarūpavavatthānenā’’tipi vadanti.
如此,通过舍离欲贪等盖,如同“于世间舍离贪求”等所说,以初禅的前行道显示了世尊的如来体性之后,现在为连同方法,以八等至与十八大观来显示它,便说“以智”等。因为,去除了那成为名色把握与度疑之缚的愚痴后,住于遍知的人,无常想等便得以成就;同样地,在禅那与等至中,以去除不喜乐为相而产生的喜悦也是如此。其中,“去除不喜乐后,证得禅那等”是等至与观去除不喜乐、破灭无明等的方法;而属于盖本质的无明,在更低下的诸盖中也已被包含,这是为了显示其次第。由于障碍进入等至安住的诸盖如同门扇,故说“打开盖的门扇”。如同在“夜间寻与伺之后,白天从事工作”所说之处,寻与伺犹如冒烟,故说“寻与伺之烟”。虽然初禅近行处已舍断了苦,第四禅近行处已舍断了乐,但此处意指更为殊胜的舍断,故说“以第四禅舍断乐与苦”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kāmacchandādinīvaraṇappahānena ‘‘abhijjhaṃ loke pahāyā’’tiādinā (vibha. 508) vuttāya paṭhamajjhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhagavato tathāgatabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni saha upāyena aṭṭhahi samāpattīhi aṭṭhārasahi ca mahāvipassanāhi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ñāṇenā’’tiādimāha. Nāmarūpapariggahakaṅkhāvitaraṇānañhi vinibandhabhūtassa mohassa dūrīkaraṇena ñātapariññāyaṃ ṭhitassa aniccasaññādayo sijjhanti, tathā jhānasamāpattīsu abhiratinimittena pāmojjena. Tattha ‘‘anabhiratiyā vinoditāya jhānādīnaṃ samadhigamo’’ti samāpattivipassanānaṃ arativinodanaavijjāpadālanādīni upāyo, uppaṭipāṭiniddeso pana nīvaraṇasabhāvāya avijjāya heṭṭhā nivaraṇesupi saṅgahadassanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Samāpattivihārappavesavibandhanena nīvaraṇāni kavāṭasadisānīti āha ‘‘nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā’’ti. ‘‘Rattiṃ anuvitakketvā anuvicāretvā divā kammante payojetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.251) vuttaṭṭhāne vitakkavicārā dhūmāyanāti adhippetāti āha ‘‘vitakkavicāradhūma’’nti. Kiñcāpi paṭhamajjhānupacāreyeva dukkhaṃ, catutthajjhānupacāre ca sukhaṃ pahīyati, atisayappahānaṃ pana sandhāyāha ‘‘catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ pahāyā’’ti.
“无常随观”:取无常、以及‘无常’而随观,即无常随观,这是执取有漏法(三地法)的无常性而转起的观之名。“常想”:于有为法中,以‘常、永恒’这种方式转起的邪想。应知这是以想为首,也包含了邪见与心。以下各项也依此类推。“厌离随观”:于诸行中以厌离的方式转起的随观。“喜”:伴有喜悦的渴爱。“离贪随观”:于诸行中以离贪的方式转起的随观。“灭随观”:对诸行之灭的随观。或者说,如同诸行确实灭尽,未来不再因后有而生起,这样随观便是灭随观。因此他说:‘以灭随观令其灭,而不是令其生起。’因为这时欲解脱智已变得强有力。“舍遣随观”:以舍遣的方式转起的随观,因为这是安住于审察。“执取”:以常等方式抓取。“密集想”:依相续、组合、作用、所缘而把一切执取为单一整体。“积集”:即造作。“特殊状态的出现”:即变异。“坚固想”:执取为稳固。“相”:依组合等密集,以及依各自作用的区分,而对诸行执取为有形体。“愿求”:即贪等愿望。从意义上,它是出于渴爱而对诸行的倾向。“执著”:即我见。显示巴利原文
Aniccassa, aniccanti ca anupassanā aniccānupassanā, tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññanti saṅkhatadhammesu ‘‘niccā sassatā’’ti evaṃpavattamicchāsaññaṃ. Saññāsīsena diṭṭhicittānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbijjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nandinti sappītikataṇhaṃ. Virāgānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya. Yathā vā saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva, āyatiṃ punabbhavavasena na uppajjanti, evaṃ anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Tenevāha ‘‘nirodhānupassanāya nirodheti, no samudetī’’ti. Muccitukamyatā hi ayaṃ balappattāti. Paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā, paṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā hi ayaṃ. Ādānanti niccādivasena gahaṇaṃ. Santatisamūhakiccārammaṇānaṃ vasena ekattaggahaṇaṃ ghanasaññā. Āyūhanaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ. Avatthāvisesāpatti vipariṇāmo. Dhuvasaññanti thirabhāvaggahaṇaṃ. Nimittanti samūhādighanavasena sakiccaparicchedatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ saviggahaggahaṇaṃ. Paṇidhinti rāgādipaṇidhiṃ. Sā panatthato taṇhāvasena saṅkhāresu ninnatā. Abhinivesanti attānudiṭṭhiṃ.
「增上慧法观」:以无常、苦等审察一切法。「执取坚实」:于非坚实中执取坚实,此为颠倒。「痴执」:执著“世间由自在所作等而生起”,此执著即是痴执。又有一说:以“我于过去世是否存在?”等方式生起的疑惑,亦是痴执。「阿赖耶执」:于诸行中执取其為庇护、皈依处。依据“乐于阿赖耶,喜于阿赖耶”之语,阿赖耶即是渴爱,而此渴爱本身以执著的方式现起于眼等、色等之中,即為阿赖耶执,此是某些论师的主张。「审察随观」:了知“如是之诸行被舍断”的智,即是审察随观。「离转起随观」:因远离转起,故称离转起,此即涅槃;于彼涅槃中,以所缘作意而生起随观,即是离转起随观,亦即种姓智。「结缚执」:以结缚的方式而住著于诸行。「见相应」:与见同生、同灭的同一处。「粗」:相较于上上道所断之烦恼而说为粗,否则,若以见断而言,第二道所断亦可称为粗。「细随行」:指微细的烦恼,此是相对于下下道所断而言。「一切烦恼」:指所余一切烦恼,盖于初道等处已断之烦恼,不复再断。显示巴利原文
Aniccadukkhādivasena sabbadhammatīraṇaṃ adhipaññādhammavipassanā. Sārādānābhinivesanti asāresu sāraggahaṇavipallāsaṃ. Issarakuttādivasena loko samuppannoti abhiniveso sammohābhiniveso. Keci pana ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhānantiādinā (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) pavattasaṃsayāpatti sammohābhiniveso’’ti vadanti. Saṅkhāresu leṇatāṇabhāvaggahaṇaṃ ālayābhiniveso. ‘‘Ālayaratā ālayasammuditā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.64, 67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 7, 8) vacanato ālayo taṇhā, sāyeva cakkhādīsu rūpādīsu ca abhinivisanavasena pavattiyā ālayābhinivesoti keci. ‘‘Evaṃvidhā saṅkhārā paṭinissajjīyantī’’ti pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanā. Vaṭṭato vigatattā vivaṭṭaṃ, nibbānaṃ, tattha ārammaṇakaraṇasaṅkhātena anupassanena pavattiyā vivaṭṭānupassanā, gotrabhū. Saṃyogābhinivesanti saṃyujjanavasena saṅkhāresu nivisanaṃ. Diṭṭhekaṭṭheti diṭṭhiyā sahajātekaṭṭhe pahānekaṭṭhe ca. Oḷāriketi uparimaggavajjhakilese apekkhitvā vuttaṃ, aññathā dassanena pahātabbāpi dutiyamaggavajjhehi oḷārikāti. Aṇusahagateti aṇubhūte. Idaṃ heṭṭhimamaggavajjhe apekkhitvā vuttaṃ. Sabbakileseti avasiṭṭhasabbakilese. Na hi paṭhamādimaggehi pahīnā kilesā puna pahīyantīti.
「坚硬性」:即硬的状态。「流动」:即液体的状态。如同被世间的风吹动,犹如风箱般胀起,由那种风使各各聚膨胀或僵硬,此即是“支持性”。当存在其他聚时,这些聚与其他聚相触,而彼此各各分离,由此形成色法之边际,称為“虚空”。对于那被划定界限者而言,它与那些為“不被触”;若非如此,诸大种的界限自性便不会是周遍的,因為若未周遍,则“不被触”即无法成立。所谓不被触,正是“不触相”。是故,世尊在解说虚空界时(《法集论》637)说:“不被四大种所触”。显示巴利原文
Kakkhaḷattaṃ kathinabhāvo. Paggharaṇaṃ dravabhāvo. Lokiyavāyunā bhastassa viya yena vāyunā taṃtaṃkalāpassa uddhumāyanaṃ, thaddhabhāvo vā, taṃ vitthambhanaṃ. Vijjamānepi kalāpantarabhūtānaṃ kalāpantarabhūtehi samphuṭṭhabhāve taṃtaṃbhūtavivittatā rūpapariyanto ākāsoti yesaṃ yo paricchedo, tehi so asamphuṭṭhova, aññathā bhūtānaṃ paricchedasabhāvo na siyā byāpībhāvāpattito, abyāpitāva asamphuṭṭhatāti yasmiṃ kalāpe bhūtānaṃ paricchedo, tehi asamphuṭṭhabhāvo asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ākāsadhātuniddese (dha. sa. 637) ‘‘asamphuṭṭhaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehī’’ti.
「恼害」:当与相违的缘会合时,生起不相似的状态。由于思心所是主导,故对于行蕴所属的诸法,是依思心所的作用而说“诸行具有造作相”。正如在论母分释的行蕴分别中(《分别论》92),以“眼触所生思”等语,唯对思心所作分别。而具造作相者即是思心所。即如所说:“此中,什么是福行?即属于欲界的善思”等。「遍满」:广大之状态。「于无信」:以无信為原因,此处是用处格表示原因,于懈怠等词句中亦同此理。「寂止相」:指能止息身心热恼的特性。当心在远离昏沉与掉举的增上心中活动时,对于策励、抑制及喜悦等功用不加干涉,保持平等旁观的念,此即由断除偏袒而生的审察。显示巴利原文
Virodhipaccayasannipāte visadisuppatti ruppanaṃ. Cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhadhammānaṃ cetanāvasenetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇa’’nti. Tathā hi suttantabhājanīye saṅkhārakkhandhavibhaṅge (vibha. 92) ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā cetanā’’tiādinā cetanāva vibhattā. Abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇā ca cetanā. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamo puññābhisaṅkhāro? Kusalā cetanā kāmāvacarā’’tiādi. Pharaṇaṃ savipphārikatā. Assaddhiyeti asaddhiyahetu. Nimittatthe bhummaṃ. Esa nayo kosajjetiādīsu. Upasamalakkhaṇanti kāyacittapariḷāhūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Līnuddhaccarahite adhicitte pavattamāne paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāvaṭatāya ajjhupekkhanaṃ paṭisaṅkhānaṃ pakkhapātupacchedato.
妄语等具有欺骗等作用,性质粗糙、不能摄持,而‘正语’与之对立,本性是能摄持的。因为正语性质润泽,能摄持与之相应的法、以正语为缘的善说以及听法之人,故说它具有‘摄持相’。身体的行动能发起某些应做的事,其本身生起即是行动,因此应理解为:名为‘正业’的远离具有‘发起相’。或者,它能提起、令生起相应诸法,犹如身体行动举起重物一般。对于一个活命的有情,或对于相应诸法的命根持续,或就活命本身,即是清净、净化。对于相应的心,不令其堕入杂染之边,而正确地使之振作,这就是‘策励’。显示巴利原文
Musāvādādīnaṃ visaṃvādanādikiccatāya lūkhānaṃ apariggāhakānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato pariggāhakasabhāvā sammāvācā siniddhabhāvato sampayuttadhamme sammāvācāpaccayasubhāsitānaṃ sotārañca puggalaṃ pariggaṇhātīti tassā pariggāhalakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Kāyikakiriyā kiñci kattabbaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, sayañca samuṭṭhahanaṃ ghaṭanaṃ hotīti sammākammanta saṅkhātāya viratiyā samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā ukkhipanaṃ samuṭṭhāpanaṃ kāyikakiriyāya bhārukkhipanaṃ viya. Jīvamānassa sattassa, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā jīvitindriyappavattiyā, ājīvasseva vā suddhi vodānaṃ. Sasampayuttadhammassa cittassa saṃkilesapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sammadeva paggaṇhanaṃ paggaho.
此处‘行’意指思心所,故说‘诸行以思为特相’。‘弯曲’是倾向所缘的状态。‘处’是转起。因为依于诸处,被称为‘意’的心与心所法才得以转起。‘渴爱的因相’指它是轮回的生起因;而‘道的因相’指它能令到达涅槃。这就是它们的差别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṅkhārā’’ti idha cetanā adhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇa’’nti. Namanaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhabhāvo. Āyatanaṃ pavattanaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ vasena hi āyasaṅkhātānaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ pavatti. Taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇanti vaṭṭassa janakahetubhāvo, maggassa pana nibbānasampāpakattanti ayametesaṃ viseso.
‘如实相’即不颠倒的自性。‘一味’是彼此不相超越、无减无增的状态。‘双运’即止与观。也有说是指信与慧、策励与安住。显示巴利原文
Tathalakkhaṇaṃ aviparītasabhāvo. Ekaraso aññamaññānativattanaṃ anūnānadhikabhāvo. Yuganaddhā samathavipassanāva. Saddhāpaññā paggahāvikkhepātipi vadanti.
「灭尽」——因断除烦恼、舍弃烦恼,故为灭尽,即道。「不生」——以不再生起为究竟,故为不生,即果。「轻安」即烦恼的止息。「欲的」指想要去做的欲。「根的特相」是作为安立处的状态。「生起的状态」即生起特相,由令所缘现前而成为相应法生起之因。「合会」——指以境等的聚集而应被把握的状态,也称作和合;或者说,相应法依之而平等、一同地安立,故称合会,也就是触。「摄入」即众法聚集于此,故称摄入。那些相应法若离受便不能转起,便如同为了体验受而被摄入一般,因此这样说。犹如椽子以屋脊为顶,相应诸法以彼为前导的状态,即是「首领的特相」。「从此更上」,意指相对于这些相应法,它是更殊胜、更首要的,因为善法以慧为最上。「解脱的」指果。此果是戒等功德精髓中最为超胜的状态,故称精髓。再者,这些特相的分类,应知是依循六界、五禅支等,随顺各别经文句,以及古疏所传的理路而作。同样,某些之前已说过的法,为显示另一层面的理趣,也会被再次指出。显示巴利原文
Khīṇoti kilese khepatīti khayo, maggo. Anuppādapariyosānatāya anuppādo, phalaṃ. Passaddhi kilesavūpasamo. Chandassāti kattukāmatāchandassa. Mūlalakkhaṇaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvo. Samuṭṭhānabhāvo samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ ārammaṇapaṭipādakatāya sampayuttadhammānaṃ uppattihetutā. Samodhānaṃ visayādisannipātena gahetabbākāro, yā saṅgatīti vuccati. Samaṃ saha odahanti anena sampayuttadhammāti vā samodhānaṃ, phasso. Samosaranti sannipatanti etthāti samosaraṇaṃ. Vedanāya vinā appavattamānā sampayuttadhammā vedanānubhavananimittaṃ samosaṭā viya hontīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Gopānasīnaṃ kūṭaṃ viya sampayuttānaṃ pāmokkhabhāvo pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ. Tato, tesaṃ vā sampayuttadhammānaṃ uttari padhānanti tatuttari, paññuttarā hi kusalā dhammā. Vimuttiyāti phalassa. Tañhi sīlādiguṇasārassa paramukkaṃsabhāvena sāraṃ. Ayañca lakkhaṇavibhāgo chadhātupañcajhānaṅgādivasena taṃtaṃsuttapadānusārena porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatanayena ca katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi pubbe vuttopi koci dhammo pariyāyantarapakāsanatthaṃ puna dassito. Tato eva ca ‘‘chandamūlakā kusalā dhammā manasikārasamuṭṭhānā phassasamodhānā vedanāsamosaraṇā’’ti, ‘‘paññuttarā kusalā dhammā’’ti, ‘‘vimuttisāramidaṃ brahmacariya’’nti, ‘‘nibbānogadhañhi āvuso brahmacariyaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.466) ca suttapadānaṃ vasena ‘‘chandassa mūlalakkhaṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
「如实法」即四圣谛,因其自性不颠倒。「如」,意为它们具有那样的自性。「不虚妄」,意为它们没有虚假的自性。「不异」,意为它们完全没有其他的相状。「为生缘所生、所集起的状态」——以生为缘,产生之后,对于具足者,随各自缘而向上转起的状态,意即随转。或者这样理解:所生的状态与所集起的状态,合称为所生所集起。老死不会离开生而存在,也不会从生之外的他处生起,这就是「为生缘所生」的意思。再者,它如此地从生而集起,故称「为生缘所集起」,意思是:不论什么样的生、以何种方式为缘,老死便随之相应地显现。「无明对行的缘相」也是如此:无明并非不是行的缘,行也不会在无无明的情形下生起;不论怎样的无明,对于哪些行、以何种方式为缘,此即无明对行的缘相,也就是缘性。显示巴利原文
Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni aviparītasabhāvattā. Tathāni taṃsabhāvattā. Avitathāni amusāsabhāvattā. Anaññathāni aññākārarahitattā. Jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭhoti jātipaccayā sambhūtaṃ hutvā sahitassa attano paccayānurūpassa uddhaṃ āgatabhāvo, anupavattanaṭṭhoti attho. Atha vā sambhūtaṭṭho ca samudāgataṭṭho ca sambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho, na jātito jarāmaraṇaṃ na hoti, na ca jātiṃ vinā aññato hotīti jātipaccayasambhūtaṭṭho. Itthañca jātito samudāgacchatīti jātipaccayasamudāgataṭṭho, yā yā jāti yathā yathā paccayo hoti, tadanurūpaṃ pātubhāvoti attho. Avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭhoti etthāpi na avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo na hoti, na ca avijjaṃ vinā saṅkhārā uppajjanti, yā yā avijjā yesaṃ yesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ yathā yathā paccayo hoti, ayaṃ avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho paccayabhāvoti attho.
其关联为:世尊以一切方式了知它、彻见它。「以此」即以此世尊。「这被分别的」应当如此配合理解。「它」指的是色处。「可爱、不可爱等」——「等」字包含了中性,也涵盖了过去、未来、现在、有限、内、外以及彼两者等种种分类。依可获得的语句:「色处是所见,声处是所闻,香处、味处、触处是所觉,一切色皆被意识所识知。」据此,在色所缘上,既可获得「所见」这个词,也可获得「所识知」这个词。色所缘即是可爱、不可爱、中性、有限、过去、未来、现在、内、外、所见、所识知、色、色处、色界、色彩、有形象、可见、有对、青色、黄色等,它拥有如此众多的名称。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā taṃ sabbākārato jānāti passatīti sambandho. Tenāti bhagavatā. Taṃ vibhajjamānanti yojetabbaṃ. Tanti rupāyatanaṃ. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīti ādi-saddena majjhattaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, tathā atītānāgatapaccuppannaparittaajjhattabahiddhātadubhayādibhedaṃ. Labbhamānakapadavasenāti ‘‘rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, saddāyatanaṃ sutaṃ, gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ mutaṃ, sabbaṃ rūpaṃ manasā viññāta’’nti (dha. sa. 966) vacanato diṭṭhapadañca viññātapadañca rūpārammaṇe labbhati, rūpārammaṇaṃ iṭṭhaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ majjhattaṃ parittaṃ atītaṃ anāgataṃ paccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā diṭṭhaṃ viññātaṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ rūpadhātu vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītakanti evamādīhi anekehi nāmehi.
「以十三转」——这是针对色蕴中出现的十三种解释转起而说的。在每一转中,依于对四项分别加以确定的理趣,而说为「以五十二理趣」。「如实」——因为具有不颠倒的见,且其教说不可退转故。应当知道:「我了知、我证知」的说法,显示了智在过去时和现在时的流转;由此也就等于宣说了智在未来时的流转。「识知」一词,应当理解为它并不区分时间阶段,就像在「所见、所闻、所觉」等用法中那样。「不现起」——就是不以我、我所的方式来执取。「如来」:如同色所缘等诸法,具有什么样的自性、什么样的样貌,他就那样地去看、去知、去行,所以称为如来。应当这样来理解其词义的成立。但也有些人解释说:依语源学的理趣,或者像「毕苏陀罗」那样的词形变化规则,省略了表示「见」的词根,而加上了表示「来」的音素,从而构成「如来」此称。显示巴利原文
Terasahi vārehīti rūpakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 616) āgate terasa niddesavāre sandhāyāha. Ekekasmiñca vāre catunnaṃ catunnaṃ vavatthāpananayānaṃ vasena ‘‘dvepaññāsāya nayehī’’ti āha. Tathameva aviparītadassitāya appaṭivattiyadesanatāya ca. ‘‘Jānāmi abhiññāsi’’nti vattamānātītakālesu ñāṇappavattidassanena anāgatepi ñāṇappavatti vuttāyevāti daṭṭhabbā. Vidita-saddo anāmaṭṭhakālaviseso veditabbo ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (dha. sa. 966) viya. Na upaṭṭhāsīti attattaniyavasena na upagacchi. Yathā rūpārammaṇādayo dhammā yaṃsabhāvā yaṃpakārā ca, tathā ne passati jānāti gacchatīti tathāgatoti evaṃ padasambhavo veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘niruttinayena pisodarādipakkhepena (pāṇini 6.3.109) vā dassi-saddassa lopaṃ, āgata-saddassa cāgamaṃ katvā tathāgato’’ti vaṇṇenti.
因无过失,故为「无可呵责」。因无有应添加者,故为「无不足」。因无有应去除者,故为「无多余」。因具足义理、文句等成就,故为「一切行相圆满」。「非他」即是「正是那样」,这是以遮止的方式成立前面所说的义理。以此表明:为了什么目的而说,即必然达成那个目的;因此,如同世尊所说,正是那样,这显示了其说法是不颠倒的。「说」之义——以此显示:他如实而说,故称如来。这里依语源学理趣,将「达」音转为「他」音。显示巴利原文
Niddosatāya anupavajjaṃ. Pakkhipitabbābhāvena anūnaṃ. Apanetabbābhāvena anadhikaṃ. Atthabyañjanādisampattiyā sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ. No aññathāti ‘‘tathevā’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ byatirekena sampādeti. Tena yadatthaṃ bhāsitaṃ, ekantena tadatthanipphādanato yathā bhāsitaṃ bhagavatā, tathevāti aviparītadesanataṃ dasseti. Gadaatthoti etena tathaṃ gadatīti tathāgatoti da-kārassa ta-kāro kato niruttinayenāti dasseti.
「他已那样去」故为如来。而「去」是指身和语的活动。当说「那样」时,由于「那」、「彼」等词有不虚妄的关联性,「随如」的意义便自然呈现出来。为了说明身行和语行,由于彼此随顺,想要说话时,身体与语言、语言与身体,以关联的状态一同呈现——为了说明这个意思,故说:「因为世尊……」等等。在这个意义里,由于他是那样说者,「如来」这个意义也成立。而这个意义先前已经用其他方式说明了,因此说:「像这样,因为他是那样作者,所以是如来。」显示巴利原文
Tathā gatamassāti tathāgato. Gatanti ca kāyavācāpavattīti attho. Tathāti ca vutte yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ abyabhicārisambandhitāya yathāti ayamattho upaṭṭhitoyeva hoti, kāyavacīkiriyānañca aññamaññānulomena vacanicchāyaṃ kāyassa vācā, vācāya ca kāyo sambandhībhāvena upatiṭṭhatīti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ pana atthe tathāvādītāya tathāgatoti ayampi attho siddho hoti. So pana pubbe pakārantarena dassitoti āha ‘‘evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato’’ti.
“在横向无量的世界界中”这句话,否定了某些人所说的“如同横向一样,上下方也有世界界存在”。所谓“说法的庄严本身”即“说法庄严时”,正如“福德所成”、“布施所成”等中的用法一样。显示巴利原文
Tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsūti etena yadeke ‘‘tiriyaṃ viya upari adho ca santi lokadhātuyo’’ti vadanti, taṃ paṭisedheti. Desanāvilāsoyeva desanāvilāsamayo yathā ‘‘puññamayaṃ, dānamaya’’ntiādīsu.
当不变化词与所说明的词共处时,由于不变化词是以显示其义的方式生起,因此“gata”一词本身既表达了知(avagata)义,也表达过去(atīta)义。故说:“gato”即了知、过去。显示巴利原文
Nipātānaṃ vācakasaddasannidhāne tadatthajotanabhāvena pavattanato gata-saddoyeva avagatatthaṃ atītatthañca vadatīti āha ‘‘gatoti avagato atīto’’ti.
或者,从发愿乃至正觉,其间在大菩提乘的道途上,没有退堕处、染污与退转,因此如其发愿而行,随顺发愿而行道,故称如来。或者,由于具大神力,以无碍解达到最上成就,又具备无碍智,于一切处无有障碍,因此身、语、意业皆如其意愿而运作、行进、生起,故称如来。又因为在世间,“种类”、“相应”、“已去”、“方式”等词被视为同义词,所以如同毗婆尸佛等诸世尊是“那样的种类”,此世尊亦是“那样的种类”,故为如来;如同那些世尊是“那样的相应”,此世尊亦是“那样的相应”,故为如来。或者,由于“真实、如实、如是”是智慧的同义语,以如是之智慧而来者,故为如来。“如来”一词的意义,亦应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Atha vā abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya yāva sammāsambodhi, etthantare mahābodhiyānapaṭipattiyā hānaṭṭhānasaṃkilesanivattīnaṃ abhāvato yathā paṇidhānaṃ, tathā gato abhinīhārānurūpaṃ paṭipannoti tathāgato. Atha vā mahiddhikatāya paṭisambhidānaṃ ukkaṃsādhigamena anāvaraṇañāṇatāya ca katthacipi paṭighātābhāvato yathā ruci, tathā kāyavacīcittānaṃ gatāni gamanāni pavattiyo etassāti tathāgato. Yasmā ca loke vidha-yutta-gata-ppakāra-saddā samānatthā dissanti. Tasmā yathāvidhā vipassīādayo bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tathāvidhoti tathāgato, yathāyuttā ca te bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tathāyuttoti tathāgato. Atha vā yasmā saccaṃ tacchaṃ tathanti ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā tathena ñāṇena āgatoti tathāgato. Evampi tathāgata-saddassa attho veditabbo.
他舍弃了贪欲等垢染,如其逝去一般,
毗婆尸佛等诸佛,以定与智而逝去;
大仙释迦牟尼,这位具足光辉者,
因为“如去”(tathā gato)之义,故称“如来”(tathāgato)。
并且,“如”(tathā)即如此,“界、处等相”(dhātāyatanādilakkhaṇa)指界、处等诸法的特相,
从自性、共相、分别与差别的角度,如实了知;
以自然智(sayambhuñāṇena)证得者,胜者(jino),
这位释迦族的最胜者,即称为如来。
以周遍眼(samantacakkhunā),如实(tathā)通达诸谛(saccāni),
也完全(sabbaso)如实通达此缘性(idappaccayatā);
因他是不依他人教导、自行阐明者,
因此,以如实(yāthāvato)的方式,那位胜者(jino)被称为如来(tathāgato)。
在种种品类各异的世间界中,
胜者于色处等诸所行境,
所见同样具足种种差别。
言语自然而出,因心已微细故;
正如往昔那些大仙以何等之方式,
那位胜者便以何等之方式,故称如来。
显示巴利原文 Pahāya kāmādimale yathā gatā, Samādhiñāṇehi vipassiādayo; Mahesino sakyamunī jutindharo, Tathā gato tena mato tathāgato. Tathañca dhātāyatanādilakkhaṇaṃ, Sabhāvasāmaññavibhāgabhedato; Sayambhuñāṇena jino samāgato, Tathāgato vuccati sakyapuṅgavo. Tathāni saccāni samantacakkhunā, Tathā idappaccayatā ca sabbaso; Anaññaneyyena yato vibhāvitā, Yāthāvato tena jino tathāgato. Anekabhedāsupi lokadhātusu, Jinassa rūpāyatanādigocare; Vicitrabhedaṃ tathameva dassanaṃ, Tathāgato tena samantalocano. Yato ca dhammaṃ tathameva bhāsati, Karoti vācāyanulomamattano; Guṇehi lokaṃ abhibhuyyirīyati, Tathāgato tenapi lokanāyako. Yathābhinīhāramato yathāruci, Pavattavācā tanucittabhāvato; Yathāvidhā yena purā mahesino, Tathāvidho tena jino tathāgatoti. (itivu. aṭṭha. 38; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7 cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā);
“Ārakattā”等语的含义,应依《清净道论》(1.125)佛随念注释所述的方法来理解。由“正是自己完全觉悟一切法”这句话,说明了不依他人教导、能以一切方式觉悟一切法、随其所欲而说,即证得称为无碍智的一切知智。显示巴利原文
Ārakattātiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.125) buddhānussatisaṃvaṇṇanāya vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattāti imināssa paropadesarahitassa sabbākārena sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthassa ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhavuttino anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa adhigamo dassito.
难道《如是语注》(38)不是说一切知智不同于无碍智吗?若非如此,“六不共智是佛智”这句话便成相违。其实并不相违,为了从所缘范围和转起方式的差别,显示其与其他不共智的不同状态,而对同一智作了两种说明。因为那唯一的智,以无余的有为法、无为法及假立法为所缘,故称一切知智;其中又因没有任何障碍、运转无滞,故称无碍智。正如《无碍解道》(1.119)所说:“遍知一切有为无为无余,故称一切知智;其中没有任何障碍,故称无碍智”等,因此,它们从义理上说并无差别。而且必须如此理解,否则一切知智与无碍智便会有障碍,且不以一切法为所缘。因为世尊的智甚至没有微尘许的障碍;若许无碍智不以一切法为所缘,则在它不转起之处就有障碍存在,那样也就不能成为无碍。或者,即使承认无碍智与一切知智是各别的,但在此处的上下文中,由于它在一切处都无碍地转起,所以便将一切知智本身指定为无碍智;因证得此智,世尊方被称为一切知者、一切见者、正自觉者,而不仅仅是因为一次通达了一切法。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca (itivu. aṭṭha. 38) sabbaññutaññāṇato aññaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, aññathā cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni buddhañāṇānīti vacanaṃ virujjheyyāti? Na virujjhati visayappavattibhedavasena aññehi asādhāraṇañāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ ekasseva ñāṇassa dvidhā vuttattā. Ekameva hi taṃ ñāṇaṃ anavasesasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatasammutidhammavisayatāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha ca āvaraṇābhāvato nissaṅgacāramupādāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti vuttaṃ. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.119) ‘‘sabbaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatamanavasesaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tatthāvaraṇaṃ natthīti anāvaraṇañāṇa’’ntiādi, tasmā natthi nesaṃ atthato bhedo, ekantena cetaṃ evamicchitabbaṃ, aññathā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇānaṃ sāvaraṇatā asabbadhammārammaṇatā ca āpajjeyya. Na hi bhagavato ñāṇassa aṇumatampi āvaraṇaṃ atthi, anāvaraṇañāṇassa ca asabbadhammārammaṇabhāve yattha taṃ nappavattati, tatthāvaraṇasabbhāvato anāvaraṇabhāvoyeva na siyā. Atha vā pana hotu aññameva anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇato, idha pana sabbattha appaṭihatavuttitāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti sabbaññutaññāṇameva adhippetaṃ, tassa cādhigamena bhagavā sabbaññū sabbavidū sammāsambuddhoti ca vuccati, na sakimeva sabbadhammāvabodhato. Tathā ca vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.162) ‘‘vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ buddho’’ti. Sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthañāṇasamadhigamena hi bhagavato santāne anavasesadhamme paṭivijjhituṃ samatthatā ahosīti.
于此,有人问:“这智在转起时,是一次性即以一切境为所缘而转起,还是次第而转起?”如果主张它一次性即以一切境为所缘而转起,那么,以过去、未来、现在、内、外等差别而区分的诸有为法,以及无为法、假立法,当它们同时现前时,就会像远远地看一幅图画一样,无法清晰分辨了知;这样,便有如下过失:如同修观者以“一切法无我”的无我相作观那样,世尊的智也以未加分辨的形态将一切法作为所缘。有些人说:“诸佛的智恒时以一切可知法的住立相为所缘,无分别而转起,因此他们被称为一切见者。这样也使‘行走时入定的龙,站立时也入定’这句话成为善说。”他们的理论也不能免除上述过失。因为如果以住立相为所缘,过去法、未来法及假立法则无住立相,如此一来,世尊的智便只以部分为所缘。因此,“智一次性转起”是不合理的。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – kiṃ panidaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattamānaṃ sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, udāhu kamenāti. Kiñcettha – yadi tāva sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, atītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhādibhedena bhinnānaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ asaṅkhatasammutidhammānañca ekajjhaṃ upaṭṭhāne dūrato cittapaṭaṃ avekkhantassa viya paṭivibhāgenāvabodho na siyā, tathā ca sati ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti vipassantānaṃ anattākārena viya sabbe dhammā anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇassa visayā hontīti āpajjati. Yepi ‘‘sabbañeyyadhammānaṃ ṭhitalakkhaṇavisayaṃ vikapparahitaṃ sabbakālaṃ buddhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tena te sabbavidūti vuccanti. Evañca katvā ‘caraṃ samāhito nāgo, tiṭṭhantopi samāhito’ti idampi vacanaṃ suvuttaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti, tesampi vuttadosānativatti. Ṭhitalakkhaṇārammaṇatāya hi atītānāgatasammutidhammānaṃ tadabhāvato ekadesavisayameva bhagavato ñāṇaṃ siyā, tasmā sakiṃyeva ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti na yujjati.
如果主张智是依次以一切领域为所缘而生起,这同样不合理。因为从种类、界域、本质等以及方位、处所、时间等方面的种种差别来看,所应知的事物种类繁多、差别不一,若一一依次执取,则由于所知无边无际,便不可能无遗地全然通达。至于认为“由于不违背真实义,先现证所知对象的一部分,再以胜解确定其余部分也是如此,由此世尊便是一切知者,且此智并非推论之智,因为它不含疑惑;而世间的推论之智总是与疑惑相伴”——这种说法也不合理。倘若并非一切对象皆是现证,那么通过不违背真实义,先现证一部分,再以胜解认定其余部分也是如此,这是无法成立的。因为被归为‘其余’的部分,就意味着它不是现证的;若它也是现证的,就根本不存在‘其余’的部分了。所有这些言论都站不住脚。何以故?因为这是不应思议的领域。世尊曾说过:‘比丘们,佛陀的境界是不应思议的,不应去思惟。若有人思惟,他将陷入迷乱与苦恼。’(《增支部》4.77)在此应当作出定论:无论世尊想要了知的是全体的或是一部分的对象,以其恒常处于等持状态的缘故,智都能以无碍生起的方式,现证而了知。显示巴利原文
Atha kamena sabbasmiṃ visaye ñāṇaṃ pavattati, evampi na yujjati. Na hi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne neyye kamena gayhamāne tassa anavasesapaṭivedho sambhavati apariyantabhāvato ñeyyassa. Ye pana ‘‘atthassa avisaṃvādanato ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanena sabbaññū bhagavā, tañca ñāṇaṃ ananumānikaṃ saṃsayābhāvato. Saṃsayānubandhañhi loke anumānañāṇa’’nti vadanti, tesampi taṃ na yuttaṃ. Sabbassa hi appaccakkhabhāve atthassa avisaṃvādanena ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanassa asambhavato. Yañhi taṃ sesaṃ, taṃ appaccakkhanti. Atha tampi paccakkhaṃ, tassa sesabhāvo eva na siyāti? Sabbametaṃ akāraṇaṃ. Kasmā? Avisayavicāraṇabhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘buddhavisayo bhikkhave, acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yo cinteyya, ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – yaṃ kiñci bhagavatā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ sakalamekadeso vā, tattha appaṭihatavuttitāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati, niccasamādhānañca vikkhepābhāvato, ñātuṃ icchitassa ca sakalassa avisayabhāve tassa ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhavuttitā na siyā, ekanteneva ca sā icchitabbā ‘‘sabbe dhammā buddhassa bhagavato āvajjanapaṭibaddhā ākaṅkhapaṭibaddhā manasikārapaṭibaddhā cittuppādapaṭibaddhā’’ti (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato. Atītānāgatavisayampi bhagavato ñāṇaṃ anumānāgamatakkagahaṇavirahitattā paccakkhameva.
有人会问:在这个主张之下,当世尊想要了知整体时,他的智岂不就会由于一时以整体为所缘,而以一种尚未分别的形态生起,从而仍然不能避免前面所说的过失吗?并非如此,因为这一领域已被清净。正是这个佛的境界被清净了,所以称之为不可思议。否则,如果诸佛世尊的智也像普通人的智那样运行,它就不会有不可思议的性质了。因此,即使以一切法为所缘,它也能像以单一法为所缘那样,将这些法完全地、清晰地安立后才生起——这正是此处不可思议的地方,而且智与所知一样,没有边际。正如所说:‘所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少;智以所知为边际,所知以智为边际’(《大义释》69, 156;《小义释》85;《无碍解道》3.5)。正是如此,无论是总合地、各别地、一时地或是次第地,都能随其所欲,由自己正确地觉悟一切法,所以称为‘正自觉者’。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca etasmimpi pakkhe yadā sakalaṃ ñātuṃ icchitaṃ, tadā sakiṃyeva sakalavisayatāya anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavatteyyāti vuttadosānativattiyevāti? Na, tassa visodhitattā. Visodhito hi so buddhavisayo acinteyyoti. Aññathā pacurajanañāṇasamānavuttitāya buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ ñāṇassa acinteyyatā na siyā, tasmā sakaladhammārammaṇampi taṃ ekadhammārammaṇaṃ viya suvavatthāpiteyeva te dhamme katvā pavattatīti idamettha acinteyyaṃ, anantañca ñāṇaṃ ñeyyaṃ viya. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyya’’nti (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Evamekajjhaṃ, visuṃ sakiṃ, kamena vā icchānurūpaṃ sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho.
其中,‘那(tanti)’是指前面所说的地等类别。‘遍知了(pariññātantaṃ)’是指周遍地、完全地、从一切方面了知了,也就是对于所应遍知的法,没有任何遗留而全部了知,这个意思。为了显示‘遍知了’这个词正是阐明了这个含义,便说‘遍知了名为……’等。‘以各各道断除烦恼没有什么差别’,这是就诸佛与声闻各自应该断除的烦恼,在每条道中即由那条道来断除的这一共通性而言的,并不是说声闻与诸佛在断烦恼的程度上没有差别。因为只有正自觉者能断尽随眠烦恼,声闻则不能。‘仅一分的’是指仅涉及自身相续的。即使仅仅遍知了自己相续所摄的法,也能圆满四谛业处的修习。因此他说:‘正是在这具足想与意、长约仅一寻的身躯之中,我宣说世间,也宣说世间的集’等等(《相应部》1.107;《增支部》4.45)。不会有‘无量’等过失……他们说,因为佛陀的大金刚智是以三十六亿十万种方式而生起的。显示巴利原文
Tanti yathāvuttaṃ pathavīādibhedaṃ. Pariññātanti parito samantato sabbākārato ñātaṃ, taṃ parijānitabbabhāvaṃ kiñci asesetvā ñātanti attho. Ayameva hi attho ‘‘pariññātanta’’nti imināpi padena pakāsitoti dassento ‘‘pariññātantaṃ nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tena tena maggena kilesappahānena viseso natthīti idaṃ taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ buddhānaṃ sāvakānañca tena tena maggeneva pahātabbabhāvasāmaññaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na sāvakehi buddhānaṃ kilesappahānavisesābhāvato. Tathā hi sammāsambuddhā eva savāsanakilese jahanti, na sāvakā. Ekadesamevāti attano santānagatameva. Sasantatipariyāpannadhammapariññāmattenapi hi catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanā samijjhati. Tenevāha – ‘‘imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca paññapemi lokasamudayañca paññapemī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni. 4.45). Aṇuppamāṇampi…pe… natthi, yato chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena buddhānaṃ mahāvajirañāṇaṃ pavattatīti vadanti.
如来品第八种方式的解释显示巴利原文
Tathāgatavāraaṭṭhamanayavaṇṇanā
13 「前际贪爱」:即在过去诸有中生起、作为现在这个有身之因的贪爱。并且,由于把握了这个词,属于过去时的无明与行,连同取也一起被包括在内,应当这样来理解。「此处」(ettha):指「从有而老死」这一句。「以那个再生有」:即「从有而老死」这一句中,以「老死」之名所称说的那个再生有。「对已生者」(bhūtassa):意为对已经出生的。然而,因为他被称为众生,所以表述为「众生的」。「如是以了知」:这是表明,在「对已生者,有老死」这一句中,也应当将「如是以了知」引来,与之结合而理解。显示巴利原文
13.Purimataṇhāti purimataresu bhavesu nibbattā paccuppannattabhāvahetubhūtā taṇhā. Taggahaṇeneva ca atītaddhasaṅgahā avijjāsaṅkhārā saddhiṃ upādānena saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā. Etthāti ‘‘bhavā jātī’’ti etasmiṃ pade. Tena upapattibhavenāti ‘‘bhavā jātī’’ti jātisīsena vuttaupapattibhavena. Bhūtassāti nibbattassa. So pana yasmā satto nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sattassā’’ti. Evañca jānitvāti iminā ‘‘bhūtassa jarāmaraṇa’’nti etthāpi ‘‘iti viditvā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ ānetvā yojetabbanti dasseti.
三界的五取蕴纵然也应按「凡所有色……」等方式(《分别论》2;《中部》1.244),被置于十一种场合中并正确地审察,然而,由于世尊是以「因何有而老死生起?以何为缘而老死?」等方式(《长部》2.57;《相应部》2.4, 10),从缘起的角度来审察它们的,而缘起作为流转与流转因,唯属前二谛,因此,为了阐明「缘起的现观即是由于无有妄想而通达缘相」,他说了「在菩提树下……显示……」等。「略说」(saṃkhippa):在此,无明等与识等即是略说;或者说,过去因等以「因、果」的形式被略摄,故为略说。略说一词,应视为「部分」(koṭṭhāsa)的同义词。因此说「部分,是这个意思」。而这些部分中,过去因是略说,现在果是略说,现在因是略说,未来果是略说,如此便有了四个略说,这就是「四略说」。因与果的连结,果与因的连结,再次因与果的连结,如此便有了三个连结,这就是「三连结」。过去、现在、未来的差别,即是三时,这就是「三时」。显示巴利原文
Yadipi tebhūmakā upādānakkhandhā ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpa’’ntiādinā (vibha. 2; ma. ni. 1.244) ekādasasu okāsesu pakkhipitabbā sammasitabbā ca, te pana yasmā bhagavatā ‘‘kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, kiṃpaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4, 10) paṭiccasamuppādamukhena sammasitā, paṭiccasamuppādo ca pavattipavattihetubhāvato purimasaccadvayameva hoti, tasmā tadabhisamayaṃ ‘‘maññanābhāvahetu paccayākārapaṭivedho’’ti vibhāvento ‘‘yaṃ bodhirukkhamūle…pe… dassento’’ti āha. Saṃkhippanti ettha avijjādayo viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepā, atīte hetuādayo ‘‘hetu, phala’’nti evaṃ saṃkhippantīti vā saṅkhepā, avijjādayo viññāṇādayo ca. Saṅkhepa-saddo bhāgādhivacananti daṭṭhabbo. Tenāha ‘‘koṭṭhāsāti attho’’ti. Te pana atīte hetusaṅkhepo, etarahi phalasaṅkhepo, etarahi hetusaṅkhepo, āyatiṃ phalasaṅkhepoti cattāro saṅkhepā etassāti catusaṅkhepo, taṃ catusaṅkhepaṃ. Hetuphalasandhi, phalahetusandhi, puna hetuphalasandhīti evaṃ tayo sandhī etassāti tisandhi, taṃ tisandhiṃ. Atītapaccuppannānāgatabhedā tayo addhā etassāti tiyaddho, taṃ tiyaddhaṃ. Sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅkhepe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā, atītahetuādīnaṃ vā pakārā ākārā, te ekekasaṅkhepe pañca pañca katvā vīsati ākārā etassāti vīsatākāro, taṃ vīsatākāraṃ.
「这一切」(esasabbo):即此四略说等种种分类,乃是无余的缘。「以缘相」(paccayalakkhaṇena):即以缘的状态,作为自果——也就是结生识——的缘,意指不离的相。正如没有贪爱,无明等便不是识的缘,同样,没有无明等,贪爱也不是识的缘。在此,通过把握「苦」,识、名色、六处、触、受便被包括;通过把握「有」,贪爱、行、取便被包括。此理前已述及,故不再重复。显示巴利原文
Esasabboti esa catusaṅkhepādipabhedo anavaseso paccayo. Paccayalakkhaṇenāti paccayabhāvena attano phalassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccayabhāvena, avinābhāvalakkhaṇenāti attho. Yathā hi taṇhaṃ vinā avijjādayo viññāṇassa paccayā na honti, evaṃ taṇhāpi avijjādike vināti. Ettha dukkhaggahaṇena viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanānaṃ, bhavaggahaṇena ca taṇhāsaṅkhārupādānānaṃ gahitatā vuttanayā evāti na uddhaṭā.
现在,为了以《无碍解道》的经文阐明那二十种行相,故说“如是这些”等语。其中,“在前业有中”:即在过去的业有中,于过去生造业之时。“痴”即“无明”:那时对苦等所起的痴,由于被其蒙蔽而造业,此即无明。“造作”即“行”:在造作彼业时,以准备布施物、人际交往等方式而生起的诸先前的思心所,此为行;而将应施之物交到受者手中的那个思,即是“有”。或者,在一转向、七速行之中,前面的思是造作,是行;第七个思是“有”。又或者,任一个思是“有”,与之相应的造作则是“行”。“喜好”即“贪爱”:造业者对于此业将在未来再生有中产生果报,生起喜爱、希求,这便称为贪爱。“近取”即“取”:作为业有之缘,以“我造了此业之后,将在某处享受欲乐,或我将断灭”等方式转起,这种接近、执取、紧抓不放,即称为取。“思”即“有”:这在两种义释中,是指造作时最后所说的那个思;而在第三种义释中,与造作相应的思是“有”。如是,这五种法于前业有中,是此处结生的缘:意思是,如上所说的痴等五种法,在过去业有中成立,而成为显示巴利原文
Idāni te vīsati ākāre paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘evamete’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.47) purimakammabhavasminti purime kammabhave, atītajātiyaṃ kammabhave kayiramāneti attho. Moho avijjāti yo tadā dukkhādīsu moho, yena mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjā. Āyūhanā saṅkhārāti taṃ taṃ kammaṃ karonto dānupakaraṇādi sajjanādivasena yā purimacetanāyo, te saṅkhārā. Paṭiggāhakānaṃ pana hatthe deyyadhammaṃ patiṭṭhāpayato cetanā bhavo. Ekāvajjanajavanesu vā purimā cetanā āyūhanā saṅkhārā, sattamā bhavo. Yā kāci vā pana cetanā bhavo, sampayuttā āyūhanā saṅkhārā. Nikanti taṇhāti yaṃ kammaṃ karontassa upapattibhave tassa phalassa nikāmanā patthanā, sā taṇhā nāma. Upagamanaṃ upādānanti yaṃ kammabhavassa paccayabhūtaṃ ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ katvā asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne kāme sevissāmi ucchijjissāmī’’tiādinā nayena pavattaṃ upagamanaṃ gahaṇaṃ parāmasanaṃ, idaṃ upādānaṃ nāma. Cetanā bhavoti dvīsu atthavikappesu vuttassa āyūhanassa avasāne vuttacetanā, tatiye pana āyūhanasampayuttacetanā bhavo. Iti ime pañca dhammā purimakammabhavasmiṃ idha paṭisandhiyā paccayāti ime yathāvuttā mohādayo pañca dhammā atītakammabhavasiddhā etarahi paṭisandhiyā paccayabhūtāti attho.
此处,“结生识”:由于执取下一世而生起,故称为结生,那个识即是结生识。“入胎是名色”:那些色法与非色法进入母胎,犹如来而后入一般,此即名色。“净色是处”:这是就眼等五处而说。“触如是触”:那个触对所缘、正在触击而生起的,即是触。“感受是受”:与结生识俱行、或因六处缘、或与触同时生起的异熟感受,此即是受。如是,这五种部分法——识等,是前一生所造之业的、业相续的缘;由于是缘,依于彼缘,在如今这个再生有中,以再生有的状态生起,这便是其义。显示巴利原文
Idha paṭisandhiviññāṇanti yaṃ bhavantarapaṭisandhānavasena uppannattā paṭisandhīti vuccati, taṃ viññāṇaṃ. Okkanti nāmarūpanti yā gabbhe rūpārūpadhammānaṃ okkanti āgantvā pavisantī viya, idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ. Pasādo āyatananti idaṃ cakkhādipañcāyatanavasena vuttaṃ. Phuṭṭho phassoti yo ārammaṇaṃ phuṭṭho phusanto uppanno, ayaṃ phasso. Vedayitaṃvedanāti yaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇena vā saḷāyatanapaccayena vā phassena sahuppannaṃ vipākavedayitaṃ, sā vedanā. Iti ime…pe… paccayāti ime viññāṇādayo pañca koṭṭhāsikā dhammā purimabhave katassa kammassa kammavaṭṭassa paccayā, paccayabhāvato taṃ paṭicca idha etarahi upapattibhavasmiṃ upapattibhavabhāvena vā hontīti attho.
“于此,因处已成熟而有痴”:这是为了显示,当诸处成熟而造业时,便显出不痴的状态。由于年幼者的心路历程大多以有分为主,多数情况下尚无能力造作能引发下一生的业。而“造业时”这一说法,以此词总括了一切作为业之缘的痴,并非仅指相应俱起的痴。其余部分,依前面所述之理理解即可。显示巴利原文
Idhaparipakkattā āyatanānaṃ mohoti paripakkāyatanassa kammakaraṇakāle asammohaṃ dasseti. Daharassa hi cittappavatti bhavaṅgabahulā yebhuyyena bhavantarajanakakammāyūhanasamatthā na hotīti. Kammakaraṇakāleti ca iminā sabbo kammassa paccayabhūto sammoho gahito, na sampayuttova. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
关于词句的连结:“因此”等词,应结合其间的关联来理解。义理的归结:指对第八种说法方式的教法归结。“喜”:指如此所说的一切渴爱。即“喜为苦本”一句中,因“喜”这一共通于欢喜义的名称,而以单数形式总括的一切渴爱。这些渴爱,依相续、所缘、相应法、现行行相等种种差别,其分类无量。“尽”是断的异名:即“究竟尽”等词,皆为断的异名。这是四道所共通的:也就是说,“尽”等说法,是对四圣道所共有的断除之义的通称。为了显示那些道的次第生起——也就是其作用的次第,才说了“离贪”等,因此说“从彼……应连结”。虽然如此,“尽”等词虽是断的异名,但为了显示那所应断除的、于所缘上有别的渴爱已无余断尽,故进一步采用了“尽”等其他异门,因而说“以此”等。由于作为前文所说再生之因等的渴爱已被断除,故作此“已断除”的说明时,所用“尽”等言词,无论如何也不会有违法的真实道理,故说“无任何越理”。显示巴利原文
Padayojanāyāti ‘‘tasmā’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ sambandhena saha. Atthanigamananti imasmiṃ aṭṭhamavāre desanatthanigamanaṃ. Nandīti evaṃ vuttānaṃ sabbataṇhānanti ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūla’’nti evaṃ nandanatthasāmaññato ekavacanena vuttānaṃ sabbataṇhānaṃ santānārammaṇasampayuttadhammappavattiākārādibhedena anekabhedānaṃ sabbāsaṃ taṇhānaṃ. Khayavevacanānevāti samucchedapahānavevacanāneva. ‘‘Accantakkhayā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Catumaggakiccasādhāraṇametanti catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ pahānakiccassa sādhāraṇaṃ sāmaññato gahaṇaṃ etaṃ khayādivacananti attho. Tesaṃ pana maggānaṃ kamena pavattanaṃ kiccakameneva dassetuṃ ‘‘virāgā’’tiādi vuttanti dassento ‘‘tato…pe… yojetabba’’nti āha. Tathā satipi khayādisaddānaṃ pahānapariyāyabhāve pahātabbāya pana visayabhedabhinnāya taṇhāya anavasesato pahīnabhāvadīpanatthaṃ khayādipariyāyantaraggahaṇaṃ katanti dassento ‘‘yāhī’’tiādimāha. Yathāvuttasañjananādihetubhūtāya taṇhāya pahīnattā tappahānadīpanaṃ katvā vuccamānaṃ khayādivacanaṃ na kathañci dhammataṃ vilometīti vuttaṃ ‘‘na kiñci virujjhatī’’ti.
「无上离」:因有超越自我的能力,故离于更上、更殊胜者。而他的这种离于更上者的特质,正体现于他自身即是“一切最胜”,故说“一切最胜”。正如“sammā”与“saṃ”这两个词,既可表达“正确地、自在地”这些意思,亦可表达赞叹与美妙之义,因此才说:「正自觉(正自觉者)」意为“值得赞叹的、美妙的觉悟”。此中,觉悟——即现观四圣谛,或了知一切所知——这棵树即是菩提(树);而依之觉悟的途径,即道,是为菩提(道);同样地,一切知智亦是菩提(智);而涅槃,因可被觉悟故,亦是菩提(所觉)。此处应作如是类的词根解析。乃至在一些概念名称中,也有“菩提”一词,如“菩提王子”等例。其余论师:指那些精通要义集的老师们。至于在此解释带前缀的“菩提”一词之义时,为何要举无前缀的用法为例,其理由已于前文说过。显示巴利原文
Uttaravirahitanti attānaṃ uttarituṃ samatthattā uttarena adhikena virahitaṃ. Ayañcassa uttaravirahatā attano seṭṭhabhāvenāti āha ‘‘sabbaseṭṭha’’nti. Yathā sammā-saṃ-saddā ‘‘aviparītaṃ, sāma’’nti imesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ vadanti, evaṃ pāsaṃsasobhanatthepīti āha ‘‘sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhi’’nti. Bujjhi ettha paṭivijjhi cattāri ariyasaccāni, sabbampi vā neyyanti rukkho bodhi, bujjhati etenāti pana maggo bodhi, tathā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, nibbānaṃ pana bujjhitabbato bodhīti ayamettha sādhanavibhāgo daṭṭhabbo. Paṇṇattiyampi attheva bodhi-saddo ‘‘bodhirājakumāro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.324; cūḷava. 268). Apareti sārasamāsācariyā. Ettha ca saupasaggassa bodhi-saddassa atthuddhāre anupasaggānaṃ udāharaṇe kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
或者,因其是出世间的,且于此出世间中,相对于较低的道而言,并无更上之道,故针对“是否会有无上正觉?”的疑虑,为破除它,而说“声闻的……”等。由宏愿誓向的成就,以及由作为殊胜果之差别相的不同智慧——某些智慧为某些[圣者]所有,全部智慧则共同成就——之道,如同在给予圣者们种种智慧上的差别。因此,说到它(阿拉汉道)并不具备能赋予一切功德的特性。由此,显示:依着那不共于他人的宏愿成就而成立、并与无上功德相续的阿拉汉道,方名为“无上正觉”。声闻波罗蜜智,非其他声闻所共有,唯是上首大弟子们独有的智慧。各自独立地觉悟诸谛,故为“独觉佛”,即“独觉”。难道不是一切圣者都各自独立地证知诸谛吗?因为法是应当亲自体证的呀。确实如此,然而这里并非针对那种亲证的意义而说。事实上,声闻是依靠他人的教导才证知诸谛的,因为若无他人的音声教导,他们的见道便不会生起;而正自觉者,则是以作他人依靠的方式去觉悟诸谛。但这些独觉佛并非如此,他们在不依赖他人教导、没有导师的情况下,自己证悟。显示巴利原文
Lokuttarabhāvato vā tatthāpi heṭṭhimamaggānaṃ viya tatuttarimaggābhāvato ca ‘‘siyā nu kho anuttarā bodhī’’ti āsaṅkaṃ sandhāya taṃ vidhamituṃ ‘‘sāvakāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Abhinīhārasampattiyā phalavisesabhūtehi ñāṇavisesehi ekaccehi sakalehi saddhiṃ samijjhamāno maggo ariyānaṃ taṃ taṃ ñāṇavisesādiṃ dento viya hotīti tassa asabbaguṇadāyakattaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena anaññasādhāraṇābhinīhārasampadāsiddhassa niratisaya-guṇānubandhassa vasena arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi nāma hotīti dasseti. Sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ aññehi sāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ mahāsāvakānaṃyeva āveṇikaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Paccekaṃ saccāni buddhavantoti paccekabuddhā. Nanu ca sabbepi ariyā paccekameva saccāni paṭivijjhanti dhammassa paccattaṃ vedanīyabhāvatoti? Saccaṃ, nayidamīdisaṃ paṭivedhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, yathā pana sāvakā aññasannissayena saccāni paṭivijjhanti paratoghosena vinā tesaṃ dassanamaggassa anuppajjanato, yathā ca sammāsambuddho aññesaṃ nissayabhāvena saccāni abhisambujjhanti, na evamete, ete pana aparaneyyā hutvā apariṇāyakabhāvena saccāni paṭivijjhanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paccekaṃ saccāni buddhavantoti paccekabuddhā’’ti.
“Iti”一词,指被造作、被发声称出,故称“iti”。此处以无固定形式表原因义,这是其用意所在,故说“故而”。由此而言“因为……”。前面曾将“iti”一词作“方式”义,解释为“这样了知后”;在此处同样作方式义,也是合宜的。何以故?因为“了知”这一词,在表原因义时应当解作——如“以智慧观察后而见”,或如“饮了酥油,便得气力”等譬喻那样。因此,即便“iti”作方式义,由于以“了知缘起”为条件,也能获得“以此为原因”的意味。在“了知缘起”一句中,当“了知”作原因义时,如前所述的意义关联同样完全成立。此中,第一种解释先确立“了知缘起”是“不妄执”的原因;由于已经揭示了以渴爱为本的缘起,故在此指出:断除渴爱即是证得正等觉之因。举出此点后,应以“不妄执地……”等语来理解其结论。而在第二种解释中,则阐明对缘起的感受是断除渴爱之因,这便显示了正等觉的证得即是“于正等觉无所妄执”的意义——这便是两种义理解说的差别所在。是故言:“喜是……”显示巴利原文
Itīti karīyati uccārīyatīti itikāro, iti-saddo. Kāraṇattho aniyamarūpenāti adhippāyo, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘yasmā cā’’ti. Pubbe pana iti-saddaṃ pakāratthaṃ katvā ‘‘evaṃ jānitvā’’ti vuttaṃ, idhāpi taṃ pakāratthameva katvā atho yujjati. Kathaṃ? Viditvāti hi padaṃ hetuatthe daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘paññāya cassa disvā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.271), ‘‘ghataṃ pivitvā balaṃ hotī’’ti ca evamādīsu viya, tasmā pakāratthepi iti-sadde paṭiccasamuppādassa viditattāti ayaṃ attho labbhateva. Paṭiccasamuppādaṃ viditvāti etthāpi hetuatthe viditvā-sadde yathāvuttā atthayojanā yujjateva. Ettha ca paṭhamavikappe paṭiccasamupādassa viditatthaṃ maññanābhāvassa kāraṇaṃ vatvā taṇhāmūlakassa paṭiccasamuppādassa dassitattā ettha taṇhāppahānaṃ sammāsambodhiyā adhigamanakāraṇaṃ uddhatanti dassitaṃ, tasmā ‘‘pathaviṃ na maññatī’’tiādi nigamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dutiyavikappe pana paṭiccasamuppādavedanaṃ taṇhāppahānassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ abhisambodhiyā abhisambodhimaññanābhāvassāti ayamattho dassitoti ayametesaṃ dvinnaṃ atthavikappānaṃ viseso, tasmā ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūla’’nti vuttaṃ.
针对“此又从何而知?”的诘问,便答道:“凡于任何处……”等语。正因为教法中同样可见这种关联方式,才作此说。事实上,即使在世间,'yaṃ'和'taṃ'这类词的对应关联,其确定不移的特性也早已成立。显示巴利原文
Taṃ kuto labbhatīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yattha yattha hī’’tiādi. Sāsanayutti ayaṃ sāsanepi evaṃ sambandho dissatīti katvā. Lokepi hi yaṃ-taṃ-saddānaṃ abyabhicārisambandhatā siddhā.
言“我如此宣称已正等觉”,既是为了点明已证得正等觉的状态,也因若非了知一切者,便不可能如此开示,故说“展示了一切知智”等语。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ abhisambuddhoti vadāmīti abhisambuddhabhāvassa gahitattā, asabbaññunā evaṃ desetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ca ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dassento’’tiādimāha.
“具足种种理趣及开示之庄严”:此与三类理趣相应相连,即依凡夫品等分类而区分的种种经教理趣,依相、业、爱、妄想等分类而区分的种种义理理趣,以及依欢喜、缘相了别等殊胜安立而成立的开示庄严。经文“正如他们不了知的那样,他开示了”同样是在阐明世尊开示的庄严。所谓“正是那地”,此处对“地”的执取仅是依等至等而安立的一种表征;同样地,对于“此处的地究竟指什么?为何只取四大种色,而不取其余色?”等问题,也应确定由此而生的疑惑。再者,“如何说此名?”中的“iti”一词表示“方式”之义。由此当知,此经已统摄了他们所有疑惑的生起。“边”(antaṃ)即界限,指教说的终结界限,亦即“连结”(anusandhi)。“端”(koṭi)即边际,指教说的结束。通过这二者,说明了经中的“意乐连结”与“法随连结”。显示巴利原文
Vicitranayadesanāvilāsayuttanti puthujjanavārādivibhāgabhinnehi vicittehi tanti nayehi, lakkhaṇakammataṇhāmaññanādivibhāgabhinnehi vicittehi atthanayehi, abhinandanapaccayākārādivisesāpadesasiddhena desanāvilāsena ca yuttaṃ. Yathā te na jānanti, tathā desesīti imināpi bhagavato desanāvilāsaṃyeva vibhāveti. Taṃyeva kira pathavinti ettha pathavīgahaṇaṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ āpādivasenapi, tathā ‘‘kīdisā nu kho idha pathavī adhippetā, kasmā ca bhūtarūpāniyeva gahitāni, na sesarūpānī’’tiādināpi tesaṃ saṃsayuppatti niddhāretabbā. Atha vā kathaṃ nāmidanti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho. Tena imasmiṃ sutte sabbāyapi tesaṃ saṃsayuppattiyā pariggahitattā daṭṭhabbā. Antanti mariyādaṃ, desanāya antaṃ paricchedanti attho, yo anusandhīti vuccati. Koṭinti pariyantaṃ, desanāya pariyosānanti attho. Ubhayena sutte ajjhāsayānusandhi yathānusandhīti vadati.
“中间话题”(Antarākathā):指于业处、作意、诵示、遍问等话题之间,突然插入的别一话题。“未竟话题”(Vippakathā):指尚未完结、未达究竟的话题。“适合疑惑而说”:即与那时聚集于法堂的诸比丘之意向相应而说。“此”(Idaṃ):指现在所说的《根本法门本生》。显示巴利原文
Antarākathāti kammaṭṭhānamanasikārauddesaparipucchādīnaṃ antarā aññā ekā tathā. Vippakathāti aniṭṭhitā sikhaṃ appattā. Kaṅkhaṇānurūpenāti tasmiṃ khaṇe dhammasabhāyaṃ sannipatitānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpena. Idanti idāni vuccamānaṃ mūlapariyāyajātakaṃ.
“各方之魁首”:因具智者之德,于一切方所而为上首。“婆罗门”:意为念诵梵行,即讽诵咒语。对“三吠陀”(梨俱吠陀、夜柔吠陀、娑摩吠陀)“到达彼岸”:从义理与文句两方面,到达了究竟。“连同尼犍度与劫波”:指包含这些在内。《尼犍度》是显示树木等异名的论书。《劫波》是关于仪轨作法的分别,能饶益诗人的论书。“连同字分”:指包含这些在内,即具备语音学、语法学等。“以第五为如是语者”:即以《阿闼婆吠陀》为第四,并将那些与“如是有,如是无”等言辞相连续的古代故事——名为“如是语”——作为第五,即具有如是语为第五。“句读者、语法家”:指能诵持、学习、了知句读及所余语法者。所谓“顺世论”,即诡辩论书。“大人相”:是阐明佛陀等大人之相的著作。“于他们中无缺少、行圆满者为无减”:指在其中无有缺少、行持完全圆满者。显示巴利原文
Disāpāmokkhoti paṇḍitabhāvena sabbadisāsu pamukhabhūto. Brāhmaṇoti brahmaṃ aṇatīti brāhmaṇo, mante sajjhāyatīti attho. Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti iruveda-yajuveda-sāmavedānaṃ. Pāragūti atthaso byañjanaso ca pāraṃ pariyantaṃ gato. Saha nighaṇḍunā ca keṭubhena cāti sanighaṇḍukeṭubhā, tesaṃ. Nighaṇḍūti rukkhādīnaṃ vevacanappakāsakaṃ satthaṃ. Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo, kavīnaṃ upakārāvahaṃ satthaṃ. Saha akkharappabhedenāti sākkharappabhedā, tesaṃ, sikkhāniruttisahitānanti attho. Itihāsapañcamānanti āthabbaṇavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā ‘‘itiha asa, itiha asā’’ti īdisavacanapaṭisaṃyutto purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā, tesaṃ. Padaṃ tadavasesañca byākaraṇaṃ kāyati ajjheti vedeti cāti padako, veyyākaraṇo. Lokāyataṃ vuccati vitaṇḍasatthaṃ. Mahāpurisānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ lakkhaṇadīpanagantho mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ. Tesu anūno paripūrakārīti anavayo.
「Mante」即指吠陀。虽然吠陀分为「咒语、梵书、仪轨」三类,但咒语才是根本吠陀。解释其义理的为梵书,依据咒语所述方法来制定祭祀规则的则为仪轨。因此才说「mante 即吠陀」。「智者」指具智慧者。确实如此:凭借「广慧」,他们能将成千、上万卷的论书显明地学习、领受;凭借「速慧」,能轻快迅捷地领受;凭借「敏慧」,能善加确定而无有差错;由于成就了「念与择法」,他们领受的内容不会消失、不会忘失。「一切工巧」指十八明处等种种应当学习的工巧,都统称为工巧。一切外道论书虽然被认为能带来解脱,实际上并不能,因此说它们只追求「现世来世之利」。「聚集在一起」的意思是:如同朋友们那样,以群集的方式聚会一处。他们心中思惟:「这样理解时,可能会与开头矛盾;那样理解时,又与结尾相违。」对于想要求知的义理,得不到前后无矛盾的定解,因此不能见其开端,也不能见其终结。显示巴利原文
Manteti vede. Yadipi vedo ‘‘manto, brahmaṃ, kappo’’ti tividho, manto eva pana mūlavedo, tadatthavivaraṇaṃ brahmaṃ, tattha vuttanayena yaññakiriyāvidhānaṃ kappo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘manteti vede’’ti. Paṇḍitāti paññāvanto. Tathā hi te puthupaññātāya bahuṃ sahassadvisahassādiparimāṇaṃ ganthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā gaṇhanti uggaṇhanti, javanapaññatāya lahuṃ sīghaṃ gaṇhanti, tikkhapaññatāya suṭṭhu avirajjhantā upadhārenti, satinepakkasampattiyā gahitañca nesaṃ na vinassati na sammussatīti. Sabbampi sippanti aṭṭhārasavijjāṭṭhānādibhedaṃ sikkhitabbaṭṭhena sippanti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ sabbaṃ bāhirakasatthaṃ mokkhāvahasammatampi na mokkhaṃ āvahatīti āha ‘‘diṭṭhadhammasamparāyahita’’nti. Sampiṇḍitā hutvāti yathā mittā, tathā piṇḍitavasena sannipatitā hutvā. ‘‘Evaṃ gayhamāne ādinā virujjheyya, evaṃ antenā’’ti cintentā ñātuṃ icchitassa atthassa pubbenāparaṃ aviruddhaṃ nicchayaṃ gahetuṃ asakkontā na ādiṃ, na antaṃ addasaṃsu.
「多毛的」(Lomasāni)指长着毛发的,也就是毛发与胡须浓密的意思。因为头发也含摄在「毛」这个词的范畴内,正如说「触碰到须发和指甲后应当处理干净」一样。「如耳」(kaṇṇaṃ viya)的耳,在这里指智慧,由于借助智慧能听闻并成办应作之事的缘故,所以说「有耳者即是有慧者」。显示巴利原文
Lomasānīti lomavantāni, ghanakesamassuvānīti attho. Kesāpi hi lomaggahaṇena gayhanti yathā ‘‘lomanakhaṃ phusitvā suddhi kātabbā’’ti. Kaṇṇaṃ viyāti kaṇṇaṃ, paññā, tāya sutvā kātabbakiccasādhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘kaṇṇavāti paññavā’’ti.
因为在不断流逝的时光中,众生的寿命、容貌等会渐渐衰灭,所以将时间拟作造作此事的作者,因此说:「他们的寿命……被吞噬,故被称为……」。显示巴利原文
Yasmā sattānaṃ gacchante gacchante kāle āyuvaṇṇādiparikkhayo hoti, tasmā taṃ kālena kataṃ viya katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘nesaṃ āyu…pe… khādatīti vuccatī’’ti.
“以证知”(abhiññāya)是指:对于应开示的法——无论依善等区分,还是依蕴等区分,对于应受教化众生的意乐、随眠、行趣、解脱等种种差别,以及对他们说法所应有的方式,都如实遍知之后。“我说法”(Dhammaṃ desemi)意为:我宣说能带来现法利益、来世利益与涅槃利益的正法。“并非未证知而说”(no anabhiññāya)是说:不像那些外道,由于并非正自觉者,不了知前述诸种方式,而宣说某种由推论所得、依循推度、出于自创的说法;我并非那样说法,这是其含义。“有因缘”(sanidānaṃ)指:有其原因,或为随顺受教化者内心的意乐,或因有人请问,或因有事情发生,具足相状、因由与譬喻。“有教诫神变”(sappāṭihāriyaṃ)意指:具足出离与对治,即通过克服所对治的烦恼而使其成为具足教诫神变之后,我再说法。也有一种说法:“随其所应,具足神通、记说与教诫神变。”然而,只要教诫神变能予导益,说法本身就无不具足。显示巴利原文
Abhiññāyāti kusalādibhedaṃ khandhādibhedañca desetabbaṃ dhammaṃ, veneyyānañca āsayānusayacariyāvimuttiādibhedaṃ, tassa ca nesaṃ desetabbappakāraṃ yāthāvato abhijānitvā. Dhammaṃ desemīti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikanibbānahitāvahaṃ saddhammaṃ kathayāmi. Noanabhiññāyāti yathā bāhirakā asammāsambuddhattā vuttavidhiṃ ajānantāyaṃ kiñci takkapariyāhataṃ vīmaṃsānucaritaṃ sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ kathenti, evaṃ na desemīti attho. Sanidānanti sakāraṇaṃ, veneyyānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vā pucchāya vā aṭṭhuppattiyā vā sanimittaṃ hetuudāharaṇasahitañcāti attho. Sappāṭihāriyanti sanissaraṇaṃ sappaṭiharaṇaṃ, paccanīkapaṭiharaṇena sappāṭihāriyameva katvā desemīti attho. Apare pana ‘‘yathārahaṃ iddhiādesanānusāsanipāṭihāriyasahita’’nti vadanti, anusāsanipāṭihāriyahitā pana desanā natthīti. Hitūpadesanā ovādo, sā eva anusāsanī. Anotiṇṇavatthuvisayo vā ovādo, otiṇṇavatthuvisayā anusāsanī. Paṭhamūpadeso vā ovādo, itarā anusāsanī. Alañca panāti yuttameva. Niṭṭhamagamāsīti atthasiddhiṃ gatā.
「引导理趣」的释义。显示巴利原文
Nettinayavaṇṇanā
现在,我们将依这部著作的理路来注释经文的意义。而这一注释,只有在先确定说法的起源、利益、所应之机,以及总摄的大意之后,才会更加清楚、更易理解,因此我们先来辨明这部经的说法起源等诸项。其中,“起源”在此首先指依所学教理而生起骄慢;“利益”则是摧伏骄慢。正如注释书所说:“依所听闻的教理……而着手。”此外还有一层含义:令应受教化者了知,在依地界、水界等差别而区分的自身当中,凡夫与有学等的圣者各随其因,或以妄计、或以无妄计的方式呈现出不同类别;这样的了知即是起源。而清楚了解前述这些分类,便是利益。因为,对于应受教化者,在所涉及的对象范围里,了知前述那些人及其原因,以及他们以妄计或无妄计方式存在的种种状态,这种了知即是利益。显示巴利原文
Idāni (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.149; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.nettinayavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. nettinayavaṇṇanā) pakaraṇanayena pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma. Sā panāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā yasmā desanāya samuṭṭhānapayojanabhājanesu piṇḍatthesu ca niddhāritesu sutarā hoti suviññeyyā ca, tasmā suttadesanāya samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamaṃ niddhārayissāma. Tattha samuṭṭhānaṃ tāva pariyattiṃ nissāya mānuppādo, payojanaṃmānamaddanaṃ. Vuttañhi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sutapariyattiṃ…pe… ārabhī’’ti. Apica veneyyānaṃ pathavīādibhūtādibhedabhinne sakkāye puthujjanassa sekkhādiariyassa ca saddhiṃ hetunā maññanāmaññanavasena pavattivibhāgānavabodho samuṭṭhānaṃ, yathāvuttavibhāgāvabodho payojanaṃ, veneyyānañhi vuttappakāre visaye yathāvuttānaṃ puggalānaṃ saddhiṃ hetunā maññanāmaññanavasena pavattivibhāgāvabodho payojanaṃ.
再者,所谓“起源”,是指说法的因缘。它分为“共通”与“不共通”两种。其中,共通的起源又分为内在与外在两种。共通的内在起源,即是世间怙主的大悲心。由大悲所策励的世尊,对应受教化者生起了说法的意念。对此经中说:“因悲悯众生,以佛眼观察世间”等。在这里,也应当了知大悲的因缘:正是为了伸出正法之援手,将众生从轮回的大瀑流中救度,大悲才得以生起。如同大悲,一切知智、十力智等,也都可以视为说法的内在起源。因为世尊如实了知一切应知之法、应当如何说法,以及众生的意乐、随眠等,善巧于处非处等,能随顺应受教化者的心意,展现出种种不同的教法理路。共通的外在起源,则是由一万梵天随从的娑婆主大梵天的劝请。由于劝请,世尊先前因观察法甚深而生的“不活跃”心态随之止息,法主世尊于是生起了说法的热忱。不共通的起源也分为内在与外在两种。不共通的内在起源,是促使这部经产生的大悲与说法智,这两者应当了知。不共通的外在起源,则是那五百位婆罗门种姓的比丘依所学教理而生起。显示巴利原文
Apica samuṭṭhānaṃ nāma desanānidānaṃ. Taṃ sādhāraṇaṃ asādhāraṇanti duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇampi ajjhattikabāhirabhedato duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇaṃ ajjhattikasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma lokanāthassa mahākaruṇā. Tāya hi samussāhitassa bhagavato veneyyānaṃ dhammadesanāya cittaṃ udapādi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sattesu ca kāruññataṃ paṭicca buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokesī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.283; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 9). Ettha ca hetāvatthāyapi mahākaruṇāya saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo yāvadeva saṃsāramahoghato saddhammadesanāhatthadānehi sattasantāraṇatthaṃ taduppattito. Yathā ca mahākaruṇā, evaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dasabalañāṇādīni ca desanāya abbhantarasamuṭṭhānabhāve vattabbāni. Sabbampi hi ñeyyadhammaṃ, tesaṃ desetabbappakāraṃ, sattānañca āsayānusayādiṃ yāthāvato jānanto bhagavā ṭhānāṭṭhānādīsu kosallena veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vicittanayadesanaṃ pavattesīti. Bāhiraṃ pana sādhāraṇaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ dasasahassabrahmaparivāritassa sahampatimahābrahmuno ajjhesanaṃ. Tadajjhesanuttarakālañhi dhammagambhīratāpaccavekkhaṇājanitaṃ appossukkataṃ paṭippassambhetvā dhammassāmī dhammadesanāya ussāhajāto ahosi. Asādhāraṇampi ambhantarabāhirabhedato duvidhameva. Tattha abbhantaraṃ yāya mahākaruṇāya yena ca desanāñāṇena idaṃ suttaṃ pavattitaṃ, tadubhayaṃ veditabbaṃ. Bāhiraṃ pana pañcasatānaṃ brāhmaṇajātikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pariyattiṃ nissāya mānuppādanaṃ, vuttameva taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ.
“利益”同样有“共通”与“不共通”两种。其中,共通的利益是指:世尊的教说依次第乃至无取著般涅槃,皆具有解脱味。因此经中说:“为此目的而如是,为此目的而议论”等。由此,令轮回之轮停止、令正法之轮转动、破除常见等邪说、推崇正语、拔除不善根、栽培善根、关闭恶趣之门、开启天界与解脱之门、止息现行的烦恼、断除随眠、不违背先前“我已解脱,将令他人解脱”的承诺、令与它敌对的魔罗期望落空、摧破外道教法、建立佛陀的教法——像这样的种种利益也都被包含在内。而不共通的利益,则是为摧伏那些比丘的骄慢。这在注释书中也已说明:“善于说法的世尊,为了摧破骄慢,开示了《一切法根本理趣经》。”这两种利益都属于外在。不过,如果认为“所期望的意义达成,对于如世尊那样的慈悯者,成就所期望的利益也就是世尊的利益”,按此理路,也可以了知有内在的一面。显示巴利原文
Payojanampi sādhāraṇaṃ asādhāraṇanti duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇaṃ anukkamena yāva anupādāparinibbānaṃ vimuttirasattā bhagavato desanāya. Tenevāha ‘‘etadatthā tathā, etadatthā mantanā’’tiādi (pari. 366). Eteneva ca saṃsāracakkanivatti saddhammacakkappavatti sassatādimicchāvādanirākaraṇaṃ sammāvādapurekkhāro akusalamūlasamūhananaṃ kusalamūlasaṃropanaṃ apāyadvārapidahanaṃ saggamokkhadvāravivaraṇaṃ pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanaṃ anusayasamugghātanaṃ ‘‘mutto mocessāmī’’ti (udā. aṭṭha. 18; itivu. aṭṭha. 38) purimapaṭiññāavisaṃvādanaṃ tappaṭipakkhamāramanorathavisaṃvādanaṃ titthiyadhammanimmathanaṃ buddhadhammapatiṭṭhāpananti evamādīnampi payojanānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Asādhāraṇaṃ pana tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ mānamaddanaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1) ‘‘desanākusalo bhagavā mānabhañjanatthaṃ ‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’nti desanaṃ ārabhī’’ti. Ubhayampetaṃ bāhiyameva. Sace pana veneyyasantānagatampi desanābalasiddhisaṅkhātaṃ payojanaṃ adhippāyasamijjhanabhāvato yathādhippetatthasiddhiyā yathākāruṇikassa bhagavatopi payojanamevāti gaṇheyya, iminā pariyāyenassa abbhantaratāpi veditabbā.
再者,对于应受教化者,在依地、水等界差别而区分的“自身”中,凡夫与有学等圣者,连同原因,如何以“妄想”与“不妄想”的方式展现出不同的存在状态——对此的了知便是“起源”;而彻底了知这部经中所宣说的这些分类,便是“利益”——这个意思前面已经说过了。因为对应受教化者而言,在所涉及的范围内,了知前述那些人和原因,如何随着妄想与不妄想展现出不同的存在状态,这样的了知就使得这一说法成为有利益的事,所以说“这说法是以成就此事为目的”。因为说法所应成就的成果,正是值得期望的,正是它促使说法者为它而说法,因此称之为“利益”。同样地,对应受教化者,彻底或部分地断除种种妄想、在这过程中见到过患、不明白那些无拘束的妄想于自身中有种种施设表现的殊特性、不明白已断除妄想的修行,以及以贪爱为首而不了解缘起道理等,这些在这里也都应视为利益。显示巴利原文
Apica veneyyānaṃ pathavīādibhūtādivibhāgabhinne sakkāye puthujjanassa sekkhādiariyassa ca saddhiṃ hetunā maññanāmaññanavasena pavattivibhāgānavabodho samuṭṭhānaṃ, imassa suttassa yathāvuttavibhāgāvabodho payojananti vuttovāyamattho. Veneyyānañhi vuttappakāre visaye yathāvuttānaṃ puggalānaṃ saddhiṃ hetunā maññanāmaññanānaṃ vasena pavattivibhāgāvabodho imaṃ desanaṃ payojeti ‘‘tannipphādanaparāyaṃ desanā’’ti katvā. Yañhi desanāya sādhetabbaṃ phalaṃ, taṃ ākaṅkhitabbattā desakaṃ desanāya payojetīti payojananti vuccati. Tathā veneyyānaṃ sabbaso ekadesato ca maññanānaṃ appahānaṃ, tattha ca ādīnavādassanaṃ, niraṅkusānaṃ maññanānaṃ anekākāravohārassa sakkāye pavattivisesassa ajānanaṃ, tattha ca pahīnamaññanānaṃ paṭipattiyā ajānanaṃ, taṇhāmukhena paccayākārassa ca anavabodhoti evamādīni ca payojanāni idha veditabbāni.
那些属于三地范畴、对于无为法只具备未完全了知等作用,以及不了解正自觉者修行的人;那些不听闻正法、不持守、不熟习、不作意正法,或者虽听闻正法却仍不持守、不熟习、不通达的人——正是这说法的适合听众(堪受者)。而在“总括义理”方面:如同经文以“无闻”等语句所显示的——不如理作意的习惯、与不善根结合、执取退缩与过度、被不恰当的方法束缚而不加以培养、具有邪执、由无明与爱染所显出的看似清净被暴露出来、在三有轮回中不得止息、不能解脱于漏、流、轭、结、取,不能超越心的荒芜、心的系缚、喜贪、盖障、染着,不会彻底舍断争论的根源、不断除随眠、不超出邪性、依止于以爱为根本之法、随顺不善业道、身心充满一切烦恼的燃烧与躁动——这些都被揭示了出来。而通过“他依地为地而了知”等经文,描述了爱染游履的方式、慢心的表露、颠倒的执取、杂染、对自身的执取、愚人的特征、三种歪曲的阐明、与多利益相违背的作法、三种所依的揭露,以及漏尽的教说等,这些也都得到彰显。显示巴利原文
Bhūmittayapariyāpannesu asaṅkhātadhammavippakatapariññādikiccasaṅkhātadhammānaṃ sammāsambuddhassa ca paṭipattiṃ ajānantā asaddhammassavanadhāraṇaparicayamanasikāraparā saddhammassavana-dhāraṇaparicayapaṭivedhavimukhā ca veneyyā imissā desanāya bhājanaṃ. Piṇḍatthā pana ‘‘assutavā’’tiādinā ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro akusalamūla-samāyogo olīyanātidhāvanāpariggaho upāyavinibaddhānubrūhanā micchābhinivesasamannāgamo avijjātaṇhā-parisuddhi vaṭṭattayānuparamo āsavoghayogaganthāgatitaṇhuppādupādānāviyogo cetokhila-cetovinibaddhaabhinandana-nīvaraṇasaṅgānatikkamo vivādamūlāpariccāgo anusayānupacchedo micchattānativattanaṃ taṇhāmūladhammasannissayatā akusalakammapathānuyogo sabbakilesa-pariḷāhasāraddhakāyacittatāti evamādayo dīpitā honti. ‘‘Pathaviṃ pathavito sañjānātī’’tiādinā taṇhāvicaritaniddeso mānajappanā vipariyesābhiniveso saṃkileso sakkāyapariggaho bālalakkhaṇāpadeso vaṅkattayavibhāvanānuyogo bahukārapaṭipakkhadīpanā tividhanissayasaṃsūcanā āsavakkhayakathananti evamādayo dīpitā honti.
「十六章」的释义。显示巴利原文
Soḷasahāravaṇṇanā
教导章注释显示巴利原文
1. Desanāhāravaṇṇanā
其中,依取蕴法而施设为地、生物等种种差别,因它们阐明施设,并以生、老、死等种种苦的同义语而说,故是应被渴爱所弃的三界法,此即苦谛。以思量、欢喜、喜贪的同义语所说的渴爱,是集谛。这是经中的方法。然而,在阿毗达摩的方法中,与前述渴爱一起,由‘无闻’等所显明的无明等、以思量的同义语所摄取的慢与见,以及以‘有’一词所摄取的业有——这一切烦恼与行,都是集谛。苦与集二者的不转起是灭谛。通过执取圣法、遍知、比丘、有学、证智等语句,以及贪等灭尽的语句,连同执取正等觉,这是道谛。然而,有些人以渴爱灭尽等语句来建立灭谛,这是违背注疏的,因为在注疏中,渴爱灭尽等被建立为道的作用。显示巴利原文
Tattha ye upādānakkhandhadhamme upādāya pathavīādibhūtādibhedā paññatti, te paññattipaṭipādanabhāvena jātijarāmaraṇavisesanadukkhapariyāyena ca vuttā taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ. Maññanābhinandananandīpariyāyehi vuttā taṇhā samudayasaccaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva suttantanayo. Abhidhammanaye pana yathāvuttataṇhāya saddhiṃ ‘‘assutavā’’tiādinā dīpitā avijjādayo, maññanāpariyāyena gahitā mānadiṭṭhiyo, bhavapadena gahito kammabhavo cāti sabbepi kilesābhisaṅkhārā samudayasaccaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ. Ariyadhammaggahaṇena, pariññābhikkhusekkhābhiññāgahaṇehi, rāgādikhayavacanehi, sammāsambodhigahaṇena ca maggasaccaṃ. Keci pana taṇhākkhayādivacanehi nirodhasaccaṃ uddharanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati tattha taṇhākkhayādīnaṃ maggakiccabhāvassa uddhaṭattā.
其中,以集而有乐味,以苦而有过患,以道与灭而有出离。摧破比丘们的慢是果。同样,‘如所说分类之了悟’等所阐明的,是利益。作为成就该利益之因,教法的种种性以及对四种人如实把握自性,便是方法;在地等当中显示凡夫等的情况,以此表明地等应当遍知、思量应当舍断——这是世尊的教令。这便是教导章。显示巴利原文
Tattha samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇaṃ, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ mānabhañjanaṃ phalaṃ, tathā ‘‘yathāvuttavibhāgāvabodho’’tiādinā vuttaṃ payojanañca. Tassa nipphattikāraṇattā desanāya vicittatā catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ yāthāvato sabhāvūpadhāraṇañca upāyo, pathavīādīsu puthujjanādīnaṃ pavattidassanāpadesena pathavīādayo ekantato parijānitabbā, maññanā ca pahātabbāti ayamettha bhagavato āṇattīti. Ayaṃ desanāhāro.
审察章注释显示巴利原文
2. Vicayahāravaṇṇanā
因为种种思量对有身都是无差别的因,且在此中对任何人都应无所遗漏,故说“一切”。由于执持自性、无众生、无命我,故说“法”。由于无住处、有不共因,故说“根”。因为是因、且能成就教法义利,故说“门”。由于面对面宣说、为给予义利,故说“你们”。由具足如此功德的相应、令其现前,故有“诸比丘”之称。为能教导,并令诸比丘生起正念,故有“我将教导”的许诺。因应教导而许诺,且依许诺而教导,故有“此”的指称。因应听闻,且必能成就听闻义利,故说“谛听”。因应恭敬,唯恭敬行方能成就其义,故说“善哉”。法应作意,一切成就皆依于此,故说“应作意”。教导依彻知而善巧开显,有详细说明之义,故说“我将宣说”。世尊言语应为含天神的世间以头顶领受,且能成就所愿之义,故说“如是”。大师是至高礼敬处,对此礼敬有大功德,故说“尊者”。因诸比丘对此事已作决意,且为言语的庄严显示巴利原文
Maññanānaṃ sakkāyassa avisesahetubhāvato, kassacipi tattha asesitabbato ca sabbagahaṇaṃ, sabhāvadhāraṇato nissattanijjīvato ca dhammaggahaṇaṃ, patiṭṭhābhāvato āveṇikahetubhāvato ca mūlaggahaṇaṃ, kāraṇabhāvato desanatthasambhavato ca pariyāyaggahaṇaṃ, sammukhabhāvato sampadānatthasambhavato ca ‘‘vo’’ti vacanaṃ, tathārūpaguṇayogato abhimukhīkaraṇato ca ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti ālapanaṃ. Desetuṃ samatthabhāvato tesaṃ satuppādanatthañca ‘‘desessāmī’’ti paṭijānanaṃ, desetabbatāya paṭiññātabhāvato, yathāpaṭiññañca desanato ‘‘ta’’nti paccāmasanaṃ, sotabbabhāvato, savanatthassa ca ekantena nipphādanato ‘‘suṇāthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sakkātabbato, sakkaccakiriyāya eva ca tadatthasiddhito ‘‘sādhuka’’nti vuttaṃ. Dhammassa manasikaraṇīyato tadadhīnattā ca sabbasampattīnaṃ ‘‘manasi karothā’’ti vuttaṃ yathāpariññātāya desanāya paribyattabhāvato vitthāratthasambhavato ca ‘‘bhāsissāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavato sadevakena lokena sirasā sampaṭicchitabbavacanattā, tassa ca yathādhippetatthasādhanato ‘‘eva’’nti vuttaṃ. Satthu uttamagāravaṭṭhānabhāvato, tattha ca gāravassa uḷārapuññabhāvato ‘‘bhante’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhikkhūnaṃ tathākiriyāya nicchitabhāvato vacanālaṅkārato ca ‘‘kho’’ti vuttaṃ. Savanassa paṭijānitabbato, tathā tehi paṭipannattā ca ‘‘paccassosu’’nti vuttaṃ paccakkhabhāvato, sakalassapi ekajjhaṃ karaṇato ‘‘eta’’nti vuttaṃ.
因所说的补特伽罗含摄于世间、为世间依止,故依世间而说“于此”。因无证悟、无广学多闻,故说“无闻”。因成众多,或由多种生命方式而生,故说“凡夫”。由远离非圣法、具足圣法,故说“圣者们”。因未成就圣位修行,且于此无善巧、无调伏,故说“不见圣者们”等。因听闻安稳法,具足安稳法,为善士所称扬,故说“善士们”。因未成就善士位修行,且于此无善巧、无调伏,故说“不见善士们”等。因以地为所缘的种种思量——以及下面将说的种种思量——为根本,属于戏论,故说“由地而知地”。对盲目的凡夫,因我执与我所执于一切处未断,故说“思量地”等。显示巴利原文
Vuccamānassa puggalassa lokapariyāpannattā lokādhārattā ca lokaṃ upādāya ‘‘idhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭivedhabāhusaccābhāvato pariyattibāhusaccābhāvato ca ‘‘assutavā’’ti vuttaṃ. Puthūsu, puthu vā janabhāvato ‘‘puthujjano’’ti vuttaṃ. Anariyadhammavirahato ariyadhammasamannāgamato ca ‘‘ariyāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Ariyabhāvakarāya paṭipattiyā abhāvato, tattha kosalladamathābhāvato ‘‘ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asantadhammassavanato santadhammasamannāgamato sabbhi pāsaṃsiyato ca ‘‘sappurisāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sappurisabhāvakarāya paṭipattiyā abhāvato, tattha ca kosalladamathābhāvato ‘‘sappurisānaṃ adassāvī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pathavīvatthukānaṃ maññanānaṃ, upari vuccamānānañcamaññanānaṃ mūlakattā papañcasaṅkhānaṃ ‘‘pathaviṃ pathavito sañjānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Andhaputhujjanassa ahaṃkāra-mamaṃkārānaṃ katthacipi appahīnattā ‘‘pathaviṃ maññatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
因为先前未被执取,且以共相被执取,以及依补特伽罗与地等所缘的同类性而可得,所以说‘且无论谁’。以‘无论谁’这样不确定地执取后,为了应确定、应反指,所以说‘他’。由于在轮回中极超越地观见怖畏,以及能破坏烦恼,所以称为‘比丘’。由于具备诸学,获得有学法,所以称为‘有学’。因为尚未证得、还应证得应以意证得的阿拉汉果,所以说‘未证心’。因为不能被其他超越,以相应性超越其他而住,所以称为‘无上’。以修习相应之轭,从欲轭等中达到安稳、吉祥、无灾患,所以称为‘安稳’。由于生起欲求、生起精勤,所以说‘希求’。由于在一切方面、依一切威仪路而住、依止观住、依天住而住,所以说‘住’。对于有学,以一切应证知、应遍知,用智胜伏了知,所以说‘自证’。对有学来说,由于一切未断的认为已不存在,所以说‘莫认为’。其余的应当依照已说的理路来理解。依这个理路,以后在所有的词句中都应该作抉择。因为跟随注释以及对其隐晦义的解释,有智慧的人能够明了这个意义。我们怕太冗长,所以不详述。如此,依一一词审察,所以是审察章。显示巴利原文
Pubbe aggahitattā, sāmaññato ca gayhamānattā, puggalassa pathavīādiārammaṇasabhāgatāya labbhamānattā ca ‘‘yopī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yo’’ti aniyamena gahitassa niyametabbato paṭiniddisitabbato ca; ‘‘so’’ti vuttaṃ sātisayaṃ saṃsāre bhayassa ikkhanato kilesabhedanasambhavato ca ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ. Sikkhāhi samannāgamato sekkhadhammapaṭilābhato ca ‘‘sekkho’’ti vuttaṃ. Manasā laddhabbassa arahattassa anadhigatattā adhigamanīyato ca ‘‘appattamānaso’’ti vuttaṃ. Aparena anuttaraṇīyato, paraṃ anucchavikabhāvena uttaritvā ṭhitattā ca ‘‘anuttara’’nti vuttaṃ. Yogena bhāvanāya kāmayogādito ca khemaṃ sivaṃ anupaddavanti ‘‘yogakkhema’’nti vuttaṃ. Chandappavattiyā ussukkāpattiyā ca ‘‘patthayamāno’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadatthassa sabbaso sabbairiyāpathavihārassa samathavipassanāvihārassa dibbavihārassa ca vasena ‘‘viharatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sekkhassa sabbaso abhiññeyyabhāvañceva pariññeyyabhāvañca ñāṇena abhibhavitvā jānanato ‘‘abhijānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sekkhassa sabbaso appahīnamaññanatāya abhāvato ‘‘mā maññī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ. Iminā nayena ito paraṃ sabbapadesu vinicchayo kātabbo. Sakkā hi aṭṭhakathaṃ tassā līnatthavaṇṇanañca anugantvā ayamattho viññūhi vibhāvetunti ativitthārabhayena na vitthārayimha. Iti anupadavicayato vicayo hāro.
合理章注释显示巴利原文
3. Yuttihāravaṇṇanā
「一切思量皆以有身为根本」是合理的,因为世间万象只不过是假立而已。缺少两种多闻的「不闻凡夫状态」是合理的,因为其本身具有产生种种烦恼与造作的性质。而上述凡夫缺少那样的多闻,也是合理的,因为若有多闻,善士性便会存在。其中,无闻凡夫「不见诸圣者、诸善士」是合理的,因为他既未见到成圣之法,也未见到圣性本身,更未依之实践。同样地,他对地生起「我即是地、地是我所、其他是地」这样的认知,也是合理的,因为我执与我所执完全未断。有了这样的认知之后,他又以种种方式执着地为业作者、业因等,并生起虚妄分别,这也是合理的,因为认知本身就是戏论的来源。凡是虚妄分别者,对于事物未能遍知,这是合理的,因为若未遍知,便不可能断除虚妄分别。从「于水中认知水」等情况,也应依此道理理解。一位尚未完成修学的人,其心未达圆满,这是合理的,因为应作之事尚未完成。有学圣者希求安稳,这是合理的,因为他内心倾向于此目标。同样地,他能于地「自证」,也是合理的,因为在遍知与断除方面,他已显示巴利原文
Sakkāyassa sabbamaññanānaṃ mūlabhāvo yujjati parikappamattakattā lokavicittassa. Byāhusaccadvayarahitassa andhaputhujjanabhāvo yujjati puthukilesābhisaṅkhārajananādisabhāvattā. Yathāvuttaputhujjanassa vā vuttappakārabāhusaccābhāvo yujjati tasmiṃ sati sabbhāvato. Tattha assutavato puthujjanassa ariyānaṃ sappurisānañca adassāvitādi yujjati ariyakaradhammānaṃ ariyabhāvassa ca tena adiṭṭhattā appaṭipannattā ca tathā tassa pathaviyā ‘‘ahaṃ pathavī, mama pathavī, paro pathavī’’ti sañjānanaṃ yujjati ahaṃkāramamaṃkārānaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ appahīnattā. Tathā sañjānato cassa pathaviṃ kammādikaraṇādivasena gahetvā nānappakārato maññanāpavatti yujjati saññānidānattā papañcasaṅkhānaṃ. Yo maññati, tassa apariññātavatthukatā yujjati pariññāya vinā maññanāpahānābhāvato. ‘‘Āpaṃ āpato sañjānātī’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Apariyositasikkhassa appattamānasatā yujjati katakiccatābhāvato. Sekkhassa sato yogakkhemapatthanā yujjati tadadhimuttabhāvato. Tathā tassa pathaviyā abhijānanā yujjati pariññāpahānesu mattaso kāribhāvato. Tato eva cassa ‘‘mā maññī’’ti vattabbatā yujjati vatthupariññāya viya maññanāpahānassapi vippakatabhāvato. Sekkhassa pathaviyā pariññeyyatā yujjati pariññātuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā sabbaso apariññātattā ca. ‘‘Āpaṃ āpato’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Arahattādiyuttassa pathaviyādīnaṃ abhijānanā maññanābhāvo ca yujjati saṅkhātadhammattā, sabbaso kilesānaṃ pahīnattā, tato eva cassa vītarāgādibhāvo tato sammadeva ca paṭiccasamuppādassa paṭividdhatāti. Ayaṃ yuttihāro.
4. 足处章注释显示巴利原文
4. Padaṭṭhānahāravaṇṇanā
某种「思量」是「有身」的足处;对于这些思量的「不如理作意」是足处;缺乏两种听闻是「不见诸圣者」的足处,而「不见诸圣者」又是「于圣法不善巧」的足处;「于圣法不善巧」是「于圣法中未被调伏」的足处。关于「不见善士」一句,也应以同样的方式理解。「想颠倒」是诸思量的足处,正如所说:「以想为缘,而有戏论之想。」在诸思量中,「爱思量」是其余思量的足处,正如经中说:「被爱所引领者,会战栗、挣扎。」又说:「以爱为缘,而有取。」而且,只有被爱所引领的人,才会生起「我是胜者」之类的慢的宣称。或者,一切思量也都是一切思量的足处。因为经中说「以取为缘,而有爱」,所以「邪见」也是爱的足处;又说「我就是梵天、大梵天」,所以「慢」也是邪见的足处;同样,由于有「当『有我』存在时,便会有『我是这样』、『我是那样』、『我是别样』」等说法,因此「慢」也理所当然地可以成为爱的足处。有学诸法,在某种层面上,是「思量的部分断除显示巴利原文
Kissopi maññanā sakkāyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, maññanānaṃ ayonisomanasikāro padaṭṭhānaṃ, sutadvayaviraho andhaputhujjanabhāvassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, so ariyānaṃ adassāvitāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, sā ariyadhammassa akovidatāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, sā ariyadhamme avinītatāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Sappurisānaṃ adassāvī’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Saññāvipallāso maññanānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhāti. Maññanāsu ca taṇhāmaññanā itaramaññanānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti, (dī. ni. 1.105-109) ‘‘taṇhāpaccayā upādāna’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; mahāva. 1) ca vacanato, taṇhāgatasseva ca ‘‘seyyohamasmi’’ntiādinā mānajappanāsabbhāvatā. Sabbāpi vā maññanā sabbāsaṃ maññanānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ . ‘‘Upādānapaccayā taṇhā’’ti hi vacanato diṭṭhipi taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Ahamasmi brahmā mahābrahmā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.42; 3.39) ādivacanato mānopi diṭṭhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā ‘‘asmīti sati itthaṃsmīti hoti, evaṃsmīti hoti, aññathāsmīti hotī’’tiādivacanato mānassapi taṇhāya padaṭṭhānatā labbhateva. Sekkhā dhammā sappadesato maññanāpahānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Asekkhā nippadesato maññanāpahānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Kammabhavo ca jātiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Jāti jarāmaraṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Paccayākārassa yathābhūtāvabodho sammāsambodhiyā padaṭṭhānanti. Ayaṃ padaṭṭhāno hāro.
5. 相章注释显示巴利原文
5. Lakkhaṇahāravaṇṇanā
在「一切法根本门」这一句中,通过「根本」或「根本门」一词的提举,如同贪爱、慢、邪见被包含在内一样,瞋、痴等其他以有身为根本的法,也应被看作已被包含,因为它们在有身之根本这一特相上是同一的。通过「无闻凡夫」这一句,如同提举了那位补特伽罗缺乏教法正法与证法正法,也应看作他同样缺乏行道正法,因为它们在正法性这一特相上是同一的。这句话具有「不见诸圣者」、「不愿见」等相。「于圣法不善巧」一句,显示了障碍证得圣法的无知。「于圣法中未被调伏」一句,显示了缺乏圣律仪;而从义理上说,缺乏圣律仪也就是不修习圣律仪。因此,这三句实际上也把前面所说境中的邪见与疑都包含了。而通过包含它们,一切不善法也都被包含了,因为它们在染污相上是同一的。对于「不见善士」一句,也应以同样的方式理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha mūlaggahaṇena mūlapariyāyaggahaṇena vā yathā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo gayhanti, evaṃ dosamohādīnampi sakkāyamūladhammānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo sakkāyassa mūlabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Assutavā’’ti iminā yathā tassa puggalassa pariyattipaṭivedhasaddhammānaṃ abhāvo gayhati, evaṃ paṭipattisaddhammassapi abhāvo gayhati saddhammabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. Ariyānaṃ adassanakāmatādilakkhaṇā. ‘‘Ariyadhammassa akovido’’ti iminā ariyadhammādhigamassa vibandhabhūtaṃ aññāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ariyadhamme avinīto’’ti iminā ariyavinayābhāvo. So panatthato ariyavinaye appaṭipatti eva vāti tīhipi padehi yathāvuttavisayā micchādiṭṭhi vicikicchā ca gahitāva honti. Taggahaṇena ca sabbepi akusalā dhammā saṅgahitāva honti saṃkilesalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Sappurisānaṃ adassāvī’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo.
“他由地而认知地”——此句旨在说明,想乃是邪见等种种思量的成因。在此,如想一样,寻、触、无明、不如理作意等也是这些思量的原因;因此,从义理上说,由于这些都属于思量之因的同一相,它们也都被摄入了此句之中。通过“他思量”这一思量的作用,贪爱、慢、邪见已然被摄入,因为它们同属烦恼的自性;而摄入了它们,疑等也应被视为已被摄入了,因为它们在烦恼相上是同一的。同样,贪爱本身具有因的自性,所以摄入了它,其余不善因也就被摄入了,因为它们在因相上是同一的。贪爱、邪见等具有漏等的自性,因此摄入了它们,其余的漏、暴流、轭、系缚、盖等也都被摄入了,因为它们在漏等自性这一相上是同一的。通过“他思量地”等语句,地等现象本是色法的自性,而以此为对象的思量又以物质为对象,因此摄入了它们,一切以色蕴为对象的思量也就被显示出来了,因为它们在以色为对象这一相上是同一的。如此,以眼处等为对象的种种思量也应当依此理推导。至于“未被遍知”一句,则是通过对遍知的否定,显示了与遍知相应的烦恼断除同样被否定了;应当如此理解,因为作为道的作用,遍知与断除在同一个相上是一致的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pathaviṃ pathavito sañjānātī’’ti idaṃ diṭṭhimaññanādīnaṃ saññāya kāraṇabhāvadassanaṃ. Tattha yathā saññā, evaṃ vitakkaphassāvijjāayonisomanasikārādayopi tāsaṃ kāraṇanti atthato tesampettha saṅgaho vutto hoti maññanānaṃ kāraṇabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Maññatī’’ti iminā maññanākiccena taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo gahitā tāsaṃ kilesasabhāvattā. Taggahaṇeneva vicikicchādinampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo kilesalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā taṇhāya hetusabhāvattā taggahaṇeneva avasiṭṭhākusalahetūnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo hetulakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā taṇhādiṭṭhīnaṃ āsavādisabhāvattā taggahaṇeneva avasiṭṭhāsavoghayogaganthanīvaraṇādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo āsavādisabhāvattā ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā ‘‘pathaviṃ maññatī’’tiādinā pathavīādīnaṃ rūpasabhāvattā tabbisayānañca maññanānaṃ rūpavisayattā taggahaṇeneva sakalarūpakkhandhavisayāpi maññanā dassitā honti rūpavisayalakkhaṇena āsaṃ ekalakkhaṇattā. Evaṃ cakkhāyatanādivisayāpi maññanā niddhāretabbā. ‘‘Apariññāta’’nti pariññāpaṭikkhepena tappaṭibaddhakilesānaṃ pahānapaṭikkhepoti daṭṭhabbo maggakiccabhāvena pariññāpahānānaṃ ekalakkhaṇattā. Iminā nayena sesesupi yathārahaṃ ekalakkhaṇā niddhāretabbāti. Ayaṃ lakkhaṇo hāro.
6. 四阵列章注释显示巴利原文
6. Catubyūhahāravaṇṇanā
有些可被化导的人,在地等所依事物上,被词句的表面意思所蒙蔽,只执取了浮浅的字面义,未能洞察法的甚深性;他们因听闻非正法等而受欺惑,从而排斥对正法的听闻、受持、熟习与如理作意;同时,他们也不了解凡夫、有学、无学及如来,在地等所依事物上修行方式的差别。这些人,就是本经说法的因缘。世尊在此说法的用意是:“怎样才能令他们脱离上述过失,又了解上述的殊胜差别,从而通过正确的修行,最终成就自他两利的究竟归宿呢?”所谓释义,也就是对词源的解释,它既是对“如是”等因缘句的说明,也是对“一切法根本门”等经文的说明。在注书及其逐字的义释中,这些内容依照已经阐明的方法极易理解,因此这里担心过于繁琐,就不再详细展开了。显示巴利原文
Pathavīādīsu vatthūsu byañjanacchāyāya atthaṃ gahetvā dhammagambhīrataṃ asallakkhetvā asaddhammassavanādinā vañcitā hutvā saddhammassavanadhāraṇaparicayamanasikāravimukhā pathavīādīsu vatthūsu puthujjanasekkhāsekkhatathāgatānaṃ paṭipattivisesaṃ ajānantā ca veneyyā imissā desanāya nidānaṃ. Te ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho yathāvuttadosavinimuttā yathāvuttañca visesaṃ jānantā sammāpaṭipattiyā ubhayahitaparāyaṇā saveyyu’’nti ayamettha bhagavato adhippāyo. Padanibbacanaṃ niruttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādinidānapadānaṃ, ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’ntiādipāḷipadānañca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ, tassā līnatthavaṇṇanāyañceva vuttanayena suviññeyyattā ativitthārabhayena na vitthārayimha.
连结有五种,是根据句、句义、解说、安立及经文脉络来划分的。其中,一个句子与另一个句子之间的关联,称为“句连结”;同样,一个句子的意义与另一个句子的意义之间的关联,称为“句义连结”,也就是通常所说的“动作与作者的关系”。对于含有多条文脉的经典,各条文脉之间的关联,便是“说法连结”;而对于仅有单一条文脉的经典,其前后文之间的关联,也属于“说法连结”。在注书中,“说法连结”又被区分为三种:提问连结、意乐连结和随宜连结。而这里所说的意乐,还应被理解为包含自意乐与他意乐两种。至于此处所要解释的,在下文的因缘注释中已经说过了。“安立连结”应当根据经典的四种安立方式来理解。而在此处,经文连结只需依第一种安立方式来理解即可。那么,为何偏偏要将《根本门经》置于最前呢?不应提出这种没有意义的问题,因为无论在何种情况下,这都不应成为疑问。进一步说,由于“有身”是以思量为根本的,而一切思量又正是以种种不同的方式在这“有身”上运作;在它所执取的那些境界中,其实连一丝一毫的真实本质都不可得。因此,为了能在地、水等种种差别的境界中,特别地引生厌离与离欲,也为了能显示巴利原文
Padapadatthadesanānikkhepasuttasandhivasena pañcavidhā sandhi. Tattha padassa padantarena sambandho padasandhi, tathā padatthassa padatthantarena sambandho padatthasandhi, yo ‘‘kiriyākārakasambandho’’ti vuccati. Nānānusandhikassa suttassa taṃtaṃanusandhīhi sambandho, ekānusandhikassa pana pubbāparasambandho desanāsandhi. Yā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘pucchānusandhi ajjhāsayānusandhi yathānusandhī’’ti tidhā vibhattā. Ajjhāsayo cettha attajjhāsayo parajjhāsayoti dvidhā veditabbo. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā nidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva. Nikkhepasandhi catunnaṃ suttanikkhepānaṃ vasena veditabbo. Suttasandhi idha paṭhamanikkhepavaseneva veditabbo. Kasmā panettha mūlapariyāyasuttameva paṭhamaṃ nikkhittanti? Nāyamanuyogo katthaci nappavattati, apica yasmā maññanāmūlakaṃ sakkāyaṃ, sabbamaññanā ca tattha eva anekabhedabhinnā pavattati, na tassā savisayāya lesamattampi sāraṃ atthīti pathavīādivibhāgabhinnesu maññanāsu ca sātisayaṃ nibbedhavirāgasañjananī upari sekkhāsekkhatathāgataguṇavibhāvanī ca ayaṃ desanā. Suttantadesanā ca visesato diṭṭhiviniveṭhanakathā, tasmā sanissayassa diṭṭhiggāhassa ādito asārabhāvadīpanaṃ upari ca sabbesaṃ ariyānaṃ guṇavisesavibhāvanamidaṃ suttaṃ paṭhamaṃ nikkhittaṃ. Kiñca sakkāye maññanāmaññanāmukhena pavattinivattīsu ādīnavānisaṃsavibhāvanato sabbesaṃ puggalānaṃ paṭipattivibhāgato ca idameva suttaṃ paṭhamaṃ nikkhittaṃ.
然而,某一种说法与另一种说法之间的相互契合,这也是“说法连结”,应当如此理解。“无闻的凡夫……乃至……欣喜涅槃”这一说法,与“诸比丘,在此,无闻的凡夫……乃至……在善士法中未受调伏,他不了解应作意的法,也不了解不应作意的法。由于不了解应作意的法和不应作意的法,他便去作意那些不应作意的法……乃至……未生的欲漏便生起,已生的欲漏便增长;未生的有漏便生起,已生的有漏便增长;未生的无明漏便生起,已生的无明漏便增长”(《中部·1.17》)这一说法相契合。同样,也与“可以预期他如是:他将作意净相,由作意净相故,贪欲将扰乱其心,他带着贪、带着嗔、带着痴、有垢秽,其心被染污而命终”(《中部·1.59》)这一说法相契合。同样,也与“贤友,缘于眼与色而生起眼识,三者的集合是触,以触为缘而有受。所感受的,便认知它;所认知的,便寻思它;所寻思的,便戏论它;由于戏论它,以此为因,种种戏论想之概念便困扰此人”(《中部·1.204》)这一说法相契合。同样,也与“诸比丘,在此,无闻的凡夫……显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana ekissā desanāya desanantarena saddhiṃ saṃsandanaṃ, ayampi desanāsandhi, sā evaṃ veditabbā. ‘‘Assutavā puthujjano…pe… nibbānaṃ abhinandatī’’ti ayaṃ desanā. ‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano…pe… sappurisadhamme avinīto manasikaraṇīye dhamme nappajānāti, amanasikaraṇīye ca dhamme nappajānāti, so manasikaraṇīye dhamme appajānanto amanasikaraṇīye ca dhamme appajānanto ye dhammā na manasikaraṇīyā, te dhamme manasi karoti…pe… anuppanno vā kāmāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā kāmāsavo pavaḍḍhati. Anuppanno vā bhavāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā bhavāsavo pavaḍḍhati, anuppanno vā avijjāsavo uppajjati, uppanno vā avijjāsavo pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.17) imāya desanāya saṃsandati. Tathā ‘‘tassetaṃ pāṭikaṅkhaṃ subhanimittaṃ manasi karissati, tassa subhanimittassa manasikārā rāgo cittaṃ anuddhaṃsessati, so sarāgo sadoso samoho sāṅgaṇo saṃkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṃ karissatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.59) imāya desanāya saṃsandati. Tathā ‘‘cakkhuñcāvuso paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā. Yaṃ vedeti taṃ sañjānāti, yaṃ sañjānāti taṃ vitakketi, yaṃ vitakketi taṃ papañceti, yaṃ papañceti tatonidānaṃ purisaṃ papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācarantī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.204) imāya desanāya saṃsandati. Tathā ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, asutavā puthujjano…pe… sappurisadhamme avinīto rūpaṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati. Vedanaṃ…pe…, saññaṃ…pe…, saṅkhāre…pe…, viññāṇaṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati. Yampi taṃ diṭṭhaṃ…pe… yampi taṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, so loko so attā so pecca bhavissāmi nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassāmīti, tampi ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.241) imāya desanāya saṃsandati.
“诸比丘,那位比丘……乃至……不欣喜涅槃”这一说法,与“帝释天王,在此,比丘听闻了‘一切法都不值得执取’,帝释天王,比丘如此听闻‘一切法都不值得执取’后,他便证知一切法;证知一切法后遍知一切法;遍知一切法后,无论感受何种乐受、苦受或不苦不乐受,他都安住于随观那些受的无常、安住于随观离欲、安住于随观灭尽、安住于随观弃舍”(《中部·1.390》)这一说法相契合。“诸比丘,那位比丘是阿罗汉……乃至……我说是正等觉者”这一说法,与“诸比丘,然而,多闻的圣弟子……乃至……在善士法中善受调伏,他将色观察为‘这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我’;将受……乃至……将想……乃至……将行……乃至……将识观察为‘这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我’。凡所见的、所闻的、所觉的、所证的、所寻求的、心所游历的,也将此观察为‘这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我’。凡那邪见之立足处——‘那个世间即是我,那个我死后将成为恒常、稳固、永恒、不变易之法,我将如永恒那样一直存在’——也将此观察为‘这不是我的,我不是这个,这不……显示巴利原文
‘‘Yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu…pe… nibbānaṃ mābhinandī’’ti ayaṃ desanā. ‘‘Idha, devānaminda, bhikkhuno sutaṃ hoti ‘sabbe dhammā nālaṃ abhinivesāyā’ti, evañcetaṃ, devānaminda, bhikkhuno sutaṃ hoti ‘sabbe dhammā nālaṃ abhinivesāyā’ti, so sabbaṃ dhammaṃ abhijānāti, sabbaṃ dhammaṃ abhiññāya sabbaṃ dhammaṃ parijānāti, sabbaṃ dhammaṃ pariññāya yaṃ kiñci vedanaṃ vedeti sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā adukkhamasukhaṃ vā, so tāsu vedanāsu aniccānupassī viharati, virāgānupassī viharati, nirodhānupassī viharati, paṭinissaggānupassī viharatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.390) imāya desanāya saṃsandati. ‘‘Yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṃ…pe… abhisambuddhoti vadāmī’’ti ayaṃ desanā ‘‘sutavā ca kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako…pe… sappurisadhamme suvinīto rūpaṃ ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati, vedanaṃ…pe…, saññaṃ…pe…, saṅkhāre…pe…, viññāṇaṃ ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Yampi taṃ diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, tampi ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. Yampi taṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, so loko so attā so pecca bhavissāmi ‘nicco dhuvo sassato api pariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassāmī’ti, tampi ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati. So evaṃ samanupassanto na paritassatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.241) evamādidesanāhi saṃsandatīti, ayaṃ catubyūho hāro.
7. 往复纲要的注释显示巴利原文
7. Āvattahāravaṇṇanā
“无闻凡夫”一句,通过遮止如理作意的方式,显示出不如理作意的取著。“未曾见圣者”等句,通过遮止亲近善士等的方式,显示出亲近不善士等的取著。其中,前一种方式说明意乐的败坏,后一种方式说明加行的败坏。由前者,他的烦恼轮转起;由此,果报轮转起,于是整个轮回之轮便转动起来。“他思量地”等句,在此处开示三种思量。其中,渴爱思量即“这是我的”的渴爱执;我慢思量即“我是这个”的我慢执;邪见思量即“这是我的自我”的邪见执。在此,由渴爱执,转起以渴爱为根本的九种法(如“缘于渴爱而有遍求”等)。由我慢执,转起九种我慢类别(如“我较胜”等)。由邪见执,转起具二十事的有身见(如“观色为我”等)。在三执中,能镇伏渴爱执的想,是苦想与苦随观;能镇伏我慢执的想,是无常想与无常随观;能镇伏邪见执的想,是无我想与无我随观。于此,与第一执相违,转起无愿解脱门;与第二执相违,转起无相解脱门;与第三执相违,转起空解脱门。显示巴利原文
‘‘Assutavā puthujjano’’ti iminā yonisomanasikārapaṭikkhepamukhena ayonisomanasikārapariggaho dīpito. ‘‘Ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’tiādinā sappurisūpanissayādipaṭikkhepamukhena asappurisūpanissayādipariggaho dīpito. Tesu purimanayena āsayavipatti kittitā, dutiyena payogavipatti. Purimena cassa kilesavaṭṭaṃ, tañca yato vipākavaṭṭanti sakalaṃ saṃsāracakkamāvattati. ‘‘Pathaviṃ maññatī’’tiādinā tattha tisso maññanā vuttā. Tāsu taṇhāmaññanā ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti taṇhāggāho, mānamaññanā ‘‘esohamasmī’’ti mānaggāho, diṭṭhimaññanā ‘‘eso me attā’’ti diṭṭhiggāho. Tattha taṇhāggāhena ‘‘taṇhaṃ paṭiccapariyesanā’’tiādikā (dī. ni. 2.103; dī. ni. 3.359; a. ni. 3.23; vibha. 963) nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā āvattanti. Mānaggāhena ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādikā nava mānavidhā āvattanti. Diṭṭhiggāhena ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādikā (saṃ. ni. 4.345) vīsativatthukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi āvattati. Tīsu ca gāhesu yāya saññāya taṇhāggāhassa vikkhambhanā, sā dukkhasaññā dukkhānupassanā. Yāya saññāya mānaggāhassa vikkhambhanā, sā aniccasaññā aniccānupassanā. Yāya pana saññāya diṭṭhiggāhassa vikkhambhanā, sā anattasaññā anattānupassanā. Tattha paṭhamaggāhavisabhāgato appaṇihitavimokkhamukhaṃ āvattati, dutiyaggāhavisabhāgato animittavimokkhamukhaṃ āvattati, tatiyaggāhavisabhāgato suññatavimokkhamukhaṃ āvattati.
以“有学”一语摄持了圣正见,由此亦显明了闻他音与如理作意。由闻他音而转起“多闻圣弟子”;由如理作意则转起九种以如理作意为根本之法,以及四种成就轮。“莫思量”一句,摄持了诸思量的分断,显示某些漏的灭尽,由此转起信解脱、见至、身证。“阿罗汉、漏尽者”等句,显示无学的戒蕴等;由戒蕴等的圆满,转起十种作庇护法。“不思量”一句,通过遮止思量,显示了于五取蕴中“这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的自我”的正行,由此宣说殊胜的欲爱尽、慢除、见灭,从而转起无愿、无相、空解脱。显示巴利原文
Sekkhaggahaṇena ariyāya sammādiṭṭhiyā saṅgaho, tato ca paratoghosayonisomanasikārā dīpitā honti. Paratoghosena ca sutavā ariyasāvakoti āvattati, yonisomanasikārena nava yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā āvattanti, catubbidhañca sampatticakkaṃ. ‘‘Mā maññī’’ti maññanānaṃ vippakatappahānatāgahaṇena ekaccāsavaparikkhayo dīpito hoti, tena ca saddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattakāyasakkhibhāvā āvattanti. ‘‘Arahaṃ khīṇāsavo’’tiādinā asekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo dassitā honti, sīlakkhandhādipāripūriyā ca dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā āvattanti. ‘‘Na maññatī’’ti maññanāpaṭikkhepena pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti sammāpaṭipatti dassitā, tāya ca sātisayā nikantipariyādānamānasamugghāṭanadiṭṭhiugghāṭanāni pakāsitānīti appaṇihitānimitta-suññatavimokkhā āvattanti.
“如来”等句阐明了遍知功德,因其不相离故,转起十力、四无畏、不共智与不共佛法。“喜是苦之根”等句,连同其因,宣说了轮转与还灭;由开显流转与还灭二者的因,转起四圣谛。“由渴爱灭尽”等句,以示断除渴爱为说,因处于同一事位,转起一千五百烦恼的断除。又因宣说“由一切渴爱灭尽,正觉无上正自觉”,故“喜是苦之根”及“如是了知后”等句所说、作为不思量之因的缘起通达,被显示为不与弟子共的智行境,由此转起世尊能出入二十四万百千俱胝等至的大金刚智。此称为“回转理趣”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tathāgato’’tiādinā sabbaññuguṇā vibhāvitāti tadavinābhāvato dasabala-catuvesārajjaasādhāraṇañāṇaāveṇikabuddhadhammā āvattanti. ‘‘Nandī dukkhassa mūla’’ntiādinā saddhiṃ hetunā vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti pavattinivattitadubhayahetuvibhāvanena cattāri ariyasaccāni āvattanti. ‘‘Taṇhānaṃ khayā’’tiādinā taṇhappahānāpadesena tadekaṭṭhabhāvato diyaḍḍhassa kilesasahassassa pahānaṃ āvattati. ‘‘Sabbaso taṇhānaṃ khayā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho’’ti ca vuttattā ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūla’’nti, ‘‘iti viditvā’’tiādinā vuttassa maññanābhāvahetubhūtassa paccayākāravedanassa sāvakehi asādhāraṇañāṇacārabhāvo dassito, tena catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcāri bhagavato mahāvajirañāṇaṃ āvattatīti. Ayaṃ āvatto hāro.
第八 分别理趣的注释显示巴利原文
8. Vibhattihāravaṇṇanā
于“一切法根本理趣”中,“一切法”指三界之法,因其以有身为所依。他们的思量是近因,以戏论之相为世间种种之因。这些法有三种:善、不善、无记。其中,善法以如理作意等为近因,不善法以不如理作意等为近因,无记法以业有、转向、所造色等为近因。其中,善法依地有欲界等三种;无记法中,能生心的自性等并非唯属欲界,而不能生心的自性者唯属欲界;不善法亦唯属欲界。“无闻”依教理、行道、证悟未得听闻而有三种。“凡夫”依盲目与贤善之差别而有二种。“圣者”依正自觉者、独觉佛、声闻之差别而有三种。“不见者”依不具肉眼、天眼、慧眼之见而有三种。“圣法”依道、果、涅槃之差别而有三种或九种。“于圣法善巧”依闻、持、习、作意、证悟而有五种,无此则为不善巧。“圣法律”依防护与断除之差别而有二种或十种,无此则于圣法未得调伏。此处近因的分别,前文已示。“不见善士”等句,其理亦然。于“思量地”等句中,思量所缘的分别已于经中给出,内外等中间的分别亦复如是。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha sabbadhammā nāma tebhūmakā dhammā sakkāyassa adhippetattā. Tesaṃ maññanā padaṭṭhānaṃ papañcasaṅkhānimittattā lokavicittassa. Tayime kusalā akusalā abyākatāti tividhā. Tesu kusalānaṃ yonisomanasikārādi padaṭṭhānaṃ, akusalānaṃ ayonisomanasikārādi, abyākatānaṃ kammabhavaāvajjanabhūtarūpādi padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha kusalā kāmāvacarādivasena bhūmito tividhā, tathā abyākatā cittuppādasabhāvā, acittuppādasabhāvā pana kāmāvacarāva tathā akusalā. Pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhasutakiccābhāvena tividho assutavā. Andhakalyāṇavibhāgena duvidho puthujjano. Sammāsambuddhapaccekabuddhasāvakabhedena tividhā ariyā. Maṃsacakkhudibbacakkhupaññācakkhūhi dassanābhāvena tividho adassāvī. Maggaphalanibbānabhedena tividho, navavidho vā ariyadhammo. Savanadhāraṇaparicayamanasikārapaṭivedhavasena pañcavidhā ariyadhammassa kovidatā. Tadabhāvato akovido. Saṃvarapahānabhedena duvidho, dasavidho vā ariyadhammavinayo, tadabhāvato ariyadhamme avinīto. Ettha padaṭṭhānavibhāgo heṭṭhā dassitoyeva. ‘‘Sappurisānaṃ adassāvī’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. ‘‘Pathaviṃ maññatī’’tiādīsu maññanāvatthuvibhāgo pāḷiyaṃ āgatova, tathā ajjhattikabāhirādiko ca antaravibhāgo.
而‘思量’简略而言,依爱、慢、见分为三种;详言之,爱思量依欲爱等有一百零八种,同样,依‘有我时,则如是’等语,慢思量也是如此。依‘有我时,则如是’等,宣说了三种戏论,由此应知,见思量也有一百零八种之说。此外,依‘我是胜者’等,慢思量有九种,依其间的差别更有多种,此义应在《劣等三经注》中阐明。见思量,依《梵网经》所说,则有六十二种,依其间的差别亦有多类。‘未遍知’一句中,应知依知遍知等,以及依对色等所缘的执取差别,遍知有多种。同样,依第八有学等,有学的分类;依慧解脱等,有无学的分类。此乃此处法的分类。近因分类与地分类,应依前述方法了知。此为分别理趣。显示巴利原文
Maññanā pana taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena saṅkhepato tividhā, vitthārato pana taṇhāmaññanā tāva kāmataṇhādivasena aṭṭhasatavidhā, tathā ‘‘asmīti sati itthaṃsmīti hotī’’tiādinā. Evaṃ mānamaññanāpi. ‘‘Asmīti sati itthaṃsmīti hotī’’tiādinā papañcattayaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ niddiṭṭhañcāti . Etena diṭṭhimaññanāyapi aṭṭhasatavidhatā vuttāti veditabbā. Apica seyyassa ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā mānamaññanāya navavidhatā tadantarabhedena anekavidhatā ca veditabbā. Ayañca attho hīnattikatthavaṇṇanāya vibhāvetabbo. Diṭṭhimaññanāya pana brahmajāle āgatanayena dvāsaṭṭhividhatā tadantarabhedena anekavidhatā ca veditabbā. ‘‘Apariññāta’’nti ettha ñātapariññādivasena ceva rūpamukhādiabhinivesabhedādivasena ca pariññānaṃ anekavidhatā veditabbā. Tathā aṭṭhamakādivasena sekkhavibhāgo paññāvimuttādivasena asekkhavibhāgo ca. Ayamettha dhammavibhāgo. Padaṭṭhānavibhāgo ca bhūmivibhāgo ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbāti. Ayaṃ vibhattihāro.
第九 回转理趣注显示巴利原文
9. Parivattahāravaṇṇanā
在‘一切法根本理趣’中,‘一切法’是指五取蕴,它们的根本因即是爱、慢、见。同样,无闻凡夫……在善士法上未调伏者,只要在五取蕴中以净、乐、常、我的随观方式,执取‘这是我的,我是这个,这是我的我’的爱、慢、见尚未断尽,那么他们的相续之止息,即使在梦中也从未被任何人获得过。然而,当他们以不净、苦、无常、无我的随观方式,生起‘这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我’的无愿、无相、空随观,精进增上,导向圣道证得时,他们的相续便止息,因为达到了究竟无施设的状态。因此说:‘一切法指五取蕴,它们的根本因即是爱、慢、见。’同样,无闻凡夫……在善士法上未调伏者,以三种思量,思量地乃至喜悦涅槃,因为对那事物未以三种遍知而遍知。然而,若对那事物已以三种遍知而遍知,他便不像前者那样思量它。因此世尊说:‘诸比丘,多闻圣弟子……在善士法上善调伏者,观察色:“这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我”,观察受……无执取故不恐惧。’有学不应思量地,乃至不应喜悦涅槃;阿罗汉与正自觉者不思量地,乃至不喜悦涅槃,因为在所思量与不显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha ‘‘sabbadhammā’’ti pañcupādānakkhandhā gahitā, tesaṃ mūlakāraṇanti ca taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo. Tathā assutavā puthujjano…pe… sappurisadhamme avinītoti. Yāvakīvañca pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu subhato sukhato niccato attato samanupassanavasena ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhigāhā na samucchijjanti, tāva nesaṃ pabandhūparamo supinantepi na kenaci laddhapubbo. Yadā pana nesaṃ asubhato dukkhato aniccato anattato samanupassanavasena ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti pavattamānā appaṇihitānimittasuññatānupassanā ussakkitvā ariyamaggādhigamāya saṃvattanti, atha nesaṃ pabandhūparamo hoti accantaappaññattikabhāvūpagamanato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbadhammāti pañcupādānakkhandhā gahitā, tesaṃ mūlakāraṇanti ca taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo’’ti. Tathā assutavā puthujjano…pe… sappurisadhamme avinīto tīhipi maññanāhi pathaviṃ maññati yāva nibbānaṃ abhinandati, tīhipi pariññāhi tassa taṃ vatthu apariññātanti katvā. Yassa pana taṃ vatthu tīhi pariññāhi pariññātaṃ, na so itaro viya taṃ maññati. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘sutavā ca kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako…pe… sappurisadhamme suvinīto rūpaṃ ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti samanupassati, vedanaṃ…pe… asati na paritassatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.241). Sekkho pathaviṃ mā maññi, yāva nibbānaṃ mābhinandi, arahā sammāsambuddho ca pathaviṃ na maññati, yāva nibbānaṃ nābhinandati, maññanāmaññitesu vatthūsu mattaso sabbaso ca pariññābhisamayasaṃsiddhiyā pahānābhisamayanibbattito. Yassa pana tesu vatthūsu sabbaso mattaso vā pariññā eva natthi, kuto pahānaṃ, so yathāparikappaṃ niraṅkusāhi maññanāhi ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā maññateva. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano…pe… sappurisadhamme avinīto rūpaṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti samanupassati, vedanaṃ…pe…, sañña…pe…’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.241). Ayaṃ parivatto hāro.
第十 异名理趣注显示巴利原文
10. Vevacanahāravaṇṇanā
‘一切法’的同义语有‘完整法、无余法’;‘根本理趣’的同义语有‘根本因、不共因’,或作‘根本教说、因如实说’;‘vo’的同义语是‘你们、你们的’;‘诸比丘’的同义语是‘沙门、苦行者’;‘我将说’的同义语有‘我将讲说、我将施设’;‘谛听’的同义语是‘倾听、倾耳、以耳门受持’;‘善’的同义语是‘正、恭敬’;‘作意’的同义语是‘置心、系念’;‘我将说’亦同于‘明了地说、分别说’;‘如是,尊者,善哉’的同义语是‘好,尊者,善’;‘应答’的同义语是‘接受、摄受’。依此方法,一切文句皆应说有异名。这是异名理趣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammā sakaladhammā anavasesadhammā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘mūlapariyāyaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ asādhāraṇahetu’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘mūlapariyāyanti vā mūladesanaṃ kāraṇatathana’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘vo tumhākaṃ tumha’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘bhikkhave, samaṇā tapassino’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘desessāmī kathessāmī paññapessāmī’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘suṇātha sotaṃ odahatha sotadvārānusārena upadhārethā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘sādhukaṃ sammā sakkacca’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘manasi karotha citte ṭhapetha samannāharathā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘bhāsissāmi byattaṃ kathessāmi vibhajissāmī’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘evaṃ, bhante, sādhu suṭṭhu bhante’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘paccassosuṃ sampaṭicchiṃsu sampaṭiggahesu’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu vevacanaṃ vattabbanti. Ayaṃ vevacano hāro.
‘一切法根本理趣’中,‘一切法’即是有身法,依蕴被施设为五种,依处被施设为十二种,依界被施设为十八种。‘根本’或‘根本理趣’即是思量,依爱、慢、见有三种,依其间的差别被施设为多种。另一种方式:‘一切法’是总摄三地诸法的概念;‘根本理趣’是它们的生起根源概念;‘向你们’是对象概念;‘我将说、我将宣说’是承诺概念;‘你们听、善作意’是教诫概念;‘未听闻者’既是通达背离的概念,也是学习背离的概念;‘凡夫’是非圣者的概念,既是拒绝圣法的概念,也是缺乏圣法的概念;‘圣者们’既是不等同的概念,也是等同的概念。其中,不等同的概念即是如来,等同的概念应知依独觉佛及俱分解脱等有八种。‘不见圣者’等是对见与修习的否定概念;‘思量地’等是对五取蕴、十二处、十八界、应审察的诸根的施设概念及生起根源概念;同样地,对于颠倒,是作用概念;对于烦恼,是现起概念;对于异熟,是结果概念;对于行作,是生长概念;对于爱,是乐味概念;对于见,是悸动概念。‘有学’是随信行、信解脱、见至、身证的显示概念及修习概念;‘未达意欲者’是有学法的住立概念;‘希求无上安稳’是以慧彻底厌离的概念;‘自证’是对应知诸法的了知概念,是苦的遍知概念,集的断除概念,灭的作证概念,道的修习概念;‘莫思量’是对思量的否定概念,是集的断除概念。依此类推,其他文句也应详细说明。这是施设理趣。显示巴利原文
11. Paññattihāravaṇṇanā
在「一切法根本说」中,所谓「一切法」即是有身法,依蕴而说为五,依处而说为十二,依界而说为十八。所谓「根」或「根本说」,则是「妄想」,依渴爱、慢、见而说为三,依其内部分类又有多别。或者,「一切法」是对三地诸法的总摄施设,「根本说」是对其根源的施设;其中‘vo’是表示听受者的施设,「我将说、我将讲」是承诺的施设,「你们听、善作意」是教诫的施设;「未听闻者」是表示背离通达、背离教理的施设;「凡夫」是非圣者的施设,既是拒斥圣法的施设,也是缺乏圣法的施设;「圣者」是别异的施设及等同的施设,其中别异的施设即是如来施设,等同的施设则依独觉、俱分解脱者等而有八种应知。「不见圣者」等是表示排斥见与修的施设;「认为地」等是对五取蕴、十二处、十八界、可作观照的诸根等所作的安立施设及起源施设,同样地,也是对颠倒的作用施设、对缠缚的显示施设、对烦恼的果报施设、对诸行的增长施设、对渴爱的乐味施设、对邪见的躁动施设。「有学」是对随信行、信解脱、见至、身证者的见施设及修施设;「未证得心意」是对有学诸法的住立施设,显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha sabbadhammā nāma sakkāyadhammā, te khandhavasena pañcadhā paññattā, āyatanavasena dvādasadhā, dhātuvasena aṭṭhārasadhā paññattā. ‘‘Mūla’’nti vā ‘‘mūlapariyāya’’nti vā maññanā vuttā, tā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena tidhā antarabhedena anekadhā ca paññattā. Atha vā ‘‘sabbadhammā’’ti tebhūmakadhammānaṃ saṅgahapaññatti, ‘‘mūlapariyāya’’nti tesaṃ pabhavapaññatti, ‘‘vo’’ti sampadānapaññati, ‘‘desessāmi bhāsissāmī’’ti paṭiññāpaññatti, ‘‘suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti ca āṇāpanapaññatti, ‘‘assutavā’’ti paṭivedhavimukhatāpaññatti ceva pariyattivimukhatāpaññatti ca, ‘‘puthujjano’’ti anariyapaññatti, sā ariyadhammapaṭikkhepapaññatti ceva ariyadhammavirahapaññatti ca, ‘‘ariyāna’’nti asamapaññatti ceva samapaññatti ca. Tattha asamapaññatti tathāgatapaññatti, samapaññatti paccekabuddhānañceva ubhatobhāgavimuttādīnañca vasena aṭṭhavidhā veditabbā. ‘‘Ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’tiādi dassanabhāvanāpaṭikkhepapaññatti, ‘‘pathaviṃ maññatī’’tiādi pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ sammasanupagānaṃ indriyānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti ceva pabhavapaññatti ca, tathā vipallāsānaṃ kiccapaññatti pariyuṭṭhānaṃ dassanapaññatti kilesānaṃ phalapaññatti abhisaṅkhārānaṃ virūhanapaññatti taṇhāya assādanapaññatti diṭṭhiyā vipphandanapaññatti, ‘‘sekkhā’’ti saddhānusārīsaddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattakāyasakkhīnaṃ dassanapaññatti ceva bhāvanāpaññatti ca ‘‘appattamānaso’’ti sekkhadhammānaṃ ṭhitipaññatti, ‘‘anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ patthayamāno’’ti paññāya abhinibbidāpaññatti, ‘‘abhijānātī’’ti abhiññeyyadhammānaṃ abhiññāpaññatti, dukkhassa pariññāpaññatti, samudayassa pahānapaññatti, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāpaññatti, maggassa bhāvanāpaññatti, ‘‘mā maññī’’ti maññanānaṃ paṭikkhepapaññatti, samudayassa pahānapaññatti. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi vitthāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ paññatti hāro.
12. 随入轨理的解释显示巴利原文
12. Otaraṇahāravaṇṇanā
在「一切法根本说」中,所谓的「一切法」是指世间的五蕴、十二处、十八界、二谛、十九根、十二支缘起——这是以“一切法”为总摄,通过蕴等门而导入教说。所谓「根」或「根本说」,是指「妄想」,它们从义理上即是渴爱、慢、见,这些被摄入行蕴——这是通过蕴门导入。同样地,“为法处、法界所摄”是通过处门和界门导入。在「未听闻者」这一句中,摄取了作为听闻障碍的无明等;在「凡夫」这一句中,摄取了那些由于能生起等原因而被称为凡夫的烦恼与诸行等;在「不见圣者」等句中,摄取了那些使众生成为不见圣者的见、慢、无明等烦恼法——所有这些都被摄入行蕴,应如前所说之理理解为导入。在「认知、妄想、自证、不妄想」中,认知、妄想、自证、随观都属于行蕴所摄,也应如前所说之理理解为导入。同样地,通过有学的总摄句涵摄了有学,通过「阿拉汉」等句涵摄了无学、戒蕴等——这也是通过蕴门导入,以及通过处门、界门等导入,应如此理解。同样地,「不妄想」通过拒绝渴爱执取等,涵摄了苦随观等,应知这是通过无愿解脱门等导入。「遍知」这一句,是以遍知的作用而现起的菩提分法被摄取,因此应知是以念处等门导入。以欢喜、有、渴爱的总摄句,涵摄了集谛;以苦、生老死的总摄句,涵摄了苦谛;以“渴爱尽”等句,涵摄了灭谛;以正等觉的总摄句,涵摄了道谛——因此,这是通过圣谛导入。以上是导入分。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha sabbadhammā nāma lokiyā pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo dve saccāni ekūnavisati indriyāni dvādasapadiko paccayākāroti, ayaṃ sabbadhammaggahaṇena khandhādimukhena desanāya otaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Mūla’’nti vā ‘‘mūlapariyāya’’nti vā maññanā vuttā, tā atthato taṇhā māno diṭṭhi cāti tesaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahoti ayaṃ khandhamukhena otaraṇaṃ. Tathā ‘‘dhammāyatanadhammadhātūhi saṅgaho’’ti ayaṃ āyatanamukhena dhātumukhena ca otaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Assutavā’’ti iminā sutassa vibandhabhūtā avijjādayo gahitā, ‘‘puthujjano’’ti iminā yesaṃ kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ jananādinā puthujjanoti vuccati, te kilesābhisaṅkhārādayo gahitā, ‘‘ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’tiādinā yesaṃ kilesadhammānaṃ vasena ariyānaṃ adassāviādibhāvo hoti, te diṭṭhimānāvijjādayo gahitāti sabbehi tehi saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahoti pubbe vuttanayeneva otaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Sañjānāti maññati abhijānāti na maññatī’’ti etthāpi sañjānanamaññanāabhijānanānupassanānaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannattā vuttanayeneva otaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tathā sekkhaggahaṇena sekkhā, ‘‘araha’’ntiādinā asekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo gahitāti evampi khandhamukhena otaraṇaṃ, āyatanadhātādimukhena ca otaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tathā ‘‘na maññatī’’ti taṇhāgāhādipaṭikkhepena dukkhānupassanādayo gahitā, tesaṃ vasena appaṇihitavimokkhamukhādīhi otaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Pariññāta’’nti iminā parijānanakiccena pavattamānā bodhipakkhiyadhammā gayhantīti satipaṭṭhānādimukhena otaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nandiggahaṇena bhavaggahaṇena taṇhāgahaṇena ca samudayasaccaṃ, dukkhaggahaṇena jātijarāmaraṇaggahaṇena ca dukkhasaccaṃ, ‘‘taṇhānaṃ khayā’’tiādinā nirodhasaccaṃ, abhisambodhiyā gahaṇena maggasaccaṃ gahitanti ariyasaccehi otaraṇanti. Ayaṃ otaraṇo hāro.
13. 净治轨理的解释显示巴利原文
13. Sodhanahāravaṇṇanā
「诸比丘,我将为你们说一切法根本说……这里,诸比丘,未听闻者……从地的角度认知地」,这是起始。「从地的角度认知地后,认为地」,这是文句净化,不是起始净化。同样地,「于地认为、从地认为、地是我的而认为、欢喜地」,这些是文句净化,不是起始净化。「那是什么原因呢?我称之为未遍知它的缘故」,这既是文句净化,也是起始净化。在其余各节也是同样的道理。这是净化分。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave…pe… idha, bhikkhave, assutavā…pe… pathaviṃ pathavito sañjānātī’’ti ārambho. ‘‘Pathaviṃ pathaviyā saññatvā pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi. Tathā ‘‘pathaviyā maññati pathavito maññati pathaviṃ meti maññati pathaviṃ abhinandatī’’ti padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi. ‘‘Taṃ kissa hetu apariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmī’’ti padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi ca. Sesavāresupi eseva nayoti. Ayaṃ sodhano hāro.
14. 确立义理的解释显示巴利原文
14. Adhiṭṭhānahāravaṇṇanā
在“一切法根本理趣”中,“一切法”的提法是总相安立;而“地、水”等不加分别的具体表述,则是别相说明。同样,“根本理趣”是总相安立,“他妄想地……乃至……欢喜”这些不加分别的具体表述,则是别相说明。再者,“他妄想地”也是总相安立,因为“妄想”是贪爱、执取等共同的特征;而“这是我的,我就是这个,这是我的自我”这些不加分别的具体表述,则是别相说明。如此,从经文中引出词句后,便应以此方式拣择出别相说明。其余各章也应如此理解。“有学”是总相安立,而“身证者、见至者、信解脱者、随信行、随法行”这些不加分别的具体词句,是别相说明。同样,“有学”是总相安立,“诸比丘,在此,比丘具备了有学的正见……乃至……具备了有学的正定”(《相应部》5.13)这一不加分别的具体语句,是别相说明。“阿拉汉”是总相安立,而“俱分解脱、慧解脱”(《人施设论》13.2; 15.1 论母)以及“三明者、六通者”(《人施设论》7.26, 27 论母)这些不加分别的具体词句,是别相说明。“漏尽者”是总相安立。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha sabbadhammaggahaṇaṃ sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Pathaviṃ āpa’’ntiādi pana taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ. Tathā ‘‘mūlapariyāya’’nti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘pathaviṃ maññati…pe… abhinandatī’’ti. ‘‘Pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti ca sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ taṇhādiggāhānaṃ sādhāraṇattā maññanāya, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti, evaṃ suttantarapadānipi ānetvā visesavacanaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ. Sesavāresupi eseva nayo. ‘‘Sekkho’’ti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘kāyasakkhī diṭṭhippatto saddhāvimutto saddhānusārī dhammānusārī’’ti. Tathā ‘‘sekkho’’ti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekkhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato hoti…pe… sekkhena sammāsamādhinā samannāgato hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.13). ‘‘Araha’’nti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘ubhatobhāgavimutto paññāvimutto (pu. pa. 13.2; 15.1 mātikā), tevijjo chaḷabhiñño’’ti (pu. pa. 7.26, 27 mātikā) ca. ‘‘Khīṇāsavo’’ti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccittha, bhavāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccitthā’’tiādi (pārā. 14). Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. ‘‘Abhijānātī’’ti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘maññatī’’ti. Maññanābhāvo hissa pahānapaṭivedhasiddho, pahānapaṭivedho ca pariññāsacchikiriyābhāvanāpaṭivedhehi na vināti sabbepi abhiññāvisesā maññanāpaṭikkhepena atthato gahitāva hontīti. Tathā ‘‘araha’’nti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘vītarāgattā vītadosattā vītamohattā’’ti. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi sāmaññavisesaniddhāraṇā veditabbā. Ayaṃ adhiṭṭhāno hāro.
14. 资具义理的解释显示巴利原文
14. Parikkhārahāravaṇṇanā
在“一切法根本理趣”中,“一切法”指摄属于范围内的诸法,这些法依善、不善、无记分为三类。其中,善法的因是如理作意及无贪等;不善法的因是不如理作意及贪等;在无记法中,异熟法各自的因是相应的业,其余的则有有分、转向、作意等为因。此处,善士的依止等缘亦归入因中,须知是由“等”字所包含。被称为“根本”的种种“妄想”,其因性已在经中说明。而在各类妄想中,“爱妄想”是以随观乐味为因,正如经中所说:“于结缚法随观乐味者,贪爱增长”(《相应部》2.52)。“慢妄想”是以不与邪见相应的贪为因,纯粹因交往而转起“我是”这样的想法。“见妄想”是以对“同一性”等道理的不如实执取为因。不听闻是凡夫性的因,不听闻是因为不见圣者;不见圣者是因为于圣法不精通;于圣法不精通是因为在圣法上未被调伏。这一因缘相续,正是于地等生起“这是我的、我是这个、这是我的自我”三种妄想的因。而达到有学、阿拉汉等果位,则是妄想部分或完全息灭的因。这就是“资具之道”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha sabbadhammā nāma pariyāpannadhammā, te kusalākusalābyākatabhedena tividhā. Tesu kusalānaṃ yonisomanasikāro alobhādayo ca hetū, akusalānaṃ ayonisomanasikāro lobhādayo ca hetū, abyākatesu vipākānaṃ yathāsakaṃ kammaṃ, itaresaṃ bhavaṅgamāvajjanasamannāhārādi ca hetū. Ettha ca sappurisūpanissayādiko paccayo hetumhi eva samavaruḷho, so tattha ādi-saddena saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Mūla’’nti vuttānaṃ maññanānaṃ hetubhāvo pāḷiyaṃ vutto eva. Maññanāsu pana taṇhāmaññanāya assādānupassanā hetu. ‘‘Saññojaniyesu dhammesu assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.52) hi vuttaṃ. Mānamaññanāya diṭṭhivippayuttalobho hetu kevalaṃ saṃsaggavasena ‘‘ahamasmī’’ti pavattanato. Diṭṭhimaññanāya ekattanayādīnaṃ ayāthāvaggāho hetu, assutabhāvo puthujjanabhāvassa hetu, so ariyānaṃ adassanasīlatāya, sā ariyadhammassa akovidatāya, sā ariyadhamme avinītatāya hetu, sabbā cāyaṃ hetuparamparā pathavīādīsu ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti tissannaṃ maññanānaṃ hetu, sekkhārahādibhāvā pana mattaso sabbaso ca maññanābhāvassa hetūti. Ayaṃ parikkhāro hāro.
16. 摄引理的解释显示巴利原文
16. Samāropanahāravaṇṇanā
在“一切法根本理趣”等经文中,通过执取“根本理趣”、执取“未闻者”,以及执取“了知”、“妄想”、“遍知”,显示了杂染法。这些杂染法概分为三种:渴爱杂染、见杂染、恶行杂染。其中,渴爱杂染是渴爱杂染、见杂染、恶行杂染的立足处;同样,见杂染是见杂染、渴爱杂染、恶行杂染的立足处;恶行杂染也是恶行杂染、渴爱杂染、见杂染的立足处。在这三者中,“渴爱杂染”即是贪,以“贪、染著、所染著、极贪、极染著、所极染著”等(《法集》389)多种教说加以分别说明。同理,“见杂染”即是见本身,以“恶见、见稠林、见荒漠、见诤论、见纠结”等(《法集》1105)多种教说,以及“诸比丘,有某些沙门、婆罗门……”(《长部》1.30)等六十二种分类加以分别说明。而“恶行杂染”即是恶戒之思及与思相应的法,以“身恶行、语恶行、身邪行、语邪行”(《分别论》913, 924),以及“杀生、不与取”等(《分别论》913)多种教说与分类加以分别说明。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’ntiādīsu mūlapariyāyaggahaṇena assutavāgahaṇena sañjānanamaññanāpariññāgahaṇehi ca saṃkilesadhammā dassitā, te ca saṅkhepato tividhā taṇhāsaṃkileso diṭṭhisaṃkileso duccaritasaṃkilesoti. Tattha taṇhāsaṃkileso taṇhāsaṃkilesassa, diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa, duccaritasaṃkilesassa ca padaṭṭhānaṃ, tathā diṭṭhisaṃkileso diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa, taṇhāsaṃkilesassa, duccaritasaṃkilesassa ca padaṭṭhānaṃ, duccaritasaṃkilesopi duccaritasaṃkilesassa, taṇhāsaṃkilesassa, diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu taṇhāsaṃkileso atthato lobhova, yo ‘‘lobho lubbhanā lubbhitattaṃ sārāgo sārajjanā sārajjitatta’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 389) anekehi pariyāyehi vibhatto. Tathā diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhisaṃkileso, yo ‘‘diṭṭhigataṃ diṭṭhigahanaṃ diṭṭhikantāro diṭṭhivisūkaṃ diṭṭhivipphandita’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 1105) anekehi pariyāyehi, ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.30) dvāsaṭṭhiyā pabhedehi ca vibhatto. Duccaritasaṃkileso pana atthato dussīlyacetanā ceva cetanāsampayuttadhammā ca, yā ‘‘kāyaduccaritaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ kāyavisamaṃ vacīvisama’’nti (vibha. 913, 924), ‘‘pāṇātipāto adinnādāna’’nti (vibha. 913) ca ādinā anekehi pariyāyehi, anekehi pabhedehi ca vibhattā.
在这三者之中,对治贪欲杂染的是止,对治邪见杂染的是观,对治恶行杂染的是戒。而这些戒等法,在此是通过‘遍知’的含摄、‘有学’的含摄,以及‘阿罗汉’等圣者地位的含摄而被把握的。其中,依戒成就了恶行杂染的断除,同时也成就了彼分断除与违犯断除;依止成就了贪欲杂染的断除,同时也成就了镇伏断除与现行断除;依观成就了邪见杂染的断除,同时也成就了正断断除与随眠断除。在修行前分,安住于戒者有止,安住于止者有观;但在证道的刹那,它们则同时生起。因为那些身语业与活命先前已极清净的人,其发起的止与观在孕育、成熟之时,便广修‘出起观’;当出起观修习圆满而契合于道时,在道刹那,止观便达到圆满。如此,在道刹那,由于止观修习圆满,它们彻底断尽一切残余杂染法,证悟寂灭——涅槃。这便是‘执持论’。显示巴利原文
Tesu taṇhāsaṃkilesassa samatho paṭipakkho, diṭṭhisaṃkilesassa vipassanā, duccaritasaṃkilesassa sīlaṃ paṭipakkho. Te pana sīlādayo dhammā idha pariññāgahaṇena sekkhaggahaṇena ‘‘araha’’ntiādinā ariyatādiggahaṇena ca gahitā. Tattha sīlena duccaritasaṃkilesappahānaṃ sijjhati, tathā tadaṅgappahānaṃ vītikkamappahānañca, samathena taṇhāsaṃkilesappahānaṃ sijjhati, tathā vikkhambhanappahānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānappahānañca. Vipassanāya diṭṭhisaṃkilesappahānaṃ sijjhati, tathā samucchedappahānaṃ anusayappahānañca. Tattha pubbabhāge sīle patiṭṭhitassa samatho, samathe patiṭṭhitassa vipassanā, maggakkhaṇe pana samakālameva bhavanti. Pubbeyeva hi suparisuddhakāyavacīkammassa suparisuddhājīvassa ca samathavipassanā āraddhā gabbhaṃ gaṇhantiyo paripākaṃ gacchantiyo vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanaṃ paribrūhenti, vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī maggena ghaṭenti maggakkhaṇe samathavipassanā paripūreti. Atha maggakkhaṇe samathavipassanābhāvanāpāripūriyā anavasesasaṃkilesadhammaṃ samucchindantiyo nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikarontīti. Ayaṃ samāropano hāro.
五种理趣之解显示巴利原文
Pañcavidhanayavaṇṇanā
1. 喜旋理趣的解释显示巴利原文
1. Nandiyāvaṭṭanayavaṇṇanā
在‘一切法根本理趣’等经文中,透过对‘一切法根本’的含摄与对‘妄想’的含摄,表明了渴爱、慢与邪见。因为这也显示了‘妄想亦是妄想之因’的道理。而透过‘未闻凡夫’等文,则表明了无明、慢与邪见,或者说表明了一切杂染法;同样,透过对‘想未遍知’等的含摄也是如此。而在‘漏尽者,已尽后有结’这句中,则是从自性上表明了诸漏与诸结;同样,也透过对‘喜’与‘渴爱’的含摄表明了渴爱。因此,在这里,从自性与教说两种方式,表明了渴爱、无明以及附属于它们的诸心法。这其中,对于渴爱,色法是它特别的安住处;对于无明,无色法是它特别的安住处。而这些色法与无色法,其实已经透过对‘一切法’以及‘地’等的含摄显示了出来。对于这些渴爱与无明等,止与观是它们的对治,它们在此的把握方式已如前述。止之果为心解脱,观之果为慧解脱。事实上,心解脱与慧解脱正是透过‘离贪’等差别而得以宣说的;因此,对于此二者的把握,应依‘正知解脱’、‘离贪’等语句来理解。在这里,渴爱与无明是集谛,而附属于它们的诸心法,由于已被含摄在渴爱与无明的执取中,故当知它们也属于集谛。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’ntiādīsu sabbadhammamūlaggahaṇena maññanāgahaṇena ca taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo gahitā. Maññanānampi hi maññanā kāraṇanti dassitoyamattho. ‘‘Assutavā’’tiādinā avijjāmānadiṭṭhiyo gahitā, sabbepi vā saṃkilesadhammā, tathā saññāapariññātaggahaṇena. ‘‘Khīṇāsavo parikkhīṇabhavasaññojano’’ti ettha pana āsavā saññojanāni ca sarūpato gahitāni, tathā nandiggahaṇena taṇhāgahaṇena ca taṇhā, evampettha sarūpato pariyāyato ca taṇhā avijjā tappakkhiyadhammā ca gahitā. Tattha taṇhāya visesato rūpadhammā adhiṭṭhānaṃ, avijjāya arūpadhammā, te pana sabbadhammaggahaṇena pathavīādiggahaṇena ca dassitā eva. Tāsaṃ samatho vipassanā ca paṭipakkho, tesamettha gahetabbākāro heṭṭhā dassito eva. Samathassa cetovimutti phalaṃ , vipassanāya paññāvimutti. Tathā hi tā ‘‘rāgavirāgā’’tiādinā visesetvā vuccanti, imāsamettha gahaṇaṃ sammadaññāvimuttavītarāgādivacanehi veditabbaṃ. Tattha taṇhāvijjā samudayasaccaṃ, tappakkhiyadhammā pana taggahaṇeneva gahitāti veditabbā. Tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhūtā vuttappabhedā rūpārūpadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, tesaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccaṃ. Taṇhāgahaṇena cettha māyā-sāṭheyya-mānātimāna-madappamāda-pāpicchatā-pāpamittatā-ahirikānottappādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo, avijjāgahaṇena viparītamanasikāra-kodhūpanāha-makkha-paḷāsa-issā-macchariya- sārambhadovacassatā-bhavadiṭṭhi-vibhavadiṭṭhiādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo, vuttavipariyāyena amāyāasāṭheyyādiaviparītamanasikārādivasena, tathā samathapakkhiyānaṃ saddhindriyādīnaṃ vipassanāpakkhiyānaṃ aniccasaññādīnañca vasena vodānapakkho netabboti. Ayaṃ nandiyāvaṭṭassa na yassa bhūmi.
2. 三丛理趣的解释显示巴利原文
2. Tipukkhalanayavaṇṇanā
当依前述方法,从自相与教说而把握渴爱、无明及与彼相应诸法时,渴爱即是贪,无明即是痴;与无明相应的,犹如脓随血,当有渴爱时,所生起的恚怒即是瞋。如是,以三不善根被把握,又以对治他们——即断除妄想、遮遣与遍知等——善根亦自成就。于此亦应知四谛联结:如‘贪等一切有漏善不善根为集谛,由彼所生、为彼依止及行境的取蕴为苦谛’等。此处之果为三解脱。复次,依三不善根,将三类恶行、杂染、垢秽、邪行、不善想、不善寻等摄入不善分;依三善根,将三类善行、平等、善、善想、善寻、正法、定、解脱门、解脱等摄入善分。此即三丛理趣的范围。显示巴利原文
Tathā vuttanayena sarūpato pariyāyato ca gahitesu taṇhāvijjātappakkhiyadhammesu taṇhā lobho, avijjā moho, avijjāya sampayutto lohite sati pubbo viya taṇhāya sati sijjhamāno āghāto doso, iti tīhi akusalamūlehi gahitehi, tappaṭipakkhato maññanāpaṭikkhepapariññāgahaṇādīhi ca kusalamūlāni siddhāniyeva honti. Idhāpi ‘‘lobho sabbāni vā sāsavakusalākusalamūlāni samudayasaccaṃ, tehi nibbattā, tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānagocarabhūtā ca upādānakkhandhā dukkhasacca’’ntiādinā saccayojanā veditabbā. Phalaṃ panettha tayo vimokkhā, tīhi pana akusalamūlehi tividhaduccarita-saṃkilesamala-visamaakusala-saññā-vitakkādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā tīhi kusalamūlehi tividhasucarita-samakusala-saññā-vitakka-saddhamma-samādhi-vimokkhamukha-vimokkhā-divasena kusalapakkho netabboti. Ayaṃ tipukkhalassa nayassa bhūmi.
3. 狮子游戏理趣的解释显示巴利原文
3. Sīhavikkīḷitanayavaṇṇanā
如此,依所说的方法,从自相及异门而摄取的渴爱、无明及他们相应法中,尤应了知:依渴爱与见之力,于不净执为‘净’、于苦执为‘乐’的颠倒;依无明与见之力,于无常执为‘常’、于无我执为‘我’的颠倒。以彼对治——即由断除妄想、遮遣、遍知及执取等所成就的念根、精进根、定根、慧根——四念处便自然成就。其中,应以此四根指示四种人。如何指示?有两种贪行者,即钝根与利根;同样有两种见行者。此中第一者,对于不净执为‘净’的颠倒执取者,以念力如实观察身体的自性,断除彼颠倒后,入于正性决定。第二者,对于苦执为‘乐’的颠倒执取者,以‘不忍受生起的欲寻’等所说的精进防护力,摧破彼颠倒后,入于正性决定。第三者,对于无常执为‘常’的不如实执取者,以定力令心得定,以观察诸行刹那灭的特性,断除彼颠倒后,入于圣位。第四者,由于被相续、积聚、作用、所缘的密集所诳惑,对仅是触等诸法积聚的无我,错误地执为‘我’者,以四重空性作意,摧破彼邪执后,亲证沙门果。显示巴利原文
Tathā vuttanayena sarūpato pariyāyato ca gahitesu taṇhāvijjātappakkhiyadhammesu visesato taṇhādiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti , dukkhe ‘‘sukha’’nti ca vipallāsā, avijjādiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti, anattani ‘‘attā’’ti ca vipallāsā veditabbā. Tesaṃ paṭipakkhato maññanāpaṭikkhepapariññāgahaṇādisiddhehi sativīriyasamādhipaññindriyehi cattāri satipaṭṭhānāni siddhāneva honti. Tattha catūhi indriyehi cattāro puggalā niddisitabbā. Kathaṃ? Duvidho hi taṇhācarito mudindriyo tikkhindriyoti, tathā diṭṭhicarito. Tesaṃ paṭhamo asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti vipariyāsaggāhī satibalena yathābhūtaṃ kāyasabhāvaṃ sallakkhento taṃ vipallāsaṃ samugghāṭetvā sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Dutiyo asukhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipariyāsaggāhī ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.310; ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.14, 114; a. ni. 6.58) vuttena vīriyasaṃvarabhūtena vīriyabalena taṃ vipallāsaṃ vidhamento sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Tatiyo anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti ayāthāvaggāhī samādhibalena samāhitacitto saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikabhāvasallakkhaṇena taṃ vipallāsaṃ samugghāṭento ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Catuttho santatisamūhakiccārammaṇaghanavañcitatāya phassādidhammapuñjamatte anattani ‘‘attā’’ti micchābhinivesī catukoṭikasuññatāmanasikārena taṃ micchābhinivesaṃ viddhaṃsento sāmaññaphalaṃ sacchikaroti.
于此亦应知四谛的联结,即以净想、乐想乃至四种颠倒为集圣谛,以他们依处及所缘——五取蕴为苦圣谛等。然而,这里的果是四沙门果。以四种心颠倒,以及四漏、四暴流、四轭、四身系、四非道、四渴爱生起、四箭、四取、四识住、四不遍知等,应摄入不善分。同样,以四念处,以及四种禅那、四种住、四种依处、四乐分法、四无量、四正勤、四神足等,应摄入善分。这便是《师子游戏说》理趣的范围。显示巴利原文
Idhāpi subhasaññāsukhasaññāhi catūhipi vā vipallāsehi samudayasaccaṃ, tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānārammaṇabhūtā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccantiādinā saccayojanā veditabbā. Phalaṃ panettha cattāri sāmaññaphalāni, catūhi cittavipallāsehi caturāsavogha-yoga-kāyagantha-agati-taṇhuppāda-sallupādāna-viññāṇaṭṭhiti-apariññādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā catūhi satipaṭṭhānehi catubbidhajhāna-vihārādhiṭṭhāna-sukhabhāgiyadhamma-appamaññā-sammappadhāna-iddhipādā- divasena vodānapakkho netabboti. Ayaṃ sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa bhūmi.
4-5. 方向观察与钩棒二理趣的解释显示巴利原文
4-5. Disālocana-aṅkusanayadvayavaṇṇanā
然而,为成就这三种义理趣,假名而言,这两种理趣自然成就。确实,对于义理趣,观察那些成为方向的法,即是“方向观察”;引导它们,即是“钩”。因此应知,五种理趣皆被运用。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ pana tiṇṇaṃ atthanayānaṃ siddhiyā vohārena nayadvayaṃ siddhameva hoti. Tathā hi atthanayānaṃ disābhūtadhammānaṃ samālocanaṃ disālocanaṃ, tesaṃ samānayanaṃ aṅkusoti pañcapi nayā niyuttāti veditabbā.
教法发趣的解释显示巴利原文
Sāsanapaṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
此经在十六类经的发趣中,属于“染污”、“厌离”、“有学分”,亦可属于“一切分”,因为《一切法根本遍知经》中以“一切法”一词含摄了世间善法,故世间善法亦被收录其中。在二十八类经的发趣中,应知此经为:以世间与出世间一切法为所依之智所应了知;应见、应修;自说语;应记说;善与不善;开许与遮止。显示巴利原文
Idañca suttaṃ soḷasavidhe suttantapaṭṭhāne saṃkilesanibbedhāsekkhabhāgiyaṃ, sabbabhāgiyameva vā ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha sabbadhammaggahaṇena lokiyakusalānampi saṅgahitattā. Aṭṭhavīsatividhena pana suttantapaṭṭhāne lokiyalokuttarasabbadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇañeyyaṃ dassanabhāvanaṃ sakavacanaṃ vissajjanīyaṃ kusalākusalaṃ anuññātaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ cāti veditabbaṃ.
第二、《一切漏经》注疏显示巴利原文
2. Sabbāsavasuttavaṇṇanā
14 14.“未曾词之解释”:为解释义理,对前文未提及的新词加以说明,即分析其义理。如经所说“舍弃了又反复回来的义理”。“曾住”:因为是过去的住处;或因为是过去世之住处;又或因为在住处出生,故称“曾住”;在那里建立,即是此义。如迦干提、马干提、憍赏弥诸城:迦干仙人住处所建之城名迦干提,马干仙人住处所建之城名马干提,库萨王子住处所建之城名憍赏弥;以此类推,说明“舍卫城”。由于靠近身体而于近处受用,称为“近受用”(upabhoga),指有识资具;由于从周围一切时皆可受用,称为“周遍受用”(paribhoga),指坐卧具、衣物等无识资具。此外,“舍卫城”依词源学理而成立:因为那里具备一切。“与商队相遇”:指商队与城市相遇,即商队进入该城;询问商队成员而得知城市名。显示巴利原文
14.Apubbapadavaṇṇanāti atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena heṭṭhā aggahitatāya apubbassa abhinavassa padassa vaṇṇanā atthavibhajanā. ‘‘Hitvā punappunāgatamattha’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Nivāsaṭṭhānabhūtā bhūtapubbanivāsaṭṭhānabhūtā, nivāsaṭṭhāne vā bhūtā nibbattā nivāsaṭṭhānabhūtā, tattha māpitāti attho. Yathā kākandī mākandī kosambīti yathā kākandassa isino nivāsaṭṭhāne māpitā nagarī kākandī, mākandassa nivāsaṭṭhāne māpitā mākandī, kusambassanivāsaṭṭhāne māpitā kosambīti vuccati, evaṃ sāvatthīti dasseti. Upanetvā samīpe katvā bhuñjitabbato upabhogo, saviññāṇakavatthu. Parito sabbadā bhuñjitabbato paribhogo, nivāsanapārupanādi aviññāṇakavatthu. Sabbamettha atthīti niruttinayena sāvatthī-saddasiddhimāha. Satthasamāyogeti satthassa nagariyā samāgame, satthe taṃ nagaraṃ upagateti attho. Pucchite satthikajanehi.
「积聚」:指妥善地积聚。「喜悦」:指城内外的地形与园林景观都令人喜悦。「美丽」:指街道布局的庄严和殿堂楼阁等的庄严,使城市可观、美丽。「令人愉悦的」:指资具、受用物的庄严和居住的安乐,能使久住之人及其他众生心生欢喜。十种声音:即象声、马声、车声、鼓声、螺声、铜鼓声、箜篌声、歌声、铙钹声,以及“请吃、请喝、请嚼”的招呼声。由于有这十种声音,所以说「无远离」,即不寂静,恒时喧闹的意思。显示巴利原文
Samohitanti sannicitaṃ. Rammanti anto bahi ca bhūmibhāgasampattiyā ceva ārāmuyyānasampattiyā ca ramaṇīyaṃ. Dassaneyyanti visikhāsannivesasampattiyā ceva pāsādakūṭāgārādisampattiyā ca dassanīyaṃ passitabbayuttaṃ. Upabhogaparibhogavatthusampattiyā ceva nivāsasukhatāya ca nibaddhavāsaṃ vasantānaṃ itaresañca sattānaṃ manaṃ rametīti manoramaṃ. Dasahi saddehīti hatthisaddo, assa-ratha-bheri-saṅkha-mudiṅga-vīṇā-gīta sammatāḷasaddo, asnātha-pivatha-khādathāti-saddoti imehi dasahi saddehi. Avivittanti na vivittaṃ, sabbakālaṃ ghositanti attho.
「达到增盛广大」:由于居住在那里的众生增长,城市也随之增盛;由这种增盛而达到广大,意思是人口众多、人群稠密。因财富和资具的具足而繁荣。因一切时食物易得而丰饶。乃至残食等,所有穷苦、困顿、行乞的人,也都能随其所愿在那里得到满足,感到可意,更何况是有权势的人——为显示此义,所以又说「令人愉悦的」。「如阿罗迦曼达城」:在《阿吒那胝经》等经中,多闻天王有十座城市,其中之一名为阿罗迦曼达,世间只称它为“阿罗迦”。如同这座有福者所居的城市,具足园林、怡悦等妙好,舍卫城也是如此,所以说“如阿罗迦曼达城”。「诸天」:指多闻天王部属的四大王天众诸天。显示巴利原文
Vuddhiṃ vepullataṃ pattanti tannivāsī sattavuddhiyā vuddhiṃ, tāya parivuddhitāyeva vipulabhāvaṃ pattaṃ, bahujanaṃ ākiṇṇamanussanti attho. Vittūpakaraṇasamiddhiyā iddhaṃ. Sabbakālaṃ subhikkhabhāvena phītaṃ. Antamaso vighāsāde upādāya sabbesaṃ kapaṇaddhikavanibbakayācakānampi icchi tatthanipphattiyā manuññaṃ jātaṃ, pageva issariye ṭhitānanti dassanatthaṃ puna ‘‘manorama’’nti vuttaṃ. Aḷakamandāvāti āṭānāṭādīsu dasasu vessavaṇamahārājassa nagarīsu aḷakamandā nāma ekā nagarī, yā loke aḷākā eva vuccati . Sā yathā puññakammīnaṃ āvāsabhūtā ārāmarāmaṇeyyakādinā sobhaggappattā, evaṃ sāvatthīpīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aḷakamandāvā’’ti. Devānanti vessavaṇapakkhiyānaṃ cātumahārājikadevānaṃ.
「征服」:由此显示“jeta”一词是作者义(主动者),如同“sota”(流)。王即波斯匿王、憍萨罗王。将国王的胜利归于王子,王子因战胜而被称为“祇多”。又以吉祥语表达“最胜”之义,故称“祇多”。「一切欲乐成就」:指由一切受用、资具等物丰足而财富圆满的意思。若仅富有而悭吝不施,便特为说明「离垢无悭吝」,即无贪嗔等染污,亦无悭吝。若虽富有且不悭吝,却缺悲悯、信心等功德,仍不施与他人,故又说「具足悲悯等功德」。因此,他常常向无依无靠的人们施食。再就词源而言:因其具足应施之德,常为孤独者备食,故名“给孤独”。「具足五种坐卧具支」:即(1)“不太远、不太近,方便来往”是一支;(2)“白天不喧杂,夜晚安静、无噪音”是一支;(3)“没有蚊虫、苍蝇、风热、蛇类的触恼”是一支;(4)“住在这样的住处时,衣服等资具可以不太困难地获得”是一支;(5)“该住处有长老比丘们居住,而且他们都是多闻的”是一支。由于具足这五种坐卧具显示巴利原文
Jinātīti iminā sota-saddo viya kattusādhano jeta-saddoti dasseti. Raññāti pasenadikosalarājena. Rājagataṃ jayaṃ āropetvā kumāro jitavāti jetoti vutto. Maṅgalakabyatāyātiādinā ‘‘jeyyo’’ti etasmiṃ atthe ‘‘jeto’’ti vuttanti dasseti. Sabbakāmasamiddhitāyāti sabbehi upabhogaparibhogavatthūhi phītabhāvena vibhavasampannatāyāti attho. Samiddhāpi maccharino kiñci na dentīti āha ‘‘vigatamalamaccheratāyā’’ti, rāgadosādimalānañceva macchariyassa ca abhāvenāti attho. Samiddhā amaccharinopi ca karuṇāsaddhādiguṇavirahitā attano santakaṃ paresaṃ na dadeyyunti āha ‘‘karuṇādiguṇasamaṅgitāya cā’’ti. Tenāti anāthānaṃ piṇḍadānena. Saddatthato pana dātabbabhāvena sabbakālaṃ upaṭṭhapito anāthānaṃ piṇḍo etassa atthīti anāthapiṇḍiko. Pañcavidhasenāsanaṅgasampattiyāti ‘‘nātidūraṃ naccāsannaṃ gamanāgamanasampanna’’nti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘divā appākiṇṇaṃ rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosa’’nti ekaṃ, ‘‘appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassa’’nti ekaṃ, ‘‘tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa appakasirena uppajjanti cīvara…pe… parikkhārā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane therā bhikkhū viharanti bahussutā’’ti ekaṃ, evametehi pañcavidhasenāsanaṅgehi sampannatāya. Yadi jetavanaṃ tathaṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmoti āha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi.
从购置之时起,这片树林便已归属给孤独长者,为何却以两人之名合称呢?因此说“祇园”等。有说法称:“虽然长者以亿金铺地购得了那块土地,但树木并未被祇多王子卖出,所以应称为‘祇园’。”显示巴利原文
Kītakālato paṭṭhāya anāthapiṇḍikasseva taṃ vanaṃ, atha kasmā ubhinnaṃ parikittananti āha ‘‘jetavane’’tiādi. ‘‘Yadipi so bhūmibhāgo koṭisantharena mahāseṭṭhinā kīto, rukkhā pana jetena na vikkītāti jetavananti vattabbataṃ labhī’’ti vadanti.
有人说“世尊为何宣说此经”,由此提出关于经之安立的问题。其实一般而言,世尊说法的因缘本是众所周知的。那么,此处的经之安立是什么呢?是“自意”。诸阿阇梨说:世尊并未受到他人劝请,而是随自心意宣说此经。然而,由于世尊了知当时比丘们心中已生染污,他心想:“这些比丘藉由此开示净除内心的染污后,将证得漏尽。”由此发起了此开示,所以另一些阿阇梨说这是“随他意”。两说皆有其道理。自意与他意等的关联与差别,前文已作说明。“那些比丘”:指那时领受佛法的比丘们。“净化染污”:即从止与观的垢染中净化其心。因为世尊总是先以次第说法等方法,在修习中去除垢染,然后才宣说殊胜的开示,就像在田地中先清除树桩、荆棘、灌木等之后才耕作一样。因此,他不直接宣说业处,而是依此渐次进行开示,这便是他的用意。显示巴利原文
Kasmā idaṃ suttamabhāsīti kathetukamyatāya suttanikkhepaṃ pucchati. Sāmaññato hi bhagavato desanākāraṇaṃ pākaṭamevāti. Ko panāyaṃ suttanikkhepoti? Attajjhāsayo. Parehi anajjhiṭṭho eva hi bhagavā attano ajjhāsayena imaṃ suttaṃ desetīti ācariyā. Yasmā panesa bhikkhūnaṃ upakkiliṭṭhacittataṃ viditvā ‘‘ime bhikkhū imāya desanāya upakkilesavisodhanaṃ katvā āsavakkhayāya paṭipajjissantī’’ti ayaṃ desanā āraddhā, tasmā parajjhāsayoti apare. Ubhayampi pana yuttaṃ. Attajjhāsayādīnañhi saṃsaggabhedassa sambhavo heṭṭhā dassitovāti. Tesaṃ bhikkhūnanti tadā dhammapaṭiggāhatabhikkhūnaṃ. Upakkilesavisodhananti samathavipassanupakkilesato cittassa visodhanaṃ. Paṭhamañhi bhagavā anupubbikathādinā paṭipattiyā saṃkilesaṃ nīharitvā pacchā sāmukkaṃsikaṃ desanaṃ deseti khette khāṇukaṇṭakagumbādike avaharitvā kasanaṃ viya, tasmā kammaṭṭhānameva avatvā imāya anupubbiyā desanā pavattāti adhippāyo.
“成为律仪者”:即成为戒律仪等的律仪,具有防护的自性,是一种因缘。从义理上应知,这指的就是见等。“被防护”:指正确地、全面地防止烦恼生起。因为如此被防护,烦恼生起的门便被关闭,所以称为“被关闭”,因此说“成为关闭者”。这样指出不究竟律仪是究竟律仪的因缘之后,现在来说明究竟律仪本身:当那种见等存在时,本应生起的诸漏便不生起,这种“不生起”即称为灭、尽、断,从义理上说,那只是不再转起罢了,而那个见等就是它的因缘。因此说:“因为那个因缘,那些漏达到称为不生与灭的尽,被断除,不再转起,那个因缘就是其因缘,这就是它的含义。”显示巴利原文
Saṃvarabhūtanti sīlasaṃvarādisaṃvarabhūtaṃ saṃvaraṇasabhāvaṃ kāraṇaṃ, taṃ pana atthato dassanādi evāti veditabbaṃ. Saṃvaritāti pavattituṃ appadānavasena sammā, sabbathā vā vāritā. Evaṃbhūtā ca yasmā pavattidvārapidhānena pihitā nāma honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘vidahitā hutvā’’ti. Evaṃ accantikassa saṃvarassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ anaccantikaṃ saṃvaraṃ dassetvā idāni accantikameva saṃvaraṃ dassento yasmiṃ dassanādimhi sati uppajjanārahā āsavā na uppajjanti, so tesaṃ anuppādo nirodho khayo pahānanti ca vuccamāno atthato appavattimattanti tassa ca dassanādi kāraṇanti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇena anuppādanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ khayaṃ gacchanti pahīyanti nappavattanti, taṃ kāraṇanti attho’’ti.
「从眼门……乃至从意门」的意思是:虽然在眼识等心路以及随后生起的意识心路中,善心等也会转起,但只有欲漏等像脓一样不断流出不净,故而才将它们称为「漏」。在此,「漏」这一词正是固定用来指称那种流出不净的状态。就法而言,「乃至种姓心为止」:因为在种姓心之后,道心与果心中它们便不再转起。也就是说,这些漏以所缘为对象在诸法中转起时,不会超出种姓心的范围。问:难道种姓心之后的有分心等,不也以法为所缘而转起吗?答:并非如此。因为有分心等所执取的,是先前已被缘取的世间法,而这些法仍属「有漏」,因此早已被纳入之前的范围,并不存在所谓「越超种姓心」的情况。此处须知,所说「种姓心」,实际已包含种姓心、净心、果等至的前行与遍作(预备)心。或者,这里只是以「初道的前行种姓心」为代表,来划定一个界限。从此之后,在其余道心的道心路、等至心路,以及灭尽定之后转起的果心和涅槃中,诸漏的转起皆被遮止,应如此理解。「流动」的意思是:它们运行、前进,以造作所缘的方式转起。前缀「ā」(意为「直到」)……显示巴利原文
Cakkhutopi…pe… manatopīti (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 14-19) cakkhuviññāṇādivīthīsu tadanugatamanoviññāṇavīthīsu ca kiñcāpi kusalādīnampi pavatti atthi, kāmāsavādayo eva pana vaṇato yūsaṃ viya paggharaṇakaasucibhāvena sandanti, tasmā te eva ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Tattha hi paggharaṇaasucimhi niruḷho āsava-saddoti. Dhammato yāva gotrabhunti tato paraṃ maggaphalesu appavattanato vuttaṃ. Ete hi ārammaṇavasena dhamme gacchantā tato paraṃ na gacchanti. Nanu tato paraṃ bhavaṅgādīnipi gacchantīti ce? Na, tesampi pubbe ālambitesu lokiyadhammesu sāsavabhāvena antogadhattā tato paratābhāvato. Ettha ca gotrabhuvacanena gotrabhuvodānaphalasamāpattipurecārikaparikammāni vuttānīti veditabbāni. Paṭhamamaggapurecārikameva vā gotrabhu avadhinidassanabhāvena gahitaṃ, tato paraṃ pana maggaphalasamānatāya aññesu maggesu maggavīthiyaṃ samāpattivīthiyaṃ nirodhānantarañca pavattamānesu phalesu nibbāne ca āsavānaṃ pavatti nivāritāti veditabbaṃ. Savantīti gacchanti, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattantīti attho. Avadhiattho ā-kāro, avadhi ca mariyādābhividhibhedato duvidho. Tattha mariyādaṃ kiriyaṃ bahi katvā pavattati yathā ‘‘āpāṭaliputtā vuṭṭho devo’’ti. Abhividhi pana kiriyaṃ byāpetvā pavattati yathā ‘‘ābhavaggā bhagavato yaso pavattatī’’ti. Abhividhiattho cāyaṃ ā-kāro idha gahitoti vuttaṃ ‘‘antokaraṇattho’’ti.
「以酒等开始」中的「等」字,应理解为包含了辛度瓦酒、阿丹巴利迦酒、波提迦酒等。「久远住著」的意思,即长久居住、是旧有的东西。「无明还不存在的时候……等等」这一段,其中的「等」字含摄了《增支部》10.62 中「诸比丘,存在的渴爱,其前际是不可知的」这部经。由于此处显示了无明漏和有漏是久远以来便存在的,那么与它们性质相同的欲漏,其久远存在性自然也就随之被显示出来了。再者,当慢等烦恼在其他所说的法(指业和有)上,以它们为依止并以它们为所缘而转起时,是依于「我」、「我所」的执取而遍满一切,并以能令人陶醉的作用而与「漏」相似。具备这些特征的,唯是这些烦恼,而非其他(善法)。因此应当明白,「漏」这个词是唯独固定施用在这些烦恼上的。于此,不应认为「见漏」未被含摄,因为恰如对「有」的渴爱一样,对「有」的邪见也已被「有漏」一词所摄而包含在内了。「长久」的意思是:因为是无始以来的。「流出」的意思是:产生果报。事实上,没有任何一种轮回的痛苦能够在没有漏的情况下生起。这里的「前三种」……显示巴利原文
Madirādayoti ādi-saddena sindhavakādambarikāpotikādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Cirapārivāsiyaṭṭho viraparivutthatā purāṇabhāvo. Avijjā nāhosītiādīti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati bhavataṇhāyā’’ti (a. ni. 10.62) idaṃ suttaṃ saṅgahitaṃ. Avijjāsavabhavāsavānaṃ ciraparivutthatāya dassitāya tabbhāvabhāvino kāmāsavassa ciraparivutthatā dassitāva hoti. Aññesu ca yathāvutte dhamme okāsañca ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānesu mānādīsu vijjamānesu attattaniyādiggāhavasena abhibyāpanaṃ madakaraṇavasena āsavasadisatā ca etesaṃyeva, na aññesanti etesveva āsava-saddo niruḷhoti daṭṭhabbo. Na cettha diṭṭhāsavo nāgatoti gahetabbaṃ bhavataṇhāya viya bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi bhavāsavaggahaṇeneva gahitattā. Āyataṃ anādikālikattā. Pasavantīti phalanti. Na hi taṃ kiñci saṃsāradukkhaṃ atthi, yaṃ āsavehi vinā uppajjeyya. Purimāni cetthāti ettha etesu catūsu atthavitappesu purimāni tīṇi. Yatthāti yesu suttābhidhammapadesesu. Tattha yujjanti kilesesuyeva yathāvuttassa atthattayassa sambhavato. Pacchimaṃ ‘‘āyataṃ vā saṃsāradukkhaṃ savantī’’ti vuttanibbacanaṃ. Kammepi yujjati dukkhappasavanassa kilesakammasādhāraṇattā.
「现法」指的是现前可见的五蕴。「于现法中存在的」,便称为「现法所生」的。「成为争论之根本者」指的是:成为争论根本原因的忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭吝、诳、谄、固执、激忿、慢与过慢。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhadhammā vuccanti paccakkhabhūtā khandhā, diṭṭhadhamme bhavā diṭṭhadhammikā. Vivādamūlabhūtāti vivādassa mūlakāraṇabhūtā kodhūpanāha-makkha-paḷāsa-issā-macchariya-māyā-sāṭheyya-thambha-sārambha-mānātimānā.
“由那种漏,我或许能投生到天界”——意思是:以那种业和烦恼为种类的漏,我或许能投生于诸天之中。应如此连接来理解。“或者投生为乾闼婆,也就是能飞行的空中鸟类”——这句应转变语法格位,理解为“我或许能成为乾闼婆,即那些能飞行的鸟类”。在此,“天”这个词包含了除夜叉和乾闼婆形态之外的所有天道众生。“以及其余的不善法”——意思是:除了不善业之外,其余的不善法(如心所等)也称为漏。应如此连接来理解。显示巴利原文
Yena devūpapatyassāti yena kammakilesappakārena āsavena devesu upapatti nibbatti assa mayhanti sambandho. Gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo ākāsacārī assanti vibhattiṃ pariṇāmetvā yojetabbaṃ. Ettha ca yakkhagandhabbatāya vinimuttā sabbā devagati devaggahaṇena gahitā. Avasesā ca akusalā dhammāti akusalakammato avasesā akusalā dhammā āsavāti āgatāti sambandho.
“为了制止”的意思是遮止与防护。“他人的谴责……等祸患”——这是指:如果世尊不制定学处,那么由于有人违犯罪行、不与取、杀生等,就会招致他人谴责等种种现世可见的灾祸;以及因为这些恶行而投生地狱等处,遭受五种束缚、种种刑罚等极其痛苦的灾祸。这段话正是针对这些祸患而说。“而这些”——指欲贪等烦恼、三界范围内的业,以及他人谴责等灾祸,这些都是属于漏的类别。“在何处”——意思是在律藏等典籍的哪些文句中。“如何”——意思是以两类等方式,以及在其他经中被提及的。应如此连接来理解。显示巴利原文
Paṭighātāyāti paṭisedhanāya. Parūpavā…pe… upaddavāti idaṃ yadi bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ na paññapeyya, tato asaddhammappaṭisevanaadinnādānapāṇātipātādihetu ye uppajjeyyuṃ parūpavādādayo diṭṭhadhammikā nānappakārā anatthā, ye ca tannimittā eva nirayādīsu nibbattassa pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇādivasena mahādukkhānubhavādippakārā anatthā, te sandhāya vuttaṃ. Te paneteti ete kāmarāgādikilesa-tebhūmakakammaparūpavādādiupaddavappakārā āsavā. Yatthāti yasmiṃ vinayādipāḷipadese. Yathāti yena duvidhādippakārena aññesu ca suttantesu āgatāti sambandho.
“导向地狱”是指能引导投生地狱的漏。这在《六集·应供经》中有提到。在那里,漏以六种方式出现。“漏品”一词的解释是:由于“漏”这个词所指称的含义有多种分类,因此借用分类来表达“漏”的不同种类,所以称为“漏品”。或者,“品”字有“部分”“章节”的意思,所以“漏品”就是指漏的各种类别,也就是名称上的部分或含义上的部分。显示巴利原文
Nirayaṃ gamentīti nirayagāminiyā. Chakkanipāte āhuneyyasutte. Tattha hi āsavā chadhā āgatā āsava-saddābhidheyyassa atthassa pabhedopacārena āsava-pade pabhedoti vutto, koṭṭhāsattho vā pada-saddoti āsavapadeti āsavappakāre saddakoṭṭhāse atthakoṭṭhāse vāti attho.
“因为这样”的意思是:因此,防护即关闭、遮蔽,不让其生起;正是出于这个原因。当意指戒等律仪时,由于它们都具有“不让生起”这种遮蔽的共同性质,所以也举“关上门”作为例证。“戒律仪”等这段话,虽然在前面《根本法门经》的注释中已经说过,但为了完整地解释这部经的含义,此处再作说明。问:戒、念、慧具有防护的意义,这是恰当的,因为经典中就是这样说的。但忍耐和精进如何能成为防护呢?答:“而它们……”等等。意思是:虽然在详细解释时,于“他能忍耐……寒冷”、“对已生起的欲贪寻思,他不容忍”这些叙述中,并未直接出现忍耐和精进是“防护”的同义语,但在“一切漏的防护”这一总纲中,它们是以防护的方式被包含在内的。所以,忍耐和精进确实具有防护的意义。显示巴利原文
Tathāhīti tasmā saṃvaraṇaṃ pidahanaṃ pavattituṃ appadānaṃ, teneva kāraṇenāti attho. Sīlādisaṃvare adhippete pavattituṃ appadānavasena thakanabhāvasāmaññato dvāraṃ saṃvaritvāti gehadvārasaṃvaraṇampi udāhaṭaṃ. Sīlasaṃvarotiādi heṭṭhā mūlapariyāyavaṇṇanāya vuttampi imassa suttassa atthavaṇṇanaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā vattukāmo puna vadati. Yuttaṃ tāva sīlasatiñāṇānaṃ saṃvarattho pāḷiyaṃ tathā āgatattā, khantivīriyānaṃ pana kathanti āha ‘‘tesañcā’’tiādi. Tassattho – yadipi ‘‘khamo hoti…pe… sītassa uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādiniddese khantivīriyānaṃ saṃvarapariyāyo nāgato, uddese pana sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāyanti saṃvarapariyāyena gahitattā attheva tesaṃ saṃvarabhāvoti.
先前已通过不同的经文显示了戒、念、慧的防护性质,现在为了说明这一道理也被此经所涵盖,所以说“再者”等等。而忍耐和精进的防护,已经在“他能忍耐寒冷”等经典中以举例的方式说明过了。至于“那不合适的坐卧处,那不合适的行境”,在这里指的是戒律仪。即依经文“对于那些不合适的……”所指出的,是指那些不合宜、无确定对象、隐蔽的坐卧处,以及前述那些不合宜的妓女等行境。经典中说“以如理作意而回避”,这种回避便是此经中所说的戒律仪。这就是它的意思。事实上,回避不合适的坐卧处,即意味着回避了不正行;回避不正行及不合适的行境,便是持守戒律、具备正行的戒律仪。正因如此,世尊在分别巴帝摩卡律仪、解说“他安住于具足巴帝摩卡防护”时,为显示正行与行境的圆满,也以“有不正行,有不合适的行境”的方式分别开示了不正行与不合适的行境。这段说明应当视为以部分显示全体,犹如以大海或山岳的一部分来代表整个大海或山岳一般。显示巴利原文
Pubbe sīlasatiñāṇānaṃ pāṭhantarena saṃvarabhāvo dassitoti idāni taṃ imināpi suttena gahitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khantivīriyasaṃvarā vuttāyeva ‘‘khamo hoti sītassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.14) pāḷiyā dassanavasena. ‘‘Tañca anāsanaṃ, tañca agocara’’nti ayaṃ panettha sīlasaṃvaroti tañca ‘‘yathārūpe’’tiādinā vuttaṃ ayuttaṃ aniyatavatthukaṃ raho paṭicchannāsanaṃ, tañca yathāvuttaṃ ayuttaṃ vesiyādigocaraṃ, ‘‘paṭisaṅkhāyoniso parivajjetī’’ti āgataṃ yaṃ parivajjanaṃ, ayaṃ pana ettha etasmiṃ sutte āgato sīlasaṃvaroti attho. Anāsanaparivajjanena hi anācāraparivajjanaṃ vuttaṃ, anācārāgocaraparivajjanaṃ cārittasīlatāyasīlasaṃvaro. Tathā hi bhagavatā ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī’’ti (vibha. 508) sīlasaṃvaravibhajane ācāragocarasampattiṃ dassentena ‘‘atthi anācāro, atthi agocaro’’tiādinā (vibha. 513, 514) anācārāgocarā vibhajitvā dassitā. Idañca ekadesena samudāyanidassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ samuddapabbatanidassanaṃ viya.
关于“于一切处,简择即智防护”这句话,此处应说为:“如理作意,也就是简择的智防护。”因为在解说见所断的部分中并未提及“简择”,只说“如理作意”。然而,如理作意从实质而言正是简择的智防护,若依此义来理解,方为合理。然而,有些论师说:“凡是出现‘在此简择、如理’之处,这一切都是指‘于一切处简择智防护’而说的。”若依此见,“如理作意‘这是苦’”等情形便可能不被智防护所涵盖,而且“见、受用、修习是智防护”的说法也将出现矛盾。因此,此处之义应依前说方式来理解。“于一切处简择智防护”一句,表明在七种场合中的那个智慧便是“智防护”,而依循回避等方式所说的戒等,则是“戒防护”等——这是它所显示的义理。若如此,各种防护之间便似乎有所混杂。为了说明彼此并不混杂,才说“以摄未摄”,意思是:回避的差别、防护、忍受、遣除,已作为戒防护等的体性而被纳入,现在再将尚未被囊括的内容也纳入其中。为按其各自特性显示那些未被囊括的内容,便说“见、受用、修习”。显示巴利原文
Sabbattha paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaroti ettha ‘‘yonisomanasikāro, paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaro’’ti vattabbaṃ . Na hi dassanapahātabbaniddese paṭisaṅkhāgahaṇaṃ atthi, ‘‘yoniso manasi karotī’’ti pana vuttaṃ. Yonisomanasikaraṇampi atthato paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaramevāti evaṃ pana atthe gayhamāne yuttametaṃ siyā. Keci pana ‘‘yattha yattha ‘idha paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’ti āgataṃ , taṃ sabbaṃ sandhāya ‘sabbattha paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaro’ti vutta’’nti vadanti. Tesaṃ matena ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādikassa ñāṇasaṃvarena ca asaṅgaho siyā, ‘‘dassanaṃ paṭisevanā bhāvanā ca ñāṇasaṃvaro’’ti ca vacanaṃ virujjheyya, tasmā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo. ‘‘Sabbattha paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaro’’ti iminā sattasupi ṭhānesu yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, so ñāṇasaṃvaroti parivajjanādivasena vuttā sīlādayo sīlasaṃvarādayoti ayamattho dassito. Evaṃ sati saṃvarānaṃ saṅkaro viya hotīti te asaṅkarato dassetuṃ ‘‘aggahitaggahaṇenā’’ti vuttaṃ parivajjanavisesasaṃvarādhivāsanavinodanānaṃ sīlasaṃvarādibhāvena gahitattā, tathā aggahitānaṃ gahaṇenāti attho. Te pana aggahite sarūpato dassento ‘‘dassanaṃ paṭisevanā bhāvanā’’ti āha.
此中以戒防护等作为手段,或作为原因。「诸法」指善与不善法。意思是:以戒防护等为俱生缘,或以之为亲依止缘,未生的善法便得以生起;同样地,未灭尽的不善法便得以灭尽。然而,经文中只说「未生起的漏不再生起,已生起的漏得到断除」,并未提到善法的生起等。不应仅这样理解,因为「比丘们,若如理作意」等经文也表明善法可以生起,此处侧重于防护诸漏,故采纳此角度。事实上,末尾也说「那些见所断的漏,即由见而断除」等,同样是以断除诸漏为重心而作总结。显示巴利原文
Etena sīlasaṃvarādinā karaṇabhūtena, kāraṇabhūtena vā. Dhammāti kusalākusaladhammā. Sīlasaṃvarādinā hi sahajātakoṭiyā, upanissayakoṭiyā vā paccayabhūtena anuppannā kusalā dhammā uppattiṃ gacchanti uppajjanti, tathā aniruddhā akusalā dhammā nirodhaṃ gacchanti nirujjhantīti attho. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘anuppannā ceva āsavā na uppajjanti, uppannā ca āsavā pahīyantī’’ti akusaladhammānaṃ anuppādapahānāni eva vuttāni, na kusaladhammānaṃ uppādādayoti? Nayidamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, ‘‘yoniso ca kho, bhikkhave, manasikaroto’’tiādinā kusaladhammānampi uppatti pakāsitāva āsavasaṃvaraṇassa padhānabhāvena gahitattā. Tathā hi pariyosānepi ‘‘ye āsavā dassanā pahātabbā, te dassanā pahīnā hontī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.28) āsavappahānameva padhānaṃ katvā nigamitaṃ.
15 在「知者、见者」这句中,这里的「见」也是指以慧眼来见,而非以肉眼或天眼来见,因此说「两个词是同一意思」。虽如此——即使这两个词意义相同——但「智的特相」是指智的本性,即如实地通达对象的真实状态,所以说「了知的特相就是智」。而「智的威力」指智的作用,即照亮所缘,所以说「以智令诸法开显」。又因为「知者、见者」是通过「知」和「见」这两个入口,以补特伽罗为安立基点来展开教说,所以说「是依智的特相和智的威力来指称补特伽罗」。所谓「知者、见者」,由于后面将讲到「如理作意与非如理作意」,所以这里是指对如理作意境的知,对非如理作意境的见。而且,这并非仅停留在所缘层面,而是着眼于生起与不生起的层面,旨在揭示漏灭尽之方便的本质,这样才合理,所以说:「如理作意……这是此处要义」。显示巴利原文
15.Jānato passatoti ettha dassanampi paññācakkhunāva dassanaṃ adhippetaṃ, na maṃsacakkhunā dibbacakkhunā vāti āha ‘‘dvepi padāni ekatthānī’’ti. Evaṃ santepīti padadvayassa ekatthatthepi. Ñāṇalakkhaṇanti ñāṇassa sabhāvaṃ, visayassa yathāsabhāvāvabodhananti attho. Tenāha ‘‘jānanalakkhaṇañhi ñāṇa’’nti. Ñāṇappabhāvanti ñāṇānubhāvaṃ, ñāṇakiccaṃ visayobhāsananti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘ñāṇena vivaṭe dhamme’’ti. ‘‘Jānato passato’’ti ca jānanadassanamukhena puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā pavattāti āha ‘‘ñāṇalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇappabhāvaṃ upādāya puggalaṃ niddisatī’’ti. Jānato passatoti ‘‘yoniso ca manasikāraṃ ayoniso ca manasikāra’’nti vakkhamānattā yonisomanasikāravisayajānanaṃ, ayonisomanasikāravisayadassanaṃ. Tañca kho pana nesaṃ āsavānaṃ khayūpāyasabhāvassa adhippetattā uppādanānuppādanavasena na ārammaṇamattenāti ayamattho yuttoti āha ‘‘yonisomanasikāraṃ…pe… ayamettha sāro’’ti.
在说了「知者」之后,此处的「知」并不是只靠传闻或仅凭思维推敲的程度,而是如同眼识对色等那样,将如理作意与非如理作意现前照见,然后就其生起的一面说「见」,因此才说「见者」。或者也可以这样来理解。因为在其他地方,如「于如是知者、如是见者」「知即知,见即见」「如是知者、如是见者」「无智者、无见者」等用例,这两个词都是为了显示智的作用之共性与特性而被使用。有些论师,如无畏山住者等,作了这样的广衍解释:「以定而知的知者,以观而见的见者」「知即知,见即见」「如此,知是止,见是观」等。这些广衍解释,在「知者」等经文句义所确定的范畴内并不适用,因为经中已经明确,这里的知与见是以如理作意与非如理作意为境。显示巴利原文
‘‘Jānato’’ti vatvā jānanañca anussavākārapaṭivitakkamattavasena na idhādhippetaṃ, atha kho rūpādi viya cakkhuviññāṇena yonisomanasikārāyonisomanasikāre paccakkhe katvā tesaṃ uppādavasena dassananti imamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘passato’’ti vuttanti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Aññatthāpi hi ‘‘evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato (itivu. 102), jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati (ma. ni. 1.203), evaṃ jānantā evaṃ passantā (ma. ni. 1.407), ajānataṃ apassata’’nti ca ādīsu ñāṇakiccassa sāmaññavisesadīpanavasenetaṃ padadvayaṃ āgatanti. Kecīti abhayagirivāsisārasamāsācariyā. Te hi ‘‘samādhinā jānato vipassanāya passato jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati, evaṃ jānanā samatho, passanā vipassanā’’ti ca ādinā papañcenti. Teti papañcā. Imasmiṃ attheti ‘‘jānato’’tiādinayappavatte imasmiṃ suttapadaatthe niddhāriyamāne. Na yujjanti jānanadassanānaṃ yonisomanasikārāyonisomanasikāravisayabhāvassa pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā.
“断漏”:指诸漏的彻底断除。而所谓彻底断除,即它们完全不生起、彻底灭尽、不复存在,因此说“诸漏的彻底灭尽、不再生起、灭尽之相,即‘无有’”。“随顺正直道者”:因断除了烦恼的邪曲与身邪曲等而成为正直,随念着带观的下地诸道。对他而言,这即是学。于灭尽中,第一智生起;于其后无间,则生起其他智,即:于名为“灭尽”的最上道中,属于该道的智首先生起;无间之后,即是其他智——阿拉汉果。虽然偈颂中只说了“于灭尽”,但依正断而言,因诸漏已灭尽,故道称为漏尽,所以说“道被说为漏尽”。“沙门”:是指已寂灭罪恶的人,也就是诸漏尽者。因此,这里的“诸漏尽”是就果的同义表达来说的;若依严格的实际含义,漏尽是指道,而果是依道所应证得的。由此也应理解为:涅槃亦可被称作漏尽。显示巴利原文
Āsavappahānaṃ āsavānaṃ accantappahānaṃ. So pana nesaṃ anuppādo sabbena sabbaṃ khīṇatā abhāvo evāti āha ‘‘āsavānaṃ accantakhayamasamuppādaṃkhīṇākāraṃ natthibhāva’’nti. Ujumaggānusārinoti kilesavaṅkassa kāyavaṅkādīnañca pahānena ujubhūte savipassane heṭṭhimamagge anussarantassa. Tadeva hissa sikkhanaṃ. Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tato aññā anantarāti khayasaṅkhāte aggamagge tappariyāpannameva ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ uppajjati , tadanantaraṃ pana aññaṃ arahattanti. Yadipi gāthāyaṃ ‘‘khayasmiṃ’’icceva vuttaṃ, samucchedavasena pana āsavehi khīṇotīti maggo khayoti vuccatīti āha ‘‘maggo āsavakkhayoti vutto’’ti. Samaṇoti samitapāpo adhippeto. So pana khīṇāsavo hotīti ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayā’’ti imassa phalapariyāyatā vuttā, nippariyāyena pana āsavakkhayo maggo, tena pattabbato phalaṃ. Eteneva nibbānassapi āsavakkhayabhāvo vuttoti veditabbo.
“Jānato passato(知者、见者)”——此处强调的是“对知者、对见者”,而非其他情况;因为若不加这层限定,便会失去其特殊性,且会导致不可意的结论。为表明此限定的用意,经中才说“no ajānato no apassato(非对不知者,非对不见者)”。对此有解释说:“那既不知、亦不见的人,我对他什么也不说。”借由此句,这里便遮除了“不如理作意”,同时也表明了“如理作意”是漏尽的决定性之因。再者,藉由“no ajānato no apassato”这句经文,那些邪见也被遮止了。哪些邪见呢?就是那些主张“愚者与智者流转轮回之后,终将作尽苦边”、“无因无缘众生便得清净”之类的言论。在这些邪见中,有些人认为单凭高贵的出身投生,或单凭某种生存状态,就能令轮回清净;另一些人则主张依自在天、生主、时间等来达成清净。应当了知,这一切全都摄在“轮回等”一词之中。显示巴利原文
‘‘Jānato passato’’ti jānato eva passato evāti evamettha niyamo icchito, na aññathā visesābhāvato aniṭṭhasādhanato cāti tassa niyamassa phalaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no ajānato noapassato’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘yo pana na jānāti na passati, tassa neva vadāmīti attho’’ti. Iminā dūrīkatāyonisomanasikāro idhādhippeto, yonisomanasikāro ca āsavakkhayassa ekantikakāraṇanti dasseti. Etenāti ‘‘no ajānato no apassato’’ti vacanena. Te paṭikkhittāti ke pana teti? ‘‘Bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karissanti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.228), ahetū apaccayā sattā visujjhantī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.227) evamādivādā. Tesu hi keci abhijātisaṅkantimattena bhavasaṅkantimattena ca saṃsārasuddhiṃ paṭijānanti, aññe issarapajāpatikālādivasena, tayidaṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘saṃsārādīhī’’ti ettheva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
透过前一组词语——即“jānato, passato”——开示了漏尽的“方便”,这从“漏尽”这一主题便可了知。而透过另一组词语——“no ajānato, no apassato”——则指出了“非方便”。因为对于诸漏的灭尽而言,那种于如理作意和不如理作意都处于不知、不见的状态,正是“非方便”;由此之故,便不会有正确的修行,而成了错误的修行。那么,难道不是借着“passato”一词,当“见”被如理安立时,不如理作意便不会生起,因此前文不就已经遮止了“非方便”吗?并非如此。因为即使是不如理作意不生起,也可能成为“方便”;好比由于正念的力量,被覆蔽的眼根等依然现起一样,仅凭正知的力量,就不会有以常等颠倒方式的妄知。因此他说:“简要地……成为。”这里的“简要地”,是指以概括的方式来说,也就是不展开为顺、逆两个方向的详尽解说。透过“jānato”等词,因为唯取用了“智”,所以智……被显示出来。若真是如此,那么“这个防护”等经文又该如何连接呢?为了显示智的主导地位而作此说。显示巴利原文
Purimena vā padadvayenāti ‘‘jānato, passato’’ti iminā padadvayena. Upāyo vutto ‘‘āsavakkhayassā’’ti adhikārato viññāyati. Imināti ‘‘no ajānato, no apassato’’ti iminā padadvayena. Anupāyo eva hi āsavānaṃ khayassa yadidaṃ yoniso ca ayoniso ca manasikārassa ajānanaṃ adassanañca, tena tathattāya appaṭipattito micchāpaṭipattito ca. Nanu ‘‘passato’’ti iminā ayonisomanasikāro yathā na uppajjati, evaṃ dassane adhippete purimeneva anupāyapaṭisedho vutto hotīti? Na hoti, ayonisomanasikārānuppādanassapi upāyabhāvato satibalena saṃvutacakkhundriyāditā viya sampajaññabaleneva niccādivasena abhūtajānanābhāvo hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhepena…pe… hotī’’ti. Tattha saṅkhepenāti samāsena, anvayato byatirekato ca vitthāraṃ akatvāti attho. Ñāṇaṃ…pe… dassitaṃ hoti ‘‘jānato’’tiādinā ñāṇasseva gahitattā. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘svāyaṃ saṃvaro’’tiādi kathaṃ nīyatīti? Ñāṇassa padhānabhāvadassanatthaṃ evamayaṃ desanā katāti nāyaṃ doso, tathā aññatthāpi ‘‘ariyaṃ vo bhikkhave sammāsamādhiṃ desessāmi saupanisaṃ saparikkhāra’’nti (ma. ni. 3.136) vitthāro.
「Dabbajātiko」意为具有贤善体质的人。因为「dabba」(贤善)一词,正如「贤善者会毁灭,非贤善者则不灭」等语句中所说。又或者,「dabbajātiko」是指本质坚实的人,也就是具有相应戒行与仪则的人。正如所说:「贤善的人啊,贤善者并非这样开脱。」「站在义务之首而行」是把义务当作最高的部分,或者说以职责为核心而行事。因为,一位具足活命清净的比丘,若是为了那些不知如何做的同梵行者,或是为了替自己遮挡风、热等而制作伞盖等时,他就是「站在义务之首而行」。所谓「它不是立足处」,是指不应被说成是立足处,因为它只是作为庇护的因缘生起,并非作为支撑成就的「亲依止」因。的确,佛陀这样说过:「对于同梵行者的各种高、低事务,他都是善巧的。」等等。显示巴利原文
Dabbajātikoti dabbarūpo. So hi drabyoti vuccati ‘‘drabyaṃ vinassati nādrabya’’ntiādīsu. Dabbajātiko vā sārasabhāvo, sāruppasīlācāroti attho. Yathāha ‘‘na kho dabba dabbā evaṃ nibbeṭhentī’’ti (pārā. 384, 391; cūḷava. 193). Vattasīse ṭhatvāti vattaṃ uttamaṅgaṃ, dhuraṃ vā katvā. Yo hi parisuddhājīvo kātuṃ ajānantānaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ, attano vā vātātapādipaṭibāhanatthaṃ chattādīni karoti, so vattasīse ṭhatvā karoti nāma. Padaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti na vattabbā nāthakaraṇadhammabhāvena upanissayabhāvato. Vuttañhi ‘‘yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṃ uccāvacāni kiccakaraṇīyāni, tattha dakkho hotī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.497).
「方便作意」是作为善法生起之因的作意。「最初作意」是指那种方便作意当中,作为「道」的作意。所谓「于无常等上,以无常等方式」:这是在具有无常、苦、不净、无我自性的诸法上,以「无常、苦、不净、无我」等如此不颠倒自性的方式作意;或者是依随顺于谛现观的方式作意。「心的转向」等:这是把作为「转向」之缘、在它之前生起的意门善速行,用「果」的名称说为「转向」。因为依靠它,它便成为善法生起的亲依止。转向有分心的,称为「转向」;随之一再转向的,称为「随转向」;倾向有分所缘之外其他所缘的,称为「倾向」;平等地注意那个所缘,并将生起的心安置于所缘上的,称为「作意」。这就是所谓的「如理作意」,也就是具足「方便」和「最初作意」特征的作意。靠着它,补特伽罗才能够转向苦等圣谛。在「不如理作意」里,因为它与谛现观相违、不顺随,所以说是「以与谛相违的方式」。其余的部分,应当依与上述「如理作意」相反的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Upāyamanasikāroti kusaladhammappavattiyā kāraṇabhūto manasikāro. Pathamanasikāroti tassā eva maggabhūto manasikāro. Aniccādīsu aniccantiādināti aniccadukkhaasubhaanattasabhāvesu dhammesu ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ asubhaṃ anattā’’tiādinā eva nayena, aviparītasabhāvenāti attho. Saccānulomikena vāti saccābhisamayassa anulomavasena. Cittassa āvaṭṭanātiādinā āvaṭṭanāya paccayabhūtā tato purimuppannā manodvārikā kusalajavanappavatti phalavohārena tathā vuttā. Tassā hi vasena sā kusaluppattiyā upanissayo hoti. Āvajjanā hi bhavaṅgacittaṃ āvaṭṭayatīti āvaṭṭanā. Anu anu āvaṭṭetīti anvāvaṭṭanā. Bhavaṅgārammaṇato aññaṃ ābhujatīti ābhogo. Samannāharatīti samannāhāro. Tadevārammaṇaṃ attānaṃ anubandhitvā uppajjamānaṃ manasi karoti ṭhapetīti manasikāro. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ upāyapathamanasikāralakkhaṇo yonisomanasikāro nāma vuccati, yassa vasena puggalo dukkhādīni saccāni āvajjituṃ sakkoti . Ayonisomanasikāre saccapaṭikūlenāti saccābhisamayassa ananulomavasena. Sesaṃ yonisomanasikāre vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ.
「Yuttin」(合理的、适当的)是指能成就再生的那种道理,也就是「原因」的意思。因此他说:「因为……」等。「在这里」指的是「诸比丘,不如理……将被舍断」这一段经文当中。「在那里」则是针对文句的显示。然而,为什么在这个地方,开示的方式与解说的顺序被调换了呢?为了回应这个问难,他说:「如理」等。那里,因为「作意」一词是两者共通的,所以用意在说:「首先,就先用『如理』、『不如理』这两个词来说。」因为「如理」即指如理作意,「不如理」即指不如理作意,在此承接着前文,而且后文将会更详细地解说。虽然在「有」等处,不善法的生起上有其共通性,补特伽罗也有引发诸多不善的共通性,但先显示这种共通性,然后再反过来显示差别,应知这是为了引出三个譬喻。他们把「轮转、运水轮」等称为「轮转」等。显示巴利原文
Yuttinti upapattisādhanayuttiṃ, hetunti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi. Etthāti ‘‘ayoniso bhikkhave…pe… pahīyantī’’ti etasmiṃ pāṭhe. Tatthāti vākyopaññāsanaṃ. Kasmā panettha ayamuddesaniddeso parivattoti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yoniso’’tiādi. Tattha manasikārapadaṃ dvinnaṃ sādhāraṇanti adhippāyena ‘‘yoniso ayonisoti imehi tāva dvīhi padehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yonisoti hi yonisomanasikāro, ayonisoti ca ayonisomanasikāro tattha anuvattanato vakkhamānattā ca. Satipi anatthuppattisāmaññe bhavādīsu puggalassa bahulisāmaññaṃ dassetvā taṃ parivattitvā visesadassanattaṃ nāvādi upamāttayaggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cakkayantaṃ āhaṭaghaṭīyantanti vadanti.
「未生起」是指尚未产生的。应当知道,漏的未生起是依「所缘的差别」来理解,而不是依色所缘等所缘的共通性,也不是依于漏本身。因此他说:「对于未曾领受过的所缘……否则,在无始的轮回当中,根本就不存在所谓『未生起』的漏。」「处」指有识、无识等分类的令漏生起的原因。「所缘」则是作为所缘缘的色等。现在,为了说明即使就漏本身而言也有「未生起」这一角度,他又说「即使是先前已领受过的」等。「以本性清净」:指因过去生中长时修习,烦恼已远离,以此成就的清净本性。诵出经典为「开示」,解说义理为「问答」。「教理」是学习教法,「工作」指缝制袈裟等事务,「如理作意」则是修习止与观。以那样的方式:犹如以「可爱的事物」等作意,会导致欲漏等可能生起的方式。所谓「漏的增长」,应知是就随眠的强盛程度来说的。而它们由于频频生起、反复修习,得到滋润,变得深厚,碾磨着、遍满着、覆盖着、制造着黑暗,一个接一个地不断生起,从同一相续的角度来说,便称为「已生的增长」。因此说:「一再地不断生起,即称为已生的增长。」显示巴利原文
Anuppannāti anibbattā. Ārammaṇavisesavasena tassa anuppatti veditabbā, na rūpārammaṇādiārammaṇasāmaññena, nāpi āsavavasena. Tenāha ‘‘ananubhūtapubbaṃ ārammaṇaṃ…pe… aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā nāma āsavā na santī’’ti. Vatthunti saviññāṇakāviññāṇakappabhedaṃ āsavuppattikāraṇaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ ārammaṇapaccayabhūtarūpādīni . Idāni āsavavasenapi anuppannapariyāyo labbhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘anubhūtapubbepī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pakatisuddhiyāti pubbacariyato kilesadūrībhāvasiddhāya suddhipakatitāya. Pāḷiyā uddisanaṃ uddeso, atthakathanaṃ paripucchā. Ajjhayanaṃ pariyatti, cīvarasibbādi navakammaṃ, samathavipassanānuyogo yonisomanasikāro. Tādisenāti yādisena ‘‘manuññavatthū’’timanasikārādinā kāmāsavādayo sambhaveyyuṃ, tādisena. Āsavānaṃ vaḍḍhi nāma pariyuṭṭhānatibbatāya veditabbā, sā ca abhiṇhuppattiyā bahulīkāratoti te laddhāsevanā bahulabhāvaṃ pattā maddantā pharantā chādentā andhākāraṃ karontā aparāparaṃ uppajjamānā ekasantānanayena ‘‘uppannā pavaḍḍhantī’’ti vuccanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ uppajjamānā uppannā pavaḍḍhantīti vuccantī’’ti. Ito aññathāti ito aparāparuppannānaṃ ekattaggahaṇato aññathā vaḍḍhi nāma natthi khaṇikabhāvato.
「而他知」这句话,是指已经不再有「法掉举」的状态。确实是说那个实际造作的人。然而,为了借着显示过去那位殊胜人物的修行方式,让前面以扼要方式所说的道理变得更加清晰,就说了「如同住在曼陀罗园的大提舍长老那样」等。因为,那正是能作为同梵行者未来如此修行的因缘,所以才会说出这样的故事来。就在曼陀罗园那里。「向导师告假之后」:为了去取业处,向自己的教授师告假之后。「礼敬导师之后」:礼敬给予业处的摩诃勒弃多长老之后。「诵经的路程」:指的是从原来开始的诵经连贯课程。据说,当时是以口诵的方式,让许多比丘一起教学之后,再以意诵的方式读诵经典。在那当中,这位长老因为很有智慧,负责给正在学习诵经的比丘们提词。他那时已是阿那含,心想:「现在我已是阿那含了,诵经对我来说还有什么用呢?」但他并没有因此而退缩,第二天到了诵经的时间,他还是去亲近导师。「已生的被断除」:这里的「已生的」是把类似已生的说为「已生的」,并不是指现在正在生起的。因为,对于现在正在生起的那些漏,是不可能以道来断除的。所以他说:「然而对于任何……是没有的。」现在正在生起的(漏),是具足三刹那的。无法用修行去断除它们,修行所能做的,只是切断那些将要生起者的缘,让它们不再生起,这就是(修行)的断除。显示巴利原文
So ca jānātīti dhammuddhaccaviggahābhāvamāha. Kārakassevāti yuttayogasseva. Yassa panātiādinā anuddesikaṃ katvā vuttamatthaṃ purātanassa purisātisayassa paṭipattidassanena pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘maṇḍalārāmavāsīmahātissabhūtattherassa viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tañhi sabrahmacārīnaṃ āyatiṃ tathāpaṭipattikāraṇaṃ hoti, yato edisaṃ vatthu vuccati. Tasmiṃ yevāti maṇḍalārāmeyeva. Ācariyaṃ āpucchitvāti attano uddesācariyaṃ kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthaṃ gantuṃ āpucchitvā. Ācariyaṃ vanditvāti kammaṭṭhānadāyakaṃ mahārakkhitattheraṃ vanditvā. Uddesamagganti yathāāraddhaṃ uddesapabandhaṃ. Tadā kira mukhapāṭheneva bahū ekajjhaṃ uddisāpetvā manosajjhāyavasena dhammaṃ sajjhāyanti. Tatthāyaṃ thero paññavantatāya uddesaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhorayho, so ‘‘idānāhaṃ anāgāmī, kiṃ mayhaṃ uddesenā’’ti saṅkocaṃ anāpajjitvā dutiyadivase uddesakāle ācariyaṃ upasaṅkami. ‘‘Uppannā pahīyantī’’ti ettha uppannasadisā ‘‘uppannā’’ti vuttā, na paccuppannā. Na hi paccuppannesu āsavesu maggena pahānaṃ sambhavatīti āha ‘‘ye pana…pe… natthī’’ti. Vattamānuppannā khaṇattayasamaṅgino. Tesaṃ paṭipattiyā pahānaṃ natthi uppajjanārahānaṃ paccayaghātena anuppādanameva tāya pahānanti.
16 如果是这样,那第二个词又有什么用呢?运用两个词,一方面是为了显示漏有已生和未生状态的可能性,另一方面也是为了通过断除者的分类,来显示所应被断除的分类。因此他说:「只取这一个词」等。其他的:是指除了智之外,还有念防护等其他方式。「见」:这里的「见」是源由格,他用表示原因的具格「以见」来阐明这个意思。这个道理是相通的。以「见」:是指以入流道。因为那个道最先见到涅槃,所以被称为「见」。虽然「种姓智」更早见到,但是由于它在见到之后,并没有做「断除烦恼」这件该做的事,所以不被称为「见」。因为那种姓智是为道转向所缘的智,这里是从它也有涅槃为所缘的共通性来说的,而不是指它真正证悟了涅槃。因此,是由法眼一再地生起,达到了修习的程度,这才称为「见」;而且法眼是透过遍知等作用来见四圣谛法,也就是现观。所以在这里,种姓智并不能成立为「见」。这个讨论在稍后的注释书里就会被提到。「一切处」:是指「应通过防护断除」等各处。「以防护」:透过防护,这里的「防护」应知是指「念防护」。「受用」:透过它而受用,是指对于资具的「知量」。「忍受」:透过它而容忍,即是以忍耐的方式现起的无嗔,或是以那个为主的四种善蕴。「回避」:透过它而避开,便是以回避猛兽等的方式所生起的思,或是那样现起的四种善蕴。「驱除」:透过它去驱除、排除欲寻等,就是指善精进。由于以初道见到了四谛法而通过修习生起的,就是「修」,即是指其余的三道。因为那其余的道不会再见到任何先前没见过的,所以如此,见等各个词义应当这样来理解。显示巴利原文
16. Yadi evaṃ dutiyapadaṃ kimatthiyanti? Padadvayaggahaṇaṃ āsavānaṃ uppannānuppannabhāvasambhavadassanatthañceva pahāyakavibhāgena pahātabbavibhāgadassanatthañca. Tenāha ‘‘idameva padaṃ gahetvā’’ti. Aññampīti ñāṇato aññampi satisaṃvarādiṃ. Dassanāti idaṃ hetumhi nissakkavacananti dassanenāti hetumhi karaṇavacanena tadatthaṃ vivarati. Esa nayoti tamevatthaṃ atidisati. Dassanenāti sotāpattimaggena. So hi paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato ‘‘dassana’’nti vuccati. Yadipi taṃ gotrabhu paṭhamataraṃ passati, disvā pana kattabbakiccassa kilesappahānassa akaraṇato na taṃ dassananti vuccati. Āvajjanaṭṭhāniyañhi taṃ ñāṇaṃ maggassa, nibbānārammaṇattasāmaññena cetaṃ vuttaṃ, na nibbānapaṭivijjhanena, tasmā dhammacakkhu punappunaṃ nibbattanena bhāvanaṃ appattaṃ dassanaṃ nāma, dhammacakkhuñca pariññādikiccakaraṇavasena catusaccadhammadassanaṃ tadabhisamayoti nutthettha gotrabhussa dassanabhāvappatti . Ayañca vicāro parato aṭṭhakathāyameva (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.22) āgamissati. Sabbatthāti ‘‘saṃvarā pahātabbā’’tiādīsu. Saṃvarāti saṃvarena, ‘‘saṃvaro’’ti cettha satisaṃvaro veditabbo. Paṭisevati etenāti paṭisevanaṃ, paccayesu idamatthikatāñāṇaṃ. Adhivāseti khamati etāyāti adhivāsanā, sītādīnaṃ khamanākārena pavatto adoso, tappadhānā vā cattāro kusalakkhandhā. Parivajjeti etenāti parivajjanaṃ, vāḷamigādīnaṃ pariharaṇavasena pavattā cetanā, tathāpavattā vā cattāro kusalakkhandhā. Kāmavitakkādike vinodeti vitudati etenāti vinodanaṃ, kusalavīriyaṃ. Paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhe catusaccadhamme bhāvanāvasena uppajjanato bhāvanā, sesamaggattayaṃ. Na hi taṃ adiṭṭhapubbaṃ kiñci passati, evaṃ dassanādīnaṃ vacanattho veditabbo.
关于见道所断之漏的解释显示巴利原文
Dassanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
17 为了显示“即使是面对善法与不善法,作为所缘的诸法,也只是在转向时才呈现出那样的性质”,他将“应作意的”(manasikaraṇīya)一词解释为“应被转向的”。由于以能带来利益与安乐的方式而值得作意,故称“应作意的”;与此相反的,便是“不应作意的”。因此他说:“不应作意的”即指与此相反者。在“于应作意法无知”等其他文句中,也是如此。因为对于善法,若以“美好、快乐、恒常”等方式去作意,那便会成为味著等的原因而有罪过,带来不利与痛苦;对于不善法,若以“无常”等方式去作意,则成为厌离等的原因而无有过失,能带来利益与安乐。所以他说“就法本身而言,并无定性”,但“就作意的方式而言,确有定性”。显示巴利原文
17. Kusalākusaladhammehi ālambiyamānāpi ārammaṇadhammā āvajjanamukheneva tabbhāvaṃ gacchantīti dassento ‘‘manasikaraṇīye’’ti padassa ‘‘āvajjitabbe’’ti atthamāha. Hitasukhāvahabhāvena manasikaraṇaṃ arahantīti manasikaraṇīyā, tappaṭipakkhato amanasikaraṇīyāti āha ‘‘amanasikaraṇīyeti tabbiparīte’’ti. Sesapadesūti ‘‘manasikaraṇīye dhamme appajānanto’’tiādīsu. Yasmā kusaladhammesupi subhasukhaniccādivasena manasikāro assādanādihetutāya sāvajjo ahitadukkhāvaho akusaladhammesupi aniccādivasena manasikāro nibbidādihetutāya anavajjo hitasukhāvaho, tasmā ‘‘dhammato niyamo natthī’’ti vatvā ‘‘ākārato pana atthī’’ti āha.
“vā”一字,在“mamaṃ vā hi bhikkhave, devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā”等大多数经文用例中,被看到的都是表示选择的意思,而非并列的意思。因此,为显示它也有并列的用法,才举出“yathā”等语句来说明。而且,这样处理后,这一经句便被引用来表示并列的涵义了。显示巴利原文
Vā-saddo yebhuyyena ‘‘mamaṃ vā hi bhikkhave (dī. ni. 1.5, 6), devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.186; ma. ni. 2.79, 80) vikappattho diṭṭho, na samuccayatthoti tattha samuccayatthe payogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā samuccayatthadīpakaṃ panetaṃ suttapadaṃ samudāhaṭaṃ.
“欲漏”:由于是对五种欲(kāmaguṇa)所生的漏,故称欲漏。因此他说这是“五种欲上的贪”。若将“有漏”排除在外,那么把一切贪都看作是欲漏,也是合理的。就色界、无色界的“有”而言,指的是依业与投生方式的差别而分为两类的色有与无色有中的欲贪。“禅那喜爱”是指对禅那的味著。当有人以“这个处所很美妙、恒常、坚固”等想法去味著时,便生起伴随着常见与断见的贪,这就是对于“有”的漏,称为“有漏”。像这样,由于一切恶见都可归摄于常见和断见之中,因此见漏便被有漏所包摄,这是因为它属于与那些见相应的贪性的缘故——这是该论师的意图。然而,另有论师说:“见漏是被无明漏所包摄的。”在此,根据“有漏在四种与恶见不相应、伴随贪的心中生起”(《法集论》1465)这样的说法,与见相应的贪是否属于有漏,是应当仔细考察的。其次,如同“与欲俱行的想和作意”等处(《相应部》4.332)那样,如果“俱行”的意思是指作为所缘的作用,那么将有漏包摄见漏的这种会通就无法成立了。因为,若没有与之相应等条件,那么彼显示巴利原文
Kāmāsavoti pañcakāmaguṇasaṅkhāte kāme āsavo kāmāsavo. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo’’ti. Bhavāsavaṃ pana ṭhapetvā sabbo lobho kāmāsavoti yuttaṃ siyā. Rūpārūpabhaveti kammupapattibhedato duvidhepi rūpārūpabhave chandarāgo. Jhānanikantīti jhānassādo. ‘‘Sundaramidaṃ ṭhānaṃ niccaṃ dhuva’’ntiādinā assādentassa uppajjamāno sassatucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhave āsavoti bhavāsavo. Evanti sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ sassatucchedadiṭṭhisaṅgahato bhavāsaveneva diṭṭhāsavo gahito taṃsahagatarāgatāyāti adhippāyo. Apare pana ‘‘diṭṭhāsavo avijjāsavena ca saṅgahito’’ti vadanti. Ettha ca ‘‘bhavāsavo catūsu diṭṭhigatavippayuttalobhasahagatacittuppādesu uppajjatī’’ti (dha. sa. 1465) vacanato diṭṭhisampayuttarāgassa bhavāsavabhāvo vicāretabbo, atha ‘‘kāmasahagatā saññāmanasikārā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.332) viya ārammaṇakaraṇattho sahagatattho, evaṃ sati bhavāsave diṭṭhāsavassa samodhānagamanaṃ kataṃ na siyā. Na hi tampayogatabbhāvādike asati taṃsaṅgaho yutto, tasmā yathāvuttapāḷiṃ anusārena diṭṭhigatasampayuttalobhopi kāmāsavoti yuttaṃ siyā. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikadukkhānañhi kāraṇabhūtā kāmāsavādayopi dvidhā vuttā.
阿毗达摩(《法集论》1103)在解释欲漏时说:“‘于诸欲中’,是指作为欲贪、见贪等所缘的、属于三界的事物欲。”这一解释是合理的。因为在那里生起的一切渴爱,都不得被称为“欲贪”等名称。然而,如果有既非欲漏亦非有漏的贪,那么当它在不与恶见相应的心中生起时,与之相应的无明漏就会变成不与漏相应,就如同与忧、疑、掉举相应的那些心所一样,那种贪也应当被说为不与漏相应,正如“在与恶见不相应、有贪的四种心中,所生的痴可能与漏相应,也可能不与漏相应”这段文所说。但是,根据“欲漏在八种有贪的心中生起”(《法集论》1465)以及“缘于欲漏而有见漏和无明漏”(《发趣论》3.3.109)等说法,便不能说与见相应的贪不是欲漏。再者,即使真的存在贪欲与欲贪的差别,那也只是二漏或一漏的情况,而不应去考察贪欲的非漏性以及非漏贪的存在。因为在阿毗达摩中,并没有第七问和第九问:“漏及非漏诸法,对于漏法,以及对于漏及非漏法,是因缘”(《发趣论》3.3.16-17)。而且在计数中也只说“因缘有七种”(《发趣论》)。显示巴利原文
Abhidhamme (dha. sa. 1103) ca kāmāsavaniddese ‘‘kāmesūti kāmarāgadiṭṭhirāgādīnaṃ ārammaṇabhūtesu tebhūmakesu vatthukāmesū’’ti attho sambhavati. Tattha hi uppajjamānā sā taṇhā sabbāpi na kāmacchandādināmaṃ na labhatīti. Yadi pana lobho kāmāsavabhavāsavavinimuttopi siyā, so yadā diṭṭhigatavippayuttesu cittesu uppajjati, tadā tena sampayutto avijjāsavo āsavavippayuttoti domanassavicikicchuddhaccasampayuttassa viya tassapi āsavavippayuttatā vattabbā siyā ‘‘catūsu diṭṭhigatavippayuttalobhasahagatacittuppādesu uppanno moho siyā āsavasampayutto, siyā āsavavippayutto’’ti. ‘‘Kāmāsavo aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatacittuppādesu uppajjatī’ti (dha. sa. 1465), ‘‘kāmāsavaṃ paṭicca diṭṭhāsavo avijjāsavo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.3.109) ca vacanato diṭṭhisahagatarāgo kāmāsavo na hotīti na sakkā vattuṃ. Kiñca abhijjhākāmarāgānaṃ viseso āsavadvayaekāsavabhāvo siyā, na abhijjhāya ca noāsavabhāvoti noāsavalobhassa sabbhāvo vicāretabbo. Na hi atthi abhidhamme ‘‘āsavo ca noāsavo ca dhammā āsavassa dhammassa āsavassa ca noāsavassa ca dhammassa hetupaccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.3.16-17) sattamo navamo ca pañho. Gaṇanāyañca ‘‘hetuyā sattā’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.3.40) vuttaṃ, no ‘‘navā’’ti. Diṭṭhisampayutte pana lobhe noāsave vijjamāne sattamanavamāpi pañhā vissajjanaṃ labheyyuṃ, gaṇanāya ca ‘‘hetuyā navā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, na pana vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhivippayutte ca lobhe noāsave vijjamāne vattabbaṃ vuttameva. Yasmā pana suttantadesanā nāma pariyāyakathā, na abhidhammadesanā viya nippariyāyakathā, tasmā balavakāmarāgasseva kāmāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmāsavoti pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo’’ti vuttaṃ, tathā bhavābhinandananti.
此处以通名将见漏摄入有漏之内,故只说了三种漏。为了显示见漏包含于有漏之中,所以说“如是,见漏……”等语句。因为下文将会说到,有漏是对治无相解脱的。至于对四圣谛的无知,这是依据经典的方式而说的,因为这是经的注释,或者说因为它包含了对于过去等(的无知)。如同从意义上界定了欲漏等,为了显示它们的生起与增长,他又说道“对于五种欲”等。如果一个人从味著的角度去作意,那就是指以“美好、快乐”等方式,随味著而作意的人。所谓“以四颠倒为近因”,就是以“美好想”等作为基础。与此理相反的方法则是:通过“这些所谓的欲,其实是无常、苦、变易法”等方式,先观察五种欲的过患,然后踏上出离的修行道路。对于这样的人,通过镇伏和彻底断除欲贪,未生起的欲漏便不会生起,已生起的也会被断除。同样,对于广大的诸法以及整个三界诸法,先观察其过患,然后以无常等作意的方式走上出离的修行道路,未生起的有漏与无明漏便不会生起,已生起的也会被断除。正是如此,与在渴爱一方所说的理趣相反,在善净的白方,这些应被广为了知。显示巴利原文
Sāmaññena bhavāsavo diṭṭhāsavaṃ antogadhaṃ katvā idha tayo eva āsavā vuttāti tassa tadantogadhataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ diṭṭhāsavo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati bhavāsavassa animittavimokkhapaṭipakkhataṃ. Catūsu saccesu aññāṇanti idaṃ suttantanayaṃ nissāya vuttaṃ. Suttantasaṃvaṇṇanā hesāti, tadantogadhattā vā pubbantādīnaṃ. Yathā atthato kāmāsavādayo vavatthāpitā, tathā nesaṃ uppādavaḍḍhiyo dassento ‘‘kāmaguṇe’’tiādimāha. Assādato manasikarototi ‘‘subhasukhā’’tiādinā assādanavasena manasi karontassa. Catuvipallāsapadaṭṭhānabhāvenāti subhasaññādīnaṃ vatthubhāvena. Vuttanayapaccanīkatoti ‘‘kāmā nāmete aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’’tiādinā kāmaguṇesu ādīnavadassanapubbakanekkhammapaṭipattiyā chandarāgaṃ vikkhambhayato samucchindantassa ca anuppanno ca kāmāsavo na uppajjati, uppanno ca pahīyati. Tathā mahaggatadhammesu ceva sakalatebhūmakadhammesu ca ādīnavadassanapubbakaaniccādimanasikāravasena nissaraṇapaṭipattiyā anuppannā ca bhavāsavaavijjāsavā na uppajjanti, uppannā ca pahīyantīti evaṃ taṇhāpakkhe vuttassa nayassa paṭipakkhato sukkapakkhe vitthāro veditabbo.
为什么不依阿毗达摩说“四漏”,而在这见所断的论题中只说了三漏呢?对此应当了知:欲漏因为是渴爱发愿的状态,故为无愿解脱的对治;有漏通常随顺对诸有的“恒常”执取,且大多获得有贪的成就,故为无相解脱的对治——若将见漏摄为有漏的一部分,则无需再另外说明其对治;无明漏则需依智慧力成就无我想,故为空解脱的对治。这里所说的“在此”,是指在这关于漏的论述中。“已说明”即已阐释清楚。“由无差别”,是指从通名的角度而言。显示巴利原文
Tayo evāti abhidhamme viya ‘‘cattāro’’ti avatvā kasmā tayo eva āsavā idha imissaṃ dassanāpahātabbakathāyaṃ vuttā? Tattha kāmāsavassa taṇhāpaṇidhibhāvato appaṇihitavimokkhapaṭipakkhatā veditabbā. Bhavesu niccaggāhānusārato yebhuyyato bhavarāgasampattito bhavāsavassa animittavimokkhapaṭipakkhatā, bhavadiṭṭhiyā pana bhavāsavabhāve vattabbameva natthi, anattasaññāya ñāṇānubhāvasiddhito avijjāsavassa suññatavimokkhapaṭipakkhatā. Etthāti etissaṃ āsavakathāyaṃ. Vaṇṇitanti kathitaṃ. Abhedatoti sāmaññato.
18 “欲漏等”,此处是指能导向人界、天界的欲漏等。至于导向地狱等的欲漏等,则已被纳入“见所断之漏”那段文中。或者也可以说,自从那一类见所断漏作为安立之处被确立时起,这类欲漏等便也随之安立。因为并非名称不同,事物本身便有所不同,所以说了“至此”等语句。也正因如此,他才说“从共称之名而说”。可是,在这本应展示见所断诸漏的地方,又为何以“我过去是否存在呢?”等方式来表示疑呢?他回答说:“此处是以疑为头绪来……”等等。即是说,正如由十六种事所生的疑那样,非理作意也是如此。显示巴利原文
18.Kāmāsavādīnanti manussalokadevalokagamanīyānaṃ kāmāsavādīnaṃ. Nirayādigamanīyā pana kāmāsavādayo ‘‘dassanā pahātabbe āsave’’ti ettheva samāruḷhā. Atha vā yadaggena so puggalodassanāpahātabbānaṃ āsavānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, tadaggena kāmāsavādīnampi adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Na hi samaññābhedena vatthubhedo atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ettāvatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sāmaññato vuttāna’’nti. Kasmā panettha dassanāpahātabbesu āsavesu dassetabbesu ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho aha’’ntiādinā vicikicchā dassitāti āha ‘‘vicikicchāsīsena cetthā’’tiādi. Evanti yathā soḷasavatthukā vicikicchā uppajjati, evaṃ ayonisomanasikāroti.
“存在性与不存在性”的意思是:依于常见,而对过去世的自己生起“我在过去长时中,究竟存在过吗?”的怀疑,即疑惑过去自我的存在性;依于无因生起论,而对过去世的自己生起“从我出生以来,在此之前,我难道不是不曾存在过吗?”的怀疑,即疑惑过去自我的不存在性。为什么呢?因为疑是以这两种行相为所缘的。又因为此疑执取了过去的所缘,所以显示出它依附于常见与无因生起的行相。像这样,疑的行相如同蛇行一般曲折盘绕,在任何地方都没有一个确定不移的因由。为了说明对此不应质疑“为何会生起疑”,所以注释中说“不应说‘是什么原因’”。这本身就是凡夫的状态。若如是,则会产生“凡夫也会如理作意吗?”这样的问题,此问是说:难道凡夫在如理作意时,此疑便不生起吗?显示巴利原文
Vijjamānataṃ avijjamānatañcāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.20) sassatāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’nti atīte attano vijjamānataṃ, adhiccasamuppattiāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘yato pabhuti ahaṃ, tato pubbe na nu kho ahosi’’nti atīte attano avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Kasmā? Vicikicchāya ākāradvayāvalambanato. Tassā pana atītavatthutāya gahitattā sassatādhiccasamuppattiākāranissayatā dassitā. Evaṃ āsappanaparisappanāpavattikaṃ katthacipi appaṭivattihetubhūtaṃ vicikicchaṃ kasmā uppādetīti na codetabbametanti dassento āha ‘‘kiṃ kāraṇanti na vattabba’’nti. Sveva puthujjanabhāvo eva. Yadi evaṃ tassa ayonisomanasikāreneva bhavitabbanti āpannanti āha ‘‘nanu ca puthujjanopi yoniso manasi karotī’’ti. Tatthāti yonisomanasikaraṇe.
“依生、相、出身”的意思是:依止于刹帝利、婆罗门等的出身,在家者、出家者等的外在行相,以及天、人等不同的再生形式。“依止”是指执取这些作为所缘。显示巴利原文
Jātiliṅgūpapattiyoti khattiyabrāhmaṇādijātiṃ gahaṭṭhapabbajitādiliṅgaṃ devamanussādiupapattiñca. Nissāyāti upādāya.
在那个时期,众生的身量为中等,与此相应,故称为“有量”;由于不再具有那样的身量,或已超越之,故应知为“无量”。有些精要论师说:“他这样思惟:‘怎么会呢?——是由自在天、梵天、前业,还是无因而产生?’”因此,他们说这是“对因生疑”。因为即使是对无因而生的疑,也属于追寻因的范畴。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ kāle sattānaṃ majjhimappamāṇaṃ, tena yutto pamāṇiko, tadabhāvato, tato atītabhāvato vā appamāṇiko veditabbo. Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā. Te hi ‘‘kathaṃ nu khoti issarena vā brahmunā vā pubbakatena vā ahetuto vā nibbattoti cintetī’’ti āhu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘hetuto kaṅkhatīti vadantī’’ti. Ahetuto nibbattikaṅkhāpi hi hetuparāmasanamevāti.
“相续”指前后持续不断的流转。“长时”是时间的异称,在此处应理解为表示处所的宾格。显示巴利原文
Paramparanti pubbāparappavattiṃ. Addhānanti kālādhivacanaṃ, tañca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“存在与非存在”:基于常见而起的疑,即疑“我于未来时还会存在吗?”,这是对未来自我的存在性生疑;基于断见而起的疑,即疑“在此有身之后,我将不复存在吗?”,这是对未来自我的不存在性生疑。对此疑,应依前文所述之理而结合解释。显示巴利原文
Vijjamānataṃ avijjamānatañcāti sassatāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘bhavissāmi nu kho ahamanāgatamaddhāna’’nti anāgate attano vijjamānataṃ, ucchedāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘yasmiñca attabhāve ahaṃ, tato paraṃ na nu kho bhavissāmī’’ti anāgate attano avijjamānatañca kaṅkhatīti heṭṭhā vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ.
“现在时”:因为此处正是指“现在时”,所以先说“以结生为始……”等。由于“这是怎么回事?这是怎么回事?”这样转起,便称为“犹豫”,也就是疑;具有此疑的人即称为“有犹豫者”,因此说“成为有疑者”。这里有什么可分别的呢?因为愚痴凡夫如同疯子,这层意思先前已经说过了。如同母亲对待孩子一般。关于“剃发者”:在不愿醒来的状态下,若被剃发者弄醒,便说“不能”再入睡,这是某类家族修行者沿袭下来的习惯;也有人说是出于对国王的恐惧等。显示巴利原文
Paccuppannamaddhānanti addhāpaccuppannassa idhādhippetattā ‘‘paṭisandhiṃ ādiṃ katvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ kathaṃ idaṃ katha’’nti pavattanato kathaṃkathā, vicikicchā, sā assa atthīti kathaṃkathīti āha ‘‘vicikiccho hotī’’ti. Kā ettha cintā, ummattako viya hi bālaputhujjanoti paṭikacceva vuttanti adhippāyo. Taṃ mahāmātāya puttaṃ. Muṇḍesunti muṇḍena anicchantaṃ jāgaraṇakāle na sakkāti suttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ kuladhammatāya yathā taṃ ekacce kulatāpasā, rājabhayenāti ca vadanti.
“清凉”一词:这是表达获得甘甜状态的原因。也有读作“变白”的,意思是因为长时间放在水中而变成了白色。显示巴利原文
Sītibhūtanti idaṃ madhurakabhāvappattiyā kāraṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Setibhūta’’ntipi pāṭho, udake ciraṭṭhānena setabhāvaṃ pattanti attho.
他怀疑自己刹帝利的出身,就像迦耳那误以为自己是车夫的儿子一样。当他的出身被揭示时,他执取这个“我”而产生了疑惑,因此说“这样的疑惑是有可能发生的”。而“有些人也像国王那样”,是指有些人就如同国王一样。显示巴利原文
Attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati kaṇṇo viya sūtaputtasaññī. Jātiyā vibhāviyamānāya ‘‘aha’’nti tassa attano parāmasanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘evañhi siyā kaṅkhā’’ti. Manussāpi ca rājāno viyāti manussāpi keci ekacce rājāno viyāti adhippāyo.
如前所说的方式,即“基于形态样貌”等。“此处”指“我如何?”这一句。“内部的生命”:指他人虚妄构想出来的内在之我。“十六种等”:“等”字涵盖身体大小、圆满相、拇指量、大麦粒量、极微尘量等。显示巴利原文
Vuttanayameva ‘‘saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāyā’’tiādinā. Etthāti ‘‘kathaṃ nu khosmī’’ti pade. Abbhantare jīvoti paraparikappitaṃ antarattānaṃ vadati. Soḷasaṃsādīnanti ādi-saddena sarīra-parimāṇa-parimaṇḍala-aṅguṭṭhayavaparamāṇu-parimāṇatādike saṅgaṇhāti.
“众生施设以命为境”,这仅是执见者的妄见;然而在究竟义上,它其实是以“有身”为所缘,故说“有身的来去处”,意思是:此人从何而来,将往何处,那个地方即是来去处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sattapaññatti jīvavisayā’’ti diṭṭhigatikānaṃ matimattaṃ, paramatthato pana sā attabhāvavisayāvāti āha ‘‘attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhāna’’nti, yatāyaṃ āgato, yattha ca gamissati, taṃ ṭhānanti attho.
19 19.“如何生起此疑?”——前面所说的各类疑如何生起?即于不如理作意者生起。由此说明疑是以执取我的倾向为依止的。正如疑依着执取我的倾向而转起——因此疑被说成执取常、无因生、常见与断见等行相——同样,执取我的倾向也因疑而转起。比如在“我过去存在吗?”等疑惑中,便包含了“我”慢的犹豫状态,因为它以执取我为所依。因此说:“有疑者的不如理作意力量增强。”“分别义”:即不确定的意思,因为经中说“某一种见生起”。“由于极其坚固的倾向”:也就是偏见极力增强。“处处”:即于彼生命存在之中。“唯现在有”:通过这一限定,否定了未来存在,而非否定过去;因为若过去也存在,便会引发对断见的执取。所以意思是:唯过去不存在,未来亦不存在。显示巴利原文
19.Yathā ayaṃ vicikicchā uppajjatīti ayaṃ vuttappabhedā vicikicchā yathā uppajjati, evaṃ ayoniso manasikaroto. Etena vicikicchāya attābhinivesasannissayatamāha. Yathā hi vicikicchā attābhinivesaṃ nissāya pavattati, yato sā sassatādhiccasamuppattisassatucchedākārāvalambinī vuttā, evaṃ attābhinivesopi taṃ nissāya pavattati ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho aha’’ntiādinā antogadhāhaṃkārassa kathaṃkathibhāvassa attaggāhasannissayabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘savicikicchassa ayonisomanasikārassa thāmagatattā’’ti. Vikappatthoti aniyamattho. ‘‘Aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Suṭṭhu daḷhabhāvenāti abhinivesassa ativiya thāmagatabhāvena. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ bhave. Paccuppannamevāti avadhāraṇena anāgate atthibhāvaṃ nivatteti, na atīte tatthapi sati atthitāya ucchedaggāhassa sabbhāvato. Atīte eva natthi, na anāgatepīti adhippāyo.
“以想蕴为首”:即是想蕴为首要,以想蕴为导首的意思。“诸蕴中”是指五蕴。“执取为我”:即顽固地执取“能知觉的自性即是我的我”。如同需要被照明的物品,又如灯既能照亮自身也能照亮所缘,有人认为能知觉者既能知觉自身也能知觉所缘;持此见解者,便成为恶见。因此说“以自己认知自己”。当把想蕴及属于想蕴的其他法执为“我”或“我所有”时,便形成了这一意义,所以说“以想蕴为首”等。在这里,若执取“在蕴之外有我”,即是常见;若执取“蕴本身就是我”,则是断见。因此说:“这一切都只是常见和断见”。显示巴利原文
Saññākkhandhasīsenāti saññākkhandhapamukhena, saññākkhandhaṃ pamukhaṃ katvāti attho. Khandheti pañcapi khandhe. Attāti gahetvāti ‘‘sañjānanasabhāvo me attā’’ti abhinivissa. Pakāsetabbaṃ vatthuṃ viya, attānampi pakāsento padīpo viya, sañjānitabbaṃ nīlādiārammaṇaṃ viya attānampi sañjānātīti evaṃdiṭṭhitopi diṭṭhigatito hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘attanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmī’’ti. Svāyamattho saññaṃ tadaññataradhamme ca ‘‘attā anattā’’ti ca gahaṇavasena hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘saññākkhandhasīsenā’’tiādi. Ettha ca khandhavinimutto attāti gaṇhato sassatadiṭṭhi, khandhaṃ pana ‘‘attā’’ti gaṇhato ucchedadiṭṭhīti āha ‘‘sabbāpi sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyovā’’ti.
“倾向行相”:即颠倒的行相。“说”:这是为了表明自己能宣说造者、受者等众生的利益与安乐,因此被称为“语业的作者”。“受”:即受者,受者就是能感受者。这类词语,多数语法学家认为具有主动的含义。有生起的必定有灭,既有生灭,则非恒常。为了揭示主张“常”者的真实意图,故说“无生灭”。“坚实”:因其恒常而具有坚实性。“一切时存在”:即存在于一切时间。“本性”:指自性之体,亦即“本性”,或指通过“说者”等方式所表达的自性。“等同常住”:即与常住等同,意为稳定、恒常。也就是说,过去如何安住,现在也如是安住,未来也如是安住。显示巴利原文
Abhinivesākārāti vipariyesākārā. Vadatīti iminā kārakavedakasattānaṃ hitasukhāvabodhanasamatthataṃ attano dīpeti. Tenāha ‘‘vacīkammassa kārako’’ti. Vedetīti vediyo, vediyova vedeyyo. Īdisānañhi padānaṃ bahulā kattusādhanataṃ saddasatthavidū maññanti. Uppādavato ekanteneva vayo icchitabbo, sati ca udayabbayatte neva niccatāti ‘‘nicco’’ti vadantassa adhippāyaṃ vivaranto āha ‘‘uppādavayarahito’’ti. Sārabhūtoti niccatāya eva sārabhāvo. Sabbakālikoti sabbasmiṃ kāle vijjamāno. Pakatibhāvanti sabhāvabhūtaṃ pakatiṃ, ‘‘vado’’tiādinā vā vuttaṃ pakatisaṅkhātaṃ sabhāvaṃ. Sassatisamanti sassatiyā samaṃ sassatisamaṃ, thāvaraṃ niccakālanti attho. Tatheva ṭhassatīti yenākārena pubbe aṭṭhāsi, etarahi tiṭṭhati, tatheva tenākārena anāgatepi ṭhassatīti attho.
“现量指示”:以‘此’字表达近前的现量义。见本身即称为“恶见”:其中‘gata’一词仅为增补音节而用,故如此说。“已入于见中”:含摄于邪见之中,因此说“包含在六十二见中”。“唯是见的执取”:仅仅是对见的执取。犹如山岳、河流、险阻难以走出,邪见的执取也难以脱离,故说“以难出之义为稠林”。那称为“水”的,因执取即需超越,故称荒漠;无水的树林也称为旷野。此外,有些林野之地难以超越,如同荒漠,见解也是如此,故说“以难超越之义”等。刺穿、切割。违逆,即变异的状态。由于它自身性质不安稳,所以是动摇、躁动的,故说“有时……”等。如桎梏绑缚等,束缚而不得自在,即是结缚之义。由烦恼、业、果的轮转因缘,将远者牵引而系缚,也是结缚之义。见解也有这样的性质,所以称为“见结”。显示其束缚义:因它能成就此作用。因此说:“由见结……解脱”。其中,“这些”指生等苦的缘。虽然已显示生等苦法的具体相状,世尊又说“不能从苦解脱”,这是为了表明:见结乃一切灾祸的制造者,罪过极重,是一切苦的根本。这一意义。显示巴利原文
Paccakkhanidassanaṃ idaṃ-saddassa āsannapaccakkhabhāvaṃ katvā. Diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigatanti gata-saddassa padavaḍḍhanamattataṃ āha. Diṭṭhīsugatanti micchādiṭṭhīsu pariyāpannanti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiantogadhattā’’ti. Diṭṭhiyā gamanamattanti diṭṭhiyā gahaṇamattaṃ. Yathā pana pabbatajalaviduggāni dunniggamanāni, evaṃ diṭṭhiggāhopīti āha ‘‘dunniggamanaṭṭhena gahana’’nti. Taṃ nāma udakaṃ, taṃ gahetvā taṃ atikkamitabbato kantāro, nirudakavanaṃ, taṃ pavanantipi vuccati. Añño pana araññapadeso duratikkamanaṭṭhena kantāro viyāti, evaṃ diṭṭhipīti āha ‘‘duratikkamanaṭṭhenā’’tiādi. Vinivijjhanaṃ vitudanaṃ. Vilomanaṃ vipariṇāmabhāvo. Anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya vicalitaṃ vipphanditanti āha ‘‘kadācī’’tiādi. Andubandhanādi viya nissarituṃ appadānavasena aseribhāvakaraṇaṃ bandhanaṭṭho, kilesakammavipākavaṭṭānaṃ paccayabhāvena dūragatampi ākaḍḍhitvā saṃyojanaṃ saṃyojanaṭṭho, diṭṭhipi tathārūpāti vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhisaṃyojana’’nti. Bandhanatthaṃ dassento kiccasiddhiyāti adhippāyo. Tenevāha ‘‘diṭṭhisaṃyojanena…pe… muccatī’’ti. Tattha etehīti iminā jātiādidukkhassa paccayabhāvamāha. Jātiādike dukkhadhamme sarūpato dassetvāpi ‘‘na parimuccati dukkhasmā’’ti vadantena bhagavatā diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ nāma sabbānatthakaraṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ sabbassapi dukkhassa mūlabhūtanti ayamattho vibhāvitoti dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃ vā bahunā, sakalavaṭṭadukkhatopi na muccatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
20 难道不是由于显示了见结,也就显示了戒禁取吗?因为如此一来,那些以见所断的诸漏便得以无余显示。正是针对这一问难,才说“由于”等。戒禁取已摄于“欲漏”等的归类之中,因为它是欲漏等之因。那些尚未断除欲贪等的人,为了享受欲乐,或是为了证得有之清净,而执取戒禁,如他们所说:“以此戒、或禁、或苦行、或梵行,我将成为天神或某类天神”,“在那里,我将是常、恒、久住、不变易法,如同永恒一般存在”,以及经中所说的“戒清净、禁清净、戒禁清净”。此处“为有乐与有清净”,意思是:为了有之乐,也为了有之清净。戒禁取是随见而被执取的,正如“为断诸恶见”等处所说。“那些”是指应以见力断除的诸漏。这是就补特伽罗安立之教而作的显示。与此相反者,即是如理作意的善凡夫。显示巴利原文
20. Nanu cettha diṭṭhisaṃyojanadassanena sīlabbataparāmāsopi dassetabbo, evañhi dassanena pahātabbā āsavā anavasesato dassitā hontīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi. Sīlabbataparāmāso kāmāsavādiggahaṇeneva gahito hoti kāmāsavādihetukattā tassa. Appahīnakāmarāgādiko hi kāmasukhatthaṃ vā bhavasuddhatthaṃ vā evaṃ bhavavisuddhi hotīti sīlabbatāni parāmasanti, ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.186; ma. ni. 2.79), ‘‘tattha nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.19), ‘‘sīlena suddhi vatena suddhi sīlabbatena suddhī’’ti (dha. sa. 1222) ca suttevuttaṃ sīlabbataṃ parāmasanti. Tattha bhavasukhabhavavisuddhiatthanti bhavasukhatthañca bhavavisuddhiatthañca. Tassa gahitattāti sīlabbataparāmāsassa diṭṭhiggahaṇena gahitattā yathā ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 277). Tesanti dassanapahātabbānaṃ. Dassetuṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya. Tabbiparītassāti yonisomanasikaroto kalyāṇaputhujjanassa.
“它”是指“多闻”等文句。“至此”意为从“多闻”起,直至“他遍知此是苦”这句为止,以此句为界限。“依前文所说的方法而应知其义”:对于“圣善士、圣法、善士法、应作意、不应作意”这些词,应按照在根本说中所采取的方式次第了知其义。“由所说的对立面”:对于“多闻圣弟子、见过诸圣者、见过诸善士”这些词,应从前面所说的所有方面的对立面来了知其义;而对于“善巧”“善调伏”等词,则无需从所有方面的对立面来了知,因为阿拉汉是究竟义上的圣法善巧者、圣法善调伏者。因此说:“而由对立面,应从一切方面……乃至……应知为圣弟子”。行舍智是到达顶点的观。有些人说“从坏灭智开始是到达顶点的观”,这是不合理的。“以与其相应的义”:即是以与那个人相应的圣义而说,并非以证得之义而说,因为此人尚是善凡夫。正如在《有学经》中,从“即使是善凡夫”开始,进而说“他也被称为有学,因为他学习”,以方便说为有学;同样地,在这里也是以方便说为圣弟子。由属于导向出起之观相的圣善士法与律——即菩提分或三学——,依此而说此人为圣弟子等身份。因此说“以”显示巴利原文
Tassāti ‘‘sutavā’’tiādipāṭhassa. Tāvāti ‘‘sutavā’’ti ito paṭṭhāya yāva ‘‘so idaṃ dukkha’’nti padaṃ, tāva imaṃ padaṃ avadhiṃ katvāti attho. Heṭṭhā vuttanayenāti ariyasappurisa-ariyadhamma-sappurisadhamma-manasikaraṇīya-amanasikaraṇīyapadānaṃ yathākkamaṃ mūlapariyāye idha gahetvā vuttanayena attho veditabboti sambandho. Vuttapaccanīkatoti ‘‘sutavā ariyasāvako, ariyānaṃ dassāvī, sappurisānaṃ dassāvī’’ti etesaṃ padānaṃ sabbākārena vuttaviparītato attho veditabbo, kovidavinītapadānaṃ pana na sabbappakārena vuttaviparītato. Arahā hi nippariyāyena ariyadhamme kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto ca nāma. Tenāha ‘‘paccanīkato ca sabbākārena…pe… ariyasāvakoti veditabbo’’ti. Saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ sikhāppattavipassanā. Keci pana ‘‘bhaṅgañāṇato paṭṭhāya sikhāpattavipassanā’’ti vadanti, tadayuttaṃ . Tadanurūpena atthenāti tassa puggalassa anurūpena ariyaṭṭhena, na paṭivedhavasenāti adhippāyo. Kalyāṇaputhujjano hi ayaṃ. Yathā cassa ‘‘yopi kalyāṇaputhujjano’’ti ārabhitvā ‘‘sopi vuccati sikkhatīti sekkho’’ti pariyāyena sekkhasutte (saṃ. ni. 5.13) sekkhabhāvo vutto, evaṃ idha ariyasāvakabhāvo vutto. Vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanālakkhaṇehi ye ariyasappurisadhammavinayasaṅkhātā bodhipakkhiyadhammā tisso sikkhā eva vā sambhavanti, tesaṃ vasena imassa ariyasāvakādibhāvo vutto . Tenāha ‘‘tadanurūpena atthenā’’ti. Ariyassa sāvakoti vā ariyasāvakatthena eva vutto yathā ‘‘agamā rājagahaṃ buddho’’ti (su. ni. 410). Sikhāppattavipassanāggahaṇañcettha vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā anivattipaṭipadāyaṃ ṭhitassa gahaṇatthanti yathāvuttā atthasaṃvaṇṇanā suṭṭhutaraṃ yujjateva.
21 如同以界为门而专注于观者,是界业处者;以处等为门而专注于观者,是处等业处者;同样地,以谛为门而专注于观者,称为“四谛业处者”。由于想要渡越四瀑流者所应修习,故为业处,即修习。业处本身就是殊胜证得的立足处、原因;或者,依前述意义,于业处中立足、安住,即修习的起始——业处,而此业处以四谛为门而生起,因此具此者,为四谛业处者。两者于此中不转起,故为“不转起”。所谓“已把握四谛业处者”,即从文句与义理上把握四谛业处后,使其适合如理作意而安住者。“已登上观道者”,即立足于见有缘的名色之后,正以无常等思惟那名色者。“作意”是就观之转向而说,因此,如同“这是苦”的观智转起那样,作意、转向,这是其义。然而,在此如何以“作意”一词表达了“观”的意义呢?因此说:“在此……已说”。“在此”即在此经中的意思。而“观”即如是为令上分殊胜证得生起,以智眼而观、观察,这是其义。道也应说。因为前二谛由于甚深而难见,后二谛由于难见而甚深。显示巴利原文
21. Yathā dhātumukhena vipassanaṃ abhiniviṭṭho dhātukammaṭṭhāniko āyatanādimukhena abhiniviṭṭho āyatanādikammaṭṭhāniko, evaṃ saccamukhena abhiniviṭṭhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko’’ti. Caturoghanittharaṇatthikehi kātabbato kammaṃ, bhāvanā. Kammameva visesādhigamassa ṭhānaṃ kāraṇanti, kamme vā yathāvuttanaṭṭhena ṭhānaṃ avaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvanārambhokammaṭṭhānaṃ, tadeva catusaccamukhena pavattaṃ etassa atthīti catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko. Ubhayaṃ nappavattati etthāti appavatti. Uggahitacatusaccakammaṭṭhānoti ca catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ pāḷito atthato ca uggahetvā manasikārayoggaṃ katvā ṭhito. Vipassanāmaggaṃ samāruḷhoti sappaccayanāmarūpadassane patiṭṭhāya tadeva nāmarūpaṃ aniccādito sammasanto. Samannāharatīti vipassanāvajjanaṃ sandhāyāha, tasmā yathā ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti vipassanāñāṇaṃ pavattati, evaṃ samannāharati āvajjatīti attho. Kathaṃ panettha ‘‘manasi karotī’’ti iminā ‘‘vipassatī’’ti ayamattho vutto hotīti āha ‘‘ettha…pe… vuttā’’ti. Etthāti ca imasmiṃ sutteti attho. Vipassatīti ca yathā upari visesādhigamo hoti, evaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā vipassati, oloketīti attho. Maggopi vattabbo. Purimañhi saccadvayaṃ gambhīrattā duddasaṃ, itaraṃ duddasattā gambhīraṃ.
“专注”即观的专注,是观的行道。“以彼为所缘”即是以色蕴为所缘而转起。“确定了如实自相”即无颠倒地将自己的所缘——如自性分断等作用,以及无明等相——无混杂地安立于心。这显示:即使先前已作了名色分别,由于把握了缘,诸法的自相确定才成为善确定,如同“两次绑缚才是善绑缚”一般。如此,遍知的作用才得以成就。由于从缘与缘生已作确定,凡以明显性而成就者,其成就性也明显,故说“从非有成为有”。“赋予无常相”即:因为非有者应当生起,且由于他们有生起,必然要希求缘所支配的状态;当有生起时,灭尽必定存在,所以绝无常恒的机会。由于无常性善住立,又被生灭法屡屡逼迫,从而以苦的含义成为苦。因此说:“由于被生灭逼迫故是苦,即赋予苦相”。于一切行法中,由于不可得“勿老、勿病”,所以没有自在支配,因此说:“由于无自在支配故是无我,即赋予无我相”。“次第”即通过生灭智等的次第。显示巴利原文
Abhinivesoti vipassanābhiniveso vipassanāpaṭipatti. Tadārammaṇeti taṃ rūpakkhandhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatte. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ vavatthapetvāti aviparītaṃ attano ārammaṇaṃ sabhāvacchedanādikiccañceva aññāṇādilakkhaṇañca asaṅkarato hadaye ṭhapetvā. Iminā pubbe nāmarūpaparicchede katepi dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇavavatthāpanaṃ paccayapariggahena suvavatthāpitaṃ nāma hotīti dasseti yathā ‘‘dvikkhattuṃ baddhaṃ subaddha’’nti. Evañhi ñātapariññāya kiccaṃ siddhaṃ nāma hoti. Paccayato paccayuppannato ca vavatthāpitattā pākaṭabhāvena siddhenapi siddhabhāvo pākaṭo hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ahutvā hontī’’ti. Aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropetīti asato hi uppādena bhavitabbaṃ, na sato, uppādavantato ca nesaṃ ekantena icchitabbā paccayāyattavuttibhāvato, sati uppāde avassaṃbhāvī nirodhoti nattheva niccatāvakāsoti. Sūpaṭṭhitāniccatāya ca udayabbayadhammehi abhiṇhapaṭipīḷanato dukkhamanaṭṭhena dukkhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā dukkhāti dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ āropetī’’ti. Katthacipi saṅkhāragate ‘‘mā jīri mā byādhiyī’’ti alabbhanato natthi vasavattananti āha ‘‘avasavattanato anattāti anattalakkhaṇaṃ āropetī’’ti. Paṭipāṭiyāti udayabbayañāṇādiparamparāya.
“于彼刹那”即在入流道刹那。“以一遍悟”即是以一智而通达。通达即由于没有障碍,于境界中无着而行,这称为穿透。现观即无偏离地证得境界,这称为觉了。如所说方式,通过限定“这是苦,苦仅此量,无过于此”而了知,即是通达,这是遍知通达。这是就智转起之后,于苦的自相等分别中无有痴迷地转起而说,并非因为道智也以“这是苦”等方式转起。因此说:“因为其时他无有……”。由于已断者不再应断,因此殊胜的断、舍弃、根绝就是断;如所说方式,断本身就是通达,这是断之通达。这也是就以下情形而说:若某烦恼未被断除,则不应有道之修习;若无道之修习,则可能生起某烦恼;对于打击该烦恼、令其达至不再生起之法的智,以其如此转起而无障碍、无着而行,而如此说。作证即现前所作,舍弃随闻、思惟等,从自相上取为所缘,即“此是如此”地如实把握;如所说方式,那本身就是通达,这是作证通达。而这是就以下情形而说:由于未根绝某障碍,智不能缘取灭;由于根绝了该障碍,彼灭即从自相上被明了而转起,而如此说。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ khaṇeti sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe. Ekapaṭivedhenevāti ekañāṇeneva paṭivijjhanena. Paṭivedho paṭighātābhāvena visaye nissaṅgacārasaṅkhātaṃ nibbijjhanaṃ. Abhisamayo avirajjhitvā visayassa adhigamasaṅkhāto avabodho. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti paricchinditvā jānanameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pariññāpaṭivedho. Ayaṃ yathā ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattiṃ gahetvā vutto, na pana maggañāṇassa ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādināpi vattanato. Tenāha ‘‘na hissa tasmiṃ samaye’’tiādi. Pahīnassa puna appahātabbatāya pakaṭṭhaṃ hānaṃ cajanaṃ samucchindanaṃ pahānaṃ, pahānameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pahānapaṭivedho. Ayampi yena kilesena appahīyamānena maggabhāvanāya na bhavitabbaṃ, asati ca maggabhāvanāya yo uppajjeyya, tassa kilesassa padaghātaṃ karontassa anuppattidhammataṃ āpādentassa ñāṇassa tathāpavattiyā paṭighātābhāvena nissaṅgacāraṃ upādāya evaṃ vutto. Sacchikiriyā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ, anussavākāraparivitakkādike muñcitvā sarūpato ārammaṇakaraṇaṃ idaṃ tanti yathāsabhāvato gahaṇaṃ, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti sacchikiriyāpaṭivedho. Ayaṃ pana yassa āvaraṇassa asamucchindanato ñāṇaṃ nirodhaṃ ālambituṃ na sakkoti, tassa samucchindanato taṃ sarūpato vibhāvitameva pavattatīti evaṃ vutto.
修习有令生起与令增长两种含义。其中,在初道中以令生起为义,在第二等道中以令增长为义,或者在两者中,也可以两种方式理解。因为初道也依适当的方式,令导向出起中的遍知等增长、相续而转起,所以在此处也可依增长之义来理解修习。在第二等道中,也因断除未断之烦恼、成就其他补特伽罗,而以令生起之义为修习,这便是依所说方式而通达,因此修习即是通达。因为这也如同在智转起之后,对诸道法的自性分别无有迷惑,如是即就此转起而说。暂且搁置已证得的道法,在依此进行的果法中,于已证得的谛法也同样成为离迷惑者。因此说“见法者、得法者、知法者、深入法者”。由此,受法性策励,依止于已证得的谛法,在道途之后,对道果所断除的残余烦恼与涅槃的观察便进行。因为苦谛法即是有身见等。这一义释也应在“以遍知现观”等处阐明。为了更清晰地显示“以一现观而现观”这一已说之义,而说“然而并非以相互不同的智”等。显示巴利原文
Bhāvanā uppādanā vaḍḍhanā ca, tattha paṭhamamagge uppādanaṭṭhena, dutiyādīsu vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena, ubhayatthāpi vā ubhayathāpi veditabbaṃ. Paṭhamamaggopi hi yathārahaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminiyaṃ pavattaṃ parijānanādiṃ vaḍḍhento pavattoti tatthāpi vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena bhāvanā sakkā viññātuṃ. Dutiyādīsupi appahīnakilesappahānato puggalantarasādhanato uppādanaṭṭhena bhāvanā, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti bhāvanā paṭivedho. Ayampi hi yathā ñāṇe pavatte pacchā maggadhammānaṃ sarūpaparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattimeva gahetvā vutto, tiṭṭhatu tāva yathādhigatamaggadhammaṃ yathāpavattesu phaladhammesupi ayaṃ yathādhigatasaccadhammesu viya vigatasammohova hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti (dī. ni. 1.299, 356; mahāva. 27, 57). Yato cassa dhammatāsañcoditā yathādhigatasaccadhammāvalambiniyo maggavīthito parato maggaphalapahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesanibbānānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā pavattanti. Dukkhasaccadhammā hi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo. Ayañca atthavaṇṇanā ‘‘pariññābhisamayenā’’tiādīsupi vibhāvetabbā. Ekābhisamayena abhisametīti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhūtataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘no ca kho aññamaññena ñāṇenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
然而,诡辩者说:‘圣道智对四谛是以种种现观的方式执行作用,而非以一种现观。它一时了知苦,一时断除集,一时证得灭,一时修习道;否则,一个智在一个刹那执行四种作用,是不合理的。而且,任何地方也未见这样的经典。’应告诉他:如果圣道智以种种现观的方式现观诸谛,而非以一种现观,那么即便单独地,它也应于诸谛以不同刹那进行,而不能以一刹那进行。若是如此,则会导致只是部分地遍知苦等、部分地断除;在种种现观的情况下,由初道等所应断的三结等,也可能部分地断除,从而成为部分住于预流道者,由此也成为部分预流者,因为出世间善法是无间果的缘故——这是不合理的。因为若不依时间差别,就无法理解‘他既是预流者又不是预流者’。显示巴利原文
Vitaṇḍavādī panāha ‘‘ariyamaggañāṇaṃ catūsu saccesu nānābhisamayavasena kiccakaraṇaṃ, na ekābhisamayavasena. Tañhi kālena dukkhaṃ pajānāti, kālena samudayaṃ pajahati, kālena nirodhaṃ sacchikaroti, kālena maggaṃ bhāveti, aññathā ekassa ñāṇassa ekasmiṃ khaṇe catukiccakaraṇaṃ na yujjati. Na hidaṃ katthaci diṭṭhampi suttaṃ atthī’’ti. So vattabbo – yadi ariyamaggañāṇaṃ nānābhisamayavasena saccāni abhisameti, na ekābhisamayavasena, evaṃ sante paccekampi saccesu nānakkhaṇeneva pavatteyya, na ekakkhaṇena, tathā sati dukkhādīnaṃ ekadesekadesameva parijānāti pajahatīti āpajjatīti nānābhisamaye paṭhamamaggādīhi pahātabbānaṃ saññojanattayādīnaṃ ekadesekadesappahānaṃ siyāti ekadesasotāpattimaggaṭṭhāditā, tato eva ekadesasotāpannāditā ca āpajjati anantaraphalattā lokuttarakusalānaṃ, na ca taṃ yuttaṃ. Na hi kālabhedena vinā so eva sotāpanno ca asotāpanno cāti sakkā viññātuṃ.
此外,这位种种现观论者应被这样询问:‘道智通达诸谛时,是从所缘通达,还是从作用通达?’若他明白,应回答‘从作用’。对他说:‘既然从作用通达,为何会有种种现观?’而后以无次第的显示令他信服。如果他回答‘从所缘’,如此一来,他的那个智便如同观智一般,对苦的遍知与对集的断除便不合理,因为尚未脱离。同样,对道的见也不合理,因为道以自己为所缘而起作用不合理,且会导致对其他道的设想,从而陷入无定论。因此,三谛从作用通达,灭谛从作用与所缘通达。如此,以无迷惑而通达的道智,绝无种种现观。这已说:‘诸比丘,见苦者,也见苦集’等。而且,这并非就异时见而说。因为‘友,见苦者,也见苦集……也见趣苦灭之道’这一说法,是由具寿牛主长老为了在探讨具有一见者是否具有他谛见时成立其义而引用的,并且单独地将见三谛连接起来;否则,先前已见者后来不再见,则见集等便无法连接。因为出世间道不像世间道那样以已作者的状态进行,它是断除者。如此,通过连接,一切见以见为最上,见无间断。如是,从教理与正理来看,种种现观不合理,应使他如此信服。显示巴利原文
Apicāyaṃ nānābhisamayavādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘maggañāṇaṃ saccāni paṭivijjhantaṃ kiṃ ārammaṇato paṭivijjhati, udāhu kiccato’’ti? Jānamāno ‘‘kiccato’’ti vadeyya, ‘‘kiccato paṭivijjhantassa kiṃ nānābhisamayenā’’ti vatvā paṭipāṭiyānidassanena saññāpetabbo. Atha ‘‘ārammaṇato’’ti vadeyya, evaṃ sante tassa ñāṇassa vipassanāñāṇassa viya dukkhasamudayānaṃ accantapariññāsamucchedā na yuttā anissaṭattā. Tathā maggadassanaṃ. Na hi maggo sayameva attānaṃ ārabbha pavattatīti yuttaṃ, maggantaraparikappanāya pana anavaṭṭhānaṃ āpajjati, tasmā tīṇi saccāni kiccato, nirodhaṃ kiccato ca ārammaṇato ca paṭivijjhatīti evaṃ asammohato paṭivijjhantassa maggañāṇassa nattheva nānābhisamayo. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yo bhikkhave dukkhaṃ passati, dukkhasamudayampi so passatī’’tiādi. Na cetaṃ kālantaradassanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yo nu kho, āvuso, dukkhaṃ passati, dukkhasamudayampi …pe… dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadampi so passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1100) ekaccadassanasamaṅgino aññasaccadassanasamaṅgibhāvavicāraṇāyaṃ tadatthasādhanatthaṃ āyasmatā gavampatittherena ābhatattā, paccekañca saccattayadassanassa yojitattā, aññathā purimadiṭṭhassa puna adassanato samudayādidassanamayojaniyaṃ siyā. Na hi lokuttaramaggo lokiyamaggo viya katakārībhāvena pavattati samucchedakattā, tathā yojanena ca sabbadassanaṃ dassanantaraparamanti dassanānuparamo siyāti evaṃ āgamato yuttito ca nānābhisamayo na yujjatīti saññāpetabbo. Evaṃ ce saññattiṃ gacchati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce gacchati, abhidhamme (kathā. 274) odhisokathāya saññāpetabboti.
‘灭为所缘’应理解为决定指‘灭本身为所缘’,而非‘或为所缘’。由此,以作用通达灭也得以成立。‘于彼时’指于诸谛现观之时。‘二十事’等是显示已说的‘三结’的自性。‘于四漏’是依阿毗达摩方式而说,并非依经藏方式。因为经中任何地方都未出现四漏。若疑不是漏,那么为何说‘有身见、疑、戒禁取,诸比丘,这些称为见所断漏’?因此说‘见所断’等。‘此处被包含故’,以此显示:如同正思惟由于在慧蕴中作用同类而被包含,此处疑也被归入漏。显示巴利原文
Nirodhaṃ ārammaṇatoti nirodhameva ārammaṇatoti niyamo gahetabbo, na ārammaṇatovāti. Tena nirodhe kiccatopi paṭivedho siddho hoti. Tasmiṃ samayeti saccānaṃ abhisamaye. Vīsativatthukātiādi ‘‘tīṇi saññojanānī’’ti vuttānaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ. Catūsu āsavesūti idaṃ abhidhammanayena vuttaṃ, na suttantanayena. Na hi sutte katthaci cattāro āsavā āgatā atthi. Yadi vicikicchā na āsavo, atha kasmā ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhi vicikicchā sīlabbataparāmāso, ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘dassanā pahātabbā’’tiādi. Ettha pariyāpannattāti etena sammāsaṅkappassa viya paññākkhandhe kiccasabhāgatāya idha vicikicchāya āsavasaṅgaho katoti dasseti.
因为说“一切我执都不离有身见”,所以才说“六种见……被分别”。那种见在一种心生起时以及在相续中,安立为同一处。其中前者是俱生同一处,后者是所断同一处。为了将这两者都拣别出来而显示,故说“以见漏”等。“以一切方式”即是以所有方式,指的是俱生同一处和所断同一处的方式。“其余”是指见漏所剩余者。三种漏即是欲漏、有漏、无明漏。因为前面确实说过“在四漏中”。因此,由于这里有多漏应断,所以用了复数表述:“诸比丘,这些即名为见所断之漏。”“古师”是指注释书老师,也有人说是指“古代的中部诵者”。显示巴利原文
Sabbo attaggāho sakkāyadiṭṭhivinimutto natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ…pe… vibhattā’’ti. Sā hi diṭṭhi ekasmiṃ cittuppāde santāne ca ṭhitaṃ ekaṭṭhaṃ, tattha paṭhamaṃ sahajātekaṭṭhaṃ, itaraṃ pahānekaṭṭhaṃ, tadubhayampi niddhāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘diṭṭhāsavehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbathāpīti sabbappakārena, sahajātekaṭṭhapahānekaṭṭhappakārehīti attho. Avasesāti diṭṭhāsavato avasiṭṭhā. Tayopi āsavāti kāmāsavabhavāsavaavijjāsavā. Tathā hi pubbe ‘‘catūsu āsavesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā bahū evettha āsavā pahātabbā, tasmā bahuvacananiddeso kato ‘‘ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbā’’ti. Porāṇānanti aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ, ‘‘purātanānaṃ majjhimabhāṇakāna’’nti ca vadanti.
关于“见所断”等部分,应说的内容前面都已说过了。显示巴利原文
Dassanā pahātabbātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
「律仪所断诸漏」的解释显示巴利原文
Saṃvarāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
22 “以律仪等”是指律仪、受用、忍受、回避和除去这五种方式。“一切”是指四种圣道。“此”律仪所断等解说,应当理解为前分的修行。如前面所说,经典教说的意趣在于“为了显示断尽诸漏的修行,而以清除随烦恼为起始”。因为不可能从一开始就直接修习圣道。实际上,应当是:一个已经受持戒法、于诸根善护根门的比丘,依于所说——“如理省察后受用一部分,如理省察后忍受一部分,如理省察后回避一部分,如理省察后除去一部分”,循此涵盖四方面的修行而实践。他进入了思择的方法,由此渐次增强观的力量,随圣道的次第而断尽诸漏。因此,世尊曾开示说:“诸比丘,犹如大海次第倾斜、次第低下、次第深入,并非陡然如悬崖。正是这样,诸比丘,于此法律中,有次第学、次第作、次第行道,并非陡然便能证得现观。”显示巴利原文
22.Saṃvarādīhīti saṃvarapaṭisevanaadhivāsanaparivajjanavinodanehi. Sabbesampīti catunnampi ariyamaggānaṃ. Ayanti saṃvarāpahātabbādikathā pubbabhāgapaṭipadāti veditabbā. Tathā hi heṭṭhā ‘‘upakkilesavisodhanaṃ ādiṃ katvā āsavakkhayapaṭipattidassanattha’’nti suttantadesanāya payojanaṃ vuttaṃ. Na hi sakkā ādito eva ariyamaggaṃ bhāvetuṃ, atha kho samādinnasīlo indriyesu guttadvāro ‘‘saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṃ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṃ vinodetī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348; ma. ni. 2.168) evaṃ vuttaṃ caturāpassenapaṭipattiṃ paṭipajjamāno sammasanavidhiṃ otaritvā anukkamena vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā āsave khepeti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahāsamuddo anupubbaninno anupubbapoṇo anupubbapabbhāro, na āyatakeneva papāto, evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, imasmiṃ dhammavinaye anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā, na āyatakeneva aññāpaṭivedho’’ti (a. ni. 8.20; udā. 45; cūḷava. 385).
“于此”一词,从一切方面阐明:以根律仪防护自身的修行人所依止的教法,同时遮止其他教法有此种状态,故说“于此教法中”。“过患思择”指对过患的省察。“被扰乱”指被摩擦、触动。“随形好”指手、脚、笑、谈、看等各类分散的细节部分。因为当对这些作不如理作意时,便会随逐烦恼的样子逐一产生,故称“随形好”。“执取总相”指执取女人、男人等总体形相,或是执取那些成为烦恼所依的相。“依燃烧等说法的理路”意为:这里所说的“过患思择”与前文的关联,应按照《燃烧法门》中所传述的理路来理解。“犹如眼根”:这并非像“女性根”那样,因某种主宰力而称为根,此处应理解为“眼本身即是根,故称‘眼根’”。“犹如渡口的乌鸦”:渡口即河滩处,乌鸦即常栖于河滩的渡鸦。“犹如洞穴中的乌龟”等例子,也应依同一道理来理解。显示巴利原文
Idhāti ayaṃ idha-saddo sabbākārato indriyasaṃvarasaṃvutassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano, aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane’’ti. Ādīnavapaṭisaṅkhāti ādīnavapaccavekkhaṇā. Sampalimaṭṭhanti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.6.58) ghaṃsitaṃ. Anubyañjanasoti hatthapādahasitakathitavilokitādippakārabhāgaso. Tañhi ayoniso manasikaroto kilesānaṃ anu anu byañjanato ‘‘anubyañjana’’nti vuccati. Nimittaggāhoti itthipurisanimittādikassa vā kilesavatthubhūtassa vā nimittassa gāho. Ādittapariyāyanayenāti ādittapariyāye (saṃ. ni. 4.28; mahāva. 54) āgatanayena veditabbā ādīnavapaṭisaṅkhāti yojanā. Yathā itthiyā indriyanti itthindriyaṃ, na evamidaṃ, idaṃ pana cakkhumeva indriyanti cakkhundriyanti. Titthakāko viyāti titthe kāko titthakāko, nadiyā samatikkamanatitthe niyataṭṭhitiko. Āvāṭakacchapotiādīsupi eseva nayo.
因此,由于这种与眼相关联的状态,于眼根起到确定作用的防护,即名“眼根律仪”。“忘失正念”指与念相对立的不善法。虽在其他情况下,有分心可以不计其数地无间生起;但是,在净色受到撞击与转向心生起的间隔中,只有两个刹那的有分心生起——这是心的定律。因此,经中就有关有分心说到“生起两次后灭去”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tappaṭibaddhavuttitāya cakkhundriye niyataṭṭhāno saṃvaro cakkhundriyasaṃvaro. Muṭṭhassaccaṃ satipaṭipakkhā akusaladhammā. Yadipi aññattha asaṅkheyyampi bhavaṅgacittaṃ nirantaraṃ uppajjati, pasādaghaṭṭanāvajjanuppādānaṃ pana antare dve eva bhavaṅgacittāni uppajjantīti ayaṃ cittaniyāmoti āha bhavaṅge ‘‘dvikkhattuṃ uppajjitvā niruddhe’’ti.
至于速行刹那中的“若有破戒……”等说,因为在此处已将其余未尽之义全部阐明,故应依六门中可能出现的情况来配合理解。因为在五门中,并没有叫作身语恶行的破戒与律仪;因此,前一部分内容(如不如理作意等)应依意门解说,后一部分则需配合六门来解说。像忘失正念这类具有与念对立等特征的不善法,或可于五门中生起;但是,表现为身语违犯的破戒,绝不可能在五门中生起,因为五门的速行心并不产生表知。显示巴利原文
Javanakkhaṇepana sace dussīlyaṃ vātiādi (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.15; dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 1352) puna avacanatthaṃ idheva sabbaṃ vuttanti chasu dvāresu yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Na hi pañcadvāre kāyavacīduccaritasaṅkhāto dussīlyasaṃvaro atthīti so manodvāravasena, itaro channampi dvārānaṃ vasena yojetabbo. Muṭṭhassaccādīnañhi satipaṭipakkhādilakkhaṇānaṃ akusaladhammānaṃ siyā pañcadvāre uppatti, na tveva kāyikavācasikavītikkamabhūtassa dussīlyassa tattha uppatti pañcadvārikajavanānaṃ aviññattijanakattāti.
「如何」的意思是:依怎样的方式,在速行中生起的不律仪被称为“眼门的不律仪”,这就是举例说明的目的。以“如同……”等为喻,说明:就像城门口若无防护,与之相关的城内房舍等也就没有防护;同样,当速行心中有不律仪时,与之相关的眼等诸门及有分等便成为无防护的状态。这只是譬喻不律仪与无防护之间的共通性,并不是指前后之间的共通,也不是指内外之间的共通。而速行与诸门等的关联,应理解为它们属于同一个相续流。从因缘关系的角度看,由前际成就的速行,在速行发生的当下它虽已非现存,但就像在果报成就时,眼等感官在速行时虽不现行却被认为仍是‘存在’的一样,它仍被称为‘存在的’。因为,并非唯有持续存在的事物才被称为‘存在’。因此,把在诸门与有分等之后生起的速行,看作外在的事物,比喻为城门;而另一边(有分等)则被比喻为城内房舍等。因为在究竟义上,速行心并没有真实的外在性,另一边的心(有分等)也没有真实的内在性。然而,由于佛陀曾开示:“诸比丘,此心是光明的,但它却被外来的诸随烦恼所染污。”(《增支部》)等说法。显示巴利原文
Yathā kinti yena pakārena javane uppajjamāno asaṃvaro ‘‘cakkhudvāre asaṃvaro’’ti vuccati, taṃ nidassanaṃ kinti attho. Yathātiādinā nagaradvāre asaṃvare sati taṃsambandhānaṃ gharādīnaṃ asaṃvutatā viya javane asaṃvare sati taṃsambandhānaṃ dvārādīnaṃ asaṃvutatāti aññāsaṃvare aññāsaṃvutatāsāmaññameva nidasseti, na pubbāparasāmaññaṃ, antobahisāmaññaṃ vā. Sambandho ca javanena dvārādīnaṃ ekasantatipariyāpannatāya eva daṭṭhabbo. Paccayabhāvena purimanipphannaṃ javanakāle asantampi bhavaṅgādi phalanipphattiyā cakkhādi viya santaṃyeva nāma. Na hi dharamānaṃyeva ‘‘santa’’nti vuccati, tasmā sati dvārabhavaṅgādike pacchā uppajjamānaṃ javanaṃ bāhiraṃ viya katvā nagaradvārasamānaṃ vuttaṃ. Itarañca antonagaragharādisamānaṃ. Javanassa hi paramatthato asatipi bāhirabhāve itarassa ca abbhantarabhāve ‘‘pabhassaramidaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, tañca kho āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭha’’nti (a. ni. 1.49) ādivacanato āgantukabhūtassa kadāci kadāci uppajjamānassa javanassa bāhirabhāvo, tabbidhurasabhāvassa itarassa abbhantarabhāvo ca pariyāyato veditabbo. Javane vā asaṃvare uppanne tato paraṃ dvārabhavaṅgādīnaṃ asaṃvarahetubhāvāpattito nagaradvārasadisena javanena pavisitvā dussīlyādicorānaṃ dvārabhavaṅgādīsu musanaṃ kusalabhaṇḍavināsanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Uppanne hi asaṃvare dvārādīnaṃ tassa hetubhāvo paññāyati, so ca uppajjamānoyeva dvārādīnaṃ saṃvarūpanissayabhāvaṃ paṭibāhentoyeva pavattatīti ayañhettha asaṃvarādīnaṃ pavattinayo. Pañcadvāre rūpādiārammaṇe āpāthagate yathāpaccayaṃ akusalajavane uppajjitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otiṇṇe manodvārikajavanaṃ taṃyeva ārammaṇaṃ katvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, puna tasmiṃyeva dvāre ‘‘itthī puriso’’tiādinā visayaṃ vavatthapetvā javanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, puna vāre rajjanādivasena javanaṃ javati, punapi yadi tādisaṃ ārammaṇaṃ āpāthamāgacchati, taṃsadisameva pañcadvāre rūpādīsu javanaṃ uppajjati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘evameva javane dussīlyādīsu uppannesu tasmiṃ asaṃvare sati dvārampi agutta’’ntiādi. Ayaṃ tāva asaṃvarapakkhe atthavaṇṇanā.
关于防护的方面,也应按照同样的方法来理解其义。一个具足防护的人被称为「防护者」,因此说“也就是指‘已具备’”。「合在一起说」的意思是,在意义上与“具足别解脱律仪”这一语句没有差别,将它们当作同一个意思来讲。这里的这种解释,由于与后面的圣典相符合,因此是更善巧的义理。所以这样说“正如……”等等。那个「yanti」是词尾变化,这显示了通过词性变化而作了格的变化;或者,这个yanti是一个不变词,具有表达“各个、众多”的意义。「能造成损害」意思是能让心受到损恼、产生心苦。如所说的,以烦恼为因、伴随燃烧的果报,就是所谓的「果报的热恼」。另外,为了说明这里诸漏以及其他能造成损害的烦恼所产生的热恼是怎样存在的,而说了“于眼门……”等等,这很容易理解。在这里,应当知道这样的区分:防护的方法、应防护的对象、防护、防护从何而来、防护在何处发生,以及防护的果。怎么区分呢?「如理思择」是防护的方法;眼根是应防护的对象;被“防护”一词所摄持的念是防护;“对于没有防护的人……”说明了防护的界限,因为防护正是显示巴利原文
Saṃvarapakkhepi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Saṃvarena samannāgato puggalo saṃvutoti vuttoti āha ‘‘upetoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Ekajjhaṃ katvāti ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti padañca atthato abhinnaṃ samānaṃ katvā. Ayameva cettha atthosundarataro uparipāḷiyā saṃsandanato. Tenāha ‘‘tathāhī’’tiādi. Yanti ādesoti iminā liṅgavipallāsena saddhiṃ vacanavipallāso katoti dasseti, nipātapadaṃ vā etaṃ paccattaputhuvacanatthaṃ. Vighātakarāti cittavighātakaraṇā cittadukkhanibbattakā ca. Yathāvuttakilesahetukā dāhānubandhā vipākā eva vipākapariḷāhā. Yathā panettha āsavā aññe ca vighātakarā kilesavipākapariḷāhā sambhavanti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhudvārehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva. Ettha ca saṃvaraṇūpāyo, saṃvaritabbaṃ, saṃvaro, yato so saṃvaro, yattha saṃvaro, yañca saṃvaraphalanti ayaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo. Kathaṃ? Paṭisaṅkhā yonisoti hi saṃvaraṇūpāyo. Cakkhundriyaṃ saṃvaritabbaṃ. Saṃvaraggahaṇena gahitā sati saṃvaro. Asaṃvutassāti saṃvaraṇāvadhi. Asaṃvarato hi saṃvaraṇaṃ. Saṃvaritabbaggahaṇena siddho idha saṃvaravisayo. Cakkhundriyañhi saṃvarañāṇaṃ rūpārammaṇe saṃvarīyatīti avuttasiddhoyamattho. Āsavatannimittakilesādipariḷāhābhāvo phalaṃ. Evaṃ sotadvārādīsupi yojetabbaṃ. Sabbatthevāti manodvāre pañcadvāre cāti sabbasmiṃ dvāre.
关于「律仪所断(saṃvarāpahātabba)」诸漏的解释到此结束。显示巴利原文
Saṃvarāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
关于「应通过受用而断的漏」的注释。显示巴利原文
Paṭisevanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
23 在“如理省思之后使用衣”等句中,“为防御寒冷”等所说的省察,即是如理省思。Īdisaṃ:指这样的可爱所缘。Bhavapatthanāya assādayato:指通过有爱的途径而对所缘产生欢喜的人。Cīvaraṃ:指下裙等任何衣物。Paṭisevati:即通过穿着等方式使用。Yāvadeva:是对目的范围的限定,因为修行者受用衣的目的正是为了防御寒冷等。Sītassa:由界的扰动或季节变化所产生的寒冷。Paṭighātāya:为了遮止,为了消除以寒冷为缘的损害。Uṇhassa:由火的热恼所产生的暑热。Ḍaṃsādayo:蚊虻等是显而易见的。又,“仅仅为了”是对确定目的范围的限定,因为受用衣的确定目的是遮蔽羞处,其他目的是偶尔的。Hirikopīnaṃ:即隐秘处。因为在哪个肢体暴露时,羞耻被扰乱、被破坏,那个由于羞耻被扰乱而称为“羞处”。为了遮蔽它而受用衣。显示巴利原文
23.Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvarantiādīsu ‘‘sītassa paṭighātāyā’’tiādinā vuttaṃ paccavekkhaṇameva yoniso paṭisaṅkhā. Īdisanti evarūpaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ. Bhavapatthanāya assādayatoti bhavapatthanāmukhena bhāvitaṃ ārammaṇaṃ assādentassa. Cīvaranti nivāsanādi yaṃ kiñci cīvaraṃ. Paṭisevatīti nivāsanādivasena paribhuñjati. Yāvadevāti payojanaparimāṇaniyamanaṃ. Sītapaṭighātādiyeva hi yogino cīvarapaṭisevane payojanaṃ. Sītassāti dhātukkhobhato vā utupariṇāmato vā uppannasītassa. Paṭighātāyāti paṭibāhanatthaṃ tappaccayassa vikārassa vinodanatthaṃ. Uṇhassāti aggisantāpato uppannassa uṇhassa. Ḍaṃsādayo pākaṭāyeva. Puna yāvadevāti niyatapayojanaparimāṇaniyamanaṃ. Niyatañhi payojanaṃ cīvarapaṭisevanassa hirikopīnapaṭicchādanaṃ, itaraṃ kadāci kadāci . Hirikopīnanti sambādhaṭṭhānaṃ . Yasmiñhi aṅge vivaṭe hirīkuppati vinassati, taṃ hiriyā kopanato hirikopīnaṃ, tassa paṭicchādanatthaṃ cīvaraṃ paṭisevati.
「团食」:指一切食物。因其以乞食的方式落入钵中,且从各处所得的食团聚合一处,故称“团食”。「不为了嬉戏」:即不为了玩耍。「不为了骄逸」:不是为了力骄逸、慢骄逸与男子气概之骄逸。「不为了装饰」:不是为了肢体各部分的丰满状态。「不为了庄严」:不是为了它们的美丽,意即并非为了肌肤的圆满。应知,这些语句依顺序是为了断除痴、瞋、身量、容色、贪的所依而说。或者,前两句是为了制止自己生起染污,后两句亦为制止他人产生染污。四句皆应理解为是为了断除沉溺于欲乐之行。「为了此身」:即为了这个色身。「为了存续、延续」:是为了令相续安住,为不间断地维持,为长久安住,以使命根持续运作。「为了止息伤害」:即为了平息饥饿之苦。「为了资助梵行」:显示巴利原文
Piṇḍapātanti yaṃ kiñci āhāraṃ. So hi piṇḍolyena bhikkhanāya patte patanato tattha tattha laddhabhikkhāpiṇḍānaṃ pāto sannipātoti ‘‘piṇḍapāto’’ti vuccati. Neva davāyāti na kīḷanāya. Na madāyāti na balamadamānamadapurisamadatthaṃ. Na maṇḍanāyāti na aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ pīṇanabhāvatthaṃ. Na vibhūsanāyāti na tesaṃyeva sobhanatthaṃ, chavisampatiatthanti attho. Imāni ca padāni yathākkamaṃ moha-dosa-saṇṭhāna-vaṇṇa-rāgūpanissaya-pahānatthāni veditabbāni. Purimaṃ vā dvayaṃ attano attano saṃkilesuppattinisedhanatthaṃ, itaraṃ parassapi. Cattāripi kāmasukhallikānuyogassa pahānatthaṃ vuttānīti veditabbāni. Kāyassāti rūpakāyassa. Ṭhitiyā yāpanāyāti pabandhaṭṭhitatthañceva pavattiyā avicchedanatthañca cirakālaṭṭhitatthaṃ jīvitindriyassa pavattāpanatthaṃ. Vihiṃsūparatiyāti jighacchādukkhassa uparamaṇatthaṃ. Brahmacariyānuggahāyāti sāsanamaggabrahmacariyānaṃ anuggahatthaṃ. Itīti evaṃ iminā upāyena. Purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmīti purāṇaṃ abhuttapaccayā uppajjanakavedanaṃ paṭihanissāmi. Navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmīti navaṃ bhuttapaccayā uppajjanakavedanaṃ na uppādessāmīti. Tassā hi anuppannāya anuppajjanatthameva āhāraṃ paribhuñjati. Ettha ca abhuttapaccayā uppajjanakavedanā nāma yathāpavattā jighacchānimittā vedanā. Sā hi abhuñjantassa bhiyyo bhiyyo pavaḍḍhanavasena uppajjati, bhuttapaccayā uppajjanakavedanāpi khudānimittāva aṅgadāhasūlādivedanā appavattā. Sā hi bhuttapaccayā anuppannāva na uppajjissatīti. Vihiṃsānimittatā cetāsaṃ vihiṃsāya viseso.
“我的存活将会是”:意为我的四种威仪的存活将得以实现。前面“为了存活”说的是命根的存活,这里则是指四种威仪无断绝,称为存活,这是二者之间的差别。「无过失和安乐住」:通过避免不如法的遍求、接受与受用,而获得无过失;通过限量受用,而获得安乐住。或者,由于以不适合、不节制的食物为缘,避免了不乐、昏沉、瞌睡、智者呵责等过失,故无过失;由于以适合、节制的食物为缘,产生身体力量,故安乐住。由于避免受用满腹、塞满胃的食物,便没有乐卧、乐触、乐睡眠等,故无过失;由于了知仅受用四、五团食的量,成就四种威仪的适业性,故安乐住。对此有说道:显示巴利原文
Yātrā ca me bhavissatīti yāpanā ca me catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ bhavissati. Yāpanāyāti iminā jīvitindriyayāpanā vuttā, idha catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ avicchedasaṅkhātā yāpanāti ayametāsaṃ viseso. Anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro cāti ayuttapariyesanapaṭiggahaṇaparibhogaparivajjanena anavajjatā, parimitaparibhogena phāsuvihāro. Asappāyāparimitabhojanapaccayā aratitandīvijambhitāviññugarahādidosābhāvena vā anavajjatā, sappāyaparimitabhojanapaccayā kāyabalasambhavena phāsuvihāro. Yāvadatthaudarāvadehakabhojanaparivajjanena seyyasukhapassasukhamiddhasukhādīnaṃ abhāvato anavajjatā, catupañcālopamattaññīnabhojanena catuiriyāpathayogyatāpādanato phāsuvihāro. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“食四、五抟食,饮水不复食,精勤之比丘,便得安乐住。”
(同第6段,此系偈颂引用,故不重复翻译,保持原引文。)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
至此,目的已得把握,中道亦被阐明。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā payojanapariggaho, majjhimā ca paṭipadā dīpitā hoti.
坐卧具:即卧具与坐具。凡于住处等处卧躺或坐下,彼处即坐卧具。“为去除时节诸难及乐隐居”:时节本身具折磨义,故称为“难”,能引起身病、心散乱;或如前所说之时节,以及狮子、老虎等显露之难,与贪、瞋等隐覆之难,合为时节诸难。为去除这些诸难,亦为乐隐居。此外,正如受用衣服时是为遮蔽羞处,此即是其确定目的,故又说“仅为”。显示巴利原文
Senāsananti sayanañca āsanañca. Yattha hi vihārādike seti nipajjati, āsati nisīdati, taṃ senāsanaṃ. Utuparissayavinodanapaṭisallānārāmatthanti utuyeva parisahanaṭṭhena parissayo, sarīrābādhacittavikkhepakaro, atha vā yathāvutto utu ca sīhabyagghādipākaṭaparissayo ca rāgadosādipaṭicchannaparissayo ca utuparissayo, tassa vinodanatthañceva ekībhāvasukhatthañca. Idañca cīvarapaṭisevane hirikopīnapaṭicchādanaṃ viya tassa niyatapayojananti puna ‘‘yāvadevā’’ti vuttaṃ.
「病缘药资具」:为对治疾病而生起,故称“病缘”;正因是良医所许之物,故称“药”;因是维持生命的随侍资粮,故称“资具”。由此而名病缘药资具。「已生的」:即已经生起、已经产生的。「诸病苦受」:指由疾病、由界扰动所生的那些苦受。「为达无苦最胜」:即为达到无苦的最高状态而受用。这是把文句连贯起来。此处仅是简要的经释。而且,“由生起新受”:不只是未来会生起果报之热恼,更因过度饮食为缘,如阿拉萨吒迦等一般,也会生起新的苦受,应当了知。显示巴利原文
Gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāranti rogassa paccanīkappavattiyā gilānapaccayo, tato eva bhisakkassa anuññātavatthutāya bhesajjaṃ, jīvitassa parivārasambhārabhāvehi parikkhāro cāti gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāro, taṃ. Uppannānanti jātānaṃ nibbattānaṃ. Veyyābādhikānanti byābādhato dhātukkhobhato ca tannibbattarogato ca jātānaṃ. Vedanānanti dukkhavedanānaṃ. Abyābajjhaparamatāyāti niddukkhaparamabhāvāya paṭisevāmīti yojanā. Evamettha saṅkhepeneva pāḷivaṇṇanā veditabbā. Navavedanuppādanatopīti na kevalaṃ āyatiṃ eva vipākapariḷāhā, atha kho atibhojanapaccayā alaṃsāṭakādīnaṃ viya navavedanuppādanatopi veditabbāti attho.
应通过忍耐而断除的漏的注释显示巴利原文
Adhivāsanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
24 「堪忍」:即能忍耐之人。业处行者的动摇,即是舍弃业处,所以说“动摇、飘摇、放弃业处”。即使极度的热也能忍受,而能忍者在忍受时,不像裸形沙门等那样去忍,乃是以不舍弃业处的方式而忍,因此说“正如那位长老”。「于外经行处」:即在洞窟外面的经行处。正因对热的怖畏——即对地狱火热的怖畏,因此说“省察无间大地狱”,即他这样省察:“我在无数劫中曾经历那样地狱的热苦,现在这热比起他们,实在轻微多了。”于此,当知如火的热恼一般,因为后面会说到太阳的热恼。显示巴利原文
24.Khamoti khamanako. Kammaṭṭhānikassa calanaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānapariccāgoti āha ‘‘calati kampati kammaṭṭhānaṃ vijahatī’’ti. Adhimattampi uṇhaṃ sahati, sahanto ca na naggasamaṇādayo viya sahati, atha kho kammaṭṭhānāvijahanenāti āha ‘‘sveva thero viyā’’ti. Bahicaṅkameti leṇato bahi caṅkame. Uṇhabhayenevāti narakaggiuṇhabhayeneva. Tenāha ‘‘avīcimahānirayaṃ paccavekkhitvā’’ti, tampi ‘‘mayā anekakkhattuṃ anubhūtaṃ, idaṃ pana tato mudutara’’nti evaṃ paccavekkhitvā. Etthāti etasmiṃ ṭhāne. Aggisantāpova veditabbo sūriyasantāpassa parato vuccamānattā.
「我是清净戒者」:时时自念“我是清净戒者”,不执取于死,而生起了以无悔为根本的喜。随着喜的生起:当遍满的喜生起时,毒即同时退散,恰如被喜的力势吞没一般,从蛇咬处消散了。就在那里:即就在被蛇咬伤的部位。获得心一境性之后:即依“喜者身得轻安”等经句所示的方式,成就了定。显示巴利原文
Parisuddhasīlohamasmīti sabbathāpi ‘‘visuddhasīlohamasmī’’ti maraṇaṃ aggahetvā avippaṭisāramūlikaṃ pītiṃ uppādesi. Saha pītuppādāti pharaṇapītiyā uppādena saheva. Visaṃ nivattitvāti pītivegena ajjhotthataṃ daṭṭhamukheneva bhassitvā. Tatthevāti sappena daṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva. Cittekaggataṃ labhitvāti ‘‘pītimanassa kāyo passambhatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.466; 3.359; saṃ. ni. 5.376; a. ni. 3.96; 11.12) nayena samādhānaṃ pāpuṇitvā.
资具少欲修习乐住性:于资具少欲,且以修习为应喜乐安住之处,故称“乐住”(林野);因此而有资具少欲修习乐住者,其状态即是资具少欲修习乐住性。大长老:指年长资深的比丘。为表达彼义而说的言词,即是语道。显示巴利原文
Paccayesu santoso bhāvanāya ca āramitabbaṭṭhānatāya ārāmo assāti paccayasantosabhāvanārāmo, tassa bhāvo paccaya…pe… rāmatā, tāya. Mahātheroti vuḍḍhataro thero. Vacanameva tadatthaṃ ñāpetukāmānaṃ pathoti vacanapatho.
“剧烈”:或从“非乐”义说。凡非乐者,即是不可意,称为“剧烈”。“如此性质者”,是为解释“忍耐种类”一词之义。仅于须臾顷刻之间,风起便仿佛要劈裂心脏。“为不来者而般涅槃”:即证得阿拉汉果后般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Asukhaṭṭhena vā tibbā. Yañhi na sukhaṃ, taṃ aniṭṭhaṃ ‘‘tibba’’nti vuccati. Evaṃsabhāvoti ‘‘adhivāsanajātiyo’’ti padassa atthamāha. Muhuttena khaṇeva vāte hadayaṃ phāletuṃ āraddheyeva. Anāgāmī hutvā parinibbāyīti arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyi.
“一切处”:如此,在一切情况下,如“为热所触者希求冷”等所说,应知以热等为相的欲漏生起;此中意谓:冷或热为不可意。“我所执”:当执取自我时,即会执取“这是我的冷、热”,这种执取即是见漏。“承当而安住”:当冷等来临时,能忍耐容受者,就如同将其承当于自身之上而安住。“不摒弃”:即不抖落、不抛弃。因为若不能忍受冷等,便如同在摒弃、抖落它们。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbatthāti ‘‘uṇhena phuṭṭhassa sītaṃ patthayato’’tiādinā sabbattha uṇhādinimittaṃ kāmāsavuppatti veditabbā, sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā aniṭṭhanti adhippāyo. Attaggāhe sati attaniyaggāhoti āha ‘‘mayhaṃ sītaṃ uṇhanti gāho diṭṭhāsavo’’ti. Sītādike upagate sahantī khamantī te attano upari vāsentī viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘āropetvā vāsetiyevā’’ti . Na nirassatīti na vidhunati. Yo hi sītādike na sahati, so te nirassanto vidhunanto viya hotīti.
通过回避而断除的漏的注释显示巴利原文
Parivajjanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
25 「我沙门」:意指此人并未这样想过:‘我是沙门,我的生或死有何意义?’ 这是其意趣所在。「省察后」:指省察村落、地方、利益等之后。「回避」:指从大象等靠近之处避开。「荆棘处」:指荆棘所在之处。「非人所污处」:指被非人游荡所染污的地方,即危险之处。「平坦」:指平坦,没有不平坦的意思。「非行」:指曾作那样的恶行。显示巴利原文
25.Ahaṃsamaṇoti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.6.58) ‘‘ahaṃ samaṇo, kiṃ mama jīvitena vā maraṇena vā’’ti evaṃ acintetvāti adhippāyo. Paccavekkhitvāti gāmappadesaṃ payojanādiñca paccavekkhitvā. Paṭikkamatīti hatthiādīnaṃ samīpagamanato apakkamati. Kaṇṭakā yattha tiṭṭhanti, taṃ kaṇṭakaṭṭhānaṃ. Amanussaduṭṭhānīti amanussasañcārena dūsitāni, saparissayānīti attho. Samānanti samaṃ, avisamanti attho. Akāsi vā tādisaṃ anācāraṃ.
「戒律仪」:关于‘回避如何是戒’这里应当说的,前文已述。再者,由于说到‘回避暴戾的象’等,因此回避象等也是依循世尊的教导而行,故应知这即是行仪戒。显示巴利原文
Sīlasaṃvarasaṅkhātenāti ‘‘kathaṃ parivajjanaṃ sīla’’nti yadettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Apica ‘‘caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjetī’’ti vacanato hatthiādiparivajjanampi bhagavato vacanānuṭṭhānanti katvā ācārasīlamevāti veditabbaṃ.
通过遣除而断除的漏的注释显示巴利原文
Vinodanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
26 「以此因由」:意谓因为这个缘故——由于它是由非如理作意所生起的,也由于伴随着贪等,又是善法的对立面等理由,这个寻思即是不善的。如此,有罪等也应以同样的方式理解。在此,通过‘不善’等显示了欲寻思在现法中的过患;通过‘有苦报’显示了后世的过患。于‘导致自苦’等处,也应同样阐明其过患。对于已生的欲寻思,‘不忍受’是指不再让那样的寻思生起,而这也就是对它进行断除、遣除、消除、归于无有。因此,在经文中先说了‘不忍受已生起的欲寻思’,然后说了‘断除’等。为显示此意,便说明:‘在不忍受时,他做什么呢?断除’等。这里所说的断除,仅指镇伏,而非正断。为说明此点,接着说‘遣除’等;这是以镇伏的方式来显示其含义。显示巴利原文
26.Itipīti iminā kāraṇena, ayonisomanasikārasamuṭṭhitattāpi lobhādisahagatattāpi kusalapaṭipakkhatopītiādīhi kāraṇehi ayaṃ vitakko akusaloti attho. Iminā nayena sāvajjotiādīsupi attho veditabbo. Ettha ca akusalotiādinā diṭṭhadhammikaṃ kāmavitakkassa ādīnavaṃ dasseti, dukkhavipākoti iminā samparāyikaṃ. Attabyābādhāya saṃvattatītiādīsupi imināva nayena ādīnavavibhāvanā veditabbā. Uppannassa kāmavitakkassa anadhivāsanaṃ nāma puna tādisassa anuppādanaṃ, taṃ panassa pahānaṃ vinodanaṃ byantikaraṇaṃ anabhāvagamananti ca vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’ti vatvā ‘‘pajahatī’’tiādi vuttanti tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘anadhivāsento kiṃ karotīti pajahatī’’tiādimāha. Pahānañcettha vikkhambhanameva, na samucchedoti dassetuṃ ‘‘vinodetī’’tiādi vuttanti vikkhambhanavaseneva attho dassito.
「欲寻思」:就相应与所缘而言,是与欲俱行的寻思。因此说「与欲相应的寻思」等。所谓「与欲相应」,即与称为欲贪的欲相应,并系着于称为事欲的所缘。「已生起、已生起」:这可能是指对这些恶寻思每次生起时的执取,或是无余的执取。就第一种意义,故说「刚生起」,意谓才一生起;为了显示无余执取的意义,则说「纵使生起百次」。「亲里寻思」:由于在家情感的依恋,对亲属生起「我们的亲属生活快乐、具足成就」之类的寻思。「地方寻思」:由于同样的在家情感的依恋,对地方生起「我们的地方食物丰足、谷物丰收、令人愉悦」之类的寻思。「不死寻思」:以为通过蹲踞勤苦等苦行折磨自身,未来自我便能快乐不死,与这种难行相关的、为了不死的寻思;或者以不死的观念为所缘,伴随不死矫乱见的寻思。也就是这个「不死」而且也是「寻思」,故称不死寻思。显示巴利原文
Kāmavitakkoti sampayogato ārammaṇato ca kāmasahagato vitakko. Tenāha ‘‘kāmapaṭisaṃyuttotakko’’tiādi. Kāmapaṭisaṃyuttoti hi kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena sampayutto vatthukāmasaṅkhātena paṭibaddho ca. Uppannuppanneti tesaṃ pāpavitakkānaṃ uppādāvatthāgahaṇaṃ vā kataṃ siyā anavasesaggahaṇaṃ vā. Tesu paṭhamaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘upannamatte’’ti, sampatijāteti attho. Anavasesaggahaṇaṃ byāpanicchāya hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘satakkhattumpi uppanne’’ti vuttaṃ. Ñātivitakkoti ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātayo sukhajīvino sampattiyuttā’’tiādinā gehassitapemavasena ñātake ārabbha uppannavitakko. Janapadavitakkoti ‘‘amhākaṃ janapado subhikkho sampannasasso ramaṇīyo’’tiādinā gehassitapemavaseneva janapadaṃ ārabbha uppannavitakko. Ukkuṭikappadhānādīhi dukkhe nijjiṇṇe samparāye attā sukhī hoti amaroti dukkarakārikāya paṭisaṃyutto amaratthāya vitakko, taṃ vā ārabbha amarāvikkhepadiṭṭhisahagato amaro ca so vitakko cāti amaravitakko. Parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyuttoti paresu upaṭṭhākādīsu sahanandikādivasena pavatto anuddayatāpatirūpako gehassitapemena paṭisaṃyutto vitakko. Lābhasakkārasilokapaṭisaṃyuttoti cīvarādilābhena ceva sakkārena ca kittisaddena ca ārammaṇakaraṇavasena paṭisaṃyutto. Anavaññattipaṭisaṃyuttoti ‘‘aho vata maṃ pare na avajāneyyuṃ, na heṭṭhā katvā maññeyyuṃ, pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garuṃ kareyyu’’nti uppannavitakko.
因为欲寻思的本质是欲的思惟,且在欲思惟的生起中最为殊胜,故具有欲的行相,因此说「在此,欲寻思即是欲漏」。其差别,即指欲漏的差别,意为与贪俱转。「遣除」:以此将欲寻思等从自相续中驱除,故名遣除,也就是精进。因此说「以名为精进防护的遣除」。显示巴利原文
Kāmavitakko kāmasaṅkappanasabhāvattā kāmasaṅkappapavattiyā sātisayattā ca kāmanākāroti āha ‘‘kāmavitakko panettha kāmāsavo’’ti. Tabbisesoti kāmāsavaviseso, rāgasahavuttīti adhippāyo. Kāmavitakkādike vinodeti attano santānato nīharati etenāti vinodanaṃ, vīriyanti āha ‘‘vīriyasaṃvarasaṅkhātena vinodanenā’’ti.
关于应该通过修习去断除的漏的解释显示巴利原文
Bhāvanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
27 27. 由于「修习、多修习七觉支,能圆满明解脱」这一说法,不能通达明解脱且不能超越整个轮回之苦,此是不修习的过患;反之,以成为世尊的亲生子等方式,则是修习的功德,当知。所谓「上三道刹那所生」,是指在第二道等刹那中生起,由于修习的增上而属第二道等所摄的意思。难道那些不是出世间吗?为何作这样的简别?这并非简别,而是应被简别者,指的正是出世间觉支,且它们是上三道刹那所生。关于觉支,为了不导致迷乱,即对观、禅那、道、果这些觉支,为了无迷乱的意义。因为当以杂合方式宣说觉支时,会以显示彼分等远离之相来分别说明观觉支等,并非只说明所生起的出世间觉支,故在觉支中不会产生迷乱,并且觉支修习的实践之道已完全开示。然而在此处,即此经中或此部分,因为修习道增上的缘故,唯应采用出世间的方式。显示巴利原文
27. ‘‘Satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiyo paripūrentī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.187) vacanato vijjāvimuttīnaṃ anadhigamo tato ca sakalavaṭṭadukkhānativatti abhāvanāya ādīnavo, vuttavipariyāyena bhagavato orasaputtabhāvādivasena ca bhāvanāya ānisaṃso veditabbo. Uparimaggattayasamayasambhūtāti dutiyādimaggakkhaṇe jātā, bhāvanādhikārato dutiyamaggādipariyāpannāti attho. Nanu ca te lokuttarā eva, kasmā visesanaṃ katanti? Nayidaṃ visesanaṃ, visesitabbaṃ panetaṃ, lokuttarabojjhaṅgā eva adhippetā, te ca kho uparimaggattayasamayasambhūtāti. Bojjhaṅgesu asammohatthanti vipassanājhānamaggaphalabojjhaṅgesu sammohābhāvatthaṃ. Missakanayena hi bojjhaṅgesu vuccamānesu tadaṅgādivivekadassanavasena vipassanābojjhaṅgādayo vibhajitvā vuccanti, na nibbattitalokuttarabojjhaṅgā evāti bojjhaṅgesu sammoho na hoti bojjhaṅgabhāvanāpaṭipattiyā ca sammadeva pakāsitattā. Idha panāti imasmiṃ sutte, imasmiṃ vā adhikāre. Lokuttaranayo eva gahetabbo bhāvanāmaggassa adhikatattā.
“最初的语句”是指“念觉支”等各处文句中,作为起始的那些语句。从词义上,即依差别与共通而释。从相、作用、现起等,即从相、作用、现起而说。按次第,即依顺序而说。无缺无增,即如其应有。这是为智者阐明。显示巴利原文
Ādipadānanti (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.418) ‘‘satisambojjhaṅga’’nti evamādīnaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vākye ādibhūtānaṃ padānaṃ. Atthatoti visesavasena sāmaññavasena ca padatthato. Lakkhaṇādīhīti lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānato. Kamatoti anupubbito. Anūnādhikatoti tāvattakato. Vibhāvināti viññunā.
在“念觉支”这一词中:以“忆念”的意义,即“随念”的意义。对于久远所作等种种所缘,前往并安住,或不舍弃地现前,即是“现前”。犹如不让水中的葫芦漂浮而去,而像安放石头一般,将不动之所缘稳固安置,这就是“忆持”,即令不忘失、不漂浮。这在《弥兰陀问经》中也已说过。“库藏官”即守护库藏者。他令不漂浮,即“令不漂浮”。这是那先长老所说的。与忘失相反的作用是“不忘失”,并非仅仅是忘失的不存在。以面向行境为现起,即以身体等所缘为面向而现起。显示巴利原文
Satisambojjhaṅgeti satisambojjhaṅgapade. Saraṇaṭṭhenāti anussaraṇaṭṭhena. Cirakatādibhedaṃ ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhānaṃ, anissajjanaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ. Udake alābu viya pilavitvā gantuṃ adatvā pāsāṇassa viya niccalassa ārammaṇassa ṭhapanaṃ sāraṇaṃ asammuṭṭhatākaraṇaṃ apilāpanaṃ. Vuttampi hetaṃ milindapañhe. Bhaṇḍāgārikoti bhaṇḍagopako. Apilāpe karoti apilāpeti. Therenāti nāgasenattherena. Sammosapaccanīkaṃ kiccaṃ asammoso, na sammosābhāvamattaṃ. Gocarābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānāti kāyādiārammaṇābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā.
在菩提之法的集合中,“支”指组成部分;或者,对于觉悟者即圣弟子而言,“支”意为原因。这在《瀑流渡经注》中有说明。显示巴利原文
Bodhiyā dhammasāmaggiyā, aṅgo avayavo, bodhissa vā ariyasāvakassa aṅgo kāraṇaṃ. Patiṭṭhānāyūhanā oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.1) –
依烦恼而执著,依造作而累积。依渴爱与邪见而执著,依其余烦恼与造作而累积。依渴爱而执著,依邪见而累积。依常见而执著,依断见而累积。依昏沉而执著,依掉举而累积。依耽著欲乐而执著,依自苦行而累积。依一切不善造作而执著,依一切世间善造作而累积。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kilesavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, abhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanā. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi patiṭṭhānaṃ, avasesakilesābhisaṅkhārehi āyūhanā. Taṇhāvasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, diṭṭhivasena āyūhanā. Sassatadiṭṭhiyā patiṭṭhānaṃ, ucchedadiṭṭhiyā āyūhanā. Līnavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, uddhaccavasena āyūhanā. Kāmasukhānuyogavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, attakilamathānuyogavasena āyūhanā. Sabbākusalābhisaṅkhāravasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, sabbalokiyakusalābhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanā’’ti –
在以上所说的种种方式中,此处应依未说者而了知。此中,所说的“菩提”即指“觉”,应如此连接。因为“觉”一词意为“醒觉”,故说“从烦恼的沉睡中醒来”。而此醒觉,就实际意义而言,即是通达四圣谛,或说为亲证涅槃,因此说“四圣谛”等。如同“禅支”、“道支”等,这些支即是禅那、圣道本身,并非在支之外别有他物,此处也是如此。又如“军支”、“车支”等,以此显示补特伽罗施设只是假名安立。显示巴利原文
Vuttesu pakāresu idha avuttānaṃ vasena veditabbā. Yā hi ayaṃ bodhīti vuccatīti yojetabbaṃ . ‘‘Bujjhatī’’ti padassa paṭibujjhatīti atthoti āha ‘‘kilesasantānaniddāya uṭṭhahatī’’ti. Taṃ pana paṭibujjhanaṃ atthato catunnaṃ saccānaṃ paṭivedho, nibbānasseva vā sacchikiriyāti āha ‘‘cattārī’’tiādi. Jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viyāti yathā aṅgāni eva jhānamaggā, na aṅgavinimuttā, evamidhāpīti attho. Senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viyāti etena puggalapaññattiyā avijjamānapaññattibhāvaṃ dasseti.
“因为能导向觉悟,故称觉支”——这是将“支”字作“原因”义而说的。而“觉悟者即是觉,觉即是支,故称觉支”——这是说“因为觉悟,故称觉支”。“随觉”是指,对于观等能觉之因与所觉之谛,随顺而觉。“对觉”是指,从烦恼的沉睡中醒来,或以现前亲证的方式面对于觉。“正觉”是指,以无颠倒的方式正确地觉悟。如此,应见诸前缀所表示的特殊含义。因为“觉”这一词,是将一切特殊的觉悟总括起来而安立的。显示巴利原文
Bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgāti idaṃ kāraṇattho aṅga-saddoti katvā vuttaṃ. Bujjhantīti bodhiyo, bodhiyo eva aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ ‘‘bujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Anubujjhantīti vipassanādīnaṃ kāraṇānaṃ bujjhitabbānañca saccānaṃ anurūpaṃ bujjhanti. Paṭibujjhantīti kilesaniddāya uṭṭhahanato paccakkhabhāvena vā paṭimukhaṃ bujjhanti. Sambujjhantīti aviparītabhāvena sammā ca bujjhanti. Evaṃ upasaggānaṃ atthavisesadīpanatā daṭṭhabbā. Bodhi-saddo hi sabbavisesayuttaṃ bujjhanaṃ sāmaññena gahetvā ṭhito.
「择」是指以「这是苦」等方式进行审察。「光照」诸法,即破除遮蔽诸法如实自性的迷乱,如同光明破除黑暗。当某法存在时即名为「英雄」,那法即是「英雄状态」。「应发动」,即应当令其转起。当趋于懈怠一边、将要下堕时,以不给懈怠机会的方式策励相应法,即是「策励」。「支持」,即给予辅助力量。「沉没」,即陷入迟钝状态;与之相反,应知是「不沉没」。「喜」,即使之满足或令之增长。「遍满」,即通过殊胜微妙之触而遍满全身。「满足」,即名为喜。「昂扬」,即「欣悦」,意为身心被提升。「平息身心之粗重」,即平息并调伏身之粗重与心之粗重。此处的「身」,指受、想、行三蕴。「粗重」即躁动,是对以掉举等烦恼为因的苦、忧等,或以这些为主的四蕴的假名。应知其(轻安)是与掉举等烦恼相对立的状态,因此这里的「轻安」即是一种无躁动、清凉的状态,因其无躁动之故。所以世尊说:「身轻安,无躁动。」(《中部》1.52)显示巴利原文
Vicinātīti ‘‘tayidaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā vīmaṃsati. Obhāsanaṃ dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvapaṭicchādakassa sammohassa viddhaṃsanaṃ yathā āloko andhakārassa. Yasmiṃ dhamme sati vīro nāma hoti, so dhammo vīrabhāvo. Īrayitabbatoti pavattetabbato. Kosajjapakkhato patituṃ appadānavasena sampayuttānaṃ paggaṇhanaṃ paggaho. Upatthambhanaṃ anubalappadānaṃ. Osīdanaṃ layāpatti, tappaṭipakkhato anosīdanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pīṇayatīti tappeti vaḍḍheti vā. Pharaṇaṃ paṇītarūpehi kāyassa byāpanaṃ. Tuṭṭhi nāma pīti. Udaggabhāvo odagyaṃ, kāyacittānaṃ ukkhipananti attho. Kāyacittadarathapassambhanatoti kāyadarathassa cittadarathassa ca passambhanato vūpasamanato. Kāyoti cettha vedanādayo tayo khandhā. Daratho sārambho, dukkhadomanassapaccayānaṃ uddhaccādikilesānaṃ, tappadhānānaṃ vā catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uddhaccādikilesapaṭipakkhabhāvo daṭṭhabbo, evañcettha passaddhiyā aparipphandanasītibhāvo daṭṭhabbo asāraddhabhāvato. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘passaddho kāyo asāraddho’’ti (ma. ni. 1.52).
「等持」是指妥善安放、令心稳定。「不散乱」是指相应法不散乱的状态;由于那种法,使得相应法成为不散乱的,因而那种法即是「不散乱」。「不散逸」,是指自身有不散逸的特性。「聚集」,是指令相应法成为不分散的状态,如同水令沐浴粉末聚合一般。「以心住为现起」,即如所说「心之安住」,以心的相续安住为其现起。「中舍」是指处于不偏不倚的状态。此处的「舍」即指舍觉支。对于平等转起的诸法,它随再生而观察、以彼相而转起,故有「简择相」;如此,由于舍的作用特别强,故说「简择、停止、执取中的中舍性」,也就是行舍。作为令相应法各自依其作用而平等转起的缘,即是「等运」。作为令心不消沉、不掉举而转起的缘,即是制止过度与不足。「它有断除偏执的作用」——意思是,它像是切断了导致相应法不能平等转起的偏袒倾向。中舍,即是中道的状态。显示巴利原文
Samādhānatoti sammā cittassa ādhānato ṭhapanato. Avikkhepo sampayuttānaṃ avikkhittatā, yena sasampayuttā dhammā avikkhittā honti, so dhammo avikkhepoti. Avisāro attano eva avisaraṇasabhāvo. Sampiṇḍanaṃ sampayuttānaṃ avippakiṇṇabhāvāpādanaṃ nhānīyacuṇṇānaṃ udakaṃ viya. Cittaṭṭhitipaccupaṭṭhānoti ‘‘cittassa ṭhitī’’ti (dha. sa. 11) vacanato cittassa pabandhaṭhitipaccupaṭṭhāno. Ajjhupekkhanatoti udāsīnabhāvato. Sāti bojjhaṅgaupekkhā . Samappavatte dhamme paṭisañcikkhati upapattito ikkhati tadākārā hutvā pavattatīti paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇā, evañca katvā ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā gahaṇe majjhattatā’’ti upekkhākiccādhimattatāya saṅkhārupekkhā vuttā. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ yathāsakakiccakaraṇavasena samaṃ pavattanapaccayatā samavāhitā. Alīnānuddhatappavattipaccayatā ūnādhikatānivāraṇaṃ. Sampayuttānaṃ asamappavattihetukapakkhapātaṃ upacchindantī viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pakkhapātupacchedarasā’’ti. Ajjhupekkhanameva majjhattabhāvo.
在一切消沉边与掉举边的状态中,它都存在、应被希求、应被渴望,故名「一切处所需」,这正是指那种一切处所需的特性。在同一刹那俱起的七觉支中,或依言语次第先后解说时,为何不先说其他任何一支,而首先阐述「念觉支」呢?原因就在于念觉支对所有的觉支都有帮助,因此注释者才这样解说道:「对所有的」等等。这里所说的「所有的」,是指属于消沉边与掉举边的心;否则,若从另一角度而言,实则一切觉支彼此都是互为条件的关系。显示巴利原文
Sabbasmiṃ līnapakkhe uddhaccapakkhe ca atthikā patthanīyā icchitabbāti sabbatthikā, taṃ sabbatthikaṃ. Samānakkhaṇapavattīsu sattasupi sambojjhaṅgesu vācāya kamappavattito paṭipāṭiyā vattabbesu yaṃ kiñci paṭhamaṃ avatvā satisambojjhaṅgasseva paṭhamaṃ vacanassa kāraṇaṃ sabbesaṃ upakārakattanti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbesa’’ntiādi. Sabbesanti ca līnuddhaccapakkhikānaṃ, aññathā sabbepi sabbesaṃ paccayāti.
有人问难:「为何只说七觉支?」提问者怀疑信、欲等是否也应为觉支。另一人则通过显示唯有念等对修习才有助益,而这样回答:「因为它们是昏沉与掉举的对立面,且于一切处皆为必需」等。其中,「昏沉之心」是指由于精进过于软弱等,尚未进入修习之流而蜷缩的心。此时,不应修习轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支。因为以这些对治彼心,便如同往小火中投入湿草等物,难以令火炽盛。因此世尊说:「诸比丘,譬如有人欲令小火燃烧,却投入湿草等物……」等等(《相应部》5.234)。然而,此时应当修习择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支。因为这些觉支能令昏沉的心,犹如往小火中加入干草等物,很容易使其振奋。因此才说:「而于彼种情况……」等等。在这里,应知择法觉支等的修习,是依各自相应的食而进行的。因为经中这样说:「诸比丘,有善与不善法……乃至……能助喜觉支增长……」(《相应部》5.232)。于彼处,通过对诸法自相与共相洞察而运作的如理作意…显示巴利原文
‘‘Kasmā satteva bojjhaṅgā vuttā’’ti codako saddhālobhādīnampi bojjhaṅgabhāvaṃ āsaṅkati, itaro satiādīnaṃyeva bhāvanāya upakārataṃ dassento ‘‘līnuddhaccapaṭipakkhato sabbatthikato cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha līnassāti atisithilavīriyatādīhi bhāvanāvīthiṃ anotaritvā saṃkuṭitassa cittassa. Tadā hi passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgā na bhāvetabbā. Tañhi etehi allatiṇādīhi viya paritto aggi dussamuṭṭhāpiyaṃ hotīti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyyā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgā pana bhāvetabbā, sukkhatiṇādīhi viya paritto aggi līnaṃ cittaṃ etehi susamuṭṭhāpiyaṃ hotīti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmiñca kho’’tiādi. Tattha yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā…pe… pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya…pe… saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232). Tattha sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasena pavattamanasikāro…pe… dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma.
「掉举之心」指因精进过度等,未能进入清凉、安住状态的心。此时,不应修习择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支。因为以这些觉支对治彼心,便如同往大火堆中投入干草等物,极难令其平息。因此世尊说:「诸比丘,譬如有人欲灭大火堆,却投入干草等物……」(《相应部》5.234)。然而,此时应当修习轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支。因为这些觉支能令掉举的心,犹如往大火堆中加入湿草等物,极容易令其平息。因此才说「而于某情况……」等。在这里,同样应知轻安觉支等的修习,是依各自相应的食而进行的。因为经中这样说:「诸比丘,有身轻安、心轻安……乃至……能助舍觉支增长……」(《相应部》5.232)。于彼处,对于轻安等过去已生起的状态,通过留意其相状,以令其生起的方式如理作意,这便称为修习轻安觉支等。然而,念觉支于一切处皆有大利益。因为此念觉支能守护心:不因沉滞一类法(如轻安等)而陷于迟钝,也不因掉举一类法(如择法等)而陷入掉举。所以它如同盐…显示巴利原文
Uddhaccassāti cittassa accāraddhavīriyatādīhi sītibhāvapatiṭṭhitabhāvaṃ anotiṇṇatāya, tadā dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgā na bhāvetabbā. Tañhi etehi sukkhatiṇādīhi viya aggikkhandho duvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyyā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgā pana bhāvetabbā, allatiṇādīhi viya aggikkhandho uddhataṃ cittaṃ etehi suvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmiñca kho’’tiādi. Etthāpi yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena passaddhisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kāyapassaddhi cittapassaddhi…pe… upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232). Tattha yathāssa passaddhiādayo uppannapubbā, taṃ ākāraṃ sallakkhetvā tesaṃ uppādanavasena tathā manasikarontova passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma. Satisambojjhaṅgo pana sabbattha bahūpakāro. So hi cittaṃ līnapakkhikānaṃ passaddhiādīnaṃ vasena layāpattito, uddhaccapakkhikānañca dhammavicayādīnaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato rakkhati, tasmā so loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu sabbakammikaamacco viya ca rājakiccesu sabbattha icchitabbo. Tenāha ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).
「了知已,即应了知」(ñatvā ñātabbā)——此是句子的连结(《相应部注疏》1.1.129)。所谓「增长」(vaḍḍhi),是指变得广大、倍增、一再地生起,故说「令再三地生起」。令其达到殊胜的增长,即是令其产生。「远离性」(vivittatā),指远离的状态。凡是因可远离而被远离者,以及远离之后而安住者,此二者在此,以远离状态的共称而被称为「远离性」。其中,前者是因可远离而正处于被远离的状态,即具足那名为「远离」的能离作用,此一法聚正是因此能离作用本身而被执取为「远离」。后者则是在一切方面彻底远离的自性。在此,当念觉支于某一法聚中,通过能离作用而运作时,它即依于前述以「正在被远离的状态」为内涵的「远离」而生起;而其余的法聚,则是以倾注于彼、以彼为所缘而运作,因此说为「依于远离」(viveke nissita)。又或者,如同依止远离之力而生起的禅那被称为「远离所生」(vivekaja)一样,依止远离之力而生起的觉支,应视为「依于远离」。显示巴利原文
Ñatvā ñātabbāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.129) sambandho. Vaḍḍhi nāma vepullaṃ bhiyyobhāvo punappunaṃ uppādo evāti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ janetī’’ti. Abhivuddhiṃ pāpento nibbatteti. Vivittatāti vivittabhāvo. Yo hi vivecanīyato viviccati, yaṃ viviccitvā ṭhitaṃ, tadubhayaṃ idha vivittabhāvasāmaññena ‘‘vivittatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tesu purimo vivecanīyato viviccamānatāya vivekasaṅkhātāya viviccanakiriyāya samaṅgī dhammasamūho tāya eva viviccanakiriyāya vasena vivekoti gahito. Itaro sabbaso tato tato vivittasabhāvatāya. Tattha yasmiṃ dhammapuñje satisambojjhaṅgo viviccanakiriyāya pavattati, taṃ yathāvuttāya viviccamānatāya vivekasaṅkhātaṃ nissāyeva pavattati, itaraṃ pana tanninnatātadārammaṇatāhīti vuttaṃ ‘‘viveke nissita’’nti. Yathā vā vivekavasena pavattaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘vivekaja’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ vivekavasena pavatto bojjhaṅgo ‘‘vivekanissito’’ti daṭṭhabbo. Nissayaṭṭho ca vipassanāmaggānaṃ vasena maggaphalānaṃ veditabbo. Asatipi pubbāparabhāve ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādā’’ti ettha paccayānaṃ samuppādanaṃ viya abhinnadhammādhārā nissayanabhāvanā sambhavantīti. Ayamevāti viveko eva. Viveko hi pahānavinayavirāganirodhā ca samānatthā.
在说明了依止彼分远离、正断远离、出离远离之后,并未提到依止寂止远离,这是因为此处所说的是「修习念觉支」等应修习的觉支。因为对于所修习的觉支而言,应当被证得的果觉支,其作用正是寂止远离。出于意乐,即出于「我将证悟涅槃」这样的大意乐。即使是在观的一刹那,心虽以诸行为所缘,但因透彻见到诸行的过患,心便倾向于其对立的涅槃,依于意乐而依止出离远离,犹如被热恼所逼迫的人内心倾向清凉。以观为基础的遍所缘等禅那中的念等,并不被排斥,因为它们可作为抉择分。然而,不同于观,禅那并非菩提的亲近因,也不是那样绝对的决定因;禅那的作用也不像观的作用那样,其完成即是道,因此不特别举出。此处,以遍为例,也应看到依于它的无色定,因为它们也是观的基础、抉择分;这可以这样说,因为确实有趋向于彼的状态存在。因为,既然有了趣向涅槃的状态,也就有了趣向果的状态,正如「我何时才能证入并安住于彼处?」这样的语句,也证明了此义。显示巴利原文
Tadaṅgasamucchedanissaraṇavivekanissitataṃ vatvā paṭipassaddhivivekanissitatāya avacanaṃ ‘‘satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādinā bhāvetabbānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ idha vuttattā. Bhāvitabbojjhaṅgassa hi ye sacchikātabbā phalabojjhaṅgā, tesaṃ kiccaṃ paṭipassaddhiviveko. Ajjhāsayatoti ‘‘nibbānaṃ sacchikarissāmī’’ti mahantaajjhāsayato. Yadipi vipassanākkhaṇe saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ, saṅkhāresu pana ādīnavaṃ suṭṭhu disvā tappaṭipakkhe nibbāne adhimuttatāya ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitatā dāhābhibhūtassa puggalassa sītaninnacitattā viya. Na paṭisiddhā vipassanāpādakesu kasiṇārammaṇādijhānesu satiādīnaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyattā. Anuddharantā pana vipassanā viya bodhiyā maggassa āsannakāraṇaṃ jhānaṃ na hoti, nāpi tathā ekantikaṃ kāraṇaṃ, na ca vipassanākiccassa viya jhānakiccassa niṭṭhānaṃ maggoti katvā na uddharanti. Ettha ca kasiṇaggahaṇena tadāyattāni āruppānipi gahitānīti daṭṭhabbāni. Tānipi hi vipassanāpādakāni nibbedhabhāgiyāni ca hontīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati tanninnabhāvasabbhāvato. Yadaggena hi nibbānaninnatā, tadaggena phalaninnatāpi siyā. ‘‘Kudāssu nāmāhaṃ tadāyatanaṃ upasampajja vihareyya’’nti (ma. ni. 1.465) ādivacanampetassa atthassa sādhakaṃ.
「舍离」一词有「舍弃」与「跃入」两义,因此说舍离有两种。因为舍离既是断除,也是以无所牵挂、无顾虑的状态持续运行;所以,在观智刹那,是以彼分断的方式舍离;在圣道刹那,则是以正断的方式舍离,这就是对敌对法的断除。同样,在观智刹那,是以心倾向于彼的方式;在圣道刹那,则是以取彼为所缘的方式,由于那种全然无顾虑的状态,便成为舍离。应当这样来理解。所谓「按照所说的方式」,就是指依彼分断与正断的方式,以及心倾向于彼、取彼为所缘的方式。因为前面已经解释过舍离一词的含义,所以说「用完整的语句」。「pariṇamantaṃ」指的是在观智刹那正在转变;「pariṇataṃ」则指在圣道刹那已经转变。所谓转变,就是成熟的意思,因此说「正在成熟的和已经成熟的」。这里的成熟,是指通过反复修习获得力量,烦恼变得可被彻底舍弃并跃入涅槃的那种锋利而清净鲜明的状态。所以接下来说「因为这个」等等。此中的道理——也就是在念觉支中以「依彼分远离」等方式所说明的——在其余的法择觉支等诸觉支中,也依照这个理路类推适用。显示巴利原文
Vossagga-saddo pariccāgattho pakkhandanattho cāti vossaggassa duvidhatā vuttā. Vossajjanañhi pahānaṃ, vissaṭṭhabhāvena nirāsaṅkapavati ca, tasmā vipassanākkhaṇe tadaṅgavasena, maggakkhaṇe samucchedavasena paṭipakkhassa pahānaṃ vossaggo, tathā vipassanākkhaṇe tanninnabhāvena, maggakkhaṇe ārammaṇakaraṇena vissaṭṭhasabhāvato vossaggoti veditabbaṃ. Yathāvuttena pakārenāti tadaṅgasamucchedapakārena tanninnatadārammaṇakaraṇapakārena ca. Pubbe vossagga-padasseva atthassa vuttattā āha ‘‘sakalena vacanenā’’ti. Pariṇamantaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe, pariṇataṃ maggakkhaṇe. Pariṇāmo nāma paripākoti āha ‘‘paripaccantaṃ paripakkañcā’’ti. Paripāko ca āsevanalābhena āhitasāmatthiyassa kilesassa pariccajituṃ nibbānañca pakkhandituṃ tikkhavisadasabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi. Esa nayoti yvāyaṃ ‘‘tadaṅgavivekanissita’’ntiādinā satisambojjhaṅge vutto, sesesu dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīsupi esa nayoti evaṃ tattha netabbanti attho.
以上,为了让初学行者在诸觉支中不致迷乱,已经讲说了混杂的方法。现在,为了阐明已经证得的出世间觉支的义理,接着说「然而在此处」等等。「然而在此处」,指的是在这部《一切漏经》当中。只有圣道本身才是以舍离而转变的,因为这里所指的,正是作为修道一部分的圣道。而那个念觉支,就「以正断而言」,意思是从断除烦恼的角度来说的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ādikammikānaṃ bojjhaṅgesu asammohatthaṃ missakanayaṃ vatvā idāni nibbattitalokuttarabojjhaṅgavasena atthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idha panāti imasmiṃ sabbāsavasuttante. Maggo eva vossaggavipariṇāmī bhāvanāmaggassa idha adhippetattā. Tañca khoti satisambojjhaṅgaṃ. Samucchedatoti samucchindanato.
由于「见漏」为初道所断,经中便说「三漏」。这些诸漏亦应知为非堕恶趣者,因为能令堕恶趣的烦恼在见道阶段即已断除。虽然觉支大多指称圣道,但此处是就各处觉支自性的道法,分别说为与三道相应的觉支。「觉支的修习」一词即统摄这些,因此注释说「与三道相应」。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhāsavassa paṭhamamaggavajjhattā ‘‘tayo āsavā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tepi anapāyagamanīyā eva veditabbā apāyagamanīyānaṃ dassaneneva pahīnattā. Satipi sambojjhaṅgānaṃ yebhuyyena maggabhāve tattha tattha sambojjhaṅgasabhāvānaṃ maggadhammānaṃ vasena vuttamaggattayasampayuttā bojjhaṅgāti paccekabojjhaṅge ‘‘bojjhaṅgabhāvanāyā’’ti iminā gaṇhanto ‘‘maggattayasampayuttāyā’’ti āha.
28 「称赞」:由于断除诸漏极为难行,他们以此难行之事赞叹那位比丘。「阿拉汉的」:指已断尽诸漏的比丘。「功德」:是从斩断渴爱等开始,最终达到苦的彻底灭尽——这样的利益。「以这些」:即通过上述略举的断除等功德项目。「激发精勤」:意思是,连法主世尊都如此称叹,且漏尽的功德极其巨大,因此生起带有殷重心的精进力。「仅由见即可断除的」:指那些只凭见道便能断除的烦恼。正因如此,才说「并非于未断除的烦恼上生起已断除之想」。显示巴利原文
28.Thomentoti āsavappahānassa sudukkarattā tāya eva dukkarakiriyāya taṃ abhitthavanto. Assāti pahīnāsavabhikkhuno. Ānisaṃsanti taṇhācchedādidukkhakkhayapariyosānaṃ udrayaṃ. Etehi pahānādisaṃkittanehi. Ussukkaṃ janentoti evaṃ dhammassāmināpi abhitthavanīyaṃ mahānisaṃsañca āsavappahānanti tattha ādarasahitaṃ ussāhaṃ uppādento. Dassaneneva pahīnāti dassanena pahīnā eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na appahīnesuyeva pahīnasaññī’’ti.
以「一切」一词关联诸漏及防护诸漏,应知由此形成了第二种与第一种解释的差别。「以见现观」:即通过遍知现观,圆满达成了遍知的作用。因此说「依作用」,意思是无有愚痴地通达。「积聚」指身体,或有身。显示巴利原文
Sabba-saddena āsavānaṃ, āsavasaṃvarānañca sambandhavasena dutiyapaṭhamavikappānaṃ bhedo daṭṭhabbo. Dassanābhisamayāti pariññābhisamayā pariññākiccasiddhiyā. Tenāha ‘‘kiccavasenā’’ti, asammohapaṭivedhenāti attho. Samussayo kāyo, attabhāvo vā.
与无过失的喜和悦相伴的心,因能带来真舍利益,故堪称为“自己的”;与之相反的心不能带来利益,则不配此名。据此,针对喜相应的心,说“自意者,即自己的意”,进而说“欢喜意”。“自意者”又可理解为被喜和悦所执持的心。然而,因为被他们所执持即是与他们相应,故又说“或者指与喜、悦相应之意”。在这些解释中,有些地方未在义理上作详细分别,应知这是由于依前述理路即可明了,或本身易于理解的缘故。显示巴利原文
Anavajjapītisomanassasahitaṃ cittaṃ ‘‘attano’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati atthāvahattā, na tabbiparītaṃ anatthāvahattāti pītisampayuttacittataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘attamanāti sakamanā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘tuṭṭhamanā’’ti. Attamanāti vā pītisomanassehi gahitamanā. Yasmā pana tehi gahitatā sampayuttatāva, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pītisomanassehi vā sampayuttamanā’’ti. Yadettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ vuttanayattā suviññeyyattā cāti veditabbaṃ.
《一切漏经》注释中,对隐微深奥之义的阐明,到此圆满。显示巴利原文
Sabbāsavasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
《法嗣经》的注释显示巴利原文
3. Dhammadāyādasuttavaṇṇanā
29 “因此,显示了彼”的意思是:因为先显示经的安立再解说注释,注释便会清晰;又因这部《法嗣经》的安立是缘起而生,所以“显示了彼安立之后,再加以解说”即为此义。对于“利养恭敬”(lābhasakkāre)一词,有些注释者说是指以利养恭敬为因的因缘;另一些则说,是指在利养恭敬中的因缘。当时,正是以利养恭敬为因,在比丘们中生起了资具丰盛的情形,世尊即以此事为因缘,开示了这部经。“双重大云”(yamakamahāmegho):指那种向下低垂、向上涌起,形成百层、千层的成对大云。当世尊在某处久住时,它们便停驻彼处;世尊游行时,它们亦随行。由于比丘们大多在百劫乃至更长的时间里,圆满了布施巴拉密的积聚,故那时生起了极大的利养恭敬,因此说:“比丘僧团也是如此”(evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassapī)。显示巴利原文
29.Tasmātaṃ dassetvāti yasmā suttantavaṇṇanā suttanikkhepaṃ dassetvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, yasmā cassa dhammadāyādasuttassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo, tasmā taṃ nikkhepaṃ dassetvā, kathetvāti attho. Lābhasakkāreti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.63) lābhasakkārasaṅkhātāya aṭṭhuppattiyāti keci, lābhasakkāre vā aṭṭhuppattiyāti apare. Yā hi lābhasakkāranimittaṃ tadā bhikkhūsu paccayabāhullikatā jātā, taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā bhagavā imaṃ desesīti. Yamakamahāmeghoti heṭṭhāolambanaupariuggamanavasena satapaṭalo sahassapaṭalo yugaḷamahāmegho. Tiṭṭhanti ceva bhagavati katthaci nibaddhavāsaṃ vasante, cārikaṃ pana gacchante anubandhanti ca. Bhikkhūnampi yebhuyyena kappasatasahassaṃ tato bhiyyopi pūritadānapāramisañcayattā tadā mahālābhasakkāro uppajjīti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassapī’’ti.
“被恭敬”(sakkato):指受到了恭敬。“被尊重”(garukato):指受到了尊重。“被看重”(mānito):指被高度珍视,且心生喜爱。“被供奉”(pūjito):指以花鬘等供养及四种资具的最上供奉而得到供养。“被礼敬”(apacito):指受到了敬礼。具体而言:若有人恭敬备办殊胜精良的四资具奉施于人,此人即是“被恭敬的”。若人于彼生起尊重心而行布施,此人即是“被尊重的”。若人心中喜爱且至为看重,此人即是“被看重的”。若人行了上述一切供养,此人即是“被供奉的”。若人见彼来,起立迎接、合掌作礼等,行最高恭敬,此人即是“被礼敬的”。世间对世尊及比丘僧团,正是如此而为。故说:“那时,诸资具……”等等。“达到了利养和称誉的顶峰”(lābhaggayasaggapattaṃ):指达到了利养之顶和称誉之顶。显示巴利原文
Sakkatoti sakkārappato. Garukatoti garukārappatto. Mānitoti bahumato manasā piyāyito ca. Pūjitoti mālādipūjāya ceva catupaccayābhipūjāya ca pūjito. Apacitoti apacāyanappatto. Yassa hi cattāro paccaye sakkatvāpi abhisaṅkhate paṇītapaṇīte upanenti, so sakkato. Yasmiṃ garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā te denti, so garukato. Yaṃ manasā piyāyanti bahumaññanti ca, so bahumato. Yassa sabbametaṃ pūjāvasena karonti, so pūjito. Yassa abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānañjalikammādivasena paramanipaccakāraṃ karonti, so apacito. Bhagavati bhikkhusaṅghe ca loko evaṃ paṭipanno. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti. Lābhaggayasaggapattanti lābhassa ca yasassa ca aggaṃ ukkaṃsaṃ pattaṃ.
“看重资具的人”:衣服等资具是他们所应看重的,意指贪著世间利益者。“资具丰盛者”:他们贪求、执著于资具,为获得丰厚资具而行,故得此称。即便是世尊,也是通过观察这些比丘平素的行止而得以了知;若非如此,不明显的状况便不会为世尊所知。“法之悚惧”:指由于思惟法的自性而生起的、伴有惭愧的智慧。但在此处,应理解为因比丘们看重利养等非法状态而生起的悚惧。“做沙门之法”:意为履行沙门的本分。“那个”:指关于法嗣的教导。“全身镜”:能照出全身影像,因此是适合用来观察整个身体的镜子。显示巴利原文
Paccayā cīvarādayo garukātabbā etesanti paccayagarukā, āmisacakkhukāti attho. Paccayesu giddhā gadhitā paccayānaṃ bahulabhāvāya paṭipannāti paccayabāhulikā. Bhagavatopi pākaṭā ahosi pakaticārittavasenāti adhippāyo aññathā apākaṭasseva abhāvato. Dhammasabhāvacintāvasena pavattaṃ sahottappañāṇaṃ dhammasaṃvego, idha pana so bhikkhūnaṃ lābhagarutādhammavasena veditabbo. Samaṇadhammavuttīti samaṇadhammakaraṇaṃ. Sāti dhammadāyādadesanā. Paṭibimbadassanavasena sabbakāyassa dassanayoggo ādāsoti sabbakāyikaādāso.
“嗣子”:父亲的遗产,本应由父亲赐予,儿子从父亲处继承。他们以具备资格的身份领受,故称“嗣子”,也就是儿子。在世间,这指的是物质利益;而在教法中,也有法。世尊排除了那些有过失、不导向解脱的教法,开示了导向解脱、无过失的教法,以此来教导比丘们,因此他说:“比丘们,你们要作我的法嗣,莫作财嗣。”“作我的法嗣”:意思是深入我的法,成为法之份额的所有者。如后文所说:“唯是法之份额的所有者。”“被产生的法”:指通过无杂染、无上等法的通性而确定的法。“迂回”:这个词的含义是,它通过变换自性来告知,因此称为“迂回”,意思是计谋或计谋的因。“非迂回法”:因为它没有这种迂回。证得道时,它彻底遮止了堕入恶趣等情况,故称为非迂回法。与之相反,即是“迂回法”:因为它……显示巴利原文
Pitu-dāyaṃ, tena dātabbaṃ, tato laddhabbaṃ arahabhāvena ādiyantīti dāyādā, puttā. Tañca loke āmisameva, sāsane pana dhammopīti tattha yaṃ sāvajjaṃ aniyyānikañca, taṃ paṭikkhipitvā, yaṃ niyyānikaṃ anavajjañca, tattha bhikkhū niyojento bhagavā avoca ‘‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’ti. Dhammassa me dāyādāti mama dhammassa ogāhino, dhammabhāgabhāginoti attho. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘dhammakoṭṭhāsasseva sāmino’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha.1.29). Nibbattitadhammoti asaṃkilesikānuttarādibhāvena dhammasāmaññato niddhāritadhammo. Pariyāyeti sabhāvato parivattetvā ñāpeti etenāti pariyāyo, leso, lesakāraṇaṃ vā. Tadabhāvato nippariyāyadhammo maggappattiyā apāyapatanādito accantameva vāraṇato. Itaro vuttavipariyāyato pariyāyadhammo accantaṃ apāyadukkhavaṭṭadukkhapātanato paramparāya vāraṇato. Yathā hi lokiyaṃ kusalaṃ dānasīlādi vivaṭṭaṃ uddissa nibbattitaṃ, ayaṃ taṃ asampādentampi taṃ sampāpakassa dhammassa nibbattakāraṇabhāvapariyāyena pariyāyadhammo nāma hoti, evaṃ taṃ vaṭṭaṃ uddissa nibbattitaṃ, yaṃ taṇhādīhi savisesaṃ āmasitabbato āmisanti loke pākaṭaṃ acchādanabhojanādi, tassa, taṃsadisassa ca phalavisesassa nimittabhāvapariyāyena pariyāyāmisanti vuccatīti dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ panidaṃ…pe… idaṃ pariyāyāmisaṃ nāmā’’ti.
“阿难,这整个梵行,就是那善友”(《相应部》5.2, 3)等语,由此,即便声闻弟子所证得的出世间法,也应说为属于导师,因此说:“非迂回法”也唯是世尊所有。对于声闻,法见之缘虽是如理作意的殊胜之缘,但从他人所闻的音声也依存于如来,所以他们证得的法,理应说是法主所有。因此说:“是由世尊……”等等。其中,“未生起的道”:指从迦叶世尊的教法消失之后,直到此佛陀出现之前,由于未证等觉而“未生起”的圣道。“令生起者”:即令其生起者。而世尊令道生起,不像独觉佛那样只在自身相续中,而是令于他相续中生起。为显示此义,而说:“未被了知之道的令了知者,未被宣说之道的宣说者”。那令道生起与了知,其意义即是知,因为它是无迷乱的证悟,所以说:“知道者、了知道者”。而其宣说,因极为善巧,所以说:“善巧于道者”。“追随导师所行的道而行,称为随道者”:因为他们正是随世尊很好地证得了那个道。“之后,从他人那里正确地、随顺地、一一到达而行持,因此是之后具足者”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sakalameva hidaṃ, ānanda, brahmacariyassa yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.2, 3) ādivacanato sāvakehi adhigatopi lokuttaradhammo satthuyevāti vattabbataṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘nippariyāyadhammopi bhagavatoyeva santako’’ti. Sāvakānañhi dhammadiṭṭhipaccayassapi yonisomanasikārassa visesapaccayo paratoghoso ca tathāgatādhīnoti tehi paṭividdhopi dhammo dhammassāminoyevāti vattuṃ yuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavatā hī’’tiādi. Tattha anuppannassa maggassāti kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti yāva imasmā buddhuppādā asambodhavasena na uppannassa ariyamaggassa. Uppādetāti nibbattetā. Taṃ panetaṃ maggassa bhagavato nibbattanaṃ, na paccekabuddhānaṃ viya sasantāneyeva, atha kho parasantānepīti dassetuṃ ‘‘asañjātassa maggassa sañjanetā,anakkhātassa maggassa akkhātā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tayidaṃ maggassa uppādanaṃ sañjānanañca atthato jānanaññeva asammohapaṭivedhabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘maggaññū maggavidū’’ti. Akkhānaṃ panassa sukusalabhāvenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘maggakovido’’ti. Satthārā yathāgataṃ maggaṃ anugacchantīti maggānugā bhagavato eva taṃ maggaṃ suṭṭhu adhigamanato. Pacchā parato sammā anu anu āgatā paṭipannāti pacchā samannāgatā.
「知者知」:依于一向有利益的修行,他如实了知所应了知之法,即应遍知等类别。 「见者见」:同样,他如实洞见所应洞见之法。 或者,「知者知」:他以一切知智如实了知应知的一切;因为他并非仅以部分智而能完全了知一切应知。 「见者见」:他以天眼、慧眼、法眼、佛眼及一切眼这五种眼,如实照见应见的一切。 又或者,「知者知」——其他怀有颠倒、宣称遍知欲与色的人,虽知却是以颠倒力而知;世尊则不如此。世尊已断颠倒,是知者即真知者;由于无有见的过失,是见者即真见者,这是它的含义。 「成为眼者」:由于世尊成就了慧眼,获得了它,又能令它在众生中生起,就引导正见这一义而言,他犹如世间之眼,所以确实成为眼。 「成为智者」也当同理理解。诸法是菩提分法,梵是圣道;由于他由这些法而生起,或者说获得、证得了这些法,又令它们于此世间生起,因此被称为「成为法者」「成为梵者」。 「说者」:因为他宣说四圣谛之法,故称「说者」。 「令转起者」:因为他长时令对谛的证悟得以持续运转。显示巴利原文
Jānaṃ jānātīti jānitabbameva abhiññeyyādibhedaṃ jānāti ekantahitapaṭipattito. Passaṃ passatīti tathā passitabbameva passati. Atha vā jānaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇena jānitabbaṃ jānātiyeva. Na hi padesañāṇena jānitabbaṃ sabbaṃ ekantato jānāti. Passaṃ passatīti dibbacakkhu paññācakkhu dhammacakkhu buddhacakkhu samantacakkhusaṅkhātehi pañcahi cakkhūhi passitabbaṃ passatiyeva. Atha vā jānaṃ jānātīti yathā aññe savipallāsā kāmarūpapariññāvādino jānantāpi vipallāsavasena jānanti, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana pahīnavipallāsattā jānanto jānātiyeva, diṭṭhidassanassa ca abhāvā passanto passatiyevāti attho. Cakkhubhūtoti paññācakkhumayattā tassa ca pattattā sattesu ca taduppādanato dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhena lokassa cakkhu viya bhūto. Ñāṇabhūtoti etassa ca evameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhammā bodhipakkhiyā, brahmā maggo, tehi uppannattā, tesaṃvā pattattā adhigatattā, lokassa ca taduppādanato ‘‘dhammabhūto,brahmabhūto’’ti ca veditabbo. Vattāti catusaccadhammaṃ vadatīti vattā. Ciraṃ saccappaṭivedhaṃ pavattento vadatīti pavattā. Atthassa ninnetāti dhammatāsaṅkhātaṃ paramatthaṃ nibbānañca niddhāretvā dassetā, pāpayitā vā. Amatassa dātāti amataṃ sacchikiriyaṃ sattesu uppādento amataṃ dadātīti amatassa dātā. Bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ tadāyattabhāvato dhammassāmī.
而那种涅槃的成就,这一切都由此获得;
福德的果报是乐,所愿皆得成就。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yā ca nibbānasampatti, sabbametena labbhati; Sukho vipāko puññānaṃ, adhippāyo samijjhati. (peṭako. 23);
与涅槃相连,给予一切成就者──显示巴利原文
Nibbānapaṭisaṃyutto, sabbasampattidāyako’’ti –
听闻世尊如是等教说之后,比丘们便了知布施等福德是依止于还灭的,而非以其他方式,因此说:「迂回法……获得」。若非世尊的话语,对于「这样的应受用」等如法的衣服等资具,比丘们连接受尚且不可能,何况受用?故说:「非迂回的利益……等等。」显示巴利原文
Evamādiṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ sutvā eva bhikkhū dānādipuññānaṃ vivaṭṭasannissayataṃ jānanti, na aññathāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyāyadhammopi…pe… paṭilabhatī’’ti. ‘‘Edisaṃ paribhuñcitabba’’nti kappiyassa ca cīvarādipaccayassa bhagavato vacanena vinā paṭiggahopi bhikkhūnaṃ na sambhavati, kuto paribhogoti āha ‘‘nippariyāyāmisampī’’tiādi.
「迂回的利益属于世尊」:由迂回的法属于世尊这一事实本身,即已阐明。而「正是显示『属于我』的状态」是关联句。「因此」:因为具有由自己支配的领受与接受,以及为自己所有的缘故。「在此处」:即在这法与利益之中。显示巴利原文
Pariyāyāmisassa bhagavato santakabhāvo pariyāyadhammassa tabbhāveneva dīpito. Tadeva sāmibhāvaṃ dassentoti sambandho. Tasmāti attādhīnapaṭilābhapaṭiggahatāya attano santakattā ca. Tatthāti tasmiṃ dhammāmise.
「以缘为最上者」:他的最高标准——即应达到的终极——乃是衣等资具之缘,而非超人法、少欲等,这就是「以缘为最上者」,意为以利得为重的比丘。「在爱欲生起之处」:即在这四种爱欲生起之处,如经中所说:「诸比丘!若比丘因衣而生起爱欲,当生起时即生起;因团食、坐卧具、或有此有、无此有之因缘而生起爱欲,当生起时即生起。」「少欲等」:指少欲、知足、严峻、远离等(超人法)。显示巴利原文
Paccayā cīvarādayo paramā pāpuṇitabbabhāvena uttamamariyādā etassa na uttarimanussadhammā appicchatādayo cāti paccayaparamo, lābhagarūti attho. Taṇhuppādesūti ‘‘cīvarahetu vā, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, piṇḍapātasenāsanaitibhavābhavahetu vā, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.311; a. ni. 4.9; itivu. 105) evaṃ vuttesu catūsu taṇhuppattikoṭṭhāsesu. Appicchatāsantuṭṭhisallekhapavivekādayo appicchatādayo.
「对此」:指对于那个教诫,或指对于那些接受法的比丘们;也可以连接为「或者对那些会……的比丘们」。在后一种情况中,「对此」应理解为「对于那个教诫」。「他的意图」:指对「因成为法之嗣子而将生起的真舍利益」的期盼,以及对「因成为财物之嗣子而将生起的无义」的观察。因此他说「他看见……」等等。「在此处绊倒在财物上者」:指那些以财物为因,行为走上邪路的人。「在过去时」:就是在迦叶正自觉者的时代。黄褐色比丘的事迹,应通过《黄褐色经》以及「僧伽帝衣也燃烧起来」等内容的《相经》加以说明。「他是以财物为重者」:应这样连接——就像因为价值低劣而失去光泽的伪币咖哈巴那一样,他以沙门的光辉无法闪耀,如同已熄灭、寂灭者的火炭一样没有了光辉。「从此」:指从以资具缘为重的状态起。「心已回转者」:就是心意已经逆转过来的人,意思是他走上了严峻少欲之道。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tasmiṃ ovāde, tesu vā dhammapaṭiggāhakesu bhikkhūsu. Bhavissati vā yesaṃ tatthāti yojanā. Imasmiṃ pakkhe tatthāti tasmiṃ ovāde icceva attho daṭṭhabbo. Adhippāyo āmisadāyādatāya uppajjanakaanatthānuppādassa dhammadāyādatāya uppajjanakaaṭṭhuppattiyā ca ākaṅkhā. Tenāha ‘‘passatī’’tiādi. Tattha āmise upakkhalitānanti āmisahetu vippaṭipannānaṃ. Atītakāleti kassapasammāsambuddhakāle. Kapilassa bhikkhuno vatthu kapilasuttena, ‘‘saṅghāṭipiādittā hotī’’tiādinā lakkhaṇasuttena (saṃ. ni. 2.218) ca vibhāvetabbaṃ. Āmisagaruko appagghabhāvena kūṭakahāpaṇo viya nittejo samaṇatejena anujjalato nibbutaṅgāro viya nippabho ca hotīti yojanā. Tatoti paccayagarukabhāvato. Vivattitacittoti vinivattitamānaso, sallekhavuttīti attho.
「法之嗣子」:这句话中已内含「唯」的限定含义。为阐明此限定词所排除的意义,故显示「不要成为财物之嗣子」这一遮止。同样,为阐明意图与利益,也显示了这一点;而且通过显示过患,也遮止了「成为法之嗣子」的反面。「应被指出」:即应被视为低下者,应被置于下方来说。「以……为始」:此处,由于前缀「ā」有「界限」之意,因此「以财物之嗣子的状态为始」意为:以「与法之嗣子状态相违的财物之嗣子状态」作为因,或作为工具,来对它进行辨析;这就是智者应当加以分别、明确确立的事。因此说法是「应将他们分别出来」。由此而说:「这是说:你们应被智者所呵责」。显示巴利原文
Dhammadāyādāti ettāvatā antogadhāvadhāraṇaṃ vacananti tena avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘mā āmisadāyādā’’ti paṭikkhepo dassito. Tatheva ca vibhāvetuṃ adhippāyānisaṃsavibhāvanesupi dassito, tathā ādīnavavibhāvanena dhammadāyādatāpaṭikkhepo. Apadisitabbāti heṭṭhā katvā vattabbāti. Ādiyāti ettha yasmā ā-kāro mariyādattho, tasmā dhammadāyādatāvidhurena āmisadāyādabhāvena hetubhūtena, karaṇabhūtena vā ādiyaṃ vivecanaṃ viññūhi visuṃ karaṇaṃ vavatthānassa hotīti āha ‘‘visuṃ kātabbā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘viññūhi gārayhā bhaveyyāthāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
“我对你们有慈悯……而非财物上的继承者”——这样宣告自己对诸比丘的悲悯,是为了柔和其心。而“我也是以此……”等语,更是在此基础上令其特别柔和,故说:“为令极为柔和其心”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi me tumhesu anukampā…pe… no āmisadāyādā’’ti bhikkhūsu attano karuṇāyanākittanaṃ tesaṃ mudukaraṇaṃ, ‘‘ahampi tenā’’tiādi pana tatopi savisesaṃ mudukaraṇanti āha ‘‘atīva mudukaraṇattha’’nti.
“那罗迦道等”:即指在《那罗迦经》(《经集》684-728)等经典中所说的行道。然而,由于这些是那罗迦长老等所行的、属于极为严峻少欲的、极其殊胜的行道,故在此被引来作为“法之嗣子”行道的例证。“作为证人”:指对于有些人,当说到那条行道时,他们不信地想“除我之外,哪里还有行道之人呢?”;为令他们亲眼得见,故举出这些行道作为证人。“在此句中”:指对于“诸比丘,你们是我的法之嗣子”等这样的句子。“其余的”:指“你们也是我的……”等在善的方面所说的原文。“以所说方式的对立面”:即通过与在恶的方面所说的“由彼法之嗣子的状态,而非财物之嗣子的状态”这一方式相反的方式。显示巴利原文
Nāḷakapaṭipadādayo nāḷakasuttādīsu (su. ni. 684-728) āgatapaṭipattiyo. Tā pana yasmā nāḷakattherādīhi paṭipannā paramasallekhavuttibhūtā atiukkaṭṭhapaṭipattiyo, tasmā idha dhammadāyādapaṭipadāya udāharaṇabhāvena uddhaṭā. Sakkhibhūtāti tāya paṭipattiyā vuccamānāya ‘‘kiṃ me vinā paṭipajjanako atthī’’ti asaddahantānaṃ paccakkhakaraṇena sakkhibhūtā. Imasminti ‘‘tumhe ca me bhikkhave dhammadāyādā’’tiādike vākye. Sesanti ‘‘tumhe ca me’’tiādikaṃ sukkapakkhe āgataṃ pāḷipadaṃ. Vuttanayapaccanīkenāti ‘‘tena dhammadāyādabhāvena no āmisadāyādabhāvenā’’ti evaṃ kaṇhapakkhe vuttanayassa paṭipakkhena.
30 “听到赞叹”:指听到对那位行道补特伽罗的称赞,如同听到对具足弟子众的具寿优波先那之行的戒德赞叹。“不变化词”:以此说明“在此地”一词在此并无实义。“被自恣了”:即被拒绝了。当一个人进食时,已因食物而饱足,将侍者呈上的食物拒绝了,他便被称为被那“已自恣者”所拒绝。故说:“‘被自恣了’的意思是……被说为”。“以种种方式见等而遮止”:用来令僧众等乞求、用来作食事等,这称为“自恣”,就是为了令犯戒清净而作的自我舍出、给予机会。然而,由于这多数被说为是“雨安居已竟者应作之事”,故特称为“雨安居自恣”。“用来令人对资具生起欲求”:这也称为“自恣”,即用衣等资具来作邀请。“与方式相应的遮止”:这称为“自恣”,指伴有“食事未完毕”等四个条件的拒绝进食。然而,由于这成为以“非残食”为缘的犯戒之因,故特称为“非残食自恣”。“足量食的自恣”即是“足量自恣”,意思是:对于已经完结的进食,拒绝被呈上的食物。显示巴利原文
30.Thomanaṃ sutvāti paṭipajjanakassa puggalassa pasaṃsanaṃ sutvā yathā taṃ saparisassa āyasmato upasenassa paṭipattiyā sīlathomanaṃ sutvā. Nipātapadanti iminā idha-saddassa anatthakatamāha. Pavāritoti paṭikkhepito. Yo hi bhuñjanto bhojanena titto parivesakena upanītabhojanaṃ paṭikkhipati, so tena pavāritena paṭikkhepito nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘pavāritoti…pe… vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Pakārehi diṭṭhādīhi vāreti saṅghādike yācāpeti bhatte karoti etāyāti pavāraṇā, āpattivisodhanāya attavossaggo okāsadānaṃ. Sā pana yasmā yebhuyyena vassaṃvutthehi kātabbā vuttā, tasmā ‘‘vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pavāreti paccaye icchāpeti etāyāti pavāraṇā, cīvarādīhi upanimantanā. Pakārayuttā vāraṇāti pavāraṇā, vippakatabhojanatādicaturaṅgasahito bhojanapaṭikkhepo. Sā pana yasmā anatirittabhojananimittāya āpattiyā kāraṇaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘anatirittapavāraṇā’’ti vuttā. Yāvadatthabhojanassa pavāraṇā yāvadatthapavāraṇā, pariyositabhojanassa upanītāhārapaṭikkhepoti attho.
“已食者”(bhuttāvī):从字面而言,此处意指食事已圆满者,故解释为“圆满者,即以食而圆满者”。“已完结者”(pariyosito):此处同理,即“以食物结束了进食行为的人”。而在注释书中,为清晰显明所指含义,便省略了“食”一词而作解说。“满足”:指饱足、满意。“能成立的”:即能令人了知者。为了显示“已完结之食”、“乐足”、“足量之状态”等概念的采用,与“已食者性”等彼此相成、互为能知与所知的关系,故说“凡夫……”等。如此,经由这六个词语,说明了填饱肚子的进食方式,而这仅是借由假想而显示。因为世尊并非如此进食。因此说:“这一切皆是假想而说。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhuttāvī’’ti vacanato bhojanapāripūritā idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘paripuṇṇoti bhojanena paripuṇṇo’’ti. Pariyositoti etthāpi eseva nayo ‘‘bhojanena bhojanakiriyāya pariyosito’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana adhippetatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ bhojana-saddassa lopo vutto. Dhātoti titto. Sādhakānīti ñāpakāni. Pariyositabhojanaṃ suhitayāvadatthatāgahaṇehi bhuttāvitādayo, bhuttāvitādiggahaṇehi vā itare bodhitā hontīti aññamaññaṃ nesaṃ ñāpakañāpetabbataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ chahipi padehi udarāvadehakaṃ bhojanaṃ dassitaṃ , tañca kho parikappanāvasena. Na hi bhagavā evaṃ bhuñjati. Tenāha ‘‘sabbañcetaṃ parikappetvā vutta’’nti.
“可能有,也可能没有”:这两种含义在此处皆可成立,故说“此处两种都可以”。“随即”:意为紧接着,即在我进食之后立刻。而由于这是对前述时间的指称,所以称为“在那时”。“没有嫩绿植物处”:指没有正在生长的草等绿色植物的地方。此处的“无”(appa)字,正如“少欲”(appiccha)等词中的用法,是表示“不存在”的意义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Siyā eva, nāpi siyā’’ti ca idaṃ atthadvayampi idha sambhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘idha ubhayampi vaṭṭatī’’ti. Athāti anantaraṃ, mama bhojanasamanantaramevāti attho. Taṃ pana yasmā yathāvuttakālapaccāmasanaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘tamhi kāle’’ti vuttaṃ. Apparuḷhahariteti ruhamānatiṇādiharitarahite. Abhāvattho ca ayaṃ appa-saddo ‘‘appiccho’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.252, 336; saṃ. ni. 2.148) viya.
“对于已说过的”:这里的“pi”字,含有将未说出的意义亦聚拢进来的作用。由此,也包含了平整、填平(vāpasamīkaraṇa)等意思。事实上,此“说”(vutta)字,例如在“不作回应而平息”(no ca kho paṭivutta)等文句中(波罗夷 289),可见其用于“平整、填平”义;在“俯首、依他而活”(pannalomo paradattavutto)等文句中(小品 332),用于“谋生方式”义;在“如枯叶已脱离系缚”(paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto)等文句中(波罗夷 92;波逸提 666;大品 129;中部3.59),用于“脱离”义;在“所唱的、所说的、所集合的”(gītaṃ pavuttaṃ samihita)等文句中(长部1.285),用于“作为圣典而流传”义;而在世间,例如在“所说为皈依处”(vuttaṃ parāyaṇa)等文句中(大疏 7.2.26),可见其用于“催促”义。显示巴利原文
Kathitepīti pi-saddo avuttasamuccayattho. Tena vāpasamīkaraṇādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hesa vutta-saddo ‘‘no ca kho paṭivutta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 289) vāpasamīkaraṇe dissati, ‘‘pannalomo paradattavutto’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 332) jīvitavuttiyaṃ, ‘‘paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto’’tiādīsu (pārā. 92; pāci. 666; mahāva. 129; ma. ni. 3.59) apagame, ‘‘gītaṃ pavuttaṃ samihita’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.285) pāvacanabhāvena pavattite, loke pana ‘‘vuttaṃ parāyaṇa’’ntiādīsu (mahābhāsa 7.2.26) ajjhene dissatīti.
在此,并非因团食而遮止法嗣的资格,而是为了显示不执取团食、实践法随法行的原因,才说“对于团食……应当度过”。其中,“应当度过”是指依止于业处而度过。因此,他说“如已观察到头上着火一般而作意”;“头上着火的譬喻”即指《头燃譬喻经》。显示巴利原文
Na ettha piṇḍapātabhojanena dhammadāyādatā nivāritā, piṇḍapātabhojanaṃ pana anādaritvā dhammānudhammapaṭipattīti ettha kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘piṇḍapātaṃ…pe… vītināmeyyā’’ti. Tattha vītināmeyyāti kammaṭṭhānānuyogena khepeyya. Tenāha ‘‘ādittasīsūpamaṃ paccavekkhitvā’’ti. Ādittasīsūpamantiādittasīsūpamasuttaṃ.
“Kiñcāpī”一词与“yadipī”同义,为不变词。不变词的特点在于:随其在任何语句中使用,便显明该处所欲表达的意义。因此,此处为显示它阐明以“团食”等为开头的许可、赞叹之义,便说它是“表示许可、赞叹的不变词”。然而,对于许可、赞叹的这一开端,若说它是“表示不可能义”,应是已先说明了可能性的展现,且从随顺的理路来看,此说更为优先。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpīti ayaṃ ‘‘yadipī’’ti iminā samānattho nipāto. Nipāto ca nāma yattha yattha vākye payujjati, tena tena vattabbatthajotako hotīti idha ‘‘piṇḍapāta’’ntiādinā anuññāpasaṃsāvasena vuccamānassa atthassa jotakoti adhippāyena ‘‘anujānanapasaṃsanatthe nipāto’’ti vuttaṃ, anuññāpasaṃsārambhe pana ‘‘asambhāvanatthe’’ti vuttaṃ siyā purimeyeva sambhāvanāvibhāvanato adhikattānulomato ca.
为回应这样的诘问——“对团食的拒绝仅发生一次,如何能成为长久少欲等的因?”——而说“对于他……”等。其中,“极度欲求”:极度地(atra)欲求(icchatī)者,称为极度欲求者(atriccho),此一状态即是极度欲求(atricchatā)。从义理上说,这就是指希求他人的所得。正如所说:“对自身已有的一切所得不满足,又希求他人的所得,此是极度欲求之相。”(《分别论注》849)“邪恶欲求”:指希望他人对自己不存在的功德生起尊敬的意图。具邪恶欲求者称为邪恶欲求者(pāpiccho),此状态即是邪恶欲求(pāpicchatā)。如所说:“希望他人对自己不存在的功德生起尊敬,以及在接受时不节量,此是邪恶欲求之相。”(《分别论注》851)“大欲求”:欲求大物品,或其欲求极大者,称为大欲求者(mahiccho),此状态即是大欲求(mahicchatā)。关于此,如所说:“希望他人对自己已有的功德生起尊敬,以及在接受时不节量,此是大欲求之相。”“当他省察时,将会制止”——应如此连接。显示巴利原文
Ekavāraṃ pavattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkhipanaṃ kathaṃ dīgharattaṃ appicchatādīnaṃ kāraṇaṃ hotīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādi. Tattha atricchatāti atra icchatīti atriccho, tassa bhāvo atricchatā, atthato paralābhapatthanā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘purimeyeva sakalābhena asantuṭṭhi, paralābhe ca patthanā, etaṃ atricchatālakkhaṇa’’nti (vibha. aṭṭha. 849). Pāpicchatāti asantaguṇasambhāvanādhippāyatā. Pāpā icchā etassāti pāpiccho, tassa bhāvo pāpicchatā. Yathāha ‘‘asantaguṇasambhāvanatā paṭiggahaṇe ca amattaññutā, etaṃ pāpicchalakkhaṇa’’nti (vibha. aṭṭha. 851). Mahantāni vatthūni icchati, mahatī vā tassa icchāti mahiccho, tassa bhāvo mahicchatā. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘santaguṇasambhāvanatā paṭiggahaṇe ca amattaññutā, etaṃ mahicchalakkhaṇa’’nti. Paccavekkhamāno nivāressatīti yojanā. Assa bhikkhuno saṃvattissati piṇḍapātapaṭikkhepo.
“多欲的人,施主们以资具供养时,他既不堪受用,又自行寻求资具”,因此说“养活自己难,养活侍者也难”。这等于把信施之物毁弃于他人家中。“空钵而回”:在他依次乞食的人家,将所得施舍一空,结果未获任何食物,空钵返回寺院,因饥饿虚弱而倒卧——这是它的意趣。应知,以如法所得资具受用,不复另求,则自身易养;以如法所得资具而不轻慢他人,由知足的成就,侍者亦易养。显示巴利原文
Mahiccho puggalo yathā paccayadānavasena paccayadāyakehi bharituṃ asakkuṇeyyo, evaṃ paccayapariyesanavasena attanāpīti vuttaṃ ‘‘attanopiupaṭṭhākānampi dubbharo hotī’’ti. Saddhādeyyassa vinipātavasena pavattiyā aññassa ghare chaḍḍento. Rittapattovāti yesu kulesu paṭipiṇḍavasena pavattati, tesaṃ sabbapacchimaṃ attano yathāladdhaṃ datvā tattha kiñci aladdhā rittapatto vihāraṃ pavisitvā nipajjati jighacchādubbalyenāti adhippāyo. Yathāladdhapaccayaparibhogena, puna pariyesanānāpajjanena attano subharatā, yathāladdhapaccayena avaññaṃ akatvā santosāpattiyā upaṭṭhākānaṃ subharatā veditabbā.
「论事」:指与少欲等相关的谈论所依之处,故称论事,亦即少欲等本身。「三种」:即三种论事。「能深切削除」:因其能极深切地削除烦恼,故名能深切削除,这是少欲等功德的集合;此义存在于这些谈论中,故这些谈论即是能深切削除的,因为它们适于令多欲等变得微薄,且与少欲等相应。「能适宜心的离盖」:能令障碍善心生起的诸盖远离,故对名为‘心的离盖’的止与观极相适宜。或者说,因能令止观之心彰显而作其助益,故称能适宜心的离盖。「一向厌离」等:这是为了说明这些谈论通过厌离等利益而被称为能深切削除与能适宜心的离盖。其中,「一向厌离」:指决然地为了厌离轮回之苦。「为了离贪、为了息灭」:即为了对那轮回离染以及令其灭尽。「为了止息」:即为了平息一切烦恼。「为了证知」:即为了证知一切所应证知。「为了正觉」:即为了四种道智的正觉。「为了涅槃」:即为了无余涅槃界。因为前三个说的是观,接着三个说的是道,最后一个说的是涅槃。由此显示:从止观开始,以涅槃为究竟,此一完整的超越凡夫之法,于证得这十种论事者,皆能成就。显示巴利原文
Kathāvatthūnīti appicchatādipaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ kathānaṃ vatthūnīti kathāvatthūni, appicchatādayo eva. Tīṇīti tīṇi kathāvatthūni. Abhisallekhikāti ativiya kilese sallikhatīti abhisallekho, appiccha tādiguṇasamudāyo, so etissā atthīti abhisallekhikā, mahicchatādīnaṃ tanubhāvāya yuttarūpā appicchatādipaṭisaṃyuttatā. Cetovinīvaraṇasappāyāti kusalacittuppattiyā nivārakānaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ dūrībhāvakaraṇena cetovinīvaraṇasaṅkhātānaṃ samathavipassanānaṃ sappāyā. Samathavipassanācittasseva vā vibhūtibhāvakaraṇāya sappāyā upakārikāti cetovinīvaraṇasappāyā. Ekantanibbidāyātiādi yena nibbidādiānisaṃsena ayaṃ kathā abhisallekhikā cetovinīvaraṇasappāyā ca nāma hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ekantanibbidāyāti ekaṃsena vaṭṭadukkhato nibbindanatthāya. Virāgāya nirodhāyāti tasseva virajjanatthañca nirujjhanatthañca. Upasamāyāti sabbakilesavūpasamāya. Abhiññāyāti sabbassapi abhiññeyyassa abhijānanāya. Sambodhāyāti catumaggasambodhāya. Nibbānāyāti anupādisesanibbānāya. Etesu hi ādito tīhi vipassanā vuttā, puna tīhi maggo, itarena nibbānaṃ. Tena samathavipassanā ādiṃ katvā nibbānapariyosāno ayaṃ sabbo uttarimanussadhammo dasakathāvatthulābhino sambhavatīti dasseti. Paripūressantīti taṃsabhāvato upakārato ca saṃvattissanti. Appicchatādayo hi ekavārauppannā upari tadatthāya saṃvattissanti. Kathāvatthuparipūraṇaṃ sikkhāparipūraṇañca vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
「不死即涅槃」:指无余涅槃界。其余有学与无学法之圆满,则另作别论。而此处所说涅槃的圆满,应知是依能招感涅槃之法圆满而作的间接表述。今为以譬喻证成由少欲等次第增长而致功德圆满的道理,故说“譬如”等。其中,「雨季所生者」:指于雨季月份所生起的水流,因其经久方生。「山涧」:指从山崖高处等流下的瀑布、河流等。「湖泊」:水从高处流下,停聚并继续流淌之处。「小池」:小的水池。「小溪」:从山脚流出的细流。它们汇入大河,令大河满溢。「最上法之继承者」:指最上、最殊胜的法之继承地位,或最上的法遗产。「那些比丘」:指接受法的比丘们。「令其等结合」:令他们与根本功德——少欲等相合。显示巴利原文
Amataṃ nibbānanti anupādisesanibbānadhātuṃ. Itarā pana sekkhāsekkhadhammapāripūriyā paripuṇṇā. Nibbānapāripūri cettha tadāvahadhammapāripūrivasena pariyāyato vuttāti veditabbā. Idāni yāyaṃ appicchatādīnaṃ anukkamaparivuddhiyā guṇapāripūritā, taṃ upamāya sādhento ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pāvussakoti vassānamāse uṭṭhito. So hi cirānuppavatti hoti. Pabbatakandarā pabbatesu upaccakādhiccakāpabhavanijjharādinadiyo. Sarasākhāti yattha upariunnatapadesato udakaṃ āgantvā tiṭṭhati ceva sandati ca, te. Kusobbhā khuddakataḷākā. Kunnadiyoti pabbatapādato nikkhantā khuddakanadiyo. Tā hi mahānadiyo otarantiyo paripūrenti. Paramadhammadāyādanti paramaṃ uttamaṃ dhammadāyādabhāvaṃ, paramaṃ dhammadāyajjaṃ vā. Te bhikkhūti te dhammapaṭiggāhake bhikkhū. Sanniyojentoti mūlaguṇehi appicchatādīhi yojento.
“领会”:即从含义与文句上正确地把握。“贯通”:即随顺我的教导,不违逆我的意趣。“正如在此处所思考的”:如同在此次法嗣开示中所思维的那样,他为了在其他地方也能赞颂法,进入香室时也是如此思维。“同一意图”:即具有相同的志向。“以慧”:即以智慧。“此开示最为殊胜等”:这是世尊从功德方面推许法将,才这样说的。显示巴利原文
Uggahetvāti atthato byañjanato ca upadhāraṇavasena gahetvā aviparītaṃ gahetvā. Saṃsandetvāti mama desanānusārena mamajjhāsayaṃ avirajjhitvā. Yathā idheva cintesīti yathā imissā dhammadāyādadesanāya cintesi, evaṃ aññatthāpi dhammathomanatthaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ pavisanto cintesi. Ekajjhāsayāyāti samānādhippāyāya. Matiyāti paññāya. Ayaṃ desanā aggātiādi bhagavā dhammasenāpatiṃ guṇato eva paggaṇhātīti katvā vuttaṃ.
“以心之动向”:即依于心而转化身体,通过“愿此身如同此心”的决意,令身体与心具有相同的趣向。然而,身体是迟钝地生灭的,又怎能与轻快转变的心具有相同的趣向呢?并非在一切方面都完全相同。正如依身体而转化心时,心也不是在一切方面都与身体具有相同的趣向。因为那时的心,无法以其自性所成的自身刹那来运作,而是随顺于迟钝的物质法刹那来运作。然而,通过“愿此心如此身”的决意,心追随迟钝的身体,直至到达想要去的地方,它便只随顺身体的趣向,以相续的方式生灭;如此即说心被转化为身体的趣向。同样地,通过“愿此身如此心”的决意,由于事先修习了轻安想与微细想,身体就不会像未修习神足的人那样迟钝地运作,而是很轻快地,仅在几个心识刹那之中便到达想去的地方。这样运作的身体,便被转化为以心的趣向为状态,但这并不只在一个心识刹那就能成就。如此一来,屈伸手臂的譬喻,即使不加方便之说,也能非常契合;否则便会违背法性。因为诸法的自相不能用神通力来改变,只能改变它们的状态。显示巴利原文
Cittagatiyāti cittavasena kāyassa pariṇāmanena ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo idaṃ cittaṃ viya hotū’’ti kāyassa cittena samānagatikatādhiṭṭhānena. Kathaṃ pana kāyo dandhappavattiko lahuparivattanacittena samānagatiko hotīti? Na sabbathā samānagatiko. Yatheva hi kāyavasena cittapariṇāmane cittaṃ sabbathā kāyena samānagatikaṃ na hoti. Na hi tadā cittaṃ sabhāvasiddhena attano khaṇena avattitvā dandhavuttikassa rūpadhammassa khaṇena vattituṃ sakkoti, ‘‘idaṃ cittaṃ ayaṃ kāyo viya hotū’’ti pana adhiṭṭhānena dandhagatikassa kāyassa anuvattanato yāva icchitaṭṭhānappatti, tāva kāyagatiṃ anulomentameva hutvā santānavasena pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ kāyagatikaṃ katvā pariṇāmitaṃ nāma hoti, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo idaṃ cittaṃ viya hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhānena pageva lahusaññāya sukhumasaññāya ca sampāditattā abhāvitiddhipādānaṃ viya dandhaṃ avattitvā yathā lahuṃ katipayacittavāreheva icchitaṭṭhānappatti hoti , evaṃ pavattamāno kāyo cittagatikabhāveneva pariṇāmito nāma hoti, na ekacittakkhaṇeneva pavattiyā. Evañca katvā bāhusamiñjanappasāraṇūpamāpi upacārena vinā suṭṭhutaraṃ yuttā hoti, aññathā dhammatāvilomitā siyā. Na hi dhammānaṃ lakkhaṇaññathattaṃ iddhibalena kātuṃ sakkā, bhāvaññathattameva pana sakkāti.
31 “了知世尊的意趣与比丘们的意乐随顺”是省略语。大长老观察了说法时机,也如同观察时机一样观察了应机之器后,才说法。对于“已离去者”(pakkantassa):为了显示这是在不尊敬的意义上使用的属格,而说“对于已离去、已远行者”等。“以几何”(kittakena):即以什么作为衡量标准。因为那个衡量标准是对所衡量之义进行限定,所以说“‘几何(kittāvatā)’是表示限定的词语”。“‘nu’字表示疑问”:这里的 nu-音是为了表达疑问而出现的,所以才这么说。此处由 nu-音所阐明的意义,以及由 kiṃ-音所限定的意义,也就是被衡量的那个对象的意义。在这里,属于染污一方的是不修学远离,也就是“财食的继承”;属于清净一方的是修学远离,也就是“法的继承”。“三种远离”:之所以取三种远离来讲解,是因为五种远离已经包含在其中了。不过,如果取五种远离来讲,那么“身远离”本身就不会被直接把握到;或者说,是根据当时导师所运用的远离开示,才说了“三种远离”等。为什么说“任何一者”呢?难道仅凭身远离,法的继承身份就不能成立吗?不是的,因为这里所指的身远离,是以前二种远离为依止的。这么说的话,“心远离”的被把握也是成立的。因为仅凭证得世间的禅那,并不是究竟意义上的导师的法继承者;而是由于证得了涅槃,才是被期许的真正继承者。因此,教法中一切的修学远离,都是朝向涅槃、以涅槃为前导、汇入涅槃的,所以才说“三种远离中的任何一者”。就像没有光明就是黑暗一样,如果没有法的继承,就必然只有财食的继承,所以说“就会仅仅是财食的继承者”。“这个道理也适用于白分”:这是指通过与黑分共通的道理,指出义理上的共同性,而不是指出其义理的特殊性,因为两者性质不同;或者,这只是在用不相似的事物作譬喻引导的方式,来指出义理的特殊性。“三种远离中的任何一种”这一说法,在这里并未被采纳。因为那三种远离,或者其中一种依止于另外两种的任何一种,在这里都可以被采纳。显示巴利原文
31.Bhagavato adhippāyānurūpaṃ bhikkhūnañca ajjhāsayaṃ ñatvāti vacanaseso. Desakāle viya bhājanampi oloketvā eva mahāthero dhammaṃ katheti. Pakkantassāti idaṃ anādare sāmivacananti dassento ‘‘pakkantassa sato’’tiādimāha. Kittakenāti kena parimāṇena. Taṃ pana parimāṇaṃ yasmā parimeyyassa atthassa paricchindanaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘kittāvatāti paricchedavacana’’nti āha. Nukāro pucchāyanti ayaṃ nu-saddo idheva pucchāyaṃ āgatoti katvā vuttaṃ. Nu-saddena hettha jotiyamāno attho kiṃ-saddena parimāṇo attho parimeyyattho ca. Ettha saṃkilesapakkho vivekassa ananusikkhanaṃ āmisadāyādatā, vodānapakkho tassa anusikkhanaṃ dhammadāyādatāti. Tīhi vivekehīti vivekattayaggahaṇaṃ tadantogadhattā vivekapañcakassa. Vivekapañcakaggahaṇe panassa sarūpena kāyaviveko gahito na siyā, tadāyattattā vā satthārā tadā payujjamānavivekadassanavasena ‘‘tīhi vivekehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aññatarampīti kasmā vuttaṃ. Na hi kāyavivekamattena dhammadāyādabhāvo sijjhatīti? Na, vivekadvayasannissayasseva kāyavivekassa idhādhippetattā. Evañca katvā cittavivekaggahaṇampi samatthitaṃ hoti. Na hi lokiyajjhānādhigamamattena nippariyāyato satthudhammadāyādabhāvo icchito, nibbānādhigamena pana so icchito, tasmā sabbāpi sāsane vivekānusikkhanā nibbānapoṇā nibbānapabbhārā nibbānogadhā cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ aññatarampī’’ti. Asati āloke andhakāro viya asati dhammadāyādatāya ekaṃsiyā āmisadāyādatāti āha ‘‘āmisadāyādāva hontī’’ti. Esa nayo sukkapakkhepīti kaṇhapakkhato sādhāraṇavasena labbhamānaṃ atthasāmaññaṃ atidisati, na atthavisesaṃ tassa visadisattā, atthavisesameva vā atidisati visadisūdāharaṇūpāyañāyena. ‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ aññatara’’nti idaṃ idha na labbhati. Tayopi hi vivekā, tesu eko vā itaradvayasannissayo idha labbhati.
“纵远”(dūrato):即从远方之处。因此说“即使从越国而来”等。固然,在“请显现(paṭibhātū)”一词中,基于“paṭi-”这个词,语法上期待“舍利弗”用对格,但其意义应当依于属格来理解。为显示此义,故说“请尊者舍利弗您的”。“请成为一份(bhāgo hotu)”:以此表明“paṭi-”有“份”的意义,因为相、特相等其他意义在此处不适用。因此说“如此,便与词语之相状相合”。“请显现(dissatu)”:即请以智慧显现,或请看见。“请现前(upaṭṭhātu)”:即请现前于智慧之前。“他们将领受(uggahessanti)”:他们将成就口诵,成就口诵即是领受(uggaho)。“他们将通晓(pariyāpuṇissanti)”:是领受的同义词;或者,通过反复提问等方式将义理确立于心中,即是通晓。“表示原因之语”:即作为所述之原因而说的话语,如说“在因由中使用工具格”。“taṃ-”音用来回顾所述之义,因此说“因为”等。显示巴利原文
Dūratopīti dūraṭṭhānatopi. Tenāha ‘‘tiroraṭṭhatopī’’tiādi. Kāmaṃ ‘‘paṭibhātū’’ti ettha paṭi-saddāpekkhāya ‘‘sāriputta’’nti upayogavacanaṃ, attho pana sāmivacanavaseneva veditabboti dassento āha ‘‘āyasmatoyeva sāriputtassā’’ti. Bhāgo hotūti iminābhāgattho paṭi-saddoti dasseti lakkhaṇādiatthānaṃ idha ayujjanato. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ saddalakkhaṇena sametī’’ti. Dissatūti ñāṇena dissatu, passatūti vā attho. Upaṭṭhātūti ñāṇassa paccupatiṭṭhatu. Uggahessantīti vācuggataṃ karissanti. Vācuggatakaraṇañhi uggaho. Pariyāpuṇissantīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Puripucchanādinā vā atthassa citte āpādanaṃ paṭṭhapanaṃ pariyāpuṇanaṃ. Kāraṇavacananti yathāvuttassa kāraṇabhāvena vacanaṃ ‘‘hetumhi karaṇavacana’’nti katvā. Vuttatthapaccāmasanaṃ taṃ-saddena karīyatīti. Tenāha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi.
“以一种方式”:即仅以一种名为“执取性”的方式,此执取性由“财食的继承”的成立而确立。正是针对此方式,才说“世尊所说的义理”。否则,长老也仅以一种方式说出了那义理:“导师住于远离时,弟子们却不修学远离。”“以三种方式”:即以构成财食继承的修行方式,也就是不修学三种远离的方式。“至此为止”:即“在此,朋友……乃至……不修学”这整段属于黑分的诵出文。显示巴利原文
Ekenevākārenāti āmisadāyādatāsiddhena ādiyatāsaṅkhātena ekeneva pakārena. Tameva hi ākāraṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘bhagavatā vuttamattha’’nti. Aññathā ‘‘satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’ti ekeneva ākārena so attho therenapi vutto. Tīhi ākārehīti āmisadāyādapaṭipadābhūtehi tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ ananusikkhanākārehi. Ettāvatāti ‘‘idhāvuso…pe… nānusikkhantī’’ti ettakena kaṇhapakkhe uddesapāṭhena.
“已详细地善加分别”:因它已被毫无遗漏地正确标明。“难道不是吗”:难道在诵出中,世尊不是也执取了导师的“执取性”,而它却未被标明吗?针对此质疑,他说:“而此确实”等。“对于摄受弟子者”:即对于那位以“诸比丘是世尊的财食继承者”这一指示来遮止对他宗的毁谤,同时以“你们应当成为法的继承者”的方式慈悯弟子的人。“那对弟子们不合适,因为不是如法的行持”:这是句子的连结方式。“此理趣”:即通过“至此,世尊”等显示黑分诵出文的义理区分,来显示其连结,此理趣同样适用于白分,用来显示白分的连结——这是他的意图。因此他说:“这是此处按连结次第的接续方式”,意为由导师开示的诵出说法,以及由大长老开示的说法,皆依连结次第而结合。在这里,应知连结即依于连结的次第本身。显示巴利原文
Vitthārato suvibhatto hoti anavasesato sammadeva niddiṭṭhattā. Nanu ca uddese satthunopi ādiyatā bhagavatā gahitā, sā na niddiṭṭhāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘so ca kho’’tiādi. Sāvake anuggaṇhantassāti ‘‘āmisadāyādā satthu sāvakā’’ti satthu parappavādapariharaṇatthampi ‘‘tumhehi dhammadāyādehi bhavitabba’’nti evaṃ sāvake anukampamānassa. Sāvakānaṃ taṃ na yuttaṃ sāmīciabhāvatoti yojanā. Esa nayoti yadidaṃ ‘‘ettāvatāyaṃ bhagavā’’tiādinā kaṇhapakkhe uddesassa atthavibhāgadassanamukhena sambandhadassanaṃ, esa nayo sukkapakkhepi sambandhadassaneti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ tāvettha anusandhikkamayojanā’’ti, satthārā desitāya uddesadesanāya mahātherena desitāya ca anusandhikkamena sambandhoti attho. Yathānusandhi eva cettha anusandhi veditabbo.
“极度远离者”(Accantapavivittassa):如同究竟的依止远离即是导师的究竟性,其他两种远离也是如此。“修学”(anusikkhana)意为“随顺圆满”(anu anu pūraṇa),因此以否定方式说“不全圆满”,意思就是“不全修习”或“不全守护”。从最初不修学远离时起,他们便不能全修习、不能全守护。然而,为何这里仅凭“不修学远离”这一无差别的总说,就唯独执取了“身远离”呢?针对此疑,他说“然而如果”等。“在问难中”:假若问与答没有区别,因而无法区分,答案也就无从区分。难道经文中因为“不修学远离”是无差别的说法,区别就得不到了吗?并非如此,因为通过其他词句已作了区分。因此他说“哪些法”等。“记说分”(Byākaraṇapakkha)即解答分。而解答并不像提问那样只显示无差别,而是随其所欲的义理进行分别——这是其意图。“以此词”即用“不修学远离”一词,来显示身远离未被圆满——这是意图。对心远离和依止远离,也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Accantapavivittassāti ekantaupadhiviveko viya itarepi viveko satthu ekantikāvāti. Anusikkhanaṃ nāma anu anu pūraṇanti tappaṭikkhepena āha ‘‘na paripūrentī’’ti, na paribrūhentīti attho, na paripūrentīti vā na paripālentīti attho. Yadaggena hi vivekaṃ nānusikkhanti, tadaggena na paribrūhenti, na paripālentīti vā vattabbataṃ labhantīti. Kasmā panettha ‘‘vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti uddese viya avisesavacane kāyavivekasseva gahaṇaṃ katanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yadi panā’’tiādi. Pucchāyāti pucchāto aviseso siyā vibhāgassa alabbhamānattā vissajjanassa. Nanu ca ‘‘vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti avisesavacanato pāḷiyaṃ vibhāgo na labbhatevāti? Na, padantarena vibhāvitattā. Tenāha ‘‘yesañca dhammāna’’ntiādi. Byākaraṇapakkhoti vissajjanapakkho. Vissajjanañca na pucchā viya avisesajotanā , atha kho yathādhippetatthavibhajananti adhippāyo. Iminā padenāti ‘‘vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti iminā padena kāyavivekaṃ aparipūriyamānaṃ dassetīti adhippāyo. Cittavivekaṃ upadhivivekanti etthāpi eseva nayo.
在这里,“不舍断”(nappajahantī)是说对应断的诸法未被舍弃,从而显示以舍断为相的远离不存在;这样说之后,又说“于远离中放下重担”,则是显示比它更殊胜的远离也不存在。因此,通过显示那两种远离的不存在,应知由“哪些法”等依据排除而得的道理:正是用“不修学远离”这一句,来显示作为那两种远离之根本的身远离不存在。因为渴爱未断,他们执取种种资生之物,所以称为“多取者”(bahulā);多取者即多取性的人(bāhulikā),就像“调伏者”(venayiko)的构词法一样。然而,由于他们确实致力于资具的丰盛,所以说“致力于衣服等资具的丰盛”。由于对学处没有尊重心,因此松散、不牢固地受持,故被称为“懈怠者”(sāthalikā)。“松散”是中性词格的表述;或者,依与“松散”同义的“sāthala”一词,来理解“sāthalikā”一词的构词成立。“以下堕的意义”即是向下的意义,指下劣的状态。“于依止远离”:即因舍离一切依止,而从依止中远离。“放下重担者”(Oropitadhurā)……显示巴利原文
Ettha ca nappajahantīti pahātabbadhammānaṃ pahānābhāvavacanaṃ pahānalakkhaṇavivekābhāvadīpanaṃ, taṃ vatvā puna ‘‘viveke nikkhittadhurā’’ti vacanaṃ tato sātisayavivekābhāvadīpananti tadubhayavivekābhāvadassanena ‘‘yesañca dhammāna’’ntiādināva pārisesañāyena ‘‘vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti iminā vivekadvayamūlabhūtakāyavivekābhāvadassanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avigatataṇhatāya taṃ taṃ parikkhārajātaṃ bahuṃ lanti ādiyantīti bahulā, bahulā eva bāhulikā yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (ma. ni. 1.246; a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8). Te pana yasmā paccayabahulabhāvāya yuttappayuttā nāma honti, tasmā āha ‘‘cīvarādibāhullāya paṭipannā’’ti. Sikkhāya ādarabhāvābhāvato sithilaṃ adaḷhaṃ gaṇhantīti ‘‘sāthalikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sithilanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, sithila-saddena vā samānatthassa sāthala-saddassa vasena ‘‘sāthalikā’’ti padasiddhi veditabbā. Avagamanaṭṭhenāti adhogamanaṭṭhena , orambhāgiyabhāvenāti attho. Upadhiviveketi sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggatāya upadhīhi vivitte. Oropitadhurāti ujjhitussāhā.
“不限定地”(Aniyamena eva):指不触及任何差别,只用“弟子们”这种无差别的说法。“限定”则是指如“长老”等这样的区分。“从十腊开始”:即从十腊以后。“关于自在”:如同在“长者位、将军位”等用法中一样。因刹那间的闪电光照就能击破目标的,是“不瞬即射者”。“于住立”(Ṭhitiyā):即于安住的状态。“于住处”(Ṭhānaso):即于那当下。他“住立”:依持着所依的关系,所以说“依止于那状态而存在”。舍的修习:对于诸行的中舍,也是证悟无为法的方便,因此,与此相反,装饰衣钵等并不能成就依止远离的圆满,所以说“以不圆满地修习衣、钵……”。“在那时”(Tattha):即在长老的场合。“在此”(Idha):在中部、九部等的场合。如此,说了“中年长老时”等。显示巴利原文
Aniyamenevāti kiñci visesaṃ anāmasitvā ‘‘sāvakā’’ti aviseseneva. Niyamento‘‘therā’’tiādinā. Dasavasse upādāyāti dasavassato paṭṭhāya. Issariyeti ‘‘seṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ senāpatiṭṭhāna’’ntiādīsu viya. Acirakkhaṇobhāsena lakkhavedhako akkhaṇavedhi. Ṭhitiyanti avaṭṭhāne. Ṭhānasoti taṅkhaṇeyeva. Tiṭṭhatīti ādhārādheyyabhāvenāti āha ‘‘tadāyattavuttibhāvenā’’ti. Upekkhānubrūhanā sattasaṅkhāresu udāsīnatāpi asaṅkhatādhigamassa upāyoti tabbipariyāyato cīvarādimaṇḍanā na upadhivivekapāripūriyā saṃvattatīti āha ‘‘cīvarapatta…pe… apūrayamānā’’ti. Tatthāti theravāre. Idhāti majjhimanavakavāresu. Tathā hi ‘‘majjhimatherakāle’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
32 “而于此黑分中”(Imasmiñca kaṇhapakkhe):是指在这解说部分的黑分中,并非总说部分的黑分。总说部分的黑分中,应以与所说相反的理趣来理解的义理,已通过“此理趣亦于白分”的类比而显示。“依所说之遮止理趣”(vuttapaccanīkanayena):即依于“不修学、不圆满身远离”等已说义理的对立面,而以“修学、圆满身远离”等理趣来阐明。“在此”(Ettha):即在此白分之中。“简略说”(Saṅkhepa):即义理的纲要。“依由旬的相续”(yojanaparamparā):即通过远离村落一由旬、二由旬、三由旬的次第。“阿兰若丛林丛”(Araññavanapatthāni):即各阿兰若中丛林密布之处。“边际的”(Pantāni):即处于边远地方。适合前往的时机,是指衰老朽迈之时,因为那时已无力往返于较远的行境村落。以“啊,善施者,如此对具德者行施,实是善施!”等语,令施予资具者生起净信。“应被称赞的”(Pāsaṃsā):即可赞。这位大长老也如此说等:这是以指显示巴利原文
32.Imasmiñca kaṇhapakkheti imasmiñca niddesavāre kaṇhapakkhe, na uddesavāre kaṇhapakkhe. Uddesavāre pana kaṇhapakkhe vuttavipariyāyena gahetabbattho ‘‘esa nayo sukkapakkhepī’’ti atidesena dassito. Vuttapaccanīkanayenāti ‘‘kāyavivekaṃ nānusikkhanti na paripūrentī’’tiādinā vuttassa atthassa paccanīkanayena, ‘‘kāyavivekaṃ anusikkhanti paripūrentī’’tiādinā nayena. Etthāti etasmiṃ sukkapakkhe. Saṅkhepoti atthasaṅkhepo. Yojanaparamparāyāti gāmantato dūrabhāvena ekaṃ dve tīṇīti evaṃ yojanānaṃ paṭipāṭiyā. Araññavanapatthānīti araññesu vanasaṇḍabhūtāni. Pantānīti pariyantāni. Upagantuṃ yuttakālo jarājiṇṇakālo gocaragāme dūre gamanāgamanasamatthatābhāvato. ‘‘Evaṃ guṇavantesu dinnaṃ aho sudinna’’nti paccayadāyakānaṃ pasādaṃ janenti. Pāsaṃsāti pasaṃsitabbā. Ayampi mahātherotiādi ekaṃ appamādavihārinaṃ vuddhataraṃ niddisitvā vadantānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Paviṭṭho vivekaṭṭhānaṃ. Sāyaṃ nikkhamati yonisomanasikāraṃ upabrūhetvāti adhippāyo. Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karoti, na yaṃ kiñci kiccantaraṃ. Samāpattiyo nibbatteti, na moghamanasikāraṃ. Sabbathātiādito tāva tadaṅgavasena kilesehi cittaṃ vivecento tato vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena paṭipassaddhivasenāti sabbappakārena cittavivekaṃ pūreti. Paṃsukūlāni dhāretīti iminā bāhulikatābhāvaṃ dasseti, asithilaṃ sāsanaṃgahetvāti iminā sāthalikatābhāvaṃ, vigatanīvaraṇoti iminā okkamane nikkhittadhurataṃ, phalasamāpattintiādinā pavivekapubbaṅgamataṃ dasseti.
33 「在此,朋友(Tatrāvuso)」:此处“iti”一词是“等”的意思,以此完全含摄了“贪是罪恶的”等后面将展开的一切说法。什么是连结(Ko anusandhi)?世尊配合杂染分,宣说了与法遗产行持相应的教诫:“诸比丘!你们要做我法的继承者,不要做物质的继承者”等,这一教诫提出后,从“导师住于远离”等开始,以庄严的十八番解说明细分析,之后紧接着问,与后面“在此,朋友,贪是罪恶的”等说法之间的关联——这便是问“连结”。「如此(Evaṃ)」:在杂染分中,是通过显示“不断除”来指出未断除;在清净分中,是通过显示“能断除”来指出已断除,如此说明。前面以“那”“这”等词,以及以“法”这个词,只是泛指地提到了应当断除的种种法,但尚未明确其个别体性。现在为了明确显示它们的个别体性,所以连接起来而说。为什么这里只说贪等是应断除法,难道没有愚痴、邪见、疑等其他应断除法吗?确实有。然而,那些法因与贪等同在一处存在,所以已被包含在内。另外,之所以此处只选取这些来说显示巴利原文
33.Tatrāvusoti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena ‘‘lobho ca pāpako’’tiādinayappavattaṃ uparidesanaṃ anavasesato pariyādiyati. Ko anusandhīti yā sā bhagavatā saṃkilesapakkhena saha dhammadāyādapaṭipattibhāvinī ‘‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’tiādinā desanā uddiṭṭhā, taṃ ‘‘satthu pavivittassa viharato’’tiādinā ārabhitvā aṭṭhārasavārapaṭimaṇḍitāya niddesadesanāya vibhajitvā tato paraṃ ‘‘tatrāvuso lobho ca pāpako’’tiādinayāya uparidesanāya sambandhaṃ pucchati. Evanti saṃkilesapakkhe ‘‘nappajahantī’’ti pahānābhāvadassanavasena, vodānapakkhe ‘‘pajahantī’’ti pahānasabbhāvadassanavasenāti evaṃ. Aniddhāritasarūpā yaṃ-taṃ-saddehi dhamma-saddena sāmaññato ye pahātabbadhammā vuttā, te sarūpato dassetunti yojanā. Ime teti ettha kasmā lobhādayo eva pahātabbadhammā vuttā, nanu ito aññepi mohadiṭṭhivicikicchādayo pahātabbadhammā santīti? Saccaṃ santi, te pana lobhādīhi tadekaṭṭhatā gahitā eva hontīti vuttā. Atha vā imesaṃyevettha gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
现在,为了从积累的角度说明连结,所以说「而且另者(apica)」等。在此,对于弟子们应当继承的、导师所喜爱的这‘法遗产’,下文并没有以‘修习四念处’等方式来开示,而是以‘他们学习远离,能断除那些法,而不是多事多求者’等方式来宣说,因此这等于以间接的方式说了‘法’。而‘他们不断除那些法,以陷入为首’等,则是间接地说了‘物质’。至于‘我可能有团食’等,以及‘他们是多事多求者’等,则是以非间接的方式也说了‘物质’。或者,世尊一方面遮止了物质遗产的继承,开示了法遗产的继承;另一方面,大长老为了详细解释其中的义理,也述说了自己学习远离等。为了从原因的角度阐明这两者,所以才说了‘在此,朋友,贪是罪恶的’等。因为由于因的灭除,杂染分便会止息;由于成就了导致灭除的因,清净分便能止息,所以阐明这两者的过患。显示巴利原文
Idāni upacayena anusandhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāvakānaṃ yassa dhammassa dāyādabhāvo satthu abhirucito, so ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāvetī’’tiādinā akatthetvā ‘‘vivekaṃ anusikkhanti, te ca dhamme pajahanti, na ca bāhulikā’’tiādinā kathitattā heṭṭhā pariyāyeneva dhammo kathitoti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Te ca dhamme nappajahanti, okkamane pubbaṅgamā’’tiādinā āmisaṃ pariyāyenapi kathitaṃ. ‘‘Siyā ca me piṇḍapāto’’tiādinā, ‘‘bāhulikā ca hontī’’tiādinā ca āmisaṃ nippariyāyenapi kathitaṃ. Atha vā yāyaṃ bhagavatā āmisadāyādapaṭikkhepanā dhammadāyādatā vuttā, yañca tadatthaṃ vibhajantena mahātherena attanā vivekānusikkhanādi vuttaṃ, tadubhayaṃ hetuvasena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tatrāvuso, lobho cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Hetunirodhena hi saṃkilesapakkhassa, nirodhahetusampādanena ca vodānapakkhassa tappāpakatā.
「过去开示的例示(Atītadesanānidassana)」:即回顾过去由长老所开示的那样教导。因此才说:“由于导师住于远离……乃至……的教授,这话是已说的。”而“于此(Tattha)”一词,是指特别提到的“哪些法是导师说应当断除的”这一句。因为在那里,只概略地提到了贪等应当被断除的法。“邪恶(Lāmaka)”:就是低劣。贪与嗔,从因、缘、自性、果报和等流来看,都是本性杂染的,或者由于会在未来导致痛苦,故称为“罪恶的”。贪的“相”:就是对于所缘生起执取的相。正因为如此,他们因这种状态而贪求,或这种状态本身就是在贪求,又或这种状态就是贪求本身,所以称为“贪”。在作用等方面:它的作用是执著,现起为不肯舍离,足处在于对那些能束缚的法产生乐味。嗔的“相”:就是对于所缘生起排斥的相。正因为如此,他们因这种状态而愤怒,或这种状态本身就是在愤怒,又或这种状态就是愤怒本身,所以称为“嗔”。在作用等方面:它的作用是扩散开来,或带有依附性的燃烧,现起为伤害。显示巴利原文
Atītadesanānidassananti atītāya therena yathādesitāya desanāya ca paccāmasanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘satthu pavivittassa…pe… desanāyanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Tatthāti yaṃ vuttaṃ visesato ‘‘yesaṃ dhammānaṃ satthā pahānamāhā’’ti, etasmiṃ pade. Tattha hi pahātabbadhammā lobhādayo sāmaññato vuttā. Lāmakāti nihīnā. Lobhadosā hi hetuto paccayato sabhāvato phalato nissandato saṃkiliṭṭhapakatikā, āyatiṃ dukkhassa pāpanaṭṭhena vā pāpakā. Lubbhanalakkhaṇoti ārammaṇassa abhigijjhanalakkhaṇo. Tathā hi so lubbhanti tena, sayaṃ vā lubbhati, lubbhanamattameva vā tanti ‘‘lobho’’ti vuccati. Rasādīsu abhisaṅgaraso, apariccāgapaccupaṭṭhāno, saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādadassanapadaṭṭhāno. Dussanalakkhaṇoti ārammaṇe byāpajjanalakkhaṇo. Tathā hi so dussanti tena, sayaṃ vā dussati, dussanamattameva vā tanti ‘‘doso’’ti vuccati. Rasādīsu visappanaraso, sanissayadahanaraso vā, dussanapaccupaṭṭhāno, āghātavatthupadaṭṭhāno.
“于他们中(Tesu)”等语,是用来说明贪与嗔是必定应当断除的。“成为物质遗产继承者,当得到资具时,便生起贪”:这是针对贪的体性为执取所缘而说的;而针对以渴爱为根源的执取,则说为“追求未得之物”。“成为物质遗产继承者,当得不到资具时,便生起嗔”:应将文意连接为:当得不到时,物质遗产继承者便生起嗔。“未得到者”:此处应将“资具”一词的格位转换过来理解。“被恼害者”:即由于“希求之物得不到,那也是苦”这句话,而成为被希求所恼害的人。“成为物质遗产继承者,对于应施之法生起贪”:应当这样连接文句。随后的文句,也依此类推。而且说“应施之法”,只是举例,因为对于有情产生爱著等情况,同样会有贪的生起。“缘渴爱而有寻求,缘寻求而有获得”等这九个,都是以渴爱为根源的。“圆满”:应当知道这里要转换格位来理解,即物质遗产继承者使之圆满。对于住处等的悭吝,共有五种悭吝。显示巴利原文
Tesūtiādinā dassanena lobhadosānaṃ ekantato pahātabbatādassanaṃ. Āmisadāyādassa paccayānaṃ lābhe hotīti idaṃ lobhassa ārammaṇaggahaṇasabhāvataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṇhāya vasena pana anugijjhanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘aladdhaṃ patthetī’’ti āha. Alābhe paccayānaṃ āmisadāyādassa hotīti ānetvā yojanā. Alabhantoti ettha ‘‘paccaye’’ti vibhattiṃ pariṇāmetvā yojetabbaṃ. Vighātavāti ‘‘yampicchaṃ na labhati, tampi dukkha’’nti (ma. ni. 1.120; vibha. 190) vacanato icchāvighātavā. Lobho ca deyyadhamme hoti āmisadāyādassāti sambandho. Esa nayo anantarapadepi. Deyyadhammeti ca idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ sattakelāyanādivasenapi tassa lobhuppattisabbhāvato. ‘‘Taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho’’ti evamādayo nava taṇhāmūlakā. Paripūreti āmisadāyādoti vibhattivipariṇāmo veditabbo. Āvāsamacchariyādīni pañca macchariyāni.
“道”是指圣道。因为它在摧灭烦恼的过程中前进,又被希求涅槃的人们所寻求,或者它自身透过亲证现观的方式而寻求涅槃,因此在究竟意义上,被称为“道”。“一端”:因为它不与另一端相混杂,是单独的一部分;或者,从低劣的意义上说,是下劣的一端。虽然其他善法也不会接近这些极端,因此那些善法是从这极端中解脱的;然而,圣道却是于毕竟解脱中也不去接近它们的,所以说“从这些极端中解脱”。因此,由于从这两端解脱出来,“处在这些的中间而存在”——这是就圣道从这两端解脱而说的,并非指圣道被包含在这两端之中,且是为了希求出离轮回之苦的人们所应行持的。所谓“同样地”,意思是:如同贪因为不与其他混淆以及低劣的意义而成为一端,同样的,放纵欲乐也是这个意义的一端。对于其他的,也是如此类推。至于圣道不接近这些极端,应理解为它使得这些极端完全不再生起。所谓“依前理”,是指依照前面说过的“不接近这两端”等方式的道理。显示巴利原文
Magganti ariyamaggaṃ. So hi kilese mārento gacchati, nibbānatthikehi ca maggīyati, sayaṃ vā sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nibbānaṃ maggatīti nippariyāyena ‘‘maggo’’ti vuccati. Eko antoti itarena asammisso eko koṭṭhāso, hīnatāya vā lāmakaṭṭhena eko anto. Kāmaṃ aññepi kusaladhammā ete ante asampayogato na upenti, tehi vimuttā eva, ayaṃ pana accantavimuttiyā na upetīti āha ‘‘vimutto etehi antehī’’ti. Tasmāti antadvayavimuttattā. Etesaṃ majjhe bhavattāti idaṃ maggassa ubhayantavimuttatāya eva vuttaṃ, na tappariyāpannatāya, vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi paṭipajjitabbato ca. Tathāti yathā itarena asammissaṭṭhena lāmakaṭṭhena ca lobho eko anto, tathā kāmasukhallikānuyogoti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Maggassa anupagamanañca nesaṃ antānaṃ sabbaso appavattikaraṇeneva daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purimanayenāti ‘‘ete dve ante na upetī’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayena.
“诸谛”即四圣谛。所谓“以见导引之义”,是指以知见——即遍知、现观等——全面地、彻尽地引导、运转之义。“能作眼”,即能作法眼,能令其生起。关于此义,虽然就修道本身而言,其与法眼并无差别,但若从支分而成就的意义,则说为由整体而作成的,故应视此为依于假立之说。正如接下来将说:“实为道自己为道果而作用,因为由道而作所应作故。”所谓“智”,即如实地了知。因此说“以令知义”,因为使其生起特别了知的状态,名为令知。所谓“以寂止”,即由断除而寂止。犹如苦等具有应遍知等性质,诸谛应被证知的特性,也同样依于道而变得清晰,故说“亦显示四圣谛应被证知的状态”,意为显明。所谓“正觉”,是由于“藉由此而证得正觉”,故道即是正觉。“为其义”,即为成就道的功用这一意义而作用。因为在道之外,并无其他能成就道之功用的东西。因此才说“实为道自己”等语。或者,当正见生起时,它即以俱生缘等方式使其余道支生起;同样地,其余道支也是如此。应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Saccānanti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ. Dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti dassanassa pariññābhisamayādibhedassa parito sabbathā nayanaṭṭhena pavattanaṭṭhena. Cakkhukaraṇīti dhammacakkhussa karaṇī nipphādikā. Tayidaṃ satipi paṭipadāya dhammacakkhuto anaññatte avayavavasena sijjhamāno attho samudāyena kato nāma hotīti upacāravasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘maggoyeva hi maggatthāya saṃvattati maggena kātabbakiccakaraṇato’’ti. Ñāṇāyāti yāthāvato jānanāya. Tenāha ‘‘viditakaraṇaṭṭhenā’’ti. Visesañātabhāvāpādanañhi viditakaraṇaṃ. Vūpasamanatoti samucchindanavasena vūpasamanato. Dukkhādīnaṃ pariññeyyādibhāvo viya abhiññeyyabhāvopi maggavaseneva pākaṭo hotīti āha ‘‘catunnampi saccānaṃ abhiññeyyabhāvadassanato’’ti, vibhāvanatoti attho. Sambodhoti maggo ‘‘sambujjhati etenā’’ti katvā. Tassatthāyāti maggakiccatthāya. Na hi maggato añño maggakiccakaro atthi. Tenāha ‘‘maggoyeva hī’’tiādi. Atha vā sammādiṭṭhi uppajjamānā sahajātādipaccayabhāvena itare uppādeti, evaṃ sesamaggadhammāpīti evampi maggatthāya saṃvattanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sacchikiriyāya paccakkhakammāyāti sacchikaraṇasaṅkhātapaccakkhakammāya. Nibbānāyāti vā anupādisesanibbānāya. Upasamāyāti iminā saupādisesanibbānaṃ gahitanti. Ayanti ‘‘sā hi saccāna’’ntiādinā yathāvutto atthanayo. Etthāti ‘‘cakkhukaraṇī’’tiādīsu padesu. Sāro sundaro anapanīto. Ito aññathāti ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāya diṭṭhivisuddhiṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī’’tiādinā atthavaṇṇanāpapañco kevalaṃ vitthāratthāya.
“唯此”一句中,“此”这个词,是用以显示他自己、其他人以及那次集会中的圣者们,对圣道亲证的状态。因为“此”这个词,是表达极为切近的直接经验。“为了遮止其余的道”,即是为了遮止“另有通往涅槃之道存在”这一说。此处所谓的遮止其余道的存在,即是进行否定,因为根本找不到另一条圣道。佛与佛弟子们所共有的性质,是无有差别的。因此,娑婆主梵天说:显示巴利原文
Ayamevāti ettha ayanti iminā attano aññesañca tassaṃ parisāyaṃ ariyānaṃ maggassa paccakkhabhāvaṃ dasseti. Āsannapaccakkhavācī hi ayaṃ-saddo. Aññamaggapaṭisedhanatthanti aññassa nibbānagāmimaggassa atthibhāvapaṭisedhanatthaṃ. Sattāpaṭikkhepo hi idha paṭisedhanaṃ alabbhamānattā aññassa maggassa. Buddhādīnaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvo anaññatā. Tenāha brahmā sahampati –
“一乘道,见尽生灭者”
具足利益与悲悯者,了知此道
过去的人们凭此道已渡瀑流,
未来者将渡,现在者正渡此瀑流。”(《相应部》5.384, 409;《大义》191;《小义》107, 121;《导论》170)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ekāyanaṃ jātikhayantadassī, Maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī; Etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, Tarissanti ye ca taranti ogha’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 5.384, 409; mahāni. 191; cūḷani. 107, 121; netti. 170);
“圣(ariya)”:由“远离(ārakattā)”这一语源,说明“圣”字的成就。“为弃舍敌(aripahānāya)”仅是义解之词。诸不善法称为“敌(arayo)”,因依此而离去、远离,故为“圣(ariyo)”。“圣所说(ariyena desito)”:此处,源自圣者世尊的,故为圣。“为获得圣性(ariyabhāvappaṭilābhāya)”:此处,能成就圣位者即圣,应知是由省略后词而成就“圣”字。由于道支的集合称为“道”,而集合即指具足集合者,故说“由八支具足(aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetattā)”。因此,就其自身而言,有八个支分,故为“八支(aṭṭhaṅgiko)”。然而,从究竟义上说,支本身就是道,并非离支别有一个道,正如说“六支吠陀(chaḷaṅgo vedo)”一样。为显示相似的例子,又说“如五支音乐等(pañcaṅgikatūriyādīni viyā)”。此处的“等”字,含摄了四支军队……显示巴利原文
Ārakattāti iminā niruttinayena ariya-saddasiddhimāha. Aripahānāyāti atthavacanamattaṃ. Arayo pāpadhammā yanti apagamanti etenāti ariyo. Ariyena desitoti ettha ariyassa bhagavato ayanti ariyo. Ariyabhāvappaṭilābhāyāti ettha ariyakaro ariyoti uttarapadalopena ariya-saddasiddhi veditabbā. Yasmā maggaṅgasamudāye maggavohāro hoti, samudāyo ca samudāyīhi samannāgato nāma hotīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetattā’’ti, tasmā attano avayavabhūtāni aṭṭha aṅgāni etassa santīti aṭṭhaṅgiko. Yasmā pana paramatthato aṅgāniyeva maggo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘na ca aṅgavinimutto’’ti yathā ‘‘chaḷaṅgo vedo’’ti. Sadisūdāharaṇaṃ pana dassento ‘‘pañcaṅgikatūriyādīni viyā’’ti āha. Ādi-saddena caturaṅginī senāti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Mārento gacchatīti niruttinayena saddasiddhimāha. Maggatīti gavesati. Ariyamaggo hi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karonto taṃ gavesanto viya hotīti. Maggīyati nibbānatthikehi vivaṭṭūpanissayapuññakaraṇato paṭṭhāya tadatthaṃ paṭipattito. Gammatīti etena ādiantavipariyāyena saddasiddhimāha yathā ‘‘kakū’’ti. ‘‘Seyyathidanti nipāto’’ti vatvā tassa sabbaliṅgavibhattivacanasādhāraṇatāya ‘‘katamāni tāni aṭṭhaṅgānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu ca aṅgāni samuditāni maggo antamaso sattaṅgavikalassa ariyamaggassa abhāvatoti? Saccametaṃ saccapaṭivedhena, maggapaccayatāya pana yathāsakaṃ kiccakaraṇena paccekampi tāni maggoyevāti āha ‘‘ekamekañhi aṅgaṃ maggoyevā’’ti, aññathā samuditānampi nesaṃ maggakiccaṃ na sambhaveyyāti. Idāni tamevatthaṃ pāḷiyā samatthetuṃ ‘‘sammādiṭṭhimaggo ceva hetu cā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“正见(sammādiṭṭhi)”:正确、无颠倒地,以遍知现观等方式,照见、通达四圣谛,是它的特相,故称为正见相。“正思惟(sammāsaṅkappa)”:正确、无颠倒地将相应法安置于涅槃所缘的安止,是它的特相,故称为正安止相。由于虚妄语等有欺诳等作用,是粗涩、不摄受的对立面;而正语本性润泽,能摄受相应法,并正确摄受那些因正语而听闻善说的人们,所以正语有正摄受相。“正业(sammākammanta)”:如同身表业令某些应作事生起,自身即是发起、活动,同样,称为正业的离行也是如此,故有正生起相,正业即是正生起相。或者,提起相应法如同身业举起重担,这就是生起。“正命(sammāājīvo)”:对活命的有情,或相应法的清净,或唯对活命运作的清净,由此而具正清净相。“正精进(sammāvāyāmo)”:令相应法不堕入懈怠分,策励它们、给予助力,这就是策励。“正念(sammāsati)”:住近所缘,或不舍所缘,这就是近住。“正定(sammāsamā…显示巴利原文
Sammā aviparītaṃ pariññābhisamayādivasena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ dassanaṃ paṭivijjhanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti sammādassanalakkhaṇā. Sammā aviparītaṃ sampayuttadhamme nibbānārammaṇe abhiniropanaṃ appanālakkhaṇaṃ etassāti sammāabhiniropanalakkhaṇo musāvādādīnaṃ visaṃvādanādikiccatāya lūkhānaṃ apariggāhakānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato siniddhasabhāvattā sampayuttadhamme, sammāvācappaccayasubhāsitasotārañca janaṃ sammadeva pariggaṇhātīti sammāvācā sammāpariggaho lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti sammāpariggahalakkhaṇā. Yathā kāyikā kiriyā kiñci kattabbaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, sayañca samuṭṭhahanaṃ ghaṭanaṃ hoti, tathā sammākammantasaṅkhātā viratipīti sammāsamuṭṭhānalakkhaṇo sammākammanto. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā ukkhipanaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ kāyikakiriyāya bhārukkhipanaṃ viya. Jīvamānassa sattassa, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā suddhi vodānaṃ, ājīvasseva vā jīvitappavattiyā suddhi vodānaṃ etenāti sammāvodānalakkhaṇo sammāājīvo. Kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sampayuttadhammānaṃ paggaṇhanaṃ anubalappadānaṃ paggaho. Ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhānaṃ, tassa vā anissajjanaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ. Ārammaṇe sampayuttadhammānaṃ sammā, samaṃ vā ādhānaṃ samādhānaṃ. Sammā saṅkappeti sampayuttadhamme ārammaṇe abhiniropetīti sammāsaṅkappo. Sammā vadati etāyāti sammāvācā. Sammā karoti etenāti sammākammaṃ, tadeva sammākammanto. Sammā ājīvati etenāti sammāājīvo. Sammā vāyamati ussahati etenāti sammāvāyāmo. Sammā sarati anussaratīti sammāsati. Sammā samādhiyati cittaṃ etenāti sammāsamādhīti evaṃ sammāsaṅkappādīnaṃ nibbacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“邪见(micchādiṭṭhi)”:指一切邪见。在“其对立烦恼(tappaccanīyakilesa)”中,“其”字指正见。并非邪见的烦恼是正见的对立面,而是正见的那些烦恼才是其对立面。以及“无明”——特别举出无明,因为它在染污法中最为尊首。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,无明是不善法等至的前导。”(《相应部》5.1)由断除障碍见的迷乱,故称为不迷。在此,断除邪见、舍弃邪见,是显示断现观;取涅槃为所缘,是显示证现观;以相应法等,是显示修现观,由此便表示了正见的作用。而遍知现观,由于无间引接,在义理上已经说到了。显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhinti sabbampi micchādassanaṃ. Tappaccanīyakileseti ettha taṃ-saddena sammādiṭṭhi. Na hi micchādiṭṭhiyā kilesā paccanīyā, atha kho sammādiṭṭhiyā. Avijjañcāti avijjāggahaṇaṃ tassā saṃkilesadhammānaṃ pamukhabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘avijjā, bhikkhave, pubbaṅgamā akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1). Dassananivārakassa sammohassa samugghātena asammohato. Ettha ca micchādiṭṭhiṃ…pe… pajahatīti etena pahānābhisamayaṃ, nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karotīti etena sacchikiriyābhisamayaṃ, sampayuttadhammetiādinā bhāvanābhisamayaṃ sammādiṭṭhikiccaṃ dasseti. Pariññābhisamayo pana nānantariyatāya atthato vutto eva hotīti daṭṭhabbo.
不应这么说:“一种智如何能在一个刹那中完成四种作用而生起?世间从未见过这样的事,圣教中也没有这样的说法。”正如一盏灯在同一个刹那中,燃烧灯芯、耗尽灯油、驱散黑暗、显示光明,这种智也应当如此看待。在此可引用《分别论》的经文:“对于证道者,这是苦智,这是苦集智,这是苦灭智,这是苦灭道智”(《分别论》754)。又如正见在前分道阶段对苦等各自分别生起,到了道刹那便合而为一,完成四种智的作用而生起;同样地,正思惟等在前分道阶段以出离思惟等为名,通过断除欲思惟等方式各别生起,到了道刹那则完成三种或四种作用而生起。然而,正定在前分道阶段和道刹那中,都是以多种不同的方式生起的。在此,对于正见来说,虽然一切恶法都是它的对立面,但为了显示正见的作用,特别举出了以直接违逆为相的邪见。正是因为如此,才说“以及它的对立烦恼”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ pana ekameva ñāṇaṃ ekasmiṃ khaṇe cattāri kiccāni sādhentaṃ pavattati. Na hi tādisaṃ loke diṭṭhaṃ, na āgamo vā tādiso atthīti na vattabbaṃ. Yathā hi padīpo ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe vaṭṭiṃ dahati, snehaṃ pariyādiyati, andhakāraṃ vidhamati, ālokañca vidaṃseti, evametaṃ ñāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ dukkhepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudayepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ , dukkhanirodhepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāyapetaṃ ñāṇanti suttapadaṃ (vibha. 754) ettha udāharitabbaṃ. Yathā ca sammādiṭṭhi pubbabhāge dukkhādīsu visuṃ visuṃ pavattitvā maggakkhaṇe ekāva catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kiccaṃ sādhentī pavattati, evaṃ sammāsaṅkappādayo pubbabhāge nekkhammasaṅkappādināmakā hutvā kāmasaṅkappādīnaṃ pajahanavasena visuṃ visuṃ pavattitvā maggakkhaṇe tiṇṇaṃ catunnañca kiccaṃ sādhentā pavattanti. Sammāsamādhi pana pubbabhāgepi maggakkhaṇepi nānāyeva hutvā pavattatīti kāmañcettha sammādiṭṭhiyā sabbepi pāpadhammā paṭipakkhā, ujuvipaccanīkatādassanavasena pana sammādiṭṭhiyā kiccaniddese micchādiṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Teneva ca ‘‘tappaccanīyakilese cā’’ti vuttaṃ.
那些若不断除便令正见不能生起的烦恼,由于与邪见俱生、同一事,故应视为邪见的对立烦恼。在正思惟等的作用解说中,也是同样的道理。此处将预流道等四种出世间道,依其同具出世间道的共性而合为一说。贪与嗔是集谛,此集所属的是苦谛,断除的状态是道谛,彼断除所趋向的是灭谛——这便构成了四谛。然而,这里为什么要把贪和嗔分开,并且放在最初来说呢?分开来说,首先是为了随顺那些以此方式理解者的意乐;也是为了显示:由于有了贪和嗔,便有财物的继承;由于断除了它们,便有法的继承;同时也是为了显示,依此随顺地将四谛联系起来,如此每一谛都能成为出离之门。对其余各项,也是同样的道理。至于把它们放在最初来说,应当知道是因为它们极为粗显、十分明显,是后面将要讲到的其他恶法的根本,也与这些恶法属于同一事。显示巴利原文
Yesaṃ kilesānaṃ anupacchindane sammādiṭṭhi na uppajjeyya, te micchādiṭṭhiyā sahajekaṭṭhatāya tadekaṭṭhāva tappaccanīyakilesā daṭṭhabbā. Sammāsaṅkappādīnaṃ kiccaniddesepi eseva nayo. Sotāpattimaggādivasena cattāro lokuttaramaggabhāvasāmaññena ekato katvā. Lobhadosā samudayasaccaṃ, yassa pana so samudayo taṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, pahānabhāvo maggasaccaṃ, yattha taṃ pahānaṃ, taṃ nirodhasaccanti imāni cattāri saccāni. Kasmā panettha lobhadosānaṃ visuṃ ādito ca gahaṇaṃ? Visuṃ gahaṇaṃ tāva tathābujjhanakānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena, imehi lobhadosehi āmisadāyādatā, tappahānena ca dhammadāyādatāti dassanatthaṃ, tadanusārena catusaccayojanāya evaṃ ekekassa niyyānamukhaṃ hotīti dassanatthañca. Sesavāresupi eseva nayo. Ādito gahaṇaṃ pana ativiya oḷārikatāya supākaṭabhāvato vakkhamānānaṃ aññesañca pāpadhammānaṃ mūlabhāvato tadekaṭṭhatāya ca veditabbaṃ.
“有愤恨相”是指具有愤怒的本质,意思就是心的损害。“凶暴”指残忍、粗暴的状态。“有怨恨作用”是说,以“他对我做了不利的事”等方式,在心中生起怨恨的作用。“现起为损恼”是指对自身和他人相续的破坏而现起,就像得到机会的怨敌一样。“重复悦意”是说对种种方式再三地感到欢喜,因而如此说。关于这一点,也说:“有不舍怨敌的作用,以持续忿怒的状态为现起”。后面的“怀恨”等——“等”字包含了《分别论》891中所说“怀恨、怀恨状态、固执、僵持、搁置、一再结合、一再连接、坚固作用”这些解说词的含义。因为具足怀恨的人,由于不舍弃怨敌,就像燃烧得炽热的火炭一样燃烧;他的心在洗涤时,就如同未鞣的生皮,又像沾了墨汁的碎布,无论如何都洗不干净。显示巴利原文
Kujjhanalakkhaṇoti kuppanasabhāvo, cittassa byāpajjanāti attho. Caṇḍikkaṃ luddatā, kururabhāvoti attho. Āghātakaraṇarasoti ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādinā citte āghātassa karaṇaraso. Dussanapaccupaṭṭhānoti saparasantānassa vināsanapaccupaṭṭhāno laddhokāso viya sapatto. Upanandhanaṃ nānappakārassa uparūpari nandhanaṃ viya hotīti katvā. Tathā hesa ‘‘veraappaṭinissajjanaraso, kodhānupabandhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti ca vutto. Aparakāle upanāhotiādīti ādi-saddena ‘‘upanayhanā upanayhitattaṃ āṭhapanā ṭhapanā saṇṭhapanā anusaṃsandanā anuppabandhanā daḷhīkamma’’ntiādīnaṃ (vibha. 891) niddesapadānaṃ atthavaṇṇanaṃ saṅgayhati. Upanāhasamaṅgī hi puggalo verassa anissajjanato ādittapūtialātaṃ viya jalati eva, cittañcassa dhoviyamānaṃ acchacammaṃ viya, masimakkhitapilotikā viya ca na sujjhateva.
「贬损他人功德相」:如同拭水布除去水一般,具有抹除他人功德的体性。应知,如此之人,犹如有人以粪便投向施恩者,粪便先玷污了自身,他亦先玷污自身。因此,由于他玷污了自他相续中的功德,故名为「贬损」。
「并驾齐驱」:执取同轭,即对并不等同、并非实有之物,强行执为等同。令成平等,即作平等之态。它依他人功德之标准显发自德,令现于前,故说「以他人功德量为标准而现起」。正因如此,他如咬住他人功德,而以自德强与之等,故名「悭嫉」。显示巴利原文
Paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇoti udakapuñchaniyā udakaṃ viya paresaṃ guṇānaṃ makkhanasabhāvo. Tathābhūto cāyaṃ attano kārakaṃ gūthena paharantaṃ gūtho viya paṭhamataraṃ makkheti evāti daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hessa saparasantānesu guṇaṃ makkhetīti makkhoti vuccati. Yugaggāho samadhuraggahaṇaṃ asamānassapi abhūtassa samāropanaṃ. Samabhāvakaraṇaṃ samīkaraṇaṃ. Paresaṃ guṇappamāṇena attano guṇānaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti āha ‘‘paresaṃ guṇappamāṇena upaṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti. Tathā hesa paresaṃ guṇe ḍaṃsitvā viya attano guṇehi same karotīti paḷāsoti vuccati.
「嫉妒他人成就」:即对他人的成就心生嫉妒。不能忍受他人的成就,是为嫉妒。因此,它被称为「以不能容忍他人成就为相」。于彼成就中,「不喜为其作用」,起着与喜悦相反的作用。「背向为其现起」,因为连看也不愿看见他人成就。「覆藏相」:因不能忍受自他共有成就而表现出来的覆藏之相。「不悦」即不快乐,是苦的,意指不喜好。显示巴利原文
Parasampattikhīyanaṃ parasampattiyā usūyanaṃ. Issati parasampattiṃ na sahatīti issā. Tathā hesā ‘‘parasampattiyā akkhamanalakkhaṇā’’ti vuccati. Tatthāti parasampattiyaṃ. Anabhiratirasā abhiratipaṭipakkhakiccā. Vimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā parasampattiṃ passitumpi appadānato. Nigūhanalakkhaṇaṃ attano sampattiyā parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanato. Asukhāyanaṃ na sukhanaṃ dukkhanaṃ, arocananti adhippāyo.
「已作恶覆盖」:对已造作的身恶行等恶业加以覆藏。它以彼恶的障碍而现起,故说「以彼为障碍现起」;此即诡诈。具此诡诈之人,犹如以灰覆盖的火炭,以水覆盖的树桩,或以破布包裹的刀。
宣扬不存在的功德:即展现自身本不具有的戒等功德。具足此虚伪之人,鼓吹莫须有的功德,随其相应之心而现行为,「如是心,如是行」,令人难以测知,全不知其腹背。因此——显示巴利原文
Katassa kāyaduccaritādipāpassa paṭicchādanaṃ katapāpapaṭicchādanaṃ. Tassa pāpassa āvaraṇabhāvena paccupatiṭṭhatīti tadāvaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānā, māyā, yāya samannāgato puggalo bhasmachanno viya aṅgāro, udakachanno viya khāṇu, pilotikapaṭicchāditaṃ viya ca satthaṃ hoti. Avijjamānaguṇappakāsanaṃ attani avijjamānasīlādiguṇavibhāvanaṃ, yena sāṭheyyena samannāgatassa puggalassa asantaguṇasambhāvanena cittānurūpakiriyāviharato ‘‘evaṃcitto, evaṃkiriyo’’ti dubbiññeyyattā kucchiṃ vā piṭṭhiṃ vā jānituṃ na sakkā. Yato –
‘‘Vāmena sūkaro hoti, dakkhiṇena ajāmigo; Sarena nelako hoti, visāṇena jaraggavo’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.296; vibha. aṭṭha. 894; mahāni. aṭṭha. 166) –
如此,便与所说的药叉猪相似。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttayakkasūkarasadiso hoti.
心的膨胀、僵硬与粗涩状态。“不谦逊而住”:即不安住于柔和。“以不柔和现起”:以不柔和的方式现起,或令不柔和性现前;此即是固执。具足此固执的人,犹如吞下犁头铁的蟒蛇,亦如充满气的皮囊,全身僵硬,见到应尊敬者也不肯弯腰,唯以偏狭的方式行事。“作上”:指更进一步的造作。“特别相违”:指更为殊胜的敌对性——当别人做了某事,他便以加倍的方式生起争执。显示巴利原文
Cittassa uddhumātabhāvo thaddhalūkhabhāvo. Appatissayavuttīti anivātavutti. Amaddavākārena paccupatiṭṭhati, amaddavataṃ vā paccupaṭṭhapetīti amaddavatāpaccupaṭṭhāno, thambho, yena samannāgato puggalo gilitanaṅgalasīso viya ajagaro, vātabharitabhastā viya ca thaddho hutvā garuṭṭhāniye ca disvā onamitumpi na icchati, pariyanteneva carati. Karaṇassa uttarakiriyā karaṇuttariyaṃ. Visesato paccanīkabhāvo vipaccanīkatā. Parena hi kismiñci kate taddiguṇaṃ karaṇavasena sārambho pavattati.
“慢”:依卧具等行相而高举自己。轻蔑亦由此类造作之途径,表现为高举的状态。“我慢”:即‘我是优越者’等执取自我的高举。“极慢”:征服他人之后更为增上的高慢。关于此,曾有这样的说法:“先时将自身视为下劣,后时则视为优越。”显示巴利原文
Seyyādiākārehi unnamanaṃ unnati. Omānopi hi evaṃ karaṇamukhena sampaggahavaseneva pavattati. ‘‘Ahamasmi seyyo’’tiādinā ahaṃkaraṇaṃ sampaggaho ahaṅkāro. Pare abhibhavitvā adhikaṃ unnamanaṃ abbhunnati. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbakāle attānaṃ hīnato dahati aparakāle seyyato’’ti (vibha. 877).
“陶醉的状态”:依出身等,心所呈现的沉醉行相;或者,由于某一法而使一个人被称为陶醉,该法即是陶醉的状态。它有执取醉味的作用,即执取陶醉的作用。当陶醉转起时,它仿佛让相应法执取其沉醉行相,同时也让具足此陶醉的人变得如此,犹如心的迷狂。“以迷狂为现起”:它藉由我慢将此人变得不可意,如同心的迷狂,故以迷狂为现起。“心的放逸”:不摄持念而舍弃心,即是心的放逸,意为忘失正念。“放逸的不断提供”:指如前所述的放逸持续不断地提供,即反复地舍弃。这些包括忿怒等,或贪等。相、作用、现起等已作说明。由于法之间的差别,此处未收录足处(近因)。释词方面,如“kujjhatīti kodho,upanayhatīti upanāho”等,容易了解,故不赘言。从义理上说,kodho即是嗔恚,upanāho亦是如此,它们仅为转起行相上的差别。贬损、恼害、斗诤,是跟随嗔恚俱起的心所法。诡诈、虚伪、固执、陶醉、放逸,是跟随贪俱起的心所法。其中的固执,或可作为慢的一种差别,应从心的僵硬状态来理解。显示巴利原文
Mattabhāvo jātiādiṃ paṭicca cittassa majjanākāro, yassa vā dhammassa vasena puggalo matto nāma hoti, so dhammo mattabhāvo. Madaggāhaṇaraso madassa gāhaṇakicco. Mado hi attano majjanākāraṃ sampayuttadhamme gāhento viya pavattamāno taṃsamaṅgiṃ puggalampi tathā karonto viya hoti. Ahaṅkāravasena puggalaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ karonto cittassa ummādabhāvo viya hotīti ummādapaccupaṭṭhāno. Satiyā aniggaṇhitvā cittassa vossajjanaṃ cittavossaggo, sativirahitoti attho. Yathāvuttassa vossaggassa anuppadānaṃ punappunaṃ vissajjanaṃ vossaggānuppadānaṃ. Imesaṃ kodhādīnaṃ lobhādīnampi vā. Lakkhaṇādīnīti lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānāni. Padaṭṭhānaṃ pana dhammantaratāya na gahitaṃ. Nibbacanaṃ ‘‘kujjhatīti kodho, upanayhatīti upanāho’’tiādinā suviññeyyamevāti na vuttaṃ, atthato pana kodho doso eva, tathā upanāho. Pavattiākāramattato hi kato nesaṃ bhedo, makkhapaḷāsasārambhā tadākārappavattā paṭighasahagatacittuppādadhammā, māyāsāṭheyyathambhamadappamādā tadākārappavattā lobhasahagatacittuppādadhammā. Thambho vā mānaviseso cittassa thaddhabhāvena gahetabbato, tathā mado. Tathā hi so ‘‘māno maññanā’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 878) niddiṭṭho. Idha pana mānātimānānaṃ visuṃ gahitattā majjanākārena pavattadhammā eva ‘‘mado’’ti gahetabbā. Sesānaṃ dhammantarabhāvo pākaṭo eva.
为何在此只选取这八个二法呢?难道其他烦恼法不存在吗?并非不存在。然而,对于贪著财利者,这些法特别会成为烦恼。为了阐明那种特殊性,并显示贪著财利者的贪等生起之相,故开始说“特别”等。其中,“于此”是指在这些贪等之中;“未获得”指未获得财利等;“由此所生的忿怒”应连起来理解;“虽有”指虽然存在;“嫉妒”即生起嫉妒;“愤恨”是其同义词,所以注中描述为“嫉妒、怨恨、愤恨”;或因生起嫉妒时,心必受染污,故说“愤恨”;“他的”指那贪著财利者;“如此行道”即行于宣扬不实功德之道;“无法教诫”以此显示固执是难以接受教诲的法,任何以告诫方式说法时,他都无法接受;“以固执……慢想”以此显示固执是慢的差别,或说以固执为原因;“若陶醉”指若导致陶醉;“于欲……放逸”以此显示由于陶醉,必然陷入放逸。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha ete eva aṭṭha dukā gahitā, kimito aññepi kilesadhammā natthīti? No natthi, ime pana āmisadāyādassa savisesaṃ kilesāya saṃvattantīti taṃ visesaṃ vibhāventena āmisadāyādassa lobhādīnaṃ pavattanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha etthāti etesu lobhādīsu. Alabhanto āmisanti adhippāyo. Tatuttari uppanno kodhoti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Santepīti vijjamānepi. Issatīti issaṃ janeti. Padussatīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Tathā hi sā ‘‘issati dussati padussatī’’tiādinā niddiṭṭhā. Yasmā vā issaṃ janento ekaṃsato paduṭṭhacitto eva hoti, tasmā ‘‘padussatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Assāti āmisadāyādassa. Evaṃ paṭipannoti evaṃ asantaguṇappakāsanaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipanno. Ovadituṃ asakkuṇeyyoti etena thambho nāma dovacassakaraṇo dhammoti dasseti. Kiñci vadati ovādadānavasena. Thambhena…pe… maññantoti iminā ca thambhassa mānavisesabhāvaṃ dasseti, thambhena vā hetunāti attho. Matto samānoti matto honto. Kāma…pe… pamajjatīti etena madavasena ekaṃsato pamādamāpajjatīti dasseti.
“如此”:通过这样显示贪著财利者的贪等生起次第,也显示了本经中它们的说法次第,应如此理解。应这样连接:“不仅以这些,而且未从其他此类恶法中解脱”。“哪些呢?”:即过贪、多欲等。贪著财利有如此大的过患,故应生起更强烈的悚惧感,这是此处的教导,应知。“于此”:指在本经中。“一切处”:指所有部分。“无差别”:即这里首先显示的真理连接方式,适用于一切部分,应知。显示巴利原文
Evanti iminā āmisadāyādassa lobhādīnaṃ uppattikkamadassaneneva idha pāḷiyaṃ nesaṃ desanākkamopi dassitoti daṭṭhabbo. Na kevalaṃ imeheva, atha kho aññehi ca evarūpehi pāpakehi dhammehi aparimutto hotīti sambandho. Ke pana teti? Atricchatāmahicchatādayoti. Evaṃ mahādīnavā āmisadāyādatāti tato balavataro saṃvego janetabboti ayamettha ovādo veditabbo. Etthāti etasmiṃ sutte. Sabbatthāti sabbesu vāresu. Nibbisesoyevāti eteneva paṭhamataraṃ idha dassitasaccayojanānayena sabbavāresu yojetabboti veditabbo.
“为令智熟悉与明净的目的”:为了阐明八支、七支等差别,以修习为熟悉之义,称为“智之熟悉”,其目的为令智明净,即获得善巧。“于此”:指在圣道中。“差别”:指特殊之处。“次第”:即支的说明顺序。“修习方式”:即修习的方法。在解释简略所说的“有时八支,有时七支”时,进而说“此”等内容。其中,“依出世间初禅那”:即依出世间初禅那。在此,某些禅那的法即是道的自性,故不能将禅那与道截然分开,因此不说“与出世间初禅那俱行”,而只说“依出世间初禅那”。或者,“依出世间初禅那”的意思是:成为出世间后,依初禅那的方式,应如此理解。圣道依于作为观的基础或已遍熟的初禅那,成为八支。或者,对于未得禅那的干观者,或虽得禅那但不以初禅那为基者,或于杂行作遍熟而生起的圣道,也成为八支;为显示其八支性源于初禅那的状态,故说“依初禅那之方式”。同样地,“依其余禅那之方式”等,应随顺理解其义。显示巴利原文
Ñāṇaparicayapāṭavatthanti maggassa aṭṭhaṅgasattaṅgatādivisesavibhāvanāya ñāṇassa āsevanaṭṭhena paricayo ñāṇaparicayo, tassa paṭubhāvatthaṃ kosallatthaṃ. Etthāti ariyamagge. Bhedoti viseso. Kamoti aṅgānaṃ desanānupubbī. Bhāvanānayoti bhāvanāvidhi. ‘‘Kadāci aṭṭhaṅgiko, kadāci sattaṅgiko’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto puna ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānavasenāti lokuttarassa paṭhamajjhānassa vasena. Ettha ca keci jhānadhammā maggasabhāvāti ekantato jhānaṃ maggato visuṃ katvā vattuṃ na sakkāti ‘‘lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānasahito’’ti avatvā ‘‘lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānavasena’’icceva vuttaṃ. Atha vā lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānavasenāti lokuttarā hutvā paṭhamajjhānassa vasenāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Ariyamaggo hi vipassanāya pādakabhūtassa, sammasitassa vā paṭhamajjhānassa vasena aṭṭhaṅgiko hoti. Atha vā ajhānalābhino sukkhavipassakassa, jhānalābhino vā pādakamakatvā paṭhamajjhānassa, pakiṇṇakasaṅkhārānaṃ vā sammasane uppanno ariyamaggo aṭṭhaṅgiko hoti, svāssa aṭṭhaṅgikabhāvo paṭhamajjhānikabhāvenāti dassento ‘‘paṭhamajjhānavasenā’’ti āha. Evaṃ ‘‘avasesajjhānavasenā’’ti etthāti yathārahaṃ attho veditabbo.
如果圣道也可以是七支,为何经文中只说是“八支”?对此,他解释说:“这是就最殊胜的说法而言”等。正如这里,从道支的角度来看,道有八支与七支的差别;同样地,从觉支的角度来看,也应了知有七支与六支的差别,因为无喜的禅那具有六支。然而,这里的教导是依道支的角度而说的,这一差别在注疏中并未被指出。所谓“在这之后”,意思是:从此八支再往前,从殊胜的角度,或从此七支再往前、从低劣的角度,都再无别的道支。问:在《分别论》〈道分别〉的五支部分中,不是提到了五种道支吗?而且,在《中部·大六处经》中也说:“如实者的见、如实者的思惟、如实者的精进、如实者的念、如实者的定,这就是他的正定。”但在前分中又说:“实则他的身业、语业、活命,在此之前便已遍净。”如此一来,正语等道支不也包含其中了吗?答:确实如此。不过,那样说是为了显示正见等这五种道支还有令其他支分成就的增上作用。因此,不应认为存在缺少正语等支的圣道。所以说“在这之后再也没有别的道支”,此说极为善巧。显示巴利原文
Yadi ariyamaggo sattaṅgikopi hoti, atha kasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgiko’’icceva vuttanti āha ‘‘ukkaṭṭhaniddesato’’tiādi. Yathā cettha paṭipadāya maggavasena aṭṭhaṅgikasattaṅgikabhedo , evaṃ bojjhaṅgavasena sattaṅgikachaḷaṅgikabhedo veditabbo appītikajjhānavasena chaḷaṅgikattā, maggavasena pana desanā āgatāti svāyaṃ bhedo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na uddhaṭo. Ito paranti ito aṭṭhaṅgato paraṃ ukkaṃsato, avakaṃsato pana sattaṅgato paraṃ maggaṅgaṃ nāma natthīti. Nanu maggavibhaṅge (vibha. 493-502) pañcaṅgikavāre pañceva maggaṅgāni uddhaṭāni, mahāsaḷāyatane (ma. ni. 3.431) ca ‘‘yā tathābhūtassa diṭṭhi, yo tathābhūtassa saṅkappo, yo tathābhūtassa vāyāmo, yā tathābhūtassa sati, yo tathābhūtassa samādhi, svāssa hoti sammāsamādhī’’ti vatvā pubbabhāgavasena pana ‘‘pubbeva kho panassa kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ ājīvo suparisuddho hotī’’ti sammāvācādayo āgatāti? Saccametaṃ, taṃ pana sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ kārāpakaṅgānaṃ atirekakiccadassanavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā na ariyamaggo sammāvācādivirahito atthīti ‘‘ito parañhi maggaṅgaṃ natthī’’ti suvuttametanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「一切善法」指所有的善法,此处的属格表示区分。在欲界等各类善法中,此正见最为殊胜。正因为它是殊胜的,才说“以慧为活命者,其活命被赞为最上”。至于道正见在一切法中最殊胜的情况,更不待言。「于善的场合」指在善心生起的时刻。正见之所以被称为“前导”,是因为它能如实洞察善等诸法的自性,从而对同时生起的诸法起到引导作用。因此,他说:“他了知正见为正见”等。正见是其来源,故正思惟是“以此为来源”,因为依于正见,方有正思惟。“由此而生起的”指从那个来源生起。虽然是从那个来源生起,却说成“从彼生起”,这是将近因方便说为原因。因此他说:“其余的道支都从那个来源生起。”于是他更说“正见者”等。就如正见是正思惟的殊胜助缘,正思惟对于正知是殊胜助缘,正知对于正发起是殊胜助缘,正发起对于正清净是殊胜助缘,正清净对于正精进是殊胜助缘,正精进对于正安立是殊胜助缘,正安立对于正定是殊胜助缘。因此,前前对于后后是殊胜助缘。显示巴利原文
Sabbakusalānanti sabbesaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kāmāvacarādivasena taṃtaṃkusaladhammesu sā sammādiṭṭhi seṭṭhā. Tassā seṭṭhabhāvena hi ‘‘paññājīviṃ jīvitamāhu seṭṭha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 184) vuttaṃ, maggasammādiṭṭhiyā pana sabbaseṭṭhabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Kusalavāreti kusaluppattisamaye. Pubbaṅgamā kusalādidhammānaṃ yāthāvasabhāvabodhena sampayuttadhammānaṃ pariṇāyakabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhiṃ sammādiṭṭhīti pajānātī’’tiādi. Sā sammādiṭṭhi pabhavo etassāti tappabhavo, sammāsaṅkappo. Sammādassanavasena hi sammāsaṅkappo hoti. Tato abhinibbattānīti tappabhavābhinibbattāni. Tappabhavābhinibbattānipi ‘‘tadabhinibbattānī’’ti vuccanti kāraṇakāraṇepi kāraṇūpacāratoti āha ‘‘tappabhavābhinibbattāni sesaṅgānī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissā’’tiādi. Yathā hi sammādassanaṃ sammāvitakkanassa visesapaccayo, evaṃ sammāvitakkanaṃ sammāpariggahassa sammāpariggaho sammāsamuṭṭhānassa, sammāsamuṭṭhānaṃ sammāvodānassa, sammāvodānaṃ sammāvāyāmassa, sammāvāyāmo sammāupaṭṭhānassa, sammāupaṭṭhānaṃ sammādhānassa visesapaccayo, tasmā ‘‘purimaṃ purimaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa visesapaccayo hotī’’ti iminā visesapaccayabhāvadassanatthena kamena etāni sammādiṭṭhiādīni aṅgāni vuttānīti dassitāni.
「修行理趣」是指止与观以双运方式生起的修行方法。这也是在圣道刹那的修行方法。但在其前分阶段,有些人的修行理趣以止为先导,有些人则以观为先导。为了显示这一方式,才开始说「有某一类人」等。其中,第一种是依止行者而说,第二种是依观行者而说。因此他说:「在这里,有某一类人」等。「那」是指止、定,或禅那法,这是其含义。「与彼相应」是指与定相应,或与禅那相应的法。而且,这一理趣大略是依止行者通过无色界的方式,或于其中也通过禅那的方式投入修观,故如此说。「修习观」是指从行道知见清净开始,令已如实证得的嫩观得以增长。「道生起」是指前分阶段的世间道生起。「亲近」是依厌离随观。「修习」是依欲解脱的意愿。「多修习」是依审察随观。或者,「亲近」是依怖畏现起智,「多修习」是依出起随观。诸结断除,随眠彻底消灭,这是依道的次第。显示巴利原文
Bhāvanānayoti samathavipassanānaṃ yuganaddhabhāvena pavatto bhāvanāvidhi. Ayañhi ariyamaggakkhaṇe bhāvanāvidhi. Tassa pana pubbabhāge bhāvanānayo kassaci samathapubbaṅgamo hoti , kassaci vipassanāpubbaṅgamoti. Taṃ vidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kocī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha paṭhamo samathayānikassa vasena vutto, dutiyo vipassanāyānikassa. Tenāha ‘‘idhekacco’’tiādi. Tanti samathaṃ samādhiṃ, jhānadhammeti vā attho. Taṃsampayutteti samādhisampayutte, jhānasampayutte vā dhamme. Ayañca nayo yebhuyyena samathayānikā arūpamukhena, tatthāpi jhānamukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ karontīti katvā vutto. Vipassanaṃ bhāvayatoti paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiṃ ārabhitvā yathādhigataṃ taruṇavipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa. Maggo sañjāyatīti pubbabhāgiyo lokiyamaggo uppajjati. Āsevati nibbidānupassanāvasena. Bhāveti muñcitukamyatāvasena. Bahulīkaroti paṭisaṅkhānupassanāvasena. Āsevati vā bhayatūpaṭṭhānañāṇavasena. Bahulīkaroti vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāvasena. Saṃyojanāni pahīyanti,anusayā byantī honti maggapaṭipāṭiyā.
“未先生起止”这一绝对限定,排除了近行定,而非排除刹那定。因为没有刹那定,观便不可能生起。“由于观的圆满”,是指由于观的圆满,达到了出起随观的状态。“于那时所生的”,是指在那一圣道刹那中生起的正见等法。此处的属格表示区分。“以最舍为所缘”,是以最舍为所缘。最舍、遣舍、弃舍与究竟,意义相同,都是指涅槃。因此,意思是以涅槃为所缘。“心的一境性”,是指道正定。因为圣道全然入定,这是由于它已彻底断除不能入定的因——烦恼。其余的部分,应按照前面已说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Samathaṃ anuppādetvāvāti avadhāraṇena upacārasamādhiṃ nivatteti, na khaṇikasamādhiṃ. Na hi khaṇikasamādhiṃ vinā vipassanā sambhavati. Vipassanāpāripūriyāti vipassanāya paripuṇṇatāya vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvappattiyā. Tatthajātānanti tasmiṃ ariyamaggakkhaṇe uppannānaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Vavassaggārammaṇatoti vavassaggassa ārammaṇatāya. Vavassaggo vossaggo paṭinissaggoti ca apavaggoti ca atthato ekaṃ, nibbānanti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā nibbānassa ārammaṇakaraṇenāti attho. Cittassa ekaggatāti maggasammāsamādhimāha. Ariyamaggo hi ekanta samāhito asamādhānahetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ samucchedanato. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
“成为双运”:在那时,定与慧达到了平衡的状态,这种平衡值得期许。因为在圣道刹那,并不像修止时那样,定在作用上更值得期许;也不像修观时那样,慧在作用上更值得期许。而是由于二者的平衡,彼此互不超越,犹如双运般共同运作。因此说:“止与观成为双运。”显示巴利原文
Yuganaddhāvahonti tadā samādhipaññānaṃ samarasatāya icchitabbato. Maggakkhaṇe hi na samathabhāvanāyaṃ viya samādhi, vipassanābhāvanāyaṃ viya ca paññā kiccato adhikā icchitabbā, samarasatāya pana aññamaññassa anativattanaṭṭhena dvepi yuganaddhā viya pavattanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samathavipassanā yuganaddhāva hontī’’ti.
4. 《怖畏恐惧经》注疏显示巴利原文
4. Bhayabheravasuttavaṇṇanā
34 “如是我闻”等,是《怖畏恐惧经》。如何安立呢?有人先这样主张:“这是依问而立”。问有两种,分为明显与不明显。其中,某个开示之相——即想要了解的意义——是通过带有“kiṃ”字的方式显示出来,那就是明显的问,例如:“世间何种财物于人最胜?”(《相应部》1.246;《经集》183)。而如果某个开示之相,其想要了解的意义不用“kiṃ”字,只是通过单纯的语言表达方式显示出来,那便是不明显的问。因为想要了解的意义被称为“问、询问”,所以此处“ye me bho gotamā”等语即为不明显的问,因此称为“依问而立”。但这种说法没有根据,因为那位婆罗门在说“ye me bho gotamā”等语时,并非出于疑惑、犹豫或困惑而说,而是为了宣说自己如理思择的意义,表达对世尊的净信与推崇,因此才说“于世尊得净信”等(《中部》注疏1.34)。“Vihāreti”指住在精舍中。“Avicchinneyeva”指正在持续进行中;这两个词都有“住于”的意思。这个国师的地位,连同顶髻等庄严宝物一起,显示巴利原文
34.Evaṃme sutanti bhayabheravasuttaṃ. Ko nikkhepo? Keci tāva evamāhu ‘‘pucchāvasiko nikkhepo’’ti. Duvidhā hi pucchā pākaṭāpākaṭabhedato. Tattha yassā desanāya nimittabhūto ñātuṃ icchito attho kiṃ-saddapubbakena pakāsīyati, sā pākaṭā pucchā yathā ‘‘kiṃsūdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’nti evamādi (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 183). Yassā pana desanāya nimittabhūto ñātuṃ icchito attho kiṃ-saddarahitena kevaleneva saddapayogena pakāsīyati, sā apākaṭā pucchā. Ñātuṃ icchito hi attho ‘‘pañhā, pucchā’’ti vuccati, tasmāyeva idha ‘‘ye me bho gotamā’’tiādikā apākaṭāti ‘‘pucchāvasiko nikkhepo’’ti. Tayidaṃ akāraṇaṃ, yasmā so brāhmaṇo ‘‘yeme bho gotamā’’tiādīni vadanto na tattha kaṅkhī vicikicchī saṃsayamāpanno avoca, atha kho attanā yathānicchitamatthaṃ bhagavati pasādabhāvabahumānaṃ pavedento kathesi. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavati pasādaṃ alatthā’’tiādi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34). Vihāreti vihārake nivāse. Avicchinneyevāti pavattamāneyeva. Padadvayassapi vasante evāti attho. Etaṃ purohitaṭṭhānaṃ uṇhīsādikakudhabhaṇḍehi saddhiṃ laddhaṃ, tathā ca ‘‘assa raññā dinna’’nti vadanti. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ tassa raññā dinna’’nti. Brahmanti vedaṃ. So pana mantabrahmakappavasena tividho. Tattha mantā padhānaṃ mūlabhāvato, ye aṭṭhakādīhi pavuttā, itare tannissayena jātā, tena tesaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ ‘‘mante sajjhāyatī’’ti . Te hi guttabhāsitabbatāya ‘‘mantā’’ti vuccanti. Idameva hīti avadhāraṇena ‘‘brahmato jātā’’tiādikaṃ niruttiṃ paṭikkhipati.
“以某因由故”(《Sārattha·Ṭīkā》毘兰若品注疏2;《相应部复注》1.1.1;《增支部复注》2.2.16)中,这里的具格表因义。因义是指动作的原因,而不是像工具那样表示动作本身。因此,此处“前往”这一动作,正是为了证得种种殊胜功德,正如“依食而住”等句中那样,此处的具格恰表因义,而非工具义,因为工具义在这里并不恰当。所以才有“以某因由故”等说。世尊因为正法果恒常转起、无有间断、殊胜、甘美、广博、有甘露味,故而譬喻为甘美果实恒常结出的大树。实际上,正是由于执取了想要享用甘美果实的意图,大树的甘美果性才被执取。显示巴利原文
Yena vā kāraṇenāti (sārattha. ṭī. verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ 2; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.16) hetumhi idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Hetuattho hi kiriyākāraṇaṃ, na karaṇaṃ viya kiriyattho, tasmā nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamatthā idha upasaṅkamanakiriyāti ‘‘annena vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuatthamevetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ yuttaṃ, na karaṇatthaṃ tassa ayujjamānattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yena vā kāraṇenā’’tiādi. Bhagavato satatappavattaniratisayasāduvipulāmatarasasaddhammaphalatāya sāduphalaniccaphalitamahārukkhena bhagavā upamito, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyaggahaṇeneva hi mahārukkhassa sāduphalatā gahitāti.
“Upasaṅkamī”是指已前往。想要到达某处而行走的人,通过超越一个又一个区域而前往,便可称为“已前往”,因此解作“即已去了”,意思便是已到达。“Upasaṅkamitvā”是对先前动作的说明,故说“显示前往完毕”之义。“Tato”是指到达“upasaṅkamī”所说的那个地点以后,从已到达之处。如同《相应部复注》1.1.112中所说,在询问“安忍”等内容时,就像世尊用“婆罗门,你能安忍吗?你能维持吗?”等话语来询问安忍等,借着先开口而和那位婆罗门一同生起欢悦;同样,那位婆罗门也与世尊一同生起欢悦——这便是其中的前后关联。为了用譬喻显示那种一同生起的欢悦,才说“如凉水”等。其中,“sammodita”指相会合,“ekībhāva”指透过欢悦这个动作而成为等同、成为一味。“Khamanīya”是在问:“这个四轮、九门的身车,因为刹那坏灭的自性而本性难忍,你能忍耐吗?”“Yāpanīya”是在问:“依赖资具而进行,称为长时相续的维持,能得以维持吗?”“Appābādha”显示巴利原文
Upasaṅkamīti upasaṅkanto. Sampattukāmatāya hi kiñci ṭhānaṃ gacchanto taṃtaṃpadesātikkamanena upasaṅkami, upasaṅkantoti vā vattabbataṃ labhati. Tenāha ‘‘gatoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti, upagatoti attho. Upasaṅkamitvāti pubbakālakiriyāniddesoti āha ‘‘upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpana’’nti. Tatoti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patto ‘‘upasaṅkamī’’ti vutto, tato upagataṭṭhānato. Yathā khamanīyādīni pucchantoti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.112) yathā bhagavā ‘‘kacci te brāhmaṇa khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīya’’ntiādinā khamanīyādīni pucchanto tena brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi pubbabhāsitāya, tadanukaraṇena evaṃ sopi brāhmaṇo bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosīti yojanā. Taṃ pana samappavattamodataṃ upamāya dassetuṃ ‘‘sītodakaṃ viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sammoditanti saṃsanditaṃ. Ekībhāvanti sammodanakiriyāya samānataṃ ekarūpataṃ. Khamanīyanti ‘‘idaṃ catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ khaṇabhaṅguratāya sabhāvato dussahaṃ, kacci khamituṃ sakkuṇeyya’’nti pucchati. Yāpanīyanti paccayāyattavuttikaṃ cirappabandhasaṅkhātāya yāpanāya kacci yāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Sīsarogādiābādhābhāvena kacci appābādhaṃ. Dukkhajīvikābhāvena kacci appātaṅkaṃ. Taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇe uṭṭhānasukhatāya kacci lahuṭṭhānaṃ. Tadanarūpabalayogato kacci balaṃ. Sukhavihārasabbhāvena kacci phāsuvihāro atthīti tattha tattha kacci-saddaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo.
已经变得强有力的喜,就是“喜”本身。微弱、初生的喜则是“欢悦”。“能生欢悦、能作”,是指能产生欢悦,这也就是“能令人欢悦的”,故说“由于能生欢悦”。为了显示“应当被欢悦的,也就是由于值得被欢悦的状态”这个含义,便说“由于值得被欢悦的状态”。“由于应被忆念的状态”,是指应被随念的状态。原本应说为“应被忆念的”,拉长元音后便说成了“应被忆持的”。“由于听闻之乐”,是就话语听起来甜美入耳而说的;“由于随念之乐”,是就反复思惟品味时所感受的喜乐而说的。“由于音节的清净”,是指因使用通俗自然的语言而展现出的言辞巧妙;“由于义的清净”,是指所说义理远离了一切随烦恼的染污。“以种种事理”,是指以种种原因与方式。显示巴利原文
Balavappattā pīti pītiyeva. Taruṇapīti pāmojjaṃ. Sammodanaṃ janeti karotīti sammodanikaṃ, tadeva sammodanīyanti āha ‘‘sammodajananato’’ti. Sammoditabbato sammodanīyanti imaṃ pana atthaṃ dassento ‘‘sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato’’ti āha. Saritabbabhāvatoti anussaritabbabhāvato. ‘‘Saraṇīya’’nti vattabbe dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttaṃ. Suyyamānasukhatoti āpāthamadhurataṃ āha, anussariyamānasukhatoti vimaddaramaṇīyataṃ. Byañjanaparisuddhatāyāti sabhāvaniruttibhāvena tassā kathāya vacanacāturiyamāha, atthaparisuddhatāyāti atthassa nirupakkilesataṃ. Anekehi pariyāyehīti anekehi kāraṇehi.
遮除太远与太近,即成立了‘不太远也不太近’这一适当距离;若从最低标准而言,当知此即两人伸直手臂时指尖恰好能相触。‘伸出脖子’是说转动脖子向外伸展。显示巴利原文
Abhidūraaccāsannapaṭikkhepena nātidūranāccāsannaṃ nāma gahitaṃ, taṃ pana avakaṃsato ubhinnaṃ pasāritahatthasaṅghaṭṭanena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gīvaṃ pasāretvāti gīvaṃ parivattanavasena pasāretvā.
「Ye me」在此因连音规则而省略了i音,为显示原形,故拆解为「ye ime」等。由于种姓高贵而生的良家子,即指「种姓良家子」,因此说「出生于高贵家族」。由于具足端正的品行而成就的良家子,即指「正行良家子」,因此说「正行具足者」。无论其家族如何默默无闻。那位婆罗门所意指的比丘,实际上兼备这两种良家子的素质,因此他说:‘但在这里,由于这两种原因,他们都是真正的良家子。’显示巴利原文
Yemeti ettha sandhivasena ikāralopoti dassento ‘‘ye ime’’tiādimāha. Uccākulīnatāya jātivasena abhijātā jātikulaputtā. Tenāha ‘‘uccākulappasutā’’ti. Ācārasampattiyā abhijātā ācārakulaputtā. Tenāha ‘‘ācārasampannā’’ti. Yattha katthaci apākaṭepi kule. Tena brāhmaṇena adhippetā bhikkhūsu duvidhāpi saṃvijjantīti āha ‘‘idha pana dvīhipi kāraṇehi kulaputtāyevā’’ti.
「Saddhā」一词是以工具格意义用主格形式说出的,故说「以信心」;或「Saddhā」意即「基于信」。依此解释,经文应视为省略了ya-kāra的表达。「从家」是指从居家生活出离,此处省略了后词,或是依所依转喻的表达。「以乞食等为性相的比丘状态,与出家具行的比丘状态共同集起」,因此他说「出家与比丘身份」。当特指以甘马语为特性的比丘状态时,则应知ca字是合集义。「无家状态」即以此标示了依出家所成的极净戒行功德特质;于此,遮止耕田、护牛等业应从无有生起等方面来了知。然而,在摄取其余时,由于有依皈依等而出家、依皈依等而受具足戒的种种差别,故说「以一切方式」,意即如此如此的方式。「前导性」是指以实践为导引,而非以身行路为前导,因此说「导师」,即依正行道引导至涅槃者。「利他之行」是指现法利益等利益行。「令执持」是于增上戒等中极尽劝导,而非仅仅言说;为显明此义,故于「执持者」后又说「教导者」。「随见」是指随顺见。显示巴利原文
Saddhāti idaṃ karaṇatthe paccattavacananti āha ‘‘saddhāyā’’ti, saddhāti vā saddahitvāti attho. Imasmiṃ pakkhe pāḷiyaṃ ya-kāralopena niddesoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Agāratoti agāravāsato, uttarapadalopena, nissayūpacārena vā ayaṃ niddesoti. Bhikkhanasīlatādilakkhaṇo bhikkhubhāvo pabbajjāsahacaritāya saddhiṃ bhikkhubhāvaṃ anvācinantoti āha ‘‘pabbajjaṃ bhikkhubhāvañcā’’ti. Kammavācālakkhaṇe pana bhikkhubhāve adhippete samuccayattho ca-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Anagārassa bhāvoti etena pabbajjānissito suvisuddho sīlācāraguṇaviseso gahito, kasigorakkhādikammapaṭikkhepo idha anuppādādīhi veditabbo. Sesaggahaṇe pana saraṇagamanādivasena pabbajjāya, saraṇagamanādivasena upasampadāya ca anekabhedattā āha ‘‘sabbathāpī’’ti, tena tena pakārenāti attho. Puratogāmitā paṭipattigamanena, na kāyagamanenāti āha ‘‘nāyako’’ti , sammāpaṭipattiyā nibbānasampāpakoti attho. Hitakiriyāyāti diṭṭhadhammikādihitacariyāya. Gāhaṇaṃ adhisīlādīsu accantāya niyojanaṃ, na kathanamattanti dassento ‘‘gāhetā’’ti vatvā ‘‘sikkhāpetā’’ti āha. Diṭṭhānugatinti diṭṭhiyā anugamananti dassento ‘‘dassanānugati’’nti vatvā sikkhāttayasaṅgahaṃ bhagavato sāsanaṃ tena diṭṭhattā diṭṭhi, tassa tasseva khamanavasena khanti, ruccanavasena ruci, taṃdiṭṭhikhantirucikāva bhagavato sāvakāti āha ‘‘yaṃdiṭṭhiko’’tiādi.
「这位据说获得了」是连接词。「如同对天子」等,是为了显示没有任何衰败,而对以「以其信心」等所说的出家状态使之昭著。「以其信心从家出离,出家已」,这是对喜极欢悦等状态的原因说明。「以食物衣物为极致而满足」,这应理解为无恐惧、无担忧状态的原因说明。显示巴利原文
Esa kira alatthāti sambandho. Devaputte viyātiādi kassaci pārijuññassa abhāvadīpanato ‘‘saddhāyā’’tiādinā vuttassa pabbajitabhāvassa pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ. Saddhāya gharā nikkhamma pabbajitvāti idaṃ haṭṭhapahaṭṭhādibhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭheti idaṃ anussaṅkitāparisaṅkitatāya kāraṇavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“如此这般”等叠语,应视为出于称赞,或出于净信而作。因为“evaṃ”一词确实具有接受和随喜之意。“mamaṃ”是作用于近取义(upayoga)的属格词,或者应视为与“maṃ”此字同义的小品词。“ādīni”一词,以“等”字摄持非邪命出家等义。这只是针对那些依信心出家而彰显无贪等性行者所说,而非针对其他有贪等性行者。以上已说。显示巴利原文
Evametantiādinā āmeḍitavacanaṃ sampahaṃsanavasena, pasādavasena vā katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi evaṃ-saddo sampaṭicchanattho abbhanumodanattho ca vutto. Mamanti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, nipātapadaṃ vā etaṃ ‘‘ma’’nti iminā samānatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ādīnīti ādi-saddena najīvikāpakatādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti īdisānaṃyevāti saddhāpabbajjāya vibhāvitaanabhijjhāluādisabhāvānaṃyeva, na itaresaṃ abhijjhālusabhāvānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“诸比丘,即使有比丘抓住我的僧伽梨衣角,紧随我身后,步步踏着我的足迹而行,但他若心怀贪欲,于诸欲中深生贪染,心含嗔恚,心生邪思维,失念,不正知,心不寂静,心意散乱,诸根放逸——那么,他实则离我很远,我亦离他很远。”(《如是语》92)显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṅghāṭikaṇṇe cepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gahetvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandho assa pade padaṃ nikkhipanto, so ca hoti abhijjhālu kāmesu tibbasārāgo byāpannacitto paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo muṭṭhassati asampajāno asamāhito vibbhantacitto pākaṭindriyo, atha kho ārakāva mama ahañca tassā’’ti (itivu. 92).
“深入而成就所欲之义”等:“苦”即指难以成就。注释中为显示彼处住所本身即是苦,故说“难以成就、难忍”。“阿兰若林野”指具足阿兰若相的森林丛。因“林野”一词亦用于树木密集之处,故称阿兰若。“虽且”是表示容许、可能的助词。容许什么?无余地宣说“村外即是阿兰若”,故说“无余地说”等。可能什么?成就阿兰若支。成就阿兰若支者,方特称为“阿兰若”,故说“即彼五百弓”等。“出至门槛外”:出离门槛之外,即从此之外起始。所谓“门槛外”,若有二、三门槛,则从最外门槛开始;若无,则从适当之处开始。因为从门槛外开始,人行之境即无怖畏恐惧,故此处并非所指。显示巴利原文
Ajjhogāhetvā adhippetatthaṃ sambhavituṃ sādhetuṃ dukkhānīti durabhisambhavāni. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana tattha nivāsoyeva dukkhoti dassetuṃ ‘‘sambhavituṃ dukkhāni dussahānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Araññavanapatthānīti araññalakkhaṇappattāni vanasaṇḍāni. Vanapattha-saddo hi saṇḍabhūte rukkhasamūhepi vattatīti araññaggahaṇaṃ. Kiñcāpīti anujānanasambhāvanatthe nipāto. Kiṃ anujānāti? Nippariyāyato araññābhāvaṃ ‘‘gāmato bahi arañña’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘nippariyāyenā’’tiādi. Kiṃ sambhāveti? Āraññakaṅganipphādakattaṃ. Yañhi āraññakaṅganipphādakaṃ, taṃ visesato ‘‘arañña’’nti vuttanti. Tenevāha ‘‘yaṃ taṃ pañcadhanusatika’’ntiādi. Nikkhamitvā bahiindakhīlāti indakhīlato bahi nikkhamitvā, tato bahi paṭṭhāyāti attho. Bahi indakhīlāti yattha dve tīṇi indakhīlāni, tattha bahiddhā indakhīlato paṭṭhāya, yattha taṃ natthi, tattha tadarahaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāyāti vadanti. Yasmā bahi indakhīlato paṭṭhāya manussūpacāre bhayabheravaṃ natthi, tasmā idha nādhippetanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“村边”即村之附近。“未行境处”指日常事务不必行之处,故说“不耕不种处”。“边远”:此词在经中取“边远”这一异名而说,故云“置边远这一异名”;而“远”这一异名则应搁置,因为其义已由“边远”一词摄得。否则,“非人行之境”等亦应搁置,故仅依字面而搁置。“远离”:由种种方式而离异;于色等种种所缘,以行住坐卧等种种方式,远离自身之身,不论行、住、坐,唯独自生起。正因应远离者及远离行相有种种差别,故总合为一体而说单数“远离”。“远离难作”意为行远离并非易事。“独一处”即独一身。“乐二二”即喜好二人相随的状态。“如搬运”:如收聚者,以恼害故。故说“如吞食者”:指如起怖畏惊恐而来欲食的夜叉、罗刹、毕舍遮等。“如是者”指未得定者。“由草叶鹿等声”:即风吹草叶等声,及鹿、鸟等可怖之声,乃至种种树桩等显现似夜叉等可怖之相。如此难作、难成之事而能作者,便惊叹:“彼实稀有!”显示巴利原文
Gāmantanti gāmasamīpaṃ. Anupacāraṭṭhānanti niccakiccavasena nupacaritabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yattha na kasīyati na vapīyatī’’ti. Pantānīti iminā ‘‘pariyantāna’’nti imassa pariyāyassa idha pāḷiyaṃ gahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyantānanti imamekaṃ pariyāyaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Dūrānanti pana ayaṃ pariyāyo ṭhapetabbo siyā tassāpi ‘‘pantānī’’ti imināva atthato gahitattā, tathā sati ‘‘na manussūpacārāna’’nti edisānampi ṭhapetabbatā āpajjati, tasmā saddato eva ṭhapanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pavivekanti pakārato, pakārehi vā vivecanaṃ, rūpādiputhuttārammaṇe pakārato gamanādiiriyāpathappakārehi attano kāyassa vivecanaṃ gacchatopi tiṭṭhatopi nisajjatopi ekasseva pavattati. Teneva hi vivecetabbānaṃ vivecanākārassa ca bhedato bahuvidhattā te ekattena gahetvā ‘‘paviveka’’nti ekavacanena vuttaṃ. Dukkaraṃ pavivekanti vā pavivekaṃ kattuṃ na sukhanti attho. Ekībhāveti ekikabhāve. Dvayaṃdvayārāmoti dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ bhāvābhirato. Haranti viyāti saṃharanti viya vighātuppādanena. Tenāha ‘‘ghasanti viyā’’ti, bhayasantāsuppādanena khādituṃ āgatā yakkharakkhasapisācādayo viyāti adhippāyo. Īdisassāti aladdhasamādhino. Tiṇapaṇṇamigādisaddehīti vāteritānaṃ tiṇapaṇṇādīnaṃ migapakkhiādīnañca bhiṃsanakehi bheravehi saddehi vividhehi ca aññehi khāṇuādīhi yakkhādiākārehi upaṭṭhitehi bhiṃsanakehi. Evaṃ dukkaraṃ durabhisambhavaṃ nāma karonto aho acchariyā eteti vimhito.
关于身业等防护部分的解释显示巴利原文
Kāyakammantavārakathāvaṇṇanā
35 “十六处”即经中“凡任何”等所说十六种原因。身业不清净等,对于住阿兰若者,因是心生恐怖之相,特能引起散乱;而身业清净等,因无彼相故,不引起散乱。故说“身业不清净的过患因”等。所谓“十六”,是取清净分而说,说到杂染也只是为了显示清净。“未取所缘者”:指那些身业不清净等者,在阿兰若中见到彼所缘,却未能以“凡任何”等经中所说之理而取著的愚者。“已取所缘者”:于此应知与前相反之义。“自己”:指世尊,即自的意思。“如是者”:即已取所缘者。显示巴利原文
35.Soḷasasuṭhānesūti ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ vakkhamānesu soḷasasu kāraṇesu. Aparisuddhakāyakammantatādayo araññe viharantānaṃ cittutrāsanimittatāya visesato vikkhepāvahā, parisuddhakāyakammantatādayo pana tadabhāvato tesaṃ avikkhepāvahā. Tenāha ‘‘aparisuddhakāyakammantasandosahetū’’tiādi. Soḷasasūti ca vodānapakkhaṃyeva gahetvā vuttaṃ. Saṃkilesaggahaṇampi yāvadeva vodānadassanatthanti. Ārammaṇapariggaharahitānanti aparisuddhakāyakammantādikassa araññe diṭṭhassa tassa ārammaṇassa ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayena pariggaṇhanañāṇarahitānaṃ. Ārammaṇapariggahayuttānanti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Attanāti bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vadati, sayanti attho. Tādisoti ārammaṇapariggahayutto.
“正觉”:依此觉悟,故称正觉,也就是圣道,因此说“证得圣道者”。诸佛证得一切知智,有赖于证得最上道,所以“未正觉者”即指尚未通达四谛之人。“菩提”:应无余地了知、觉悟,故称菩提。“有情”:在菩提中与大精进等具有特殊的相应,故称有情,因此说“觉悟的有情”。由此而有“正等觉”等语。大士自获得决定性的授记之时起,便行于趋向大菩提的乘道——这修行既不是退分,也不是住分,而是胜分与抉择分;正因为如此修行,所以对菩提是完全倾向、完全朝向的,故说“菩萨于菩提专精”。因此说到“燃灯佛时”等。这些都是由八种法的和合具足——显示巴利原文
Sambujjhati etenāti sambodho, ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘ariyamaggappattito’’ti. Aggamaggādhigamādhīno buddhānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamoti āha ‘‘anabhisambuddhassāti appaṭividdhacatusaccassā’’ti. Anavasesato ñeyyaṃ, bujjhituṃ arahatīti bodhi, mahāvīriyatādinā tattha visesayogato sattoti āha ‘‘bujjhanakasattassā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘sammāsambodhi’’ntiādi. Niyatabhāvappattito paṭṭhāya mahāsattā yathā mahābodhiyānapaṭipadā hānabhāgiyā, ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na hoti, atha kho visesabhāgiyā nibbedhabhāgiyā ca hoti, tathā paṭipajjanato bodhiyaṃ ninnagoṇapabbhārā evāti āha ‘‘bodhiyā vā sattasseva laggassevā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘dīpaṅkarassa hī’’tiādi. Aṭṭhadhammasamodhānenāti –
得人身、具足性别、有因、得见导师、
出家、具足功德、有愿求、有欲。”(《佛种姓经》2.59)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Manussattaṃ liṅgasampatti, hetu satthāradassanaṃ; Pabbajjā guṇasampatti, adhikāro ca chandatā’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.59) –
由这八种作为发起成佛志愿支分的法和合、聚集在一起。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ abhinīhārassa aṅgabhūtānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ dhammānaṃ samodhānena samavadhānena.
“Pabbajjūpagatā”(已至出家):即已经达到出家。藉此说明,他们仅是凭藉出家的形式而称为沙门,并非因为已经止息了罪恶。这里所说的婆罗门,仅依出身而言,故说为“惯呼‘尊者’者”等。正因为他们有“尊!尊!”这样称呼的习惯,所以有言:“即使拥有财物,也仍被称为‘惯呼尊者者’。”(《法句经》396;《经集》625)“杀生等”中的“等”字,包含了不与取和非梵行。而“不清净”这一限定词,是针对身业而言,并非针对杀生等行为本身,因为杀生等行为及其加行,都谈不上有丝毫清净。“怖”:指有令人畏惧之义。“畏”:指有令人惊惧之义。“有浊因”:即具有烦恼之因。这里的“有”字,表示随顺之意,故说“因自烦恼故”。针对那种纯粹具有心惊特征的怖畏,故说“有罪过”,因为心惊绝对是罪过,且从令人生畏的意义上说……显示巴利原文
Pabbajjūpagatāti pabbajjaṃ upagatā. Tena pabbajjāmattena samaṇā, na samitapāpatāyāti dasseti. Jātimattena idha brāhmaṇāti adhippetāti āha ‘‘bhovādino vā’’ti. Te hi ‘‘bho bho’’ti vadanasīlā, tenāha ‘‘bhovādī nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano’’ti (dha. pa. 396; su. ni. 625). Pāṇātipātādināti ādi-saddena adinnādānaṃ abrahmacariyañca saṅgaṇhāti. Aparisuddhenāti ca visesanaṃ kāyakammantāpekkhāya, na pāṇātipātādiapekkhāya. Na hi pāṇātipātādiko tassa pubbabhāgapayogo ca koci parisuddho nāma atthi. Bhāyanaṭṭhena bhayaṃ, bhīrutāvahaṭṭhena bheravaṃ. Sandosahetūti sadosahetu. Sa-saddo hi idha sānusāro vutto. Tenāha ‘‘attano dosassa hetū’’ti. Ekantena cittutrāsalakkhaṇassa bhayassa vasena ‘‘sāvajja’’nti vuttaṃ. Cittutrāso hi ekantasāvajjo bhāyanaṭṭhena bhayañcāti. Akkhemanti idaṃ ubhayavasena. Cittutrāsopi hi sarīracittānaṃ anatthāvahato akkhema, tathā bhayānakārammaṇampīti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana atthadvayaṃ yathāsaṅkhyaṃ yojitaṃ. Sayaṃ parikappitabhayānakārammaṇanimittaṃ cittutrāsasamuppādanavasena ānentā bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti viya hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘avhāyantīti pakkosantī’’ti. Teti māritamanussānaṃ ñātimittādayo. Gacchaṃ gahanabhūtaṃ mahantaṃ kaṇṭakasaṇḍaṃ, gumbaṃ nātimahantanti vadanti. Gacchanti pana tiṇavanaṃ veditabbaṃ, ‘‘gacche ruḷhatiṇe’’ti vuttaṃ, gumbaṃ kaṇṭakalatādibharitāviruḷhaṃ. Baddhā vadhitā viyāti baddhā hutvā tāḷiyamānā viya.
在“Na kho pana”一句中,“kho”是不变词,表示决定、强调的意义;“pana”是表示差别的词。以此表达:“我不像其他沙门、婆罗门那样,以不清净的身业去受用那些山林、荒野、边远的坐卧处;我只是以清净的身业去受用那些坐卧处。”应当这样理解此处的词义结合。因为,通过“我是清净身业者”这一决定词,所抉择的意义被明确地揭示出来。“我为他们中之一员”的意思是:由于那种清净的身业,我得以进入那些圣者之列。菩萨正是以这种身业的清净,将自己列入圣者之列。当时,菩萨的身业清净,以及语业等清净,都已达到极为纯朴精纯的程度,因此,即便魔罗连续六年不断寻找机会,也始终找不到任何把柄。显示巴利原文
‘‘Na kho panāti ettha khoti avadhāraṇatthe nipāto, panā’’ti visesatthe. Tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇā viya ahaṃ aparisuddhakāyakammanto hutvā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni na kho pana paṭisevāmi, parisuddhakāyakammantoyeva pana hutvā tāni paṭisevāmī’’ti. Evaṃ vā ettha atthayojanā veditabbā. ‘‘Parisuddhakāyakammantohamasmī’’ti hi tena avadhāraṇena vibhāvitatthadassanaṃ. Tesamahaṃ aññataroti tāya parisuddhakāyakammatāya tesaṃ ariyānaṃ ahaṃ aññataroti kāyakammapārisuddhiyā mahāsatto attānaṃ ariyesu pakkhipati. Paramasallekhabhāvappattā hi tadā bodhisattassa kāyakammapārisuddhi , tathā vacīkammādipārisuddhi, yato māro randhagavesī hutvā chabbassāni nirantaraṃ anubandho antaraṃ na labhati. Tenāha –
我跟随世尊七年,步步紧随,
却未能于正自觉者、具念者身上觅得丝毫可乘之机。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ; Otāraṃ nādhigacchissaṃ, sambuddhassa satīmato’’ti. (su. ni. 448);
“Bhiyyo”意为更多、更殊胜,或辗转增上。那些心怀恐惧的人,因怖畏灾祸而身体战栗、汗毛竖立;而无恐惧、不害怕的人,则因没有怖畏灾祸,汗毛不竖,得以安稳、平安地安住。因此,他们通过汗毛柔顺便显示出已得安稳或平安,故经文中说为“柔顺”(palloma)。由此而有“汗毛柔顺”(pannalomata)等说法。其中,“我更得柔顺,住于林野”是对许诺的说明;“我是清净身业者”是对原因的说明;“你们那些圣者”是举出同类的例证;“凡有沙门或婆罗门”是举出不同类的例证;其余各项,应视为顺向与逆向的阐明。这便是此处的义理阐发。以此方法,在其他各节中也应了知义理的阐发。显示巴利原文
Bhiyyoti adhikaṃ savisesaṃ, uparūpari vā. Bhītatasitā bhayūpaddavena chambhitasarīrā haṭṭhalomā honti, abhītātasitā pana bhayūpaddavābhāvato ahaṭṭhalomā khemena sotthinā tiṭṭhantīti tesaṃ khemappatti sotthibhāvo vā pannalomatāya pākaṭo hotīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘palloma’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pannalomata’’ntiādi. Ettha ca bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṃ araññe vihārāyāti paṭiññāniddeso. Parisuddhakāyakammantohamasmīti hetudassanaṃ. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā’’ti sadisūdāharaṇadassanaṃ. Ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vāti visadisūdāharaṇadassanaṃ. Sesāni anvayabyatirekavibhāvanānīti daṭṭhabbanti ayamettha yuttivibhāvanā. Iminā nayena sesavāresupi yuttivibhāvanā veditabbā.
语业品等释文显示巴利原文
Vacīkammantavārādikathāvaṇṇanā
36 “以不清净的妄语等”如何解说?此处应交代之义,与前面所述法式全然相同。然而,为了借“怖畏恐惧”之名,显示被“等”字所摄的那些妄语等行为的现行差别,经中才说了“如何”这一段。其中应交代的内容,也与前面已说完全一致。显示巴利原文
36.Aparisuddhena musāvādādināti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Ādi-saddena pana saṅgahitaṃ tesañca musāvādādīnaṃ pavattibhedaṃ bhayabheravāvhānamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
于诸财物:指于有识与无识的财物。生起:即通过自我转变,生起名为贪欲的不正贪。瞋怒:即心怀破坏之想而对他人瞋怒。如此,后来便可能对他们生起“我们曾得罪他们,他们如今追来了”等疑虑。应知,正是针对“他们想夺取我们的执受物,想进行破坏”这样的意业——如同他人可从外部观察到他们的贪欲与嗔恚现行一样——而说“他们对他人”等。诚然,在不善身业、语业现行时,贪欲等亦确实现行,但那时它们属于思的方面,或不被计取,是故仅在意业部分以贪欲等作结合。又或者,如同于他门生起的杀生等不具语业等性,于他门生起的贪欲等亦不具身业等性,然唯独意业性成立,是故仅在意业部分举出贪欲等。即如所说:显示巴利原文
Bhaṇḍesūti saviññāṇakāviññāṇakesu bhaṇḍesu. Uppādetvāti attano pariṇāmavasena abhijjhāsaṅkhātaṃ visamalobhaṃ uppādetvā. Kujjhitvāti vināsacintāvasena parassa kujjhitvā. Evañhi nesaṃ ‘‘yesaṃ aparajjhimhā, te idāni anubandhitvā’’tiādinā pacchā āsaṅkuppatti siyā. ‘‘Ete amhākaṃ pariggahavatthuṃ gahetukāmā maññe, vināsaṃ kātukāmā maññe’’ti yathā pare parato tesaṃ abhijjhābyāpādappavattiṃ pariggaṇhanti, tādisaṃ manokammantaṃ sandhāya ‘‘te paresa’’ntiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāmaṃ akusalakāyakammavacīkammapavattikālepi abhijjhādayo pavattantiyeva, tadā pana te cetanāpakkhikā vā abbohārikā vāti manokammantavāre eva abhijjhādivasena yojanā katā. Atha vā dvārantare pavattānampi pāṇātipātādīnaṃ vacīkammādibhāvābhāvo viya dvārantare pavattānampi abhijjhādīnaṃ kāyakammādibhāvābhāvo, manokammabhāvo eva pana siddhoti katvā manokammantavāre eva abhijjhādayo uddhaṭā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
‘‘Dvāre caranti kammāni, na dvārā dvāracārino; Tasmā dvārehi kammāni, aññamaññaṃ vavatthitā’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1.kāyakammadvāra);
虽然在注释中,依于教法,是从出家者的角度在活命部分联系了‘怖畏恐惧’之名,但根据“凡有诸沙门或婆罗门”的经文,也应了知此说亦关联外道者与在家者。因为在家者也会因违背出身之法、家族之法、地域之法等而有邪命,正是由于这种活命的缺失,或以其他方式,他们的阿兰若住才会生起怖畏恐惧。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ sāsane pabbajitavasena ājīvavāre bhayabheravāvhānaṃ yojitaṃ, ‘‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’ti pana vacanato bāhirakavasena gahaṭṭhavasena ca yojanā veditabbā. Gahaṭṭhānampi hi jātidhammakuladhammadesadhammavilomanavasena aññathāpi micchājīvo labbhateva, tāya eva ca ājīvavipattiyā aññathā vā nesaṃ araññavāso sambhaveyyāti.
37 37. 如此,为了显示依活命第八戒所产生的怖畏恐惧之后,接着为了显示依断除诸盖等方式所带来的怖畏恐惧,教说便得以展开。为阐明其意义,说出“从此以后”等。其中,“以盖的角度再说”的意思是:如此,即便仅有戒清净,住于阿兰若者便能无有怖畏恐惧,更何况是舍断诸盖而成就安止定,乃至仅成就近行定呢?因此,为显示由定具足而无有怖畏恐惧,上面的教说便得以展开。虽然贪欲、嗔恚已作为不善意业被摄取,但这里再从盖的角度来说,这就是它的意趣。带有前缀‘abhi’的‘jhā’词有‘专念’之义,所以说“有对于他物等专念的习性”。“于所依欲中”,即是在色等作为烦恼欲所依的欲中。“有厚重烦恼贪者”,即因烦恼欲坚固、难以拔出而执著,也就是具有众多烦恼欲。这里,“贪欲”是对未得之境的希求,“强烈贪染”是对已得之境的耽著。那些被贪所胜的人,因对自己有强烈期许,遂被贪所败,所缘不定、对境不决,于阿兰若中不加细察种种所缘而住,对绳子等不能如实了知。因此说“他们”等。“现起”指因心平静。同样,经中说“心混乱”。显示巴利原文
37. Evaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlavasena bhayabheravaṃ dassetvā tato paraṃ nīvaraṇappahānādivasena taṃ dassetuṃ desanā vaḍḍhitāti tadatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘ito para’’ntiādimāha. Tattha nīvaraṇavasena puna vuttāti ayamadhippāyo – evaṃ sīlavisuddhimattampi araññe viharato bhayabheravābhāvaṃ āvahati, kimaṅgaṃ pana nīvaraṇāni pahāya appanāsamādhiṃ, upacārasamādhimeva vā sampādayatoti samādhisampadāya bhayabheravābhāvahetukaṃ dassetuṃ upari desanā vaḍḍhitāti akusalamanokammantabhāvena gahitāpi abhijjhābyāpādā nīvaraṇavasena puna vuttāti adhippāyo. Abhi-pubbo jhā-saddo abhijjhāyanatthoti āha ‘‘parabhaṇḍādiabhijjhāyanasīlā’’ti. Vatthukāmesūti rūpādīsu kilesakāmassa vatthubhūtesu kāmesu. Bahalakilesarāgāti thiramūladummocanīyatāhi ajjhosāne pabhūtakilesakāmā. Abhijjhā cettha appattavisayapatthanā, tibbasārāgo sampattivisayābhiniveso. Te hi lobhābhibhūtā puggalā attani tibbasāpekkhatāya eva lobhābhibhūtatāya avavatthitārammaṇā avinicchitavisayā araññe taṃ taṃ visayaṃ anupadhāritvā viharanti, rajjuādīni yāthāvato na sallakkhenti. Tenāha ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi. Upaṭṭhāti santacittatāya. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘ākulacittā’’ti. ‘‘Idānimha naṭṭhā’’ti tasanti vitasanti, āgantvā bādhiyamānā viya honti, evaṃ taṃ bhayabheravaṃ attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti pakkosantīti yojanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sesaṃ tādisamevā’’ti. ‘‘Anabhijjhāluhamasmī’’ti pāḷipade ciraparicitaalobhajjhāsayatāya kamaladale jalabindu viya alaggamānasattā sabbattha anapekkhohamasmīti attho.
38 “舍断其本性状态”:即舍断名为清净状态的本性状态。有罪法生起时,心的无罪性即被舍断。“心败坏”:指被烦恼不净所染污而混乱的心。因此说“随烦恼……乃至……腐臭”。“心有嗔思惟”:犹如杂有毒液的尿液,是嗔恚所染的心之思惟。“依前已说之理”:即按贪欲生起处所说的“他们成为所缘不定”等道理。正如因贪而如此,因嗔等亦成所缘不定。“于一切处”:无论下方、上方等一切处,都应这样解说。显示巴利原文
38.Pakatibhāvavijahanenāti parisuddhabhāvasaṅkhātassa ca pakatibhāvassa vijahanena. Sāvajjadhammasamuppattiyā hi cittassa anavajjabhāvo jahito hotīti. Vipannacittāti kilesāsucidūsitatāya kuthitacittā. Tenāha ‘‘kilesānugataṃ…pe… pūtikaṃ hotī’’ti. Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappāti visasaṃsaṭṭhamuttaṃ viya dosena padūsitacittasaṅkappā. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘te avavatthitārammaṇā hontī’’tiādinā abhijjhāluvāre vuttanayeneva. Yathā hi lobhavasena, evaṃ dosādivasenapi avavatthitārammaṇā hontīti. Sabbatthāti heṭṭhā upari cāti sabbattha ṭhānesu vaṇṇetabbā.
39 “心之不适、不堪业作”:由此说,昏沉以心的病态被把握,故说“以作为心病的昏沉”。同样,“身之不适、不堪业作”(《法集论》1163):由此说,睡眠特别以名身的病态被把握,故说“以作为其余名身病的睡眠”。此处说“余”是为了排除心。而且应知,此睡眠也会为色身带来病,因为是睡眠的因。它也被称为“睡眠、懒散”。所以说“他们成为多睡眠者”。显示巴利原文
39. ‘‘Yā cittassa akallatā akammaññatā’’ti vacanato thinaṃ cittassa gelaññabhāvena gahaṇaṃ gacchatīti āha ‘‘cittagelaññabhūtena thinenā’’ti. Tathā ‘‘yā kāyassa akallatā akammaññatā’’ti (dha. sa. 1163) vacanato middhaṃ visesato nāmakāyassa gelaññabhāvena gahaṇaṃ gacchatīti āha ‘‘sesanāmakāyagelaññabhūtena middhenā’’ti. Sesaggahaṇañcettha cittanivattanatthaṃ. Idañca middhaṃ rūpakāyassapi gelaññāvahanti daṭṭhabbaṃ niddāya hetubhāvato. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘niddā capalāyikā’’ti niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘te niddābahulā hontī’’ti.
40 “有掉举本性者”:即有掉举习性、本性不安住者。掉举的特性正是不得安住。故说“心躁动者”等。此处:在“心不寂静”一词中,亦可包含悔恨。因为据注释,悔恨亦以追悔而令心不寂静。然而,掉举是就其自身特性而被直接采用,这是意趣所在。显示巴利原文
40.Uddhaccapakatikāti uddhaccasīlā anavaṭṭhitasabhāvā. Anavaṭṭhānarasañhi uddhaccaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vipphandamānacittā’’tiādi. Idhāti ‘‘avūpasantacittā’’ti imasmiṃ pade. Kukkuccaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati saṃvaṇṇanāvasena pacchānutāpassapi cittassa avūpasamakarattā. Uddhaccaṃ pana sarūpeneva gahitanti adhippāyo.
41 这第五盖即是此一种,也就是所谓的疑与犹豫。既然如此,为何将其分作二种而说呢?因此经文说“为什么”等。「以疑故」:即由于犹豫。而「犹豫」的意思是:“在抉择法的自性时,以此而困惑”,或解释为“无可治疗”。显示巴利原文
41.Ekamevidaṃ pañcamaṃ nīvaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ kaṅkhā vicikicchāti ca. Yadi evaṃ kasmā dvidhā katvā vuttanti āha ‘‘kiṃ nu kho’’tiādi. Kaṅkhanatoti saṃsayanato. Vicikicchāti vuccati ‘‘dhammasabhāvaṃ vicinanto etāya kicchati, vigatā tikicchā vā’’ti katvā.
42 如此,通过称扬无盖,显示了由于定具足而灭除怖畏恐惧。现在,为通过称扬无自赞等,显示由于慧具足而灭除怖畏恐惧,便以“凡有诸”等开示向上展转。为阐明其义,说出「自赞者」等。「抬高」:即以慢心而举扬,因此说「置于高显之处」。在昏沉睡眠、掉举悔恨、疑的段落中,其所述内容与贪欲的段落相似。然而,在不提及这些的情况下,在自赞者的段落中,是否有何不同之处呢?为显明此,便说“他们如何”等。显示巴利原文
42. Evaṃ nīvaraṇābhāvakittanamukhena samādhisampadāya bhayabheravābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni attukkaṃsanādiabhāvakittanamukhena paññāsampadāya bhayabheravābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādinā upari desanā vaḍḍhitā, tadatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘attukkaṃsanakā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ukkaṃsenti mānavasena paggaṇhanena. Tenāha ‘‘ucce ṭhāne ṭhapentī’’ti. Thinamiddhauddhaccakukkuccavicikicchāvāresu gayhamānaṃ abhijjhāluvārasadisanti tattha taṃ anāmasitvā attukkaṃsakavāre kiñci visadisaṃ atthīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘te katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
43 惊惧(chambhana)即惊悚(chambho),指成为身体惊悚之因的强烈内心恐惧。因为他们具有此惊悚,故称为“惊悚者”。因此说“身体僵硬”等。“有畏惧习性者”:指习性上容易害怕的人。这同一种有过患的恐惧,能令身体产生惊悚,令心与身产生僵硬状态,因而被称为“惊悚、恐惧”。所以,具有此状态的沙门、婆罗门便被称为“惊悚者、畏惧习性者”。在此,怖畏恐惧是依其自性而把握的。显示巴利原文
43. Chambhanaṃ chambho, kāyassa chambhitattahetubhūto balavacittutrāso. So etesaṃ atthīti chambhī. Tenāha ‘‘kāyathambhanā’’tiādi. Bhīrukajātikāti bhāyanakasīlā. Ekameva cetaṃ sāvajjabhayaṃ kāye chambhitattassa, citte ca kāye ca thaddhabhāvassa uppādanavasena ‘‘chambho bhīrutā’’ti ca vuccatīti taṃsamaṅgino samaṇabrāhmaṇā ‘‘chambhī bhīrukajātikā’’ti vuttā, idha bhayabheravaṃ sarūpeneva gahitaṃ.
44 「可得到(labbhati)」意为应当被证得——这是以‘所应作成就’义来解释「利得(lābha)」一词。「应恭敬而行、应施」即是「恭敬(sakkāra)」。「其义能显(tadatthadīpaka)」:意谓舍弃利养等而住于森林者,不招怖畏恐惧,此义能显。据说,他正是由于重视利养,对可意的村落怀有贪爱,因此得名「喜爱村落者(piyagāmiko)」。「从业解脱(kammamutto)」:指因年老衰败而不能作务,因此被主人释放的人。显示巴利原文
44.Labbhati pāpuṇīyatīti lābhasaddassa kammasādhanattamāha. Sakkaccaṃ kātabbo dātabboti sakkāro. Tadatthadīpakanti lābhādiṃ pahāya araññe vasato bhayabheravāvhāyanaṃ natthīti dīpakaṃ. So kira lābhagarutāyeva piyo gāmo etassāti ‘‘piyagāmiko’’ti nāmaṃ labhati. Kammamuttoti jarājiṇṇattā kammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkotīti sāmikehi vissaṭṭho.
45 由于以懈怠的习性而不行正精进,他们被称为可鄙又沉滞的人,即「懈怠者(kusītā)」。勇者(vīra)的状态或行,即是精进(vīriya);又或者,精进是指应由方法策励、推动而生起者,这即是正精进(sammāvāyāmo)。于精进上低劣,故称「劣精进者(hīnavīriyā)」。以身表(kāyaviññatti)为等起门而转起的精进,称为「身精进(kāyikavīriya)」,这于履行义务、经行等中可见。而依坐卧之后对业处作意(manasikāra)为门而转起的精进,称为「心所法精进(cetasikavīriya)」。为显示前者特以对治懈怠而显明,后者以精进勤策而显明,故说‘懈怠者’等语。那些低劣精进者,正是因为懒惰,连对所缘(ārammaṇa)作决定(vavatthāna)这样些许的事也做不到。显示巴利原文
45. Alasabhāvena sammāvāyāmassa akaraṇato kucchitaṃ sīdantīti kusītā. Vīrassa bhāvo, kammaṃ vā vīriyaṃ, vidhinā vā īretabbaṃ pavattetabbanti vīriyaṃ, sammāvāyāmo. Tena hīnā hīnavīriyā. Kāyaviññattiyā samuṭṭhānavasena pavattavīriyaṃ kāyikavīriyaṃ, vattakaraṇacaṅkamanādīsu daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nisajja sayitvā ca kammaṭṭhānamanasikāravasena pavattavīriyaṃ cetasikavīriyaṃ. Tattha purimaṃ visesato kosajjapaṭipakkhatāvasena, dutiyaṃ vīriyārambhatāvasena pākaṭaṃ hotīti dassento ‘‘kusītā’’tiādimāha. Te hi hīnavīriyā alasatāyeva ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkonti.
46 「失念者(naṭṭhassati)」指不得念的人。因资粮欠缺,念虽存在,却无力发挥念的作用,故如此说。「不正知(na sampajānāti)」即是「非正知者(asampajānā)」。此中否定前缀‘a-’表示不具足那相应的状态,如‘无因法’、‘无比丘住处’等,故说他们是「无慧者(paññārahitā)」。难道不是第十六章讨论慧,第十四章讨论念吗?为何在染污一边却以‘慧’来把握?为答此问,故说‘对于此也……’等。实则第十四章为念分别(satibhājanīya),此处慧仅于第十四章中被提及,意在显示单凭念力是薄弱的,故以‘不正知’这一遮止的说法点明念的薄弱。今为使所言之义更为明显,而说‘有两种……’等。显示巴利原文
46.Naṭṭhassatīti alabbhamānassati, paccayavekallena vijjamānāyapi satiyā satikiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthatāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Na sampajānāti asampajānā. Taṃyoganivattiyañcāyaṃ a-kāro ‘‘ahetukā dhammā (dha. sa. 2.dukamātikā), abhikkhuko āvāso’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 76) viyāti āha ‘‘paññārahitā’’ti. Nanu soḷasamo paññāvāro, ayaṃ sativāro, tattha kasmā saṃkilesapakkhe paññā gahitāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘imassa cā’’tiādi. Satibhājanīyamevetaṃ, yadidaṃ cuddasamo vāro, paññā panettha cuddasame vāre kevalā sati dubbalāti satidubbalyadīpanatthaṃ ‘‘asampajānā’’ti paṭikkhepamukhena vuttā. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘duvidhā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
47 为了说明唯有依于安止定或近行定,心才能正确地安立在所缘上,否则便不能,所以说“心不等持者”是指“缺乏近行定与安止定者”。“散乱心者”即“心不安住者”。前文根据与盖共通的状态,将掉举理解为“高举、心未寂止者”;此处则依不等持的状态,说由掉举因所生的心的散乱,即“心不等持、心散乱者”。这是它们的差别。依前述的方法,即先前曾说:“由于掉举,心于同一所缘上颤动,犹如风吹旗杆上的旗帜。”他说:“一切皆同于前面所说的”,此即指:就名为怖畏恐惧而言,此处所说与贪欲章节中所说相似。显示巴利原文
47. Appanāsamādhinā, upacārasamādhinā vā cittaṃ ārammaṇe samaṃ, sammā vā āhitaṃ nāma hoti, nāññathāti dassento ‘‘asamāhitāti upacārappanāsamādhivirahitā’’ti āha . Vibbhantacittāti anavaṭṭhitacittā. Pubbe nīvaraṇabhāvasāmaññena uddhaccaṃ gahitaṃ ‘‘uddhatā avūpasantacittā’’ti, idha samādhānābhāvena uddhaccahetuko cittavibbhamo vutto ‘‘asamāhitā vibbhantacittā’’ti, ayametesaṃ viseso. Pubbe vuttanayenāti pubbe ‘‘uddhaccena hi ekārammaṇe cittaṃ vipphandati dhajayaṭṭhiyaṃ vātena paṭākā viyā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.40) vuttanayena. Sabbaṃ pubbasadisamevāti bhayabheravāvhāyanassa abhijjhāluvāre vuttasadisataṃ sandhāya vadati.
48 “恶慧者”:为表明此处的“恶”字,如同“恶戒者”等词中那样是“无”的意思,而非如“恶趣”、“邪行道者”等词中那样表示“应受呵责”,所以先说“这是无慧者的别称”,而后说“然而,慧本身并没有恶劣这回事”。“他们”指这些恶慧者。“一切处”指于地界的四种情形。“恶”也称为过失。因此他说:“那种柔和悦耳的言语。”同样,戒称为“无过失之支”。当恶慧者们说话时,因为无智,他们只说带有过失的话。因此他说:“他们是言恶说者。”所以,由于他们自身带有过失,其口也成为过失之口,故称为“恶口者”,此处也可这样理解其义。为从反面说明,依于此慧而称为“具慧者”,故接着宣说“然而并非……”显示巴利原文
48.Duppaññāti ettha du-saddo ‘‘dussīlo’’tiādīsu viya abhāvattho, na ‘‘duggati, duppaṭipanno’’tiādīsu viya garahatthoti dassetuṃ ‘‘nippaññānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti vatvā ‘‘paññā pana duṭṭhā nāma natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Teti duppaññā. Sabbatthāti catūsupi pāṭhavikappesu. Elanti vā doso vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā’’ti. Tathā hi sīlaṃ ‘‘nelaṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Duppaññā ca kathentā sadosameva kathaṃ kathenti apaṇḍitabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘dubbhāsitabhāsī’’ti. Tasmā elasabbhāvato elaṃ mukhaṃ etesanti elamūgāti vuttāti evampi vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yāya paññāya vasena ‘‘paññāsampanno’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘no ca kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nanu ca bodhisattā bahulavipassanāpaññāya samannāgatā hontīti? Honti, tadā pana bodhisattena na vipassanārambho kato, no ca vipassanāpaññā adhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘no ca kho vipassanāpaññāyā’’ti.
然而,在这里有些人说:‘那些缺乏信、身业等不清净的人,就像怖畏恐惧的特因一样;而多信者自然就安稳,所以经中没有列出“信”这一节。’这种说法是没有道理的。因为相信业果的人,正是靠着‘以业为皈依(kammapaṭisaraṇataṃ)’这一点,才不把怖畏恐惧当回事,视如草芥,而获得安稳。但是,由于精进等心所没有信就不能生起,所以信作为它们的亲依止缘(upanissaya)和俱生缘(sahajāta),在把握精进等的同时就被把握了,因此没有单独列出。同样地,信在禅那的前行次第中也没有被单独列出。再者,要这些信做什么?在把握所缘的这一阶段,信是一定要把握的。因此,法主(佛陀)才没有在这里单独列出它。在其他类似的地方,也应该这样确定。因为,开示经文的教导是随顺适合的。显示巴利原文
Keci panettha ‘‘saddhāvirahitā aparisuddhakāyakammantādayo viya bhayabheravāvhāyanassa visesakāraṇaṃ, nāpi saddhālutā pallomatāyāti saddhāvāro anuddhaṭo’’ti vadanti, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Kammaphale hi saddahanto kammapaṭisaraṇataṃyeva nissāya bhayabheravaṃ tiṇāyapi amaññamāno pallomatamāpajjeyya. Yasmā pana vīriyādayo saddhāya vinā nappavattantīti tesaṃ upanissayabhūtā sahajātā ca sā taggahaṇeneva gahitā hotīti visuṃ na uddhaṭā. Tathā hi sā jhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyampi na uddhaṭā, kiṃ vā etāya saddhāya, addhā sā imasmiṃ ārammaṇapariggahaṭṭhāne na gahetabbāva, tato dhammassāminā idha na uddhaṭā, evaṃ aññesupi edisesu ṭhānesu nicchayo kātabbo. Yathānulomadesanā hi suttantakathāti.
(现在开始)对名为「怖畏恐惧」的住处等内容的解释。显示巴利原文
Bhayabheravasenāsanādivaṇṇanā
49 49.「十六种所缘」(soḷasārammaṇāni)指的是:十六种处所和所缘(soḷasa-ṭṭhānāni ārammaṇāni)。「在像这样的夜晚里」(evarūpāsu rattīsu)所说的是:那些如同十四日(cātuddasī)等、将在下文被提到的夜晚。「在像这样的住处中」(evarūpe senāsane)这里,也一样适用同样的规则。「无论哪些」(yā)是指那些被不特定地举出的,再用「它们」(tā)这个词,就像在指示一样。所以说:「‘无论哪些’和‘它们’(yā tā)这两者,正是对于那些夜晚的列出与指明的话。」「称‘阿毗’(abhi)」的(abhīti),这个词用在「相」(lakkhaṇa)的意义上,就像在「以及其他有名的(abhiññātā)婆罗门大家(brāhmaṇamahāsālā)」等处的用法一样。然而,在这里怎么能知道它是「相」的意义(lakkhaṇatthatā)呢?回答是:「凡依此而被了知的,即是‘相’(lakkhaṇa)」,所以解释说:「例如月圆满(candapāripūriyā)等。」意思是:在月圆日(puṇṇamāsi),因为月亮(canda)的圆满;在新月日(amāvāsi),因为月亮的耗尽;用「等」(ādi)这个词,就包含了月亮呈半圆、星宿凌犯等情形。它的用意是:这个「abhi」前缀,仅仅是一个前缀(upasagga);由于它和「被了知的」(lakkhita)这个词结合在一起,使它所表示的「相」的意义得以被理解。显示巴利原文
49.Soḷasārammaṇānīti soḷasaṭṭhānāni ārammaṇāni. Evarūpāsu rattīsūti cātuddasīādikā upari vakkhamānā rattiyo sandhāya vadati . Evarūpe senāsaneti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yāti aniyamato uddiṭṭhānaṃ puna ‘‘tā’’ti vacanaṃ niddeso viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘yā tāti ubhayametaṃ rattīnaṃyeva uddesaniddesavacana’’nti. Abhīti lakkhaṇatthe ‘‘aññe ca abhiññātā brāhmaṇamahāsālā’’tiādīsu viya. Kathaṃ panettha lakkhaṇatthatā veditabbā? Lakkhīyati etenāti lakkhaṇanti āha ‘‘candapāripūriyā’’tiādi. Puṇṇamāsiyaṃ candapāripūriyā amāvāsiyaṃ candaparikkhayena. Ādi-saddena candassa upaḍḍhamaṇḍalatārāhuggahatādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Upasaggamattameva abhi-saddo lakkhitasaddeneva lakkhaṇatthassa viññāyamānattāti adhippāyo.
「从第一天起」:即从第一个新月的日子开始。由于诘问者想到,在世尊的时代尚不视为特殊的日子,在后世却成了特殊的日子,便据此「被视为特殊」这一特点诘问:「遍知的世尊为何不取第五日呢?」答辩者则以如是意图回避:「十四日等通于一切时的日子既被采纳,非通于一切时的日子又如何能被采纳?」因此说:「以其非通于一切时故。」显示巴利原文
Paṭhamadivasato pabhutīti paṭhamapāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya. Yasmā codako bhagavato kāle anabhilakkhitāpi aparabhāge abhilakkhitā jātā, tasmā taṃ abhilakkhaṇīyataṃ upādāya ‘‘sabbadassinā bhagavatā pañcamī kasmā na gahitā’’ti codeti, itaro sabbakālikāsu cātuddasīādīsu gayhamānāsu asabbakālikāya kathaṃ gahaṇanti adhippāyena ‘‘asabbakālikattā’’ti pariharati.
「于如是等之中」:即如「已知」等语所述的那一类。由于园林等处有天神住持,故成为世间的支提,因此说「以应受供养之义」。人们大多在村落、城邑等的门口,将那样的树木作为支提来称呼,故说「在村落、城邑等的门口」等。仅凭见、闻即令凡俗有情生起恐惧,故是能怖畏者。因此说「能生恐惧」等。恐惧(bhaya)是由彼而起怖;极恐怖、有大怖畏的,即是怖畏(bherava)。显示巴利原文
Tathāvidhāsūti ‘‘abhiññātā’’tiādinā yathā vuttā, tathāvidhāsu. Devatādhiṭṭhitabhāvena ārāmādīnaṃ lokassa cetiyabhāvoti āha ‘‘pūjanīyaṭṭhenā’’ti. Manussā yebhuyyena gāmādīnaṃ dvāresu tathārūpe rukkhe cetiyaṭṭhāniye katvā voharantīti āha ‘‘gāmanigamādidvāresū’’tiādi. Dassanamattenapi savanamattenapi bhayuppādanena pākatikasatte bhiṃsentīti bhiṃsanakāni. Tenāha ‘‘bhayajanakānī’’tiādi. Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, ativiya sappaṭibhayaṃ bheravaṃ.
Āyācanaupahārakaraṇārahaṃ 是指适合进行种种祈请、献供、誓愿仪式的处所或事物。以花、香……乃至铺地等,这是依次展示用簸箕等器具进行供奉的情形。Koṭṭento 意为击打,其用意是:以角顶、以蹄踢而发出声响。这里对于一切四足众生,统称为“鹿”,并非如“熊皮、鹿皮、羊皮”等中的用法,而是特指赤鹿等特定种类的鹿,这是它的含义。Cāletvā 意为:通过按压顶端而使之摇动。此处提及孔雀,是作为例示,因此说明:“这里意指一切鸟类。”其中的道理是:正如“或者孔雀”中的“或者”用以表示未明说的类别,“或者鹿”中的用法也是如此,这是针对“鹿”字在此处被用于特殊意义而说的。从此以后,是指从“那么,我何不在那些夜晚……”这样思惟、寻求怖畏恐惧之时起算,并非从实际开始寻求之时算起。因为即使在“我或许会见到怖畏恐惧”这一句中,怖畏恐惧也仅仅是所缘而已。正如以色为目标而生起的乐受,即以色为所缘。显示巴利原文
Āyācanaupahārakaraṇārahanti taṃtaṃbalikammapaṇidhikammakaraṇayoggaṃ. Pupphadhūpa…pe… dharaṇitalanti idaṃ yathāpaṭisūtena suppādinā upahārakaraṇadassanaṃ. Koṭṭentoti paharanto, siṅgappahārakhurappahārehi saddaṃ karontoti adhippāyo. Sabbacatuppadānaṃ idha magoti nāmaṃ, na ‘‘acchacammaṃ migacammaṃ eḷakacamma’’ntiādīsu (mahāva. 259) viya, rohitotiādi migavisesānanti adhippāyo. Cāletvāti aggamaddanena cāletvā. Moraggahaṇañcettha upalakkhaṇanti dassento āha ‘‘idha sabbapakkhigahaṇaṃ adhippeta’’nti. Esa nayoti idaṃ yathā ‘‘moro vā’’ti ettha vā-saddo avuttavikappanattho, evaṃ ‘‘migo vā’’ti etthāpīti migasaddassa visesatthavuttitaṃ sandhāyāha. Ito pabhūtīti ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ yā tā rattiyo’’tiādinā bhayabheravassa gavesanacintanato pabhuti, na gavesanārambhato pabhuti. ‘‘Appeva nāmāhaṃ bhayabheravaṃ passeyya’’nti etthāpi hi ārammaṇameva bhayabheravaṃ. Sukhārammaṇaṃ rūpaṃ sukhamiva ‘‘rūpaṃ sukhaṃ sukhānupatitaṃ sukhāvakkanta’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.60). Kathaṃ bhayaggahaṇena ca rūpārammaṇaggahaṇanti āha ‘‘parittassa cā’’tiādi. ‘‘Āgacchatī’’ti vacanato gavesanārambhato pabhuti ‘‘etaṃ bhaya’’nti ārammaṇaṃ adhippetanti keci ‘‘taṃ na passeyya’’nti cakkhunā dassanassa adhippetattā, tasmā vuttanayeneva attho gahetabbo. Bhayaṃ ākaṅkhamānoti upaparikkhanavasena ahaṃ bhayavatthuṃ ākaṅkhanto viharāmi, taṃ kimatthiyaṃ, ettakopi bhayasamannāhāro mayhaṃ ayuttoti adhippāyo.
Yaṃ pakāraṃ bhūto 是指如实处于某种姿态,而此处的姿态是基于威仪而相应的,由于经文是如此出现的,故说:“以某种威仪而住者”。Bhavitassa 一词应视为与“bhūtassa”同义。为显示“samaṅgībhūtassa”一词因省略前分而说为“bhūtassa”,所以又说:“或为具足而住者”。于怖畏恐惧所缘,即在被视为怖畏恐惧的所缘上。大士既不站立等等,这是为显示“处于那种状态的人应当排除它”,正如其所思惟的那样去实践。所谓威仪的顺序,是指站、行、坐、卧;而逆序则应理解为:先是卧,次是坐,再是站,最后是行。就近邻的顺序而言:行的近邻是站,站的近邻是坐与行,坐的近邻是卧与站,卧的近邻是坐。在此,行与站、站与行、坐与卧、卧与坐,是作为近邻来把握的,其余则依前后相续的关系,应如此了知。然而对于比丘而言,威仪是如其成就的次第那样,以次第生起的方式来说的。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pakāraṃ bhūto yathābhūto, so panettha pakāro iriyāpathavasena yutto pāḷiyaṃ tathā āgatattāti āha ‘‘yena yena iriyāpathena bhūtassā’’ti. Bhavitassāti idaṃ ‘‘bhūtassā’’ti iminā samānatthaṃ padanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Samaṅgībhūtassā’’ti padaṃ purimapadalopena bhūtassāti vuttanti dassento ‘‘samaṅgībhūtassa vā’’ti āha. Bhayabheravārammaṇeti bhayabheravābhimate ārammaṇe. Neva mahāsatto tiṭṭhatītiādi ‘‘tathābhūto ca taṃ paṭivineyya’’nti yathā cintitaṃ, tathā paṭipannabhāvadassanaṃ. Iriyāpathapaṭipāṭi nāma ṭhānagamananisajjānipajjāti vadanti, uppaṭipāṭi pana paṭhamaṃ nipajjā, puna nisajjā, puna ṭhānaṃ, pacchā gamananti evaṃ veditabbā. Āsannapaṭipāṭiyāti gamanassa tāva ṭhānaṃ āsannaṃ, ṭhānassa nisajjā gamanañca, nisajjāya nipajjā ṭhānañca, nipajjāya nisajjā āsannā. Idha pana gamanassa ṭhānaṃ, ṭhānassa ca gamanaṃ, nisajjāya ca nipajjā, nipajjāya ca nisajjā āsannabhāvena gahitā, itare paramparāvasenāti veditabbā. Bhikkhussa pana iriyāpathā sampattapaṭipāṭiyā viya aparāparuppattivasena vuccanti.
「无迷乱住」的注释显示巴利原文
Asammohavihāravaṇṇanā
50 再者,我完全消除了怖畏恐惧,这尤其归因于无迷乱的法性。为了显示此义,故以“Santi kho pana……”等将后面的开示进一步展开,这就是此处的连结。“关于禅修者的迷乱处”这句话,意在说明:对于那些诵习者而言,在迷乱之处实无什么可说的。“atthi”这个虚词也可表示复数,如“atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā”等句中那样,因此,为了解释“santi”的词义,才做这样的说明。问:它们是否凭借刹那有三性而存在?答:并非如此,而是取“存在、可被察觉”之义。也就是说,在这广大的世间共住中,这样的迷乱处也是存在的,由于它能被智慧所领受,所以是可被察觉的。所谓“白遍获得者”,即指证得无量白遍的人。如此,对他来说,周遭的一切便都如同光明一般显现。“前分”指的是等至的前部分。他生起这样的意念:“当太阳运行到这个高度时,我当出定。”但他其实并不善于精确地判断时间,只是单纯作了意:“我将在白天出定。”一切所缘境清晰呈现,如同以天眼观看一般分明。“无”显示巴利原文
50. Ayañca me sabbaso bhayabheravābhāvo visesato asammohadhammattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘santikho panā’’tiādinā upari desanā vaḍḍhitāti ayaṃ vā ettha anusandhi. Jhāyīnaṃ sammohaṭṭhānesūti iminā ajjhāyīnaṃ sammohaṭṭhānesu vattabbameva natthīti dasseti. Atthīti idaṃ nipātapadaṃ puthuvacanampi hoti ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.373-374; ma. ni. 1.110; 3.154; saṃ. ni. 4.127; khu. pā. 3.dvatiṃsākāra) viyāti ‘‘santī’’ti padassa atthadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Kiṃ khaṇattayasamaṅgitāya te atthi, noti āha ‘‘saṃvijjanti upalabbhantī’’ti, mahati lokasannivāse edisāpi saṃvijjanti ñāṇena gahetabbatāya upalabbhantīti. Odātakasiṇalābhīti appamāṇaodātakasiṇalābhī. Evaṃ hissa samantato āloko viya upaṭṭhāti. Parikammanti samāpattipubbabhāgamāha. Ettakaṃ sūriye gate vuṭṭhahāmīti,no ca kho addhānaparicchede kusalo hoti, kevalaṃ ‘‘divā eva vuṭṭhahāmī’’ti manasikāraṃ uppādesi. Visadaṃ hoti sabbaṃ ārammaṇajātaṃ, dibbacakkhunā passantassa viya vibhūtaṃ. Avisadanti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Evaṃsaññinoti rattiṃ ‘‘divā’’ti, divā ca ‘‘rattī’’ti evaṃsaññino.
“于住所内,夜间安坐”一句,应补入“夜间”(ratti)一词。这或因微细的恐惧等,或因其他因缘。那些地方深如地穴,为浓密树林所遮蔽,被极厚密的树网所覆盖。在日光隐没之时,虽未明说“白昼”,其义已自然成立。迷乱住有多种,这便属于迷乱住的一种。显示巴利原文
Antosenāsane rattiṃ nisinno hotīti ratti-saddo ajjhāharitabbo. Parittāsanādīhi, aññehi vā kāraṇehi. Gambhīrāya bhūmigabbhasadisāya ghanavanapaṭicchannāya bahalatarajālavanapaṭalapaṭicchannāya. Antarahitasūriyāloke kāleti eteneva divāti avuttasiddho. Sammohavihāro nāma bahuvidhoti āha ‘‘sammohavihārānaṃ aññatara’’nti.
菩萨对昼夜的划分非常清楚,乃至少分、刹那等最细微处,也都善作确定。同样,他对夜晚与白天的时分段落,也是依于自身应做之事和知时的智慧而确定的。显示巴利原文
Pākaṭo bodhisattassa rattindivaparicchedo antamaso lavatuṭikhaṇassapi upādāya suvavatthitattā, tathā rattidivasakoṭṭhāsaparicchedo attanā kātabbakiccavasena kālañāṇavasena ca.
依日晷柱影来量度,当影长达到两指之时。敲击报时板,是为了让僧团各尽己务。“木槌”即指敲击报时板所用的槌子。“报时器械落下”,是说由其他比丘操作使其落下。在其他比丘进入食堂的这段时间,他便前往昼间修行的处所,修习沙门法。显示巴利原文
Kālathambhe laddhabbachāyāvasena dvaṅgulakāle. Yāmaghaṇṭikaṃ paharati saṅghassa taṃtaṃvattakaraṇatthaṃ. Muggaranti ghaṇṭikappaharaṇamuggaraṃ. Yāmayantaṃ patati aññehi bhikkhūhi yojitanti adhippāyo. Yāva aññe bhikkhū bhojanasālaṃ upagacchanti, tāva divāvihāraṭṭhānaṃ gantvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti.
“Yaṃ kho taṃ”中,“yaṃ”是不定指示,“kho”表强调,合起来的意思是“正是那位补特伽罗”。“taṃ”是表示所指之人的词。“Mameva”即“正是我”。“无迷乱体性”指本性上的无迷乱。由于前文提到了“生起”,故此处说“在人界”。“以慧成就”是说,凭借能如实了知利益的智慧功德,不唯发心利益他人,更付诸实际行动,故称“开示利益者”;而利益他人的发心,则通过“出于对世间的悲悯”一语显示。若全无资具,则绝无财富之乐;而布施资具又以舍成就为因,故说“以舍成就……施与者”。以慈成就,是通过给予利益来守护(他人);以悲成就,是通过拔除痛苦来保护(他人)。问:前面已经说过“为利、为乐”,为何这里重复?答:为释此疑,故说“这里以执取天与人……”等。这表明:前面是从总体上无分别地显示利益等,此处则是特别连同目的来显示。因为没有比涅槃更上的最上义,故说“为最上义”。“hitaṃ”意为导向涅槃的利益。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ kho tanti ettha yanti aniyamuddeso, khoti avadhāraṇe, yameva puggalanti attho. Tanti vuccamānākāravacanaṃ. Mamevāti maṃ eva. Asammohasabhāvoti sabhāvabhūtaasammoho. ‘‘Uppanno’’ti vuttattā ‘‘manussaloke’’ti vuttaṃ. Paññāsampattiyāti yāthāvato hitassa jānanasamatthena attano paññāguṇena, na kevalaṃ ajjhāsayeneva hitesitā, atha kho payogenāti dassento ‘‘hitūpadesako’’ti āha. Ajjhāsayena pana hitesitā ‘‘lokānukampāyā’’ti iminā dassitā. Upakaraṇehi vinā na kadāci bhogasukhaṃ upakaraṇadānañca cāgasampattihetukanti āha ‘‘cāgasampattiyā…pe… dāyako’’ti. Mettāsampattiyā hitūpasaṃhārena rakkhitā. Karuṇāsampattiyā dukkhāpanayanena gopāyitā. Nanu ca pubbepi vuttaṃ ‘‘hitāya sukhāyā’’ti, atha kasmā puna taṃ gahitanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘idha devamanussaggahaṇenā’’tiādi. Tena pubbe avisesato hitādīni dassitāni, idāni visesato saha payojanena tāni dassitānīti dīpeti. Nibbānato paro paramo attho nāma natthīti āha ‘‘paramatthattāyā’’ti. Hinoti nibbānaṃ gacchatīti hitaṃ, maggo. Ukkaṃsato sukhatthaṃ ariyaphalanti āha ‘‘tato uttari sukhābhāvato’’ti.
「前行道等」的注释。显示巴利原文
Pubbabhāgapaṭipadādivaṇṇanā
51 无迷乱住(asammohavihāraṃ):指无迷乱的状态,或也可解为无迷乱的正觉;它所指的即是名为止与观的修习之道。从前行开始(pubbabhāgato pabhuti):即从修习的前行阶段精进用功开始。某些(keci):指那些住于上住(uttaravihāra)的人。显示巴利原文
51.Asammohavihāranti asammohavuttiṃ, asammohasambodhinti vā attho. Tanti samathavipassanābhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipadaṃ. Pubbabhāgato pabhutīti bhāvanāya pubbabhāgavīriyārambhādito paṭṭhāya. Kecīti uttaravihāravāsino.
菩提场(bodhimaṇḍe):指称为“菩提”的智慧达到如坛场般成就之处。四支(caturaṅgaṃ):即经中所说“即使皮、腱、骨残留……”(kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatū)这样具足四支。提起(paggahitaṃ):指不松懈的努力,以称为坚毅精进的奋力状态而把握,故说“持续而不松懈地运转”。不懈怠(asallīnaṃ):指心不萎缩,未陷入因懈怠而生的退缩。显示巴利原文
Bodhimaṇḍeti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.11.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 3.8.11) bodhisaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa maṇḍabhāvappatte ṭhāne. Caturaṅganti ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatū’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.237; a. ni. 2.5; 8.13; mahāni. 17, 196) vuttacaturaṅgasamannāgataṃ. Paggahitanti ārambhaṃ sithilaṃ akatvā daḷhaparakkamasaṅkhātussahanabhāvena gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘asithilappavattitanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Asallīnanti asaṅkucitaṃ kosajjavasena saṅkocaṃ anāpannaṃ.
“近住”(upaṭṭhitā):是以名为投入而不浮散的方式,亲临所缘并安住下来。因此说“以面对所缘的状态”。“无忘失”(asammuṭṭhā):因已破除迷乱而现起,故不忘失,是为无忘失。虽然犹如心轻安生起时,以心轻安的力量,身也由身轻安而变得轻安;然而,身轻安生起时必与心轻安俱起,并非离于心轻安而有,故此处说“由身轻安与心轻安的生起”。物质性的身体也确实变得轻安,因为身轻安能带来两类身体的安稳。而此身体,以“离躁动”(vigatadaratho)来说,即已远离烦恼的躁动。当名身没有了躁动时,物质身体的躁动和热恼亦会止息。“善安置”(sammā āhitaṃ):即截断心于种种所缘上奔驰的散乱,令心无散乱地住于单一所缘,妥善地安立。因此说“妥善安置”等。心的不专一状态,是由散乱而摇摆不定;一旦有了心一境性,那种动摇便不再存在,故说“一境、不动、无悸动”(ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandanaṃ)。“至此”(ettāvatā):依“然而已发勤……”等文。显示巴利原文
Upaṭṭhitāti ogāhanasaṅkhātena apilāpanabhāvena ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhitā. Tenāha ‘‘ārammaṇābhimukhībhāvenā’’ti. Sammosassa viddhaṃsanavasena pavattiyā na sammuṭṭhāti asammuṭṭhā. Kiñcāpi cittamiva cittapassaddhivasena kāyapassaddhivaseneva kāyo passaddho hoti, tathāpi yasmā kāyapassaddhi uppajjamānā cittapassaddhiyā saheva uppajjati, na vinā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyacittapassaddhisambhavenā’’ti . Rūpakāyopi passaddhoyeva hoti kāyapassaddhiyā ubhayesampi kāyānaṃ passambhanāvahattā. So ca kho kāyo. Vigatadarathoti vigatakilesadaratho. Nāmakāye hi vigatadarathe rūpakāyopi vūpasantadarathapariḷāho hoti. Sammā āhitanti nānārammaṇesu vidhāvanasaṅkhātavikkhepaṃ vicchinditvā ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe avikkhittabhāvāpādānena sammadeva āhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suṭṭhu ṭhapita’’ntiādi. Cittassa anekaggabhāvo vikkhepavasena cañcalatā, sā sati ekaggatāya na hotīti āha ‘‘ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandana’’nti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘āraddhaṃ kho panā’’tiādinā vīriyasatipassaddhisamādhīnaṃ kiccasiddhidassanena. Nanu ca saddhāpaññānampi kiccasiddhi jhānassa pubbapaṭipadāya icchitabbāti? Saccaṃ icchitabbā, sā pana nānantariyabhāvena avuttasiddhāti na gahitā. Asati hi saddhāya vīriyārambhādīnaṃ asambhavoyeva, paññāpariggahe ca nesaṃ asati paññāyārambhādibhāvo na siyā. Tathā asallīnāsammosatādayo vīriyādīnanti asallīnatādiggahaṇenevettha paññākiccasiddhi gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jhānabhāvanāyaṃ vā samādhikiccaṃ adhikaṃ icchitabbanti dassetuṃ samādhipariyosānāva jhānassa pubbapaṭipadā kathitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
已经说过了,故此处不再赘述。实际上,《清净道论》正是此释论的一部分,因此彼义理已作解说。“住”(viharati)一词是从住处(vihāra)的角度而来;而这里“住于此”(idha vihāsiṃ)则是从义理的角度来说的。据说,这是一切佛陀所不舍的,故称为“入出息念业处”(ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhāna)。由修习色离欲(rūpavirāgabhāvanā)而转起的四种无色定差别,实属第四禅所摄,故此处说“四禅”(cattāri jhānāni)。首先,心一境性作为生于有的意义,以及作为修观的基础,亦是四种禅那所共通的,因此依这些而说“四禅”。然而,作为神通的基础及灭尽的基础,则唯属于第四禅,这又如何能说是四种禅那的共同法呢?因为是以辗转的方式作为依止的缘故。犹如近因的近因亦被称为近因,因的因亦被称为因,譬如说“以草席来成就众生”,以此为喻,在显示义理时,提及八等至便得以合理。“为心一境性”(cittekaggatatthāni):即是为了令心等持,为了现法乐住(di...显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ, tasmā idha na vattabbaṃ. Visuddhimaggo hi imissā saṃvaṇṇanāya ekadesabhūtoti vuttovāyamatthoti. Viharatīti āgataṃ paruddesikattā vihārassa. Idha vihāsinti āgataṃ atthuddesikattā. Idaṃ kira sabbabuddhānaṃ avijahitanti āha ‘‘ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhāna’’nti. Rūpavirāgabhāvanāvasena (sārattha. ṭī. 1.12.nerañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) pavatto catubbidhopi arūpajjhānaviseso catutthajjhānasaṅgaho evāti āha ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti. Yuttaṃ tāva cittekaggatā bhavokkamanatthatā viya vipassanāpādakatāpi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sādhāraṇāti tesaṃ vasena ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti vacanaṃ, abhiññāpādakatā pana nirodhapādakatā ca catutthasseva jhānassa āveṇikā, sā kathaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sādhāraṇā vuttāti? Paramparādhiṭṭhānabhāvato. Padaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānampi hi padaṭṭhānanteva vuccati, kāraṇakāraṇampi kāraṇanti yathā ‘‘tiṇehi sattaṃ siddha’’nti, evañca katvā payojananiddese aṭṭhasamāpattiggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Cittekaggatatthānīti cittasamādhānatthāni, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthānīti attho. Cittekaggatāsīsena hi diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāro vutto, sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ekaggacittā sukhaṃ divasaṃ viharissāmā’’ti. Bhavokkamanatthānīti bhavesu nibbattiatthāni.
菩萨于最后生中,在前往菩提场之前,虽也曾证得第四禅,但那时只是简单地生起,并未成为修观等的基础,因此特别加以区分,说为“在菩提树下证得”(bodhirukkhamūle nibbattitaṃ)。“为观的基础”(vipassanāpādakaṃ):即在修观时,作为观的基础。“为神通的基础”也是如此。因为佛陀仅在修行最初开始时需要基础禅那,此后为了证得更上的道果、等至、神通等,便不再需要。自证得正等觉的那一刻起,一切智与定的一切作用,皆唯随其所欲而当下现前。“成就一切事”(sabbakiccasādhakaṃ):指成就次第住等一切功德作用。“能赐予一切世间与出世间的功德”(sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakaṃ):此处,由于第四禅具有作为观与神通基础的性质,应知它正是世尊一切世间、出世间功德的赐予者。因为遍知智是道智的基础,道智是正等觉的基础,而道智又是依于第四禅而证得的。在证得正等觉的同时,世尊的一切佛陀功德已圆满在手,而这证道正是以第四禅为依止。显示巴利原文
Yasmā (sārattha. ṭī. 1.12.nerañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) bodhisattena bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamanato pubbepi carimabhave catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattitapubbaṃ, tadā pana taṃ nibbattitamattameva ahosi, na vipassanādipādakaṃ , tasmā ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle nibbattita’’nti tato visesetvā vuttaṃ. Vipassanāpādakanti vipassanārambhe vipassanāya pādakaṃ. Abhiññāpādakanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Buddhānañhi paṭhamārambhe eva pādakajjhānena payojanaṃ ahosi, na tato paraṃ uparimaggādhigamaphalasamāpattiabhiññāvaḷañjanādiatthaṃ. Abhisambodhisamadhigamato paṭṭhāya hi sabbaṃ ñāṇasamādhikiccaṃ ākaṅkhamattapaṭibaddhamevāti. Sabbakiccasādhakanti anupubbavihārādisabbakiccasādhakaṃ. Sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti ettha vipassanābhiññāpādakattā eva catutthassa jhānassa bhagavato sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakatā veditabbā. Sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi maggañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ abhisambodhi, tadadhigamasamakālameva bhagavato sabbe buddhaguṇā hatthagatā ahesuṃ, catutthajjhānasannissayo ca maggādhigamoti.
宿住论释显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsakathāvaṇṇanā
52 「于二明」(dvinnaṃ vijjānaṃ):指名为宿住智与天眼智的两种明。「随句释」(anupadavaṇṇanā):即对这二明的经文逐句解释。「修习方法」(bhāvanānayo):即生起这些明的方法。为了说明经文中的“彼”(so)这一第三人称词如何与“我”(ahaṃ)衔接,所以说了“我转向”(abhininnāmesiṃ)等。又或者,在圣典中,“我转向”是上人的表达,当以“我”字引述说明时,其义便很清楚,因此说“彼即我”(so ahaṃ)。「转向」(abhinīhariṃ):将心从禅那的所缘移开,引向宿住智的方向,令心倾注宿住、朝向宿住、俯向宿住。显示巴利原文
52.Dvinnaṃvijjānanti pubbenivāsañāṇadibbacakkhuñāṇasaṅkhātānaṃ dvinnaṃ vijjānaṃ. Anupadavaṇṇanāti tāsaṃ vijjānaṃ niddesapāḷiyā anupadavaṇṇanā. Bhāvanānayoti uppādanavidhi. ‘‘So’’ti paccattavacanassa ahaṃ-saddena sambandhane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘abhininnāmesi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ vā ‘‘abhininnāmesi’’nti uttamapurisassa yogoti ahaṃ-saddena ānetvā vuccamāne tadattho pākaṭo hotīti ‘‘so aha’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhinīharinti cittaṃ jhānārammaṇato apanetvā pubbenivāsābhimukhaṃ pesesiṃ, pubbenivāsaninnaṃ pubbenivāsapoṇaṃ pubbenivāsapabbhāraṃ akāsinti attho.
「宿住」(pubbenivāso)指在过去诸生中所住过的诸蕴。「所住」指已经居住、已经受用、在自己的生命相续中曾经生起然后又灭去的那些;或者,依所缘而住,是被自己的识所认知的法,乃至被其他众生的识所认知的(就像随念断头鬼等的情形)。以那样的念去随念该宿住,与那种念相应的智,就是宿住随念智。「转回时」(paṭinivattantassa)指在随念宿住并顺着意愿一直往前,然后又返回的时候。「因此」(tasmā)是对已经说过的道理,以它为原因而回头再提,意思是「当返回时进行观察」。「于此再生」(idhūpapattiyā)指在此最后有的再生。「无间」(anantara)是指紧接着过去。「于某处」(amutra)意为在某有中。「生起」(udapādi)即产生。「从那些天神」(tāhi devatāhi)指从兜率天神。「同姓」(ekagotto)指与兜率同一族姓。因为大菩萨在生命相续的最后阶段,导致投生天界的那个业,并没有被不善业所干扰,基于这个意图,所以只说「只是行苦的苦」。但是,即使有大福德的天子,在前兆出现等时候,也确实会有遇到不可意所缘的情况,因此不能说「连苦苦也完全不可能发生」。五十七……乃至……为边际:这是依人间的年数来说的。其中,若依天神的年数,则只有四千。显示巴利原文
Pubbeatītajātīsu nivutthakkhandhā pubbenivāso. Nivutthāti ca ajjhāvutthā anubhūtā attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhā, gocaranivāsena nivutthadhammā vā attano viññāṇenaviññātā, paraviññāṇaviññātāpi vā chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsu, taṃ pubbenivāsaṃ yāya satiyā anussarati, tāya sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiññāṇaṃ. Paṭinivattantassāti pubbenivāsaṃ anussaraṇavasena yāvadicchakaṃ gantvā paccāgacchantassa. Tasmāti vuttassevatthassa kāraṇabhāvena paccāmasanaṃ, paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇabhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idhūpapattiyāti idha carimabhave upapattiyā. Anantaranti atītānantaramāha. Amutrāti amukasmiṃ bhaveti attho. Udapādinti uppajjiṃ. Tāhi devatāhīti tusitādevatāhi. Ekagottoti tusitagottena ekagotto. Mahābodhisattānaṃ santānassa pariyosānāvatthāya devalokūpapattijanakaṃ nāma akusalena kammunā anupaddutameva hotīti adhippāyena ‘‘dukkhaṃ pana saṅkhāradukkhamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāpuññānampi pana devaputtānaṃ pubbanimittuppattikālādīsu aniṭṭhārammaṇasamāyogo hotiyevāti ‘‘kadāci dukkhadukkhassapi sambhavo natthī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ. Sattapaññāsa…pe… pariyantoti idaṃ manussānaṃ vassagaṇanāvasena vuttaṃ. Tattha devānaṃ vassagaṇanāya pana catusahassameva.
过去有中的诸蕴以及与它们关联的名和姓,这一切都包含在「宿住」里面,所以说:「令知什么?宿住。」愚痴(moha)由于覆障的意义,称为「暗」(tamo),说它「就像黑暗」。而说光照义(obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena)时:因为应作,所以是作;光就是作,意思是,以自己的缘而应被光照之状态生起。剩下的是赞叹的话,因为它们说明了与对立面的斗争、转起的不同情形。「无明被破」:这句话也指示出「有明了知」这一层含义。因为「明已生起」,这显示:明是无明的对治,而这种对治性是指,无明是应该被断除的,而明是能断除它的。这个道理也适用于另外两句:「暗被破、已灭尽」。为什么?因为「光已经生起」。这也指示出这个意思。「已策励心者」指朝向如所意欲的义利成就,而释放其心。「如对不放逸者」意思是,对其他任何像我这样的人也是如此。显示巴利原文
Atītabhave (sārattha. ṭī. 1.12.pubbenivāsakathāyaṃ) khandhā tappaṭibaddhanāmagottāni ca sabbaṃ pubbenivāsanteva saṅgahitanti āha ‘‘kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsa’’nti. Moho paṭicchādakaṭṭhena‘‘tamo’’ti vuccati ‘‘tamo viyā’’ti katvā. Obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhenāti kātabbato karaṇaṃ, obhāsova karaṇaṃ, attano paccayena obhāsabhāvena nibbattetabbaṭṭhenāti attho. Sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacananti paṭipakkhavidhamanapavattivisesānaṃ bodhanato vuttaṃ. Avijjā vihatāti etena vijjanaṭṭhena vijjāti ayampi attho dīpitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā vijjā uppannāti etena vijjāpaṭipakkhā avijjā, paṭipakkhatā cassā pahātabbabhāvena vijjāya ca pahāyakabhāvenāti dasseti. Esa nayo itarasmimpi padadvayeti iminā tamo vihato vinaṭṭho. Kasmā? Yasmā āloko uppannoti imamatthaṃ atidisati. Pesitattassāti yathādhippetatthasiddhiṃ pati vissaṭṭhacittassa. Yathā appamattassāti aññassapi kassaci mādisassāti adhippāyo.
天眼智论的解释显示巴利原文
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
53 「此处」(idha)出自《怖畏恐惧经》。其中,「此差别」是用于关联说明的。前面已述的内容,以「此由我」等例说明。所谓「遍作之事」,例如「从神通基础第四禅那出定后,应作意最后那次坐姿」等,以及「以遍相为所缘的神通基础禅那,须令其全然堪能引导」等;依此类遍作,在此处便无需功用。为何此处无此功用?因为,依此种修习方式,注释书中并不涉及此义,此处亦非意在讨论此事。显示巴利原文
53.Idhāti bhayabheravasutte vuttaṃ. Idha ayaṃ visesoti yojanā. Vuttasadisameva ‘‘meti mayā’’tiādinā. Parikammakiccanti ‘‘abhiññāpādakacatutthajjhānato vuṭṭhāya sabbapacchimā nisajjā āvajjitabbā’’tiādinā, kasiṇārammaṇaṃ abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ sabbākārena abhinīhārakkhamaṃ katvā’’tiādinā ca vuttena parikammena kiccaṃ payojanaṃ natthi. Natena idha atthoti tena bhāvanānayena idha pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanāyaṃ attho natthi tathābhāvanāya idha anadhippetattāti adhippāyo.
漏尽智论述的解释显示巴利原文
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
54 「以观为前行」:即作为观的基础(近行处)。观依修行者的类型差别,分为三种。于大菩萨及辟支菩萨,其观因思所成智的增长,体性为自生智;于其余修行者,则因闻所成智的增长,为依他教导而生。此观,如「除非想非非想处,于余色界、无色界禅那任一者出定後」等所说,通过多种无色禅门,依四界差别中种种摄界门的某一门,在《清净道论》中以种种方便详加开演。然于大菩萨,其观智以二十四俱胝又十万种门类显示差别。因此,他的观智,是作为含摄一切知智所依圣道智之根本安立、作为前行部分智之内在种性而辗转成熟的、极为甚深、细密、层层微细、不共于其他人的观智。此观智于注释书中,被称为「大金刚智」。复次,此智以展现种种门类差别为近行因,若依此行而成就,则称为世尊日常受用的二十四俱胝又十万数等至。诸如来此种观行境界,于《胜义宝函》中的《清净道论释》,已通过纲要形式阐明。显示巴利原文
54.Vipassanāpādakanti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.14.āsavakkhayañāṇakathāyaṃ; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.248; a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.59) vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vipassanā ca tividhā vipassanakapuggalabhedena. Mahābodhisattānañhi paccekabodhisattānañca vipassanā cintāmayañāṇasaṃvaddhitattā sayambhuñāṇabhūtā, itaresaṃ sutamayañāṇasaṃvaddhitattā paropadesasambhūtā, sā ‘‘ṭhapetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ avasesarūpārūpajjhānānaṃ aññatarato vuṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā anekadhā arūpamukhavasena catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhātupariggahamukhānaṃ aññataramukhavasena anekadhāva visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.306) nānānayato vibhāvitā. Mahābodhisattānaṃ pana catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena pabhedagamanato nānānayaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasannissayassa ariyamaggañāṇassa adhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pubbabhāgañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ paramagambhīrasaṇhasukhumataraṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ hoti, yaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu mahāvajirañāṇanti vuccati. Yassa ca pavattivibhāgena catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassappabhedassa pādakabhāvena samāpajjiyamānā catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā devasikaṃ satthu vaḷañjanakasamāpattiyo vuccanti, svāyaṃ buddhānaṃ vipassanācāro paramatthamañjūsāya visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.144) uddesato dassito, atthikehi tato gahetabboti.
「漏尽(āsavakkhayo)」:由于断除诸漏、彻底根绝它们,所以称为漏尽,这是指圣道,从殊胜的意义上说,特别是指阿拉汉道。「于漏尽之智(āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ)」即是关于漏灭的智。为了显示这个意思,先说「于此有此智(tatra cetaṃ ñāṇaṃ)」,然后又为了显示「灭」这个词是依处格而非所缘格,所以说「因为依於漏灭而得名」。所谓「此是苦(idaṃ dukkha)」,是显示在当时对苦圣谛的现前了知。「这些是苦(ettakaṃ dukkhanti)」,是显示在当时对苦圣谛通过限定而了知。「无过于此(na ito bhiyyo)」,是显示毫无剩余地完全了知。因此说「这一切就是苦谛」等。「以自性相通达(sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena)」,就是对称为自性的相无有迷乱地通达。所谓无迷乱通达,就是指当那种智生起之后,在判别苦的自相、差别等等时,不会产生迷惑,就是这样成立的。所以又说「如实了知(yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi)」。「到达之处(yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā)」,是指涅槃,因为它是道的所缘缘意义上的因,依此而到达。具有厌逆与无厌逆两者的修行者所达到的,就称为「厌逆与无厌逆两者的获得」。或者说,「到达」就是达到的因。「无转起(appavatti)」,就是无转起的相状。或者说「在那里,它们不再转起(te vā nappavattanti etthā)」,这就称为「无转起」,也就是涅槃。「彼」是指苦的灭。「善能令至(sampāpaka)」,就是通过现证的方式完全正确地引导到那里。显示巴利原文
Āsavānaṃ khepanato samucchindanato āsavakkhayo, ariyamaggo, ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena arahattamaggaggahaṇaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇanti dassento ‘‘tatra cetaṃ ñāṇa’’nti vatvā khayeti ca ādhāre bhummaṃ, na visayeti dassento ‘‘tappariyā pannattā’’ti āha. Idaṃ dukkhanti dukkhassa ariyasaccassa tadā paccakkhato gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Ettakaṃ dukkhanti dukkhassa ariyasaccassa tadā paccakkhato gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Ettakaṃ dukkhanti tassa paricchijja gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Na ito bhiyyoti anavasesetvā gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbampidukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti sabhāvasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa asammohato paṭivijjhanena. Asammohapaṭivedhoti ca yathā tasmiṃ ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavatti. Tenāha ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’nti. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvāti yaṃ nibbānaṃ maggassa ārammaṇapaccayaṭṭhena kāraṇabhūtaṃ āgamma. Tadubhayavato hi puggalassa patti tadubhayassa pattīti vuttaṃ. Patvāti vā pāpuṇanahetu. Appavattinti appavattinimittaṃ. Te vā nappavattanti etthāti appavatti, nibbānaṃ. Tassāti dukkhanirodhassa. Sampāpakanti sacchikiriyāvasena sammadeva pāpakaṃ.
所谓“以烦恼而言”,即依名为“漏”的烦恼而说。因为诸漏为苦谛所摄,是苦谛的同义语;而其余诸谛则有其集起的同义语等,所以说这是“从同义语的角度”。接着,“开示诸谛”是连接词。此处只取诸漏,是因为开篇即以“为漏尽之智”为起始。同样,由于以漏的解脱为首要,故说一切烦恼的解脱。像“此是苦,如实了知”这样的表述,在此是说明夹杂着观的道,所以说“开示与观一同达到顶点的道”。而且在这里,虽然那时对诸谛的通达已是过去时,并用过去式说“如实了知”,但若依现观时的现在性,便以“如是知、如是见”这样的现在时来说明。再者,从道刹那之后直至现在的全部时间固然都是过去,但其最初的过去性,理应从果刹那来了知,因此说“以‘便解脱’显示果刹那”。“知者、见者”,这是从原因的角度来说明。也就是说,因为知、因为见,心才从欲漏解脱——应如此连接。在此处提及有漏,正如压制“有贪”的同时,也压制了“有见”,故应视为也包含了见漏。显示巴利原文
Kilesavasenāti āsavasaṅkhātakilesavasena. Yasmā āsavānaṃ dukkhasaccapariyāyo tappariyāpannattā, sesasaccānañca taṃsamudayādipariyāyo atthi, tasmā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pariyāyato’’ti. Dassento saccānīti yojanā. Āsavānaṃyeva cettha gahaṇaṃ ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti āraddhattā. Tathā hi āsavavimutti sīseneva sabbasaṃkilesavimutti vuttā. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’ntiādinā missakamaggo idha kathitoti ‘‘saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca saccapaṭivedhassa tadā atītakālikattā ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’nti vatvāpi abhisamayakāle tassa paccuppannataṃ upādāya ‘‘evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato’’ti vattamānakālena niddeso kato. So ca kāmaṃ maggakkhaṇato paraṃ yāvajjatanā atītakāliko eva, sabbapaṭhamaṃ panassa atītakālikattaṃ phalakkhaṇena veditabbanti āha ‘‘vimuccitthāti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dassetī’’ti. Jānato passatoti vā hetuniddesoyaṃ. Jānanahetu dassanahetu kāmāsavā cittaṃ vimuccitthāti yojanā. Bhavāsavaggahaṇeneva cettha bhavarāgassa viya bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi samavarodhoti diṭṭhāsavassapi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
对于“生已尽”等词句,所谓“它的”,是指观察智。“地”,是指转起的立足处。其意趣是:对他而言,过去的生并非依靠修道才得以灭尽的。他对此说明原因:“因为先前早已灭尽”。“未来的生并非已灭尽”——应如此连接。而说“非未来”,是取其“未来性”的共相,以含蓄的方式指陈。因此他说“因为对于未来,并无努力”,但这指的是未来的殊胜部分,致力于其灭尽的努力还是存在的。所以他接着说:“然而,就道而言”等。在“一有、四有、五蕴有”之中,是为了依上述的义理,显示生已从无余的角度灭尽的实相,故而总括三有而说。“此”,是指前面所说的那种生。“彼”,是指世尊。显示巴利原文
Khīṇājātītiādīhi padehi. Tassāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa. Bhūmīnti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā maggabhāvanāyāti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘pubbeva khīṇattā’’ti. Na anāgatā assajāti khīṇāti yojanā. Na anāgatāti ca anāgatattasāmaññaṃ gahetvā lesena codeti. Tenāha ‘‘anāgate vāyāmābhāvato’’ti, anāgataviseso panettha adhippeto, tassa ca khepane vāyāmopi labbhateva. Tenāha ‘‘yā pana maggassā’’tiādi. Ekacatupañcavokārabhavesūti bhavattayaggahaṇaṃ vuttanayena anavasesato jātiyā khīṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tanti yathāvuttaṃ jātiṃ. Soti bhagavā.
这里所说的“梵行住”,仅指生起出世间道之梵行,所以说“已完毕”。在四圣谛中,当正见依遍知等作用而转起时,正思惟等其他道支,在苦圣谛中同样与遍知现观相顺应地转起;而在其余圣谛中,它们依断证现观等方式转起,这是显而易见的。因此说“借助四道,依遍知、断证、作证、修习的方式进行”。关于“为此状态”,这类情况称为‘如是’,其状态即为‘此性’,因此是“为了成就此目的”的意思。这里所指的,就是作为圣道作用的遍知等,故称“为了这十六种作用的状况”。当比丘观察道时,依靠道的威力,这些作用便明晰地显现、前来呈现;而在遍知等作用中,“断”才是核心,其余作用皆是为此服务的,所以说“为了烦恼的灭尽”。或者,这也是相对于观察所断之烦恼而说。在“为此状态”一词中,它是以处格表示目的格的用法,故解释为“从这种状态中彻底解脱”。其余的,则是未来的。而此处的,是指被称为最后有的五蕴。说“它们被遍知后而停留”,是要显示它们已再无安立之处。因为有安立的根本……显示巴利原文
Brahmacariyavāso nāma idha maggabrahmacariyassa nibbattanamevāti āha ‘‘niṭṭhita’’nti. Sammādiṭṭhiyā catūsu saccesu pariññādikiccasādhanavasena pavattamānāya sammā saṅkappādīnampi dukkhasacce pariññābhisamayānuguṇā pavatti, itarasaccesu ca nesaṃ pahānābhisamayādivasena pavatti pākaṭā eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasenā’’ti. Itthattāyāti ime pakārā itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattaṃ, tadatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Te pana pakārā ariyamaggabyāpārabhūtā pariññādayo idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāyā’’ti. Te hi maggaṃ paccavekkhato maggānubhāvena pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, pariññādīsu ca pahānameva padhānaṃ tadatthattā itaresanti āha ‘‘kilesakkhayāyavā’’ti. Pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇavasena vā etaṃ vuttaṃ. Itthattāyāti nissakke sampadānavacananti āha ‘‘itthabhāvato’’ti. Aparaṃ anāgataṃ. Ime pana carimattabhāvasaṅkhātā pañcakkhandhā. Pariññātā tiṭṭhantīti etena tesaṃ appatiṭṭhataṃ dasseti. Apariññāmūlakā hi patiṭṭhā. Yathāha ‘‘kabaḷīkāre ce, bhikkhave, āhāre atthi rāgo atthi nandī atthi taṇhā, patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ virūḷha’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.64; mahāni. 7; kathā. 296). Tenevāha ‘‘chinnamūlakā rukkhā viyā’’tiādi.
此处意谓:此智为观察智所摄,非如初、二两种智证得时那般孤立。其意在以结说方式加以阐明,因为就其自性而言,此前已作开示。由于宿住智同样以过去为所缘,且是彼智之本性,故应如此连结:即将宿住智亦含摄于过去分智中。这里所说的“过去分智”,是指于所有过去蕴、处、界之分位中无碍通达的智慧。所谓“以天眼”,即天眼智及其所摄。现在分与未来分则合称现在未来分,对此分位的智慧即是“现在未来分智”。所言“一切世间与出世间功德”,当知同时含摄了如一切知智那般超诸世间而住立的其余不共智,以及十力、佛不共法等他人不具的佛陀功德。是故说言:“一切知智之一切功德,皆已会集一处。”显示巴利原文
Paccavekkhaṇañāṇapariggahitaṃ, na paṭhamadutiyañāṇadvayādhigamaṃ viya kevalanti adhippāyo. Dassento nigamanavasenāti adhippāyo. Sarūpato hi taṃ pubbe dassitamevāti. Pubbenivāsañāṇena atītārammaṇasabhāgatāya tabbhāvībhāvato ca atītaṃsañāṇaṃ saṅgahetvāti yojanā. Tattha atītaṃsañāṇanti atītakhandhāyatanadhātusaṅkhāte atītakoṭṭhāse appaṭihataṃ ñāṇaṃ. Dibbacakkhunāti saparibhaṇḍena dibbacakkhuñāṇena. Paccuppannaṃso ca anāgataṃso ca paccuppannānāgataṃsaṃ, tattha ñāṇaṃ paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇaṃ. Sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇanti etena sabbaṃ lokaṃ uttaritvā abhibhuyya ṭhitattā sabbaññutaññāṇassa viya sesāsādhāraṇañāṇassa balañāṇaāveṇikabuddhadhammādīnampi anaññasādhāraṇānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ saṅgaho veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘sabbepi sabbaññuguṇe saṅgahetvā’’ti.
关于阿兰若住的因缘之注释。显示巴利原文
Araññavāsakāraṇavaṇṇanā
55 在“Siyā kho pana te brāhmaṇā”句中,“siyā”是与“appeva”(或许)同义的不变词,因此意为:“婆罗门,你或许会这样认为吧”。而注释书中所说的“kadāci”(有时),也是基于同一含义而说,目的在于驳斥婆罗门所设想的那无因由之说后,开示自宗所主张的因由。拥有果效即是目的,因其随顺于彼,故称为“义利之力”(atthavaso);或在此亦可理解为“因由”(hetu)。至于“以及我自己的现法乐住”,导师借此说明自己对远离的喜悦,于是以“名为现法(diṭṭhadhammo)”等语句展开。其中,“威仪之住”(iriyāpathavihārānaṃ)是指四种威仪的转起。这些转起能在某一威仪中生起的苦被截断后,由转入另一威仪而得以维持,故称为“住”(vihārā)。所谓“亦哀愍后世的众人”,导师则是将婆罗门最初所说的“尊贵的乔达摩是他们的先行者……大家便随顺追随”,以及导师自己应允的“确实如此,婆罗门”等内容,以归纳的方式呈现出来,顺着这一教说而展示。显示巴利原文
55.Siyā kho pana te brāhmaṇāti ettha siyāti ‘‘appevā’’ti iminā samānattho nipāto , tasmā ‘brāhmaṇa, appeva kho pana te evamassā’ti attho. Yaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kadācī’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi imamevatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ akāraṇaṃ brāhmaṇena parikappitamatthaṃ paṭipakkhipitvā attano adhippetaṃ kāraṇaṃ dassento. Atthova phalaṃ tadadhīnavuttitāya vaso etassāti atthavaso, hetūti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāranti etena satthā attano vivekābhiratiṃ pakāsetīti dassento ‘‘diṭṭhadhammo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha iriyāpathavihārānanti iriyāpathapavattīnaṃ. Tappavattiyo hi ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe uppannadukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā haraṇato vihārāti vuccanti. Pacchimañca janataṃ anukampamānoti etena yo ādito brāhmaṇena ‘‘bhavaṃ tesaṃ gotamo pubbaṅgamo…pe… diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjatī’’ti vutto, yo ca tathā ‘‘evametaṃ brāhmaṇā’’tiādinā attanā sampaṭicchito, tameva atthaṃ nigamanavasena dassento yathānusandhināva satthā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
关于「说法随喜」的注释。显示巴利原文
Desanānumodanāvaṇṇanā
56 如此开示圆满后,那位婆罗门为表明对世尊的净信,便说出“abhikkanta”等语。“abhikkanta”意为“已过去、消逝”,故表耗尽义。正因为如此,才说“初夜已过”。而“abhikkantataro”则是“极其可意、令人愉悦”之义;那样一种状态,即是美好、善妙,所以表示美好义。显示巴利原文
56. Evaṃ niṭṭhāpitāya desanāya brāhmaṇo tattha bhagavati pasādaṃ pavedento ‘‘abhikkanta’’ntiādimāha. Abhikkantāti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.15.desanānumodanakathā; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.250; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.16) atikkantā, vigatāti atthoti āha ‘‘khaye dissatī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhikkantataroti ativiya kantataro manoramo. Tādiso ca sundaro bhaddako nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sundare dissatī’’ti.
“Ko”:在诸天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等之中,是哪一位?“Me”:我的。“Pādāni”:双足。“Iddhiyā”:以如此的天威神力。“Yasasā”:以如此的随从眷属。“Jalanti”:照耀着的。“Abhikkantena”:以极其可意、令人喜爱、端严的容貌。“Vaṇṇena”:以肤色,也就是凭藉身体的光泽。“照破一切诸方”的意思是,光耀、照亮十方,令一切皆成光明,犹如日月。这便是偈颂的义涵。“Abhirūpe”:指在广大、殊妙的容貌中,具足圆满的容色。显示巴利原文
Koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko katamo. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti iminā edisena parivārena parijanena. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena abhirūpena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti dasapi disā obhāsento pabhāsento, cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti gāthāya attho. Abhirūpeti uḷārarūpe sampannarūpe.
于恐惧时,用“贼!贼!”、“蛇!蛇!”这等叠语。于忿怒时,用“射!射!”、“打!打!”等;于赞叹时,用“善哉!善哉!”等;于仓促时,用“走!走!”、“割!割!”等;于惊奇时,用“来!来!”等;于思惟时,用“佛陀,佛陀,在思惟着”等;于嬉笑时,用“前进吧,尊者!前进吧,尊者!”等;于忧伤时,用“独子在哪?独子在哪?”等;于明净信时,用“啊!是乐!啊!是乐!”等。而“ca”字具有“总合未说之事”的义涵,因此也包含了讥嫌与不恭敬等情形。其中,于讥嫌时,有“恶!恶!”等;于不恭敬时,有“漂亮的家伙!漂亮的家伙!”等,应如此了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Coro coro, sappo sappo’’tiādīsu bhaye āmeḍitaṃ. ‘‘Vijjha vijjha, pahara paharā’’tiādīsu kodhe, ‘‘sādhu sādhūtiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.327; saṃ. ni. 2.127; 3.35; 5.1085) pasaṃsāyaṃ, ‘‘gaccha gaccha, lunāhi lunāhī’’tiādīsu turite, ‘‘āgaccha āgacchā’’tiādīsu kotūhale, ‘‘buddho buddhoti cintento’’tiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 2.44) acchare, ‘‘abhikkamathāyasmanto, abhikkamathāyasmanto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.20; a. ni. 9.11) hāse, ‘‘kahaṃ ekaputtaka, kahaṃ ekaputtakā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.353; saṃ. ni. 2.63) soke, ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’ntiādīsu (udā. 20; dī. ni. 3.305; cūḷava. 332) pasāde. Ca-saddo avuttasamuccayattho. Tena garahāasammānādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha ‘‘pāpo pāpo’’tiādīsu garahāyaṃ. ‘‘Abhirūpaka abhirūpakā’’tiādīsu asammāne daṭṭhabbaṃ.
并非依叠用而说两次,乃是基于两种意义,为显明此义,故说「或者」等语。「abhikkantaṃ」一词,是依于“言说”而以中性词性说出的,但那实为世尊的话语,因其是法的教导,才如此表述。或者,那仅是显示其义而已,因此应知是随义理而转变词性与格位。第二句也是如此所说。所谓「由过失灭尽」,是指由于断除了贪等烦恼过失;所谓「由功德证得」,是指由于成就了戒等功德。于教导所令证得的那些功德之中,当开示那些主要的,为了首先开示那些主要的,故说「由于令生信,由于令生慧」。因为世间功德以信为首,出世间功德以慧为首。由于成就了戒等义利,故为「有义利的」;由于成就了自性词源,故为「有文句的」。由于运用了极易了知的词语,故为「文句显了的」;由于微细、幽玄之相,义理难以了知,故为「义理甚深的」。由于运用了润滑、柔软、甜美的词语,故为「悦耳的」;由于义利广大、清净、可意可爱,故为「惬心的」。由于摧破慢与过慢而不抬高自己,故为「不自赞的」;由于摧破顽固与忿而对他人不轻蔑,故为「不毁他的」。由于依利益意显示巴利原文
Nayidaṃ āmeḍitavasena dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ, atha kho atthadvayavasenāti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Abhikkantanti vacanaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgavasena vuttaṃ, taṃ pana bhagavato vacanaṃ dhammassa desanāti katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Atthamattadassanaṃ vā etaṃ, tasmā atthavasena liṅgavibhattivipariṇāmo veditabbo. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Dosanāsanatoti rāgādikilesadosavidhamanato, guṇādhigamanatoti sīlādiguṇānaṃ sampāpanato. Ye guṇe desanā adhigameti, tesu padhānabhūtā dassetabbāti te padhānabhūte tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhājananato paññājananato’’ti vuttaṃ. Saddhāpamukhā hi lokiyā guṇā, paññāpamukhā lokuttarā. Sīlādiatthasampattiyā sātthato, sabhāvaniruttisampattiyā sabyañjanato. Suviññeyyasaddapayogatāya uttānapadato, saṇhasukhumabhāvena dubbiññeyyatthatāya gambhīratthato. Siniddhamudumadhurasaddapayogatāya kaṇṇasukhato, vipulavisuddhapemanīyatthatāya hadayaṅgamato. Mānātimānavidhamanena anattukkaṃsanato, thambhasārambhamaddanena aparavambhanato. Hitādhippāyapavattiyā paresaṃ rāgapariḷāhādivūpasamanena ca karuṇāsītalato, kilesandhakāravidhamanena paññāvadātato. Karavīkarutamañjutāya āpātharamaṇīyato, pubbāparāviruddhasuvisuddhatthatāya vimaddakkhamato. Āpātharamaṇīyatāya eva suyyamānasukhato, vimaddakkhamatāya hitajjhāsayappavattitatāya ca vīmaṃsiyamānahitato. Evamādīhīti ādisaddena saṃsāracakkanivattanato, saddhammacakkappavattanato, micchāvādavidhamanato, sammāvādapatiṭṭhāpanato, akusalamūlasamuddharaṇato, kusalamūlasaṃropanato, apāyadvārapidhānato, saggamaggadvāravivaraṇato, pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanato, anusayasamugghātanatoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“朝下放置的”:指被某人特意朝下放置的。“自性面朝下”:指依其本性而面朝下。“若能掀开”:指若能令其打开。握住他的手,并不说“你应朝东走”或“你应朝北走”之类的话,而是握着那人的手,告诉他:“此路无疑,就这样走。”“黑分十四日”:即黑分中的第十四日。显示巴利原文
Adhomukhaṭṭhapitanti kenaci adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Heṭṭhāmukhajātanti sabhāveneva heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ. Ugghāṭeyyāti vivaṭaṃ kareyya. Hatthe gahetvāti ‘‘puratthābhimukho, uttarābhimukho vā gacchā’’tiādīni avatvā hatthe gahetvā ‘‘nissandehaṃ esa maggo, evaṃ gacchā’’ti vadeyya. Kāḷapakkhacātuddasīti kāḷapakkhe cātuddasī.
被倒扣的容器,对所放入之物不能成为承载之器,通过令其成为承载之器而将它翻正过来。所谓“自性面朝下”,是指心背离正法;所谓“被朝下放置”,是指心陷没于非正法。这两句当随其适切加以结合,而非依数字次序对应。虽然欲贪等也是遮蔽者,但邪见是尤为严重的遮蔽,所以说“被邪见稠林所遮蔽”。因此世尊开示:“比丘们,我说邪见是最大的罪过。”一切趣向恶趣之道皆是邪道,因为是鄙恶之道。邪见等既是正见等的正相反对,所以邪见等八种邪性法即是邪道。正是为此显明二者的对立,而说“在开示通往天界与解脱之道时”。以酥等为燃料的灯,不如以油为燃料的灯明亮,故举油灯为譬喻。“以种种理趣”,是指通过这些覆仰、遮蔽与开显等的譬喻及所喻之事;或者,指依前文所说,通过把握十六所缘、无混乱住、天住的开显理趣,以及以三明开显为表示,来开显自己一切知者功德的理趣。因而说:“以种种理趣,法已被阐明。”显示巴利原文
Nikujjitaṃ ādheyyassa anādhārabhūtaṃ bhājanaṃ ādhārabhāvāpādanavasena ukkujjeyya. Heṭṭhāmukhajātatāya saddhammavimukhaṃ, adhomukhaṭṭhapitatāya asaddhamme patitanti evaṃ padadvayaṃ yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ, na yathāsaṅkhyaṃ. Kāmaṃ kāmacchandādayopi paṭicchādakā, micchādiṭṭhi pana savisesaṃ paṭicchādikāti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchanna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ, bhikkhave, vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310). Sabbo apāyagāmimaggo kummaggo ‘‘kucchito maggo’’ti katvā. Sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ ujupaṭipakkhatāya micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha micchattadhammā micchāmaggo. Teneva hi tadubhayapaṭipakkhataṃ sandhāya ‘‘saggamokkhamaggaṃ ācikkhantenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sappiādisannissayo padīpo na tathā ujjalo, yathā telasannissayoti telapajjotaggahaṇaṃ. Etehi pariyāyehīti etehi nikujjitukkujjanapaṭicchannavivaraṇādiupamopamitabbapakārehi, etehi vā yathāvuttehi soḷasārammaṇapariggahaasammohavihāradibbavihāravibhāvanapariyāyehi vijjāttayavibhāvanāpadesena attano sabbaññuguṇavibhāvanapariyāyehi ca. Tenāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito’’ti.
《明净信所作论释》显示巴利原文
Pasannakāravaṇṇanā
「明净信所作」(Pasannakāra):是指应该由已生净信的人所做的恭敬行为。「皈依」(saraṇa):是指庇护所。因此,说「最上庇护」(parāyaṇa)。而「最上庇护」这种状态,是通过遮止无义和成就义利来实现的,所以说:「为恐怖的救护者,为利益的施与者」。「恐怖的」(aghassa):有些人说它是指「苦」的意思,但理解为「恶」才恰当。此词在这里是属格形式,表示“从……中”的意思。在这里,「去」(gami) 这个动词词根,并不像「引导」(nī) 等词根那样可以带两个宾语(双及物)。因此,就像我们说「把山羊引导到村子」,对于皈依,我们不能说「我皈依乔达摩」,而应当说「我以皈依而去」(saraṇanti gacchāmī)。而此处的「iti」字是文中省略并未直接说出的,它的含义是:为了显示「去」就是依照其意图的「亲近」,或者同样表示「了知」,所以说「即以此意图」等语。在这里,「我亲近」等语句,后面的话是前面话的义理解说,层层递进。或者这样解释:「亲近」是依皈依的意图而接近;「敬奉」是在他身边行持的状态;「承事」是通过履行义务和服务来侍奉——如此,在一切情况中,都只是彰显了「不以其他事物为皈依」这一事实。至于「我去」(gacchāmi) 这个词,如何才能得到「我觉了」(bujjhāmi) 这样的意义呢?为了说明这点,而说:「因为,对于那些……等」。显示巴利原文
Pasannakāranti pasannehi kātabbaṃ sakkāraṃ. Saraṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘parāyaṇa’’nti. Parāyaṇabhāvo ca anatthanisedhanena atthasampaṭipādanena ca hotīti āha ‘‘aghassa tātā hitassa ca vidhātā’’ti. Aghassāti dukkhatoti vadanti, pāpatoti pana yuttaṃ. Nissakke cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Ettha ca nāyaṃ gami-saddo nī-saddādayo viya dvikammako, tasmā yathā ‘‘ajaṃ gāmaṃ netī’’ti vuccati, evaṃ ‘‘gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vattuṃ na sakkā, ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti pana vattabbaṃ. Iti-saddo cettha luttaniddiṭṭho, tassa cāyamattho – gamanañca tadadhippāyena bhajanaṃ, tathā jānanaṃ vāti dassento ‘‘iti iminā adhippāyenā’’tiādimāha . Tattha bhajāmītiādīsu purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Bhajanaṃ vā saraṇādhippāyena upasaṅkamanaṃ, sevanaṃ santikāvacaratā, payirupāsanaṃ vattapaṭivattakaraṇena upaṭṭhānanti evaṃ sabbathāpi anaññasaraṇataṃyeva dīpeti. ‘‘Gacchāmī’’ti padassa kathaṃ ‘‘bujjhāmī’’ti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘yesañhī’’tiādi.
“已证得道,已作证灭”这两个词,也只显示了果位的人,而非道位的人。为了显示他们,因此说:“也在于当按照教导而正确实践的时候”。难道善凡夫不也被说为是按照教导而实践吗?虽有所说,然而在严格意义上,唯有处于道位的人才应被如此称呼,而非其他人,因为他们未入决定。因此,唯有他们才被称为“护持那些不堕恶趣者”。由入正性决定,方有可能从恶趣中解脱。
“被说为”:在此,“iti”字有“等”的含义,或“类别”的含义。以此含摄了经句:“比丘们,凡任何有为法或无为法,离染于他们中被说为最上”;或以此“vitthāro”字含摄。而在这里,由于圣道是“导出的”,涅槃是那道成就其义之因——如此,在此严格意义上,只有这两者才被说为“法”。因为,涅槃成为所缘缘,被道获得后,才有道之义的成就;对于圣果,由于“因为依彼信,当彼未平息时……”等语,由道所断的烦恼得以止息与舍断,并且(果)是随顺于导出的,也是导出。显示巴利原文
Adhigatamagge,sacchikatanirodheti padadvayenapi phalaṭṭhā eva dassitā, na maggaṭṭhāti te dassento ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cā’’ti āha. Nanu ca kalyāṇaputhujjanopi yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjatīti vuccatīti? Kiñcāpi vuccati, nippariyāyena pana maggaṭṭhā eva tathā vattabbā, na itare niyāmokkamanābhāvato. Tathā hi te eva ‘‘apāyesu apatamāne dhāretī’’ti vuttā. Sammattaniyāmokkamanena hi apāyavinimuttisambhavo. Akkhāyatīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā. Tena ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti suttapadaṃ (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) saṅgaṇhāti, vitthāroti vā iminā. Ettha ca ariyamaggo niyyānikatāya, nibbānaṃ tassa tadatthasiddhihetutāyāti ubhayamevettha nippariyāyena dhammoti vutto. Nibbānañhi ārammaṇapaccayabhūtaṃ labhitvā ariyamaggassa tadatthasiddhi, ariyaphalānaṃ ‘‘yasmā tāya saddhāya avūpasantāyā’’tiādivacanato maggena samucchinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhipahānakiccatāya niyyānānuguṇatāya niyyānapariyosānatāya ca. Pariyattidhammassa pana niyyānadhammasamadhigamahetutāyāti iminā pariyāyena dhammabhāvo labbhati eva, svāyamattho pāṭhāruḷho evāti dassento ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādimāha.
“欲贪、有贪”等,如此种种差别的一切贪,都因此离染、被断除,故称“贪离染”,这是就道而言。对于被称为“动”的爱,以及具有内在烧灼特征的愁,因其生起之因已一切皆尽,故称“无动无愁”,这是就果而言。“不违逆”:指不显示对立,即不与任何事物相冲突;或者意为“可意的、殊胜的”。“娴熟的”:由于是以熟练的方式转起,或由于令殊胜功德明了,故为娴熟。正如经文所说:“婆罗门,我知有害想,不说娴熟、殊胜的法于人群之中。”“一切法蕴皆已被说”,这是整句的连属。显示巴利原文
Kāmarāgo bhavarāgoti evamādibhedo sabbopi rāgo virajjati pahīyati etenāti rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya antonijjhānalakkhaṇassa sokassa ca taduppattiyaṃ sabbaso parikkhīṇattā anejamasokanti phalaṃ kathitaṃ. Appaṭikūlanti avirodhadīpanato kenaci aviruddhaṃ, iṭṭhaṃ paṇītanti vā attho. Paguṇarūpena pavattitattā, pakaṭṭhaguṇavibhāvanato vā paguṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vihiṃsasaññī paguṇaṃ na bhāsiṃ, dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ manujesu brahme’’ti. Sabbadhammakkhandhā kathitāti yojanā.
“以见与戒的集合”:这是就如下之见而言:“凡此见是圣的、出离的,能导出此实践者的正确尽苦;依如是类的见,得具足见之同分而住。”以及就如下之戒而言:“凡他们戒,无缺、无穿、无斑点、无污点,令自在,为智者所称誉,不执取,能引生定;依如是类的戒,得具足戒之同分而住。”以见与戒共相集合的状态,即是具足见与戒的同分。“集合”,即聚合。因为圣者无论在何处,即使站得很远,也因自身功德的集合而成为聚合。
“有八种人,是法见者”:“八”,即使按一对人的方式计有四种,若按单人计则为八种。因他们亲见了圣法,故称“法见者”。“三次”:以皈依的行动及进行三次的行动,便有三种皈依。“他表白”:他通过自己口中的言语,将存于内心的皈依表达出来。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātenāti ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā, ‘‘yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni , tathārūpehi sīlehi sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.12; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttānaṃ sīlānañca saṃhatabhāvena, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññenāti attho. Saṃhatoti ghaṭito. Ariyapuggalā hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatā eva. Aṭṭha ca puggala dhammadasā teti te purisayugavasena cattāropi puggalavasena aṭṭheva ariyadhammassa paccakkhadassāvitāya dhammadasā. Tīṇi vatthūni saraṇanti gamanena tikkhattuṃ gamanena ca tīṇi saraṇagamanāni. Paṭivedesīti attano hadayagataṃ vācāya pavedesi.
《皈依论注疏》显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
正如为令人在皈依上获得善巧,须阐明皈依的所缘差别、果报差别、染污差别以及皈依者本身,世尊才说:「为于诸皈依而得善巧……应当了知皈依」。因若无这些阐明,皈依本身即无法成立。然则,此处为何不摄入「清净」呢?难道阐明清净不也令人于皈依更得善巧吗?确是如此,但「染污」已被含摄时,清净之义即已间接开显,故不另加摄取。因为能令造成皈依染污的诸缘——如无明等——完全不再生起,并使已生者彻底舍断,即是清净。应知,「皈依」(saraṇa)一词以具伤害义的 sara 词根为基,故说「以其能伤害故,名为皈依」。继而,为澄清「何所伤害?如何伤害?伤害于谁?」的疑问,便说明「对于已皈依者……」等。其中,「怖畏」指轮回之怖畏;「惊惧」为内心所感之惊恐。既已涵盖心所苦,此处「苦」即指身苦。「恶趣杂染」则指属恶趣范围的一切苦,这些将于后文果报部分详加阐明。「此」即指「皈依」一词。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanassa visayapabhedaphalasaṃkilesabhedānaṃ viya kattu ca vibhāvanā tattha kosallāya hotīti ‘‘saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃsaraṇaṃ…pe… veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ tena vinā saraṇagamanasseva asambhavato. Kasmā panettha vodānaṃ na gahitaṃ, nanu vodānavibhāvanāpi tattha kosallāvahāti? Saccametaṃ, taṃ pana saṃkilesaggahaṇeneva atthato dīpitaṃ hotīti na gahitaṃ. Yāni hi tesaṃ saṃkilesakāraṇāni aññāṇādīni, tesaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ anuppannānaṃ anuppādanena, uppannānañca pahānena vodānaṃ hotīti. Hiṃsatthassa sara-saddassa vasenetaṃ padaṃ daṭṭhabbanti ‘‘hiṃsatīti saraṇa’’nti vatvā taṃ pana hiṃsanaṃ kesaṃ, kathaṃ, kassa vāti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘saraṇagatāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha bhayanti vaṭṭabhayaṃ. Santāsanti cittutrāsaṃ. Teneva cetasikadukkhassa gahitattā dukkhanti idha kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ. Duggatiparikilesanti duggatipariyāpannaṃ sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ parato phalakathāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Etanti ‘‘saraṇa’’nti padaṃ.
像这样,从无差别角度显示了 saraṇa 一词的含义之后,现在为了从有差别的角度来显示,而说「或者又……」等等。「令住立于利益」,就是指透过「比丘们,你们要具足戒而安住」(中部1.64,69)这样的义理教诫,让人投入到利益里面去。「及从不善遮止」,就是透过「杀生确实会招来苦的果报,会带来不好的来世」这种指出过患的方式,让人从不善中退回来。「伤害怖畏」,就是通过使那些在利益与不善上不转起或转起的原因所造成的灾祸停息下来,从而摧毁怖畏。经中说:「法,也就是八圣道,因为能度脱有旷野;其他的三宝,则因为赐予安稳,所以能伤害众生的怖畏」,应该这样结合理解。「应施物」,是指通过供养与恭敬的方式所呈献上来的那些恭敬物品。「以令获得广大果报,伤害众生之怖畏,为无上应供者之义」,这是要义。「以此行相」,意思就是用这种分别解说的方式来阐明。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ avisesato saraṇasaddassa atthaṃ dassetvā idāni visesato dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Hite pavattamānenāti ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharathā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.64, 69) atthe niyojanena. Ahitā ca nivattanenāti ‘‘pāṇātipātassa kho pāpako vipāko pāpakaṃ abhisamparāya’’ntiādinā ādīnavadassanādimukhena anatthato vinivattanena. Bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti hitāhitesu appavattipavattihetukaṃ byasanaṃ appavattikaraṇena vināseti . Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena maggasaṅkhāto dhammo, itaro assāsadānena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti yojanā. Kārānanti dānavasena pūjāvasena ca upanītānaṃ sakkārānaṃ. Vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvatoti adhippāyo. Imināpi pariyāyenāti imināpi vibhajitvā vuttena kāraṇena.
所谓「彼信(tappasāda)」,就是指对于「正自觉的世尊、善说的法、善行的僧伽」生起的那种信心;对于那个人来说,三宝是他尊重崇敬的对象,因此称为「彼尊重(taggaru)」,这种状态就是「彼尊重性(taggarutā)」。把彼信和彼尊重性合在一起,就是「彼信与彼尊重性(tappasādataggarutā)」。依止这两种特质,就能震伏邪见、疑、迷乱、无信等等,并且摧破烦恼。所谓「皈依(saraṇagamana)」,就是心以「只有三宝是我的依怙、去处、救护、隐蔽处」这样的行相生起,这种以彼为归趣的行相所转起的心念,就称为皈依,意思是「依此而走向皈依」。「具足彼者」,就是指具足了这种心念的人。「如是归向」,意思是这样地亲近、奉侍、承事,或者这样地了知、觉悟,应当知道这就是它的含义。在这里,透过摄取「信」,讲的是世俗层次的皈依,因为这种皈依是以信心为主,而不是以智慧为主。透过摄取「尊重」,则讲的是出世间的皈依。因为圣者们如实确知三宝的功德,把三宝看得像石伞盖一样地珍贵尊重。所以,凭藉彼信,可以用暂伏的方式来摧破烦恼;凭藉彼尊重性,可以用正断的方式来摧破烦恼,应当这样来结合理解。而在这里的「彼归趣性」,指的就是那种归向的性态,应当知道,由它已经涵摄了所有即将讲到的四种皈依。或者,也可以这样理解:通过无差别地显示信与尊重,以信之摄入也包含了「不坏净信」以及其他,以尊重之摄入同样包含了其他;所以,用这两者,就可以将世俗与出世间的两种皈依连系起来。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti evaṃ pavatto tattha ratanattaye pasādo tappasādo, tadeva ratanattayaṃ garu etassāti taggaru, tassa bhāvo taggarutā, tappasādo ca taggarutā ca tappasādataggarutā, tāhi. Vidhutadiṭṭhivicikicchāsammohaassaddhiyāditāya vihatakileso. ‘‘Tadeva ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ gati tāṇaṃ leṇa’’nti evaṃ ākārena pavattiyā tapparāyaṇatākārapavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ ‘‘saraṇanti gacchati etenā’’ti. Taṃsamaṅgīti tena yathāvuttacittuppādena samannāgato. Evaṃ upetīti evaṃ bhajati sevati payirupāsati, evaṃ vā jānāti bujjhatīti evamattho veditabbo. Ettha ca pasādaggahaṇena lokiyasaraṇagamanamāha. Tañhi pasādappadhānaṃ, na ñāṇappadhānaṃ. Garutāgahaṇena lokuttaraṃ. Ariyā hi ratanattayaṃ guṇābhiññātāya pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garuṃ katvā passanti, tasmā tappasādena vikkhambhanavasena vihatakileso taggarutāya samucchedavasenāti yojetabbaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā panettha taggatikatāti tāya catubbidhampi vakkhamānaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avisesena vā pasādagarutā jotitāti pasādaggahaṇena aveccappasādassa itarassa ca gahaṇaṃ, tathā garutāgahaṇenāti ubhayenapi ubhayaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
应作这样的结合理解:皈依在证道的那一刹那成就。经文说“以涅槃为所缘后”,这在意义上真正显示了四圣谛的体证本身就是出世间的皈依。因为在那里,涅槃法通过作证通达,道法通过修习通达,正是在如实通达的当下,便成就了皈依的性质;而佛功德作为声闻的行境,以遍知通达,圣僧功德同样以遍知通达。因此世尊说:“从作用上说,是在完整的三宝上成就”,而且这种成就与三宝同时,不像世俗皈依那样有次第,因为它是以一种毫无迷惑的悟达方式去证得的,这是关键所在。如果有人主张:“皈依并非以涅槃为所缘后生起,只是因为证得了圣道,才被称作已得的皈依罢了,就像那些三明阿拉汉生起世间明等一样”,那么依此说法,皈依就只能是世俗的,不能成为出世间。然而这是不合理的,因为两种皈依都应该被希望发生才对。“彼”指世俗皈依。“信获得”是指透过“正自觉的世尊”等语而生起的信心。“信为根本”是指以刚才所说的信心为先行的正见。这正见仅仅是借助世间性的理解方式,依循正当的方法,去观见佛陀的善自觉性、法的善法性,以及显示巴利原文
Maggakkhaṇe ijjhatīti yojanā. Nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvāti etena atthato catusaccādhigamoyeva lokuttaraṃ saraṇagamananti dasseti. Tattha hi nibbānadhammo sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena, maggadhammo bhāvanābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhiyamānoyeva saraṇagamanattaṃ sādheti, buddhaguṇā pana sāvakagocarabhūtā pariññābhisamayavasena, tathā ariyasaṅghaguṇā. Tenāha ‘‘kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhatī’’ti, ijjhantañca saheva ijjhati, na lokiyaṃ viya paṭipāṭiyā asammohapaṭivedhena paṭividdhattāti adhippāyo. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘na saraṇagamanaṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā pavattati, maggassa adhigatattā pana adhigatameva hoti ekaccānaṃ tevijjādīnaṃ lokiyavijjādayo viyā’’ti, tesaṃ lokiyameva saraṇagamanaṃ siyā, na lokuttaraṃ, tañca ayuttaṃ duvidhassapi icchitabbattā. Tanti lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ. Saddhāpaṭilābho ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’tiādinā. Saddhāmūlikāti yathāvuttasaddhāpubbaṅgamā sammādiṭṭhi buddhasubuddhataṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipatiñca lokiyāvabodhavaseneva sammā ñāyena dassanato. ‘‘Saddhāmūlikā sammādiṭṭhī’’ti etena saddhūpanissayā yathāvuttalakkhaṇā paññā lokiyasaraṇagamananti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhijukammanti vuccatī’’ti ‘‘diṭṭhi eva attano paccayehi ujuṃ karīyatī’’ti katvā. Diṭṭhi vā ujuṃ karīyati etenāti diṭṭhijukammaṃ, tathā pavatto cittuppādo . Evañca katvā ‘‘tapparāyaṇatākārapavatto cittuppādo’’ti idañca vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Saddhāpubbaṅgamasammādiṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ pana cittuppādassa tappadhānatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Saddhāpaṭilābho’’ti iminā mātādīhi ussāhitadārakādīnaṃ viya ñāṇavippayuttasaraṇagamanaṃ dasseti, ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti iminā ñāṇasampayuttasaraṇagamanaṃ.
这三种是世间的皈依。其中,“自我施与”是指依此而把自己交出、托付、舍弃出去,也就是前面所说的令见正直之业。“彼为皈依”是指以三宝为依靠、为归宿的人,或指那样的心念,这种状态就是“彼皈依性”,同样也就是前面所说的令见正直之业。“学童归向”是指怀着皈依的心意,依此而趋向弟子、学童的身份。“俯首行礼”是指依此同样怀着皈依的心意低头顶礼。在所有这些情况里,都应当以令见正直之业来理解它的意义。“自我舍离”是指为了渡脱轮回的苦海,而舍弃自己的有身。这个道理对于剩下的其他词也同样适用。“唯对佛等”这种限制性的说法,也应该相应地运用到其他的皈依差别情形上。正因为如此,对其他对象的执着便被排除了。显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ. Attā sanniyyātīyati appīyati pariccajīyati etenāti attasanniyyātanaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ diṭṭhijukammaṃ. Taṃ ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ etassāti tapparāyaṇo, puggalo, cittuppādo vā, tassa bhāvo tapparāyaṇatā, yathāvuttadiṭṭhijukammameva. Saraṇanti adhippāyena sissabhāvaṃ antevāsikabhāvaṃ upagacchati etenāti sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ. Saraṇagamanādhippāyeneva paṇipatati etenāti paṇipāto. Sabbattha yathāvuttadiṭṭhijukammavaseneva attho veditabbo. Attapariccajananti saṃsāradukkhanittharaṇatthaṃ attano attabhāvassa pariccajanaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Buddhādīnaṃyevāti avadhāraṇaṃ itaresupi saraṇagamanavisesesu yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Evañhi tadaññanivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti.
这样以一种方式说明了“自我施与”等之后,现在为了再以其他方式来阐明,而开始说“复次……”等。这表示,通过另外的途径,“自我施与”等本身也被解析了,因为它们的内涵是同一的。提到的“阿拉瓦迦等”,这个“等”字应理解为包含了沙塔基利、黑玛瓦德等在内。难道这些阿拉瓦迦等不是依圣道而获得皈依的吗?为什么说他们的皈依是“彼皈依性皈依”呢?即便他们是依圣道而获得皈依,由于他们本人也通过“我将从一村到另一村去游行”等语句,表露了心归向三宝的那种行相,所以才这样说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ attasanniyātanādīni ekena pakārena dassetvā idāni aparehipi pakārehi dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tena pariyāyantarehipi attasanniyyātanādi katameva hoti atthassa abhinnattāti dasseti. Āḷavakādīnanti ādi-saddena sātāgirihemavatādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nanu cete āḷavakādayo maggeneva āgatasaraṇagamanā, kathaṃ tesaṃ tapparāyaṇatāsaraṇagamanaṃ vuttanti? Maggenāgatasaraṇagamanehipi ‘‘so ahaṃ vicarissāmi gāmā gāma’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.246) tehi tapparāyaṇatākārassa paveditattā tathā vuttaṃ.
「由亲族……等等」:在这里,「由」字应分别与「由亲族」「由怖畏」「由老师」「由应供者」结合来理解。其中,「由亲族」指以亲族的身份关系来行事,余者类推。「以对应供者的俯首行礼」:指以对方是可受供养者为由而生起的顶礼行为。「与其他」:指其他三种基于亲族身份等因缘而生的顶礼行为。为了将「与其他」等简要之义展开详释,才说「因此……」等等。「他俯首行礼」是描述行礼特征的用语。「如是类」:着眼于现法利益而说。因为心中期待来世利益或能导向解脱教诫的人,只会向值得供养的对象俯首行礼,这是要点。「皈依之差别」:指皈依的不同分类。显示巴利原文
Ñāti…pe… vasenāti ettha ñātivasena bhayavasena ācariyavasena dakkhiṇeyyavasenāti paccekaṃ ‘‘vasenā’’ti padaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ñātivasenāti ñātibhāvavasena. Evaṃ sesesupi. Dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātenāti dakkhiṇeyyatāhetukena paṇipātena. Itarehīti ñātibhāvādivasappavattehi tīhi paṇipātehi. Itarehītiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vandatīti paṇipātassa lakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Evarūpanti diṭṭhadhammikaṃ sandhāya vadati. Samparāyikañhi niyyānikaṃ vā anusāsanaṃ paccāsīsanto dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātameva karotīti adhippāyo. Saraṇagamanappabhedoti saraṇagamanavibhāgo.
由于圣道本身就是出世间的皈依,因此说「四沙门果是其异熟果」。「一切苦尽」:指整个轮回之苦彻底止息,不再生起。「此」:指「他以正慧观照四圣谛」(《法句经》190)中所说的见圣谛。显示巴利原文
Ariyamaggoyeva lokuttarasaraṇagamananti āha ‘‘cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphala’’nti. Sabbadukkhakkhayoti sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa anuppādanirodho. Etanti ‘‘cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passatī’’ti (dha. pa. 190) evaṃ vuttaṃ ariyasaccadassanaṃ.
「从不执取为常等」:也就是不用“这是常”这样的方式去执取。「非处」:是对原因的否定。「无机会」:是对条件的否定。这两者都是对原因的否定。「以此」:即凭借这个原因。「具见者」:指具足道见的入流者。「于任何行」:指在四地范围内的有为诸行中,对任何一个行。「会执取为常」:就会执取说“这是常”。「会执取为乐」:这是指依据“自我成为一向乐者、无病、死后更无所有”(如《长部》1.76所说)这样的我见而执取为乐。然而,如果用不与见相应的心,圣弟子为了止息苦迫,就像被醉象惊吓的阔行婆罗门逃入粪坑一样,也会对一些行执取为乐。在“自我”的句子里,为了包含遍业等施设,所以不说“行”而说“任何法”。在这些句子里,也应该知道是以四地或者三地来区划的。因为,凡夫以执取的方式执取任何事物,圣弟子就相应地从那种执取中解开。「于母」等句子中:亲生母亲为母,亲生父亲为父,这里指的应是已证得阿拉汉的人。然而,难道圣弟子会夺取其他生命吗?这也是不可能的情况,但为了显示凡夫状态的大罪过性,以及为了说明圣弟子的果德,才这样说。「以染污心」:指以杀心而使内心染污的人。「令其流血」:即使在活着的身体上,也要令流出哪怕小苍蝇啜饮那么少的血。「分裂僧团」:把同住在一起、处于同一界内的僧团,通过这样的五种方式——“以羯磨、以说戒、以分别说、以唱说、以筹票”(见《律藏·小品·附随》458)——来分裂。「其他导师」:指去执取其他的外道师,认为“这位是我的导师”,这是不可能存在的情况——这就是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Niccato anupagamanādivasenāti niccanti aggahaṇādivasena. Aṭṭhānanti hetupaṭikkhepo. Anavakāsoti paccayapaṭikkhepo. Ubhayenapi kāraṇameva paṭikkhipati. Yanti yena kāraṇena. Diṭṭhisampannoti maggadiṭṭhiyā sampanno sotāpanno. Kañci saṅkhāranti catubhūmakesu saṅkhatasaṅkhāresu ekasaṅkhārampi. Niccato upagaccheyyāti ‘‘nicco’’ti gaṇheyya. Sukhato upagaccheyyāti ‘‘ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.76) evaṃ attadiṭṭhivasena sukhato gāhaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhivippayuttacittena pana ariyasāvako pariḷāhavūpasamanatthaṃ mattahatthiparittāsito viya cokkhabrāhmaṇo ukkārabhūmiṃ kañci saṅkhāraṃ sukhato upagacchati. Attavāre kasiṇādipaññattisaṅgahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāra’’nti avatvā ‘‘kañci dhamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Imesupi vāresu catubhūmakavaseneva paricchedo veditabbo tebhūmakavaseneva vā. Yaṃ yañhi puthujjano gāhavasena gaṇhāti, tato tato ariyasāvako gāhaṃ viniveṭheti. Mātarantiādīsu janikā mātā, janako pitā, manussabhūto khīṇāsavo arahāti adhippeto. Kiṃ pana ariyasāvako aññaṃ jīvitā voropeyyāti? Etampi aṭṭhānaṃ, puthujjanabhāvassa pana mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ ariyasāvakassa phaladīpanatthañcevaṃ vuttaṃ. Duṭṭhacitto vadhakacittena paduṭṭhacitto. Lohitaṃ uppādeyyāti jīvamānakasarīre khuddakamakkhikāya pivanamattampi lohitaṃ uppādeyya. Saṅghaṃ bhindeyyāti samānasaṃvāsakaṃ samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitaṃ saṅghaṃ ‘kammena uddesena voharanto anussāvanena salākaggāhenā’’ti (pari. 458) evaṃ vuttehi pañcahi kāraṇehi bhindeyya . Aññaṃ satthāranti aññaṃ titthakaraṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me satthā’’ti evaṃ gaṇheyyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti attho.
“他们不会去恶趣之地”(na te gamissanti apāyabhūminti):那些已皈依佛者,不以此皈依而堕恶趣,反而将充满天众。这就是此句的意思。显示巴利原文
Na te gamissanti apāyabhūminti te buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā tannimittaṃ apāyabhūmiṃ na gamissanti, devakāyaṃ pana paripūressantīti attho.
“以十种理由”(dasahiṭhānehīti):即由十种原因。“胜超”(adhiggaṇhantīti):即胜伏、超越。“也根据《韦拉摩经》等”(Velāmasuttādivasenāpīti):在此是根据阐明此义的《韦拉摩经》(《增支部》9.20):“有八万四千头象,各有依次装满碎银、黄金、金币,其量如四分之一迦梨沙,并饰以一切庄严具的金钵、银钵、铜钵;有八万四千匹马、八万四千辆车、八万四千头乳牛、八万四千名童女、八万四千张床座、八万四千俱胝套衣服,以及无量种类的嚼食、啖食等,连续施与长达七年零七个月——这就是韦拉摩大布施。相比于这种大布施,供养一位具见者的果报更大;相比于供养一百位入流者,供养一位一来者的果报更大;相比于供养一来者,供养一位不还者的果报更大;相比于供养不还者,供养一位阿拉汉的果报更大;相比于供养阿拉汉,供养一位独觉佛的果报更大;相比于供养独觉佛,供养正自觉者的果报更大;相比于供养正自觉者,供养以佛陀为首的僧团的果报更大。”显示巴利原文
Dasahiṭhānehīti dasahi kāraṇehi. Adhiggaṇhantīti adhibhavanti. Velāmasuttādivasenāpīti ettha ‘‘caturāsītisahassasaṅkhānaṃ suvaṇṇapātirūpiyapātikaṃsapātīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ rūpiyasuvaṇṇahiraññapūrānaṃ karīsassa catutthabhāvappamāṇānaṃ sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitānaṃ caturāsītiyā hatthisahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā assasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā rathasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā dhenusahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā kaññāsahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā pallaṅkasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā vatthakoṭisahassānaṃ aparimāṇassa ca khajjabhojjādibhedassa āhārassa pariccajanavasena sattamāsādhikāni satta saṃvaccharāni nirantaraṃ pavattavelāmamahādānato ekassa sotāpannassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato sataṃ sotāpannānaṃ dinnadānato ekassa sakadāgāmissa, tato ekassa anāgāmissa, tato ekassa arahato, tato ekassa paccekabuddhassa, tato sammāsambuddhassa, tato buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa vihārakaraṇaṃ, tato saraṇagamanaṃ mahapphalatara’’nti imamatthaṃ dīpentassa velāmasuttassa (a. ni. 9.20) vasena. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ gahapati, velāmo brāhmaṇo dānaṃ adāsi mahādānaṃ, yo ekaṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalatara’’ntiādi (a. ni. 9.20). Velāmasuttādīti ādi-saddena aggappasādasuttādīnaṃ (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“无知”(aññāṇaṃ):即对三事的功德不了知,于其中迷惑。“疑”(vicikicchā):即“这是佛陀吗?还是不是佛陀?”等疑惑、犹豫。“邪智”(micchāñāṇaṃ):即通过将功德构想为非功德而起的颠倒执取。“等”字包含了不敬、轻慢等意思。“非大光明”(na mahājutikanti):即不灿烂、不清净、不洁白。“非大遍满”(na mahāvipphāranti):即不广大。“有过失”(sāvajjoti):即因邪见、渴爱等而有污点。世间的皈依、受持学处,它的时限仅到寿命终尽,因此说“于寿尽时无过失”(anavajjo kālakiriyāyāti)。这是指无过失的皈依的坏灭。即使无过失,也不会产生可意的果报,因此说“无果报”(aphaloti)。显示巴利原文
Aññāṇaṃ vatthuttayassa guṇānaṃ ajānanaṃ tattha sammoho, ‘‘buddho nu kho, na nu kho buddho’’tiādinā vicikicchā saṃsayo,micchāñāṇaṃ tassa guṇānaṃ aguṇabhāvaparikappanena viparītaggāho. Ādi-saddena anādarāgāravādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Na mahājutikanti na ujjalaṃ, aparisuddhaṃ apariyodātanti attho. Na mahāvipphāranti anuḷāraṃ. Sāvajjoti diṭṭhitaṇhādivasena sadoso. Lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ sikkhāsamādānaṃ viya aggahitakālaparicchedaṃ jīvitapariyantameva hoti, tasmā tassa khandhabhedena bhedoti āha ‘‘anavajjo kālakiriyāyā’’ti. Soti anavajjo saraṇagamanabhedo. Satipi anavajjatte iṭṭhaphalopi na hotīti āha ‘‘aphalo’’ti.
《优婆塞行仪论注释》显示巴利原文
Upāsakavidhikathāvaṇṇanā
“谁为优婆塞?”这是询问特相,因此意在问明:具备何种特相的人才可称为优婆塞?“为何?”是追问原因,意在显示:依凭何种生起的因缘,“优婆塞”这一名称才能安立在此人身上。“他的戒如何?”即这位优婆塞的戒是怎样的?具足多少戒才堪称为戒具足者——这是其中的含义。“他的正命如何?”即他的正命是什么?然而,正命也是通过远离邪命而成就的,所以对此也须加以分析。“如何是坏失?”即戒的坏失或正命的坏失是什么。接下来紧接的内容,或从正面成立,或从反面遮止。“如何是具足?”此处也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Koupāsakoti sarūpapucchā, tasmā kiṃlakkhaṇo upāsakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmāti hetupucchā. Tena kena pavattinimittena upāsakasaddo tasmiṃ puggale niruḷhoti dasseti. Kimassa sīlanti kīdisaṃ assa upāsakassa sīlaṃ, kittakena sīlenāyaṃ sīlasampanno nāma hotīti attho. Ko ājīvoti ko assa sammāājīvo, so pana micchājīvassa parivajjanena hotīti sopi vibhajīyatīti. Kā vipattīti kā assa sīlassa, ājīvassa vā vipatti. Anantarassa hi vidhi vā paṭisedho vā. Kā sampattīti etthāpi eseva nayo.
“任何一位”:即在刹帝利等种姓中的任何一位。这是为了表明,此处但以皈依为因缘,而非以出身等差别。“由亲近侍奉”:即由彼皈依,并依恭敬、尊重、敬仰等方式在彼处亲近承事。“近于远离”:“怨仇”是指杀生等恶戒,因能计量、杀害、破坏这些怨仇,故称为“近于远离”,也就是五种远离,因为这种戒是以远离为本的。因此在各处都说:“成为已远离者”。显示巴利原文
Yo kocīti khattiyādīsu yo koci. Tena saraṇagamanamevettha kāraṇaṃ, na jātiādivisesoti dasseti. Upāsanatoti teneva saraṇagamanena tattha ca sakkaccakāritāya ādaragāravabahumānādiyogena payirupāsanato. Veramaṇiyoti veraṃ vuccati pāṇātipātādidussīlyaṃ, tassa maṇanato hananato vināsanato veramaṇiyo, pañca viratiyo viratippadhānattā tassa sīlassa. Tenevāha tattha tattha ‘‘paṭivirato hotī’’ti.
“邪贩贾”指不正当的买卖、不如法的买卖、不合宜的买卖。“舍弃”是指仅以不去造作的方式而舍离。“依法”是指以不背离于法的方式,由此也遮止了其他不如法的谋生方式。“平等”是指以不偏邪的方式,由此显示了应当避开身邪行等恶行,而以身平等行等善行度日。“武器贩贾”指制造或令他人制造武器货品,或获取已制成的武器后,进行贩卖。“有情贩贾”指贩卖人。“肉贩贾”指如屠夫等那样,饲养鹿、猪等动物,制成肉后再行贩卖。“酒贩贾”指调配任何酒类后进行贩卖。“毒贩贾”指调配毒物,或取得毒物后,进行贩卖。其中,武器贩贾是因以伤害他人为因,故说不应作;有情贩贾是因其会令众生失去自由;肉贩贾与毒贩贾是因其为杀生的因缘;酒贩贾是因其能令人滋长放逸懈怠。显示巴利原文
Micchāvaṇijjāti na sammāvaṇijjā ayuttavaṇijjā asāruppavaṇijjā. Pahāyāti akaraṇeneva pajahitvā. Dhammenāti dhammato anapetena. Tena aññampi adhammikaṃ jīvikaṃ paṭikkhipati. Samenāti avisamena. Tena kāyavisamādiduccaritaṃ vajjetvā kāyasamādinā sucaritena jīvanaṃ dasseti. Satthavaṇijjāti āvudhabhaṇḍaṃ katvā vā kāretvā vā yathākataṃ vā paṭilabhitvā tassa vikkayo. Satthavaṇijjāti manussavikkayo . Maṃsavaṇijjāti sūnakārādayo viya migasūkarādike posetvā maṃsaṃ sampādetvā vikkayo. Majjavaṇijjāti yaṃ kiñci majjaṃ yojetvā tassa vikkayo. Visavaṇijjāti visaṃ yojetvā, visaṃ gahetvā vā tassa vikkayo. Tattha satthavaṇijjā paroparodhanimittatāya akaraṇīyā vuttā, sattavaṇijjā abhujissabhāvakaraṇato, maṃsavisavaṇijjā vadhahetuto, majjavaṇijjā pamādaṭṭhānato.
「他的」是指具有五远离相的戒,以及具有五邪贩卖相的正命。「坏失」指破坏与崩散。「以何种(行持)」指依何种修行方式。「贱民」指优婆塞中的贱民。「垢秽」指优婆塞的垢秽。「卑劣」指优婆塞中的下劣者。对佛陀等以及业与业果的信受,其颠倒即是不信与邪胜解。具足上述不信之人,即是无信者。由于上述戒与正命的坏失,故称坏戒者。「凭这所见闻的东西,就能有某种吉祥吧」——像这样,具足由愚人所计度、名为怪异的所见、所闻、所觉之祥瑞者,即是计怪异为祥瑞者。「信祥瑞」指专门信受所见祥瑞等类别的祥瑞。「不信业」指不信受业的自性。「从此之外」指从此一切知者——佛陀的教法之外,即是在其他外道教法中。「寻求应供者」指将那些恶修行者误认为值得供养的人而前往寻求。「先于彼处作」指先在那些外道处行布施、恭敬等善行。于此,应将「寻求应供者」与「先于彼处作」合为一组,加上前五项,共计应知为五种法。显示巴利原文
Tassevāti pañcaveramaṇilakkhaṇassa sīlassa ceva pañcamicchāvaṇijjālakkhaṇassa ājīvassa ca. Vipattīti bhedo pakopo ca. Yāyāti yāya paṭipattiyā. Caṇḍāloti upāsakacaṇḍālo. Malanti upāsakamalaṃ. Patikiṭṭhoti upāsakanihīno. Buddhādīsu kammakammaphalesu ca saddhāvipariyāyo assaddhiyaṃ micchādhimokkho. Yathāvuttena assaddhiyena samannāgato assaddho. Yathāvutta sīlavipatti ājīvavipattivasena dussīlo. ‘‘Iminā diṭṭhādinā idaṃ nāma maṅgalaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ bālajanaparikappitakotūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena samannāgato kotūhalamaṅgaliko. Maṅgalaṃ paccetīti diṭṭhamaṅgalādibhedaṃ maṅgalameva pattiyāyati. No kammanti kammassakataṃ no pattiyāyati. Ito bahiddhāti ito sabbaññubuddhasāsanato bahiddhā bāhirakasamaye. Dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesatīti duppaṭipannaṃ dakkhiṇārahasaññī gavesati. Pubbakāraṃ karotīti dānamānanādikaṃ kusalakiriyaṃ paṭhamaṃ karoti. Ettha ca dakkhiṇeyyapariyesanapubbakāre ekaṃ katvā pañca dhammā veditabbā.
对于坏失,应依相反的方式了知成就。然而,此处的差别如下:就令四众弟子生起欢喜的意义而言,优婆塞本身就是宝,故称优婆塞宝。以功德的辉耀、称誉的美名和戒香的芬芳,优婆塞本身就是莲花,故称优婆塞莲花。同样地,优婆塞本身就是白莲花,故称优婆塞白莲花。显示巴利原文
Vipattiyaṃ vuttavipariyāyena sampatti ñātabbā. Ayaṃ pana viseso – catunnampi parisānaṃ ratijananaṭṭhena upāsakova ratanaṃ upāsakaratanaṃ. Guṇasobhākittisaddasugandhatāhi upāsakova padumaṃ upāsakapadumaṃ. Tathā upāsakapuṇḍarīko.
「在开始处」是指在初始处的意义。「于边际」是指在究竟边际处的意义。「以精舍的部分」是指以房间、隔间等作为部分,其意义是:「在这些房间里居住的人们,获得了这种名为某某果的果位」等等,以各自居住的场所部分来区分。「于今日」即是于今日的意义。显示巴利原文
Ādimhīti ādiatthe. Koṭiyanti pariyantakoṭiyaṃ. Vihāraggenāti ovarakakoṭṭhāsena, ‘‘imasmiṃ gabbhe vasantānaṃ idaṃ nāma panasaphalaṃ pāpuṇātī’’tiādinā taṃtaṃvasanaṭṭhānakoṭṭhāsenāti attho. Ajjatanti ajjaicceva attho.
“以生命皈依”一句,表明此皈依是尽形寿的。在说了“只要我的生命还在延续”等语后,又通过生命来恭敬这三项皈依对象,为阐明那位婆罗门心中生起的“我护持皈依”的意图,而接着说了“确实我”等语加以说明。也就是说,“以生命皈依”的意思是:“只要我的生命还在维系,我便已皈依;而且我在皈依时,并非仅以口头说说,也不是仅生起一次心念就算了,而是确实可以舍弃生命,尽此一生都皈依。”此处应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
Pāṇehiupetanti iminā tassa saraṇagamanassa āpāṇakoṭikataṃ dassento ‘‘yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattatī’’tiādinā vatvā puna jīvitena taṃ vatthuttayaṃ paṭipūjento ‘‘saraṇagamanaṃ rakkhāmī’’ti uppannaṃ tassa brāhmaṇassa adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ahañhī’’tiādimāha. Pāṇehi upetanti hi yāva me pāṇā dharanti, tāva saraṇaṃ upetaṃ, upento ca na vācāmattena, na ekavāraṃ cittuppādanamattena, atha kho pāṇe pariccajitvāpi yāvajīvaṃ upetanti evamettha attho veditabboti.
5.《无可责难经》释义显示巴利原文
5. Anaṅgaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
57 “Āyasmāsāriputto”(具寿舍利弗)一句中,“iti”(如是)一词是“开始”的意思,即“像这样开始的(经典)”之义。用它来统摄从“世尊告诉比丘们”开始的所有经文,因此被称作“anaṅgaṇasuttaṃ”(《无可责难经》)。这部经是基于什么而发起的呢?是基于(舍利弗)自己的心意。因为大长老并未受人劝请,而是自己发起了这次开示。不过,也有一些人说:“是因为见到一些比丘心有染污,为了断除他们心中的染污,也为了让另一些人未来不再生起这些染污,才发起这次开示。”“Evaṃ sabbasuttesūti”(如此,于一切经中)的意思是:如同在这部《无可责难经》中,同样地,在之后的所有经中,我也只对那些显著、但意义尚未清晰、前所未有的词语进行注释。因此才说“Tasmā”(因此)等语。“Gaṇanaparicchedoti”(以数目限定)的意思是:通过数目来界定,也就是先依据少尘垢和大尘垢两种性行,将众生分为两类,然后又分别在每一类中,依据通晓义理和不通晓义理再分为两类,如此显示巴利原文
57.Āyasmāsāriputtoti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, evamādikanti attho. Tena ‘‘bhikkhū āmantesī’’tiādikaṃ sabbaṃ suttaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tenāha ‘‘anaṅgaṇasutta’’nti. Tassa ko nikkhepo? Attajjhāsayo. Parehi anajjhiṭṭhoyeva hi mahāthero imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Keci panāhu ‘‘ekacce bhikkhū saṃkiliṭṭhacitte disvā tesaṃ cittasaṃkilesappahānāya ceva ekaccānaṃ āyatiṃ anuppādanāya ca ayaṃ desanā āraddhā’’ti. Evaṃ sabbasuttesūti yathā ettha anaṅgaṇasutte, evaṃ ito paresūti sabbesupi suttesu anuttānaapubbapadavaṇṇanā eva karīyati. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Gaṇanaparicchedoti gaṇanena paricchindanaṃ. Idañhi apparajakkhamahārajakkhatāvasena duvidhe satte paccekaṃ atthaññutānatthaññutāvasena dvidhā katvā ‘‘cattāro’’ti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Vajjīputtakādayo viya puggalavādīti na gahetabbaṃ lokasamaññānusārena atthaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ samatthānaṃ vasena desanāya āraddhattā, ayañca desanānayo satthu nissāya evāti dassento ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādimāha.
关于世俗与究竟二种开示的论释。显示巴利原文
Sammutiparamatthadesanākathāvaṇṇanā
在此(《增支部义注》1.1.170),基于世俗的教说称为世俗教说,基于究竟义的教说称为究竟义教说。“在此”是指在这两种教说之中,而非在世俗与究竟义本身。因此说:“这样的,是世俗教说;这样的,是究竟义教说。”这里,世俗与究竟义的特征如下:当某物被分解,或在心中被解析为各个部分时,原先的名称便不复存在,如瓶、布等种种被分解之物,即是世俗;与此相反的,即是究竟义。因为在坚硬、触等自性法中,这一理路并不适用;在那里,依着色等诸法以聚集、相续的方式流转,而施设了“人”等假名,故说:“补特伽罗是世俗教说。”其余词句亦同此理。具有生灭的自性法并非恒常,故说:“无常是究竟义教说。”此理也同样适用于其余词句。难道蕴的教说不是世俗教说吗?因为蕴的含义是积聚,或部分之义?确实如此。然而,此蕴的名称如同依触等而起的同类施设,以究竟义为所依,更贴近于它,不像补特伽罗等名称那样疏远,因此说它摄于究竟义中,或者说,以蕴为首,其所摄的自性法便被取用。难道不是一切自性法都通过世俗言说的门径而进入教说,而非直接进入吗?如此,一切教说岂不显示巴利原文
Tattha (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.170) sammutiyā desanā sammutidesanā, paramatthassa desanā paramatthadesanā. Tatthāti sammutiparamatthadesanāsu, na sammutiparamatthesu. Tenāha ‘‘evarūpā sammutidesanā, evarūpā paramatthadesanā’’ti. Tatridaṃ sammutiparamatthānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ – yasmiṃ bhinne, buddhiyā avayavavinibbhoge vā kate na taṃsamaññā, sā ghaṭapaṭādippabhedā sammuti, tabbipariyāyato paramattho. Na hi kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāve ayaṃ nayo labbhati, tattha rūpādidhammaṃ samūhasantānavasena pavattamānaṃ upādāya puggalavohāroti āha ‘‘puggaloti sammutidesanā’’ti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Uppādavayavanto sabhāvadhammā na niccāti āha ‘‘aniccanti paramatthadesanā’’ti. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Nanu khandhadesanāpi sammutidesanāva. Khandhaṭṭho hi rāsaṭṭho, koṭṭhāsaṭṭho vāti? Saccametaṃ, ayaṃ pana khandhasamaññā phassādīsu tajjāpaññatti viya paramatthasannissayā tassa āsannatarā, puggalasamaññādayo viya na dūreti paramatthasaṅgahatā vuttā, khandhasīsena vā tadupādānā sabhāvadhammā eva gahitā. Nanu ca sabhāvadhammā sabbepi sammutimukheneva desanaṃ ārohanti, na samukhenāti sabbāpi desanā sammutidesanāva siyāti? Nayidamevaṃ desetabbadhammavibhāgena desanāvibhāgassa adhippetattā, na ca saddo kenaci pavattinimittena vinā atthaṃ pakāsetīti.
“依世俗方式听闻教说后”:指如同“在此,有一种人是自我折磨者,热衷自我折磨的实践”等(《中部》2.413;《人施设论》10.25论母)这样,通过世俗门径所施设的教说,依生起闻所成慧的方式而听闻。“通达义理后”:指随顺该教说,连同观照,以道通达了名为四圣谛的义理之后。“断除愚痴后”:指连同与之共住的烦恼一起,毫无残余地断除愚痴后。“殊胜”:指名为涅槃的殊胜,以及名为阿罗汉果的殊胜。“对他们”:指对那些可受教化的众生。“依究竟义方式”:指通过“诸比丘,有此五根”等(《相应部》5.472-474)方式,依究竟法所施设的教说。其余如上文所述。“在此”:指在那依世俗方式与究竟义方式所说的教说中。“通晓各地方言者”:指精通种种不同地方语言的人。“三吠陀”:这仅是举例。其意涵为三吠陀以及各种技艺,因为后文将说“通晓技艺”。或者,将技艺含摄于吠陀中而说“三吠陀”。它们是以应被言说的状态而存在,并非以被储藏于某处的状态而存在。为了阐明即使吠陀也只是以应被言说的状态而存在,故驳斥“秘密地”显示巴利原文
Sammutivasena desanaṃ sutvāti ‘‘idhekacco puggalo attantapo hoti attaparitāpānuyogamanuyutto’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.413; pu. pa. 10.25 mātikā) sammutimukhena pavattitaṃ desanaṃ sutamayañāṇuppādanavasena sutvā. Atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvāti tadanusārena catusaccasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ saha vipassanāya maggena paṭivijjhitvā. Mohaṃ pahāyāti tadekaṭṭhehi kilesehi saddhiṃ anavasesaṃ mohaṃ pajahitvā. Visesanti nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ arahattasaṅkhātañca visesaṃ. Tesanti tādisānaṃ vineyyānaṃ. Paramatthavasenāti ‘‘pañcimāni, bhikkhave, indriyānī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 5.472-474) paramatthadhammavasena. Sesaṃ anantaranaye vuttasadisameva. Tatthāti tassaṃ sammutivasena paramatthavasena ca desanāyaṃ. Desabhāsākusaloti nānādesabhāsāsu kusalo. Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti nidassanamattaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ sippaganthānampīti adhippāyo sippuggahaṇañhi parato vakkhati. Sippāni vā vedantogadhe katvā ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vedāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Kathetabbabhāvena ṭhitāni, na katthaci sannihitabhāvenāti vedānampi kathetabbabhāveneva avaṭṭhānaṃ dīpento ‘‘guyhā tayī nihitā gayhatī’’ti micchāvādaṃ paṭikkhipati. Nānāvidhā desabhāsā etesanti nānādesabhāsā.
最上、最胜的义理为究竟义,即诸法的如实自性。仅仅依世间约定而成立的,是世俗。若如此,为何世俗论说具有真实性?答:“由世间共称为因”,因为它是依于世间共称而转起的。世间共称若不以执著而告知,就如同让人听到某种声音一般,并非虚妄,不应过度追究它。因此世尊说:“不应执著于地方方言,不应过度追逐共称。”(《中部》3.332)“诸法”:指自性法。“以实为因”:指依止于如实自性而转起。“宣说世俗者”:指说“补特伽罗”、“有情”等世间共称的人。显示巴利原文
Paramo uttamo attho paramattho, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvo. Lokasaṅketamattasiddhā sammuti. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sammutikathāya saccatātiāha ‘‘lokasammutikāraṇā’’ti, lokasamaññaṃ nissāya pavattanato. Lokasamaññāya hi abhinivesena vinā ñāpanā ekaccassa sutassa sāvanā viya na musā anatidhāvitabbato tassā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘janapadaniruttiṃ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.332). Dhammānanti sabhāvadhammānaṃ. Bhūtakāraṇāti yathābhūtasabhāvaṃ nissāya pavattanato. Sammutiṃ voharantassāti ‘‘puggalo satto’’tiādinā lokasamaññaṃ kathentassa.
“为了阐明惭与愧”:为了从作用上开显作为世间守护者的惭与愧法。因为惭与愧的作用唯有在有情的相续中才明显,故应依补特伽罗安立的论说来说明。此理对于其余诸法也同样适用。因为,业在哪一种心生起时生起,其果也正是在该相续中生起,这就是业自性。如此,“已作业不失,未作业不受”之理,唯有依补特伽罗安立的论说才能阐明。有情所应作的布施等善行,以及各人精进,也因依于相续而成就,故唯有依补特伽罗安立的论说才能阐明。显示巴利原文
Hirottappadīpanatthanti lokapālanakicce hirottappadhamme kiccato pakāsetuṃ. Tesañhi kiccaṃ sattasantāneyeva pākaṭaṃ hotīti puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya taṃ vattabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Yasmiñhi cittuppāde kammaṃ uppannaṃ, taṃsantāne eva tassa phalassa uppatti kammassakatā. Evañhi kataviññāṇanāso akatāgamo vā natthīti sā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya eva kathāya dīpetabbā. Tehi sattehi kātabbā puññādikiriyā paccattapurisakāropi santānavasena nipphādetabbato puggalādhiṭṭhānāya eva kathāya dīpetabbo.
“为了阐明无间业”:死心之后无间生起的果称为“无间”,系属于此无间果的、因能引生彼果而具有作无间之性质者,或以无间果为目的者,即是“无间业”,如杀母等。这些业也依相续而应成就,故应通过如“他夺取了母亲的生命”等(《发趣论》1.1.423)这样依人施设的言说来阐明。同样地,如“他以慈俱行之心遍满一方而住”等(《长部》1.556; 3.308; 《中部》1.77; 2.309; 3.230; 《分别论》642, 643)、“他随念种种宿住,谓一生、二生……”等(《长部》1.244, 245; 《中部》1.148, 384, 431; 《波罗夷》12)、“有布施从施者方面清净,非从受者方面”等(《中部》3.381)所展开的梵住、宿住、布施清净的言说,也应当通过依人施设的言说来阐明,因为它们以有情的相续为境。而“八人补特伽罗”(《相应部》1.249)、“非时解脱的补特伽罗”等(《人施设》1),即使是在说胜义,为了不舍世间共称,也说了补特伽罗的言说。应知,由此以总相摄取了其余言说中依人施设的部分。显示巴利原文
Ānantariyadīpanatthanti cutianantaraṃ phalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttāni, tannibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlāni, anantarapayojanāni vāti ānantariyāni, mātughātādīni, tesaṃ dīpanatthaṃ. Tānipi hi santānavasena nipphādetabbato ‘‘mātaraṃ jīvitā voropetī’’tiādinā (paṭṭhā. 1.1.423) puggalādhiṭṭhānāya eva kathāya dīpetabbāni, tathā ‘‘so mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.556; 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77; 2.309; 3.230; vibha. 642, 643) ‘‘so anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati ekampi jāti’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 1.244, 245; ma. ni. 1.148, 384, 431; pārā. 12) ‘‘atthi dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati, no paṭiggāhakato’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.381) ca pavattā brahmavihārapubbenivāsadakkhiṇāvisuddhikathā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya eva kathāya dīpetabbā sattasantānavisayattā. ‘‘Aṭṭha purisapuggalā (saṃ. ni. 1.249), na samayavimutto puggalo’’tiādinā (pu. pa. 1) ca paramatthaṃ kathentopi lokasammutiyā appahānatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ kathesi. Etena vuttāvasesāya kathāya puggalādhiṭṭhānabhāve payojanaṃ sāmaññavasena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāmañcetaṃ sabbaṃ apariññātavatthukānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, pariññātavatthukānampi pana evaṃ desanā sukhāvahā hoti.
“大众”是指世间的大众。他们因不能破除密集的假合、不能觉察法的作用而不知。于是,他们陷入“这是什么?这是怎么回事?”的疑惑,产生迷乱。因固执于对立的见解而成为敌对者。然而,对于长久熟悉其义的事物,他们则依惯用言说而知晓。正因如此,他们不产生迷乱,不成为敌对者。显示巴利原文
Mahājanoti lokiyamahājano. Na jānāti ghanavinibbhogābhāvena dhammakiccassa asallakkhaṇena. Tattha ‘‘kiṃ nāmetaṃ, kathaṃ nāmeta’’nti saṃsayapakkhandatāya sammohaṃ āpajjati. Viruddhābhinivesitāya paṭisattu hoti. Jānāti ciraparicitatthā vohārakathāya. Tato eva na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti.
“不舍弃”:因通过惯用语的门径阐明胜义,故不舍弃。以共称的执取方式被世间认知、共称、惯用的,即是“世间共称”,依此世间共称。对于各各义理的显明,被世间确定或决定而说、而惯用的,即是“世间通称”,依此世间通称。同样地,被世间所表诠的,即是“世间总说”或“世间言说”,安立于此世间言说中而不舍离。不像补特伽罗论者那样,以胜义的方式执取。显示巴利原文
Nappajahanti vohāramukhena paramatthassa dīpanato. Samaññāgahaṇavasena lokena ñāyati samaññāyati voharīyatīti lokasamaññā, tāya lokasamaññāya. Tassa tassa atthassa vibhāvane lokena nicchitaṃ, niyataṃ vā vuccati voharīyatīti lokanirutti, tassaṃ lokaniruttiyaṃ. Tathā lokena abhilapīyatīti lokasamaññatāya lokābhilāpo, tasmiṃ lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva appahānato. Puggalavādino viya paramatthavasena aggahetvā.
“有”(santa):此处“santa”一词,在“长时疲劳的由旬”等(《法句经》70)中表示疲劳义;在“此寻、此伺已寂静、已止息”等(《分别论》576)中表示息灭义;在“我今证得此法,甚深、难见、难觉、寂静、胜妙”等(《长部》2.67;《中部》1.281;2.337;《相应部》2.172;《大品》7)中,因是寂静智的行境而用于此义;于“彼寂静者常持念”等(《优陀那》27)中,指烦恼的止息;在“善人实与善人共相知”等(《法句经》15)中,指善人;在“诸比丘,这些五大贼存于世”等(《波罗夷》195)中,表示存续义。此处亦为存续义。且因它是就补特伽罗而言,故依世间共许而说,为明此义而说“依世间约定而有”。“有”(atthi)应视为小品词,如“于此身中,有发”等(《长部》2.373-374;《中部》1.110;3.154;《增支部》6.29;10.60)。为显明“现存”(saṃvijjamānā)一词之义,故说“可得”。凡是现存的,即是可得的。
“垢”(aṅga):因具这些者,他们显示巴利原文
Santoti ettha santasaddo ‘‘dīghaṃ santassa yojana’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 70) kilantabhāve āgato, ‘‘ayañca vitakko ayañca vicāro santā honti samitā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 576) niruddhabhāve āgato, ‘‘adhigato kho myāyaṃ dhammo gambhīro duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 2.172; mahāva. 7) santañāṇagocaratāya, ‘‘upasantassa sadā satimato’’tiādīsu (udā. 27) kilesavūpasame, ‘‘santo have sabbhi pavedayantī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 15) sādhūsu, ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, mahācorā santo saṃvijjamānā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 195) atthibhāve, idhāpi atthibhāveyeva. So ca puggalasambandhena vuttattā lokasamaññāvasenāti dassento ‘‘lokasaṅketavasena atthī’’ti āha. Atthīti cetaṃ nipātapadaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.373-374; ma. ni. 1.110; 3.154; a. ni. 6.29; 10.60) viya. Saṃvijjamānāti padassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘upalabbhamānā’’ti āha. Yañhi saṃvijjati, taṃ upalabbhatīti. Aṅganti etehi taṃsamaṅgipuggalā nihīnabhāvaṃ gacchantīti aṅgaṇāni, rāgādayo. Añjati makkhetīti aṅgaṇaṃ, malādi. Añjeti tattha ṭhitaṃ ahundaratāya abhibyañjetīti aṅgaṇaṃ, vivaṭo bhūmipadeso. Dosādīnaṃ pavattiākāravisesatāya nānappakārā bahulappavattiyā tibbakilesā. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ. Icchāvacarānanti icchāvasena pavattānaṃ. Saha aṅgaṇenāti aṅgaṇanti laddhanāmena yathāvuttakilesena saha vattati.
“亦不知为有”:因缺少那样的如理作意而不知。为显明那些烦恼的存在具有种种可怖畏之处,应特别了知,故说“这些名为烦恼”等。其中,“粗犷”即粗暴。“凶暴”即残忍。“不应取着”即不应令其生起。“依如实味”即从如实本性而言。“如是以”即如上文“这些名为烦恼”等方式所说。“以某种方式”指或在修建之事,或在教理、头陀支等任何一种方式中。“于中”是简别场合的处格。为表此简别是从有烦恼与无烦恼的总聚中而作简别,故先说“于四补特伽罗中”,再显其一分而说“或于那两种有烦恼的补特伽罗中”。因彼二者先以劣与胜而被简别,由最先列出之故。简别本亦可有从某处、从某类、以某种方式而成。显示巴利原文
Atthītipi na jānāti tādisassa yonisomanasikārassa abhāvā. Yesaṃ kilesānaṃ atthitā, tesaṃ sappaṭibhayatā visesato jānitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ime kilesā nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kakkhaḷāti pharusā. Vāḷāti kururā. Na gahitabbāti na uppādetabbā. Yāthāvasarasatoti yathābhūtasabhāvato. Evañcāti ‘‘ime kilesā nāmā’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Yena vā tena vāti navakammesu vā pariyattidhutaṅgādīsu vā yena vā tena vā. Tatrāti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Taṃ pana niddhāraṇaṃ saṅgaṇānaṅgaṇasamudāyatoti dassento ‘‘catūsu puggalesū’’ti vatvā puna tadekadesato dassento ‘‘tesu vā dvīsu sāṅgaṇesū’’ti āha. Tañhi dvayaṃ paṭhamaṃ hīnaseṭṭhabhāvena niddhārīyati paṭhamaṃ uddiṭṭhattā. Niddhāraṇañhi kvaci kutoci kenaci hotīti.
58 58. 虽然在别处,因与缘以“能生者为因,执持者为缘;不共为因,共为缘;同分为因,异分为缘;前时为因,俱起为缘”等方式分别宣说,但在此处,如同“诸比丘,四大种是因,四大种是缘,为施设色蕴”等(《中部》3.85)一样,为显示因与缘二词义同,故说“两者皆唯问原因”。此处“两者”(ubhayena)即指因与缘两种说法。此为尊者大目犍连为令开示更为增广而问。“虽”(kiñcāpi)是表示容许与推测的不变词。容许何等义?即当两者同有烦恼时,了知与不了知的因性,亦即那些人之胜劣。推测何等义?即依长老之辩才璀璨,以种种原因与譬喻庄严之,令所问之义明显。因此故说“不了知”等。因与缘即在胜劣中如是被宣说,此亦为他们所缘之境。显示巴利原文
58. Kiñcāpi aññattha ‘‘janako hetu, pariggāhato paccayo, asādhāraṇo hetu, sādhāraṇo paccayo, sabhāgo hetu, asabhāgo paccayo, pubbakāliko hetu, sahappavatto paccayo’’tiādinā hetupaccayā vibhajja vuccanti, idha pana ‘‘cattāro kho, bhikkhave, mahābhūtā hetū, cattāro mahābhūtā paccayā rūpakkhandhassa paññāpanāyā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.85) viya hetupaccayasaddā samānatthāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ubhayenapi kāraṇamevapucchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ubhayenāti hetupaccayavacanadvayena. Pucchati āyasmā mahāmoggallāno desanaṃ vaḍḍhetukāmo. Kiñcāpīti anujānanasambhāvanatthe nipāto. Kiṃ anujānāti? Samānepi dvinnaṃ sāṅgaṇabhāve tassā pajānanāppajānanahetukataṃ tesaṃ seṭṭhahīnataṃ. Kiṃ sambhāveti? Therassa vicittapaṭibhānatāya nānāhetūpamāhi alaṅkatvā yathāpucchitassa atthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nappajānātī’’tiādi. Hetu ceva paccayo ca seṭṭhahīnabhāve. Tathāakkhātabbatāpi hi tesaṃ tannimittā evāti.
59 「彼」(taṃ):指那两种补特伽罗有劣有胜的原因。为了通过譬喻使其更为明了而开示。
「此」(etaṃ):指经中接着所说者,因为未策励精进,所以未断烦恼。因此说:“不欲……即指此而言”。
「欲作之欲」(kattukamyatāchanda):即称为欲作的、以想要断除烦恼之心而生起的善法欲。此欲将不会生起。善精进依于欲而有力,故说“将不会作比那更强的精进”,意即若不生起欲,又如何能作相应的精进呢?
「有力精进」(thāmagatavīriya):指已达至勇悍、坚固的精进。
因为说到“有烦恼”,即烦恼是染污之事,心已成杂染,为显出特异的杂染相,所以说“更加杂染的心”。在“秽心”等处,应接以“由他们”来连属。犹如擦锅布、犹如吸了油的粗布,因难以摆脱而执垢,此即秽性;逼迫、加害、不令宽广,此为压迫;由产生恼热而烧灼、热恼,此为焦热;“时”(kāla)即杀灭,意思是令已执持的有身耗尽,即是命尽之意。
「将作」(karissati):指将会转起,将会达成,意思即是将会到。显示巴利原文
59.Tanti tesaṃ dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ hīnaseṭṭhatāya kāraṇaṃ. Opammehi pākaṭataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ. Etanti sutte anantaraṃ vuccamānaṃ vīriyārambhābhāvena aṅgaṇassa appahānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na chandaṃ…pe… sandhāyāhā’’ti. Kattukamyatāchandhanti kattukamyatāsaṅkhātaṃ aṅgaṇassa pahātukamyatāvasena uppajjanakakusaladhammacchandaṃ. Na janessatīti na uppādessati. Kusalo vāyāmo nāma chandato balavāti āha ‘‘tato balavataraṃ vāyāmaṃ na karissatī’’ti, chandampi anuppādento kathaṃ tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ karissatīti adhippāyo. Thāmagatavīriyaṃ ussoḷhībhāvappattaṃ daḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ. Sāṅgaṇaggahaṇeneva aṅgaṇānaṃ kilesavatthutāya cittassa saṃkiliṭṭhatāya saddhāya puna saṃkiliṭṭhaggahaṇaṃ savisesaṃ kiliṭṭhabhāvavibhāvananti āha ‘‘suṭṭhutaraṃ kiliṭṭhacitto’’ti. Malinacittotiādīsupi ‘‘tehiyevā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Ukkhalipucchanacoḷakassa viya vasāpītapilotikā viya ca dummocanīyabhāvena malaggahaṇaṃ malīnatā, pīḷanaṃ hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ vibādhanaṃ darathapariḷāhuppādanena paridahanaṃ upatāpanaṃ, kālanti kālanaṃ, yathāgahitassa attabhāvassa khepanaṃ āyukkhayanti attho. Karissatīti pavattessati, pāpuṇissatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathābhūto ca pāṇaṃ cajissati nāmāti āha ‘‘marissatī’’ti.
「犹如」(seyyathāpi):这是表示譬喻与例证的虚词。为显示其意义,说“正如名称所示”。
以“尘土等”一词,其中的“等”字包含了垢秽等;以“摩擦等”一词,其中的“等”字包含了用灰擦拭等。
正如“应嫁给美貌女子”等语句,虽无直接比较词,然藉由表示殊胜义的词语,即可了知殊胜之义,因此说“就是更加执垢”。这是许可反问的特殊用语。“被如此处置”,是指由于不让受用、不让清洁、置于尘土路上,而生起杂染的状态。“令譬喻相应”,是指使所引的譬喻与所喻之义相等而作应合,也就是连结起来。
「有烦恼的补特伽罗」:指在那个有身中不肯清净的有烦恼的补特伽罗。如同从店铺等处带到家中的执垢铜器,由于未得到彼处应得的清净,而次第变得更加杂染;从家中出离的补特伽罗,由于未得到出家应得的清净,而次第变得更加杂染,为显示这一道理,故说“杂染的铜盘”等。而出家人变得更为杂染,可能是由于活命的坏失,或者由于行坏失、见坏失、戒坏失中的任何一种,为总摄这一切,故说“那个补特伽罗”等。因为提及违犯波逸提,也就包括了部分的见坏失。“立于此处”,是指立于这活命的坏失。依于此。显示巴利原文
Seyyathāpīti upamānidassane nipāto. Tadatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā nāmā’’ti āha. Paṃsuādināti ādi-saddena jallādīnaṃ saṅgaho, ghaṃsanādīhīti ādi-saddena chārikāparimajjanādīnaṃ saṅgahoti. ‘‘Abhirūpāya kaññā dātabbā’’tiādīsu viya antarenapi atisayatthabodhakasaddena atisayattho ñāyatīti āha ‘‘malaggahitatarāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Paṭipucchāvacananti anumatipucchāviseso. Evaṃkariyamānāti aparibhoga-apariyodapanarajopathanikkhipanehi kiliṭṭhabhāvaṃ āpādiyamānā. Opammaṃ sampaṭipādentoti yathūpanītaṃ upamaṃ upameyyatthena samaṃ katvā paṭipādento, saṃsandentoti attho. Sāṅgaṇo puggaloti sāṅgaṇo tasmiṃ attabhāve asujjhanakapuggalo. Āpaṇādito kulagharaṃ ānītassa malaggahitakaṃsabhājanassa tattha laddhabbāya visuddhiyā alābhato yathā anukkamena saṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvo, evaṃ gharato nikkhantassa puggalassa pabbajjāya laddhabbāya visuddhiyā alābhato anukkamena saṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvoti dassento ‘‘saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā’’tiādimāha. Saṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvo ca nāma pabbajitassa ājīvavipattivasena vā siyā ācāradiṭṭhisīlavipattīsu aññataravasena vāti taṃ sabbaṃ saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tassa puggalassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pācittiyavītikkamanaggahaṇena hi ekaccadiṭṭhivipattiyāpi saṅgaho hotīti. Ettha ṭhitassāti etissaṃ ājīvavipattiyaṃ ṭhitassa. Iminā nayena sesesupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Sabbaparisasādhāraṇā mahātherassa desanā, tasmā gahapativasenapi yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ukkaṃsagatasaṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘mātughātādiānantariyakaraṇa’’nti āha. Avisodhetvāti yathā attano sīle vā diṭṭhiyā vā visuddhi hoti, evaṃ kilesamalinacittasantānaṃ avisodhetvā.
「有能者」(bhabbapuggalo):是指由于具足亲近依止等条件,在那一生中得以清净的人。
「以……为首」(ādiṃ katvā):是指以洗涤、摩擦等净化作为始端而说。
「净处」(suddhaṭṭhānaṃ):即那里不被灰尘扬起之处。
「作了处罚」(daṇḍakammaṃ katvā):是指作了“应取来这么多水或沙”的处罚。
「安住于此者」(ettha ṭhitassa):是指安住于完全清净的戒中的人。通过正行与正持之戒,显示了戒清净。因为正行与正持也能镇伏内心的污垢。
正如这样,以譬喻的方式,说明了污秽铜盆得到清净洁白的状态。
安住于偏僻的坐卧处,是对烦恼的镇伏,是对烦恼的暂时克制。证得入流果……乃至……证悟阿拉汉果,在这七处,都应把“犹如清净洁白的状态”这句话引用来连结。对于出家人来说,所谓的清净,最低限度可以是通过戒清净,或者通过业处修行,或者通过远离独住,或者通过证得禅那,或者通过修观,或者通过证得沙门果。显示巴利原文
Bhabbapuggaloti upanissayādisampattiyā tasmiṃ attabhāve visuddhapuggalo. Ādiṃ katvāti iminā dhovanaghaṃsanādīhi pariyodapanaṃ ādimantaṃ katvā vadati. Suddhaṭṭhānaṃ yattha vā na rajena okirīyati. Daṇḍakammaṃ katvāti ‘‘ettakā udakā, vālukā vā ānetabbā’’ti daṇḍakammaṃ katvā. Ettha ṭhitassāti parisuddhe sīle ṭhitassa. Sammāvattapaṭipattisīlehi sīlavisuddhi dassitā. Vattapaṭipattiyāpi hi aṅgaṇānaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ siyā. Tathā hissā saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā parisuddhapariyodātabhāvo upamābhāvena vutto. Pantasenāsanavāso kilesavikkhambhanaṃ kilesānaṃ tadaṅganivāraṇaṃ. Sotāpattiphalādhigamo…pe… arahattasacchikiriyāti sattasupi ṭhānesu ‘‘parisuddhapariyodātabhāvo viyā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Pabbajitassa hi visuddhi nāma heṭṭhimantena sīlavisuddhiyā vā siyā kammaṭṭhānānuyogavasena vivekavāsena jhānassādhigamena vā vipassanābhāvanāya vā sāmaññaphalādhigamena vāti.
“为贪之处(rāgaṭṭhāniyanti)”,即成为贪生起之因的所缘。针对不相应的所缘而说“于可爱所缘”。“于此(tasminti)”,即在可爱所缘上。“失念者(vipannassatīti)”,即忘失正念者。“彼相(taṃ nimittaṃ)”,即净妙相。“将作意(āvajjissatīti)”,即将不如理作意。这是他自己独有的,不与其他法混杂。这里应把善法被中断视为破坏。“其余(sesanti)”,是指“有垢、有染污心”等。依前文所说的道理,即依第一段所说的道理。“一切(sabbanti)”,包括杀母等无间业究竟在内的一切,这是譬喻所对应的话。显示巴利原文
Rāgaṭṭhāniyanti rāguppattihetubhūtaṃ. Visabhāgārammaṇaṃ sandhāya vadati ‘‘iṭṭhārammaṇa’’nti. Tasminti iṭṭhārammaṇe. Vipannassatīti muṭṭhassati. Taṃ nimittanti subhanimittaṃ. Āvajjissatīti ayoniso āvajjissati. Sayameva aññena avomisso. Kusalavārapacchindanameva cettha anuddhaṃsanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sesanti ‘‘sāṅgaṇo saṃkiliṭṭhacitto’’tiādi. Vuttanayānusārenāti paṭhamavāre vuttanayānusārena. Sabbanti mātughātādiānantariyakaraṇapariyosānaṃ sabbaṃ upamāsaṃsandanavacanaṃ.
“由非远离性(ativirahābhāvatoti)”,即由于没有忘失正念,意思是念现前的状态。“其余(sesanti)”,是指“彼无贪”等。依照第二段所说的道理,即“通过洗涤、摩擦、细灰、擦拭等”所说的那样。“谁能”等是以提问形式出现的,而这里是作为结语的形式,这就是唯一的区别。显示巴利原文
Ativirahābhāvatoti satisammosābhāvato, upaṭṭhitassati bhāvatoti attho. Sesanti ‘‘so arāgo’’tiādi. ‘‘Dhovanaghaṃsanasaṇhachārikāparimajjanādīhī’’tiādinā dutiyavārānusārena. ‘‘Ko nu kho’’tiādi pucchāvasena āgataṃ, idaṃ nigamanavasenāti ayameva viseso.
60 “垢秽(aṅgaṇaṃ)”,在各处只是从名称上加以说明,并未从自性或分类上解释,因此,为了从自性等方面加以阐明,而说“为了使它从种种行相上明显起来”。“顺欲而行者(icchāya avacarānanti)”,即依着欲而活动者。“渗入者(otiṇṇānanti)”,即渗入心相续者。“已转起者(pavattānaṃ)”,是说它们由于依缘而生起,故称为已转起。“种种(nānappakārānanti)”,是由于所缘的差别以及转起行相的差别而成为种种的。“以什么原因(yenakāraṇena)”——并不仅仅是贪求利养而已,还应当把有福德、受恭敬、受尊重作为此处的原因,为了显示这一点,所以说了“本性亦”等。以此显示,即使贪求利养的人,也并非任何人都这样生起不善心,而是那些有福德、值得尊重的人才会。上座们因为害怕覆藏过失,便向中辈人告知;同样,中辈向新学者告知;新学者则因为自己新学,向那些侍者等告知:“请看你们上座的所做所为”。所谓的侍者等,便向比丘尼们告知:“你们是为了求教诫才来到这样的人身边的”。而“且诸比丘莫知”显示巴利原文
60.Aṅgaṇanti tattha tattha nāmato eva vibhāvitaṃ, na pana sabhāvato, pabhedato vāti sabhāvādito vibhāvanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘nānappakārato pākaṭaṃ kārāpetukāmenā’’ti. Icchāya avacarānanti icchāvasena avacaraṇānaṃ. Otiṇṇānanti cittasantānaṃ anupaviṭṭhānaṃ. Te pana tattha paccayavasena nibbattattā pavattā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘pavattāna’’nti. Nānappakārānanti visayabhedena pavattiākārabhedena ca nānāvidhānaṃ. Yenakāraṇena. Na kevalaṃ lābhatthikatā eva, atha kho puññavantatā sakkatagarukatā ca ettha kāraṇabhāvena gahetabbāti dassento ‘‘pakatiyāpi cā’’tiādimāha. Tena lābhatthikopi na yo koci evaṃ cittaṃ uppādeti puññavā sambhāvanīyoti dasseti. Therā avajjapaṭicchādanabhayena majjhimānaṃ ārocenti, tathā majjhimā navakānaṃ, navakā pana attano navakabhāvena vighāsādādīnaṃ ārocenti ‘‘passatha tumhākaṃ therassa kamma’’nti. Vighāsādādayo nāma ‘‘īdisassa santike ovādatthaṃ tumhe āgatā’’ti bhikkhunīnaṃ ārocenti. Na ca maṃ bhikkhū jāneyyunti na ca vata maṃ bhikkhū jāneyyuṃ, aho vata maṃ bhikkhū na jāneyyunti yojanā. Ṭhānaṃ kho panetanti ettha kho-saddo avadhāraṇattho, pana-saddo vacanālaṅkāroti āha ‘‘atthiyevā’’ti. Pubbe icchuppādavāravaṇṇanāya vuttanayena. Iti-saddo idha āsannakāraṇatthoti taṃ dassento ‘‘iminā kāraṇenā’’ti āha . Idañca kopaappaccayānameva gahaṇaṃ. Tādisānanti kopaappaccayādhibhūtānanti adhippāyo.
“于相应之空闲处”(anurahoti),即在相适合的隐蔽处。为显示此义,故说“在寺院边”等。这与前文相似,即与前面以“欲求利养者乎”等所述的连接方式相同。显示巴利原文
Anurahoti anurūpe rahasi. Evameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vihārapaccante’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Purimasadisamevāti ‘‘lābhatthiko hī’’tiādinā vuttena purimena yojanānayena sadisameva.
举罪时存在对立者,而举罪涉及犯戒,故被举罪者与举罪者同样犯戒,因此说“相同”即是有犯戒者。为说明他正是因有对立者才欲被举罪的原由,而说“他……”等。他并非只因犯戒而希望相同,也希求其他方面的相同;为表明此义,又说“而且……”等。又或,由另一位对立者而有对立者。因为他如此思惟:“必须有对立者来举罪我,这样我就能与那些对立者同心,从而有机会对他说些什么或做些什么。”在这一立场中,“无对立者”应如此理解:对于此人,不存在对立者,故称无对立者。显示巴利原文
Codanāya paṭipuggalabhāvo, codanā ca āpattiyāti cuditakena codakassa samānabhāvo āpattiāpannatāyāti āha ‘‘samānoti sāpattiko’’ti. Sappaṭipuggalenevassa codanicchāya kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘aya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Na cāyaṃ sāpattikatāya eva samānataṃ icchati, atha kho aññathāpīti dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Aññena vā paṭipuggalena sappaṭipuggalo. Ayañhi ‘‘sappaṭipuggalova maṃ codeyyā’’ti icchati ‘‘evāhaṃ tassa paṭipuggalehi saddhiṃ ekajjhāsayo hutvā tassa upari kiñci vattuṃ kātuṃ vā labhissāmī’’ti maññamāno. Imasmiṃ pana pakkhe no appaṭipuggaloti natthi etassa paṭipuggaloti appaṭipuggaloti evamattho veditabbo.
出现了“啊,但愿”一词,这是关联所在。由于此人安住于随心所欲的状态,且由“诸比丘,愿他教授法”这句话可知,故说“而那是在征求同意的情况下”——即以征得同意的方式提问。因为他并不希望世尊以“比丘,听说你确实……”等方式,就任何违犯来诘问自己。他也不希望世尊以道、果或观作为间隔——即不以修习道、证得果、修习已达顶峰的观、入灭尽定或入禅那定作为间隔的理由,来反诘自己。他只希望以“常、无常”等征得同意的方式被提问,意思是希望直截了当、不绕弯子地被问。应关联理解为“看见正在取用(供养)的人”。由于他成了不应共住的比丘,他们便会将他从教法中驱逐出去。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aho vatā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ dissatīti sambandho, imassa puggalassa icchācāre ṭhitattā bhikkhūnaṃ dhammaṃ deseyyāti vacanato ‘‘tañca kho anumatipucchāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hesa ‘‘saccaṃ kira tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādinā kiñci vītikkamaṃ uddissa bhagavatā pucchitabbataṃ icchati. No maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā antaraṃ katvāti maggabhāvanaṃ vā phalasacchikiriyaṃ vā sikhāppattavipassanānuyogaṃ vā nirodhasamāpajjanaṃ vā jhānasamāpajjanameva vā antaraṃ kāraṇaṃ katvā bhagavatā attānaṃ paṭipucchitabbaṃ no icchati. Niccaṃ aniccantiādinā anumatiggahaṇavasena pucchitabbaṃ icchati, uttānameva katvā pucchitabbaṃ icchatīti attho. Upaharante passatīti sambandho. Abhabbaṭṭhānabhikkhutāya niharissanti sāsanato.
“那种成就”是指眷属的成就,以及由比丘们所行的恭敬与尊重的成就。当我在进行分配时,他们即取用那些供养。“她亲自显现”,意思是她自己走到比丘们面前显现自身;而对于正处在她前面的比丘,她则让他走在前面而行——这是其意趣。显示巴利原文
Taṃ sampattinti parivārasampattiñceva bhikkhūhi kariyamānaṃ sakkāragarukārasampattiñca. Gahetvā paribhuñjanti mayā saṃvibhāge kariyamāne. Sayameva paññāyatīti sayameva gantvā bhikkhūnaṃ purato attānaṃ dasseti, purato vasantaṃ pana bhikkhu purakkhatvā gacchantiyevāti adhippāyo.
“供养水”是指从前方递上来的供养水。由于其中有“唯”字,故有“唯在此处,非他处”的限定。或者,将“唯”字视为表决定,那么“唯我应得”即“我应得”,这样的决定应如此理解——他正是怀着此意说:“‘唯我应得’这种欲望并非很大的过失”。否则,若照字面意思理解,便会成为“别人不应得”。又说“成为令人欢喜的”,是为了显示他希求最上座等原因。显示巴利原文
Dakkhiṇodakanti aggato upanīyamānaṃ dakkhiṇodakaṃ. Yato eva-kāro, tato aññattha niyamo icchito. Avadhāraṇatthaṃ vā eva-kāraggahaṇanti katvā ahameva labheyyanti ahaṃ labheyyamevāti evametaṃ avadhāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbanti adhippāyenāha ‘‘ahameva labheyyanti icchā nātimahāsāvajjā’’ti, aññathā yathārutavasena avadhāraṇe gayhamāne ‘‘na aññe labheyyu’’nti ayamevettha attho siyāti. Pāsādiko hotīti idaṃ tassa aggāsanādipaccāsīsanāya kāraṇadassanaṃ.
“随喜”是指在吉祥与非吉祥的场合中,以随喜的方式所应宣说的法教。“分随喜”是指随喜的一部分。即,长老未说“请先前曾随喜者随喜”,而只是直接这样说出的情况。显示巴利原文
Anumodananti maṅgalāmaṅgalesu anumodanāvasena pavattetabbadhammakathaṃ. Khaṇḍānumodananti anumodanekadesaṃ. ‘‘Pubbe anumoditapubbo anumodatū’’ti avatvā therena vuttamatteyeva.
“在这样的住处”是指那些善好、多闻者所居住的地方。因为一切喜乐皆从中生起,故而称为“整夜”。“善巧于裁决者”意谓在种种疑惑之处,为断除疑惑,能对各别问题进行裁决的善巧者、熟练者。当那些说法者受请,依次说法时,那位以法邀请者心想“此人聪慧”而作了邀请,因此未能获得机会。显示巴利原文
Tādisesu ṭhānesūti tādisesu pesalānaṃ bahussutānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānesu. Sabbampi ratiṃ pavattanato sabbarattikāni. Vinicchayakusalānanti anekavihitesu kaṅkhaṭṭhāniyesu kaṅkhāvinayanāya taṃ taṃ pañhānaṃ vinicchaye kusalānaṃ chekānaṃ. Tesu tesu dhammakathikesu ajjhiṭṭhesu vārena dhammaṃ kathentesu ‘‘ayaṃ byatto’’ti dhammajjhesakena ajjhiṭṭhattā okāsaṃ alabhamāno.
“应恭敬而行”是指:比丘们对我所作的礼敬、起迎、合掌问讯及如法行事等,应以恭敬为之;他们为我准备的诸般资具,亦应善加料理,使之周备完好。这便是其义。“应视之为重”意为应如同石伞一般受到尊重。“此礼仪”即指通过“应恭敬”等所宣说的恭敬等礼仪。“因此”即以此因由,多闻等功德殊胜者方堪受此恭敬等。这便是其义。“如是”意为如“可爱、可敬”等(增支部7.37)所述之品类。“应如此行”意指当依“应恭敬”等所宣说的方式,行持此恭敬等。“此理趣”即在此比丘章节中所阐明的,同样亦是此理趣;此后比丘尼等章节中亦复如是。显示巴利原文
Sakkaccañcakareyyunti bhikkhū yaṃ mama abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānañjalikammasāmīcikammādiṃ karonti. Taṃ ādareneva kareyyuṃ, yañca me parikkhārajātaṃ paṭiyādenti, tampi sundaraṃ sammadeva abhisaṅkhataṃ kareyyunti attho. Bhāriyanti pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukātabbaṃ. Etaṃ vidhinti etaṃ ‘‘sakkareyyu’’ntiādinā vuttasakkārādividhiṃ. Tenāti tena kāraṇena, bāhusaccādiguṇavisesavato eva sakkārādīnaṃ arahattāti attho. Evarūpanti īdisaṃ ‘‘piyo garū’’tiādinā (a. ni. 7.37) vuttappakāraṃ. Evaṃ kareyyunti evaṃ ‘‘sakkareyyu’’ntiādinā vuttappakāraṃ sakkārādiṃ kareyyuṃ. Esa nayoti yoyaṃ bhikkhuvāre vuttavidhi, eseva nayo. Ito paresu bhikkhunīvārādīsu vāresu.
“唯我应是得利者”此处亦应按照前文所述之理趣,理解为决定之义。由于以佐味等而令团食精妙,故说“充满酥油、蜂蜜、糖等”。“床、椅等”仅为举例,因时令适宜、避风、触感柔软、门窗紧闭的卧具亦属精妙坐卧具之故。或由“等”字,也应视为包含此类。“于一切处”意指于所有这四种资具的章节中皆是如此。显示巴利原文
Ahameva lābhī assanti etthāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva avadhāraṇaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Piṇḍapātassa paṇītatā upasecanādivasenāti āha ‘‘sappitelamadhusakkharādipūritāna’’nti . Mañcapīṭhādīnanti nidassanamattaṃ utusappāyānaṃ nivātānaṃ phassitatalānaṃ pihitadvārakavāḷavātapānādīnampi paṇītasenāsanabhāvato. Ādi-saddena vā tesampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbatthāpīti sabbesu tesu catūsupi paccayavāresu.
61 “看见身业”:此处并非指眼所识知的身业,而是指与身业同时发生的嘴唇嚅动、皱眉,以及看见身体姿态等,犹如看见了身业一般,故如此说。“听闻语业”于此也是同理,因此,引生身体变化的诸法称为“被看见”,引生语言变化的诸法称为“被听闻”。也正因为如此,那些法在当面、面对面时称为“被看见”;在背后、非面对面时称为“被听闻”。随顺地执取即是“随护”。“阿兰若住者性”是随顺那位比丘的头陀功德分而执取,所以说“随护阿兰若住者性”。住于阿兰若者名为“阿兰若住者”。处于边远坐卧具者名为“边陲坐卧具者”。为了开示其中部分意义,故说“住在边陲坐卧具”。名为乞食的团食,落下而成为乞食(团食),寻求此种团食者称为“常乞食者”。或者,为团食而行、游,以此为誓愿者也称为“团食者”,他即是“常乞食者”。离去断、离割截称为“不断”,与“不断”俱行即是“次第”,即不割截。依此挨户次第行乞并以此为习性者,称为“次第乞食者”。以高起状如同粪扫,或因如尘垢般鄙劣状而称为“去”的,即是粪扫衣。显示巴利原文
61.Kāyakammaṃ disvāti idaṃ na kāyakammaṃ cakkhuviññeyyaṃ, kāyakammunā pana saha pavattaṃ oṭṭhaparipphandanaṃ bhākuṭikaraṇaṃ kāyaṅgādidassanaṃ kāyakammadassanaṃ viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Vacīkammaṃ sutvāti etthāpi eseva nayo, tasmā kāyavikārajanakā dhammā ‘‘dissantī’’ti vuttā, vacīvikārajanakā ‘‘sūyantī’’ti. Tato eva ca te paccakkhakāle sammukhakāle dissanti nāma. Tirokkhakāle asammukhakāle sūyanti nāma. Anurūpato gahaṇaṃ anuggaho. Āraññikattanti tassa bhikkhuno dhutaguṇattānurūpato gaṇhāti. Tenāha ‘‘āraññikattaṃ anuggaṇhātī’’ti. Araññe nivāso assāti āraññiko. Pantaṃ pariyantaṃ dūrataraṃ senāsanaṃ assāti pantasenāsano. Taṃ pana atthamattena dassentena ‘‘pantasenāsane vasatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhikkhāsaṅkhātānaṃ piṇḍānaṃ pāto piṇḍāpāto, taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ uñchati gavesatīti piṇḍapātiko. Piṇḍāya patituṃ carituṃ vatametassāti vā piṇḍapāti, so eva piṇḍapātiko. Dānato avakhaṇḍanato apetaṃ apadānaṃ, saha apadānena sapadānaṃ, anavakhaṇḍanaṃ. Anugharaṃ caraṇasīlo sapadānacārī. Unnatabhāvena paṃsukūlaṃ viya paṃsukūlaṃ, paṃsu viya vā kucchitabhāvaṃ ulati gacchatīti paṃsukūlaṃ, tassa dhāraṇaṃ idha paṃsukūlaṃ, taṃ sīlamassāti paṃsukūliko.
由三种原因可知粪扫衣为粗陋:价值、触感、色泽的减损。若非粪扫衣尚且如此,何况粪扫衣——这是其意趣。“以粗、长线”是指用下垂的粗长线缝制。“以色”:在此也应说触感亦随之衰减,因为它在那上面触感也是粗涩的。那么,为何经文中仅举阿兰若住者等而说了四种头陀功德分呢?因为它们为根本,而且通过执取这些,其余头陀支分亦可随喜好受用而被执取。诚然,那位阿兰若住者、边陲坐卧具者,他的露地住者、树下住者、常坐不卧者、随得敷具者、冢间住者等支分都极为圆满。而那位常乞食者、次第乞食者,他的但取钵食者、过午不食者、一食者等支分也同样如此。那位粪扫衣者,他的三衣者支分则极易护持。正因其为根本,世尊也在各处说:“我何时能见到难陀,住阿兰若,著粪扫衣……”等,只举出阿兰若住者等。“至此”是指经文中所出现的,这是限定的执取,并非说这些全部都必定会在一个人身上具足,也不是说只有这些恶法应当断除。因为,即使没有断除覆蔽、恼害等,同梵行者也不会恭敬……乃至……不尊崇。显示巴利原文
Tīhikāraṇehi lūkhaṃ veditabbaṃ agghaphassavaṇṇaparihānito apaṃsukūlampi, ko pana vādo paṃsukūlanti adhippāyo. Thūladīghasuttakenāti thūlena olambamānena dīghasuttakena. Vaṇṇenāti ettha phassenapi parihāyatīti vattabbaṃ. Tañhi tattha kharaphassampi hotiyevāti. Kasmā pana pāḷiyaṃ āraññikādiggahaṇena cattārova dhutaguṇā vuttāti? Padhānattā, taggahaṇeneva ca ito paresampi sukhaparibhogatāya gahaṇasambhavato. Yo hi āraññiko pantasenāsano, tassa abbhokāsika-rukkhamūlika-nesajjika-yathāsanthatika-sosānikaṅgāni suparipūrāni. Yo ca piṇḍapātiko sapadānacārī ca, tassa pattapiṇḍikakhalupacchābhattikaekāsanikaṅgāni. Yo pana paṃsukūliko, tassa tecīvarikaṅgaṃ supariharamevāti. Padhānattā hi bhagavatāpi ‘‘kadāhaṃ nandaṃ passeyyaṃ, āraññaṃ paṃsukūlika’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.242; netti. 100) tattha tattha āraññikādayo eva gayhanti. Ettakāti pāḷiyaṃ āgatānaṃ paricchijja gahaṇametaṃ, na ettakā sabbepi ekassa ekaṃsato sambhavanti, nāpi ettakāyeva pāpadhammā pahātabbā. Na hi makkhapaḷāsādīnaṃ appahīnabhāvepi sabrahmacārī neva sakkaronti…pe… na pūjentīti.
“彼义”指“无论何人”等所说的意义。“以譬喻使之明了”是通过顺喻、逆喻和举例来阐明。蛇尸等那般极不净、极可厌,是由于极度恶臭。而且据说,蛇因为具有猛烈的嗔怒,狗和人则因食米饭粥令身体如此。“这些”指蛇等。“堆加”即向上投掷而作成。那堆加之物令容器满溢,故说“堆加令满溢”。“适宜展示于众人”即美丽、可爱,那是极清净、可意的,故说“极净”。“新娶”指大母,即新媳妇。而她因为有生育能力,用吉祥语称为“生母”;为她所献的礼物由新媳妇带来,故为可爱。“于两处”即指两种意义。“重叠”指重复的言辞。“此于彼不可意”即不可意,其状态为不可意性,如此心生起,故说“此不可意……乃至……之称谓”。因为是佛的弟子,所以相状有如洁净的铜钵。如同充塞了腐物,其相续被欲贪充满。而那是因为未断除那些,所以说“未断欲贪”。显示巴利原文
Tamatthanti ‘‘yassa kassacī’’tiādinā vuttamatthaṃ. Upamāya pākaṭaṃ karontoti anvayato byatirekato ca udāharaṇena vibhāvento. Ahikuṇapādīnaṃ atipaṭikūlajigucchanīyatā ativiya duggandhatāya. Sā ca ahīnaṃ tikhiṇakopatāya, kukkuramanussānaṃ odanakummāsūpacayatāya sarīrassa hotīti vadanti. Imesanti ahiādīnaṃ. Vaḍḍhetvāti uparūpari khipanena racitaṃ katvā. Taṃ pana vaḍḍhitaṃ tena ca bhājanaṃ pūritaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vaḍḍhetvā paripūretvā’’ti. Janassa dassanayogyaṃ dassanīyaṃ jaññaṃ, taṃ paramaparisuddhaṃ manoharañca hotīti āha ‘‘cokkhacokkha’’nti. Abhinavaniviṭṭhā mahāmātā vadhukā. Sā pana puttalābhayogyataṃ upādāya maṅgalavacanena ‘‘janī’’ti vuccati, tassā niyyamānaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ janiyā haratīti jaññaṃ. Ubhayatthāti atthadvaye. Punaruttanti āmeḍitavacanamāha. Na manāpaṃ etassāti amanāpo, tassa bhāvo amanāpatā, tathāpavatto cittuppādoti āha ‘‘amanāpaṃ idanti…pe… adhivacana’’nti. Buddhavesattā liṅgassa parisuddhakaṃsapātisadisakā. Kuṇaparacanaṃ viya icchāvacarehi santānassa bharitabhāvo. So pana tesaṃ appahīnatāyāti āha ‘‘icchāvacarānaṃ appahāna’’nti.
62 原本应说“他随护村落边住者”,但书册中却写作“阿兰若住者性”。因为白分经文中,并没有对阿兰若住者的执取;而且,若已断除欲贪,便绝对不应拒绝村落边住者——这类人因覆藏超人法,反而更值得期许。确实,下文将说“由少欲所生起”等。如同善加调制的米饭,断除欲贪既可意,也是饱足的因。显示巴利原文
62. ‘‘Tena gāmantavihāraṃ anuggaṇhātī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘āraññikatta’’nti pana potthake likhitaṃ. Na hi sukkapakkhe pāḷiyaṃ āraññikaggahaṇaṃ atthi, sati ca icchāvacarappahāne gāmantavihāro ekantena na paṭikkhipitabbo, icchitabbova tādisānaṃ uttarimanussadhammapaṭicchādanato . Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘appicchatāsamuṭṭhānehī’’tiādi. Sālivarabhattaracanaṃ viya icchāvacarappahānaṃ manuññabhāvato tittihetuto ca.
63 「叫我」是受格的词,因为与“对”字相连,但它的意思其实是与格,所以解释为“于我、于你”。「时」字是处格的意义,所以“时”是受格。「以其环绕之山」指依靠灵鹫峰、般度婆、伊湿耆利、毗富罗、巍巍五山而四面环山。「于王舍城」是表示近处的处格,所以解释为“我依彼而住”。显示巴利原文
63.Maṃtanti ca upayogavacanaṃ paṭi-saddayogena, attho pana sampadānamevāti āha ‘‘mayhaṃ tuyha’’nti ca. ‘‘Samaye’’ti bhummatthe ‘‘samaya’’nti upayogavacanaṃ. Gijjhakūṭapaṇḍavaisigilivebhāravepullapabbatānaṃ vasena samantato giriparikkhepena. Rājagaheti samīpatthe bhummavacananti āha ‘‘taṃ nissāya viharāmī’’ti.
“旧车匠之子”:他在过去出家之前,是车匠的儿子,因而得此称呼“曲”:因其弯曲如蛇行一般,故说“曲”,也说“如同蛇行之路”。“他”指般度子。“另一位”指三弥提。“所念之处即是所念之处”:这位车匠之子切削的,正是他心里所想的地方。而且,他并非顺着他人心意,而是顺着自己弹下的墨线去切削。“以心”:以他自己的心,仿佛能了知我的心一般。显示巴利原文
Purāṇayānakāraputtoti purāṇe pabbajitato pubbe yānakāraputto tathāpaññāto. Jimhanti gomuttakuṭilaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sappagatamaggasadisa’’nti. Soti paṇḍuputto. Itaroti samiti. Cintitaṭṭhānamevāti cintitacintitaṭṭhānameva tacchati, tañca kho na tassa cittānusārena, atha kho attano suttānusārena tacchanto yānakāraputto. Cittanti attano cittena mama cittaṃ jānitvā viya.
「非因信出家」这一句本身便表明他们对业果没有信心,所以论中说「无信者,即对佛、法、僧缺乏信心」。那些以活命为目的而出家的人,称为「以活命为目的者」。因此论中说「因债务、怖畏等」。诡诈,即奸诈。诡诈者的所为,就如那些假装有德行的商人的行为,即是诡诈,所以论中说「因为诡诈……」。慢的特质空洞,犹如芦草,因此称「芦」;他们具有这种高耸如芦草的慢,所以是「高慢者」。因此论中说「生起空洞傲慢的人」。又或因轻率而浮躁;因言语粗恶而口出粗语;因常谈论畜生论等无益之语,故是「浮言者,多说无益之语」。所谓「业门不防护」:这是说,由于诸根门不防护,才有业门等的不防护,所以如此说。或「于六根」是依处格,意指在作为所缘的六根之上,业门不防护。「节量」:是指在饮食方面,避开不正当的寻求、不正当的接受和不正当的受用之后,所应知的正当寻求、正当接受与正当受用的分量,这是不放逸者所当知。因此论中说「合理性」。「于觉寤」:是指在昼夜中,于障碍法中净化自心的觉寤。为了说明那些在觉寤和增上戒学上……显示巴利原文
‘‘Na saddhāya pabbajito’’ti imināva kammaphalasaddhāya abhāvo nesaṃ pakāsitoti āha ‘‘assaddhāti buddhadhammasaṅghesu saddhāvirahitā’’ti. Pabbajitānaṃ jīvikā attho etesanti jīvikatthā. Tenāha ‘‘iṇabhayādīhī’’tiādi. Kerāṭikaṃ vuccati sāṭheyyaṃ. Saṭhānaṃ guṇavāṇijakānaṃ kammaṃ sāṭheyyanti āha ‘‘sāṭheyyañhī’’tiādi. Tucchasabhāvena māno naḷo viyāti naḷo, mānasaṅkhāto uggato naḷo etesanti unnaḷā. Tenāha ‘‘uṭṭhitatucchamānā’’ti. Lahukatāya vā capalā. Pharusavacanatāya kharavacanā. Tiracchānakathābahulatāya niratthakavacanapalāpino. Asaṃvutakammadvārāti idaṃ kammadvārādīnaṃ asaṃvutabhāvo uppattidvārānaṃ asaṃvutatāya eva hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā chasu indriyesūti nimitte bhummaṃ, chasu indriyesu nimittabhūtesu asaṃvutakammadvārāti attho. Yā mattāti bhojane ayuttapariyesana-ayuttapaṭiggahaṇa-ayuttaparibhoge vajjetvā yuttapariyesana-yuttapaṭiggahaṇa-yuttaparibhogasaṅkhātā yā mattā appamattehi jānitabbā. Tenāha ‘‘yuttatā’’ti. Jāgareti rattindivaṃ āvaraṇiyehi dhammehi cittaparisodhanasaṅkhāte jāgare. Tesaṃ jāgaritāya adhisīlasikkhāya gāravarahitānaṃ itarasikkhāsu patiṭṭhā eva natthīti dassento ‘‘sikkhāpadesu bahulagāravā na hontī’’ti vatvā tameva gāravābhāvaṃ sarūpena vibhāvento ‘‘āpattivītikkamabahulā’’ti āha.
即使本已具足的对三宝及业果的信,也称作信。他们就像得到了流体的甘露而饮一般,就像获得了浓稠坚实的美食而细嚼吞咽一般,口中发出欢喜语:「善哉!善哉!」又将这赞叹安住于心,随喜称扬。其中,发出欢喜语被比喻为饮,因为那是外在的表露;而内心的随喜,因是内在的,故被比喻为咀嚼吞食——咀嚼吞食即咬碎并吞咽。当「善哉」为短音单数时,此赞叹是指向舍利弗之上;当为长音复数时,则是指于同梵行者之中。「在上」之义,需结合上下文来理解。「因懈怠或亲友遭难等」:由于懈怠,或因为亲友遭遇灾难等。在说明了「被称为大象」之后,为了阐明其中的原因,论中说「在这里……」等等。为了审察并显示所期望的种种词义——如「不行,所以称为象」、「不来,所以称为象」、「不作恶,所以称为象」——而宣说了「以欲等」等说明,然而这只是为了让智者明了所作的简要说明。显示巴利原文
Pakatiyāpi siddhāya ratanattayasaddhāya kammaphalasaddhāya ca saddhā. Pivanti maññe yathā taṃ dravabhūtaṃ amataṃ laddhā. Ghasanti maññe yathā taṃ bahalapiṇḍikasudhābhojanaṃ laddhā. Attamanavācaṃ nicchārentā ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti. Tameva pana sādhukāraṃ hadaye ṭhapetvā abbhanumodantā. Ettha ca attamanavācānicchāraṇaṃ pivanasadisaṃ katvā vuttaṃ bahiddhābhāvato, manasā abbhanumodanaṃ pana abbhantarabhāvato ghasanasadisaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṅkhādanajjhoharaṇañhi ghasananti. Rassañca ekavacanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘rasse sati sāriputtassa upari hotī’’ti. Dīghañca bahuvacanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘dīghe sati sabrahmacārīna’’nti. ‘‘Upari hotī’’ti ānetvā sambandho. Ālasiyabyasanādīhīti ālasiyena vā ñātibyasanādīhi vā. ‘‘Mahānāgāti vuccantī’’ti vatvā tattha kāraṇaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘tatrā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘na gacchantīti nāgā, na āgacchantīti nāgā, na āguṃ karontīti nāgā’’ti yo vividho vacanattho icchito, taṃ vicāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘chandādīhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ pana ñeyyāvabodhāya vacanato appamattakāraṇaṃ.
他自己完全不作恶,因为一切恶都通过圣道彻底断除了。他解开了欲缚等一切结缚、十种结的诸分类以及所有束缚,在一切处、一切鬼神中,或在一切生存界中,不再因任何执着而粘着,且依三种解脱而得解脱。正因如此,面对可意、不可意等一切境界,他都达到了「如如不动」的状态,故被称为「如如不动者」。应知,由于具备了上面所说的这些特质,他成为如是者,拥有这样的自性,因此称为「象」。所以论中说:「在这里,应当这样理解其含义。」与其他那些漏尽的象相比,因他是上首弟子,具足殊胜功德,所以更值得尊敬、更值得赞叹。他们平等地随喜:就是说,他们彼此接受对方的善说,以完全生起的欢喜,作同样、平等的随喜赞叹。而这种随喜赞叹,正如经文中「在那里……」等所显示的那样。显示巴利原文
Sayameva āguṃ na karoti sabbathā maggena pahīnaāguttā. So kāmayogādike sabbasaṃyoge dasavidhasaṃyojanappabhedāni ca sabbabandhanāni visajja jahitvā sabbattha yakkhādīsu, sabbesu vā bhavesu kenaci saṅgena na sajjati tīhi ca vimuttīhi vimutto, tato eva iṭṭhādīsu tādibhāvappattiyā tādi, so vuttalakkhaṇena tathattā taṃsabhāvattā nāgo pavuccateti attho veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘evamettha attho veditabbo’’ti. Aññehi khīṇāsavanāgehi aggasāvakattā guṇavisesayogato pujjatarā ca pāsaṃsatarā ca. Samaṃ anumodisunti aññamaññassa subhāsitato sampaṭicchanena samappavattamodatāya samaṃ sadisaṃ abbhanumodiṃsu. Taṃ pana samanumodanaṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādinā pāḷivaseneva dasseti.
6.《意欲经》的注释显示巴利原文
6. Ākaṅkheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
64 「具足」(sampannaṃ):即圆满,因由各方面到达、证得,故称具足。因此论中说:「这称为『圆满具足』」。(关于蜜)「那群」(naṃ):指被称为「蜜」(suvā)的蜂群。(动词词根)「具足」(sampanno):指正确地前往、到达、接近,所以论中说「具有」。(名词)「具足」(sampannaṃ):指与成就相应。而这里所说的成就,特指滋味的成就,这是以总说的方式确立差别。所以论中说:「譬如小小的甘甜而无瑕疵的蜜」,意为「没有缺点」。由此说:「这称为『甘甜具足』」。那些通过圆满受持戒、不缺不破等状态而成就的圆满之戒。由于从受持开始便已断除恶法,故称具戒者。要知道,从受持开始,那些完全相反的恶法便不再生起,因此称为具戒者;而在思等具有「戒」特相的法生起的刹那,就更不必说了。这些义理在《清净道论》中已有详明,因此应依彼处所说而详细了知——这是论师的意思。显示巴利原文
64.Sampannanti paripuṇṇaṃ, samantato pannaṃ pattanti sampannaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ paripuṇṇasampannaṃ nāmā’’ti. Nanti ‘‘suvā’’ti vuttaṃ suvagaṇaṃ. Sampannoti sammadeva panno gato upagato. Tenāha ‘‘samannāgato’’ti. Sampannanti sampattiyuttaṃ. Sā panettha rasasampatti adhippetā sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato. Tenāha ‘‘seyyathāpi khuddamadhuṃ aneḷaka’’nti, niddosanti attho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ madhurasampannaṃ nāmā’’ti. Sīlassa anavasesasamādānena akhaṇḍādibhāvāpattiyā ca paripuṇṇasīlā. Samādānato paṭṭhāya acchindanato sīlasamaṅgino. Samādānato hi accantavirodhidhammānuppattiyā sīlasamaṅgitā veditabbā, cetanādīnaṃ pana sīlanalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ pavattikkhaṇe vattabbameva natthi. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.9) vuttā, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva vitthārakathā veditabbāti adhippāyo.
「田地的圆满」:因为所依之业的失坏与成就,正是以所依为所缘,所以如同说「床座发出乌库提声」,此处便以所依的圆满来指称能依的圆满。同样,以田地为喻,说明了破损、腐坏等过失。田地若有破损,便是不圆满,因为无法获得庄稼的丰收。所以论中说:「庄稼不会生长」。即便只有一尺见方之地,因其能生出多个结节、结出众多果实,故有「大果」;又因嫩芽、秸秆等极为丰多,故有「大利益」。同样的道理:正如播下的种子因为有破损等四种过失而不圆满,因无这些过失而圆满;戒也是如此,因具破损等四种过失而不圆满,因无这些过失而圆满。这显示四种过失及其无有的状态,在能喻与所喻——即失坏与成就——之间是相通的。由于异熟果而成为「大果」。「大利益」:指广大的利益。而这一利益,在这部经文中正以种种方式被详细阐述。显示巴利原文
Khettapāripūrīti nissitapāripūriyā nissayapāripūrimāha nissitakammavipattisampattivisayattā yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Tathā hi khettena khaṇḍapūtiādidoso vutto. Khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hotīti aparipūraṃ hoti sassapāripūriyā abhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘sassaṃ na uṭṭhetī’’ti. Pādamattassapi anekambaṇaphalanato mahapphalaṃ hoti. Kisalayapalālādibahutāya mahānisaṃsaṃ. Evamevanti yathā khittaṃ bījaṃ khaṇḍādicatudosavasena aparipuṇṇaṃ hoti, tadabhāvena ca paripuṇṇaṃ, evaṃ sīlaṃ khaṇḍādicatudosavasena aparipuṇṇaṃ hoti, tadabhāvena ca paripuṇṇanti, catudosatadabhāvasāmaññameva nidassananidassitabbavipattisampattīsu dasseti. Mahapphalaṃ hoti vipākaphalena. Mahānisaṃsanti vipulānisaṃsaṃ. Svāyaṃ ānisaṃso idha pāḷiyaṃ nānappakārena vitthārīyati.
「据说至此」:这里的「据说」一词,含有「表示不认同」的意味。以此,论师表示自己不认同某位老师的说法。「具足戒」:这是以共相概括性地指称戒,而未指出具体的不共相。对此,有一位亲教师说「开示了四种遍净戒」。论师回应:在那四种遍净戒中,「殊胜戒」即指「上首戒」。无论在开示中还是注解中,道理皆是如此。因为在注解这里,如同在开示中一样,世尊所说的「具足戒」,指的就是巴帝摩卡律仪——这是他的意图。实际上,在巴利圣典中对戒的摄取,皆依巴帝摩卡律仪而来。因此他说:「正是巴帝摩卡律仪」等等。这里通过「正是」这一强调词,显示了其余三种戒只是部分地包含在巴帝摩卡之中。的确如此:例如在未经观察就观看等情况下,为了活命而违犯六条学处,或者在受用病缘药等时未作省思,这些都被佛陀制定为犯戒的过失。其余三戒:指根律仪等(根律仪、活命遍净戒、资具依止戒)。论师以近乎反问、并非正面驳斥的方式说道:是否有某部经典中,像以「巴帝摩卡律仪」那样,也用「戒」这一名称来明确摄持其余三戒呢?因此,他接着显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā kirāti (a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.37; a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.71-74) kira-saddo arucisūcanattho. Tenettha ācariyavādassa attano aruccanabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Sampannasīlāti anāmaṭṭhavisesaṃ sāmaññato sīlasaṅkhepena gahitaṃ. Tañca catubbidhanti ācariyatthero ‘‘catupārisuddhisīlaṃ uddisitvā’’ti āha. Tatthāti catupārisuddhisīle. Jeṭṭhakasīlanti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 3.5.412) padhānasīlaṃ. Ubhayatthāti uddesaniddese. Idha niddese viya uddesepi pātimokkhasaṃvaro bhagavatā vutto ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti vuttattāti adhippāyo . Sīlaggahaṇañhi pāḷiyaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvaravasena āgataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvaroyevā’’tiādi. Tattha avadhāraṇena itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ekadesena pātimokkhantogadhabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Tathā hi anolokiyolokane ājīvahetu chasikkhāpadavītikkame gilānapaccayassa apaccavekkhitaparibhoge ca āpatti vihitāti. Tīṇīti indriyasaṃvarasīlādīni. Sīlanti vuttaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthīti sīlapariyāyena tesaṃ katthaci sutte gahitaṭṭhānaṃ nāma kiṃ atthi yathā pātimokkhasaṃvaroti ācariyassa sammukhattā apaṭikkhipantova upacārena pucchanto viya vadati. Tenāha ‘‘ananujānanto’’ti. Chadvārarakkhāmattakamevāti tassa sallahukabhāvamāha cittādhiṭṭhānamattena paṭipākatikabhāvāpattito. Itaradvayepi eseva nayo. Paccayuppattimattakanti phalena hetuṃ dasseti. Uppādanahetukā hi paccayānaṃ uppatti. Idamatthanti idaṃ payojanaṃ imassa paccayassa paribhuñjaneti adhippāyo. Nippariyāyenāti iminā indriyasaṃvarādīni tīṇi padhānassa sīlassa parivāravasena pavattiyā pariyāyasīlāni nāmāti dasseti.
现在,为了通过遮遣、随顺与譬喻来阐明巴帝摩卡律仪本身的上首地位,论师说了“对其而言”等开头的语句。其中,“它”指巴帝摩卡律仪;“其余”指根律仪等其余三戒;“指的就是那一个”:即“具足戒”这一表述中所说的戒。在“具足巴帝摩卡”等句中,他先以“巴帝摩卡”一词宣说同义语,再展开详细解释……并说出了开头的语句。正如在其他地方,以教导个人为主的“于此,有比丘具足戒”,在注解中便被阐述为“他安住于巴帝摩卡律仪的防护中”。显示巴利原文
Idāni pātimokkhasaṃvarasseva padhānabhāvaṃ byatirekato anvayato ca upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha soti pātimokkhasaṃvaro. Sesānīti indriyasaṃvarādīni. Tassevāti ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti ettha yaṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ, tasseva. Sampannapātimokkhāti ettha pātimokkhaggahaṇena vevacanaṃ vatvā taṃ vitthāretvā…pe… ādimāha. Yathā aññathāpi ‘‘idha bhikkhu sīlavā hotī’’ti (mahāni. 199) puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya uddiṭṭhaṃ sīlaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī’’ti (vibha. 508; mahāni. 199) niddiṭṭhaṃ.
“以巴帝摩卡律仪防护而住”:能守护持守者、并令他解脱地狱等诸苦的学处戒,由此而得名“巴帝摩卡”。被此巴帝摩卡所防护,他们的身、语二门得以封闭。因为如此成就,他们便被称为“具足此戒者”,因此论中说:“具足巴帝摩卡律仪”。显示巴利原文
Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutāti yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehīti ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti laddhanāmena sikkhāpadasīlena pihitakāyavacīdvārā. Te pana yasmā evaṃbhūtā tena samannāgatā nāma honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgatā’’ti.
另一种解释——由于烦恼力强,造恶容易,行善困难,因而常常堕入恶趣,故名“堕者”,也就是凡夫。或者因为无常之故,在诸有等生存界中被业力之流抛掷,犹如旋转的陶罐,无片刻安稳而流转,具有如此不断往来的习性,故为“堕者”;或者依死亡的含义,在各类众生中不断舍弃有身(色身)的习性,故为“堕者”,这是指众生的相续,或单指心。能令此“堕者”从轮回之苦中解脱,故为“巴帝摩卡”。因为通过心的解脱,众生方名为解脱。正如经中所说:“因心清净而得净化”,以及“心从诸漏中无取著地解脱”。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo (udā. aṭṭha. 31; itivu. aṭṭha. 97) – kilesānaṃ balavabhāvato, pāpakiriyāya sukarabhāvato, puññakiriyāya ca dukkarabhāvato bahukkhattuṃ apāyesu patanasīloti pātī, puthujjano. Aniccatāya vā bhavādīsu kammavegakkhitto ghaṭīyantaṃ viya anavaṭṭhānena paribbhamanato gamanasīloti pātī, maraṇavasena vā tamhi tamhi sattanikāye attabhāvassa pātanasīloti pātī, sattasantāno, cittameva vā, taṃ pātiṃ saṃsāradukkhato mokkhetīti pātimokkhaṃ. Cittassa hi vimokkhena satto vimuttoti vuccati. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti, ‘‘anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimutta’’nti (mahāva. 28) ca.
或者,以无明等为因,在轮回中坠落、流转、相续,故称为「堕者」。正如经中说:「那些被无明盖遮蔽、被渴爱结系缚的众生,流转、轮回不已。」对于这个堕落的众生,此戒能令他解脱渴爱等三种染污,故名「巴帝摩卡」。其复合词的构成方式,应如「荆棘桩」等例去理解。显示巴利原文
Atha vā avijjādinā hetunā saṃsāre patati gacchati pavattatīti pātī. ‘‘Avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ sattānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarata’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.125) hi vuttaṃ. Tassa pātino sattassa taṇhādisaṃkilesattayato mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. ‘‘Kaṇṭhekālo’’tiādīnaṃ viya samāsasiddhi veditabbā.
或者,能使人堕落、毁坏、受苦的,是「堕者」,即心。正如经中说:「世间被心所牵引,被心所拖曳。」能令这堕落的心从中解脱的,便是「巴帝摩卡」。或者,因之而堕入恶趣之苦、轮回之苦的,是「堕者」,指渴爱等染污。正如经中说:「渴爱产生人」,「人以渴爱为伴侣」等。能令那堕落者从此解脱的,便是「巴帝摩卡」。显示巴利原文
Atha vā pāteti vinipāteti dukkheti pāti, cittaṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittena nīyati loko, cittena parikassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.62). Tassa pātino mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. Patati vā etena apāyadukkhe saṃsāradukkhe cāti pātī, taṇhādisaṃkileso. Vuttañhi ‘‘taṇhā janeti purisaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.57), taṇhādutiyo puriso’’ti (itivu. 15, 105; a. ni. 4.9) ca ādi. Tato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho.
又或者,是堕落之处,故为「堕者」,指六内处与六外处。正如经中说:「世间在六处中生起,在六处中亲近交往。」能从此内、外处之堕落中解脱的,便是「巴帝摩卡」。又或者,具有堕落与毁坏,是「堕者」,指轮回。能从中解脱的,便是「巴帝摩卡」。又或者,世尊是一切世间的尊主,于法自在,故称为「主」;能由此而解脱,是为「解脱」;因为是那位「主」所施设的解脱,故名「巴帝摩卡」。此巴帝摩卡本身即是巴帝摩卡。又或者,因为是一切功德的根本,依最胜义为「主」,又依前说义为「解脱」,故名「巴帝摩卡」。此巴帝摩卡本身即是巴帝摩卡。正如广说中所述:「巴帝摩卡是开端,是面首,是首要。」显示巴利原文
Atha vā patati etthāti pātī, cha ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Vuttañhi ‘‘chasu loko samuppanno, chasu kubbati santhava’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.70; su. ni. 171). Tato ajjhattikabāhirāyatanasaṅkhātato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā pāto vinipāto assa atthīti pātī, saṃsāro. Tato mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā sabbalokādhipatibhāvato dhammissaro bhagavā ‘‘patī’’ti vuccati, muccati etenāti mokkho, patino mokkho tena paññattattāti pātimokkho . Pātimokkho eva pātimokkho. Sabbaguṇānaṃ vā mūlabhāvato uttamaṭṭhena pati ca so yathāvuttatthena mokkho cāti pātimokkho. Pātimokkho eva pātimokkho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhantiādimetaṃ mukhametaṃ pamukhameta’’nti (mahāva. 135) vitthāro.
又或者,“pa-”是表方式的前缀,“atī”是表究竟、超越的不变词,因此,以种种方式彻底令解脱,故称“巴帝摩卡”(别解脱)。因为此戒本身,通过彼分断的方式,以及与定、慧相应,通过镇伏断和正断的方式,能彻底地令解脱、释放,故称“巴帝摩卡”。或者说,各别各别地从各种违犯过失中解脱,即是“巴帝摩卡”。所谓“巴帝摩卡”,即是各别解脱的意思。又或者说,“解脱”即涅槃,戒是涅槃的影像,故称“巴帝摩卡”。因为戒律仪属于抉择分,恰如日出的曙光,是涅槃的生起因,因而是涅槃的影像;又由于它能随宜灭除烦恼,故称“巴帝摩卡”。因此,“巴帝摩卡”即是各别解脱。又或者,朝向解脱而行、面朝解脱,即是“巴帝摩卡”。如此,应知“巴帝摩卡”一词的诸多含义。显示巴利原文
Atha vā pa-iti pakāre, atīti accantatthe nipāto, tasmā pakārehi accantaṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkho. Idañhi sīlaṃ sayaṃ tadaṅgavasena, samādhisahitaṃ paññāsahitañca vikkhambhanavasena, samucchedavasena ca accantaṃ mokkheti mocetīti pātimokkho. Pati pati mokkhoti vā pātimokkho, tamhā tamhā vītikkamadosato paccekaṃ mokkhoti attho. Pātimokkho eva pātimokkho. Mokkho vā nibbānaṃ, tassa mokkhassa patibimbabhūtoti pātimokkho . Sīlasaṃvaro hi nibbedhabhāgiyo sūriyassa aruṇuggamanaṃ viya nibbānassa udayabhūto tappaṭibhāgo viya hoti yathārahaṃ kilesanibbāpanatoti pātimokkho. Pātimokkhoyeva pātimokkho. Atha vā mokkhaṃ pati vattati mokkhābhimukhanti vā pātimokkhaṃ. Pātimokkhameva pātimokkhanti evamettha pātimokkhasaddassa attho veditabbo.
“成就行仪与行境”:以身语不违犯的“行仪”和以不涉足妓家等行境的“行境”而成就,意即具足圆满的行仪与行境。“于微细”:指极其微细、不至于犯戒之事;也有说法指仅属恶作、恶说等。“于过”:指应受呵责的过失。而这些过失必定属于不善的自性,故说“于不善法”。“见怖畏者”:即见其为怖畏,将微细的过失看得如同须弥山一般巨大,恒常心怀恐惧。“善受持”:即正确地、恭敬地、完整地受持。“学处”:此处为“简别依格”,表示从总体中简别出部分,故说“于诸学处中,各别受持此彼学处而学”。意思是,学处正是应当受持、应当修学的。“任何学处部分”:指在学的部分中,无论属于根本制、随制、一切处制、方所制等何种类别,凡是应学、应行、应圆满的戒。若依行门而言,则唯有两种,故说“身的、语的”。在此义释中,“于学处”是依格,因其不特取任何一类学处部分,故说“彼一切”。显示巴利原文
Ācāragocarasampannāti kāyikavācasikaavītikkamasaṅkhātena ācārena ceva navesiyagocaratādisaṅkhātena gocarena ca sampannā, sampannaācāragocarāti attho. Appamattesūti atiparittakesu anāpattigamanīyesu, dukkaṭadubbhāsitamattesūti apare. Vajjesūti gārayhesu. Te pana ekantato akusalasabhāvā hontīti āha ‘‘akusaladhammesū’’ti. Bhayadassinoti bhayato dassanasīlā, paramāṇumattampi vajjaṃ sineruppamāṇaṃ viya katvā bhāyanasīlā. Sammā ādiyitvāti sammadeva sakkaccaṃ sabbaso ca ādiyitvā. Sikkhāpadesūti niddhāraṇe bhummanti samudāyato avayavaniddhāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘sikkhāpadesu taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhathā’’ti atthamāha. Sikkhāpadameva hi samādātabbaṃ sikkhitabbañcāti adhippāyo. Yaṃ kiñci sikkhākoṭṭhāsesūti sikkhākoṭṭhāsesu mūlapaññattianupaññatisabbatthapaññattipadesapaññattiādibhedaṃ yaṃ kiñci sikkhitabbaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ pūretabbaṃ sīlaṃ. Taṃ pana dvāravasena duvidhamevāti āha ‘‘kāyikaṃ vācasikañcā’’ti. Imasmiṃ atthavikappe sikkhāpadesūti ādhāre bhummaṃ sikkhābhāgesu kassaci visuṃ aggahaṇato. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ sabba’’nti.
65 “为何开始?”这是对于开示之原因的询问。“为了显示戒的功德”则是目的的说明。不应这样看待:“什么是功德?在何处有功德?什么被宣说了?”因为在此,“为了显示戒的功德”中,通过别异的方式,即“未显示戒的功德”正是此开示的原因,所以“为何开始?”的意思,正是“为了那些尚未见到戒之功德的所化众生”。因此,说“若亦”等语。而为了阐明“为了显示戒的功德”之义,进而说“他们”等语。所谓“功德”,即是利益的生起。在“具戒者身坏命终后,生于善趣、天界”等经文中,异熟果也称为“功德”。“什么差别?”即什么果报的差别。“什么增长?”即什么殊胜的增进?因为即使存在功德,也唯有在被如实地阐明时,才能令人心生欢喜,否则便不能。因此,为了显示必然应当赞叹功德,便举出了毒刺商人的例子。显示巴利原文
65.Kasmā āraddhanti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.71-74) desanāya kāraṇapucchā. Sīlānisaṃsadassanatthanti payojananiddeso. Ko attho kva attho kva nipātitāti? Nayidamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sīlānisaṃsadassanatthanti hi ettha byatirekato yaṃ sīlānisaṃsassa adassanaṃ, taṃ imissā desanāya kāraṇanti kasmā āraddhanti vineyyānaṃ sīlānisaṃsassa adassanatoti atthato āpanno eva hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘sacepī’’tiādi. Sīlānisaṃsadassanatthanti pana imassa atthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ānisaṃsoti udayo. ‘‘Sīlavā sīlasampanno kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggalokaṃ upapajjatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.150; 3.316; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 285) pana vipākaphalampi ‘‘ānisaṃso’’ti vuttaṃ. Ko visesoti ko phalaviseso. Kā vaḍḍhīti ko abbhudayo. Vijjamānopi guṇo yāthāvato vibhāvito eva abhiruciṃ uppādeti, na avibhāvito, tasmā ekantato ānisaṃsakittanaṃ icchitabbamevāti dassetuṃ visakaṇṭakavāṇijo udāhaṭo.
其中,所谓“粗糖”,是将甘蔗汁熬煮之后,掺入粉末等,凝结成块的。“糖浆”则不成块,呈液状。“糖块”容易碎裂。“冰糖”类似水晶。“冰糖等”的“等”字,包含了低劣的糖。那时,粗糖等物有“毒刺”一名,在非边地普遍使用,故说“去了边地村”,并对孩子们喊:“不要拿毒刺!”显示巴利原文
Tattha guḷo nāma ucchurasaṃ pacitvā cuṇṇādīhi missitvā sampiṇḍane piṇḍībhūtaṃ. Phāṇitaṃ apiṇḍitaṃ dravībhūtaṃ. Khaṇḍaṃ bhijjanakkhamaṃ. Sakkharā nāma phalikasadisā. Sakkharādīniti ādi-saddena macchaṇḍikānaṃ saṅgaho. Tasmiṃ kāle guḷādīsu visakaṇṭakavohāro apaccantadese pacuroti ‘‘paccantagāmaṃ gantvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dārake ca palāpesuṃ ‘‘visakaṇṭakaṃ mā gaṇhantū’’ti.
“可爱”:指应当被喜爱者。因为可爱的形相,凡是见到,必然全然令人欣喜,故说“应以可爱眼而见”。由喜所生、澄净柔和之相所摄的眼,即称为“可爱眼”。“他们”:指同梵行者。“令意增长者”:通过滋养喜悦之心,令喜心层层增长者。“应安置于尊重处者”:即成为恭敬之处的对象。“知者而能知”:以智了知应知者。或者,不像有些人虽然无知却装作有知,此人并非如此,他正是知者而能知。“见者而能见”:以称为见的慧眼,能见应见者;或者说,正是见者而能见。“如是应受尊重”:如此,因具有智慧、具有贤善之德,应受尊重。显示巴利原文
Piyoti piyāyitabbo. Piyassa nāma dassanaṃ ekantato abhinanditabbaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘viyacakkhūhi sampassitabbo’’ti. Pītisamuṭṭhānapasannasommarūpapariggahañhi cakkhu ‘‘piyacakkhū’’ti vuccati. Tesanti sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Manavaḍḍhanakoti pītimanassa paribrūhanato uparūpari pīticittassa uppādako. Garuṭṭhāniyoti garukaraṇassa ṭhānabhūto. Jānaṃ jānātīti ñāṇena jānitabbaṃ jānāti. Yathā vā aññe ajānantāpi jānantā viya pavattanti, na evamayaṃ, ayaṃ pana jānanto eva jānāti . Passaṃ passatīti dassanabhūtena paññācakkhunā passitabbaṃ passati, passanto eva vā passati. Evaṃ sambhāvanīyoti evaṃ viññutāya paṇḍitabhāvena sambhāvetabbo.
“唯于戒为圆满行者”:应当理解为“于戒正是圆满行者”,如此后置词的限定当这样看待。因为以此句,上二学便成为无有退转。但是,为了以果来显示如何成为于戒圆满行者,而说“内”等。因为这里的戒圆满,是由于它能成就作为观之基础的定,而非仅仅是无缺等状态。所以说:“然而,那些诸无缺……乃至……能成就定。”这样,上二学便作为戒的资具而被含摄其中,因此,此处以戒为根本而作把握是成立的。由此,将说明心一境性以及对诸行的护持等,是戒的随护。至于后来所说“三学教示已生”,那是就其余诸学在此被摄持的层面而言,并非以根本的方式把握。如果这样,为何说戒是微少的呢?因为曾说过“然而,这仅仅是微少、卑浅的”,那是针对凡夫的行境而言的。因此,在那里戒并没有被无余地分别,所以那里的“唯戒”的“唯”字把握,应当视为合理。“以无减缺”:即以无缺等状态,或以未遗落任何而具足的方式。“以行相”:以因由、以成就。“于心之止”:即心的等持。“专注”:即不离、专精。如果有人完全未致力于禅那修习,即名为“将彼摒于外”。如果有人开始后中途退缩,即名为“破坏彼”。而如果不……显示巴利原文
Sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti sīlesu paripūrakārī eva bhaveyyāti evaṃ uttarapadāvadhāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañhi iminā padena uparisikkhādvayaṃ anivattitameva hoti. Yathā pana sīlesu paripūrakārī nāma hoti, taṃ phalena dassetuṃ ‘‘ajjhatta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Vipassanādhiṭṭhānasamādhisaṃvattanikatāya hi idha sīlassa pāripūrī, na kevalaṃ akhaṇḍādibhāvamattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni akhaṇḍāni…pe… samādhisaṃvattanikānī’’ti. Evañca katvā upari sikkhādvayaṃ sīlassa sambhārabhāvena gahitanti sīlassevettha padhānaggahaṇaṃ siddhaṃ hoti. Tathā hi cittekaggatāsaṅkhārapariggahānaṃ sīlassānurakkhaṇabhāvaṃ vakkhati. Yaṃ pana vakkhati ‘‘sikkhattayadesanā jātā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.65), taṃ itarāsampi sikkhānaṃ idha gahitatāmattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na padhānabhāvena gahitataṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sīlassa appamattakatāvacanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave, oramattaka’’nti (dī. ni. 1.7). Taṃ puthujjanagocaraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tathā hi tattha na nippadesato sīlaṃ vibhattaṃ, evaṃ katvā tattha sīlamattakanti mattaggahaṇaṃ samatthitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Anūnenāti akhaṇḍādibhāvena, kassaci vā ahāpanena upapannena. Ākārenāti karaṇena sampādanena. Cittasamatheti cittasamādhāne. Yuttoti aviyutto pasuto. Yo sabbena sabbaṃ jhānabhāvanaṃ ananuyutto, so taṃ bahi nīharati nāma. Yo ārabhitvā antarā saṅkocaṃ āpajjati , so taṃ vināseti nāma. Yo pana īdiso ahutvā jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, so anirākatajjhānoti dassento ‘‘bahi anīhaṭajjhāno’’tiādimāha.
「无常随观」:随观无常的三界法,或者随观其为「无常」,即无常随观。苦随观与无我随观,也应如此理解。以厌离的方式,对于这同一法而转起的随观,是「厌离随观」。以离染的方式转起的随观,是「离染随观」。随观灭,即是「灭随观」。以弃舍的方式转起的随观,是「弃舍随观」。住在空寂处的比丘,在那里获得身远离,依止与观的力量增长心远离,依教行道,以此庄严世间、教法,也庄严作为自己证得殊胜之处的空寂处;通过成就殊胜功德,智者从义理上增长这些,故称「增长空寂处者」。由此而说「这里」等。为了表明这才是增长空寂处及智者所称赞的合适之人,而不是指建造住所,于是说「作为同一地等……应见」。而且,此处提及「空寂之处」,已经包括了阿兰若、树下等一切适合精勤修习的坐卧具,应如此看待。显示巴利原文
Aniccassa tebhūmakadhammassa, aniccanti vā anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Tathā dukkhānupassanā anattānupassanā ca. Tasseva nibbindanākārena pavattā anupassanā nibbidānupassanā. Virajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā virāgānupassanā. Nirodhassa anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Paṭinissajjanavasena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Suññāgāragato bhikkhu tattha laddhakāyavivekatāya samathavipassanāvasena cittavivekaṃ paribrūhento yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattiyā lokaṃ sāsanañca attano visesādhigamaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ suññāgārañca upasobhayamāno guṇavisesādhiṭṭhānabhāvāpādanena viññūnaṃ atthato taṃ brūhento nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Ayameva suññāgārānubrūhanaviññuppasatthānaṃ bhājanaṃ, na senāsanapatiṭṭhāpananti dassento āha ‘‘ekabhūmakādi…pe… daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Suññāgāraggahaṇena cettha araññarukkhamūlādi sabbaṃ padhānānuyogakkhamaṃ senāsanaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「渴爱行之教」,即是依「缘于内」等开头的方式而展开的《渴爱行经》。因以渴爱为足处,也就是依止于渴爱,所以若无渴爱,慢与见便不会生起。所谓「进入慢与见」,意思是:为了显示而进入慢与见。对所说之法的教导,其「进入」正是为了领解。渴爱、慢、见这三种称为戏论,因为它们使众生的相续在轮回中扩展、辗转不息。以戒为足处,即依止于戒。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāvicaritadesanāti ‘‘ajjhattikassa upādāyā’’ti (vibha. 937) ādinayappavattaṃ taṇhāvicaritasuttaṃ. Taṇhāpadaṭṭhānattāti taṇhāsannissayattā. Na hi taṇhāvirahitā mānadiṭṭhipavatti atthi. Mānadiṭṭhiyo osaritvāti dassetabbatāya mānadiṭṭhiyo ogāhetvāti attho. Gahaṇatthameva hi desetabbadhammassa desanāya osaraṇaṃ. Taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo papañcattayaṃ sattasantānassa saṃsāre papañcanato anuppabandhanavasena vitthāraṇato. Sīlapadaṭṭhānattāti sīlādhiṭṭhānattā.
说「增上心学」,是为了连接前后文而引入。依观而增长空寂处的说法,与两者结合进行解说。两种学,是指增上心学与增上慧学。所谓「含摄而说」,就是连同增上戒学一起含摄着说明。若如此,这就变成了三学的教导,且应成为显示三学利益的教示;针对这个疑问,于是说「这里……」等。其中应说明的内容,前面已经说过。应知,此处取用「守护戒的心一境性和观」,正如根律仪守护巴帝摩卡律仪的四种遍净戒一样;然而这两者并非重点,只是以戒为主要而摄受。因此说「实为护戒者……」等。显示巴利原文
Adhicittasikkhā vuttāti ānetvā sambandho. Vipassanāvasena suññāgāravaḍḍhaneti yojanā. Dvepi sikkhāti adhicittādhipaññāsikkhā. Saṅgahetvāti adhisīlasikkhāya saddhiṃ saṅgahetvā vuttā. Yadi evamayaṃ sikkhattayadesanā jātāti sikkhattayānisaṃsappakāsanī siyāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Indriyasaṃvaro viya pātimokkhasaṃvarassa catupārisuddhisīlassa ārakkhabhūtā cittekaggatā vipassanā ca idha gahitāti tadubhayaṃ appadhānaṃ, sīlameva pana padhānabhāvena gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sīlānurakkhikā evā’’tiādi.
「更有力的乐」:当所生的病苦之痛变得更为强烈时,能克服此病的、更有力的禅那乐便生起。单有强力之乐的陶醉时,由于坚固的自我爱着,心被毁坏的人会舍弃善法,对于那样的人……他成为养活者。或者,若无强力之乐的陶醉爱着,则依如实观察“这纯是行的积聚”,而无我执、我所执。关于饥荒的怖畏,为说明战胜饥饿,而说“即使他的肠子向外流出”。关于疾病的怖畏,说“枯瘦、憔悴”。以“等”字所摄的盗贼怖畏,说“或为支离破碎”。“两者”,指止与观这一对。在此,由“内于心……空寂之处”等语句,因已使之成为抉择分的一部分,所取的心一境性与观正是能守护戒的。因为后面宣说了戒的禅那、解脱、果、神通、决定的状态,故应知,那心一境性与观作为其资助,在在处处皆被摄取。显示巴利原文
Balavatarasukhanti samuppannabyādhidukkhato balavataraṃ, taṃ abhibhavituṃ samatthaṃ jhānasukhaṃ uppajjati. Balavamamattaṃ hoti, tena daḷhaattasinehena viluttahadayo kusaladhamme chaḍḍento so tathārūpesu…pe… posetā hoti. Balavamamattaṃ vā sineho na hoti ‘‘suddho saṅkhārapuñjo’’ti yāthāvadassanena ahaṃkāramamaṃkārābhāvato. Dubbhikkhabhaye khudābhibhavaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sacepissa antāni bahi nikkhamantī’’ti. Byādhibhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ussussati visussanī’’ti. Ādi-saddena gahitaṃ corabhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘khaṇḍākhaṇḍiko vā’’ti. Ubhayassāti samathavipassanādvayassa. Ettha ca ‘‘ajjhattaṃ ceto…pe… suññāgārāna’’nti imehi visesanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvāpādanena sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ samatthā eva cittekaggatāvipassanā gahitā. Yasmā parato jhānavimokkhaphalābhiññāṇaadhiṭṭhānabhāvo sīlassa uddhaṭo, tasmā tassa bhiyyopi sambhārabhūtā eva cittekaggatā vipassanā tattha tattha gahitāti veditabbā.
「戒等」:以“等”字摄尽前文所说心一境性与观,或摄尽作为戒之根本的一切业自性智,或业道正见。因为戒及其他福业事,皆由此正见而得清净,方成大果、大利。「他成为获得」:指获得护戒的圆满。经中已说如此情形,那究竟是怎样呢?世尊是否认可?世尊并非一概认可,而是出于大悲,随顺补特伽罗的意乐方作此说;为示此义,遂言“在这里并不……”等。其中,「断食言谈者」:即不发起为求食所用的语言,如哑人一般断除言谈,凡为指示、说明、暗示、表明求食所应说者,皆不应说、不应讲,这便是它的含义。随顺补特伽罗的意乐,在略说之后,为开显其义而说“对于那些……”等。味:指本质的功德利益,称为“味的利益”。显示巴利原文
Sīlādīti ādi-saddena yathāvuttacittekaggatāvipassanā saṅgaṇhāti, sīlassa vā mūlakāraṇabhūtaṃ sabbaṃ kammassakatañāṇañca saṅgaṇhāti kammapathasammādiṭṭhiṃ vā. Sīlañhi tadaññampi puññakiriyāvatthu teneva parisodhitaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsanti. Lābhī assanti lābhā sāya saṃvaraṇasīlaparipūraṇaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ kimīdisaṃ bhagavā anujānātīti? Na bhagavā sabhāvena īdisaṃ anujānāti, mahākāruṇikatāya pana puggalajjhāsayena evaṃ vuttanti dassento ‘‘na cetthā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ghāsesanaṃ chinnakatho na vācaṃ payuttaṃ bhaṇeti chinnakatho mūgo viya hutvā obhāsaparikathānimittaviññattipayuttaṃ ghāsesanaṃ vācaṃ na bhaṇe na katheyyāti attho. Puggalajjhāsayavasenāti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘yesañhī’’tiādimāha. Raso sabhāvabhūto ānisaṃso rasānisaṃso.
「施与资具的施主们」:即以衣等资具而行布施的施主。为阐明“对于天人们”一语,故说“天人也……”等。在“在家者们,有这五种利益”等经文中,“利益”一词亦有“果”的同义词用法,因此说“这两者在意义上是一样的”。显示巴利原文
Paccayadānakārāti cīvarādipaccayavasena dānakārā. ‘‘Devānaṃ vā’’ti vuttavacanaṃ pākaṭīkātumāha ‘‘devāpī’’tiādi. ‘‘Pañcime gahapatayo ānisaṃsā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.150) anisaṃsasaddo phalapariyāyopi hotīti āha ‘‘ubhayametaṃ atthato eka’’nti.
“舅姑及其眷属”,指公婆以及他们的眷属。他们或是通过亲族血统的联结,或是通过嫁娶婚配的联结而成为亲族。“同血亲”,是以血统联结的。“一血相连者”,即由同一个共同的血统联结而成。“往至死后之状态”,即因投生于饿鬼趣而获得新生。然而,由于他们在此世间命终时,依限寿尽,故说为“已命终者”。“有净信心者”,即具有清净信心。由所缘可知,命终的父亲或母亲投生于饿鬼趣,因此说“即成大利”,意即因他具足戒行而成为大利益。若成为圣者,则更不待言。因此说“不计其数百劫千劫”等。“多所助益”,即有广大的利益。“亲近”,即通过问讯、礼拜等方式前往。“恭敬侍奉”,即恭敬承事供养。显示巴利原文
Sassusasurā ca tappakkhikā ca sassusasurapakkhikā. Te ñātiyonisambandhena āvāhavivāhasambandhavasena sambandhā ñātī. Sālohitāti yonisambandhavasena. Ekalohitasambaddhāti ekena samānena lohitasambandhena sambaddhā. Peccabhāvaṃ gatāti petūpapattivasena nibbattiṃ upagatā. Te pana yasmā idha katakālakiriyā kālena katajīvitupacchedā honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kālakatā’’ti. Pasannacittoti pasannacittako. Kālakato pitā vā mātā vā petayoniṃ upapannoti adhikārato viññāyatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahānisaṃsameva hotī’’ti, tassa tathā sīlasampannattāti adhippāyo. Ariyabhāve pana sati vattabbameva natthi. Tenāha ‘‘anekāni kappasatasahassānī’’tiādi. Bahukāranti bahupakāraṃ. Upasaṅkamananti abhivādanādivasena upagamanaṃ. Payirupāsananti upaṭṭhānanti.
66 “被压伏”,即被摧破。“厌倦”,即舍弃、不喜乐、不修习。具戒比丘因畏惧戒蕴的毁坏而令心安住等持,同时作为修观者,由于资具的灭尽,对不悦与悦皆加以压伏,所以说“正因为具足戒等功德……”等。显示巴利原文
66.Ajjhottharitāti madditā. Ukkaṇṭhāti riñcanā anabhirati ananuyogo. Sīlavā bhikkhu attano sīlakhaṇḍabhayena samāhito vipassako ca paccayaghātena aratiyā ratiyā ca sahitā abhibhavitāva hotīti āha ‘‘sīlādiguṇayuttenevā’’tiādi.
“心的畏惧称为害怕”,故为恐惧。“所缘由此使人害怕”,故为恐惧。由于与前段相似,虽可依先前所说之理类推,但仍再次开示,故说“具足戒等功德者……”等。由于在尊者的下风处坐下,诸天人的幼童无法以本来面貌安住,不能安乐地活动,因此变得无能为力。显示巴利原文
Cittutrāso bhāyatīti bhayaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ. Purimavārasadisattā vuttanayamevāti atidisitvāpi puna taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlādiguṇayutto hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Therassa heṭṭhā nisinnattā devatāya dārakā sakabhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ sukhena vattituṃ asakkontā asamatthā.
“更上的心”即增上心,指近行定心。又因其较通常的欲界心更为殊胜、美妙,且从对立面中清净,故说“殊胜清净之心”。“增上心”即定,于此应视为近行定。由远离所生之喜乐、定所生之喜乐、无喜之禅那乐、念清净所生之禅那乐——这四种禅那乐,因从对立面出离,故称为“出离乐”;因此说“领受出离乐”。“能于所期望的任何时刻入定”,以此说明他们于禅那的入定自在;又由“随欲而得”一语,应知转向自在、决意自在、观察自在亦已说明。“以乐镇伏敌对法”,以此显示他们禅那乐的速疾明了。“广大的”指已被导入广大。禅那之广大,名为由善巧修习而能较长时间安住,且此应与所限定的时间相应;故说“广大的”之后,又说“即能于所限定的时分出定”。若未到限定时间便出定,则非不艰难而得,因不能随其所欲地持续。今为以遮遣方式阐明他们如前所述的入定等自在,而说“有一类人……”等。其中,“他仅是得者”,是就仅证得禅那而言。“那样”指于所期望的任何时刻。“有障碍者”指自在的敌对法。而证得禅那的敌对法,更早即已被镇伏,否则证得禅那本身便不可能。“艰难显示巴利原文
Adhikaṃ cetoti abhiceto, upacārajjhānacittaṃ. Tassa pana adhikatā pākatikakāmāvacaracittehi sundaratāya sapaṭipakkhato visuddhiyā cāti āha ‘‘abhikkantaṃ visuddhicitta’’nti. Adhicittanti samādhimāha, so ca upacārasamādhi daṭṭhabbo. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ, samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ, apītijaṃ jhānasukhaṃ, satipārisuddhijaṃ jhānasukhanti catubbidhampi jhānasukhaṃ paṭipakkhato nikkhantataṃ upādāya ‘‘nekkhammasukha’’nti vuccatīti āha ‘‘nekkhammasukhaṃ vindantī’’ti. Icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjituṃ samatthoti iminā tesu jhānesu samāpajjanavasībhāvamāha, ‘‘nikāmalābhī’’ti pana vacanato āvajjanādhiṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇavasiyopi vuttā evāti veditabbā. Sukheneva paccanīkadhamme vikkhambhetvāti etena tesaṃ jhānasukhakhippābhiññatañca dasseti. Vipulānanti vepullaṃ pāpitānaṃ. Jhānānaṃ vipulatā nāma subhāvitabhāvena ciratarappatti, sā ca paricchedānurūpāva icchitabbbāti ‘‘vipulāna’’nti vatvā ‘‘yathāparicchedeyeva vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthoti vuttaṃhotī’’ti āha. Paricchedakālañhi appatvāva vuṭṭhahanto akasiralābhī na hoti yāvadicchakaṃ pavattetuṃ asamatthattā. Idāni teyeva yathāvutte samāpajjanādivasībhāve byatirekavasena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ekacco hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha lābhīyeva hotīti idaṃ paṭiladdhamattassa jhānassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tathāti icchiticchitakkhaṇe. Pāribandhiketi vasībhāvassa paccanīkadhamme. Jhānādhigamassa pana paccanīkadhammā pageva vikkhambhitā, aññathā jhānādhigamo eva na siyā. Kicchena vikkhambhetīti kicchena visodheti. Kāmādīnavapaccavekkhaṇādīhi kāmacchandādīnaṃ viya aññesampi samādhipāribandhikānaṃ dūrasamussāraṇaṃ idha vikkhambhanaṃ visodhanañcāti veditabbaṃ. Nāḷikāyantanti kālamānanāḷikāyantaṃ āha.
特别是,以色界第四禅那完全达到自在,成为神通的基础,正是基于这一意趣,所以说“当神通基础的禅那被说出时”。然而,无色界禅那也因作为决意的依处而成为基础,因为若不通过十四种方式调伏心,它便不存在。“因此,这里的意思是:‘如此,当作为神通基础的色界禅那被说出时,神通虽属世间,其色界部分亦已提及。’”“Nanti”指神通的部分。“四……乃至……诸圣道是戒的功德,因为唯有具足戒者才能获得。”“遍取后”即把握后。显示巴利原文
Visesena rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ sabbaso vasībhāvāpāditaṃ abhiññāpādakanti adhippāyenāha ‘‘abhiññāpādake jhāne vutte’’ti. Arūpajjhānampi pana adhiṭṭhānatāya pādakameva cuddasadhā cittaparidamanena vinā tadabhāvato. ‘‘Evamabhiññāpādake rūpāvacarajjhāne vutte rūpāvacaratāya kiñcāpi abhiññānaṃ lokiyavāro āgato’’ti ayañhettha adhippāyo. Nanti abhiññāvāraṃ. Cattāri…pe… ariyamaggā sīlānaṃ ānisaṃso sampannasīlasseva lābhato. Pariyādiyitvāti gahetvā.
“支的寂静”:指由于盖等敌对法极其遥远,禅支得以止息,灭尽了一切躁动与热恼的意思,由此,那些禅那具有更殊胜等的状态。“所缘的寂静”:指由于远离了色的撞击等,达到了柔和、微细等状态的寂静性质。实际上,从修习与证得的所缘已被充分修习,而呈现柔和微细之相时开始,禅支的寂静便应被了知。而因所缘寂静而有的寂静,应以缘取出世间法的观察来阐明。“解脱”是殊胜地解脱。那些禅那法,由于先前分位修习的力量,以更超越的方式从敌对法解脱而转起,并且因此种解脱的状态,如同在父亲膝上四肢放松的幼童一样,毫无疑虑地倾向于所缘而转起,这些便称为“诸解脱”。因此说:“‘诸解脱’是由于从敌对法解脱,以及倾向于所缘。”虽然无色定是通过超越所缘而证得的,并非通过超越禅支,但由于若对色界禅那的所缘不离欲,便不能超越禅那,而且当禅那被超越时,所缘也已被超越,因此不说“超越所缘”,而只说“超越色界禅那后”。在经文中,“超越诸色想”应理解为需要补充“应当修习”、“应当观察”等词,但基于未曾听过的推论并无意义,所以说“与‘寂静’一词相显示巴利原文
Aṅgasantatāyāti nīvaraṇādīnaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ sudūratarabhāvena jhānaṅgānaṃ vūpasantatāya, nibbutasabbadarathapariḷāhatāyāti attho, yato tesaṃ jhānānaṃ paṇītatarādibhāvo. Ārammaṇasantatāyāti rūpapaṭighādivigamanena saṇhasukhumādibhāvappattasantabhāvena. Yadaggena hi nesaṃ bhāvanābhisamayasabbhāvitasaṇhasukhumākārāni ārammaṇāni santāni, tadaggena jhānaṅgānaṃ santatā veditabbā. Ārammaṇasantatāya santatā lokuttaradhammārammaṇāhi paccavekkhaṇāhi dīpetabbā. Vimuttā visesena muttā. Ye hi jhānadhammā tathāpavattapubbabhāgabhāvanāhi tabbisesatāya sātisayaṃ paṭipakkhadhammehi vimuttivasena pavattanti, tato eva tathāvimuttatāya pitu aṅke vissaṭṭhaaṅgapaccaṅgo viya kumāro nirāsaṅkabhāvena ārammaṇe adhimuttā ca pavattanti, te vimokkhāti vuccanti. Tenāha ‘‘vimokkhāti paccanīkadhammehi vimuttattā ārammaṇe ca adhimuttattā’’ti . Yadipi ārammaṇasamatikkamavasena pattabbāni āruppāni, na aṅgātikkamavasena, tathāpi yasmā ārammaṇe avirattassa jhānasamatikkamo na hoti, samatikkantesu ca jhānesu ārammaṇaṃ samatikkantameva hoti, tasmā ārammaṇasamatikkamaṃ avatvā ‘‘rūpāvacarajjhāne atikkamitvā’’ti icceva vuttaṃ. Atikkamma rūpeti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sampādetabbā, passitabbā’’ti vā kiñci padaṃ icchitabbaṃ, asutaparikappanena pana payojanaṃ natthīti ‘‘santāti padasambandho’’ti vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā tena virāgabhāvena tesaṃ santatāti ayampi attho vibhāvito hoti. Rūpajjhānādīnaṃ viya natthi etesaṃ ārammaṇabhūtaṃ vā phalabhūtaṃ vā rūpanti arūpā. Arūpā eva āruppā. Tenāha ‘‘ārammaṇato ca vipākato ca rūpavirahitā’’ti. Nāmakāyenāti sahajātanāmasamūhena.
67 「结缚」意为「束缚」。被什么所缚?答曰「诸蕴之趣」等。因为对于尚未断除贪等烦恼者,未来的诸蕴等与诸蕴等仍有连结;而对于已断除贪等烦恼者,虽然曾造作业,但由于业已失去功能,便不再有这种连结。又因随顺贪等而有结缚之义,故说「诸蕴之趣……乃至……被称为结」。「以遍尽」即以断除而于未来完全不再生起。由于能彻底弃绝、流注并压迫敌对法,故称为「流」,即指圣道,因此说「『流』是道的别名」。初次证入此流、到达此流者,即「入流者」,是为第八位圣者。因此说「彼具足者」,意指处于初道刹那的补特伽罗。但此处「已入」一词,如同在「为作证果而修行者」等语境中一样,是现在时的用法,故说「以道之名来称说果」。但如果是在非比喻的实际情形中,则应直接从自性获得名称。「堕处」是指将人抛入卑劣、痛苦、忧恼之处,即抛入恶趣之苦。「法」即自性。因此说「自身」等。为何如此?这是对不退堕法的询问。显示巴利原文
67.Saṃyojentīti bandhanti. Kehīti āha ‘‘khandhagatī’’tiādi. Asamucchinnarāgādikassa hi khandhādīnaṃ āyatiṃ khandhādīhi sambandho, samucchinnarāgādikassa pana taṃ natthi katānampi kammānaṃ asamatthabhāvāpattitoti. Rāgādīnaṃ anvayato ca saṃyojanaṭṭho siddhoti āha ‘‘khandhagati…pe… vuccantī’’ti. Parikkhayenāti samucchedena sabbaso āyatiṃ anuppajjanena. Paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ anavasesato savanato pīḷanato soto, ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘sototi ca maggassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Taṃ sotaṃ ādito panno adhigacchīti sotāpanno, aṭṭhamako. Tenāha ‘‘taṃsamaṅgīpuggalassā’’ti, paṭhamamaggakkhaṇe puggalassāti adhippāyo. Idha pana panna-saddo ‘‘phalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.59) viya vattamānakālikoti āha ‘‘maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinna’’nti. Abhītakālikatte pana sarasatova nāmalābho siyā. Virūpaṃ sadukkhaṃ saupāyāsaṃ nipātetīti vinipāto, apāyadukkhe khipanako. Dhammoti sabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘attāna’’ntiādi. Kasmāti avinipātadhammatāya kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Apāyaṃ gamentīti apāyagamanīyā. Sambujjhatīti sambodhi, ariyamaggo. So pana paṭhamamaggassa adhigatattā avasiṭṭho eva adhigandhabbabhāvena icchitabboti āha ‘‘uparimaggattaya’’nti.
这些烦恼的表述是为了称扬功德,并非意在说明它们应当被断除。第二道(一来道)在运作时,以断除粗显的贪等为其相,并令所剩余的贪等变得薄弱,因此说「贪、嗔、痴的微薄」。「偶尔生起」是指有时、难得地生起。「缠缚力弱」是指在现行上变得柔和。由于与之相应的不如理作意并非恒常相随,所以不会频频生起;又由于颠倒想及其所缘的痴、慢等变得柔和,因此它们微弱地生起;但若亲近于事境,它们也会浓厚地生起,这是其意图所在。因此以「例如」等加以说明。显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttāni,na pahātabbānīti adhippāyo. Oḷārikānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ samucchindanavasena pavattamāno dutiyamaggo avasiṭṭhānaṃ tesaṃ tanubhāvāpattiyā uppanno nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā’’ti. Adhiccuppattiyāti kadāci karahaci uppajjanena. Pariyuṭṭhānamandatāyāti samudācāramudutāya. Abhiṇhaṃ na uppajjanti tajjassa ayonisomanasikārassa anibaddhabhāvato. Mandamandā uppajjanti vipallāsānaṃ tappaccayānañca mohamānādīnaṃ mudutarabhāvato. Bahalāva uppajjanti vatthupaṭisevanatoti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi.
「有一来法」是指以结生而言,仅有一次回来的自性。「唯只一次……乃至……回来」:以此显示在五种一来者中,除去四种,唯取一种,故说「即使那位」等。其中,此处所说的第五种一来者,即:「于此世间修习圣道后生于天界,在那里尽其寿量而住,之后再降生此处而入般涅槃。」那么,他与一种子者有何差别呢?一种子者有一次结生,一来者有两次结生,这便是他们的差别。对于某些入流者,唯有一蕴之种子,而非仅取一次有身,他便被称为一种子者。显示巴利原文
Sakiṃ āgamanadhammoti paṭisandhivasena sakiṃyeva āgamanasabhāvo. Ekavāraṃyeva…pe… āgantvāti iminā pañcasu sakadāgāmīsu cattāro vajjetvā ekoyeva gahitoti dassento ‘‘yopi hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yvāyaṃ pañcamako sakadāgāmī ‘‘idha maggaṃ bhāvetvā devaloke nibbatto, tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā puna idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyatī’’ti vutto, tassa ekabījinā saddhiṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti? Ekabījissa ekā paṭisandhi, sakadāgāmissa dve paṭisandhiyoti idaṃ tesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ. Yassa hi sotāpannassa ekaṃyeva khandhabījaṃ, na ekaṃ attabhāvaggahaṇaṃ, so ekabījīti.
「下(heṭṭhā)」指与「非广大地」结合的下方。「对下分有益的」,即属于下分(orambhāgiya)的,指那些结。那些就是五下分结。缘于内在的结缚,必定生于欲界。为了显示他即使从远方也会回转,故以吞钩之鱼等作为比喻来说明。「化生者」:以此说明无有胎藏之苦。「于彼处般涅槃者」:以此说明其余诸苦的止息。而他之所以会在彼处般涅槃,正是由于欲界的蕴种子不再回转生起,故称「不还法」(anāvattadhamma)。显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhāti ‘‘amahaggatabhūmiya’’nti heṭṭhā sambandhanena. Heṭṭhābhāgassa hitāti heṭṭhābhāgiyā, tesaṃ. Tānīti orabbhāgiyasaṃyojanāni. Kāmāvacare nibbattatiyeva ajjhattaṃ saṃyojanattā. Tathā hesa dūratopi āvattidhammo evāti dassetuṃ gilabaḷisamacchādayo upamābhāvena vuttā. Opapātikoti iminā gabbhavāsadukkhābhāvamāha. Tattha parinibbāyīti iminā sesadukkhābhāvaṃ. Tattha parinibbānatā cassa kāmaloke khandhabījassa apunārohavasenevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘anāvattidhammo’’ti vuttaṃ.
68 「纯全」指不与世间神通相混杂。世间五神通也是戒的功德,因为它们与戒不相离。为了显示那些神通,故连接了「若希望……乃至……如是开端」等文。由于彻底断尽了所有烦恼,唯有阿拉汉道在殊胜意义上才配称为「漏尽」,所以说「在说出漏尽时」;否则,一切六神通便都成了「漏尽」。「这些功德」指世间神通。如同一个人剃光了头,因没有顶髻而不庄严,同样,作为教说顶端的无上道谈论,如果离开了世间神通,也不会庄严,故说:「这个谈论几乎可以被称为『无髻神通之谈』。」「神变」指神通与变化。此处以「变化」一词指变化神通,以「神通」一词指其余一切神通的作用。「唯在恰当的场合」:正如世间神通的生起有其适当的场合,教说也是如此。以此显示,这不单是依说法次第的教说,也是依行道次第的教说。这在《清净道论》中已经说过,因此应依那里所述的方式来理解,这是意图所在。显示巴利原文
68.Kevalāti lokiyābhiññāhi asammissā. Lokiyapañcābhiññāyopi sīlānaṃ ānisaṃso tadavinābhāvato. Tāpi dassetuṃ ākaṅkheyya ce…pe… evamādimāhāti yojanā. Āsavānaṃ anavasesappahānato arahattamaggoyeva visesato ‘‘āsavakkhayo’’ti vattabbataṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘āsavakkhaye kathite’’ti, aññathā sabbāpi chaḷabhiññā āsavakkhayo evāti. Imesaṃ guṇānanti lokiyābhiññānaṃ . Yathā purisassa muṇḍitaṃ sīsaṃ sikhāvirahitattā na sobhati, evaṃ desanāya sīsabhūtāpi aggamaggakathā lokiyābhiññārahitā na sobhatīti āha ‘‘ayaṃ kathā muṇḍābhiññākathā nāma bhaveyyā’’ti. Iddhivikubbanāti iddhi ca vikubbanā ca. Vikubbanaggahaṇena cettha vikubbaniddhimāha, iddhiggahaṇena tadaññaṃ sabbañca abhiññākiccaṃ. Yuttaṭṭhāneyevāti lokiyābhiññānaṃ nibbattanassa viya desanāya yuttaṭṭhāneyeva. Etena na kevalaṃ desanakkamenevāyaṃ desanā, atha kho paṭipattikkamenapīti dasseti. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.369) vuttā, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbāti adhippāyo.
69 「以漏尽故」:由下分道灭除后所残余的诸漏,被阿拉汉道断尽了。由于阿拉汉道不仅灭尽诸漏,也灭尽其余一切烦恼,因此说:「以一切烦恼的灭尽故」。在此,「漏」仅是举其代表而已,因为阿拉汉道并不缘取漏为所缘,故称「无漏」。然而,由于在那里丝毫不存有漏,所以说「远离诸漏」。「定」以心为上首而被说出,正如「修习心与慧」的意旨。「从贪解脱,从无明解脱」:这应视为显示了直接对立的止息,而不是说其余的不善法未得止息。现在,为了以教证显示此定与慧是贪与无明的对治法,故说:「这已说」等。「止的果」是止的成果:因为以世间止的修习导入观,而出世间的止有其相应的果——心解脱。「观的果」,观的成就是慧解脱。这是以观导入道果,因为观的相应果便是慧解脱。果定被含摄于此二者当中,这就是所说的意思。以此表明:依于止观双运,诸善士完成了应作,因此应致力于其修习,这便是意趣。现在,为了显示在成就阿拉汉道时,道的次第是如何的,故开始了「当他的心如此入定」等语。显示巴利原文
69.Āsavānaṃ khayāti heṭṭhimamaggena khepitāvasiṭṭhānaṃ āsavānaṃ arahattamaggena samucchindanato. Yasmā arahattamaggo na kevalaṃ āsaveyeva khepeti, atha kho avasiṭṭhe sabbakilesepi, tasmā āha ‘‘sabbakilesānaṃ khayā’’ti. Lakkhaṇamattañhettha āsavaggahaṇaṃ, āsavānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvassapi anupagamanato anāsavaṃ. Yasmā pana tattha āsavānaṃ lesopi natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘āsavavirahita’’nti. Samādhi vutto cetosīsena yathā ‘‘cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 2.1.9) adhippāyo. Rāgato vimuttattā avijjāya vimuttattāti idaṃ ujuvipaccanīkapaṭippassaddhidassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na tadaññesaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ appaṭippassaddhattā. Idāni tameva samādhipaññānaṃ rāgāvijjāpaṭipakkhataṃ āgamena dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttaṃ ceta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Samathaphalanti samathassa phalaṃ lokiyasamathabhāvanāya hi vipassanāgatāya āhitaphalassa lokuttarasamathassa sarikkhakaphalo cetovimutti. Vipassanāphalanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Attanoyevāti sutamayañāṇādinā viya parapaccayataṃ nayaggāhañca muñcitvā paratoghosānugatabhāvanādhigamabhūtatāya attanoyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā sayambhuñāṇabhūtāyāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘aparappaccayena ñatvā’’ti.
“一切”:指上面提到的全部十七种戒的功德。那些功德若是圆满成就,由于它们依戒而生的缘故,功德便自然显现;同样,当以功德为主的适宜性被显示出来时,那些功德也就随之显现了。因此说“将它们总集在一起宣说”。重复已说之义即是摄结,故说“作了摄结”。“前”:指最初说法之时。“如是所说”:指通过“具戒者”等方式所宣说的内容。“这一切”:指“具戒者”等所有这些语句。“缘此”是就具备前文所述十七种功德的具戒比丘而言。正是为了说明“如此所说的一切,正是依此而说”这句话,才说“总集一切戒功德而显示”。在此,最初六种功德属于“小地”的成就,随后五种世间神通属于“广大地”的成就,其余则属于“出世间地”的成就。如此,这兼具四种地之成就的戒,实在广大、有大威神力,因此在修习时应当殷重、不放逸。显示巴利原文
Sabbampi tanti sabbampi sattarasavidhaṃ taṃ yathāvuttaṃ sīlānisaṃsaṃ. Yathā ānisaṃsavante sammadeva sampādite tadānisaṃsā dassitā eva honti tadāyattabhāvato, evaṃ ānisaṃsapadhānayogyabhāvena dassite tadānisaṃsā dassitā eva hontīti āha ‘‘sampiṇḍetvā dassento’’ti. Vuttasseva atthassa punavacanaṃ nigamananti vuttaṃ ‘‘nigamanaṃ āhā’’ti. Pubbeti desanārambhe. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti evamādinā ākārena vuttaṃ. Idaṃ sabbampīti idaṃ ‘‘sampannasīlā’’tiādikaṃ sabbampi vacanaṃ. Etaṃ paṭiccāti etaṃ sampannasīlassa bhikkhuno yathāvuttasattarasavidhānisaṃsabhāgitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idameva hi ‘‘iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti vacanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sabbampi taṃ sīlānisaṃsaṃ sampiṇḍetvā dassento’’ti vuttaṃ. Etthaādito chahi ānisaṃsehi parittabhūmikā sampatti gahitā, tadantaraṃ pañcahi lokiyābhiññāhi ca mahaggatabhūmikā, itarehi lokuttarabhūmikāti evaṃ catubhūmikasampadānisaṃsasīlaṃ nāmetaṃ mahantaṃ mahānubhāvaṃ, tasmā taṃsampādane sakkaccakāritā appamattena bhavitabbaṃ.
《若希望经》的注释——阐明隐含义的部分,到此结束。显示巴利原文
Ākaṅkheyyasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
7. 《衣经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Vatthasuttavaṇṇanā
70 “应遮覆之秘密处”:因其居住、遮蔽之故,称为“衣”。与度量相似但并非全然等同,而是近于衡量,这便是“所比”。通过此而令人生起比知,是为“比喻”;以比喻令人了知的言辞,称为“比喻语”。“于某经中”:指经文的某处。“义”:指被比喻的义理。首先陈说比喻,继而阐明义理,然后再申比喻,这称为“以比喻环绕而显示义”;在“以义环绕比喻”之处,道理亦同。如今为阐明这四种方式皆随顺经中传承的义理,故有“诸比丘,譬如”等语。其中,“两个在家人”是指两间相邻的房屋。“有门”是指门与门相对。显示巴利原文
70. Chādetabbaṃ ṭhānaṃ vasati paṭicchādetīti vatthaṃ. Yaṃ samānaṃ viya na sabbaso minoti, mānassa pana samīpe, taṃ upamānaṃ. Upamīyati etāyāti upamā, upamāya bodhakavacanaṃ upamāvacanaṃ. Katthaci sutte. Atthanti upamiyatthaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ upamaṃ vatvā tadanantaraṃ atthaṃ vatvā puna upamaṃ vadanto ‘‘upamāya atthaṃ parivāretvā dassetī’’ti vutto. Atthena upamaṃ parivāretvāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Idāni te cattāropi pakāre sutte āgatanayeneva dassento ‘‘seyyathāpissu, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha dve agārāti dve paṭivissakagharā. Sadvārāti sammukhadvārā.
“彼如此”:彼世尊,正是这样一位借由展示比喻及种种方便来说法的人。为了阐明“对于某一类应调伏者,其义理容易通达,是因为先示比喻、先显义理、以比喻围绕义理、以义理围绕比喻”这个意义,所以说“此法适用于一切处”。“法界”:指一切知智。此一切知智摄于法界之中,它能对前述一切法及一切所应了知的法,如其真实相状而安立、觉知、令他人觉知,故称为“界”;或者,一切法皆依此法界而于一切方面被了知、被传达,故为“法界”。又因世尊是极善巧通达真理而证得此智,故称“极善通达”;或者说,自从以此智极善通达所缘境以来,此智本身便也极善通达了,因此说为“极善通达”。显示巴利原文
Svāyanti so ayaṃ evaṃ upamādassanavasenapi nānānayenapi dhammadesako bhagavā. Ekaccānaṃ veneyyānaṃ atthassa sukhāvabodho paṭhamaṃ upamādassane hetu, evaṃ paṭhamaṃ atthadassane, upamāya atthaparivāraṇe, atthena upamāparivāraṇe cā’’ti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘esa nayo sabbatthā’’ti iminā. Dhammadhātuyāti sabbaññutaññāṇassa. Tañhi dhammadhātupariyāpannattā yathāvuttadhamme ca sabbepi ñeyyadhamme ca padahati yathāsabhāvato bujjhati bodheti cāti dhātu, dhīyanti vā dhammā etāya sabbākārato ñāyanti ñāpiyanti cāti dhammadhātu. Tassā pana suṭṭhu saccasampaṭivedhavasena laddhattā suppaṭividdhattāti, yadaggena vā ñeyyaṃ tāya suppaṭividdhaṃ, tadaggena sāpissa suppaṭividdhā evāti āha ‘‘suppaṭividdhattā’’ti.
为说明本性极清净的心如何被外来垢秽所染,故作“染污之衣”的比喻,由此而有“本性清净之衣”之说。“由尘等”一句中,“尘”指微尘。“等”字则包含了微细尘、灯烟等令衣不清净的因素。但凡由它而彻底染污、毁坏、失去清净的,即名为“染污”;正是由于那种染污——即尘土之类——导致了染着,因为颜色的毁损而成为玷污。污垢指“墨迹”。肤垢指盐霜等附着于皮肤表面的身体垢秽。“等”字包含了身体的其它污垢,如泪、唾液、鼻涕等。“因已执取”:是由于遍覆而执持。“能令有情染着,故称染料”:染料是能染之物,正如忿怒即是忿怒的状态。“作意令染入”:即投入其中。“为作青衣”:为了染成青色。“以菩提叶青等”:“等”字涵盖了黑色、褐色等。姜黄、岩黄等为黄色染料。紫胶、苏木汁等为红色染料。粗制红花、紫矿树胶等为浅红色染料。所染得的颜色黯淡无光。因此说“唯是色泽不清净”。“如是”即指这种染坏的颜色。“在那件衣上,染料本身极为清净,为何染出的颜色却不清净?”这是为了说明染料并无过失。因此说“然而是因为”等等。显示巴利原文
Pakatipariyodātassa cittassa āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭhabhāvadassanatthaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhavatthadassananti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pakatiparisuddhaṃ vattha’’nti. Rajādināti ettharajo nāma reṇu. Ādi-saddena aṇutajjāridhūmādikaṃ vatthassa aparisuddhikāraṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabbaso kilissati vinassati visuddhi etenāti saṃkileso, tena saṃkilesena paṃsurajādinā saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ vaṇṇavināsanena vidūsitaṃ. Malaṃ masi. Jallikā vuccati loṇapaṭalādi chaviyā upari ṭhitaṃ sarīramalaṃ. Ādisaddena sarīrajallameva assukheḷasiṅghāṇikādikaṃ tadaññamalaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Gahitattāti pariyonandhanavasena gahitattā. Rajanti sattā tenāti raṅgaṃ, raṅgameva raṅgajātaṃ yathā kopameva kopajātaṃ. Upanāmeyyāti pakkhipeyya. Nīlakatthāyāti nīlavaṇṇatthāya. Palāsanīlādiketi ādi-saddena kāḷasāmādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Haliddikakudhaselādike pītakaraṅge. Lākhāpattaṅgarasādike lohitakaraṅge. Mahārajanaloddakandulādike mandarattaraṅge. Duṭṭhu rajitavaṇṇaṃ apabhassaraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aparisuddhavaṇṇamevassā’’ti. Īdisanti durattavaṇṇaṃ. Tasmiṃ vatthe raṅgajātaṃ sayaṃ suparisuddhaṃ samānaṃ kissa hetu kena rattavaṇṇaṃ aparisuddhaṃ hotīti raṅgajātassa niddosataṃ vadati. Tenāha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi.
在阐释染污的一面时,本应以未被染污的衣为喻,此义本已明显;然而,此处通过举出被染污的衣为喻,意在探问:“是否还别有差别?”故而发问:“然而为何”等等。为显示其它义理上的差别,而说“为显精进有大果报故”等语。在此,“若说净化染污心之法,则当以染污之衣为喻”是所立命题,“为显精进有大果报”是能立理由。“正如”等是顺喻之义。“不像那种天生就黑的布那样”等是反喻之义。类似的譬喻,应了知如被垢秽所覆的铜盘等。“心亦如是”等是将譬喻之义应用于所喻。其中,“本性”指非造作的自性。“彼”即指心。而且,这是从心之状态无有差别的角度总说的。因此说“于一切”等。心是洁白的,并非染污的,因为它不与染污法相应。难道不是由唯作心,在异熟相续中得以建立殊胜吗?否则,所作的业便会坏灭,应受的业分便会失去?虽能建立,但彼之染污是轮回的所依,而非不净;不染污是还灭的所依,而非清净。然而,此处所言“被染污”,是依于能成为被染污的心而说,不是就异熟相续而言。因此说:“比丘们,此心是极光净的”,又说:“是洁白的”。至于“彼且”云云,是指它们同属一个相续,唯依一体之理而说,并非因为异熟法不与烦恼相应。或显示巴利原文
Saṃkilesapakkhaṃ dassentena asaṃkiliṭṭhameva vatthaṃ udāharitabbanti pākaṭoyamattho, saṃkiliṭṭhavatthanidassanena pana ‘‘siyā nu kho aññopi koci viseso’’ti adhippāyena pucchati ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādinā. Itaro atthavisesoti dassento ‘‘vāyāmamahapphaladassanattha’’ntiādimāha. Ettha ca saṃkiliṭṭhacittavisodhanavidhāne saṃkiliṭṭhavatthaṃ nidassatabbanti paṭiññā, vāyāmamahapphaladassanatthanti hetuattho. Yathā hītiādi anvayattho. Na tattha jātikāḷake viyātiādi byatirekattho. Sadisūdāharaṇaṃ pana malaggahitakaṃsapātiādi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ cittampītiādi opammatthassa upameyyaupanayanaṃ. Tattha pakatiyāti akittimena sabhāvena. Tanti cittaṃ. Sāmaññaggahaṇañcetaṃ cittabhāvāvisesato. Tenāha ‘‘sakalepī’’ti. Paṇḍarameva na saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ saṃkilesehi asamannāgatabhāvato. Nanu kiriyāmayacittehi vipākasantāne visesādhānaṃ labbhati, aññathā katavināsā katabbhāgamā āpajjeyyuṃ? Kiñcāpi labbhati, tassa saṃkileso vaṭṭupanissayo, asuddhi vā na hoti, asaṃkileso vivaṭṭupanissayo, visuddhi vā na hoti eva. Upakkiliṭṭhanti panetaṃ upakkilesanārahassa cittassa vasena vuttaṃ, na vipākapabandhassa. Tenāha ‘‘pabhassaramidaṃ bhikkhave citta’’nti, ‘‘paṇḍaramevā’’ti ca. Tañca khoti pana sakasantatipariyāpannatāya nesaṃ kevalaṃ ekattanayavasena vuttaṃ, na vipākadhammānaṃ kilesāsamaṅgibhāvato. Atha vā upakkiliṭṭhanti iminā upakkilesahetu tattha vijjamānaṃ visesādhānamāha, na ‘‘saṃkiliṭṭhā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 77.dukamātikā) viya taṃsamaṅgitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Visodhiyamānanti vipassanāpaññāya anukkamena sabbupakkilesehi vimociyamānaṃ. Sakkā aggamaggakkhaṇe pabhassarataraṃ kātuṃ, yato na puna upakkilissati. Evantiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanaṃ.
依令恶趣圆满的方式而行,即是“行道”。此行道本身,因烦恼的燥热、烧恼等,即为忧恼之苦;或者,鄙恶的趣向与流转,称为“恶趣”;又因为是恶趣之因,故名“恶趣”;再者,彼行道即是恶趣,因如同乾闼婆一般,或因彼所成就之故为鄙恶,且是苦的趣向,故为“恶趣”。“染污心者”:这是为了显示彼行道即是恶趣的性质,并非意在简别。因为非染污的心,不会有杀生等行为。“染污心者”:即因贪求而被完全染污的心。“奉使送信之行”:“奉使”指信使之工作,即持在家人的书信或消息前往各处;“送信行”指被差遣至各家各户的小步行;他从事这类奉使与送信之行。“营医业”:即在戒律不允许之处,因贪求而为在家众制作医药。“破僧之语”将于后文出现。“以赠竹、施钵等”:即通过赠竹、施钵、赠花等邪命方式而活命者。“一切”:即依《分别论》中所说“有非行,有非境”等,以所行圆满了一切非行与非境。显示巴利原文
Duṭṭhagatiparipūraṇavasena paṭipajjanaṃ paṭipatti. Sā eva kilesadarathapariḷāhādivasena upāyāsadukkhā, kucchitā vā gati pavatti, duggatihetūti vā duggati, duggatiyā pana paṭipattiyā gandhabbato, tassā vā nipphannabhāvato kucchito, dukkhā ca gatīti duggati. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittoti idaṃ tassā paṭipattiyā duggatibhāvadassanatthaṃ, na visesanatthaṃ. Na hi asaṃkiliṭṭhacittassa pāṇaghātādivasena pavatti. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittoti lābhāsāya sabbaso kiliṭṭhacitto . Dūteyyapahiṇagamananti dūteyyaṃ vuccati dutakammaṃ, gihīnaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā gahetvā tattha tattha gamanaṃ, pahiṇagamanaṃ gharāgharaṃ pesitassa khuddakagamanaṃ, dūteyyagamanaṃ pahiṇagamanañca gacchati. Vejjakammanti ananuññāte ṭhāne lābhāsāya gahaṭṭhānaṃ bhesajjaṃ karoti. Saṅghabhedakathā parato āgamissati. Veḷudānādīhīti veḷudānapattadānapupphadānādīhi micchājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti. Sakalampīti ‘‘atthi anācāro, atthi agocaro’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 513, 514) āgataṃ sabbampi anācāraṃ agocarañca caraṇavasena paripūreti.
在说完“乃至地狱……乃至饿鬼界”之后,接着解说其趣向饿鬼界的状况,于是又说“成为名为沙门夜叉者”等语。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nirayampi…pe… pettivisayampi gacchatī’’ti vatvā tattha pettivisayagamanaṃ dassento ‘‘samaṇayakkho nāma hotī’’tiādimāha.
在白分方面,「清净」(parisuddhanti)是指一切方面都清净,未被染污。正因为清净,所以极为洁白,即光耀,其意思就是「光辉」(pabhassara)。「唯成善染之色」(surattavaṇṇamevassāti) 就是指唯成极善所染之色。「唯成清净之色」(parisuddhavaṇṇamevassāti) 则是说,比如他的青色也应变得清净等等;基于这个意趣,才说「应知即与黑分中所说的相反」(kaṇhapakkhe vuttapaccanīkeneva veditabbā)。至于「染色料」等文句,也应依那里所说的方式来了解。关于「行道善趣」等中应说的义理,应知即与「行道恶趣」等中所说的相反。「清净心者」(parisuddhacittoti) 是指意乐清净的人。
「圆满十善业道」(dasa kusalakammapathe paripūretīti)——这句话是为了显示与黑分中「圆满十不善业道」之说相对而说的。正如在那里,通过执取贪欲(abhijjhā)、嗔恨(byāpāda)、邪见(micchādiṭṭhi),依业道相应的理趣,也意在含摄在家者那种未达业道的邪行道;同样地,在这里,也应理解为:通过执取无贪欲(anabhijjhā)、无嗔(abyāpāda)、正见(sammādiṭṭhi),显示了依无贪、无嗔、无痴而转起的在家者正行道被含摄,而不是只有已达业道的才被含摄。「人之伟大性」(manussamahantatanti) 是指在人类当中,以种姓、容貌、财富、权贵等为主的伟大状态。以十种处而超越其他诸天,这称为「天伟大性」(devamahantatā)。
因为「行道」是在与善趣结缘的语境中被说的,所以在陈述「他修习不来道」(anāgāmimaggaṃ bhāvetī)这句时,是将不来道的修习拉到此位而说的。由于取其执受时意在乐受之处,所以不包含无想有;而对于那些没有乐受的地方,则说「于十梵天界中」(dasasu vā brahmabhavanesū)等。显示巴利原文
Sukkapakkhe parisuddhanti sabbaso visuddhaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ. Parisuddhattā eva pariyodātaṃ, pabhassaranti attho. Surattavaṇṇamevassāti suṭṭhu rattavaṇṇameva assa. Parisuddhavaṇṇamevassāti nīlavaṇṇopissa parisuddho ca bhaveyyāti evamādiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kaṇhapakkhe vuttapaccanīkeneva veditabbā’’ti. Raṅgajātantiādi pana tattha vuttavaseneva veditabbaṃ. Paṭipattisugatiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭipattiduggatiādīsu vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ. Parisuddhacittoti suddhāsayo. Dasa kusalakammapathe paripūretīti idaṃ kaṇhapakkhe ‘‘dasa akusalakammapathe paripūretī’’ti vuttassa paṭipakkhadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Yathā hi tattha abhijjhābyāpādamicchādiṭṭhiggahaṇena kammapathasaṃsandananayena kammapathaṃ appattāya ca agāriyassa tathārūpāya micchāpaṭipattiyā saṅgaho icchito, evaṃ idhāpi anabhijjhāabyāpādasammādiṭṭhiggahaṇena alobhādosāmohavasena pavattā agāriyassa sammāpaṭipatti saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, na kammapathappattāvāti. Manussamahantatanti jātirūpabhogādhipateyyādivasena manussesu mahantabhāvaṃ. Dasahi ṭhānehi aññesaṃ devānaṃ abhibhavo devamahantatā. Paṭipatti sugatiyā bhājiyamānattā ‘‘anāgāmimaggaṃ bhāvetī’’ti tathā anāgāmibhāvanaṃ pāpetvā ṭhapitā. Gahitaggahaṇena sukhānubhavaṭṭhānassa adhippetattā tadabhāvato asaññibhavaṃ anādiyanto ‘‘dasasu vā brahmabhavanesū’’tiādimāha.
71 第71段. 对自己资具所起的欲贪,以「遍贪之义」(abhijjhāyanaṭṭhena) 而称为「贪欲」(abhijjhā);「遍贪」就是它的意思。对他人资具所起的欲贪,由于是不平等的贪著,所以称为「不平等贪」(visamalobho)。为了显示贪欲与不平等贪之间也有差别,才说「或者」(atha vā) 等语。
这其中,「自己的所有物以及和那相似的东西」—— 这是「适当处」(yuttaṭṭhānaṃ)。「凡是有人请求的,或者花少许力气就能得到的」—— 这是「已得处」(pattaṭṭhānaṃ)。「他人的妻子、应受尊重的妇女」—— 这是「非适当处」(ayuttaṭṭhānaṃ)。「凡是不应希求的,或者对之希求就会遭受灾祸的」—— 这是「未得处」(appattaṭṭhānaṃ)。
「长老」(theroti) 指的是大僧护长老,就是他将注释书载入贝叶的。他见到弟子们在讨论时,曾这么说。
在这部经中,因为意在显示心的染污,所以没看到将这两者(贪欲、不平等贪)分开解释的情况。因此才说「于适当」(yutte vā)等语句。
「以不正作意而生起,且于现世和未来都只会产生苦,所以没有任何贪是不能称为暴恶的。」
说「以遍贪之义」——这是指,对任何所缘,无论是适当的、不适当的、或是未得的,以遍贪、以希求的方式转起的渴爱,就称为「贪欲」,以此显示它与「贪」并无差别。因此才说「这二者意义相同,只是音节有别」(ekatthametaṃ byañjanameva nāna)。
「令坏失」(dūsetīti) 是指破坏它本性的无染,使它变得不清净。因此才说「不让光辉」(obhāsituṃ na detī)。
「愿这些众生被灭绝、被毁灭」——依据这种于众生起愤怒相而转起的心,就是嗔恨(byāpāda)所摄的「嗔恚」,这里说它有九种嗔恨事。而「忿怒」(kodho) 则还会于诸行中转起,所以有十种嗔恨事。这两者本质上都是恚(paṭigha),只是因为转起的差别才分开来说。它只是以愤怒的方式缠缚住心,就像「他曾骂我、曾打我」等等。显示巴利原文
71.Sakabhaṇḍe chandarāgo abhijjhāyanaṭṭhena abhijjhā, abhijjhāyanāti attho. Parabhaṇḍe chandarāgo visamaṃ lubbhatīti visamalobho. Evampi abhijjhāvisamalobhānaṃ viseso hotīti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha attano santakaṃ taṃsadisañca yuttaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ yācitaṃ, appakasirena vā sakkā laddhuṃ, taṃ pattaṭṭhānaṃ. Paradāragarudārāti ayuttaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ apatthaniyaṃ, yassa vā patthanāya byasanaṃ āpajjati, taṃ appattaṭṭhānaṃ. Theroti mahāsaṅgharakkhitatthero, yena aṭṭhakathā potthakaṃ āropitā. So hi antevāsikesu sākacchantesu evamāha. Sopi imasmiṃyeva sutte vinibbhogo na labbhati cittasaṃkilesassa adhippetattā. Tenāha ‘‘yutte vā’’tiādi. Ayonisomanasikāravasena uppajjanato sampatti āyatiñca dukkhasseva uppādanato na koci lobho avisamo nāma. Abhijjhāyanaṭṭhenāti yassa kassaci ārammaṇassa yuttassa ayuttassa appattassa ca abhijjāyanavasena abhipatthanāvasena ca pavattā taṇhā abhijjhāti lobhato nibbisesanti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘ekatthametaṃ byañjanameva nāna’’nti. Dūsetīti sabhāvasantaṃ asaṃkilesaṃ vināseti avisuddhaṃ karoti. Tenāha ‘‘obhāsituṃ na detī’’ti. ‘‘Ime sattā ucchijjantu vinassantū’’ti sattesu byāpajjanākārappavattiyā byāpādo navavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo vutto. Kodho pana saṅkhāresupi pavattanato dasavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo vutto. Ubhayampi paṭighameva, pavattanānattato bhinditvā vutto. Kujjhanavaseneva cittapariyonandhano ‘‘akkocchi maṃ avadhi ma’’ntiādinā.
善作(sukataṃ)即善巧地所作;能破坏那以先前造作为特征之功德的人,如同用干布擦拭身上附着的水一般,是‘伤善’(makkho)。正因如此,他以涂抹他人功德的意义,而被称为‘伤善’(makkho)。现在,为了详细说明‘于出家者’等略说的义理,便说出了‘出家者亦’等等。以坐谈、说法、遍说法等方式来讲述法,称为‘说法理趣’(dhammakathānayo);或者,也可以理解为一味等法理。对于‘七部论’(pakaraṇaṃ satta pakaraṇāni)的‘善巧’(kosallaṃ),就是‘于说法理趣及论书的善巧’(dhammakathānayapakaraṇakosallaṃ)。‘等’字则含摄了于律藏次第及四大部经典中的善巧。‘不恭敬者’(acittīkatoti)就是没有恭敬心的人。‘正如这样’——即用这首偈颂来显示:正如伤善这样染污心,悭嫉(paḷāso)也这样染污心,所以它们都属于染污。‘趣处不定’(aniyatā gati)是因为没有固定的趣向和决定性。‘等’字则含摄了‘看见久出家(cirapabbajita)的上座比丘便凌驾他,说“你在这个教法里出家,我也出家了;你只持戒,我不也一样吗?”’这样一类的话。‘争胜执担者’(yugaggāhāgīti)就是将不平等的看成平等的,抱着‘你和我有什么区别’的想法,而执取平起平坐的人。‘讥嫌’(khīyanā)就是‘嫉妒’(usūyanā)。隐藏自己的成就,是由于不能忍受那成就与别人共享,所以直接说为‘不能忍受与他人共享’。因为抓住了原因,结果也就被抓住了。如果不是这样,用别的方式表露自己的人就是伪诈者,也被人称为‘奸商’。蛇口的鱼线是一种大鱼,名叫‘广长鱼’(āyatanamaccho),因此说‘名为广长鱼’等等。‘住学徒者’(baddhacaroti)就是近住的学童(antevāsika)。显示巴利原文
Suṭṭhu kataṃ karaṇaṃ sukataṃ, tassa pubbakāritālakkhaṇassa guṇassa vināsano udakapuñchaniyā viya sarīrānugataṃ udakaṃ puñchanto makkho. Tathā hi so paresaṃ guṇānaṃ makkhanaṭṭhena ‘‘makkho’’ti vuccati. Idāni anagāriyassa vātiādinā saṅkhepena vuttatthaṃ vitthārena dassetuṃ ‘‘anagāriyopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nisinnakathāparikathādivasena dhammassa kathā dhammakathānayo, ekattādidhammanīti eva vā. Pakaraṇaṃ satta pakaraṇāni, tattha kosallaṃ dhammakathānayapakaraṇakosallaṃ. Ādi-saddena vinayakkame catūsu mahānikāyesu ca kosallaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Acittīkatoti cittīkārarahito. Yathā cāyanti iminā yathāyaṃ makkho cittaṃ dūseti, evaṃ paḷāsopi cittaṃ dūseti, tasmā upakkilesoti dasseti. Aniyatā gati niyāmokkamanābhāvato. Ādi-saddena ‘‘rattaññū cirapabbajite puggale ajjhottharitvā ‘tvampi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajito, ahampi pabbajito, tvampi sīlamatte ṭhito ahampī’ti’’ evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Yugaggāhagāhīti ‘‘tava vā mama vā ko viseso’’ti asamampi samaṃ katvā samadhuraggāhagaṇhanako. Khīyanā usūyanā. Attano sampattiyā nigūhanaṃ tassa parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanena hotīti ‘‘parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ asahamānaṃ’’icceva vuttaṃ. Kāraṇe hi gahite phalampi gahitameva hotīti. Aññathā attano pavedanakapuggalo kerāṭiko, ‘‘nekatikavāṇijo’’tipi vadanti. Sappamukhā macchavālā ekā macchajāti āyatanamaccho. Tenāha ‘‘āyatanamaccho nāmā’’tiādi. Baddhacaroti antevāsī.
或者,因其本性全然不受折伏,犹如负重之物般僵硬,似不弯之杖,是个不低头之人,故名为'如负重者'。'更增上作者',是指无论他人作了恶行或善行,他都要再增上、加倍去造作的人。为了自身打扮等目的,而受用他人所作的饰品等,或随力学习、讲述。虽然确有因摄受二部等而生起的、可亲近之慢,但因其属染污一方,故此处说'不依附慢'。显示巴利原文
Sabbaso amadditasabhāvena vā tabharitabhattasadisassa thaddhabhāvassa anonamitadaṇḍasadisatāya paggahitasiraanivātavuttikārassa ca karaṇato vā tabharita…pe… karaṇo. Taduttarikaraṇoti yaṃ yena kataṃ duccaritaṃ vā sucaritaṃ vā, taduttari, tassa dviguṇaṃ vā karaṇo. Attano maṇḍanādiatthaṃ parena kataṃ alaṅkārādiṃ. Pariyāpuṇāti vā katheti vā attano balānurūpaṃ. Kāmaṃ nikāyadvayaggahaṇādivasena pavatto sevitabbamāno eva, tathāpissa saṃkilesapakkhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘mānaṃ anissāyā’’ti.
'凭抬高自己',即通过'我是优胜者'等膨胀自心。先将自己与他人等齐,而后生起自以为超胜于彼的过度之慢。'以我执为行相',是指基于出身等而产生的沉溺行相,此从义理上说即是慢。放逸,是同样转起的心念。显示巴利原文
Uṇṇativasenāti ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā cittassa paggahaṇavasena. Pubbe kenaci attānaṃ sadisaṃ katvā pacchā tato adhikato dahanato uppajjanako atimāno. Madaggahaṇākāro jātiādiṃ paṭicca majjanākāro, sopi atthato māno eva. Pamādo tathāpavatto cittuppādo.
‘因此,从贪开始揭示’,提出此问,是为了说明为何将贪置于最前。‘由最初生起’是指,于诸生存处中,它都是最先生起的。正如有情众生对于所证得的禅那等殊胜境界进行省察,他们对于已获得的投生之处所生起的爱着,也总是位居第一。所以说‘一切众生’等。‘其余随缘生起’是说,嗔等其他烦恼,是随着各自的缘而生起的,不像贪那样可以断定‘此后必是某者’,它们没有固定的生起顺序,这便是此义。那么,心的随烦恼就只有这十六种吗,还是另有其他?为了显示还有其他随烦恼,应对此问,所以才说‘na ca ete’等。既然如此,为何此处只列出这些呢?为显明(此乃举要之)法,便说‘etena pana…pe… veditabbā’。应知,由此已含摄了昏沉睡眠、掉举悔恨、疑、自赞毁他、惊悚、胆怯、无惭无愧、极欲、恶欲、多欲等。显示巴利原文
Tasmā lobhamādiṃ katvā dassetīti lobhassa ādito gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetukāmo pucchati. Paṭhamuppattitoti tattha tattha bhave sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppajjanato. Sattānañhi yathādhigataṃ jhānādivisesaṃ ārabbha paccavekkhaṇā viya yathāladdhaṃ upapatibhavaṃ ārabbha nikanti eva. Tenāha ‘‘sabbasattāna’’ntiādi. Yathāsambhavaṃ itareti itare byāpādādayo yathāpaccayaṃ uppajjanti, lobhassa viya ādito asukassa anantaraṃ asukoti vā na nesaṃ niyamo atthīti attho. Kiṃ pana ete soḷaseva cittassa upakkilesā, udāhu aññepi santīti anuyogaṃ sandhāya aññepi santīti dassento ‘‘na ca ete’’tiādimāha. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ettakā eva idha vuttāti. Nayadassanavasenāti dassento āha ‘‘etena pana…pe… veditabbā’’ti. Tena thinamiddhauddhaccakukkucca-vicikicchā-attukkaṃsana-paravabbhanachambhitattā- bhīrukatā-ahirikānottappa-atticchatā-pāpicchatā-mahicchatādayo saṅgahitāti veditabbaṃ.
72 ‘揭示了杂染之后’:通过显示杂染的状况,将概要所说的杂染以分别的方式揭示出来之后。‘显示清净’之处,亦可以同样的方式理解。‘如此了知后’:乃是以加行慧及下二道(初果与二果)的智慧,从自性、集、灭、灭的方法这四个方面,如实了知‘贪欲与不正当的贪,必定是心的随烦恼’之后。‘断除’在此处特指究竟断,因此他说‘以正断的方式,由圣道断除’。‘由圣道’,此处特指由不来道断除。因为在此经的所有场合中,所意指的断除,都是由不来道来断除的。‘烦恼次第’在此处是指诸烦恼的解说顺序。‘道次第’则既是四种圣道的解说次第,也是依照那种解说的修行次第,又是依于那种修行而生起圣道的次第。显示巴利原文
72.Saṃkilesaṃdassetvāti saṃkiliṭṭhavattanidassanena saṅkhepena vuttaṃ saṃkilesaṃ vibhāgena dassetvā. Vodānaṃ dassentoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Evaṃ jānitvāti ‘‘abhijjhā visamalobho ekanteneva cittassa uppakkileso’’ti sabhāvato samudayato nirodhato nirodhūpāyato ca pubbabhāgapaññāya ceva heṭṭhimamaggadvayapaññāya ca jānitvā. Pajahatīti ettha accantappahānameva adhippetanti dassento ‘‘samucchedappahānavasena ariyamaggena pajahatī’’ti āha. Ariyamaggenāti anāgāmimaggena. Tena hi pahānaṃ idha sabbavāresu adhippetaṃ. Kilesapaṭipāṭi idha kilesānaṃ desanākkamo. Maggapaṭipāṭipana catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ desanākkamopi tāya desanāya paṭipajjanakkamopi tāya paṭipattiyā uppattikkamopi. Tattha ye ye kilesā yena yena maggena pahīyanti, maggapaṭipāṭiṃ anoloketvā tesaṃ tesaṃ kilesānaṃ tena tena maggena pahānadassanaṃ kilesapaṭipāṭi na kilesānaṃ uppattikkamo idha desanākkamo cāti dassento ‘‘abhijjhā visamalobho’’tiādimāha. Yena yena pana maggena ye ye kilesā pahīyanti maggānupubbiyā, tena tena maggena tesaṃ tesaṃ kilesānaṃ pahānadassanaṃ maggapaṭipāṭiyā pahānadassananti dassento ‘‘sotāpattimaggenā’’tiādimāha.
而在此处,即是指‘诸比丘,那位比丘’等经文所说的断除节。‘这些烦恼’,指的便是如上所述的那些烦恼。它们或是入流道所断除的,或是其余诸道所断除的,这是依据下文所显示的道次第而说。其中,那些第三道所断除的烦恼,应该由不来道断除,这已无需多言。然而,对于那些在此处被涵盖的下道所断之烦恼,想在后文中说明其理由,却不取最上道所断的烦恼,为何只取第三道所断的呢?因此说‘这是此处依传承而来的意趣’,意思是:这便是依于此经在此处的师承解说方式而来的义理与真义。为了要在后文中说明下道所断之烦恼在此被涵盖的理由,并显示不取最上道所断之烦恼的合理性,所以又说‘而它’等。‘以它’指的是以第四道。‘其余的’则指嗔恚等。‘那些也’是就覆等烦恼而说的。‘那些令它们生起的心’所指的,是那些能令覆等烦恼生起的心。其中,令覆、恼、嫉、悭生起的,是两种嗔恚心;特别是,那些以五种欲贪而成为谄与诳的人,而这五种欲贪正是——显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāneti ‘‘sa kho so, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’tiādinā āgato imasmiṃ pahānavāre. Ime kilesāti ime yathāvuttā kilesā. Sotāpattimaggavajjhā vā hontu sesamaggavajjhā vāheṭṭhā dassitamaggapaṭipāṭivasena. Tattha pana ye tatiyamaggavajjhā, tesaṃ anāgāmimaggeneva pahāne vattabbaṃ natthi, yesaṃ panettha heṭṭhimamaggavajjhānaṃ idha saṅgahe kāraṇaṃ pacchā vattukāmena aggamaggavajjhānaṃ anādiyitvā kasmā tatiyamaggavajjhānameva gahaṇaṃ katanti āha ‘‘ayamettha paveṇimaggāgato sambhavo’’ti, ayaṃ imassa suttassa etasmiṃ ṭhāne ācariyapaveṇiyā kathāmaggo tato āgato atthasambhavo atthatatvanti attho. Tattha heṭṭhimamaggavajjhānaṃ idha saṅgahe kāraṇaṃ pacchā vattukāmo aggamaggavajjhānaṃ aggahaṇe yuttiṃ dassento ‘‘so cā’’tiādimāha. Tenāti catutthamaggena. Sesānanti byāpādādīnaṃ . Yepīti makkhādike sandhāyāha. Taṃsamuṭṭhāpakacittānanti tesaṃ makkhādīnaṃ samuṭṭhāpakacittuppādānaṃ. Tattha makkha-paḷāsa-issā-macchariya-samuṭṭhāpakaṃ paṭighadvayacittaṃ, visesato pañcakāmaguṇalobhena saṭho māyāvī ca hoti, pañcakāmaguṇikarāgo ca anāgāmimaggeneva niravasesato pahīyati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃsamuṭṭhāpakacittānaṃ appahīnattā’’ti. Tepi suppahīnā hontīti sambandho. Tanti paṭhamamaggeneva pahānaṃ pubbāparena na sandhiyati ‘‘yathodhi kho’’ti ettha odhivacanassa maggattayavācakattā. Ratanattaye aveccappasādo nāma ariyakantasīlaṃ viya sotāpannassa aṅgāni, te ca pahānato pacchā niddiṭṭhā, tasmā idha vuttappahānaṃ vikkhambhanapahānamevāti keci vadanti. Tesaṃ icchāmattameva yathāvuttapahānasseva vasena aveccappasādānaṃ odhiso pahānassa vibhāvitattā, svāyamattho heṭṭhā yuttitopi pakāsitoyeva.
74 应当逐词配合。因为即使对每一种随烦恼,就其自性等方面进行观察,也能成为出离之门,而这一点前文也已作注释。在宣说了以阿那含道断除之后,由于提到了“净信”,所以接着说“以阿那含道获得了出世间的净信”。如果这样,为什么又说“世间净信生起”呢?因为通过“彼世尊是如此这般……”等方式生起的净信是世间的,只有以涅槃为所缘的才是出世间的净信。借由“彼世尊是如此……”等语句来显示世间净信,再借由“证净”一词来显示出世间净信,如此即显示世间与出世间相杂的净信。所谓证净,是指如实了知三宝功德后而生起的净信。然而,由于它是依道而生,不为任何所动摇、所破坏,因此说“以不动、不坏”。其中,出世间的证净对于佛功德等能彻底摧破愚痴,在那里是以作用的方式转起;世间的证净则是以所缘的方式,缘取那些功德而生起。那种方式,即它生起的方式。随念处,即随念的业处。显示巴利原文
74.Ekamekena padena yojetabbaṃ, yato ekamekassapi upakkilesassa sabhāvādito dassanaṃ niyyānamukhaṃ hoti, tathā ceva heṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Anāgāmimaggavasena pahānaṃ vatvā pasādassa uddhaṭattā vuttaṃ ‘‘anāgāmimaggena lokuttarappasādo āgato’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘lokiyo uppajjatī’’ti vuttanti? ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinayappavattassa lokiyattā. Nibbānārammaṇo eva hi lokuttaro pasādo. ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā’’tiādivacanena lokiyaṃ, aveccappasādavacanena lokuttaranti lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ pasādaṃ dassento. Avecca ratanattayaguṇe yāthāvato ñatvā pasādo aveccappasādo. So pana yasmā maggenāgatattā kenaci akampaniyo appadhaṃsiyo ca hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘acalena accutenā’’ti. Tattha lokuttaro sabbaso buddhaguṇādīsu sammohaṃ viddhaṃsento tattha kiccato pavattati, itaro ārammaṇavasena te ārabbha. Taṃ vidhinti taṃ tassa uppannappakāraṃ. Anussatiṭṭhānānīti anussatikammaṭṭhānāni.
75 “喜等”(Somanassādīti):以“等”字包含智等。因为盗贼经常往来之处在于边境,所以举边境为喻。恰如国王观察道:“在某处,这些盗贼和那些盗贼如此这般地被消灭了。”这里同样是在观察。显示巴利原文
75.Somanassādīti ādi-saddena ñāṇādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Corānaṃ abhiṇhaṃ sañcaraṇaṭṭhānatāya paccantaggahaṇaṃ. Paccavekkhatoti ‘‘asukasmiñca ṭhāne ime cime corā evañca evañca vināsitā’’ti paccavekkhato rañño viya.
“Yo yo odhi yathodhi”:yathā一词用于表达遍取之意,kho一词表示决定。为显示此义,便说“依各自的限定,只有四种”等,以此表明在“已断”(vanta)等词中也应作决定。为了展开略说的“依各自的限定”之义,接着开始宣说“两种限定”等。其中,“yaṃmaggavajjhā”是指应由该道无余断除的烦恼。因为依无余断除故,各道所应断的烦恼互不混杂;否则,若依各自的限定,将上道所应断的烦恼由下道断除,那么那些已断的堕恶趣性等便是由它们所断,如此在断除上便会造成混杂。因此,“那些即已断”一句在此处也是同样的道理。“Tatuttaripi”是指从那种作为断除之因的喜悦生起之后,更向上。由于下三道对于所敌对之法只是分限地予以断除,因此它们被称为“有分限”(odhi)。“Te hi”等便是对所说之义的展开。这位比丘是指阿那含,因此说“由下三道所断除的”。显示巴利原文
Yo yo odhi yathodhi. Yathā-saddo byāpanicchāyaṃ, kho saddo avadhāraṇeti dassento ‘‘sakasakaodhivasena cattameva hotī’’tiādimāha. Tena ‘‘vanta’’ntiādīsupi avadhāretabbanti dasseti. Sakasakaodhivasenāti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘dve odhī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yaṃmaggavajjhāti yena maggena anavasesato pahātabbā. Anavasesappahānavasena hi taṃtaṃmaggavajjhānaṃ kilesānaṃ tadaññamaggavajjhehi asammissatā, aññathā ye sakasakaodhivasena uparimaggavajjhā, te heṭṭhimamaggehi pahīnāpāyagamanīyādisabhāvā eva tehi pahīyantīti pahānavasena sammissā siyuṃ. Tena teyeva pahīnā hontīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tatuttaripīti tato pahānanimittasomanassuppattito uddhampi. Paṭipakkhesu odhiso pavattikiccattā odhīti heṭṭhā tayo maggā vuccanti. Te hītiādi vuttassevatthassa vivaraṇaṃ. Imassa bhikkhunoti anāgāmiṃ sandhāyāha. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhāmaggattayena catta’’nti.
有些人执取全部四种,为了显示并非如此,而说“vanta”。因为,凡为某者所吐弃,他便不会再取回。由此而说“依不取之相而显示”。即使吐弃了,也可能仍有少许残留黏着,为了显示并非如此,而说“mutta”。由此而说“依从相续中解脱而显示”。即使解脱了,也可能如同某些解脱束缚的果报那样,还停留在某处,为了显示并非如此,而说“pahīna”。由此而说“依于任何处皆不停留而显示”。有些未善加舍离的,又会被取回,而善加舍离的才称为“paṭinissaṭṭha”;同样地,为了显示由观照所舍离的犹如被取回一般,而由道所断除的称为“paṭinissaṭṭha”。由此而说“依已取者的舍离而显示”。并非如懦夫那般背向而舍离,而是正面地舍离,为了显示这一点,而说“paṭinissaṭṭha”。由此而说“或面向”等。应亲近的:因为期求自利之人,必定应当证得。由于能持护:因为能持护具足者免堕恶趣。典籍称为“veda”,因为“人们依此而知晓”;依诸明、诸智而行者,为“vedagū”。“Abhijaññā”即能了知。“Vedajātā”即显示巴利原文
Keci cattampi gaṇhanti, nayidamevanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vanta’’nti vuttaṃ. Na hi yaṃ yena vantaṃ, so puna taṃ ādiyati. Tenāha ‘‘anādiyanabhāvadassanavasenā’’ti. Vantampi kiñci sasantatilaggaṃ siyā, nayidamevanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘mutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘santatito vinimocanavasenā’’ti. Muttampi kiñci muttabandhanā viya phalaṃ kuhiñci tiṭṭhati, na evamidanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘pahīna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kvaci anavaṭṭhānadassanavasenā’’ti. Yathā kiñci dunnissaṭṭhaṃ puna ādāya sammadeva nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhanti vuccati, evaṃ vipassanāya nissaṭṭhaṃ ādinnasadisaṃ maggena pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ nāma hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭinissaṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ādinnapubbassa paṭinissaggadassanavasenā’’ti. Na kāpurisena viya parammukhena nissaṭṭhaṃ , atha kho abhimukheneva nissaṭṭhanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭinissaṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paṭimukhaṃ vā’’tiādi. Upagantabbatoti attano hitasukhaṃ paccāsīsantena ekantena adhigantabbato. Dhāraṇatoti taṃsamaṅgīnaṃ apāyapātato sandhāraṇena. Gantho‘‘vedo’’ti vuccati ‘‘vidanti etenā’’ti, vedehi ñāṇehi gato paṭipannoti vedagū. Abhijaññāti jāneyya. Vedajātāti uppannasomanassā. Ñāṇaṃ ‘‘vedo’’ti vuccati ‘‘veditabbaṃ vedetī’’ti. Somanassaṃ ‘‘vedo’’ti vuccati ārammaṇarasaṃ vindati anubhavatīti.
“Uppanna”:依证净而生起的。所说的“veda”,即“喜与喜俱之智”,正是如前所说的那样。“Atthaveda”:于义——即于果,有明。“Dhammaveda”:于法——即于因,有明。因此说“证净之因”等。为了以经文明示此处“义”与“法”二词是因果的同义词这一意义,而说“曾如是说”等。“那义与那法”:即所说的证净之因,以及如前所说的烦恼断除。由义法之利益所生的明:即如前所说,由义法之利益所生、称为喜俱之智的明。“Pāmojja”:指微弱的喜。以观察行之相而转起:由此应知,此处观察本身因其无过失性而被称为法。“Pīti jāyatī”:指依他缘的强力喜。心满意足者:因带来轻安的广大喜之激流而心满足者。“Kāya”:指名身。止息了不安者:因烦恼热恼的远离而善加止息了不安。此处意指由观察为因的心等持,故说“如安止般不动而住”。显示巴利原文
Uppannanti aveccappasādaṃ nissāya uppannaṃ. Vuttappakārameva vedanti ‘‘somanassaṃ somanassamayañāṇañcā’’ti evaṃ vuttappakārameva. Atthavedanti atthe hetuphale vedaṃ. Dhammavedanti dhamme hetumhi vedaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aveccappasādassa hetu’’ntiādi. Idha dhammatthasaddā hetuphalapariyāyāti imamatthaṃ pāḷiyā eva dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tameva atthañca dhammañcāti attho dhammoti ca vuttaṃ aveccappasādanimittaṃ yathāvuttaṃ kilesappahānañca. Atthadhammānisaṃsabhūtaṃ vedanti yathāvuttaatthadhammānisaṃsabhūtaṃ somanassamayañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ vedañca. Pāmojjanti taruṇapītiṃ āha. Paccavekkhaṇākārappavattenāti etena paccavekkhaṇā evettha anavajjasabhāvatāya dhammoti vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pīti jāyatīti parappaccayaṃ balavapītimāha. Pīṇitamanassāti passaddhiāvahehi uḷārehi pītivegehi tittacittassa. Kāyoti nāmakāyo. Vūpasantadarathoti kilesapariḷāhānaṃ dūrībhāvena suṭṭhu upasantadaratho. Paccavekkhaṇahetukaṃ cittassa samādhānaṃ idha adhippetanti āha ‘‘appitaṃ viya acalaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
76 诚然,“我具足对佛的不坏净信,我具足对法、对僧的不坏净信”,这也同样只是显示其审视方式运作情形的展示。然而,这一句特别用来展示于三宝所生之喜悦等。而“如分齐”等语句,也是附带差别地展示审视方式的语句,基于这一用意,才说“现在,如分齐……乃至……展示之后”。再者,四种分齐都可以理解为是藉由展示审视方式以及展示喜悦等功德而说的,因为于两处都论述了此二者。虽然圣道仅是一个心识刹那,不会再次生起,但由于此道彻底断除了对立面,具足此道者便成为不退转法,也就以该道所具的戒等体性来称呼他,故说:“展示与他不还道相应的圣戒蕴”等。如“那些世尊是如是法者”等句中,此处的“法”字是定的同义词,故说“展示圣定蕴与圣慧蕴”。实际上,它令相应的诸法在同一所缘上不散动、不纷乱、不扩散,平等而正确地安立、持守它们,因此称为“法”,即是值得被称为“能持守者”。种种不同,即多种类别的意思。所谓的障碍,要么是对未得者而言不能获得,要么是对已得者而言会退失,为了说明这两种情况于此皆不存在,而说“或对于道……”等。显示巴利原文
76. Kāmaṃ ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhi, dhamme saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhī’’ti idampi tassā paccavekkhaṇāya pavattiākārapakāsanameva, idaṃ pana visesato ratanattaye uppannasomanassādippakāsanapadaṃ. ‘‘Yathodhi kho panā’’ti idampi savisesaṃ paccavekkhaṇākārappakāsanapadanti adhippāyena ‘‘idāni yathodhi…pe… pakāsetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cattāropi pana vārā paccavekkhaṇākārappakāsanavasena ceva somanassādiānisaṃsadassanavasena ca vuttāti sakkā viññātuṃ ubhayatthāpi ubhayassa vuttattā. Yadipi ariyamaggo ekacittakkhaṇiko na puna uppajjati, paṭipakkhassa pana tena suppahīnattā taṃsamaṅgī aparihānadhammo taṃsīlādibhāveneva vuccatīti āha ‘‘tassa anāgāmimaggasampayuttaṃ sīlakkhandhaṃ dassetī’’tiādi. ‘‘Evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13; ma. ni. 3.197-198; saṃ. ni. 5.378) viya idha dhamma-saddo samādhipariyāyoti āha ‘‘samādhikkhandhaṃ paññākkhandhañca dassetī’’ti. Tathā hi so sampayuttadhamme ekārammaṇe avikkhipamāne avippakiṇṇe avisaṭe katvā samaṃ, sammā ca ādahanto tathā te dhāretīti ca vattabbataṃ arahatīti dhammoti ca vuccati. Anekarūpānanti anekappakārānaṃ. Antarāyo nāma appaṭiladdhassa vā alabbhanavasena, paṭiladdhassa vā parihānavasena, tadubhayampi idha natthīti dassento ‘‘maggassa vā’’tiādimāha. Nevassa taṃ hoti antarāyāyāti tassa anāgāmino piṇḍapātabhojanaṃ neva hoti antarāyāya ukkaṃsagatāya paccavekkhaṇāya paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanato. Tañcassā ukkaṃsagamanaṃ hatapaṭipakkhattāti dassento ‘‘maggena visuddhacittattā’’ti āha.
「此处」即指这无有障碍的状况。这心清净本身就是它的原因。而且,“那对于他绝非障碍”一语,便证明了前面所说的断除纯粹是由阿那含道所成。因为阿那含已彻底断除欲贪,由于不再有味爱,这样的团食受用,对于证得最上道无论如何也不会成为障碍。世尊说“比丘们,譬如布”时,是将自己最初所举的布喻连结起来。水因无泥、苔、藻等污垢而清澈,有则浑浊,所以说「清澈」即是「清净」。布因离垢的色泽而闪耀,因其光辉而可说为洁净,故说「洁净」来自「光辉性」。绑扎火炬:犹如以薄泥涂层等绑扎炭盆,使其不被木片、炭火等弄碎。如同云层因与高空风带摩擦而发出闪电,纯粹由风带摩擦所生的光芒便是火炬的光芒;而这种光是由两股风带急速摩擦所生,因此从其成因上说,「风速」即称为「火炬」。显示巴利原文
Etthāti etasmiṃ antarāyābhāve. Etadeva visuddhacittattameva kāraṇaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘nevassa taṃ hoti antarāyāyā’’ti iminā heṭṭhā vuttappahānaṃ anāgāmimaggenevāti siddhaṃ hoti. Anāgāmino hi sabbaso kāmarāgo pahīno hoti, rasataṇhāya abhāvato tādisapiṇḍapātaparibhogo aggamaggādhigame kathañcipi antarāyāya na hotīti. ‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vattha’’nti vadanto bhagavāādimhi attanā upanītavatthūpamaṃ anusandheti. Udakassa acchabhāvo paṅkasevālapaṇakādimalābhāvena pasannatāya, tabbipariyāyato bahalatāti āha ‘‘acchanti vippasanna’’nti. Vaṇṇanibhāya vigatasaṃkilesatāya samujjalanaṃ pabhassaratāya vatthassa, taṃ pariyodātanti vattabbataṃ labhatīti āha ‘‘pariyodātaṃ pabhassaratāyā’’ti. Ukkaṃ bandheyyāti aṅgārakapallaṃ yathā dārughaṭikaṅgārādikena na bhijjati, evaṃ tanumattikālepādinā bandheyya. Meghapaṭalato verambhavātadhārāsaṅghaṭṭanato vijjutā viya kevalaṃ vātadhārāsaṅghaṭṭanajanitā pabhā ukkāpabhā, sā pana yasmā dvinnaṃ vātadhārānaṃ vegasambhūtasaṅghaṭṭanahetukā, tasmā kāraṇavasena ‘‘vātavego ukkā’’ti vuttaṃ.
77 于“随顺连结而……”等句中:与所发起的教说相应的连结,称为「随顺连结」,即依此随顺连结的方式。如同为证明一理,先在开头显示其对立面,这也是令所发起的教说得以正确安立的相应教说,正如“摄受联结之应用”中的“异法回转”,应当如此理解。为了详细说明方才简略提及的“教说是随顺连结而来的”,并藉此机会展示其他的连结,故说“因为有三(种连结)……”。向外,是指于外在的事物上。无有怖畏,是指没有贪爱与邪见所引起的怖畏。以所阐明的经为基础,是指以“比丘,于此有一类……”等所阐明的经为基础。以任何法,是指在戒等清净法,以及不忍等杂染法中,任取一种法。六种通智被提及,由此示现了“或以相应法(连结)”这一种情况;其余则示现了“或以对立面(连结)”这一种情况。因为对于不忍,锯喻的教说是它的对立法;同样,对于邪见,“这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我”——以如是空性之相而对治。其余二者也是同样的道理。前文已说“当心染污时,恶趣可期”,那是关于杂染的教说。一切,即毫无剩余。以一切方式,显示巴利原文
77.Yathānusandhivasenātiādimhi uṭṭhitadesanāya anurūpā anusandhi yathānusandhi, tassā vasena. Byatirekadassanaṃ viya hi sādhetabbassa ādimhi uṭṭhitadesanāya paṭipakkhadassanampi anurūpadesanāva sammadeva patiṭṭhāpanabhāvato, yathā taṃ āvattahārayojanāyaṃ visabhāgadhammāvattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārento tappasaṅgena itarepi anusandhī dassetuṃ ‘‘tayo hī’’tiādimāha. Bahiddhāti bāhiresu vatthūsu. Asati paritassanāti taṇhādiṭṭhiparitassanābhāvo. Vissajjitasuttavasenāti ‘‘idha bhikkhu ekaccassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.242) vissajjitasuttavasena. Yena dhammenāti sīlādivodānadhammesu akkhantiyādisaṃkilesadhammesu ca yena yena dhammena. Cha abhiññā āgatāti iminā ‘‘anurūpadhammavasena vā’’ti vuttavikappaṃ dasseti, sesehi ‘‘paṭipakkhavasena vā’’ti vuttavikappaṃ. Akkhantiyā hi kakacūpamovādo (ma. ni. 1.222) paṭipakkho, tathā diṭṭhiyā ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti evaṃ paṭibhāgā suññatākārena. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Citte saṃkiliṭṭhe duggati pāṭikaṅkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.70) heṭṭhā kilesadesanā āgatā. Sabboti anavaseso. Sabbākārenāti ādīnavānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇapuggaladosajānanādinā sabbappakārena.
78 由“为了断除嗔恨,应当修习慈”等教导,慈等法门是嗔恨、害意、不满与贪染的对治法。因为世尊通过“他有‘此存在’”等开示,将阿那含证得最上圣道的四谛禅修引导至究竟的顶点,所以为了阐明此义,便说“现在为他……”等语。显示巴利原文
78. ‘‘Mettā bhāvetabbā byāpādassa pahānāyā’’tiādivacanato (a. ni. 9.1) mettādayo byāpādavihesāratirāgānaṃ paṭipakkhā. Yasmā ‘‘so atthī’’tiādinā bhagavatā anāgāmino aggamaggādhigamanaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā kathitaṃ, tasmā taṃ dassento ‘‘idānissā’’tiādimāha.
“梵住法” —— 即梵住本身及与梵住俱行的诸法。因此说“以名称而……”。“安立之后”应这样理解:先引据过来,再作关联。因为在此类语境中,“名称”所指正是四种非色蕴。依此方法,便揭示了依止于大种的一切其余所造色,以及除应断的渴爱之外、三界中所有诸法的掌握方式。“此存在,即如理安立的名色”:这是就自性而真实存在,借由智慧亲自现证、如实通达,故说为“被如理安立”。正因如此,文中说“至此,他已完成了对苦谛的安立”。这句话含决定之义,也就是说,如同世间共许的众生、女人、男人等,它在究竟意义上并非不存在,而是真实存在;却不像外道所妄计的自性、实体、命者、身等,在究竟意义上并不存在。所谓“了知”:在修行前期,是通过相状、作用等方式,以摄持和分别而作的多面了知;在修行后期,则是通过遍知证悟而通达地了知。所谓“绝对低劣者”是指不善法,因为它们在现在与未来都成为苦的根源,其中又以渴爱为最,所以说“在通达苦之集时,他了知‘有低劣者’”。“殊胜”是指由自身之因而被提升至首要地位,基于此义。显示巴利原文
Brahmavihāradhammeti brahmavihāre ceva brahmavihārasahagatadhamme ca. Tenāha ‘‘nāmavasenā’’ti. Vavatthapetvāti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Nāmantipi hi īdisesu ṭhānesu cattāro arūpino khandhā vuccanti. Iminā nayenāti etena bhūtanissitānaṃ sesupādāyadhammānaṃ sabbesampi pahātabbataṇhāvajjānaṃ tebhūmakadhammānaṃ pariggahavidhiṃ ulliṅgeti. Sabhāvato vijjamānaṃ taṃ attapaccakkhaṃ katvā ñāṇena yāthāvato paṭivijjhiyamānataṃ upādāya ‘‘atthi ida’’nti yathāvavatthāpitaṃ nāmarūpaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘ettāvatānena dukkhasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hotī’’ti. Sāvadhāraṇañcetaṃ vacanaṃ, lokasamaññāsiddhaṃ sattaitthipurisādi viya, ito bāhirakaparikappitaṃ pakatiādi drabyādi jīvādi kāyādi viya ca na paramatthato natthi, atthevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pajānātīti pubbabhāge tāva lakkhaṇarasādivasena ceva paṭiggahavibhāgavasena ca pakārato jānāti, aparabhāge pana pariññābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhanto jānāti. Ekantahīnā nāma akusaladhammā sampati āyatiñca dukkhamūlattā, tatthāpi visesato taṇhāti āha ‘‘dukkhassa samudayaṃ paṭivijjhanto atthi hīnantipajānātī’’ti. Attano paccayehi padhānabhāvaṃ nītattā paṇītanti iminā atthena ariyamaggova ‘‘paṇīta’’nti vuccatīti āha ‘‘pahānupāyaṃ vicinanto atthi paṇītanti pajānātī’’ti. ‘‘Uttamaṭṭhena ca paṇīta’’nti vuccamāne nirodhasaccassapi saṅgaho siyā, tassa pana padantarena saṅgahitattā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo. Appamaññāmukhena vipassanābhinivesasseva katattā ‘‘brahmavihārasaññāgatassā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sabbassapi tebhūmakassa saññāgatassā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Na cettha asaṅgaho tassāpi saññāya āgatabhāvato. Lokaṃ uttaritvā samatikkamitvā nissaritvā visaṃyuttaṃ hutvā ṭhitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘uttari nissaraṇaṃ nibbāna’’nti.
“以四种方式” —— 即以“有低劣的”等四种分类。观慧属于随觉智,作用为了知;道慧属于法智、证悟智,作用为照见。这是法的自性所成。为阐明此理,便这样说:“因为观慧了知四圣谛,因为道慧照见四圣谛”。所谓“依《怖畏恐惧经》中已说的方式”,是指该经注释书中自己解释过的义理与这里的经文有相似之处,故引述过来说:“心从欲漏……乃至……他彻底了知”。在这里,当世尊说“心从欲漏解脱……乃至……心从无明漏解脱”、“生已尽”等语时,实际所指正是第四道;所以注释书前文所说的“这在上文其实是针对第四道而指出的,因此很合理”,实为精当之论。显示巴利原文
Catūhiākārehīti ‘‘atthi hīna’’ntiādīhi catūhi pakārehi. Anvayañāṇatāya anubodhabhūtāya vipassanāpaññāya jānanattho dhammañāṇatāya paṭivedhabhūtāya maggapaññāya dassanattho sabhāvasiddhoti dassento ‘‘vipassanāpaññāya cattāri saccāni jānanato maggapaññāya passato’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhayabherave vuttanayenevāti bhayabheravasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ attanā vuttaatthavacanatthapāṭhena idha pāṭhassa sadisattā atidisanto ‘‘kāmāsavāpi…pe… pajānātī’’ti āha. Ettha ca yasmā ‘‘kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccati…pe… avijjāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’ti ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīni vadatā bhagavatā catutthamaggo niddiṭṭho, tasmā yaṃ heṭṭhā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘so ca upari catutthamaggasseva niddiṭṭhattā yujjatī’’ti, taṃ suvuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“为了呵责他” —— 世尊为呵责那位婆罗门,便说了“婆罗门,你心中所希冀的任何事,只管来问我吧”,其用意是给予他提问的机会。由于这位婆罗门并不具备堪为说法所依的那种意乐,此处已超出前文所说的三种连结范畴,所以说“独立建立了一个连结”。由于存于内心,故称“内在的”。所谓“以烦恼出离之沐浴”:即以八支圣道的法流甘露来沐浴,洗除烦恼的垢秽,平息贪欲等热恼。显示巴利原文
Tassa codanatthāyāti tassa brāhmaṇassa bhagavā attano codanatthāya ‘‘puccha maṃ tvaṃ brāhmaṇa yadettha tayā manasābhisamīhita’’nti codanāya, okāsadānatthāyāti adhippāyo. Desanāsannissayo brāhmaṇassa tathārūpo ettha ajjhāsayopi natthīti yathāvuttaanusandhittayavinimuttattā ‘‘pāṭiyekkaṃ anusandhiṃ āhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cittagatattā abbhantarena. Kilesavuṭṭhānasinānenāti kilesamalapavāhanena rāgapariḷāhādivūpasamakarena ca aṭṭhaṅgikaariyamaggasalilasinānena.
79 因为他刚从法堂过来,便妄想他如同刚从巴户咖河沐浴归来一般。若以圣果碾碎烦恼、出离油腻的滋润来审视,“粗涩”即指世间,因为那条河具有这些特质,故被世人普遍认可为“世间”。通过执取这种世俗认可的粗涩概念,便显露出他心中的邪见:“那条河在世间就是如此闻名”。因此说:“能赋予清净状态,故得众人如此认可”。因为能通过除灭罪恶而带来来世等成就,对世间有所利益,所以称为“益世的”。被认可为“益世的”,其解释皆与前文类同。因此说:“能引导到达最殊胜的世间,故得众人如此认可”。被认可为“福德”:因为能产生应受供养的善果报,并能再度净化有情,故被众人认可为“福”。这纯粹是为了阐明前面已教导的义理。至于为何再次阐明已说的义理,回答是:“为了喜爱偈颂的人”。有些人领悟长行有困难,以这种方式说便能理解;有些人通过随文而通达,以这种方式说便能了悟;这些人便是喜爱偈颂的人。“为了阐明殊胜的义理”:意思是,为了显示一种更殊胜、不同于先前教导的另一种阐释。显示巴利原文
79. Dhammasabhāmaṇḍapaṃ tāvadeva upagatattā bāhukā nadito āgataṃ viya maññamāno. Ariyaphalamaddanacuṇṇādayo telasinehassa vivecanena . Lūkhabhāvo lokaṃ, taṃ etissā atthīti lokāti sammatā. Lokkhasammataggahaṇena ‘‘tathā sā nadī loke pākaṭā’’ti evaṃ pavattaṃ attano micchāgāhaṃ dīpeti. Tenāha ‘‘visuddhabhāvaṃ detīti evaṃ sammatā’’ti. Pāpapavāhanena samparāyikādisampattiāvahato lokassa hitā lokyā. Lokyāti sammatāti sabbaṃ purimasadisaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘seṭṭhaṃ lokaṃ gamayatīti evaṃ sammatā’’ti. Puññasammatāti pujjabhavaphalanibbattanena sattānaṃ punanena visodhanena puññāti sammatā. Tadatthadīpanatthamevāti tassā pubbe āgatadesanāya atthadīpanatthameva. Vuttassevatthassa puna dīpanaṃ kimatthiyanti āha ‘‘gāthārucikāna’’nti. Cuṇṇikavacanaṃ asambhāventā tathā ca vutte atthamabujjhanakā pajjavacanaṃ sambhāventā tathā ca vutte bujjhanakā gāthārucikā. Visesatthadīpanatthanti visiṭṭhadīpanatthaṃ, purimadesanāya aññadīpanatthanti attho.
“乔达摩尊师是否前往巴户咖河沐浴呢?”(《中部·经集》1.78)由于前文已述,此处“巴户咖”一词只为表明此义。其余关于“阿谛咖咖”等的文词,则因能令人了知更为殊胜之义,故为阐明殊胜义理。为何此处世尊要提及婆罗门并未问及的阿谛咖咖等河呢?答言:“正如……”。其中“咖咖”指沐浴所用的香粉;沐浴之后,又在此处额外取用香粉,故名“阿谛咖咖”。因此说:“依沐浴资具而……”。“圆池形状”指圆形池塘的形状。“各别河川”指各自独立的河流,并非如同阿谛咖咖等仅是渡口。显示巴利原文
‘‘Gacchati pana bhavaṃ gotamo bāhukaṃ nadiṃ sināyitu’’nti (ma. ni. 1.78) heṭṭhā vuttattā bāhukanti idameva ettha tadatthadīpakaṃ. Sesāni adhikakkādivacanāni tato visiṭṭhassa atthassa bodhanato visesatthadīpakāni. Kasmā panettha bhagavatā brāhmaṇena avuttāni adhikakkādīni gahitānīti āha ‘‘yatheva hī’’tiādi. Kakkanti nhānapiṇḍaṃ adhippetaṃ, nhāyitvā adhikaṃ kakkaṃ ettha gaṇhantīti adhikakkaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nhānasambhāravasenā’’tiādi. Maṇḍalavāpisaṇṭhānanti vaṭṭapokkharaṇīsaṇṭhānaṃ. Nadiyoti visuṃ nadiyo, na adhikakkādīni viya titthamattaṃ.
“以三处”指孙陀利咖、婆雅戈、巴户咖这三处。“四”是指阿谛咖咖等四处。这些其实都已说过了:因为在婆罗门的意图中,依世间共许的特征,它们与前三者具有同一特性;然而在究竟意义上,则是由于它们同样具备除罪的特征。因此说:“所以……”。它们根本不能带来任何罪业的清净。它不能净化他:意思是它不能使那个人清净。所谓“未达到仇恨罪性”是指未达到业道的程度。因此说:“因为是微小的过失”。显示巴利原文
Tīhi padehīti sundarikāpayāgabāhukāpadehi. Cattārīti adhikakkādīni cattāri. Vuttāneva hontīti lokasammatālakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇatā brāhmaṇassa adhippāyena, paramatthato pana pāpapavāhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Kiñci pāpasuddhiṃ na karontiyeva. Na hi naṃ sodhayeti naṃ puggalaṃ na sodhaye. Verakibbisabhāvaṃ appattā nāma kammapathabhāvaṃ appattā. Tenāha ‘‘khuddakehī’’ti.
“驳斥者”:通过指出其不合理,来驳斥那种见解。其驳斥方法如下:正如任何入水沐浴都不能除罪,任何星宿祭祀也同样不能,因为这些并非罪恶之因的对治。能够灭除某物的,才是该物的对治。犹如光明是对治黑暗的,明是对治无明的,而入水沐浴或星宿祭祀,并非贪等罪恶之因的对治。因此,应于此得出结论:“入水沐浴等并不能除罪”。“常恒的弗栗诃星宿日”,意思是:对于戒行等清净的人来说,每一天都是吉祥日。而“其他”日子,则是对那些戒行等不清净的人而言。“常恒的布萨日”,是指通过圣布萨而住于布萨。“清净者”:指心意行为清净的人。“善业者”:指身体和语言行为清净的人。因此说:“无过失性”等。“导向善”:指达到了无过失的状态。“誓愿受持”:指圆满地受持头陀支等誓愿,若他圆满受持,便无退失——这是其含义。“在我的教法中沐浴吧”:意思是,如果你想获得彻底清净,就在我的教法中修行。因此说:“如果……”等。“安稳”:指安稳无畏的状态。正如以苦行令一切众生达到安稳无畏,你也应如此修习——佛陀如此简要地为婆罗门开示了慈爱等的修习,便彰显了之。显示巴利原文
Paṭihanantoti ayuttabhāvadassanena taṃ diṭṭhiṃ paṭibāhanto. Tatthāyaṃ paṭibāhanavidhi yathā yaṃ kiñci udakorohanaṃ na pāpapavāhanaṃ, evaṃ yo koci nakkhattayogo pāpahetūnaṃ paṭipakkhābhāvato. Yañhi vināseti, so tassa paṭipakkho. Yathā āloko andhakārassa vijjā ca avijjāya, na evaṃ udakorohanaṃ nakkhattayogo vā pāpahetūnaṃ lobhādīnaṃ paṭipakkho, tasmā niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ ‘‘na udakorohanādi pāpapavāhana’’nti. Niccaṃ phaggunīnakkhattanti suddhasīlādikassa sabbakālaṃ maṅgaladivaso evāti adhippāyo. Itaroti sīlādivasena asuddho. Niccameva uposatho ariyuposathena upavutthabhāvato. Suddhassāti parisuddhamanosamācārassa. Sucikammassāti parisuddhakāyavacīsamācārassa. Tenāha ‘‘nikkilesatāyā’’tiādi. Kusalūpasañhitanti anavajjabhāvūpagataṃ. Vatasamādānanti dhutadhammasamādānādi sampannameva hoti, nāssa vipatti atthīti attho. Mama sāsaneyeva sināhi, yadi accantameva suddhiṃ icchasīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘sace’’tiādi. Khematanti khemabhāvaṃ. Yathā sabbabhūtāni tapavasena khemappattāni abhayappattāni honti, evaṃ karohīti taṃ heṭṭhā dassitaṃ mettādibhāvanaṃ brāhmaṇassa saṅkhepena upadisantenassa ekaccasamādhisampadā tadavinābhāvinī paññāsampadā ca dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘manodvārasuddhi dassitā’’ti.
为了显示作为那两种成就之基础的戒成就,才说“如果你不说妄语”等。在此,正如通过“如果你不说妄语”等远离妄语、杀生、不与取的表述,运用举一反三的方法,也就同时表述了对其余身、语恶行的远离;同样,通过“有信、不悭吝”等对信等财富具足的劝导,也就自然成就了对其余圣财具足的劝导。因此,应知信等作为导向解脱的成熟法,已为婆罗门揭示了。正因如此,说:“依此行道而有烦恼清净”。“伽耶河比巴护伽河等更被人们公认”,这是其意。显示巴利原文
Tassa pana sampadādvayassa nissayabhūtaṃ sīlasampadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sace musā na bhaṇasī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘sace musā na bhaṇasī’’tiādinā musāvāda-pāṇātipāta-adinnādāna-paṭivirativacanena avasesakāyavacīduccaritaviratīpi vuttā eva hoti lakkhaṇahāranayena, evaṃ ‘‘saddahāno amaccharī’’ti saddhādidhanasampadāniyojaneneva avasesaariyadhanasampadāniyojanampi siddhameva hotīti saddhādayo vimuttiparipācanīyadhammā brāhmaṇassa pakāsitā evāti veditabbā. Tenevāha ‘‘imāya eva paṭipattiyā kilesasuddhī’’ti. Gayā sammatatarā bāhukādīhipīti adhippāyo.
80 “独一”:即没有同伴。然而,他此时的没有同伴,只是指“独一”的状态,因为他以渴爱为第二者的状态尚未消失。因此说:“不久……”等。通过“独一”一词,已表述了身体的远离,所以说:“以心远离而远离”。以此来表述如“于日间经行、坐禅”等(《中部》1.423; 3.75;《分别论》519;《大义释》161)所教导的警寤精进。对于如此修行的人,当他观察被十一种火燃烧的三界时,完全没有一丝一毫的放逸,如此修习业处,正确地精进。为了显示他对于一切行所摄的事物心无期待,唯以涅槃为志向而安住,才说了“不放逸”等。“生已尽”等中应解释的,前面已说。其余的都容易理解。显示巴利原文
80.Ekoti asahāyo, esā panassa asahāyatā ekībhāvenāti. Na hissa tāva taṇhādutiyatā vigatā. Tenevāha ‘‘na cirassevā’’tiādi. Ekaggahaṇeneva kāyena vūpakaṭṭhatā vuttāti āha ‘‘vupakaṭṭho cittavivekenā’’ti. Tena ‘‘divā caṅkamena nisajjāyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.423; 3.75; vibha. 519; mahāni. 161) āgataṃ jāgariyānuyogamāha. Tathābhūtassa cassa ekādasahi aggīhi āditte tayo bhave passato yathā pamādassa lesopi nāhosi, evaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ brūhento sammadeva padahati. Katthaci saṅkhāragate anapekkhacitto nibbānādhimutto eva vihāsīti dassetuṃ ‘‘appamatto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khīṇā jātītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
8. 削损经义注显示巴利原文
8. Sallekhasuttavaṇṇanā
81 「纯陀」是那位大长老的名字,出于尊敬而称为「大纯陀」,如同称呼「大目犍连」。另一种说法是,他有一位外甥名唤纯陀长老——即舍利弗长老的兄弟,这位大长老因此得名「大纯陀」,正如被称为「大周利般陀伽」一样。「于傍晚时分」:此处的「时分」原是处格,句中用为具格,故说“于傍晚时”,因为这里并不具备绝对的呼应关系。「与七种行」:指同住比丘、弟子、在家信众等有情,以及色境等诸行。「退转」即退避。「独处」即远离,指身与心从一切诸行中抽离。因此「独一状态」指身远离,「远离」指心远离。「从中起」:即从这两种远离状态中出离,生命有分心流相续生起,又与同梵行者会合,便脱离独处。「令问讯」:令人代为问安。「如是」:依照前文所说的方式问安。「举起」:即抬起、合掌。对于尚未断除生死根本的人,姑且如此问讯;但对于已断生死根本者,问讯又有何意义?于是回答:“这是如来的惯例。”因此应知,如来不仅祝愿众生来世安乐,也祝愿现法利益。为何如来要这样问讯呢?因此说明原因。显示巴利原文
81. ‘‘Cundo’’ti tassa mahātherassa nāmaṃ, pūjāvasena pana mahācundoti vuccati yathā ‘‘mahāmoggallāno’’ti. Attano vā cundaṃ nāma bhāgineyyattheraṃ upādāya āyasmato sāriputtattherassa bhātā ayaṃ mahāthero ‘‘mahācundo’’ti paññāyittha yathā ‘‘mahāpanthako’’ti. Sāyanhasamayanti bhummatthe ekaṃ upayogavacananti āha ‘‘sāyanhakāle’’ti. Na hettha accanta saṃyogo sambhavatīti. Sattasaṅkhārehīti saddhivihārikaantevāsikaupāsakādisattehi ceva rūpārammaṇādisaṅkhārehi ca. Paṭinivattitvāti apasakkitvā. Nilīyananti vivecanaṃ kāyacittehi tato vivittatā. Ekībhāvoti hi kāyavivekamāha, pavivekoti cittavivekaṃ. Tato vuṭṭhitoti tato duvidhavivekato bhavaṅguppattiyā, sabrahmacārīhi samāgamena ca apeto. Abhivādāpetvāti abhivādaṃ kāretvā. Evanti yathāvuttaabhivādavasena. Paggayhāti unnāmetvā. Anupacchinnabhavamūlānaṃ tāva evaṃ abhivādo hotu, ucchinnabhavamūlānaṃ kimatthiyoti āha ‘‘etaṃ āciṇṇaṃ tathāgatāna’’nti. Tena na tathāgatā samparāyikaṃyeva sattānaṃ sukhaṃ āsīsanti, atha kho diṭṭhadhammikampīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā evaṃ tathāgatā abhivadantīti tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘sukhakāmā hī’’tiādi. Puthukāyāti bahū sattakāyā. Yakkhāti devā. Te hi pūjanīyatāya ‘‘yakkhā’’ti vuccanti. Abhivadantīti āsīsitamevatthaṃ ñāṇakaruṇāhi abhimukhaṃ katvā vadanti.
「这些」:为了把那些不确定地把握的见确切地标示出来,而说「这些」。并且,「这些」是表示近在眼前、现量可证的词,所以说「好像使之呈现于面前」,意思就是将那些种种的恶见、心中的取向,如同置于面前一样。「见」:为了显示在巴利文经典中因省略了前面「邪」字而只说「见」,所以解释为「邪见」。这些邪见在众生中生起,或者是以众生为所缘而生起,因此被称为「在众生中显现」。「我论所相应」:就是与以「我」为中心而生起的言论相应。「相应」:是以「有我」这种执取为对象而形成的相应。那些见行者执取这些见,在执取和使人执取的过程中,见本身是见论的所缘,因此才称为与(我论)「相应」。像「有我」这样生起的见,在这里是与「我论相应」的,而不是指作为其对象的「我」本身。它也是通过这种方式,与以此为境生起的言论相应。与「世论相应」的说法,道理也是一样。这些见有二十种:此后便不再有我论的所依了。因为即使对五取蕴逐一执取为「我」,以及以这些取蕴为所依而生起执取,从而产生这些见,但是,除了这五取蕴之外,并没有一个能因此显现为所缘、以及作为执取「我」的方式的东西。「常恒的我与世间」:在色等五蕴中,执取其中某一蕴为「我」或「世间」,并认为它是常恒、永远存在、稳固不变的。正如经中所说:「执取色是我、也是世间、是常恒的,如此安立我和世间」等等。在关于「常」等的执取中,第一种是由于常住论而生起的我执,第二种是由于断灭论,第三种是由于一分常住论,第四种是由于寻思者论,或是由于诡辩论而生起的我执。「有边」:是执取自我有分际。「无边」:是执取自我没有分际。「有边且无边」:是将两者结合起来的执取。另外一种是以寻思者论而生起的我执。这样,它们生起的方式共有八种——这是文句的连结。显示巴利原文
Yāti aniyamato gahitā niyamato dassento ‘‘imā’’ti āha. Imāti ca āsannapaccakkhavacananti āha ‘‘abhimukhaṃ karontoviyā’’ti , taṃ taṃ diṭṭhigatikaṃ cittagataṃ sammukhā viya karontoti attho. Diṭṭhiyoti purimapadalopena pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti dassento ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiyo’’ti āha. Sattesu diṭṭhigatacittuppādesu uppajjamānā, sattesu vā visayabhūtesu ārabbha uppajjamānā ‘‘sattesu pātubhavantī’’ti vuttā. Attavādenāti attānaṃ ārabbha pavattena vacanena. Paṭisaṃyuttāti ‘‘atthi attā’’ti gāhe gāhaṇe ca visayabhāvena paṭisaṃyuttā. Diṭṭhigatikena diṭṭhiṃ gāhantehi gahaṇe gāhāpaṇe ca diṭṭhi diṭṭhivādassa visayoti tena paṭisaṃyuttā nāma hoti. ‘‘Atthi attā’’ti evaṃ pavattā diṭṭhi idha attavādapaṭisaṃyuttā, na tassā visayabhūto attā. Sā ca visayabhāvato tathāpavattena vādena paṭisaṃyuttā. Lokavādappaṭisaṃyuttāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Vīsati bhavanti tato paraṃ attavādavatthuno abhāvā . Pañcapi hi upādānakkhandhe paccekaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti te ca attano nissayabhāvena gaṇhato etāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ sambhavo, tabbinimutto panāyaṃ visayo attaggahaṇākāro ca natthīti. Sassato attā ca loko cāti rūpādīsu aññataraṃ ‘‘attā’’ti, ‘‘loko’’ti vā gahetvā taṃ sassato sabbakālabhāvī nicco dhuvoti. Yathāha ‘‘rūpī attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapetī’’tiādi. Sassatotiādīsu paṭhamo sassatavādavasena attaggāho, dutiyo ucchedavādavasena, tatiyo ekaccasassatavādavasena, catuttho takkīvādavasena pavatto, amarāvikkhepavasena vā pavatto attaggāho. Antavāti attano paricchedatāvasena. Anantavāti aparicchedatāvasena. Antavā ca anantavā cāti tadubhayavasena, itaro takkīvādavasena pavatto attaggāho. Evaṃ pavattattā aṭṭha hontīti yojanā.
「只是始」:仅仅是最初的、根本的作意。为了展示它的具体面貌,而说「唯是那夹杂着观的最初作意」。「即使未达入流道」:这句话通过这样一种限定,排除了其他可能。从能够辨别名色开始,一直到能观察生灭的阶段,这一过程就是这里所指的「始作意」,因为它是智慧修习的初始阶段。而且,由于它伴随着生灭随观,所以称之为「夹杂着观」。对这句话的解释是:「即依此方便」——意思就是依于所说的「始作意」。「这些」:指的是前面所说的我论、世论相应之见。虽然通过那种「始作意」可以在暂时压制的程度上舍断这些邪见,但这并不是这里所意指的。因此提问:「是否以完全断除的方式而成为舍离呢?」虽然因为完全断除了结使,而成为不增上慢的人。但认为「我已证得圣法」的慢心,就是增上慢。有这种慢心的人叫增上慢人。对于他们,通过证得生灭智,并以此为最终的作意,才是这里所指的。但由于这种程度的作意还不能断除诸见,为了发起讨论才提出这个问题,因此说「为了断除增上慢而问」。「只是始……有舍离吗?」当他这样问时,就好像一个尚未通达的人,仿佛住于增上慢中一样,所以说「犹如增上慢者」。他(指大纯陀)就是那位长老。「为了他们的利益」:就是为了他自己那些弟子们的利益,希望由世尊来辨别、破除这种错误的执取。据说,长老如同法将军一样,与他的弟子们一起,前去拜见世尊。显示巴利原文
Ādimevāti ādimanasikārameva. Taṃ pana sarūpato dassento ‘‘vipassanāmissakapaṭhamamanasikāramevā’’ti āha. Appatvāpi sotāpattimagganti iminā avadhāraṇena nivattitaṃ dasseti. Nāmarūpaparicchedato pabhuti yāva udayabbayadassanaṃ, ayaṃ idha ādimanasikāroti adhippeto paññābhāvanāya ārambhabhāvato. Udayabbayānupassanāsahitatāya cassa vipassanāmissakatā vacanaṃ. Evanti imassa atthavacanaṃ ‘‘ettakenevaupāyenā’’ti , yathāvuttaādimanasikārenāti attho. Etāsanti yathāvuttānaṃ attavādalokavādapaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ. Kāmañca tāsaṃ tena tadaṅgavasena pahānaṃ hotiyeva, taṃ pana nādhippetaṃ, tasmā samucchedavasena pahānaṃ paṭinissaggo ca hotīti pucchati. Sabbaso samucchinnasaṃyojanatāya anadhimānikopi samāno. ‘‘Ariyadhammo adhigato’’ti māno adhimāno, so yesaṃ atthi te adhimānikā, tesaṃ udayabbayañāṇādhigamena adhimānuppatti tadavasāno ca manasikāroti adhippeto. Tena diṭṭhīnaṃ pahānaṃ na hotīti kathāpanatthaṃ ayaṃ pucchāti āha ‘‘adhimānappahānatthaṃ pucchatī’’ti. ‘‘Ādimeva nu kho…pe… paṭinissaggo hotī’’ti anabhisametāvī viya vadanto adhimāne ṭhito viya hotīti āha ‘‘adhimāniko viya hutvā’’ti. Soti thero. Tesaṃ atthāyāti tesaṃ attano antevāsikānaṃ bhagavatā etassa micchāgāhassa vivecanatthāya. Thero kira dhammasenāpati viya saddhiṃ attano antevāsikehi bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkami.
82 “于其中”:这是表示处所的处格,用于指示诸见的所缘。由于诸见的随眠地与现行处也都是蕴,因此说“于其中这些见生起”等,是就五蕴而说。“执取色”:即依“此色是我的自我”之见而生起执取,执取、缘取于它。诸见只有在执取时,才会以那个对象为所缘而生起。“它是自我”等之中,这涵盖了归入眼等范畴的色;由于与慧联结,它便成为我的自我;又因世间众生于此处居住,故称为世间。“那个我死后将会在他世存在”:由如是存在而成为常有,由坚固而成为稳固,由一切时存在而成为常住,由不变异而成为不变易之法——这是它的含义。如果说这是针对五蕴而说,为何使用单数呢?答:“以所缘故”等。由此而示其差别,即差异。“以生起”:即以发生的方式。那些先前未曾生起的法,由于具备了名为“生起”的变化,故称为“生起”。因此说“以生起”等。“数数修习”:是指在无始轮回中再三发生,从而获得反复的修习。这是从烦恼修习的角度,区别于随眠的意义。“有力量”:是指达到强而有力的状态。这是从自性上显示随眠。所谓“显示巴利原文
82.Yatthāti visaye bhummaṃ. Diṭṭhīnañhi ārammaṇanidassanametanti. Yasmā diṭṭhīnaṃ anusayanabhūmipi samudācaraṇaṭṭhānampi khandhā eva, tasmā āha ‘‘yattha cetā diṭṭhiyo uppajjantī tiādi pañcakkhandhe sandhāya vutta’’nti. Rūpaṃ abhinivissāti ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ mama attā’’ti diṭṭhābhinivesavasena abhinivisitvā ārabbha. Abhinivisamānā eva hi diṭṭhi naṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjati. ‘‘So attā’’tiādīsu yadidaṃ cakkhādisaṅgahaṃ rūpaṃ, sahabuddhinibandhanatāya so me attā, sukhāsukhaṃ ettha lokiyatīti so loko. ‘‘Soevāhaṃ pecca paraloke bhavissāmīti tathābhāvena nicco, thirabhāvena dhuvo, sabbadābhāvitāya sassato, nibbikāratāya avipariṇāmadhammoti attho. Yadi pañcakkhandhe sandhāya vuttaṃ, kathamekavacananti āha ‘‘ārammaṇavasenā’’tiādi. Nānā karīyati etenāti nānākaraṇaṃ, viseso. Jātivasenāti uppattivasena. Ye hi anibbattapubbā samānāvatthā, te uppādasaṅkhātavikārasamaṅgitāya uppajjantīti samaññaṃ labhanti. Tenāha ‘‘jātivasenā’’tiādi. Punappunaṃ āsevitāti anādimati saṃsāre aparāparuppattiyā laddhāsevanā. Etena kilesānaṃ bhāvanaṭṭhena anusayatthaṃ viseseti . Thāmagatāti thāmabhāvaṃ upagatā. Etena anusaye sabhāvato dasseti. Thāmagamananti ca kāmarāgādīnaṃ anaññasādhāraṇo sabhāvo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘thāmagato anusaye pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.21). Appaṭivinītāti samucchedavinayavasena na paṭivinītā. Appahīnā hi thāmagatā kilesā anusentīti vuccanti. Etena tesaṃ kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanārahataṃ dasseti. Samudācarantīti abhibhavanti. Etena tesaṃ vītikkamappattataṃ dasseti. Uppajjantīti pana imināva pariyuṭṭhānāvatthā dassitā.
诸见的所缘,即“于其中这些见生起”等所说的色取蕴等五蕴的差别,也就是以这五蕴差别为所缘。“彼不是我所有”:指这五蕴并非归我所有,因为不应以“我所”的系缚来执取它。由此,在究竟意义上拒绝了它成为渴爱的所依,因为它是无常等。“我亦不是这”:即这五蕴差别,我也不是它,不应执取为“我”。由此,拒绝了它成为慢的所依,因为它具有无常、苦、可厌等性质。“彼是我的自我亦不是”:因为在那五蕴中并没有自我的实体,也因为不应以“我所”的系缚来执取。如此,便对这一切作了全面的否定。因为那些见行者正是依托这些蕴,而非其他,如今这些蕴被世尊宣说为不是我所有、不是我、不是我的自我,当如此理解时,他们的一切见行处就都被破除了。因此,世尊宣说“于其中”等,就是为了显示:通过否定我、我所,一切见即被破除。显示巴利原文
Taṃ pañcakkhandhappabhedaṃ ārammaṇanti yaṃ taṃ ‘‘yattha cetā diṭṭhiyo uppajjantī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ rūpupādānakkhandhādipañcakkhandhapabhedaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ ārammaṇaṃ. Etaṃ mayhaṃ na hotīti etaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ mayhaṃ santakaṃ na hoti mama kiñcanapalibodhabhāvena gahetabbatāya abhāvato. Tenassa paramatthato taṇhāvatthubhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati tāvakālikādibhāvato. Ahampi eso na asmīti eso pañcakkhandhapabhedo ahampi na asmi, ahanti so gahetabbo na hotīti attho. Etenassa mānavatthubhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati aniccadukkhajegucchādibhāvato. Eso me attāpi na hoti attasabhāvassa tattha abhāvato mamañcassa kiñcanapalibodhabhāvena gahetabbatāya abhāvato.
“渴爱执取”:因为凭借它而执取“这是我的”,所以称为渴爱执取。“执取那”:即生起那执取的意思。因此说“执取渴爱戏论”。“戏论”:因为它会延长相续,令有情长久滞留于轮回,故称戏论。按所说分类,即指一百零八种渴爱运行的方式。其意图是:通过阐明五蕴并无渴爱的所依,来遮止渴爱戏论。后面的两个词句,也应依此道理理解。“与见同处”:即与见在同一个被断除之处。借此显示它们是初道所应断的。而与见俱生同处的,其实只有渴爱,没有慢,且这种渴爱是导向恶趣的。“如实存在”:即依照无常、苦、不美、无我的状况而存在,如此看待方为如实观见。因此说“因为五蕴……”等等。“以此行相”:即以被恼迫等无常等行相。“虽被执取”:是指被那些尚未破除颠倒的人所执取。“以此行相”:即以“这是我的”等行相。“彼时并无”:因为在如实观见时,那些颠倒并不存在。“善观见者”:指这样观见后,便不会再以其他方式去观见,也就是极为善妙、殊胜地观见者。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāva mamanti gaṇhāti etenāti taṇhāgāho. Taṃ gaṇhantoti taṃ uppādento. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhāpapañcaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti. Papañceti santānaṃ vitthārento satte saṃsāre cirāyatīti papañco. Yathā vuttapabhedanti aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritapabhedaṃ. Taṇhāpapañcaṃ paṭikkhipati khandhapañcakassa taṇhāvatthukābhāvavibhāvanenāti adhippāyo. Parato padadvayepi eseva nayo. Diṭṭhekaṭṭhāti diṭṭhiyā pahānekaṭṭhā. Tena tesaṃ paṭhamamaggavajjhataṃ dasseti. Sahajekaṭṭhā pana diṭṭhiyā taṇhā eva, na māno, sā ca kho apāyagamanīyā. Yathā atthīti yena aniccadukkhāsubhānattākārena atthi, tathā passanto yathābhūtaṃ passati nāma. Tenāha ‘‘khandhapañcakañhī’’tiādi. Eteneva ākārenāti ruppanādianiccādiākāreneva. Gayhamānampi appahīnavipallāsehi. Tenākārenāti ‘‘etaṃ mama’’ntiādiākārena. Nevatthi yathābhūtadassanavipallāsānaṃ tadabhāvato. Suṭṭhu passantassāti yathā puna tathā na passitabbaṃ, evaṃ suṭṭhu sātisayaṃ passantassa.
并非仅凭作意于“始”便能断除邪见,那只是增上慢者的一种增上慢知见;唯有依于圣道方能断除。为阐明此义,他说:“通过入流道显示了邪见的断除。”所谓“分别解说者”,即是为增上慢者不加削减地分别解说诸禅那。对于愚痴凡夫,它不会生起,因为他们不具作者性;对于圣弟子,它也不会生起,因为增上慢的缘已被断除。他不会将人引向歧途,因为他只在适当、有益的业处上作引导。显示巴利原文
Na ādimanasikāreneva diṭṭhippahānaṃ hoti, adhimānikānaṃ pana adhimānamattametaṃ dassanaṃ. Maggeneva taṃ hotīti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhippahānaṃ dassetvā’’ti āha. Vibhajantoti adhimānikānaṃ jhānāni asallekhabhāvena vibhajanto. Bālaputhujjanānaṃ neva uppajjati akārakabhāvato. Na ariyasāvakānaṃ pahīnādhimānapaccayattā. Na aṭṭhānaniyojako sappāyakammaṭṭhāneyeva niyojanato.
长老心想:“僧团因何事召请?住在那里的人,不论已来或未来,那件事在此地便可成就。”他如此思惟后,虽然僧团再三遣使迎请,他既未前往,也并非出于不敬。因此他说“为何这样……”等。因为智者在那里只是履行自己的本分,他便另派了一位长老比丘前去。“为何这样”:是以“为何对僧团的教令不予执行”这样的反问,来显示对应当奉行之事的重视。“年过六十”:是指未证得而自以为证得的人。因持戒善者与善者相聚,是由于有相同的意乐,所以长老说了“善哉,贤友”之后,便将铺设象迹等一切事务妥善完成了。显示巴利原文
Thero ‘‘yadatthaṃ saṅgho pakkosati, so attho tattha vāsīnaṃ āgatāgatānaṃ idha ijjhatī’’ti taṃ udikkhanto saṅghena yāvatatiyaṃ pahitopi na gato na agāravena. Tenāha ‘‘kimeta’’ntiādi. Paṇḍito hi tattha attano kiccameva karotīti aññataraṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ pāhesi. Kimetanti saṅghassa āṇāya akaraṇaṃ nāma kimetanti karaṇe ādaraṃ dīpento evamāha. Saṭṭhivassātītoti appatte pattasaññī eva saṭṭhivassātīto. Yasmā pesalā pesalehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti samānādhimuttitāya, tasmā thero ‘‘sādhāvuso’’ti vatvā hatthimāpanādiṃ sabbaṃ akāsi.
“如彼者”:意为与紧接着前面所说的那位长老相似,也是未证得而自以为证得、年过六十的人。“莲丛”:即莲花丛。“他走进殿堂”:他从容地走进殿堂,借着观察,他凡夫的本性自然便会显露。据说当时帝须大寺的长老比丘们,为了恭敬“令自心澄净”这一教言,一早就将塔庙庭院打扫干净,只取这一所缘,生起以佛陀为所缘的喜悦,日日如此。因此说“在那时……”等。即便有人对他说:“法乐,把钵和衣放在这里”,这也只是出于款待而随口一说,并没有被问及什么。“知道功德”:就如同通过在水下等处留出空间等方式而知道功德;然而你们却不知道,因为连客比丘应尽的义务都没有履行。违背导师教令的僧团规约是怎样的呢?所谓的规约,是在不与学处相违的情况下才应遵守的。连这些都不知道的人,我与他们没有任何共住可言。说罢,他便腾空而起。显示巴利原文
Tādisovāti anantaraṃ vuttattherasadisova appatte pattasaññī eva saṭṭhivassātītoti attho. Padumagumbanti kamalasaṇḍaṃ. Pāsādaṃ pāvisi vissaṭṭhaṃ olokanenassa puthujjanabhāvo attanāva paññāyissatīti. Tissamahāvihāre kira therā bhikkhū tadā ‘‘sakacittaṃ pasīdatī’’ti vacanaṃ pūjentā kālasseva cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā ettakārammaṇameva buddhārammaṇapītiṃ uppādetvā divase divase tathā karonti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiñca samaye’’tiādi. ‘‘Dhammadinna, idha pattacīvaraṃ ṭhapetī’’ti vattāpi paṭisanthāravasena kiñci pucchitāpi nāhosi. Guṇaṃ jānātīti nimujjanādīsu vivaradānādinā guṇaṃ jānāti viya. Tumhe pana na jānittha āgantukavattassapi akaraṇato. Satthuāṇāvilaṅghinī kīdisī sā saṅghassa katikā? Katikā ca nāma sikkhāpadāvirodhena anuvattetabbā, ettakampi ajānantehi me saṃvāso natthīti ākāse abbhukkami.
“若他对‘我以削减而住’这样想”:对于那位被称为“具足初禅而住”的比丘,如果他怀着增上慢这样认为:“我以名为初禅的修行方式削减了烦恼,我以那样的削减而住”——这样的情况是可能存在的。应如此理解此处的文句关联。“那并不适当”:那位增上慢者所思索的“依于分别,初禅即是削减”,这是不适当、不恰当的。因此,他接着说“因为不是……”等。其中,能正确、彻底地削减诸烦恼的,名为“削减”,也就是圣道。作为趣入削减之方法的观,即是“削减之道”。不过,作为观之基础的禅那,也间接地成为道的基础。因此他说:“因为不是作为观之基础……”等。显示巴利原文
Yaṃtassa evamassa sallekhena viharāmīti yo ‘‘paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyā’’ti vutto, tassa bhikkhuno yaṃ ‘‘paṭhamajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ paṭipattividhānaṃ kilese sallekhati, tena sallekhena ahaṃ viharāmī’’ti adhimānavasena evamassa evaṃ bhaveyya ṭhānametaṃ vijjatīti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Taṃ na yujjatīti taṃ adhimānikassa ‘‘yathāvibhaṅgaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ sallekho’’ti parivitakkitaṃ na yujjati yuttaṃ na hoti. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Tattha sammā sabbaso ca kilese likhatīti sallekho, ariyamaggo. Tadupāyavipassanā sallekhapaṭipadā. Yaṃ pana jhānaṃ vipassanāpādakaṃ, tampi jhānaṃ pariyāyena maggapādakaṃ hotiyeva. Tenāha ‘‘avipassanāpādakattā’’tiādi.
“依于禅支法”:即依于寻等五种禅支法。“依于心路生起”:虽然禅那依于心识生起会持续多次,但由于仅以一次转向即归属于同一条心路,因此被视为同一个等至,故说“依于反复等至”。“四种无色禅”各自只于单一的所缘上转起,所以说“因所缘无差别”。“即依前述两种原因”:即依于“禅支法”与“反复等至”这两种前面已说明的原因。显示巴利原文
Jhānadhammavasenāti vitakkādipañcakajjhānadhammavasena. Cittuppādavasena anekavāraṃ pavattamānampi jhānaṃ ekāvajjanatāya ekavīthipariyāpannattā ekā samāpatti evāti ‘‘punappunaṃ samāpattivasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cattāri arūpajjhānāni yathāsakaṃ ekekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe pavattantīti āha ‘‘ārammaṇabhedābhāvato’’ti. Purimakāraṇadvayavasenevāti ‘‘jhānadhammavasena, punappunaṃ samāpattivasenā’’ti pubbe vuttappakārakāraṇadvayavaseneva.
这些无色禅因为没有烦恼的炽然,故其支分已寂止;又因修习的殊胜,其所缘极为微细。因此,依于这些所缘,这些禅那本身是寂静的,故被称为“寂静住”。而“那四种”,即指这全部四种无色禅。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ arūpajjhānānaṃ kilesapariḷāhābhāvena nibbutāni aṅgāni, bhāvanāvisesavasena sukhumāni ārammaṇāni. Tasmā tānīti tesaṃ vasena tāni jhānāni santāni, tasmā ‘‘santā ete vihārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ catunnampīti catunnampi tesaṃ arūpajjhānānaṃ.
83 “他”:指增上慢的比丘,或除此以外的外道苦行者、游方者等,他们其实并未正确地审度。其中,增上慢者因自以为证得未证之法而不审度,外道则因并非其领域而不审度。“于何处”:即在哪些削减的事相上,以无害等四十二种行相来审度。显示巴利原文
83.Soti adhimāniko bhikkhu, añño vā ito bāhirako tāpasaparibbājakādiko na hi sammasati. Tattha adhimāniko appatte pattasaññitāya na sammasati, itaro avisayatāya. Yatthāti yasmiṃ sallekhavatthusmiṃ, avihiṃsakatādīhi catucattālīsāya ākārehi.
所谓八等至,是通过镇伏烦恼而生起的法,且一个比一个更寂静、更殊胜;世俗的无害等法则并非如此。这里,有人质问:“为何在此只将无害等作为削减来宣说,却不将那些等至作为削减呢?”为了阐明此义,质问者便说了“为何……”等开头的话。回答者则为了阐明“等至虽然本性寂静殊胜,但因为是轮回的基础,所以不能成为烦恼的削减之道;而无害等法因为是出离的基础,所以才是削减之道”这一含义,而说了“由于是出世间之基……”等话。正是依于能够辨明八等至与无害等二者差别的这句经文,才得以了知“如此是如何成就更大果报”的情况。这其实是针对布施中,因应供者更为殊胜而致布施果报更大而说的,这就是前后文的关联。难道在那部经中,不是提到了“为亲证入流果而行道的人”吗?并非只说了“皈依的人”。为了回应这个质疑,他说:“从皈依的人开始……”等。这在注疏中有记载:“从最低限度而言,皈依三宝的优婆塞,也可称为‘为亲证入流果而行道的人’。”因为,如果有人希望超越轮回的痛苦,以净信心皈依三宝,那么……显示巴利原文
Aṭṭha samāpattiyo nāma kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena pavattā uttaruttari santapaṇītā dhammā, na tathā lokiyā avihiṃsādayo. Tattha kathaṃ avihiṃsādayo eva sallekhabhāvena vuttā, na itarāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento codako ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Itaro kāmaṃ samāpattiyo santapaṇītasabhāvā, vaṭṭapādakatāya pana kilesānaṃ sallekhapaṭipadā na honti, avihiṃsādayo pana vivaṭṭapādakā sallekhapaṭipadāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘lokuttarapādakattā’’tiādimāha. Imināyeva aṭṭhasamāpattīhi avihiṃsādīnaṃ visesadīpakena suttena yathā mahapphalataraṃ hoti, taṃ pakārajātaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idañhi dakkhiṇeyyataratāya dakkhiṇāya mahapphalatarataṃ sandhāya vuttanti sambandho. Nanu tattha ‘‘sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’ti āgataṃ, na ‘‘saraṇagato’’ti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘saraṇagamanato paṭṭhāyā’’tiādi. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.379) ‘‘heṭṭhimakoṭiyā tisaraṇaṃ gato upāsakopi sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno nāmā’’ti. Yo hi vaṭṭadukkhaṃ samatikkamitukāmo pasannacitto ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchati, tassa taṃ adhisīlādīnaṃ upanissayo hutvā anukkamena dassanamaggādhigamāya saṃvatteyyāti.
“损害等事”:指我们所称的损害等类事,即“在此损害等事中”。“末尾的邪见与诸邪道最初的邪见”:这是依开示的次第而说。“总合起来”:即依邪见这一状态的共通性,将它们统合而说。“如是”:以此字总括了如下意义:如同把业道中诸邪道末尾与开头所说的邪见总合起来宣说一样,那些邪道末尾所说的正见,也以同样的方式被总括。显示巴利原文
Vihiṃsādivatthunti yadetaṃ vihiṃsādīnaṃ vatthuṃ vadāma, imasmiṃ vihiṃsādivatthusmiṃ. Antamicchādiṭṭhiñca micchattānaṃ ādimicchādiṭṭhiñcāti idaṃ desanākkamaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Missetvāti micchādiṭṭhibhāvasāmaññena ekajjhaṃ katvā. Tathāti iminā yathā kammapathamicchattānaṃ ante ādimhi ca vuttamicchādiṭṭhiṃ missetvā ekajjhaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā tesaṃ ante vuttasammādiṭṭhīti imamatthaṃ upasaṃharati.
「命根」在世俗言说上指众生,在究竟意义上指命根。「断」是令其跨越自然坠落的本性,于中途即令其坠落;或是通过刀杖等方式强加摧折,坏灭后再令其坠落。「不给予的」指属于他人所有之物。「取」即攫取的行为。「削除」即彻底削平,意思是完全舍断。这是关于业道的论述,所以称为“破坏真实义利者”。「离间」是因为它使相互之间的爱念化为乌有,或因割裂、摧残他命而称为离间。「粗恶」即粗涩、残酷。「无义利」指毫无真舍利益,完全背离自他的安乐因缘。「邪」即颠倒,以执取恒常等错误方式运作。「恶的」即卑劣。因其纯属不善,故被佛陀等圣智者所呵斥。以“无有布施”等为基,这是以十事为所依的邪见。因为以断灭见固执地计度事物根本不存在的这种邪执已达到业道的程度,所以说它属于业道的范畴。以“色是我”等方式生起的有身见,因为能障碍圣道,所以是不导向解脱的邪见。正因为它不导向解脱,才被归入邪性之中。「正」即不颠倒,因此是善的、美妙的;因为被佛陀等所赞许,所以是智者们所共同称誉的。其余显示巴利原文
Pāṇanti vohārato sattaṃ, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Atipātenti saraseneva patanasabhāvaṃ aticca antarā eva pātenti, atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātenti. Adinnanti parasantakaṃ. Ādiyantīti gaṇhanti. Sallekhatīti samaṃ lekhati, pajahatīti attho. Kammapathakathā esāti ‘‘atthabhañjanaka’’nti vuttaṃ. Piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇā, pisati pare satte hiṃsatīti vā pisuṇā. Pharusāti lūkhā, niṭṭhurāti attho. Niratthakanti attharahitaṃ attano paresañca hitavinimuttaṃ. Micchāti viparītā niccādivasena pavattiyā. Pāpikāti lāmikā. Ekantākusalatāya viññūhi buddhādīhi garahitā. Natthi dinnanti ādivatthukāyāti dasavatthukamicchādiṭṭhimāha. Natthikabhāvābhinivesanavasena kammapathappattiyevassā kammapathapariyāpannatā. ‘‘Rūpaṃ attā’’’tiādinayappavattā attadiṭṭhi maggantarāyakarattā aniyyānikadiṭṭhi. Aniyyānikattā eva hissā micchattapariyāpannatā. Sammāti aviparītā, tato eva sobhanā sundarā, buddhādīhi pasatthattā viññuppasatthā. Sesamettha micchādiṭṭhiyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
所谓思惟不善者:由于对不净等执取净等相,故其非真实、不导向解脱,从不如理作意而生。「不善」即指非真实的、不导向解脱的、不善的思惟。「以此类推」:通过这一句,以“非真实的、不导向解脱的、不善的语”等方式,将非真实等义理类推至各处。这里的「语」意指思心所,身业与命也是如此。这多数是依随念过去的方式而转起,所以说「当比丘心念过去时」,正如世人这样说:“我过去曾有众多财富,后来皆因放逸,几乎耗尽。”“带有类似忆念之相”是说它生起时带有一个类似“能忆念久远所作、久远所说”的念的生起相。「生起」指心的生起。像那样转起的心,就是「邪念」。这种邪念,或以瞋恚而生——如思惟“他曾骂我、打我”等而对人怀恨;或以贪欲而生——如依“忆念过去与女人的嬉笑、交谈、玩乐”等所说方式,以净相随念;或以邪见而生——如顽固执着“我的这个我确是恒常、稳固的”。当知邪念即依这些行相而转起。显示巴利原文
Asubhādīsu subhādiākāraggahaṇato ayāthāvaaniyyānikā ayoniso uppattiyā. Akusalāti ayāthāvāaniyyānikā akusalā saṅkappā. Esa nayoti iminā ‘‘ayāthāvā aniyyānikā akusalā vācā’’tiādinā tattha tattha ayāthāvādiatthaṃ atidisati. Vācāti cetanā adhippetā, tathā kammantājīvāsati ca. Yebhuyyena atītānussaraṇavasena pavattito ‘‘atītaṃ cintayato’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi loke evaṃ vadanti ‘‘yaṃ me pahūtaṃ dhanaṃ ahosi, taṃ pamādavasena pana bahuṃ khīṇa’’nti. Satipatirūpakenāti ‘‘cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā’’ti evaṃ vuttasatuppattipatirūpakena. Uppattinti cittuppattiṃ. Tathāpavattacittuppādo hi micchāsati. Sā pana kodhavasena vā ‘‘akkocchi maṃ avadhi ma’’ntiādinā (dha. pa. 3) upanayhantassa, rāgavasena vā ‘‘yānissa tāni pubbe mātugāmena saddhiṃ hasitalapitakīḷitāni anussaratī’’ti (a. ni. 7.50) vuttanayena subhato anussarantassa, diṭṭhivasena vā ‘‘so kho pana me atto nicco dhuvo’’tiādinā micchāabhinivisantassāti evamādinā nayena pavattatīti veditabbā.
以思惟方便而转起者:指对速网、钩、罟等捕猎之具的筹备安排等,进行种种计度思量。在如此造恶之后,取追悔相为所缘;或在造善之后,取“此为我所作之善”的欢喜相为所缘——以此观察方式转起的愚痴,即是「无智」。在此处,正如同将“刀”俗称为“吉祥”一般,那只是借用“智”的名称来称呼它。然而由于其本质为邪,故唯名「邪智」。十九类观察智,由于是正确地观察,故称为「正智」。其他对禅那等的观察智,则唯摄于正见之中。那些仅证得色界及无色界等至的人,实际上并未从轮回中解脱,却生起“我等已解脱”之想。这或是就某种凡夫慧而言,或是就“远离功德而对自我个体的执着”而言,或是就“与大梵天共住、亲近、结合的境界”而言,在这些并非解脱的状态中,他们生起了已解脱的想法。由于纯属不善而卑劣,故是邪恶的。由于其非真实,故是颠倒的。所谓「依所说」,即指按“他们实际上并未解脱”所说明的情形。像“我等于此将成为正见者”等说法,其中果正见等,由于也是道正见等的同类,故注释说“与果相应”。显示巴利原文
Upāyacintāvasenāti khippajālakumināduhalādiupakaraṇasaṃvidhānādīsu yutticintanādivasena pāpaṃ katvā vippaṭisāranimittaṃ, ‘‘sukataṃ mayā’’ti pāmojjanimittaṃ katvā paccavekkhaṇākārena moho aññāṇaṃ. Tattha pana ‘‘asive sivā’’ti vohāro viya ñāṇavohāro. Micchāsabhāvattā pana micchāñāṇaṃtveva vuccati. Ekūnavīsatibhedaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ sammā pekkhitattā sammāñāṇaṃ vuccati, itaraṃ pana jhānādipaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ sammādiṭṭhiyāva saṅgayhati. Rūpārūpasamāpattilābhitāmattena vaṭṭato avimuttāyeva samānā ‘‘vimuttā maya’’nti evaṃsaññino. Pakatipurisantarañāṇasaṅkhātāyaṃ, guṇaviyuttassa attano sakattani avaṭṭhānasaṅkhātāyaṃ, attano mahābrahmunā salokatā tassa samīpatāsaṃyujjanasaṅkhātāyaṃ vā avimuttiyaṃ vimuttisaññino. Ekantākusalatāya hīnattā pāpikā. Ayāthāvatāya viparītā. Yathāvuttenāti ‘‘avimuttāyeva samānā’’ti vuttappakārena. ‘‘Mayamettha sammādiṭṭhi bhavissāmā’’tiādīsu phalasammādiṭṭhiādīnipi maggasammādiṭṭhiādipakkhikānevāti adhippāyena ‘‘phalasampayuttāni…pe… veditabbā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbepi pana phaladhamme vimuttikkhandhasaṅgahato ‘‘vimuttī’’ti vuccamāne na koci virodho. Ettha sammāvimuttisaṅkhāte sallekhavatthumhi.
若从盖的角度而言,仅说三种,故接着说“有贪欲”等。“已至缠缚者”:即被昏沉睡眠所缠缚者。由于具足某法而被称为掉举,该法即是掉举,因此说“具足掉举者,称为掉举者”。“审察者”:是指判定某种性质,诸如“这是法”或“这不是法”等。“怀恨习性者”:指习惯于心中忆念他人而随逐不舍的人。“嫉妒者”:即嫉妒、嫌弃。“诡诈者”:指内心一套、外表一套,隐藏真实自我的人。然而,因为他们并非如实而言者,故说“即非正确地言说”。“依于对已说法之反义方式”:即依据与已说之义相对立的方式,例如从“不忿怒者……”等反面来说明。显示巴利原文
Yadi nīvaraṇavasena vuttāni, tasmā tīṇeva vuttānīti āha ‘‘abhijjhālū’’tiādi. Pariyuṭṭhānappattā thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitā. Yassa dhammassa atthitāya uddhatā nāma honti, so dhammo uddhaccanti āha ‘‘uddaccena samannāgatāti uddhatā’’ti. Vicinantāti dhammoti vā adhammoti vā ādinā yaṃ kiñci sabhāvaṃ vinicchinantā. Upanāhanasīlāti parassa attano citte anubandhanasīlā. Issantīti usūyanti. Saṭhayantīti saṭhā aññathā attānaṃ aññathā pavedanakā. Te pana yasmā na yathābhūtavādino, tasmā āha ‘‘na sammā bhāsantīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Vuttapaccanīkanayenāti ‘‘na kodhanā akkodhanā’’tiādinā vuttaatthapaṭipakkhanayena.
“难言者”:于这些人中,由于有反感执取与对立执取,言语令人痛苦,故称难言者。而他们不能容忍言语,故说“难以开口劝说”等。由于行为低劣,或因招致苦果,故是“邪恶的”。依于非正法,即依于非善士法。正如由于自身需被区分,身表等方有业门、身业门等,同样,由于具足不信等非善士法,这些不信等本身即称为非正法,即非善人的法。依于此而说“他们没有信”,正如说“恶慧”那样。于契经、应颂等听闻少者为少闻者,即不具足听闻。以“没有可执取的”来说明此处的“少”字是“没有”的意思,如同“少蚊、虻、风、热、爬虫类之触”等中的“少”。由于不发起正道,卑鄙应受呵责,他们在杂染处沉没、陷落,故为懈怠者——将da转为ta而构成。为了断除不善法、具足善法,他们拥有已策励、已增长的精进,故为精进者。由于未能令念生起,念便忘失、灭去,故为失念者。被染污,即被破坏。名为恶慧,即破坏的状态,被相反面毁坏的状态,所以说“即是说‘慧已灭失’”。在前文,由于提到正见,已包含业自性智和道正见;在显示巴利原文
Dukkhaṃ vaco etesu vippaṭikūlaggāhitāya vipaccanīkagāhesūti dubbacā. Te pana vacanakkhamā na hontīti āha ‘‘vattuṃ dukkhā’’tiādi. Hīnācāratāya dukkhassa vā sampāpakatāya pāpakā. Asaddhammavasenāti asappurisadhammavasena. Attanā visesitabbavasena kāyaviññattiādīnaṃ kāyakammadvārādibhāvo viya assaddhiyādiasaddhammasamannāgamenaasataṃ asappurisānaṃ dhammānanti tāniyeva assaddhiyādīni asaddhammā nāma, tesaṃ vasenāha ‘‘saddhā etesaṃ natthī’’ti yathā taṃ ‘‘duppaññā’’ti. Suttageyyādi appaṃ sutaṃ etesanti appassutā, sutena anupapannā. Natthīti gahetabbanti iminā abhāvattho ayaṃ appa-saddo ‘‘appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassāna’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 10.11) viyāti dasseti. Sammāpaṭipattiyā anārambhanato kucchitā gārayhā sīdanti osīdanti saṃkilesapakkheti kusītā da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānāya kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ upasampadāya āraddhaṃ paggahitaṃ vīriyaṃ etesanti āraddhavīriyā. Anuppādanena muṭṭhā naṭṭhā sati etesanti muṭṭhassatī. Duṭṭhāti dūsitā. Duppaññā nāma dūsitabhāvo paṭipakkhena vināsitabhāvoti āha ‘‘naṭṭhapaññāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Heṭṭhā sammādiṭṭhiggahaṇena kammassakatāpaññāya maggasammādiṭṭhiyā ca gahitattā subbacakalyāṇamittatāparivārāhi idha saddhādīhi vipassanāsambhārassa uddhaṭattā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘idha vipassanāpaññā veditabbā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāsambhāro hī’’tiādi. Yuttiṃ anapekkhitvāpi ayamattho gahetabboti dassento āha ‘‘porāṇānaṃ āṇā’’ti.
“超世间功德的障碍”:即障碍证得出世间功德者。“执取自见”:指自己的见解,或自己随意执取的任何见解,这是该词的意思。由于越过真实面貌而从别处执取,故为“执取者”。“坚固执持者”:即坚固地执持“只有这个才是真的”者。“能令舍离者”:具有促使舍离的性能。“如同龟一般”:就像龟的脚等肢体被某物触及时,会将一切肢节缩回自己的壳内而不伸出;同样,即使有人劝说“你的这种执取不好,请舍弃吧”,他也不肯舍离,只将它收在心里,于内心中如此说。“鳄鱼般的执取”:即鳄鱼的执取。“这样执取”:意思是如鳄鱼抓取而不肯放开那样,如此执取不放。显示巴利原文
Lokuttaraguṇānaṃ antarāyakaranti lokuttaraguṇānaṃ adhigamassa antarāyakaraṃ. Sandiṭṭhinti saṃ attano diṭṭhiṃ, yaṃ vā taṃ vā attanā yathāgahitadiṭṭhinti attho. Sabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanato parāmāsī. Daḷhaggāhīti ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti thiraggāhaggāhī. Paṭinissaggīti paṭinissajjanako. Kummovāti yathā kacchapo attano pādādike aṅge kenaci ghaṭṭito sabbāni aṅgāni attano kapāleyeva samodahati, na bahi nīharati, evamayampi ‘‘na sundaro tava gāho, chaḍḍehi na’’nti vutto taṃ na vissajjeti. Antoyeva attano hadaye eva ṭhapetvā taṃ vadati. Kumbhīlaggāhanti saṃsumāraggāhaṃ. Gaṇhantīti yathā saṃsumārā gahitaṃ na vissajjenti, evaṃ gaṇhanti.
84 “如此以四十四种方式”:即依不害等四十四种行相。那么,为何在此首先宣说不害?因为不害是一切功德的根本。所谓“不害”,即是悲的同义词,而悲尤其是戒的根本之因,因为以损恼为相的恶戒能由此远离。正如杀生以损恼有情为相,不与取(偷盗)也是如此,夺人财物甚至比刀刺更严重;邪淫亦因导致怀胎等苦,何况侵犯他人妻女?妄语欺骗、离间语离间他人、粗恶语刺人心髓,其害明显;绮语则障碍对真实义利的把握而滋生无义利之事;贪欲是不与取等之因;嗔恚是杀生等之因;邪见是一切无义利之因,也以损恼为相,邪见者即便口称如法,仍会造作杀生等事,还会教唆他人,余者更不待言。如此,以害为相的恶戒得以远离,以不害为相者成为戒的特别有力之因。以戒为足处,定乃确立;以定为足处,慧乃确立。因此,不害是一切功德的根本。再者,对于志向高远、行事审慎的贤善上士,如其戒,其定与慧也都能成就他人的利益与安乐。如是,悲……显示巴利原文
84.Evaṃcatucattālīsāya ākārehīti avihiṃsanādīhi catuadhikacattālīsappakārehi. Kasmā panettha avihiṃsā ādito vuttā? Sabbaguṇānaṃ mūlabhāvato. Avihiṃsāti hi karuṇāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, sā ca visesato sīlassa mūlakāraṇaṃ parūpaghātalakkhaṇā dussīlyā oramāpanato. Yathā hi pāṇātipāto parūpaghātalakkhaṇo, tathā paresaṃ sāpateyyāvaharaṇaṃ, sattippahāratopi dhanassāvahāro garutaroti. Tathā abrahmacariyaṃ gabbhadhāraṇādidukkhāvahanato, paradārātikkame pana vattabbameva natthi. Paresaṃ visaṃvādanabhedanamammaghaṭṭanānaṃ parūpaghātabhāvo pākaṭo eva, samphappalāpo atthaggāhāpanato anatthuppādanato, abhijjhā adinnādānādihetuto, byāpādo pāṇātipātādihetuto, micchādiṭṭhi sabbānatthahetuto parūpaghātalakkhaṇā, micchādiṭṭhi dhammikapaṭiññopi pāṇātipātādīni karoti, pare ca tattha niyojeti, kimaṅgaṃ pana itare. Vihiṃsalakkhaṇā dussīlyā oramā avihiṃsalakkhaṇā visesato sīlassa balavakāraṇaṃ. Sīlapadaṭṭhāno ca samādhi, samādhipadaṭṭhānā ca paññāti sabbaguṇānaṃ mūlabhūtā avihiṃsā. Apica uḷārajjhāsayānaṃ nisammakārīnaṃ dhīrānaṃ uttamapurisānaṃ sīlaṃ viya samādhipaññāpi paresaṃ hitasukhāvahāva sampajjantīti evampi karuṇā sabbaguṇānaṃ mūlanti sā ādito vuttā.
其后,为特别指明“这些法是以不害为等起的”,便选取了善业道法。进而,为说明“此即功德根本之戒,安住于此戒者应令这些法生起”,便选取了八种正性。为显示“如此行道者,从一开始便如此”,便选取了远离盖;至于两种盖的已取与未取之由,在义注中已有说明。关于忿与瞋的差别,应依《中部·因缘品》注释所释之方式来了知。在此,为显示通过断除忿等能获得渐损的成就,故接着列出随烦恼的清净。为显示此种清净是借由随顺、善知识及不放逸来完成的,便列出了杂项。为显示具足圆满随顺等功德者,这些法可达圆满,修习观后即能导向圣道的证得,便列出了正法。为显示对这些人而言,彼种错误执取乃是证得出世间功德的障碍,故应从远处弃舍;如此,依前面所述的正行道证得圣道,将渐损的修习推向极致,于是宣说了“执取自见”等语。应当如此理解这四十四种渐损方式的选取意图与次第。对于那些不能以精进实际修习渐损行道的人来说,内心的意向也有大利益,因此说“为显示内心意向亦有大利益”。显示巴利原文
Tato paraṃ visesato ‘‘avihiṃsāsamuṭṭhānā ime dhammā’’ti dassanatthaṃ kusalakammapathadhammā gahitā. Tato idaṃ guṇānaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ sīlaṃ, ettha patiṭṭhitena ime dhammā uppādetabbāti dassanatthaṃ aṭṭha sammattā gahitā. Tesaṃ visodhanāya paṭipannassa ādito evaṃ hotīti dassanatthaṃ nīvaraṇaviveko gahito, ādito nīvaraṇadvayassa aggahaṇe gahitāgahitakāraṇaṃ aṭṭhakathāya vuttameva. Kodhassa pana byāpādato bhedo vatthasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.71) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Kodhādippahānena cettha sallekhasiddhīti dassanatthaṃ tato upakkilesavisuddhi gahitā. Sā ca subbacakalyāṇamittaappamattatāhi sijjhatīti dassanatthaṃ pakiṇṇakā gahitā. Sampannasovacassatādiguṇassa ime dhammā pāripūriṃ gacchanti, vipassanaṃ paribrūhetvā ariyamaggādhigamāya saṃvattantīti dassanatthaṃ saddhammā gahitā. Evaṃbhūtassa ayaṃ micchāgāho lokuttaraguṇādhigamassa antarāyakaro, tasmā so dūrato vajjetabbo, evaṃ yathāvuttāya sammāpaṭipattiyā ariyamaggaṃ adhigacchanto sallekhaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī’’tiādi vuttanti evametesaṃ catucattālīsāya sallekhākārānaṃ gahaṇapayojanaṃ anupubbī ca veditabbā. Payogato sallekhapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjituṃ asakkontānaṃ cittuppādopi bahūpakāroti āha ‘‘cittuppādassapi bahūpakārataṃ dassetu’’nti.
“于善法中”:指于不害等如前所说的无过失法。“随顺”:指内心意向随顺身业与语业而行。“那些法”:即不害等法,或指依内心意向而转起的诸法。现在,为了详细开演上述诸法,故提出“何以故”等语。“皈依”是为使无法以语言表达皈依者得以了知,故说“以身”等方便。“以身受持戒”一句,其道理亦然。在此,应依渐次生起、较为轻安的欲界善心的生起,来理解如是身业、语业之善有大利益,而并非从自性上去理解内心意向有大利益。显示巴利原文
Kusalesudhammesūti avihiṃsādīsu yathāvuttaanavajjadhammesu. Anuvidhiyanāti cittuppādassa kāyavācāhi anuvidhānā. Tesaṃ dhammānanti avihiṃsādidhammānaṃ, tesaṃ vā cittuppādavasena pavattadhammānaṃ. Idāni yathāvuttadhammaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Saraṇagamanaṃ vācāya viññāpetuṃ asakkontassa vasena vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyena vā’’ti. ‘‘Sīlaṃ kāyena samādiyatī’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Ettha ca tathā tathā pavattasallahukakāmāvacarakusalacittuppattiṃ upādāya tathārūpakusalakāyavacīkammānaṃ bahūpakāratā vuttāti na sabhāvato cittuppādassa bahūpakārataṃ ñāyatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
85 “为获得利益”:指为获得现法利益等成就,或仅为证得圣道。圣道是纯一利益,故称为利益。“遍行”:指以回避的方式而行、而转起,故说“为遍行,为回避”。“不害”是正自觉者以正见方便所善巧安排的。“轻易地”:即不费力地。“以这一方便”:即以此处不害句中所说方式。“诸余句”:指其余四十三句。显示巴利原文
85.Hitādhigamāyāti diṭṭhadhammikādihitasampattiyā, ariyamaggādhigamāya eva vā. Ariyamaggo hi ekantahitattā hito nāma. Parivajjanavasena kamanaṃ pavatti parikkamananti āha ‘‘parikkamanāya parivajjanatthāyā’’ti. Sammādassanupāyasaṃvidhānena avihiṃsā paṭiyattā sammāsambuddhena. Sukhenevāti akiccheneva. Eteneva upāyenāti eteneva avihiṃsāpade vuttena vidhinā. Sabbapadānīti sesāni tecattālīsa padāni.
86 所谓“不善结生令生者”,是指与掉举俱行的心生起等法。其中,有些仅是转起果报的给予者,对已发生的结生则是果报的令生者;有些因缺缘而未得机会成熟,或成为无记业等,是不令生者。“以种类而言”:指以不善种类而言。“向下分行进”:指趣向恶趣。“如是名者”:以名称标示其体性,于有缘和合时,不会超越其体性,故说“于果报时为不可爱、不可乐的果报”。于善的方面,亦应以同样方式理解。但此中的差别是:这里的结生令生者伴有神通等法,其余与前类似。于一切不善中,除“害”以外,其余一切不善为能喻,“害”为所喻。于一切善中,亦同此理。以此方便:如“害”成为所喻,其余善与不善成为能喻之义;依此理,应以杀生等不善比喻其他不善,应以远离杀生等善比喻其他善。显示巴利原文
86.Akusalā paṭisandhiajanakā nāma uddhaccasahagatacittuppādadhammā aññepi pavattivipākamattadāyino, dinnāya paṭisandhiyā vipākajanakā, paccayavekallena vipaccituṃ aladdhokāsā ahosikammādayo vā ajanakā. Jātivasenāti akusalajātivasena. Adhobhāgaṅgamanīyāti apāyagamanīyā. Evaṃnāmāti nāmaggahaṇena sabhāvaṃ upalakkheti sati paccayasamavāye taṃsabhāvānativattanato. Tenāha ‘‘vipākakāle aniṭṭhākantavipākattā’’ti. Vuttanayeneva kusalapakkho veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso, idha paṭisandhiajanakā abhiññāsahagatadhammā, sesaṃ vuttasadisameva. Sabbe akusalāti ettha vihiṃsamekaṃ ṭhapetvā itare sabbe akusalā upamābhūtā. Vihiṃsā hi upameyyaṃ. Sabbe kusalāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Eteneva upāyenāti yathā vihiṃsānaṃ upameyyatā, tadavasesānaṃ kusalākusalānaṃ upamābhāvo vutto, iminā nayena akusalaṃ pāṇātipātādiakusalena itarena, kusalañca pāṇātipātāpaṭiviratiādikusalena itarena upametabbaṃ.
87 “般涅槃”:意指使烦恼的热恼止息。由于周遍涂抹之义,大泥潭称为泥沼,而且它必然也是甚深的,故说“沉入甚深泥沼”。如同泥沼那样,五种欲功德被称为泥沼,因此应依据现在所说的比喻与所喻的连结之理,来理解此处的含义。“无有彼因”中,“因”指手或脚未陷入之状态,然而这种状态并不存在。此义同样适用于所喻。显示巴利原文
87.Parinibbāpaneti kilesapariḷāhavūpasamane. Parito limpanaṭṭhena palipaṃ vuccati mahākaddamaṃ, taṃ pana ekantato gambhīrampi hotīti ‘‘gambhīrakaddamenimuggo’’ti vuttaṃ. Palipaṃ viya palipanti pañca kāmaguṇā vuccanti, tasmā evaṃ idāni vuccamānena upamopameyyasaṃsandananayena ettha imasmiṃ ṭhāne atthayojanā veditabbā. Na hi taṃ kāraṇanti ettha kāraṇaṃ nāma hatthassa vā pādassa vā apalipannabhāvo, so pana natthi. Esa nayo upameyyepi.
其中,有人或许会想:“比丘们是凭借世尊的教法威力而说法。”为了说明“实际上唯是世尊在那里拔除”,并藉比喻阐明其义,故说“国王的……”等。且置凡夫不论,即使是达到声闻顶点的圣者们,其所说法也依然是老师的说法。为显示此义,故说“虽……”。因此,由他们所说的经典即是佛语;圣者们说法虽得殊胜,却仍是佛子。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā kassaci parivitakko ‘‘bhagavato desanānubhāvena bhikkhuādayo kathentī’’ti. ‘‘Bhagavāyeva hi tattha uddharatī’’ti vatvā upamāya tadatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘rañño’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Puthujjanā tāvatiṭṭhantu, sāvakasikhāppattavisesānampi ariyānaṃ desanā satthuyeva desanāti dassetuṃ ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādimāha. Tathā hi tehi desitasuttāni buddhavacanameva, tesaṃ desanāya laddhavisesāpi ariyā buddhaputtāyevāti.
“未得味”指未受用的状态。“未学律”指未恭敬学习五种律的状态。然而,那些律是经由三学的训练而成立,故说“将训练三学”。那是什么呢?在“此事理存在”一句中,若问“是什么事理?”,则说“未陷泥沼与陷入泥沼的状态”等。因为在圣典中以“纯陀啊,他……”等,以一般义为喻,以殊胜义为所喻。为阐明此义,先作“应如此了知义”之说,再以不共的方式开示“说了什么”等。“将止息他人的害意”:这是指见到名为“无害”的正行道而随见而行的人,通过说法令他人亦成无害,因彼之话语能作指示。故说“此,即是彼害者……”。过去是行邪道的害者。通过修习断除害之道等,表明自己本身已达无害、息灭害意,故说“如同已般涅槃”等。“于一切句中”,是指在“杀生者”等文中出现的四十三句。显示巴利原文
Anibbisatāyāti anibbisevanatāya. Asikkhitavinayatāyāti pañcannaṃ vinayānaṃ sādaraṃ asikkhitabhāvena. Te pana vinayā tissannaṃ sikkhānaṃ sikkhāpanena hotīti āha ‘‘tisso sikkhā sikkhāpessatī’’ti. Kiṃ pana tanti? ‘‘Ṭhānametaṃ vijjatī’’ti ettha vuttaṃ kiṃ pana ṭhānanti āha ‘‘apalipapalipannatta’’ntiādi. Yasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘so vata cundā’’tiādinā sāmaññatthaṃ upamābhāvena gahetvā visesattho upameyyabhāvena vutto, tasmā tamatthaṃ ‘‘evamattho veditabbo’’tiādinā sādhāraṇato vatvā puna asādhāraṇato vivaranto ‘‘kiṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādimāha. Parassa vihiṃsācetanaṃ nibbāpessatīti idaṃ yo avihiṃsāsaṅkhātaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ disvā diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjanto dhammadesanāya paro avihiṃsako hoti, tādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ādesanañhi tassa vacananti. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ yā esā vihiṃsakassā’’ti. Pubbe vihiṃsakassa micchāpaṭipajjantassa. Vihiṃsāpahānāya maggaṃ bhāvayatotiādinā attano eva avihiṃsāya vihiṃsāparinibbānāya saṃvattanamāha. Tenāha ‘‘parinibbuto viyā’’tiādi. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘pāṇātipātissā’’tiādinā āgatesu tecattālīsāya padesu.
88 「如是」是指示所说的状态。「它的」指减损的。如同“婆罗门,确实有此道理”等(增支部8.11;巴帝摩卡3-10)中,道理一词是理由的意思,因此说“减损的理由”。“以它们为依据”即依据种种减损。通过慈心的和合而追求利益。通过悲心而怜悯。「已遍取」:即周遍地取,是遍满的意思。「已遍行」:即周遍地行,是遍满的意思。“莫放逸”:对于所说的止与观,由于无知或其他放逸的因缘,不要行放逸。在导出的教法中,即使是不可做的事也是放逸。“于失坏时”指七种不适等失坏之时。如上所说的五种道理,以及其他一切教法功德都摄在这里,所以说“你们修习禅那,不要放逸,这是对你们的教诫”。显示巴利原文
88.Evanti desitākāraparāmasanaṃ. Tassāti sallekhassa. ‘‘Atthi khvesa brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 3-10) viya pariyāya-saddo kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘sallekhakāraṇa’’nti. Tesaṃ vasenāti sallekhānaṃ vasena. Mettāya upasaṃharaṇavasena hitaṃ esantena. Karuṇāya vasena anukampamānena. Pariggahetvāti parito gahetvā, paritvāti attho. Pariccāti parito itvā, samantato pharitvā icceva attho. Mā pamajjitthāti ‘‘jhāyathā’’ti vuttasamathavipassanānaṃ aññāṇena, aññena vā kenaci pamādakāraṇena mā pamādaṃ āpajjittha. Niyyānikasāsane hi akattabbakaraṇampi pamādoti. Vipattikāleti sattaasappāyādivipattiyuttakāle. Yathāvuttā pañca pariyāyā aññepi sabbe sāsanaguṇā idheva saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti āha ‘‘jhāyatha, mā pamādatthāti tumhākaṃ anusāsanī’’ti.
9. 《正见经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Sammādiṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
89 单取“欲说之问”:这是通过简别而排除其余四种问,因为那四种问不存在,且所问之义依此处作答故。“他为正见者”:凡夫虽不如实了知,却将外道苦行者等持守类似戒行者称为正见者。依“传闻”等,即依传闻、遍寻、见、审虑忍可等方式。“因符合具足相状之义而获得审虑忍可”:由于通达如实之相,确实有了如实执取,所以说“以自己亲证”,意即自己现证如实之相。“由多数人的话而成立”:由此,于教法与世间中,这种叠语用法成为惯用,亦可依对教法的净信看待那两种叠语用法。“义”即词义。“相”即自性。“依”即执取。“美好”、“殊胜”:前一种显示对诸法的如实觉了,即正见的自性,藉此正见超越一切法而显耀;后一种显示正见于相应法中为导首,由此令相应法犹如由智所成,并使具足此见者如同智的聚集体,诚如“智者、聪敏、善巧、有智、明察”之说,流布赞叹于各处。显示巴利原文
89.Kathetukamyatāpucchāevāti avadhāraṇena itarā catasso pucchā nivatteti itarāsaṃ asambhavato, tattha yathāpucchitassa atthassa vissajjanato ca ‘‘ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhī’’ti yāthāvato ajānantāpi puthujjanā bāhirakatāpasādayo attano samānasīle ṭhitaṃ sammādiṭṭhīti vadanti. Anussavādivasenāpīti anussavākāraparivitakkadiṭṭhinijjhānakkhantivasenapi. Yathāsamaṅgitākārassa atthassa evametanti nijjhānakkhamāpanato ekantato yāthāvaggāho hotīti āha ‘‘attapaccakkhenapī’’ti, yāthāvato lakkhaṇassa paṭividdhattā attano paccakkhabhāvenāti attho. Bahunnaṃ vacanaṃ upādāyāti iminā sāsane loke ca niruḷhatāya ayaṃ āmeḍitapayogoti sāsanassa niruḷhatāya ca sampasādaṃ upādāyapi tadubhayiko āmeḍitapayogo daṭṭhabbo. Atthanti vacanatthaṃ. Lakkhaṇanti sabhāvaṃ. Upādāyāti gahetvā. Sobhanāyāti sundarāya. Pasatthāyāti pasaṃsāya. Tesu purimena dhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodhasaṅkhātaṃ sammādiṭṭhisabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tena hi sā sabbadhamme abhibhavitvā sobhati. Dutiyena sampayuttadhammesu pariṇāyikabhāvaṃ. Tena hi sā sampayuttadhamme ñāṇamaye viya taṃsamaṅginañca puggalaṃ ñāṇapiṇḍaṃ viya karoti, tassa ‘‘paṇḍito nipuṇo cheko viññū vibhāvī’’tiādinā disāsu pasaṃsā pattharati.
“业自作智”:业是自己所有,故称“业自作”;此自性即是业自作性;于其中,智即“此业是有情自己的,此非自己的”——能如此了知的智。“随顺谛智”:随顺于圣谛的通达,故为随顺谛智,即观智。外道没有随顺谛的正见,因为全然不具此智。此中便说其因:“为我见习所执持故”。然而,外道的“业所作见”是随顺有我见而转起的,依“有布施”等道理而现起。教内之人具备两种:教内的凡夫,以业自作智等而具备两种正见。由于已入正决定,故说“有学为决定”。应联系起来理解:“由无学正见而成为正见者”。为显示此三种人中此处意指有学为正见者,故说“以决定的、导出的”等。显示巴利原文
Kammassakatāñāṇanti kammaṃ sako etassāti kammassako, tassa bhāvo kammassakatā, tattha ñāṇaṃ ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ sattānaṃ sakaṃ, idaṃ no saka’’nti evaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ. Saccānulomikañāṇanti ariyasaccānaṃ paṭivedhassa anulomato saccānulomikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, vipassanāñāṇaṃ. No saccānulomikāyāti bāhirako saccānulomikāya sammādiṭṭhiyā no sammādiṭṭhi sabbena sabbaṃ tassa abhāvato. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘attadiṭṭhiparāmāsakattā’’ti. Kammassa katādiṭṭhi pana bāhirakassa attadiṭṭhiṃ anurujjhantī pavattati ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattito. Sāsaniko dvīhipīti sāsaniko puthujjano kammassakatāñāṇādīhi dvīhipi sammādiṭṭhi. Okkantasammattaniyāmattā ‘‘sekkho niyatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Asekkhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā sammādiṭṭhīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tīsupi puggalesu sekkho idha sammādiṭṭhīti adhippetoti dassento ‘‘niyatāya niyyānikāyā’’tiādimāha.
现在,为以圣典阐明前说之义,故说“因此他这样说”等。“二边”,即“常见、断见、欲乐、自苦”此二边。不接近沉滞与掉举、住着与策励的二边,其义自然成就。“以正直性”,即由正直自性的道,也就是中道的意思。由于对法已生净信,对师与僧的净信亦因此得以生起,故只说“于法”,以其不相离故。此处所说决定正见的具足者,名为正见者;而此种正见,是通过出离轮回、证得离系而成就的,因此说“来到这里的正法”。涅槃是寂静、常住之法,故说“正法”;由果的殊胜,因而得到演说。它的到来即是作证现观,而此现观与断现观等同时成就,为显此义,故说“解开一切见之稠林”等。其中,以“解开一切见之稠林”与“断一切烦恼”两句说断现观;以“出离生与轮回”说遍知现观,“超越”即是遍知的意思;以“完成行道”说修习现观,应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tenevāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Antadvayanti ‘‘sassataṃ, ucchedaṃ, kāmasukhaṃ, attakilamatha’’nti etaṃ antadvayaṃ. Līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanantadvayassa anupagamanaṃ atthasiddhameva. Ujubhāvenāti ujusabhāvena maggena, majjhimāya paṭipattiyāti attho. Dhamme pasādaggahaṇena satthari saṅghe ca pasādopi gahitoyeva hotīti ‘‘dhamme’’icceva vutto tadavinābhāvato. Yasmā esa niyatāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato sammādiṭṭhīti adhippeto, tañca vaṭṭato niyyānaṃ vivaṭṭādhigamena hotīti āha ‘‘āgato imaṃ saddhamma’’nti. Nibbānañhi santo sadā vijjamāno dhammoti katvā saddhammoti imaṃ phalehi asādhāraṇena pariyāyena vattabbataṃ labhati. Tayidamassa āgamaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayo, so ca pahānābhisamayādīhi saheva idha ijjhatīti dassento ‘‘sabbadiṭṭhigahanānī’’tiādimāha. Tattha sabbadiṭṭhigahanāni vinibbeṭhento sabbakilese pajahantoti padadvayena pana pahānābhisamayamāha, jātisaṃsārā nikkhamantoti iminā pariññābhisamayaṃ. Samatikkamattho hi pariññattho. Paṭipattiṃ pariniṭṭhapentoti iminā bhāvanābhisamayanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“时间上的限定之说”:“限定”即是被划定界限,时间本身即是限定,故称“时间限定”。以了知不善等方式所限定的、从道出起的时分,即是道刹那,对它所作的言说即为此义,因此说“于其时”。而“及不善”中的“及”字是合集义,藉此将下文将述及的不善根等合摄进来。“十不善业道”——此处有何特别,要将尚未确定差别的不善皆悉收摄?因为以共相显示时,并不固定于别相。又何必作这番理证思择?因为第二转是对第一转中略说的内容,予以广释开示,因此说“然而,尊者,什么……”等。由于此处指出世间正见,故以作用门的方式,依凭以涅槃为所缘的了知——即道慧,从迷乱中穿透“此是苦”,通达十不善业道,因此被称为“了知不善”,此即其义。此处的“其”,即指称为不善业道的苦。“以彼行相”,即指前文所说“以取涅槃为所缘的了知的作用门”这一行相。显示巴利原文
Kālaparicchedavacananti paricchijjatīti paricchedo, kālo eva paricchedo kālaparicchedo, yo so akusalapajānanādinā paricchinno maggavuṭṭhānakālo maggakkhaṇo, tassa vacananti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yasmiṃ kāle’’ti. Akusalañcāti ca-saddo samuccayattho. Tena vakkhamānaṃ akusalamūlādiṃ samuccinoti. Dasākusalakammapathanti kutoyaṃ viseso, yāvatā aniddhāritavisesaṃ akusalaṃ gahitanti? Na sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato. Kiṃ vā imāya yutticintāya, yasmā paṭhamavārena uddesavasena desitassa atthassa vitthāradesanā dutiyavāro. Tenevāha ‘‘katamaṃ panāvuso’’tiādi. Yasmā lokuttarā sammādiṭṭhi idha adhippetā, tasmā nirodhārammaṇāya pajānanāya maggapaññāya kiccavasena sammohato ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti dasaakusalakammapathaṃ paṭivijjhanto ‘‘akusalaṃ pajānātī’’ti vuccatīti attho. Tassāti akusalakammapathasaṅkhātassa dukkhassa. Teneva pakārenāti ‘‘nirodhārammaṇāya pajānanāya kiccavasenā’’ti vuttappakārena.
“善”,此处解释其词义:能令应呵责的恶法动摇、震动的,即是“善”。或者,以应呵责的方式而安住的,名为“茅草”,即种种恶法。能割截、斩断那些如茅草般的恶法的,即是“善”。又或者,应被呵责者,以磨砺而令其微细的智慧,名为“茅草”,依此应被获得、执取、转起的,即是“善”。又如茅草会割伤双掌,同样地,此善法能割截、斩断已生与未生两方面的杂染分,故如茅草般割截,因此称为“善”。或者,由于能制止、防护应呵责的有罪法,故称为“善”。因为借助善法的力量,不善法于六门中不得转起,便获得了防护。或者,能令应呵责的恶法动摇、离去、排除的,即是“善”。或者,应被呵责的杀生等,以磨砺、令其锋利、刺痛故,名为“茅草”,即指瞋恚与贪爱等。从过患来看,由于思达至猛利的状态,杀生等便具有重大的罪过。能割截、斩断那些茅草的,即是“善”。或者,以磨砺、作边际、摧毁故,名为“茅草”,即指以福行业为门而转起的信等诸根。依凭它们应被获得、转起的,即是“善”。又或者,以“ku”指地,由依止性而与之相似,即成为自身所依的色、无色法。显示巴利原文
Kusalanti etthāyaṃ vacanattho – kucchite pāpadhamme salayati calayati kampetīti kusalaṃ, kucchitena vā ākārena sayantīti kusā, pāpakā dhammā. Te kuse lunāti chindatīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā sānato tanukaraṇato ñāṇaṃ kusaṃ nāma, tena lātabbaṃ gahetabbaṃ pavattetabbanti kusalaṃ. Yathā vā kuso ubhayabhāgagataṃ hatthapadesaṃ lunāti, evamidaṃ uppannānuppannavasena ubhayabhāgagataṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ lunāti chindati, tasmā kuso viya lunātīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā sāvajjadhammānaṃ salanato saṃvaraṇato kusalaṃ. Kusaladhammavasena hi akusalā manacchaṭṭhesu dvāresu appavattiyā saṃvutā honti. Kucchite vā pāpadhamme salayati gameti apanetīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā pāṇātipātādīnaṃ sānato nisānato tejanato kusā, dosalobhādayo. Sādīnavavasena cetanāya tikkhabhāvappattiyā pāṇātipātādīnaṃ mahāsāvajjatā. Te kuse lunāti chindatīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā sānato antakaraṇato vināsanato kusāni, puññakiriyavasena pavattāni saddhādīni indriyāni. Tehi lātabbaṃ pavattetabbanti kusalaṃ. ‘‘Ku’’iti vā bhūmi vuccati, adhiṭṭhānabhāvena taṃsadisassa attano nissayabhūtassa rūpārūpapabandhassa sampati āyatiñca anudahena vināsanato kuṃ sasantīti kusā, rāgādayo. Te viya attano nissayassa lavanato chindanato kusalaṃ. Payogasampāditā hi kusaladhammā accantameva rūpārūpadhamme appavattikaraṇena samucchindanti. Kusalassa mūlanti kusalamūlaṃ, suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanena kusalassa patiṭṭhā nidānanti attho. Akusalamūlanti etthāpi eseva nayo.
“不善”,即是“非善”,应知此词的含义,乃从与善法相对立的角度而言。之所以称为“善”,是从无病、无过、乐异熟、从善巧所生这些意义而来的。若有一类法,并非无病、并非无过、并非乐异熟、亦非善巧所生,那便是“不善”——此处显示了这样的含义。同样地,凡是不具备制止应呵责者的自性,既不应以茅草为喻,亦非依诸茅草而转起,也不像茅草那样能作割截,即名为不善——应知此义亦被显示出来。“了知事”,即是对苦等诸事的了知,也就是通达。同样地,随顺能觉证者的心向来作开示,故说“亦以了知不善等”,也正是因此,以略说的方式来开示。而“修习作意”,则依据“比丘们,应遍知一切”这样的法语,毫无残余,纯粹以总摄色法、无色法的方式而转起,因此说“唯是开示……”等。其中的“作意通达”,是指在加行阶段转起的观作意,以及圣道通达。对于某些人,因不堪烦乱,故以广释方式而说:那些致力于修观者,在证道时亦以广释的方式通达——这句话的意思是:因为。显示巴利原文
Akusalanti pana na kusalaṃ akusalaṃ, kusaladhammānaṃ paṭipakkhavasena akusalanti padassa attho veditabbo. Evañhi ārogyānavajjasukhavipākakosallasambhūtaṭṭhena kusalaṃ vuccatīti. Yathā yaṃ dhammajātaṃ na arogaṃ na avajjaṃ na sukhavipākaṃ na ca kosallasambhūtaṃ, taṃ akusalanti ayamattho dassito hoti. Evaṃ yaṃ na kucchitānaṃ salanasabhāvaṃ, na kusena, kusehi vā pavattetabbaṃ, na ca kuso viya lavanakaṃ, taṃ akusalaṃ nāmāti ayampi attho dassitoti veditabbo. Vatthupajānanāti dukkhādivatthuno pajānanā paṭivedho. Tathā bujjhanakapuggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena desanā pavattāti āha ‘‘akusalādipajānanenāpī’’ti. Teneva ca saṃkhittena desanā pavattā. Bhāvanāmanasikāro pana ‘‘sabbaṃ bhikkhave abhiññeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.46; paṭi. ma. 1.3) vacanato anavasesato rūpārūpadhammānaṃ pariggahavaseneva pavattati. Tenāha ‘‘desanāyevā’’tiādi. Tattha manasikārapaṭivedhoti pubbabhāge pavattavipassanāmanasikāro ariyamaggapaṭivedho ca. Kassaci akopanato vitthāravaseneva vuttaṃ vipassanaṃ anuyuñjantā maggaṃ paṭivijjhantāpi vitthāranayeneva paṭivijjhantīti attho visuddhikkamassa abhāvato.
“比丘”:指在大精舍(大寺)中,为结集法而会坐于五部阿含坛场中的比丘众。“长老”:在此处指僧团长老。然而,依《衣相应注》中所说,则是就大护长老的弟子比丘们而言,故说“他们曾说”。而“长老”即指大护长老,因为他在此《中部》中对……作了论说。“积聚”即“以聚”,是同一、合集的意思。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhūti mahāvihāre dhammasaṅgītivasena pañcanikāyamaṇḍale nisinnabhikkhū. Theroti tattha saṅghattheroti vadanti. Vatthasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena pana mahāsaṅgharakkhitattherassa antevāsikabhikkhū sandhāya ‘‘āhaṃsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Theroti pana mahāsaṅgharakkhitatthero. So hi imasmiṃ majjhimanikāye taṃ taṃ vinicchayaṃ kathesi. Rāsitoti piṇḍato, ekajjhanti attho.
不善业道注释显示巴利原文
Akusalakammapathavaṇṇanā
“从不善巧转起故”:是善巧的对立面,故称“不善巧”,也就是无智;由无智转起、因不善巧而生,是其义。与智慧相对的是无智,犹如与朋友相对的是敌人;与善相对的是不善,因为善应断除不善,而非善被断除。实际上,唯有依精勤修习的善,方能断除不善。与罪过等及贪等共转,故称为“有罪”。其果报由苦、不可意的四蕴所成,故是“苦果”。其中,“有罪”一语显示不善在转起时的苦;“苦果”一语则显示其果报的苦。前一句依转起的生起,说明不善的相状;后一句依异熟之间能引生异熟的功能而说。同样地,前一句显示不善的自性不清净;后一句显示其异熟不清净。前一句将不善从善的自性中排除;后一句因能显示有异熟,故将不善从无记的自性中排除。或者,前一句因显示有罪,故从作用的层面,显示它带来无义之味;后一句从成就的层面,显示它不可意异熟之味。前一句从现起的行相层面,显示它杂染的现起;后一句从果的……显示巴利原文
Akosallappavattiyāti kosallapaṭipakkhato akosallaṃ vuccati aññāṇaṃ, tato pavattanato, akosallasambhūtattāti attho. Ñāṇapaṭipakkho aññāṇaṃ mittapaṭipakkho amitto viya kusalapaṭipakkho akusalaṃ kusalena pahātabbattā, na pana kusalānaṃ pahāyatattā. Kusalameva hi payogasampāditaṃ akusalaṃ pajahati. Saha avajjehi lobhādīhi vattatīti sāvajjaṃ. Dukkho aniṭṭho catukkhandha-saṅkhāto vipāko etassāti dukkhavipākaṃ. Tattha sāvajjavacanena akusalānaṃ pavattidukkhataṃ dasseti, dukkhavipākavacanena vipākadukkhataṃ. Purimañhi pavattisambhavavasena akusalassa lakkhaṇavacanaṃ, pacchimaṃ tālantare vipākuppādanasamatthatāvasena. Tathā purimena akusalassa avisuddhasabhāvataṃ dasseti, pacchimena avisuddhavipākataṃ. Purimena akusalaṃ kusalasabhāvato nivatteti, pacchimena abyākatasabhāvato savipākattadīpakattā pacchimassa. Purimena vā avajjavantatādassanato kiccaṭṭhena rasena anatthajananarasataṃ dasseti, pacchimena sampattiatthena aniṭṭhavipākarasataṃ. Purimena ca upaṭṭhānākāraṭṭhena paccupaṭṭhānena saṃkilesapaccupaṭṭhānataṃ, pacchimena phalaṭṭhena dukkhavipākapaccupaṭṭhānataṃ. Purimena ca ayonisomanasikāraṃ akusalassa padaṭṭhānaṃ pakāseti. Tato hi taṃ sāvajjaṃ jātaṃ, pacchimena akusalassa aññesaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvaṃ vibhāveti. Tañhi dukkhavipākassa kāraṇanti. Saṃkiliṭṭhanti saṃkilesehi samannāgataṃ, dasahi kilesavatthūhi vibādhitaṃ, upatāpitaṃ vā tehi vidūsitaṃ malīnakatañcāti attho. Idañcassa dukkhavipākatañcāti atthe idañca dukkhavipākataṃ apaccakkhatāya asaddahantānaṃ paccakkhato ādīnavadassanena saṃvejanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Sādhāraṇā sabbassapi akusalassa.
对本身具有坠落性质者,在中间急剧地令其坠落,即是“杀”,意思是不令其缓慢坠落,而是使其迅速坠落。超越地、或以刀杖等制伏而令其坠落,亦是“杀”。从加行、事(对象)的重大等而有重罪:这是因为以那些缘而生起的思具有强力。对于一种加行,以迅速成就的方式成办自身作用、多次转起的速行,以及数数惯习、以决定思之力,令加行具有重大性。即使有时加行在杀害小生命和大生命上是同等的,杀害大生命者的思会生起猛利的行相,这就是事的重大性。如此,这两种重大性都只依于思的强力而有。即使在如前所说的缘的不同类别中,也应知是由于依那些缘而思具有强力,才会有重罪。因为即使加行、事等不重大,由于所杀对象具有德行,也会有重罪,反之则有轻罪,这应与事的重大、不重大同等看待。烦恼与加行二者的柔和与猛利,也相应地配合为轻罪与重罪。‘有生命’、‘有生命想’、‘杀心’这三者,也属于加行前的部分;而……显示巴利原文
Saraseneva (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 1) patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atīva pātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkammavā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto. Payogavatthumahantatādīhi mahāsāvajjatā tehi paccayehi uppajjamānāya cetanāya balavabhāvato. Ekassa hi payogassa sahasā nipphādanavasena sakiccasādhikāya bahukkhattuṃ pavattajavanehi laddhāsevanāya ca sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya vasena payogassa mahantabhāvo. Satipi kadāci khuddake ceva mahante ca pāṇe payogassa samabhāve mahantaṃ hanantassa cetanā tibbākārā uppajjatīti vatthussa mahantabhāvo. Iti ubhayampetaṃ cetanāya balavabhāveneva hotīti. Yathāvuttapaccayapariyāyepi taṃtaṃpaccayehi cetanāya balavatāya eva mahāsāvajjabhāvo veditabbo. Payogavatthuādipaccayānañhi amahattepi hantabbassa guṇavantatāya mahāsāvajjatā, tabbipariyāyena appasāvajjatā ca vatthussa mahattāmahattesu viya daṭṭhabbā. Kilesānaṃ upakkamānaṃ dvinnañca mudutāya tibbatāya ca appasāvajjatā mahāsāvajjatāpi yojetabbā. Pāṇo pāṇasaññitā vadhakacittañca pubbabhāgiyāpi honti, upakkamo vadhakacetanāsamuṭṭhāpito. Pañca sambhārā hi pāṇātipātacetanāti sā pañcasambhāravinimuttā daṭṭhabbā. Ayañca vicāro adinnādānādīsupi yathārahaṃ vattabbo. Vijjhanapaharaṇādivasena sahatthenanibbatto sāhatthiko, āṇāpanavasena pavatto āṇattiko, ususattiyantapāsāṇādinissajjanavasena pavatto nissaggiyo, aduhalasajjanādivasena pavatto thāvaro, āthabbaṇikādīnaṃ viya mantaparijappanavasena pavatto vijjāmayo, kammavipākajiddhimayo iddhimayo dāṭhākoṭanādīni viya.
若他人以“这是我的”而执持某物,未予而取便为“不与取”(adinna)。若问:对于仰卧的婴儿,因其尚无执取想,这又怎么说?于是说“凡有他……”等。所谓“他”(paro),指那物品的主人,无论有识或无识。因即使是无识者,若在其有识时随己意而取,亦非无罪。以咒术念诵而取他人之物,为“术所作”;不以咒术,而以身语表业吸引他人之物,或依同类神通力而行,为“神通所作加行”。不与取中,说有此六种加行:自手作等。所谓“随宜”:在此,自手作可依五种偷盗而转起,令作及放下作亦如是。固定作依偷盗、强夺盗、隐匿盗而转起。其余各项亦应如此观察。显示巴利原文
Yadi ‘‘mama ida’’nti parena pariggahitaṃ adinnaṃ, uttānaseyyakadārakasantake kathaṃ tassa pariggahasaññāya eva abhāvatoti āha ‘‘yattha paro’’tiādi. Paro nāma viññū vā aviññū vā atthi tassa vatthussa sāmiko. Aviññūpi hi viññukāle yathākāmaṃ karonto adaṇḍārahoti. Mantaparijappanena parasantakaharaṇaṃ vijjāmayo, vinā mantena parasantakassa kāyavacīpayogehi parikaḍḍhanaṃ tādiseniddhivasena iddhimayo payogoti adinnādāne cha payogāsāhatthikādayo vuttā. Yathānurūpanti ettha sāhatthiko tāva pañcannampi avahārānaṃ vasena pavattati, tathā āṇattiyo nissaggiyo ca. Thāvaro theyyāvahārapasayhāvahārapaṭicchannāvahāravasena. Tathā sesāpīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“于淫欲共行”,指于满足己妻与于他妻行淫两种淫欲行为中。此处正是就这种区分而言。“族护”:被同族姓者所保护。“法护”:被同法行者所保护。“有主护”:有丈夫的。“罚护”:若与之交合,国王已设刑罚,她便名为罚护。为作妻子以钱财买来的,为“财买”。依己意愿而生活的,为“欲住”。为财富而生活的,为“财住”。为布匹而生活的,为“布住”。通过触水盆而娶的,为“触水盆妇”。取下头垫后而娶的,为“取去垫妇”。被抢掠带来的,为“夺帜妇”。又有“刹那临时妇”。凡以强力制服而行淫者,此于邪行中罪重;若双方同意,则不如此。即使被制服而行淫,虽于道或非道有所忍受,但因先前未生起惯习的染着心及加行,被制伏者并不构成邪行,有论师如此说。若存在行欲心,但缺少加行,亦不构成,因在多数情况下,女方并无行欲的加行。如此,即使她心中先生起行欲心,她亦不构成邪行;同样,若男方无行欲的加行,也是如此。因此,依自愿进行的,有三项;依强迫进行的,有三项。显示巴利原文
Methunasamācāresūti sadārāsantosa-paradāragamanavasena duvidhesu methunasamācāresu. Ayamevahi bhedo idhādhippeto. Gottarakkhitā sagottehi rakkhitā. Dhammarakkhitā sahadhammikehi rakkhitā. Sārakkhā sasāmikā. Yassā gamane raññā daṇḍo ṭhapito, sā saparidaṇḍā. Bhariyabhāvatthaṃ dhanena kītā dhanakkītā. Chandena vasantī chandavāsinī. Bhogatthaṃ vasantī bhogavāsinī. Paṭatthaṃ vasantī paṭavāsinī. Udakapattaṃ āmasitvā gahitā odapattakinī. Cumbaṭakaṃ apanetvā gahitā obhaṭacumbaṭā. Karamarānītā dhajāhatā. Taṅkhaṇikā muhuttikā. Abhibhavitvā vītikkame micchācāro mahāsāvajjo, na tathā dvinnaṃ samānachandatāya. Abhibhavitvā vītikkamane satipi maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsane purimuppannasevanābhisandhipayogābhāvato micchācāro na hoti abhibhuyyamānassāti vadanti. Sevanācitte sati payogābhāvo appamāṇaṃ yebhuyyena itthiyā sevanāpayogassa abhāvato. Tathā sati puretaraṃ sevanācittassa upaṭṭhānepi tassā micchācāro na siyā, tathā purisassapi sevanāpayogābhāveti, tasmā attano ruciyā pavattitassa vasena tayo, balakkārena pavattitassa vasena tayoti sabbepi aggahitaggahaṇena cattāro sambhārāti vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“破坏义利”是以业道来解说的,因为这里讨论的是业道。“其”指欺骗者的。“以此而说虚妄”的思就是“妄语”;在这一种解释中,以不真实的方式令对象了知的表业加行是“妄”,而能等起它的思就是“妄语”,由于这样说过,所以另说“另一种理趣”等。“不愿给予自己的所有物”等,是就与妄语共通的特性而说。即使以嬉笑为动机,只要以欺骗为首要,就是妄语。“对他人”:指应被以欺骗方式告知的对象。“彼”:指妄语的加行。显示巴利原文
Atthabhañjakoti kammapathavasena vuttaṃ. Kammapathakathā hesāti. Assāti visaṃvādakassa. Musā vadati etenāti cetanā musāvādo, imasmiṃ pakkhe atathākārena vatthuno viññāpanapayogo musā, taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā cetanāmusāvādoti vuttattā tato aññathā vattuṃ ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāyātiādi musāvādasāmaññena vuttaṃ. Hasādhippāyenapi visaṃvādanapurakkhārassa musāvādo. Parassāti visaṃvādanavasena viññāpetabbassa. Soti musāvādapayogo.
“空无的状态”(suññabhāvaṃ):指因无喜而呈空虚之状。声粗恶故,不悦于耳;义被损故,不悦于心。这些是心被染污者之相,“心被染污者”(saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa)指为嗔恚或贪欲所染污的心。显示巴利原文
Suññabhāvanti pītivirahitatāya rittabhāvaṃ. Pharusasaddatāya neva kaṇṇasukhā. Atthavipannatāya na hadayasukhā. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittassāti dosena, lobhena vā dūsitacittassa.
「Ekantapharusā cetanā」:以此显示纯粹是嗔心,而这种嗔心应理解为并非出于令对方死去的意图。若怀令其死去的意图,事相上即是杀生;若无此意,则可能只是杀生所依的嗔恚。对于引发粗恶语的对象,当面言说即是首要形式(当面为首);亦有认为背后言说同样算作首要的说法。此处合理的意趣应是:当面使用时,因对不敬者施展强力,其思可能更为有力,且能令对方领解其意,背后言说则并非如此。正如在受辱者死后于火葬场忏谢,能消除毁谤的障碍,同样,背后使用的粗恶语依然成立,这是可以理解的。
「Tassā」:指那纯粹的粗恶思,为阐明纯粹由粗恶之思而有粗恶语。
「Mammacchedako savanapharusatāya」:意指伤及心髓、听闻粗恶之义。
「Cittasaṇhātāya pharusavācā na hoti kammapathā’ppattattā, kammabhāvaṃ pana na sakkā vāretuṃ」:当心柔软时,粗恶语不成为业道,因其未达业道之量;然而,其业的性质是无法否认的。显示巴利原文
Ekantapharusā cetanāti etena duṭṭhacittataṃyeva vibhāveti, duṭṭhacittatā cassa amaraṇādhippāyavasena daṭṭhabbā. Sati hi maraṇādhippāye atthasiddhi, tadabhāve pāṇātipātabyāpādā siyunti. Yaṃ paṭicca pharusavācā payujjati, tassa sammukhāva sīsaṃ eti. Parammukhāpi sīsaṃ eti evāti apare. Tatthāyaṃ adhippāyo yutto siyā – sammukhā payoge agāravādīnaṃ balavabhāvato siyā cetanā balavatī, parassa ca tadatthaviññāpanaṃ, na tathā asammukhāti. Yathā ca akkosite mate āḷahane katā khamāpanā upavādantarāyaṃ nivatteti, evaṃ parammukhā payuttā pharusavācā hotiyevāti sakkā viññātuṃ. Tassāti ekantapharusacetanāya eva pharusavācābhāvassa āvibhāvatthaṃ. Mammacchedako savanapharusatāyāti adhippāyo. Cittasaṇhātāya pharusavācā na hoti kammapathā’ppattattā, kammabhāvaṃ pana na sakkā vāretuṃ. Evaṃ anvayavasena cetanāpharusatāya pharusavācaṃ sādhetvā idāni tameva byatirekavasena sādhetuṃ ‘‘vacanasaṇhatāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Esāti pharusavācā. Kammapathabhāvaṃ appattā appasāvajjā, itarā mahāsāvajjā. Tathā kilesānaṃ mudutibbatābhedehi sabbaṃ purimasadisaṃ.
「Āsevanaṃ bahulīkaraṇaṃ」:指反复修习、多所作。
若杂秽语是缘于某对象而发起,而对方未领受,则过患小;若对方已领受,则达业道程度,过患大。再者,任何杂秽语皆由两种资粮成就。还应了知,依烦恼的软、强程度,亦有小过患与大过患的差别。显示巴利原文
Āsevanaṃ bahulīkaraṇaṃ. Yaṃ uddissa pavattito, tena aggahite appasāvajjo, gahite mahāsāvajjo kammapathappattito. Yo koci pana samphappalāpo dvīhi sambhārehi sijjhati. Kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasenapi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā veditabbā.
“Attano pariṇāmanaṃ cittenevā”ti:应知这是用心将自己的功德回向。
“Hitasukhaṃ byāpādayatī”ti:它破坏生起者的利益与安乐。
“Aho vatā”ti:此语显示彻底破坏的思惟。由如此粗暴的现行,便成就了业道。
“Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvenā”ti:因为未如实执取,即对无常等真实自性,反而执取为常等。
“Micchā passatī”ti:颠倒而见。
“Samphappalāpo viyā”ti:以此显示,因反复修习而减轻,故过患小;因重大,故过患大。
“Gahitākāraviparītatā”ti:指邪见所执取的方式之颠倒。
“Vatthuno”ti:说明邪见所缘的对象具有不符合实际情况的自性。
“Tathābhāvenā”ti:以所执取的方式,对于该见行者,或对于所缘的呈现,即是“正是如此,而非其他”。显示巴利原文
Attano pariṇāmanaṃ cittenevāti veditabbaṃ. Hitasukhaṃ byāpādayatīti yo taṃ uppādeti, tassa hitasukhaṃ vināseti. Aho vatāti iminā accantavināsacintanaṃ dīpeti. Evaṃ hissa dāruṇapavattiyā kammapathappatti. Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvenāti yāthāvaggāhassa abhāvena aniccādisabhāvassa niccādito gahaṇena. Micchā passatīti vitathaṃ passati. Samphappalāpo viyāti iminā āsevanassa mandatāya appasāvajjataṃ, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjataṃ dasseti. Gahitākāraviparītatāti micchādiṭṭhiyā gahitākārassa viparītabhāvo. Vatthunoti tassā ayathābhūtasabhāvamāha. Tathābhāvenāti gahitākāreneva tassa diṭṭhigatikassa, tassa vā vatthuno upaṭṭhānaṃ evametaṃ, na ito aññathāti.
“Dhammato”ti:从法的自性而言,即从本质上说。
“Koṭṭhāsato”ti:在触等第五支等心所的部分中,凡是属于某一分者,即从该角度说。意思是指那些以思为本质的法。
“Cetanādhammā”ti:即以思为自性的法。显示巴利原文
Dhammatoti sabhāvato. Koṭṭhāsatoti phassapañcamakādīsu cittaṅgakoṭṭhāsesu yaṃ koṭṭhāsā honti, tatoti attho. Cetanādhammāti cetanāsabhāvā.
在“按顺序的七种业道”这句话中,或许会问:为何思在阿毗达摩中未被放在业道中来说?如此一来,按顺序的七种业道之说岂非不合理了?并非不合理,因为未说到思,另有原因。的确,在阿毗达摩中,并非由于思不具业道性才在业道聚中不提及它,而是因为“业道有时存在,并非恒常”,业道性不确定,所以才没有说。然而,当思成为业道时,它被归入业道聚中并无妨碍。
此处可能会有人质疑:如果思由于并非恒常具有业道性、业道性不确定,因而在业道聚中未被说,那么贪欲等也存在尚未达到业道性的状态,其业道性同样不确定,如此岂不是也应在业道聚中不被说吗?不会如此,因为贪欲等在彼处已被说为业道,或以同分的方式被说。若是这样,那么思也应在那中被说才对?确实应如此,然而“思即是杀生等”这一事实极为明显,大概正是因其业道性过于明显,才未被说。实际上,对于思,因为有“比丘们,我说思就是业”“比丘们,有三种身思是不善的身业”这样的经文,思的业性是显而易见的;而且,正是业成为趣向善。显示巴利原文
Paṭipāṭiyā sattāti ettha nanu cetanā abhidhamme kammapathesu na vuttāti paṭipāṭiyā sattannaṃ kammapathabhāvo na yuttoti? Na, avacanassa aññahetukattā. Na hi tattha cetanāya akammapathattā kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ, kadāci pana kammapatho hoti, na sabbadāti kammapathabhāvassa aniyatattā avacanaṃ. Yadā pana kammapatho hoti, tadā kammapatharāsisaṅgaho na nivārito. Etthāha – yadi cetanāya sabbadā kammapathabhāvābhāvato aniyato kammapathabhāvoti kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ, nanu abhijjhādīnaṃ kammapathabhāvaṃ appattānaṃ atthitāya aniyato kammapathabhāvoti tesampi kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati kammapathatātaṃsabhāgatāhi tesaṃ tattha vuttattā. Yadi evaṃ cetanāpi tattha vattabbā siyā? Saccametaṃ, sā pana pāṇātipātādikāti pākaṭo, tassā kammapathabhāvoti na vuttā siyā. Cetanāya hi – ‘‘cetanāhaṃ, bhikkhave, kammaṃ vadāmi (a. ni. 6.63; kathā. 539), tividhā, bhikkhave, kāyasañcetanā akusalaṃ kāyakamma’’ntiādivacanato (kathā. 539) kammabhāvo pākaṭo, kammaṃyeva ca sugatiduggatīnaṃ tattha uppajjanakasukhadukkhānañca pathabhāvena pavattaṃ kammapathoti vuccatīti pākaṭo tassā kammapathabhāvo, abhijjhādīnaṃ pana cetanāsamīhanabhāvena sucaritaduccaritabhāvo cetanājanitapiṭṭhivaṭṭakabhāvena sugatiduggatitaduppajjanakasukhadukkhānaṃ pathabhāvo cāti na tathā pākaṭo kammapathabhāvoti teyeva tena sabhāvena dassetuṃ abhidhamme cetanā kammapatharāsibhāvena na vuttā , atathājātiyakattā vā cetanā tehi saddhiṃ na vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mūlaṃ patvāti mūladesanaṃ patvā, mūlasabhāvesu dhammesu vuccamānesūti attho.
“不与取以有情为所缘”这一说法,与“五学处唯以有限所缘为所缘”这一问分巴利文相违。然而,杀生等恶戒的所缘,正是其离的所缘;离的确就是从应违犯的对象上远离的。说“以有情为所缘”,是就取名为“有情”的诸行作为所缘而说,因此并无矛盾。正如《迷惑冰消》(《分别论注》)中所说:“其中那些被说为以有情为所缘的学处,因为它们是以那些被称为‘有情’的诸行作为所缘的。”另有一说:由于应从不同类的对象即“女人、男人”来把握,故说以有情为所缘。在杂秽语中,如“一见,二闻”等,是以所见、所闻、所觉、所知为缘。同样地,在贪欲这里,“同样地”一词也将“以所见、所闻、所觉、所知为缘”这一句带了过来,并非仅以见等方式贪求,就只显示以有情诸行为所缘。至于在“没有化生有情”这种观点中生起的邪见,则是以三界一切法为境,依此意图而说它以诸行为所缘。那么,邪见如何能以三界一切法为所缘呢?因为它们是共通的。当有“善行恶行之业无果报”的说法生起时,实质上连色界、无显示巴利原文
Adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇanti idaṃ ‘‘pañca sikkhāpadā parittārammaṇā eva vā’’ti imāya pañhapucchakapāḷiyā virujjhati. Yañhi pāṇātipātādidussīlyassa ārammaṇaṃ, tadeva taṃ veramaṇiyā ārammaṇaṃ. Vītikkamitabbavatthuto eva hi viratīti. Sattārammaṇanti vā sattasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhārārammaṇameva upādāya vuttanti nāyaṃ virodho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 714) ‘‘yāni sikkhāpadāni ettha sattārammaṇānīti vuttāni, tāni yasmā sattoti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ saṅkhārameva ārammaṇaṃ karontī’’ti. Visabhāgavatthuno ‘‘itthī, puriso’’ti gahetabbato sattārammaṇoti eke. ‘‘Eko diṭṭho, dve sutā’’tiādinā samphappalapane diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasena. Tathā abhijjhāti ettha tathā-saddo ‘‘diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasenā’’ti idampi upasaṃharati, na sattasaṅkhārārammaṇataṃ eva dassanādivasena abhijjhāyanato. ‘‘Natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti pavattamānāpi micchādiṭṭhi tebhūmakadhammavisayāvāti adhippāyenassā saṅkhārārammaṇatā vuttā. Kathaṃ pana micchādiṭṭhiyā sabbe tebhūmakadhammā ārammaṇaṃ hontīti? Sādhāraṇato. ‘‘Natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko’’ti hi pavattamānāya atthato rūpārupāvacaradhammāpi gahitā eva hontīti.
国王们常处安乐,即使面带笑容也会说“处死那个贼!”然而,他们的笑意是指向别处的,所以说“做出决定者……乃是思”。显示巴利原文
Sukhabahulatāya rājāno hasamānāpi ‘‘coraṃ ghātethā’’ti vadanti, hāso pana tesaṃ aññavisayoti āha ‘‘sanniṭṭhāpaka…pe… hotī’’ti.
“某些的”是指俱生的那些,即不与取等。它们以相应的方式令其生起,即以俱生的方式生起。“某些的”又指非俱生的。这是依亲近缘的意义,由此遮止了贪以根的意义给予助成的主张。因为,令善法得以稳固成就的意义即是根的意义,而这与因缘性是不分离的;因此在这里,应当如树根一般,理解其为“根”。而从直接的意义上说,先前所说的“某些的”——也就是俱生的——才应知为根。藉由“贪染者……”等经文,也表明了杀生等不善是以贪为根本因,而不是以根的意义不加分别地去助成,因为它们并非处在因缘的状态。显示巴利原文
Kesañcīti sahajātānaṃ adinnādānādīnaṃ. Sampayuttapabhāvakaṭṭhenāti sampayutto hutvā uppādakaṭṭhena. Kesañcīti asahajātānaṃ. Upanissayapaccayaṭṭhenāti etena mūlaṭṭhena lobhassa upakārataṃ nivatteti. Suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanaṭṭho hi mūlaṭṭho, so ca hetupaccayatāavinābhāvī, tena cettha mūlamiva mūlanti gahetabbaṃ, nippariyāyato pana pubbe ‘‘kesañcī’’ti vuttānaṃ sahajātānaṃ mūlabhāvo veditabbo. Ratto khotiādinā suttapadenapi pāṇātipātādīnaṃ akusalānaṃ lobhassa mūlakāraṇataṃ vibhāveti, na mūlaṭṭhenupakāratthaṃ avisesato tesaṃ hetupaccayattābhāvato.
「善业道」的注释。显示巴利原文
Kusalakammapathavaṇṇanā
「怨敌」(vera)指杀生等恶法。由于它正是怨敌之因,故称「怨敌」。它作出呵斥,拦阻道:“我正安住于此,你怎能来?”——这就是「离怨敌」(veramaṇī),也就是离。因此说“断除”。本来应说「离」(viramaṇī)处,依词源规则加上e-,便说成veramaṇī。在《分别论》(分别论703,704)中,正是如此指明的。对于未受戒者,在具体情境中,从现前可被违犯的对象上自然生起的远离,称为「自然离」(sampattavirati);由于受戒而生起的远离,称为「受戒离」(samādānavirati);透过断除烦恼而持续生起的远离,称为「正断离」(samucchedavirati)。显示巴利原文
Veranti pāṇātipātādipāpadhammaṃ. So hi verahetutāya ‘‘vera’’nti vuccati, taṃ maṇati ‘‘mayi idha ṭhitāya kathamāgacchasī’’ti tajjentī viya nivāretīti veramaṇī. Tenāha ‘‘pajahatī’’ti. ‘‘Viramaṇī’’ti vattabbe niruttinayena eva-kāraṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Vibhaṅge (vibha. 703, 704) eva niddisanavasena evaṃ vuttā. Asamādinnasīlassa sampattato yathāupaṭṭhitavītikkamitabbavatthuto virati sampattavirati, samādānavasena uppannā virati samādānavirati, samādānavasena uppannā virati samādānavirati, kilesānaṃ samucchindanavasena pavattāvirati samucchedavirati.
因为混杂了鲜血,活兔子的肉便称为「鲜血肉」。由于他对一切众生心怀平等的悲悯,便把兔子放了。随后,他说出真实语,决意道:“凭借这句真实语,愿我母亲的病平息!”显示巴利原文
Jīvamānasasassa maṃsarudhirasammissatāya allasasamaṃsaṃ. Muñci sabbattha samakaruṇatāya. Saccaṃ vatvā ‘‘etena saccavajjena mayhaṃ mātu rogo sammatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi.
「大蛇」即蟒蛇。凭着戒的威德,它放他离开,便自行走了。显示巴利原文
Mahāsappoti ajagaro. Muñcitvā agamāsi sīlatejena.
「善巧」即是智:因由善巧而转起、通达,或从善巧而生起,故称为善巧。「躺卧于卑劣」则是以卑劣的方式躺卧、随眠、转起。此处本应说「离善」,但为与提问相应,回答时未用复数形式的「善」,而只说单数的「善」。显示巴利原文
Kosallaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ, kosallena, kosallato vā pavattiyā upagamanato. Kucchitasayanatoti kucchitenākārena sayanato anusayanato, pavattanato vā. ‘‘Veramaṇikusalā’’ti vattabbāpi pucchānurūpaṃ vissajjananti ‘‘kusalā’’ti na vuttā, ‘‘kusala’’ntveva vuttā.
虽然这段巴利经文只提及「远离」,然而在《学处分别》(《分别》704)中,也援引了「思」并加以阐明。因此,兼顾此二者而说:「思亦起作用,远离亦起作用。」显示巴利原文
Kāmañcettha pāḷiyaṃ viratiyova āgatā, sikkhāpadavibhaṅge (vibha. 704) pana cetanāpi āharitvā dīpitāti tadubhayampi gaṇhanto ‘‘cetanāpi vaṭṭanti viratiyopī’’ti āha.
当无贪作为根本、进而作为业道支分时,所说的「无贪」这一法,从其根本上说即是无贪善根——应当如此理解其义。其余两句,解说方式亦同。显示巴利原文
Anabhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā kammapathakoṭṭhāsaṃ patvā anabhijjhāti vuttadhammo mūlato alobho kusalamūlaṃ hotīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
「以恶戒为所缘」「以彼为所缘」「以命根等为所缘」——如何由这些断除种种恶戒?为说明此义,便开示了「然而正如……」等。显示巴利原文
Dussīlyārammaṇā tadārammaṇā jīvitindriyādiārammaṇā kathaṃ dussīlyāni pajahantīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「无贪欲……远离者」意指断除贪欲者。并非从意恶行而有远离,而是由无贪欲等本身便能断除彼。于「无贪」等句中,应依于不善根中所说之方法而了知。显示巴利原文
Anabhijjhā…pe… viramantassāti abhijjhaṃ pajahantassāti attho. Na hi manoduccaritato virati atthi anabhijjhādīheva tappahānasiddhito. Tesu alobhotiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ akusalamūlesu vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
「Appanāvāra」指结语部分。「以一种方法」:即在种种观业处中,如受等,唯以无色门这一种业处的方法。应当说:「除贪欲外,有九不善业道。」或者,「十」一词应与「善业道」相连,即「十不善业道与十善业道」。由说「除贪欲」,即已显示不善业道为九。或者,「十」一词应从两方面连接。因为贪欲虽应断除,却仍属于应遍知的范围。正如所说:「对色的渴爱、令人欢喜、可悦意的」等。因此,由彼应遍知性,它确实也被摄入苦圣谛;但依应断除之义,故说「除贪欲」。所以他说:「然而依方便,一切业道皆是苦圣谛。」依贪欲与贪的生起形态所安立的差别,而说「此二法」。在经典的方式中,渴爱被称为「集圣谛」,因此他说「无方便的集圣谛」。「无转起」是指转起灭尽的相,如「贪尽、嗔尽」(《相应部》4.314)。当通过有因有缘而把握了以有为自性的苦圣谛时,那由无因无缘的无为灭圣谛,便作为对立面而转向;当把握了纯有过失、具积聚相的集圣谛时,那远离过失、具离系相的道圣谛显示巴利原文
Appanāvāranti nigamanavāraṃ. Ekena nayenāti vedanādivasena arūpamukheneva anekavidhesu vipassanākammaṭṭhānesu ekena kammaṭṭhānanayena. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā abhijjhaṃ nava akusalakammapathā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Dasāti vā idaṃ ‘‘kusalakammapathā’’ti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ ‘‘akusalakammapathā ca dasa kusalakammapathā cā’’ti. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā abhijjha’’nti hi imināva akusalakammapathānaṃ navabhāvo vutto hoti. Atha vā dasāti idaṃ ubhayathāpi sambandhitabbaṃ. Abhijjhā hi pahātabbāpi sati pariññeyyataṃ nātivattatīti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpataṇhā piyarūpaṃ sātarūpa’’ntiādi, tasmā sā tāya pariññeyyatāya dukkhasaccepi saṅgahaṃ labhateva, pahātabbaṃ pana upādāya ‘‘ṭhapetvā abhijjha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘pariyāyena pana sabbepi kammapathā dukkhasacca’’nti. Abhijjhālobhānaṃ pavattiākārasiddhabhedaṃ upādāya ‘‘ime dve dhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Suttantanayena taṇhā ‘‘samudayasacca’’nti vuttāti āha ‘‘nippariyāyena samudayasacca’’nti. Appavattīti appavattinimittamāha yathā ‘‘rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.314). Sappaccayatāya saṅkhatasabhāve dukkhasacce gahite appaccayatāya asaṅkhataṃ nirodhasaccaṃ paṭipakkhato āvattati, ekantasāvajje ācayagāmilakkhaṇe samudayasacce gahite sāvajjā vigamanaṃ apacayagāmilakkhaṇaṃ maggasaccaṃpaṭipakkhato āvattatīti dve āvattahāravasena veditabbānīti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha nettiyaṃ (netti. 4.niddesavāra) –
“于同一立足处,却寻求其余的立足处;
转向对立的一方,即名为‘转向者’。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ekamhi padaṭṭhāne, pariyesati sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ; Āvattati paṭipakkhe, āvatto nāma so hāro’’ti.
“以一切方式”:即依欲贪、色贪等一切种类,或从一切堕恶趣的方面,又或毫无剩余地对他们。“唯以一切方式”即从一切方面。“引导出离”即除去、断除。“于任何一法皆不令为分别”:即从色、受等诸法中,不对任何一法加以分析,不一一别别执取,唯以总聚的方式执取。“我是”:即以“我存在”的我慢执取方式。然而,因其毫无剩余地执取五蕴,故说“以总聚执取的方式”。此处是就最上道心而言,故说“与见相似的随眠”。正如邪见依“彼色是我”等而执取色等,生起“我存在”;同样地,慢也以“我是最优胜的”等方式生起,因此说“由‘我是’生起的缘故,随眠与见相似”。“作为边际者”:即作为最终边际,因为自此之后苦不再产生。“以业道开示”:即通过业道这一门径而开示四圣谛。“以作意通达”:即依观的作意与道的通达。显示巴利原文
Sabbākārenāti kāmarāgarūparāgādisabbappakārehi, sabbato vā apāyagamanīyādiākārato, tattha kiñcipi anavasesetvā vā. Sabbākārenevāti sabbākārato. Nīharitvāti apanetvā, samucchinditvāicceva attho. Kañci dhammaṃ anavakārīkaritvāti rūpavedanādīsu kañci ekadhammampi avinibbhogaṃ katvā, ekekato aggahetvā samūhatova gahetvāti attho. Asmīti ahamasmīti mānaggāhavasena. So pana yasmā pañcakkhandhe niravasesato gaṇhāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samūhaggahaṇākārenā’’ti. Yasmā cettha aggamaggacittaṃ vuccati, tasmā āha ‘‘diṭṭhisadisaṃ mānānusaya’’nti. ‘‘Yaṃ rūpaṃ taṃ aha’’ntiādinā yathā diṭṭhi rūpādiṃ ‘‘ahamasmī’’ti gaṇhantī pavattati, evaṃ mānopi ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādināti āha ‘‘mānānusayo asmīti pavattattā diṭṭhisadiso’’ti. Paricchedakaroti osānaparicchedakaro ito paraṃ dukkhassābhāvakaraṇato. Kammapathadesanāyāti kammapathamukhena pavattacatusaccadesanāya. Manasikārappaṭivedhavasenāti vipassanāmanasikāramaggappaṭivedhavasena.
关于食的部分的注释显示巴利原文
Āhāravāravaṇṇanā
90 “取来”的意思是带来、令生起及作支撑。“已生者”指那些已经出生者,因为从此时起,世间才施设“已生”之名。然而,从结生识执取开始,直到出离母胎为止,这段期间都称为“求有者”。这是就胎生者中“已生”与“求有”的区分而言;而对于其余化生等类,则是依初生之心等来作区分。此处,“生起”一词,对胎生者是“出生”的同义词,对其余诸生类则是“生起”的同义词。因为在初生之心与初威仪路的那一刹那,他们称为寻求、趋近于生起,还不算“已生”,因为其生起尚未稳固。“唯独是已生者”,是因为对有爱的寻求已彻底断尽。“不复再有”,是以决定之词显示被遮止的意义,正如“彼已尽寿”等经文中,“已生者”一词应被理解为指诸漏尽者。这里的“或”字是总括之义,就像“由火或由水”等语句的用法一样。显示巴利原文
90.Āharatīti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.11) āneti, uppādeti upatthambheti cāti attho. Nibbattāti pasutā. Tato paṭṭhāya hi loke jātavohāro. Paṭisandhiggahaṇato pana paṭṭhāya yāva mātukucchito nikkhamanaṃ, tāva sambhavesino. Esa tāva gabbhaseyyakesu bhūtasambhavesivibhāgo, itaresu pana paṭhamacittādivasena vutto. Sambhava-saddo cettha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ vasena pasūtipariyāyo, itaresaṃ vasena uppattipariyāyo. Paṭhamacittapaṭhamairiyāpathakkhaṇesu hi te sambhavaṃ uppattiṃ esanti upagacchanti nāma, na tāva bhūtā uppattiyā na suppatiṭṭhitattā. Bhūtāyeva sabbaso bhavesanāya samucchinnattā. Na puna bhavissantīti avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘yo ca kālaghaso bhūto’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.2.190) bhūta-saddassa khīṇāsavavācitā daṭṭhabbā. Vā-saddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho ‘‘agginā vā udakena vā’’tiādīsu (udā. 76) viya.
“由各自为缘的摄益,即是令有身于此世间得以安立”,怀着此意趣,所以说:“只是言辞差别……实质上是一回事。”关于“有情已生的诸法”,是指有情相续中已生的种种法。正如在说“能住世百年”时,这意味着它是以相续的方式流转;同样地,“为住立”的意义也是以相续的方式流转,而相续即是不间断,所以说“为无间断故”。因为有情的相续,正是由于相续之法的生起,才被称为受摄益,所以说“为令未生者生起故”。这些“摄益”、“住立”之类的词语,应被理解为是就两方面而说,并非逐一对应。显示巴利原文
Yathāsakaṃ paccayabhāvena attabhāvassa paṭṭhapanamevetthaāhārehi kātabbaanuggahoti adhippāyenāha ‘‘vacanabhedo…pe… ekoyevā’’ti. Sattassa uppannadhammānanti sattassasantāne uppannadhammānaṃ. Yathā ‘‘vassasataṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vutte anuppabandhavasena pavattatīti vuttaṃ hoti, evaṃ ṭhitiyāti anuppabandhavasena pavattiyāti attho, sā pana avicchedoti āha ‘‘avicchedāyā’’ti. Anuppabandhadhammuppattiyā sattasantāno anuggahito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘anuppannānaṃ uppādāyā’’ti. Etānīti ṭhitianuggahapadāni. Ubhayattha daṭṭhabbāni, na yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.
住于所依中的食素,与所依一同具有应被摄取的性质,因此说“从可被吞食的角度,是食”。至于由食素所生起的食素,则将针对它说:“段食能带来以食素第八微为首的诸色。”粗显的特性是由于食素微少,而非由于所依的粗大或坚硬。因此,在哪一种所依中食素微少,那种所依便被称作粗显。蛇等所食之物,因其能产生痛苦,应视为粗显。角等物,如果被吐出三年之久,因为腐烂,有人说那是细软的;但刚吞下时,由于豺狼唾液的润泽而呈现那种样子,所以它们也属于细软。这终归是诸法自身的体性。兔子的食物是细软的,因为它吃的是嫩草和嫩芽;鸟类的食物是细软的,因为它吃的是草籽等;边地人的食物是细软的,因为他们也以枝叶、干谷、莲叶为食。此处所说的细软食,是指他化自在天众生的食物。所谓“唯是细软”,并非与其他相比,而是说它已达到细软的极致,因为没有比这更细软的了。显示巴利原文
Vatthugatā ojā vatthu viya tena saddhiṃ āharitabbataṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhoharitabbato āhāro’’ti. Nibbattitaojaṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharatī’’ti vakkhati. Oḷārikatā appojatāya, na vatthuno thūlatāya, kathinatāya vā, tasmā yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ parittā ojā hoti, taṃ oḷārikaṃ. Sappādayo dukkhuppādakatāya oḷārikāveditabbā. Visāṇādīnaṃ tivassachaḍḍitānaṃ pūtibhūttatā mudukatāti vadanti, taracchakheḷatemikatāya pana tathābhūtānaṃ tesaṃ mudukatā. Dhammasabhāvo hesa. Sasānaṃāhāro sukhumo taruṇatiṇasassakhādanato. Sakuṇānaṃ āhāro sukhumo tiṇabījādikhādanato. Paccantavāsīnaṃ sukhumo, tesañhi sākapaṇṇasukkhakurapadumapattampi āhāroti. Tesaṃ paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ. Sukhumotvevāti na kiñci upādāya, atha kho sukhumo icceva niṭṭhaṃ patto tato paraṃ sukhumassa abhāvato.
然而,在此是依基体而说食的粗与细,而这种粗细性又应藉由食素的少与多来了解,为说明此义,故说“在此”等语。“疲劳”指因饥饿而生起的身体劳倦。“除去”是说基体仅能暂时去除那种疲劳,却不能守护身体,即因无坚实性而不能令身体延续;粗食不能去除疲劳,以其无法充满胃腔。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvasena panettha āhārassa oḷārikasukhumatā vuttā, sā cassa appojamahojatāhi veditabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Parissamanti khudāvasena uppannaṃ sarīrakhedaṃ. Vinodetīti vatthu tassa vinodanamattaṃ karoti. Na pana sakkoti pāletunti sarīraṃ yāpetuṃ nappahoti nissārattā. Na sakkoti parissamaṃ vinodetuṃ āmāsayassa apūraṇato.
“六种亦皆”此语,是表示没有任何触被排除在外。在此,触等之所以成为第二等,完全是依据开示“食”的顺序,而非其他原因,故说“即是开示的次第”等。“意思”,是为了表明这是意的思,而非有情的思,因此用了“心”这个词,正如“心之住立、心解脱”等说法,所以说“即是思”。“心”指任何心,并非唯指果报识。显示巴利原文
Chabbidhopīti iminā kassacipi phassassa anavasesitabbatamāha. Āhārassadesanākkamenevettha phassādīnaṃ dutiyāditā, na aññena kāraṇenāti āha ‘‘desanānayo evā’’tiādi. Manaso sañcetanā, na sattassāti dassanatthaṃ manogahaṇaṃ yathā ‘‘cittassa ṭhiti (dha. sa. 11), cetovimutti cā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.69) āha ‘‘manosañcetanāti cetanā evā’’ti. Cittanti yaṃ kiñci cittaṃ, na vipākaviññāṇameva.
由于前文已说“诸食即是缘”,故以“若缘之义为食之义”等进行质问。那么为何只说此四种食?这是衔接:为何只说四种,且只说此四种。“因为是殊胜缘”一句,表明:其他缘法对其所缘生的法,仅仅是作为缘而已,但这四种食却既是如此,又别有作用;在同为缘的状态中,它们还是增上的缘,所以才被称为“食”。这是为了显示此义。现在为显明那种增上的缘性,而展开“是殊胜缘”等文。段食是色身的殊胜缘,因为它有支持的作用。因此《清净道论》的注释中说:“由于支持色法与非色法,四食为食缘。”因为即使有生起的作用,对于非色的食和食生色而言,食生色的生起也必须有支持的状态;若无支持的状态,食便没有生起的作用,因此支持的状态是主要的。即使是正在生起的食,也是以不中断的方式在支持着而生起,所以支持的状态即是食的状态。触是受的殊胜缘,因为说“缘于触而有受”。由于说“缘于行而有识”,所以思是识的殊胜缘,因为说“思产生三种有”。又由于说“缘于识而有名色”,所以识是名色的殊胜缘。显示巴利原文
Pubbe ‘‘āhāranti paccaya’’nti vuttattā ‘‘yadi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭho’’tiādinā codeti. Atha kasmā imeyeva cattāro vuttāti atha kasmā cattārova vuttā, ime eva ca vuttāti yojanā. Visesapaccayattāti etena yathā aññe paccayadhammā attano paccayuppannassa paccayāva honti, ime pana tathā ca honti aññathā cāti samānepi paccayatte atirekapaccayā honti, tasmā āhārāti vuttāti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Idāni taṃ atirekapaccayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesapaccayo hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Visesapaccayo rūpakāyassa kabaḷīkāro āhāro upatthambhakabhāvato. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 2.708; paṭṭhā. aṭṭha. paccayuddesavaṇṇanā) ‘‘rūpārūpānaṃ upatthambhakattena upakārakā cattāro āhārā āhārapaccayo’’ti. Upatthambhakattañhi satipi janakatte arūpīnaṃ āhārānaṃ āhārajarūpasamuṭṭhāpakarūpāhārassa ca hoti, asati pana upatthambhakatte āhārānaṃ janakattaṃ natthīti upatthambhakattaṃ padhānaṃ. Janayamānopi hi āhāro avicchedavasena upatthambhayamāno eva janetīti upattambhakabhāvo eva āhārabhāvo. Vedanāya phasso visesapaccayo. ‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti (udā. 1; ma. ni. 3.126) vacanato viññāṇassamanosañcetanā. ‘‘Cetanā tividhaṃ bhavaṃ janetī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti pana vacanato nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ visesapaccayā. Na hi okkantiviññāṇābhāve nāmarūpassa attasambhavo. Yathāha ‘‘viññāṇañca hi, ānanda, mātukucchismiṃ na okkamissatha, api nu kho nāmarūpaṃ mātukucchismiṃ samuccissathā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.115). Vuttamevatthaṃ suttena sādhetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
虽然缘的含义也就是食的含义,但由于殊胜的缘性,只将这四种称为“食”。前面已不分门别类地显示了它们的殊胜缘性,现在为了分门别类地显示,便开始了“然而这里,什么是……”等文。即使仅将食物放在口中尚未咀嚼,仅凭那样,也已经成为了内在食的缘。因此说“令八种色生起”。对乐受有利益的,是乐受的所缘。所谓“由一切种”,是指依眼触等一切种类的方式。触的一切种类差别,按这些种类,一切种类的触也都是触食。它们各自如其所应地带来三种受;没有任何受不是这样带来的食。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ yadipi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭho, visesapaccayatāya pana ime eva āhārāti vuttāti taṃ nesaṃ visesapaccayataṃ avibhāgato dassetvā idāni vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘ko panetthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Mukhe ṭhapitamattoyeva asaṅkhādito, tattakenapi abbhantarassa āhārassa paccayo hoti eva. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Sukhavedanāya hito sukhavedaniyo. Sabbathāpīti cakkhusamphassādivasena. Yattakā phassassa pakārabhedā, tesaṃ vasena sabbappakāropi phassāhāro. Yathārahaṃ tisso vedanā āharati, anāhārako natthi.
在这里,“由一切种”的含义也应按触食中所说的方法来理解。所谓“通过三种相续”,即身十法聚、性根十法聚、心所依十法聚这三类相续。“通过俱生等缘的方法”,即通过俱生等缘的法则。因为结生识对于与自己俱生的名法,以俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、异熟根缘、相应缘、有缘、不离缘等成为缘;正是以食缘的状态,才说“它食”。而对于俱生的色法,除了对心所依的相应缘之外,以不相应缘;对于其余的色法,除相互缘之外,应按上述所说的方法来连接。“那些”用中性词表述,是因为中性词可以与中性词一起说,即使所指并非中性词。显示巴利原文
Sabbathāpīti idhāpi phassāhāre vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Tisantativasenāti kāyadasakaṃ bhāvadasakaṃ vatthudasakanti tividhasantativasena. Sahajātādipaccayanayenāti sahajātādipaccayavidhinā. Paṭisandhiviññāṇañhi attanā sahajātanāmassa sahajātaaññamaññanissayavipākindriyasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hontoyeva āhārapaccayatāya taṃ āhāretī vuttaṃ, sahajātarūpesu pana vatthuno sampayuttapaccayaṃ ṭhapetvā vippayuttapaccayena, sesarūpassa aññamaññapaccayañca ṭhapetvā vuttanayenevayojanā kātabbā. Tānīti napuṃsakaniddeso anapuṃsakānampi napuṃsakehi saha vacanato.
这里仅说到有漏的善与不善思。为了显示殊胜缘的状态,故说“hetanti”。因此说“然而普遍地……”等。只说结生识,在这里也是同样的道理。正如由于这些食对于各自的果有殊胜的缘性而有食的含义,同样地,从普遍的角度而言也是如此,为了显示这一点,故说“然而普遍地……”等。其中,“那些相应和那些俱生的法”,是指与那些触等相应的法,以及由它们所生起的色法。在这里,对“相应”的把握应依其各自情况来看,而对“俱生”的把握则是普遍的。显示巴利原文
Sāsavākusalākusalacetanāva vuttā. Visesapaccayabhāvadassanaṃ hetanti. Tenāha ‘‘avisesena panā’’tiādi. Paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vuttanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yathā tassa tassa phalassa visesato paccayatāya etesaṃ āhāraṭṭho, evaṃ avisesatopīti dassantena ‘‘avisesena panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṃsampayuttataṃsamuṭṭhānadhammānanti tehi phassādīhi sampayuttadhammānañceva taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammānañca. Tattha sampayuttaggahaṇaṃ yathārahato daṭṭhabbaṃ, samuṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ pana avisesato.
“以支持而完成食的作用”:正是通过支持,色法才得以生起;而它完成支持的作用,正是通过令食生色等八法生起。“正是触着而完成食的作用”:即正在作触的作用。“正在造作而完成食的作用”:即正在思惟、正在连结。“正是了别着而完成食的作用”:即以再生计度的方式,在了别的当下完成食的作用。这是衔接。其余两句也是如此。而它们能完成食的作用,是因为它们是受等生起的原因,也就是令有身运转。显示巴利原文
Upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādhetīti upatthambhentoyeva rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, ojaṭṭhamakarūpasamuṭṭhāpaneneva panassa upatthambhanakiccasiddhi. Phusantoyevāti phusanakiccaṃ karonto eva. Āyūhamānāvāti cetayamānā eva abhisandahantī eva. Vijānantamevāti upapattiparikappanavasena vijānantameva āhārakiccaṃ sādhetīti yojanā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Āhārakiccasādhanañca tesaṃ vedanādiuppattihetutāya attabhāvassa pavattanameva.
为什么说“以令身住立”?这是针对“难道业生等色不是由业等而运转吗?”的质问,而说“即使是业所生的……”等。由于通过支持执受色的相续,也就完成了对时节生色和心生色相续的支持,因此说“两种色相续”。正是着眼于这种支持,也说“成为守护者”。因为令色身存续的原因,即是维持与守护。显示巴利原文
Kāyaṭṭhapanenāti kasmā vuttaṃ? Nanu kammajādirūpaṃ kammādināva pavattatīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kammajanitopī’’tiādi. Upādinnarūpasantatiyā upatthambhaneneva utucittajarūpasantatīnampi upatthambhanasiddhi hotīti ‘‘dvinnaṃ rūpasantatīna’’nti vuttaṃ. Upatthambhanameva sandhāya ‘‘anupālako hutvā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Rūpakāyassa ṭhitihetutā hi yāpanā anupālanā.
“作为乐等所依之处”:即成为乐等生起的处所。因为即使是所缘,也在此处停留——通过作为所缘的方式,那些以它为所缘的法,便称为“事”。“正是触着”:这是就触有触的自性而说的,因为诸法若离自性便无法转起。没有受的转起,众生就没有流转的可能,因此说“成为乐等……的有”;而在这里,于有想生存的讨论中,不应显示无想生存;或者说,作为原因的受的转起,已经包含了那种存续的原因。正如所说:“意思即是……由于令有之根成就,故成为众生存续的原因。”由此,正因如此,才说“识正是了别着:通过再生计度的方式,在了别着的时候”等等,这也正是这个意思。显示巴利原文
Sukhādivatthubhūtanti sukhādīnaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Ārammaṇampi hi vasati ettha ārammaṇakaraṇavasena tadārammaṇā dhammāti vatthūti vuccati. Phusantoyevāti idaṃ phassassa phusanasabhāvattā vuttaṃ. Na hi dhammānaṃ sabhāvena vinā pavatti atthi. Vedanāpavattiyā vinā sattānaṃ sandhāvanatā natthīti āha ‘‘sukhādi…pe… hotī’’ti, na cettha saññībhavakathāyaṃ asaññībhavo dassetabbo, tassāpi vā kāraṇabhūtavedanāpavattivaseneva ṭhitiyā hetuno abyāpitā. Tathā hi ‘‘manosañcetanā…pe… bhavamūlanipphādanato sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hotī’’ti vuttā, tato eva ‘‘viññāṇaṃ vijānantamevāti upapattiparikappanavasena vijānantamevā’’ti vuttovāyamatthoti.
通过显示过患,应看到四种怖畏。“贪求”即渴望。这是针对味爱而说的,因为在段食中,味爱特别强,因此于此处作了简别。“由此而生恐惧”,故称为怖畏;贪求本身就是怖畏,因为它是巨大灾祸的原因。“接近”是在境、根、识中——特别于境和识中——以结合的方式转起;由于那是受等生起的原因,故说为“怖畏”。简别的用意即如上述。其余两项也是如此。“造作”即连结,也说为安排;由于那是再生的原因,故说为“怖畏”。“投生”是在此、彼诸有中,通过结生执取的方式而生起。它是一切以再生为因的过患的根本原因,故说为“怖畏”。现在,为了详细显示贪求等的可怖性,便展开“什么原因?”等文。其中,“作了贪求”即产生了爱著、生起了渴爱,这是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Cattāribhayāni daṭṭhabbāni ādīnavavibhāvanato. Nikantīti nikāmanā. Rasataṇhaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sā hi kabaḷīkāre āhāre balavatī. Teneva tattha avadhāraṇaṃ kataṃ. Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, nikantiyevabhayaṃ mahānatthahetuto. Upagamanaṃ visayindriyaviññāṇesu visayaviññāṇesu eva ca saṅgativasena pavatti, taṃ vedanādiuppattihetutāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Avadhāraṇe payojanaṃ vuttanayameva. Sesadvayepi esevanayo. Āyūhanaṃ abhisandahanaṃ, saṃvidhānantipi vadanti. Taṃ bhavūpapattihetutāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhinipāto tattha tattha bhave paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena nibbatti. So bhavūpapattihetukānaṃ sabbesaṃ anatthānaṃ mūlakāraṇattā ‘‘bhaya’’nti vutto. Idāni nikantiādīnaṃ sappaṭibhayataṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃkāraṇā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha nikantiṃ katvāti ālayaṃ janetvā, taṇhaṃ uppādetvāti attho.
“接近触”指使眼触等各种触生起。“触的味著者”即通过身触而味著触所(触的所缘)的人。为了显示众生通过身触而对触所生起渴爱,在说明触食的过患时,将触所作为所缘举出:“对于他人所守护、秘密的……”等。或者,“触的味著者”就是触食的味著者。因为有触食时,众生才会于触所生起味著,无触食则无味著,故说“以触味为根本”等。显示巴利原文
Phassa upagacchantāti cakkhusamphassādibhedaṃ phassaṃ pavattentā. Phassassādinoti kāyasamphassavasena phoṭṭabbasaṅkhātassa phassassa assādanasīlā. Kāyasamphassavasena hi sattānaṃ phoṭṭhabbataṇhā pavattatīti dassetuṃ phassāhārādīnavadassane phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ uddhaṭaṃ ‘‘paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesū’’tiādinā. Phassassādinoti vā phassāhārassādinoti attho. Sati hi phassāhāre sattānaṃ phassārammaṇe assādo, nāsatīti. Tenāha ‘‘phassassādamūlaka’’ntiādi.
由于生相怖畏是以投生的自性而被执取,故说“以彼为根本”,意思就是业造作的相。显示巴利原文
Jātinimittassa bhayassa abhinipātasabhāvena gahitattā ‘‘tammūlaka’’nti vuttaṃ, kammāyūhananimittanti attho.
“投生”即再生。因为众生的最初再生在种种地方,犹如坠入火炭坑一般的“有”中,与“投落”相似,故称投生。“以此为根”:因为它是名色再生的根本。显示巴利原文
Abhinipatatīti abhinibbattati. Paṭhamābhinibbatti hi sattānaṃ tattha tattha aṅgārakāsusadise bhave abhinipātasadisīti. Tammūlakattāti nāmarūpanibbattimūlakattā.
“在那里”是指那些譬喻中。“以真实义作了说明”意为:不是虚构的意义,而是以真实、过去曾经发生过的意义来说明。当人手里拿着路粮赶路时,路粮仿佛也在行走,所以说“走着而路粮耗尽”。或者,“走了”意为“由于行走”。他们被饥渴所逼迫,无力走到浓密树荫的树下,便在稀疏树荫处坐下。“现在我已虚弱得无法再做那件事了。”那个步履踉跄的幼童又被饥渴压垮,于是就在行走途中死去了。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti tāsu upamāsu. Bhūtamatthaṃ katvāti na parikappitamatthaṃ, atha kho bhūtaṃ bhūtapubbaṃ atthaṃ katvā. Pātheyyahatthesu gacchantesu pātheyyaṃ, gacchantaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘gantvā pātheyyaṃ niṭṭhāsī’’ti. Gantvāti vāgamanahetūti attho. Khuppipāsāturatāya ghanacchāyaṃ rukkhaṃ upagantuṃ asamatthā viraḷhacchāyāyaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Na dāni sakkā taṃ mayā kātuṃ atidubbalabhāvato. Parikkhalitagatitaruṇadārako khuppipāsābhibhūto ca, tasmā gacchantoyeva mato.
“由于同种类肉”:指由于同一种类的肉,即人肉。因为人肉在世间令人厌恶,所以是不净的,正如智者所避弃。在人肉中,亲族的肉因不适合受用而不净,其中子女的肉更不净,爱子的肉尤其不净;幼嫩的肉、生肉、未与凝乳一起烹调的、未加盐的、未熏烤的,依次越来越不净。应当了解从较下等的肉到较上等的肉,不净性逐渐增强的道理。“如子肉”:通过令不净相现起,观想为如同子肉。“在那里耗尽欲乐”:以圣道断除对食物的期盼。显示巴利原文
Sajātimaṃsatāyāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.63) samānajātimaṃsatāya, manussamaṃsatāyāti attho. Yaṃ manussamaṃsaṃ, tañhi loke jigucchanīyattā paṭikulaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ viññūhi vajjitaṃ, manussamaṃsesupi ñātimaṃsaṃ ayuttaparibhogatāya paṭikūlaṃ, tatthāpi puttamaṃsaṃ, tatthāpi piyaputtamaṃsaṃ, tatthāpi taruṇamaṃsaṃ, tatthāpi āmakamaṃsaṃ, tatthāpi agorasābhisaṅkhataṃ, tatthāpi aloṇaṃ, tatthāpi adhūpitanti evaṃ heṭṭhimato uttaruttarassa paṭikūlatarabhāvakāraṇatā daṭṭhabbā. Puttamaṃsasadisanti paṭikūlatāupaṭṭhāpanena puttamaṃsasadisaṃ katvā passati. Tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyatīti ariyamaggena āhāre sāpekkhaṃ khepeti.
“那牛”:即经中(《相应部》2.63)所说“比丘们,譬如一头牛……”的那头牛。“撕裂后”:即拔出之后。“依止而住”:指以之为缘而转起。基于苦苦等,三种感受皆是苦,故说“感受之苦者”。显示巴利原文
Sā gāvīti ‘‘seyyathāpi bhikkhave gāvī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.63) evaṃ sutte vuttagāvī. Uddāletvāti uppāṭetvā. Nissāya tiṭṭhatīti paṭiccapaccayaṃ katvā pavattati. Dukkhadukkhatādivasena tiṇṇampi vedayitānaṃ dukkhabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vedayitadukkhassā’’ti.
即使是世人所共许的善趣,由于变易的行苦与烦恼苦,实如大火聚,故说“以大热恼义,三有”。正如那两个拖拽人的男子,同样地,依善与不善而有二种意思。应知,若如实行持令意思不再转起,便于彼处耗尽欲乐。显示巴利原文
Sādhusammatāpi gati vipariṇāmasaṅkhāradukkhatāvasena kilesadukkhavasena ca mahāpariḷāhāyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahāpariḷāhaṭṭhena tayo bhavā’’ti. Yathā upakaḍḍhakā dve purisā, evaṃ kusalākusalavasena dve manosañcetanā. Yathā manosañcetanā na pavattati, tathā paṭipajjanto tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyatīti veditabbo.
“被百矛所刺”本身即是譬喻,即“百矛所刺的譬喻”;在此譬喻中,“那百矛”即这位男子所受的。“落在之处”:指被先前的矛所刺中的部位。由于种种苦相续生起,故苦无量。“蕴之生起”:指诸蕴的相续生起;而最初的生起就是结生。如同罪犯,结生识是种种苦生起的所依,也是那些苦所趣向之处。与它相应的诸法以它为主而转起,故说“识的苦之生起”。正如所说:“诸法以意为前导”(《法句》1,2)。应知,如是为令识未来不以结生方式转起而修习者,便在那里耗尽欲乐。显示巴利原文
Sattisatena hatā eva upamā sattisatahatūpamā, tassaṃ sattisatahatūpamāyaṃ. Taṃ sattisataṃ. Assa purisassa. Patitokāseti purimasattīhi patitappadese. Dukkhassa pamāṇaṃ natthi anekassa aparāparaṃ uppajjanato. Khandhajanananti khandhānaṃ aparāparuppādo, paṭhamābhinibbatti pana paṭisandhi eva. Āgucārī puriso viya paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ nānappakāradukkhuppādasannissayato, tehi ca dukkhehi upagantabbato. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ pamukhabhāvena pavattiyā ‘‘viññāṇassa dukkhuppādoti vuttā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti (dha. pa. 1, 2) yathā viññāṇaṃ āyatiṃ paṭisandhivasena na pavattati, evaṃ karaṇaṃ tattha nikantipariyādānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“了知事物”指的即是苦谛。“五欲贪”是以五种欲为所缘的贪。“已经被遍知”意为,通过决断的智慧已超越了它。因为当味爱完全正确地消失时,色爱等也必定消失。如此一来,欲贪结便被彻底断除;应知如此修行即是在彼处耗尽欲乐。由于遍知现观成就时,断现观也就成就了。为了显示欲贪结断除后,连丝毫的下劣结也不会残留,所以他说“没有那种结”等。这是为了表明:通过对抟食的遍知,能够证得不还果。为了表明对其他食的遍知最终会证得阿拉汉果,他才开始说“比丘们,在触上……”等。这其中,“三种爱”指的是欲爱、色爱和无色爱,这就是三种爱。显示巴利原文
Pariññātaṃvatthūti dukkhasaccamāha. Pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgoti pañcakāmaguṇārammaṇo rāgo. Pariññāto hotīti paricchijja jānanena samatikkanto hoti. Rasataṇhāya hi sammadeva vigatāya rūpataṇhādayopi vigatāyeva honti. Tathā ca sati kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ samucchinnameva hoti, evaṃ karaṇaṃ tattha nikantipariyādānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pariññābhisamaye hi siddhe pahānābhisamayo siddho evāti. Pahīne ca kāmarāgasaṃyojane orambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ lesopi nāvasissatīti dassento āha ‘‘natthi taṃ saṃyojana’’ntiādi. Tena kabaḷīkārāhārapariññā anāgāmitaṃ pāpetīti dasseti. Sesāhārapariññā pana arahattaniṭṭhā evāti dassento ‘‘phasse bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha tisso taṇhāti kāmataṇhā rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhāti imā tisso taṇhā.
为了将“由过去爱之集”这一略说的义理详细展开,才开始说“如何……”等。其中,“以爱为缘而生”的意思是:以爱作为缘而生起。在结生刹那,通过显示诸食如何因过去爱之集而生起,其实也就同时显示了执取食在生命流转的刹那也生起了;为了不触及那个,转而单独显示非执取食的爱之集,所以说了“然而,因为……”等。“在这里”是指在这部经中,它们被混同讲述,未作区分。“由俱生爱作为缘而生”:这里特别用“俱生”一词,是为了显示也有由非俱生爱为缘而生起的非执取食这种情况存在。然而,那种非执取食,因为生起的共相也是“由非俱生爱为缘而生”,恐怕会让人把它和前面所说的执取食混淆,所以没有特别举出来;但这并不能成为理由,因为有“依贪,忧生起”这样的说法,以及可以由爱作为亲依缘、依嗔心所生的食素而得到非执取食。那么,爱如何成为食素的亲依缘呢?虽然在《发趣论》中,任何一处都没有说色法有亲依缘,但这并不矛盾,因为这里指的是经典的方法:“当有了这个,就有那个;这个就是那个的亲依缘”,应以这样的意趣来理解,正如……显示巴利原文
‘‘Purimataṇhāsamudayā’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha taṇhāpaccayanibbattāti taṇhāpaccayā nibbattā. Paṭisandhikkhaṇe purimataṇhāsamudayā āhārānaṃ samudayadassaneneva pavattikkhaṇepi upādinnakaāhārasamudayo dassito hotīti taṃ anāmasitvā anupādinnakānaṃ taṇhāsamudayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ sutte missitvā kathitā avisesitattā. Sahajātataṇhāpaccayanibbattoti ettha sahajātaggahaṇaṃ asahajātataṇhāpaccayanibbattopi anupādinnakaāhāro labbhatīti dassanatthaṃ. So pana asahajātataṇhāpaccayanibbattatāsāmaññenapi yathāvuttaupādinnakāhārena saṃsayaṃ janeyyāti na uddhaṭo, na ca etaṃ kāraṇaṃ ‘‘rāgaṃ upanissāya domanassaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vacanato, taṇhopanissayapaṭighacittasamuṭṭhānāya ca ojāya vasena anupādinnakaāhārassa labbhanato. Kathaṃ pana taṇhā ojāya upanissayapaccayo; na hi paṭṭhāne katthaci rūpassa upanissayapaccayo vutto atthīti. Nāyaṃ virodho ‘‘yasmiṃ sati yaṃ hoti, so tassa upanissayo’’ti suttantanayassa adhippetattā yathāvuttatthasambhavato. Tenevāha ‘‘imissā…pe… taṇhāya nirodhenā’’ti.
因为当因完全灭尽时,果也就完全灭尽,所以他说“食灭显现”。由于食属于苦谛的一部分,取“食”来观察,就等于取了“苦谛”来观察,因此他补充说“在这里,四谛全都以其真实面貌被宣说了出来”。开示圣谛,纯粹是为了显示苦等应当被遍知、应当被断除等,因此,为了表明对于老死等,其“应被遍知”等属性应当不迷惑地加以观察,他说:“在一切处,应当不迷惑地择取四谛”。显示巴利原文
Kāraṇe sabbaso niruddhe phalampi sabbaso nirujjhatīti āha ‘‘āhāranirodho paññāyatī’’ti. Āhārānaṃ dukkhasaccekadesattā āhāraggahaṇaṃ dukkhasaccaggahaṇameva hotīti āha ‘‘idha cattāripi saccāni sarūpeneva vuttānī’’ti. Saccadesanā dukkhādīnaṃ yāvadeva pariññeyyādibhāvasandassanatthā, tasmā jarāmaraṇādīsu pariññeyyādibhāvo asammohato sallakkhetabboti dassento ‘‘sabbattha asammuyhantena saccāni uddharitabbānī’’ti āha.
谛论注释显示巴利原文
Saccavāravaṇṇanā
91 “以种种方式解说”:即藉由苦、老死等种种方式,对诸圣谛作略说与广说。“苦”:指苦圣谛即是苦,并非仅仅是苦受。显示巴利原文
91.Yena yena pariyāyena byākarotīti yena yena dukkhādijarāmaraṇādipariyāyena ariyasaccāni saṅkhepato ca vitthārato ca katheti. Dukkhanti dukkhasaccaṃ dukkhaṃ, na dukkhamattaṃ.
老死论注释显示巴利原文
Jarāmaraṇavāravaṇṇanā
92 「诸他们」:这是依想要说明的意图而作此解说。因此,如同说「每个村庄都庄严」时,所有那样的村庄都依庄严性而被包含;同样地,说「诸那些众生之生」时,所有众生都依名为生的变异而被包含。因此他说:「这是简略地、对众多众生共通的解说。」显示巴利原文
92.Tesaṃtesanti byāpanicchāvasenāyaṃ niddeso kato, tasmā yathā ‘‘gāmo gāmo ramaṇīyo’’ti vutte ramaṇīyatāya tādisā sabbepi gāmā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, evaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ jātī’’ti vutte jātisaṅkhātavikāravasena sabbepi sattā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso’’ti.
“依趣、依生”:依五趣而说,且在每一趣中,又依刹帝利等、地居天等、象等之生而说。“部类”者,众生被归类于此,或依此而被归类,故称部类,即种姓、行为等的区分。老的自性,名为青春的减损,故“老”是对名为青春减损之自性的解说;而依明显的老来解说,是因为通过齿落等现象才得以把握。老化即是老化性,或以“性”字表示老化者的状态。因此他说:“这是状态的解说”。因牙齿等而有了破损,此人为“破损者”,即补特伽罗。其状态为“齿落”。此人有白发,故为“白发者”,其状态为“白发苍苍”。此人有皱纹之皮,故为“皮皱者”,其状态为“皮皱”。这些齿落等即是老。这是依展示变异,即依显示衰败而说。“风”者,指大风团。依齿落等所行之道是明显的,故说取齿落等现象是对老的作用的解说,以表明此义。并非齿落等本身就是老;从羯罗蓝时开始,先前诸色在到达老之刹那,生起后后诸色,后后诸色随顺成熟之色,渐次极熟、极熟而生起。当极熟之色成熟时,便生起齿落等自性之法。它们犹如水、道路等处草木的毁坏等,在名为已行于成熟之道的极熟色中生起,唯被称为“老所行之道”,而非老本身。显示巴利原文
Gatijātivasenāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.1.2) pañcagativasena, tatthāpi ekekāya gatiyā khattiyādibhummadevādihatthiādijātivasena ca. Nikiyyanti sattā ettha, etena vāti nikāyo, gottacaraṇādivibhāgo. Jarāya sabhāvo nāma vayohāni, tasmā jarāti vayohānisaṅkhātassa sabhāvassa niddeso, pākaṭajarāvasena niddeso khaṇḍiccādivasena gahaṇato. Jīraṇameva jīraṇatā, jīrantassa vā ākāro tā-saddena vutto. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ ākāraniddeso’’ti. Dantādīnaṃ vasena khaṇḍaṃ jātaṃ etassāti khaṇḍito, puggalo. Tassa bhāvo khaṇḍiccaṃ. Palitaṃ etassa atthīti palito, tassa bhāvo pāliccaṃ. Vali taco etassāti valittaco, tassa bhāvo valittacatā. Ime khaṇḍiccādayo jarā. Vikārānaṃ dassanavasenāti vipattidassanavasena. Vātassāti mahato vātakkhandhassa. Khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo, tasmā khaṇḍiccādiggahaṇaṃ jarāya kiccaniddesoti vuttanti dasseti. Na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarāti kalalakālato pabhuti purimarūpānaṃ jarāpattakkhaṇe uppajjamānāni pacchimarūpāni paripakkarūpānurūpāni pariṇatapariṇatāni uppajjantīti anukkamena supariṇatarūpānaṃ paripākakāle uppajjamānāni khaṇḍiccādisabhāvāni uppajjanti, tāni udakādimaggesu tiṇarukkhasaṃbhaggatādayo viya paripākagatamaggasaṅkhātesu paripakkarūpesu uppannāni ‘‘jarāya gato maggo’’icceva vuttāni, na jarāti.
“依本性”:指依果报成熟的本性,或说老所应得的果即是本性,由此显示老。“极清净”:即极为清净。为从作用上显示那极清净性,故说“即使是微细的也……”等。因为诸根的锐利明了,就是他们的极清净性。“浑浊”:即混乱。“不明了”:即不清晰。显示巴利原文
Pakatiyāti phalavipaccanapakatiyā, jarāya vā pāpuṇitabbaṃ phalamevapakati, tāya jarā dīpitā. Suppasannānīti suṭṭhu pasannāni. Tameva suppasannataṃ kiccato dassetuṃ ‘‘sukhumampī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tikkhavisadatā hi tesaṃ indriyānaṃ suppasannatā. Āluḷitānīti ākulāni. Avisadānīti abyattāni.
诚然,即使在色法中,刹那老也是难觉察、被隐匿的;但它在相续流转中变得明显,所以只说为“明显的老”。无间、无间隔的老称为“无间老”,因为在有情的相续中,它持续不断地生起。“于其他者”:指于弱十年等之中,依前十年等的划分,不同于如前所述的情况。“各个之间”:即在他们所说的种类中,于前十年等与后十年等之间。“颜色之差异等”:指颜色的差异、形状的差异、触感的差异等。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ rūpadhammesupi khaṇikajarā durupalakkhitā paṭicchannāva, sā pana yasmā santānavasena pavattiyā paribyattāva hotīti ‘‘pākaṭajarā’’icceva vuttā. Avīci nirantarā jarā avīcijarā sati santāne sattānaṃ anuppabandhato. Tato aññesūti mandadasakādīsu pubbadasakādiparicchedato aññesu yathāvuttesu. Antarantarāti tesu eva vuttappakāresu purimadasakādito pacchimadasakādīnaṃ antarantarā. Vaṇṇavisesādīnanti vaṇṇavisesasaṇṭhānavisesasamphassavisesādīnaṃ.
「依言词」:因为借助ka字将词语扩展后而说,所以说「死」即是「死灭」。而它对于一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有中的死,不加区别地总括把握,故说:「是对一蕴、四蕴、五蕴的共同称谓」。或者「依死者」:即依死去之补特伽罗之义。死灭即是死灭性,故说「以状态之词」。「显示相」:即对名为衰亡之相的显示。或者,死者的状态以「性」字说为「死灭性」。破坏即毁坏,故说「表明死灭诸蕴之崩解现起」。犹如已破裂的瓶,无论如何不能以完整瓶的状态而存在;已坏的诸蕴也是如此,死灭即名为消失,故说「表明……消失」。所谓「死神」的毁坏,与所谓「死亡」的舍命,合此二者而说为「死神、死亡」,应当如此理解此处之义。世间所说的「时间终结者之作用」,即是死灭、死亡之义。或者,死的时间,因其不可超越而特称为「时」,其作用,据真实义即是死灭诸蕴崩解之现起。前文以「死灭、死灭性」等,是结合世俗之说而作的解说。显示巴利原文
Vacanakavasenāti ka-kārena hi padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuttaṃ, tasmā cavanaṃ cutīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ pana ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu cutiyā avisesato gahaṇanti āha ‘‘ekacatupañcakkhandhānaṃ sāmaññavacana’’nti. Cavanakavasenāti vā cavanakassa puggalassa vasenāti attho. Cavanameva cavanatāti āha ‘‘bhāvavacanenā’’ti. Lakkhaṇanidassananti vayasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa nidassanaṃ. Cavantassa vā ākāro tā-saddena vutto ‘‘cavanatā’’ti. Bhijjanaṃ bhedoti vuttaṃ ‘‘cutikkhandhānaṃ bhaṅguppattiparidīpana’’nti. Yathā bhinnassa ghaṭassa kenaci pariyāyena ghanaghaṭabhāvena ṭhānaṃ natthi, evaṃ bhinnānaṃ khandhānanti cavanaṃ antarahitaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘antaradhānanti…pe… paridīpana’’nti. Yo maccūti vuccati bhedo, yañca maraṇaṃ pāṇacāgo, tadubhayaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘maccu maraṇa’’nti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kālassa antakassa kiriyāti yā loke vuccati, sā cuti, maraṇanti attho. Cavanakālo eva vā anatikkamanīyattā visesena kāloti vuttoti tassa kiriyā atthato cutikkhandhānaṃ bhedappattiyeva. ‘‘Cuti cavanatā’’tiādinā pubbe vohāramissakena niddiṭṭhaṃ.
现在,为了显示「这是依已生起的究竟义理趣而作解说」,故说「以究竟义阐明」。因为前面以「依死者」等,是依于补特伽罗、并以世俗为所依而作的注释。化生者不弃任何骸骨,唯有死灭诸蕴的消失;此后,时节生色的相续便不再转起。对于「生之集」等中应说的义理,依于「渴爱之集」等中已说的道理即可了知,因此不再赘述。显示巴利原文
Idāni nibbattitaparamatthanayeneva niddesoti dassetuṃ ‘‘paramatthena dīpetu’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cavanakavasenā’’tiādinā hi puggalavasena ca vohārādhiṭṭhānā saṃvaṇṇanā katā. Na kiñci kaḷevaraṃ nikkhipaki opapātikānaṃ cutikkhandhānaṃ antaradhānamevahoti, tato paraṃ utusamuṭṭhānarūpasantati na pavattati. ‘‘Jātisamudayā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘taṇhāsamudayā’’tiādīsu vuttanayaneva sakkā viññātunti na vuttaṃ.
生章节的注释显示巴利原文
Jātivāravaṇṇanā
93 「以正在生起为义」等,是为了通过依处和生处,以每两个词为一组的方式,涵盖一切众生之后,显示「生」而说的。然而在《破迷论》(Sammohavinodanī)中,因为说到「依正在出生的状态为生,依完全出生的状态为全面生」,所以应当了知:在该处,是以每个词单独涵盖一切众生之后而显示「生」的。由于作了「诸处完全成就的生即是全面生」这样的解释,所以说「它依于诸处圆满的方式而相应」。应当了知:仅用「生」这个词所说的生,就是指诸处不圆满的状态。明显的出生即是「发生」,意思是明显的出生。以「对于这些那些众生……发生」的方式,由于是依于众生而发生的,所以这是通俗的教导。显示巴利原文
93.Jāyanaṭṭhenātiādi āyatanavasena yonivasena ca dvīhi dvīhi padehi sabbasatte pariyādiyitvā jātiṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 191) pana ‘‘jāyamānakavasena jāti, sañjāyanavasena sañjātī’’ti vuttattā tattha ekekeneva padena sabbasatte pariyādiyitvā jātiṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sampuṇṇā jāti sañjātīti katvā ‘‘sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā’’ti vuttaṃ. Eteneva kevalaṃ jātisaddena vuttāya jātiyā aparipuṇṇāyatanatā daṭṭhabbā. Abhibyattā nibbatti abhinibbatti, pākaṭā nibbattīti attho. ‘‘Tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ…pe… abhinibbattī’’ti sattavasena pavattattā vohāradesanā.
“于处处”(tatratatrāti)一词,此处应如此理解摄集:在四蕴有中,结生刹那生起两处;在一蕴有中,结生刹那生起两处;在其余的色界中,结生刹那生起五处;在欲界中,依根的具足与否,分别生起七处、九处、十处、复又十处及十一处,这是依处(āyatana)而作的摄集。虽然死灭诸蕴(cutikkhandhā)以无间缘等为缘,引生紧随的结生法(paṭisandhikadhammānaṃ),但经中所说的“再生有”(upapattibhavo),指的仅是那些作为集起而非直接能生再生的业。为阐明唯能生者才是此处所说的“有”(bhavo),论师云:“须知,‘业有’(kammabhavo)才是生起之缘。”显示巴利原文
Tatratatrāti ettha catuvokārabhave dvinnaṃ, ekavokārabhave dvinnaṃ, sesarūpadhātuyaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe uppajjamānānaṃ pañcannaṃ, kāmadhātuyaṃ vikalāvikalindriyavasena sattannaṃ navannaṃ dasannaṃ, puna dasannaṃ, ekādasannañca āyatanānaṃ vasena saṅgaho veditabbo. Yadipi cutikkhandhā anantarānaṃ paṭisandhikadhammānaṃ anantarādinā paccayā honti, ye pana samudayā ajanakā, te ettha upapattibhavoti adhippetā. Janako eva bhavoti adhippetoti dassento ‘‘jātiyā paccayabhūto kammabhavo veditabbo’’ti āha.
有之章节的注释显示巴利原文
Bhavavāravaṇṇanā
94 94. 依“令存在”与“存在”之义,“有”(bhava)分为两种。其中,业有(kammabhavo)因“再生有依此而生起”之意,以能令存在之义称为“有”。而在注释书中,则先说“再生有”为“它存在故为有”,后又因其为业之因,以果名呼因,故业亦称“有”——此义已明。此二处皆说:业作为再生有的原因而令其存在,即是“业”有“业有”这一同义语的缘由。“以一切方式”(sabbathāpīti),即依令存在、存在、善、不善、再生、成就、有、劣、胜等一切种类的方式而言。所谓“欲有”(kāmabhavoti),是依其为欲爱之因及欲爱之所缘这两种状态而说。能令投生于色有的业,即是“色有”(rūpabhavo);同样,能令投生于无色有的业,即是“无色有”(arūpabhavo);而那些各自所产生之诸蕴,则为色与无色的“再生有”。然此二者被称为“色有”、“无色有”的情形,亦应如这里所说“欲有”之理,参照理解。显示巴利原文
94. Bhāvanabhavanaṭṭhena bhavo duvidho. Tattha kammabhavo ‘‘bhavati etasmā upapattibhavo’’ti bhāvanaṭṭhena bhavo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana upapattibhavaṃ ‘‘bhavatīti bhavo’’ti vatvā tassa kāraṇattā kammaṃ phalūpacārena bhavoti ayamattho vutto, ubhayatthāpi upapattibhavahetubhāvanettha kammassa kammabhavapariyāyoti dassitaṃ hoti. Sabbathāpīti bhāvanabhavanakusalākusalaupapattisampattibhavahīnapaṇītādinā sabbappakārenapi. Kāmabhavoti vuttaṃ kāmataṇhāhetukato kāmataṇhāya ārammaṇabhāvato ca. Rūpabhavūpagakammaṃ rūpabhavo, tathā arūpabhavūpagakammaṃ arūpabhavo, taṃtaṃnibbattakkhandhā rūpārūpupattibhavā, rūpārūpabhavabhāvo pana tesaṃ ‘‘kāmabhavo’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
取之章节的注释显示巴利原文
Upādānavāravaṇṇanā
95 95. “取”(upādānanti),指的是四种取(catubbidhaṃ upādānaṃ)。譬如,有人因耽著欲乐,或因耽著生存,而造作能投生种种善趣之有的业,此时该业以欲取(kāmupādāna)为缘;同样,在造作善业时,若执持“断灭”等邪见,随其所应,这四种取亦仅以亲依止缘(upanissaya)的方式,成为种种善的业有之缘。对于不善的业有,这些取不仅以亲依止缘,还以所缘缘(ārammaṇa)为缘,因为它们与不善业有是不俱生、无间的关系。在俱生的不善业有中,欲取以俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘、因缘这七种方式为缘;其余诸取在此情况下,除去因缘的作用,加入道缘,同样以七种方式为缘。而对于无间的不善业有,这些取则以无间缘、等无间缘、无间亲依止缘、无有缘、离去缘、习行缘为缘。须知,此处的“俱生等”,乃是由“等”(ādi)字所涵盖。执取所依的欲的事物(vatthukāma)的是心,或者显示巴利原文
95.Upādānanti catubbidhampi upādānaṃ. Yathā hi kāmassādavasena, bhavassādavasena vā taṃtaṃsugatibhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ karontassa kāmupādānaṃ, evaṃ ucchedādimicchābhinivesavasenāti cattāripi upādānāni yathārahaṃ tassa tassa kusalakammabhavassa upanissayavaseneva paccayā honti, akusalakammabhavassa asahajātassa anantarassa upanissayavasenapi ārammaṇavasenapi . Sahajātassa kāmupādānaṃ sahajāta-aññamañña-nissaya-sampayutta-atthi-avigata-hetu-vasena sattadhā, sesaupādānāni tattha hetupaccayabhāvaṃ pahāya maggapaccayaṃ pakkhipitvā sattadhāva paccayā honti. Anantarassa pana anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanavasena paccayā honti. Tassidampi sahajātādīti ādi-saddena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vatthukāmaṃ upādiyati cittaṃ, puggalo vā etenāti attho. Tanti vatthukāmaṃ. Kāmetīti kāmo ca so upādiyatīti upādānañcāti yojanā. Vuttanayenāti abhidhamme vuttanayena.
“常住之我”一语,是在执取前一种见时,为显明后一种见而说。如同为了使此见坚固,以前一见为基础,次第执取后一见一样,“无布施”等见也是如此。而此处的“执取我”,实即“我语取”,应知这并非在说明见取。至于“及世间”一词,则是脱离了“执取我”的执取,属于见取,于此应透过说明前一见与后一见的方式来理解。因为经中说“一切恶见皆称见取”,是故一切见皆为见取。显示巴利原文
Sassato attāti idaṃ purimadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyamānaṃ uttaradiṭṭhiṃ nidassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā esā diṭṭhi daḷhīkaraṇavasena purimaṃ purimaṃ uttarā uttarā upādiyati, evaṃ ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādikāpīti. Attaggahaṇaṃ pana attavādupādānanti nayidaṃ diṭṭhupādānadassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Loko cāti attaggahaṇavinimuttagahaṇaṃ diṭṭhupādānabhūtaṃ idha purimadiṭṭhiuttaradiṭṭhivacanehi vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Sabbadiṭṭhigatassa ‘‘diṭṭhupādāna’’nti etaṃ adhivacanaṃ ‘‘sabbāpi diṭṭhi diṭṭhupādāna’’nti vacanato.
所谓“执取戒禁取”,是指将戒禁执取为“清净之道”。这是就邪执著而说。或者,它本身就与邪执著俱行。由于与戒禁俱行,故称为“戒禁”;又因为它是坚固执取的状态,故称为“取”;合起来便是“戒禁取”。认为“这样即是清净”而生起执著,意思是通过牛戒、牛行那样的行为,便在轮回中获得清净,由此成为执著。如是,因执著与戒禁俱行,便说明“执著”一词应归属于此。显示巴利原文
Sīlabbataṃ upādiyantīti sīlabbataṃ ‘‘suddhimaggo’’ti upādiyanti. Etena micchābhinivesena. Sayaṃ vā taṃ micchābhinivesasahagataṃ. Sīlabbatasahacaraṇato sīlabbatañca taṃ daḷhaggāhabhāvato upādānañcāti sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Evaṃ suddhīti abhinivesatoti evaṃ gosīlagovatādicaraṇena saṃsārasuddhīti abhinivesabhāvato. Etena taṃ sahacaraṇato abhinivesassa taṃsaddārahataṃ dasseti.
“他们说”的意思,是依“我有我”等语而宣说,此即通过那种恶见而说。“仅仅是在说‘我’”的意思是,“我”只是一个言词罢了。由此表明:这只是一个言词所依的基础,也就是那些外道所施设的“我”。显示巴利原文
Vadantīti ‘‘atthi me attā’’tiādinā voharanti. Etena diṭṭhigatena. Attavādamattamevāti attāti vācāmattameva. Etena vācāvatthumattametaṃ, yadidaṃ bāhirakaparikappito attāti dasseti.
于“渴爱与欲取”中,这里依经说:“什么是欲取?即对于诸欲的欲求、欲贪、欲喜、欲爱、欲爱著、欲热恼、欲昏迷、欲耽著,这称为欲取。”因此,欲取就是渴爱的坚固状态。而所谓“渴爱的坚固状态”,是指以前面的渴爱为亲依止缘而变得坚固的后起渴爱本身。然而,有些论师说:显示巴利原文
Taṇhākāmupādānassāti ettha ‘‘tattha katamaṃ kāmupādānaṃ? Yo kāmesu kāmacchando kāmarāgo kāmanandī kāmataṇhā kāmasneho kāmapariḷāho kāmamucchā kāmajjhosānaṃ. Idaṃ vuccati kāmupādāna’’nti vacanato taṇhādaḷhattaṃ kāmupādānaṃ. Taṇhādaḷhattanti ca purimataṇhāupanissayapaccayato daḷhabhūtā uttarataṇhā eva. Keci panāhu –
“对尚未获得的所缘生起希求,这是‘爱’,犹如暗夜中盗贼伸手摸索;对已得的所缘牢牢抓取,这是‘取’,犹如彼贼攫取财物。”这些法(爱与取)是少欲与知足的对立面,是遍求与守护之苦的根源。因此,具有所述特征的‘爱’,对于具有所述特征且并非无间的‘取’,依亲依止缘为缘,亦依所缘缘等为缘;对于无间缘等,则依无间缘等方式为缘。因为一切贪,既可以用‘爱’这一同义词来表述,也可以用‘欲取’这一同义词来表述。至于其余(即见取等),则依俱生缘等为缘:于俱生者,以俱生缘等方式为缘;于非俱生者,以无间缘、亲依止缘等方式为缘。这一切都应依照前面已经说过的道理来理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Appattavisayapatthanā taṇhā andhakāre corassahatthappasāraṇaṃ viya, sampattavisayaggahaṇaṃ upādānaṃ tasseva bhaṇḍaggahaṇaṃ viyā’’ti. Appicchasantuṭṭhipaṭipakkhā ete dhammā pariyesanārakkhadukkhamūlāni, tasmā vuttalakkhaṇā taṇhā vuttalakkhaṇasseva upādānassa anānantarassa upanissayavasena paccayo, ārammaṇādivasenapi paccayo hotiyeva, anantarādīnaṃ pana anantarādivasena paccayo. Sabbassapi hi lobhassa taṇhāpariyāyopi kāmupādānapariyāyopi labbhatevāti. Avasesānanti diṭṭhupādānādīnaṃ. Sahajātādivasenāti sahajātānaṃ sahajātādivasena, asahajātānaṃ anantaraupanissayādivasenāti sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
关于“爱”的部分的释义。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāvāravaṇṇanā
96 「眼触」等,如同从母亲一方为儿子取名,是从所依处来称呼触的,以所依处为其生起之因;而所缘仅是纯粹的生起因。所以说“犹如长者……之名”等。所谓“以欲贪的状态”,即是对事欲的染著。「于色爱乐」,即由爱著与欢喜,于色所缘中耽乐、爱乐。乃以“此是常”等邪见而欢喜的方式,于色中享乐。「死后将不存在」,意为坏灭之后便无有,因不再生起。同样,声、香……等亦复如是:正如对色的渴爱,因欲贪之性,依常见之贪与断见之贪而转起,有三种渴爱;对声、香、味、触、法的渴爱也是如此。「爱行」,即爱的现行,指依种种现行方式而转起的爱。显示巴利原文
96. ‘‘Cakkhusamphasso’’tiādi phassassa mātito nāmaṃ viya puttassa vatthuto tassa nissayabhāvena uppattihetuttā, ārammaṇaṃ pana kevalaṃ uppattihetūti vuttaṃ ‘‘seṭṭhi…pe… nāma’’nti. Kāmarāgabhāvenāti vatthukāmassa rajjanavasena. Rūpaṃ assādentīti rupārammaṇaṃ taṇhābhinandanāvasena abhiramamānā eva assādentī. Niccantiādinā diṭṭhābhinandanāmukhena rūpaṃ abhiramantī. Pecca na bhavissatīti bhijjitvā na hoti puna anuppajjanato. Tathā saddakaṇhādayopīti yathā rūpataṇhā kāmarāgabhāvena sassatarāgavasena ucchedarāgavasenāti ca pavattiyā tisso taṇhā, tathā saddataṇhā gandharasaphoṭṭhabbadhammataṇhāpi. Taṇhāvicaritānīti taṇhāsamudācārā, samudācāravasena pavattataṇhāti attho.
「依内」的意思是,依靠内在的五蕴。这里虽然用的是属格形式,但表达的是受格的意义。「“我是”而有」的意思是:凡是通过渴爱、慢心和邪见来执取一个整体观念,而对内在的五蕴生起“我是”这样的想法——当这种执取存在时,就会这样生起。这就是这句话的意思。「“我是这样”而有」的意思是:在刹帝利等身份中,通过渴爱、慢心和邪见,生起“我就是这个样子的”这样的想法。这里没有和别人比较的执取。「如这些」——这个“等”字,涵盖了这些爱行:“‘我是如此’、‘我是别样’、‘我将有’、‘我将如是’、‘我将如此’、‘我将别样’、‘我存在’、‘我坏灭’、‘愿我存在’、‘愿我如是存在’、‘愿我如此存在’、‘愿我别样存在’、‘或许我存在’、‘或许我如是存在’、‘或许我如此存在’、‘或许我别样存在’”。其中,「“我是如此”」是在和同等身份的人比较后产生的执取,意思是:“就像这位刹帝利,就像这位婆罗门,我也是这样的”。「“我是别样”」是在和不同等身份的人比较后产生的执取,意思是:“就像这位刹帝利,就像这位婆罗门,我跟他们不一样,要么比他们低,要么比他们高”。这样,前面所说的这两项,是根据现在时而说的四种爱行。至于「“我将有”」等四项,则是根据未来时而说的。它们的含义应该按照前面四组中所讲的方法来理解。「“我存在”」——“存在”这个词,是指不可坏灭、常存的意思,是常住的同义词。因此,它的意思是:“我是常住的”。「“我坏灭”」——“坏灭”这个词,是指会灭去的意思,是无常的同义词。因此,它的意思是:“我是非常住的”。这样一来,这两项是依据常见和断见来说的。在这之后,「“愿我存在”」等四项,是依据疑惑和遍寻的心态来说的,它们的含义也应当依照前面四组中所讲的方法来理解。而「“或许我存在”」等四项,是依据“啊,但愿我能存在!”这样的希求与计度来说的,同样也应当依照前面四组中所讲的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattikassupādāyāti (vibha. aṭṭha. 973; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.2) ajjhattikaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya. Upayogatthe hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Asmīti hotīti yadetaṃ ajjhattaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena samūhagāhato asmīti evaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ satīti attho. Itthasmīti hotīti khattiyādīsu ‘‘idaṃpakāro aha’’nti evaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena hotīti idamettha anupanidhāya gahaṇaṃ. Evamādināti ādi-saddena ‘‘evaṃsmīti, aññathāsmīti, bhavissanti, itthaṃ bhavissanti, evaṃ bhavissanti, aññathā bhavissanti, asasmīti, satasmīti, siyanti, itthaṃ siyanti, evaṃ siyanti, aññathā siyanti, apāhaṃ siyanti, apāhaṃ itthaṃ siyanti, apāhaṃ evaṃ siyanti, apāhaṃ aññathā siya’’nti (vibha. 973) imesaṃ taṇhāvicaritānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tattha evaṃsmīti idaṃ samato upanidhāya gahaṇaṃ, yathā ayaṃ khattiyo, yathā ayaṃ brāhmaṇo, evaṃ ahampīti attho. Aññathāsmīti idaṃ asamaṇo upanidhāya gahaṇaṃ, yathā ayaṃ khattiyo, yathā ayaṃ brāhmaṇo, tato aññathā ahaṃ hīno vā adhiko vāti attho. Iti imāni pubbe vuttāni dveti etāni paccuppannavasena cattāri taṇhāvicaritāni. Bhavissantiādīni pana cattāri anāgatavasena vuttāni. Tesaṃ purimacatukke vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Asasmīti asatīti asaṃ. Niccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā sassato asmīti attho. Satasmīti sīdatīti sataṃ. Aniccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā asassato asmīti attho. Iti imāni dve sassatucchedavasena vuttāni. Ito parāni siyantiādīni cattāri saṃsayaparivitakkavasena vuttāni, tāni purimacatukke vuttanayena atthato veditabbāni. Apāhaṃ siyantiādīni cattāri ‘‘api nāmāhaṃ bhaveyya’’nti evaṃ patthanākappanavasena vuttāni, tāni purimacatukke vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.
在此,依常见与断见而说的两种,称为“见首”;而“我是”“我将有”“愿我存在”“或许我存在”这四项,则仅是“单纯首”;至于“我是这样”等,每一项又可各分为三种,总计十二项,称为“以首为根源的”。如是,当知依于内而有的爱行共十八种,即:二见首、四单纯首、十二以首为根源的。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca sassatucchedavasena vuttā dve diṭṭhisīsā nāma, asmi, bhavissaṃ, siyaṃ, apāhaṃ siyanti ete pana cattāro suddhasīsā eva, ‘‘itthasmī’’tiādayo tayo tayoti dvādasa sīsamūlakā nāma. Evametāni dve diṭṭhisīsā, cattāro suddhasīsā, dvādasa sīsamūlakāti ajjhattikassupādāya aṭṭhārassa taṇhāvicaritāni veditabbāni.
「依外」:指依于外在的五蕴。因为这里的属格也是用于受格的意义。「以此」:即以此色……乃至……以此识——像这样,在色等诸蕴中,把其中某一个执取为“我”,而把其余的部分执取为“我所”与障碍,然后由渴爱等力量,强烈地执著于“我是”;在这里,“以此”这个表达是它的特别之处。强烈地执著于“我是”,指的就是凭这把剑、凭这把伞、凭这个灌顶仪式,而强烈地执著于“我是刹帝利”这样的身份。「依止于外色等」:指依止于外在的、属于他人相续中的色、受等诸蕴。「十八种」:就是指通过这类“我是”等方式而生起的爱行有十八种,这些都应该按照前面讲过的方式来理解。因为这里唯一的特别之处就在于“以此”这个词,所以应当依照前面“二见为首”等所说的方式,把它们简别开来理解。而将这两方面合在一起,就说为“三十六种”。显示巴利原文
Bāhirassupādāyāti bāhiraṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya. Idampi hi upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Imināti iminā rupena vā…pe… viññāṇena vāti evaṃ rūpādīsu ekameva ‘‘aha’’nti, itaraṃ kiñcanapalibodhabhāvena gahetvā taṇhādivasena ‘‘asmī’’ti abhinivisati, ‘‘iminā’’ti ayamettha viseso. Asmīti iminā khaggena vā chattena vā abhisekena vā ‘‘khattiyohamasmī’’ti abhinivisati. Bāhirarūpādinissitānīti bāhirāni parasantatipariyāpannāni rūpavedanādīni nissitāni. Aṭṭhārasāti iminā ‘‘asmī’’tiādinayappavattāni aṭṭhārasa, tāni pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. ‘‘Iminā’’ti hi ayamevettha viseso, tasmā ‘‘dve diṭṭhisīsā’’tiādinā vuttanayeneva niddhāretvā veditabbā. Ubhayaṃ pana ekajjhaṃ katvā āha ‘‘chattiṃsā’’ti.
以解释之义:即藉由“贤友,有六爱身”等解释性经文的语句,阐明其义理。以解释之广说:即基于这一解释,再展开为一百零八种爱行。又复摄广说:即从两个方面广说的这十八种爱行分类,又可再收摄,总括为六种,乃至合为三种。显示巴利原文
Niddesatthenāti ‘‘chayime āvuso taṇhākāyā’’tiādiniddesapāḷiyā atthavacanena. Niddesavitthārāti tassa ca niddesassa aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritavasena vitthārena. Vitthārassa ca puna saṅgahatoti dvīhi ākārehi vitthāritassa aṭṭhārasataṇhāvicaritapabhedassa chaḷeva tissoyevāti ca puna saṅgahaṇato ca.
此处特指果报受,因为特别将受当作自我来享用。为阐明这种可被享用的特性,因而提出“如何”等后续的问难。“以味著”:指以欢喜、乐著的方式享用。“视为我所而执取”:指视之为财富而贪取。“如彩画师等”:此“等”字摄受提供可爱色所缘的人。“如技艺展示者等”:此“等”字摄受医师等人。医师即透过味觉处所含摄的营养力,以及由此而来的支持力,成为法所缘的提供者。此处的“等”字,如“琴师等”例子,应各随其义而理解。视为儿子而执取,即如疼爱儿子一般珍爱。在此,应将受观为如子;将作为受之缘的适意乳等,观为如可爱的色等所缘;而将提供色等六所缘的彩画师等,观为如保姆。显示巴利原文
Vipākavedanā adhippetā visesato attānaṃ assādetabbato. Tameva hissā assādetabbataṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Assādanenāti abhiratiyā. Mamāyantāti dhanāyantā. Cittakārādīnanti ādi-saddena iṭṭhavaṇṇārammaṇadāyakānaṃ saṅgaho. Sippasandassanakādīnanti ādi-saddena vejjādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Vejjā hi rasāyatanojāvasena tadupatthambhitavasena ca dhammārammaṇassa dāyakā. Svāyaṃ ādi-saddo ‘‘vīṇāvādakādī’’tiādinā paccekañca yojetabbo, puttaṃ mamāyantāti puttaṃ sampiyāyantā. Putto viya cettha vedanā daṭṭhabbā, sappāyasappikhīrādīni viya vedanāya paccayabhūtāni iṭṭharūpādiārammaṇāni, dhāti viya rūpādichaḷārammaṇadāyakā cittakārādayo daṭṭhabbā.
受节的注疏显示巴利原文
Vedanāvāravaṇṇanā
97 97. 纯就眼触所生的受,依过去、未来等时间差别而作区分,将之合为整体,即成一种受身,犹如受蕴;耳触所生的受等亦复如是。因此经中说:“贤友,有此六受身。”所以此处所说“受身”,即受的集合。从眼触生起者,为眼触所生受。然而此受既包含被执取的,也包含未被执取的。由于释义时涵盖此二者,故说“于此先总一切而说”。而如今,当说“这是果报之理则”时,则只取被执取之受,因此接着说“依于果报……”等。在意门中,与意界相应的受,即指与彼所缘意界相应的受。显示巴利原文
97. Cakkhusamphassajā eva vedanā atītādibhedabhinnā rāsivasena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā eko vedanākāyo yathā vedanākkhandho, evaṃ sotasamphassajādikāti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘chayime āvuso vedanākāyā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘vedanākāyāti vedanāsamūhā’’ti. Cakkhusamphassato jātā cakkhusamphassajā vedanā. Sā pana upādinnāpi anupādinnāpi, tadubhayassapi saṅgaṇhantena atthavaṇṇanāya katattā āha ‘‘ayaṃ tāvettha sabbasaṅgāhikakathā’’ti. Idāni ‘‘vipākavidhi aya’’nti upādinnayeva gaṇhanto ‘‘vipākavasenā’’tiādimāha. Manodvāre manoviññāṇadhātusampayuttāti tadārammaṇamanoviññāṇadhātusampayuttā.
「其余者」:指领受等其余诸受。「亲依止等」:此中的“等”字,应理解为也包括无间缘等。对于无间等受,触以无间缘等方式为缘;对于其余诸受,触则以亲依止缘为缘。而在意门中,对于彼所缘之受,意触以亲依止缘为缘。「无门者」:指无门之受,因为结生等受并无任何门。「俱生意触之集」:由此说明,通过这些方式,触以俱生缘为其缘。显示巴利原文
Avasesānanti sampaṭicchanādivedanānaṃ. Upanissayādīti ādi-saddena anantarādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Anantarānañhi anantarādivasena, itaresaṃ upanissayavasena phasso paccayo hoti, manodvāre pana tadārammaṇavedanānaṃ manosamphasso upanissayavasena paccayo. Advārikānanti dvārarahitānaṃ. Na hi paṭisandhiādivedanānaṃ kiñci dvāraṃ atthi. Sahajātamanosamphassasamudayāti etenassa tāsaṃ sahajātakoṭiyā paccayabhāvamāha.
触节的注释显示巴利原文
Phassavāravaṇṇanā
98 98. 依止于眼而生起的触,名为眼触。「以五事为所依」:即以眼等五事为所依,依止于眼等五事。「此为所执受之说」:此即所执受之说,因其属转起之说,故为世俗之说。「与异熟意相应之触」:即与异熟意识相应之触。「如由缘所生者,缘亦应是所执受」:正如由缘所生的果是所执受,作为缘的本身亦必须是所执受,因此说“六眼等诸处”。显示巴利原文
98. Cakkhuṃ nissāya uppanno samphasso cakkhusamphasso. Pañcavatthukāti cakkhādipañcavatthukā cakkhādipañcavatthusannissayā. ‘‘Upādinnakakathā esā’’ti bāvīsatiggahaṇaṃ, pavattikathābhāvato lokiyaggahaṇaṃ. Vipākamanasampayuttaphassāti vipākamanoviññāṇasampayuttā phassā. Paccayuppannena viya paccayenapi upādinnakeneva bhavitabbanti ‘‘channaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ āyatanāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
《六处分注释》显示巴利原文
Saḷāyatanavāravaṇṇanā
99 99. 这仅是举例。因此,正如此处由于关联无色界,需将“第六处与六处”省略为“六处”,同样地,对于那些主张所引生之果为“所执取”而缘为“非所执取”的论者,依其观点,也应依外处进行省略:“第六处与六处、六处、六处”。而《清净道论》即是这部圣典的义释,故他说:“于《清净道论》……所阐述的方法即是如此。”此理在其他引用《清净道论》之处同样适用。显示巴利原文
99. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ, tasmā yathā ettha arūpalokāpekkhāya chaṭṭhāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca saḷāyatananti ekaseso icchitabbo, evaṃ yesaṃ paccayuppanno upādinno, paccayo pana anupādinnotipi icchitabbo. Tesaṃ matena bāhirāyatanavasenapi ekaseso veditabbo ‘‘chaṭṭhāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca saḷāyatana’’nti. Visuddhimaggopi imassa āgamassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanāti āha ‘‘visuddhimagge…pe… vuttanayamevā’’ti. Esa nayo aññatthāpi visuddhimaggaggahaṇe.
《名色分注释》显示巴利原文
Nāmarūpavāravaṇṇanā
100 所谓“名”的特征,即朝向所缘弯曲的自性,因为没有它,心便不能生起。“色”的特征,则是当冷、热等对立之缘聚集时,产生变异的状态。然而,这里说“这三种”等,是依一切心生起所共通的方面来把握那行蕴的;因此,对于那些在不共的方面,从义理上说也已被把握,这是为了显示此意。显示巴利原文
100.Namanalakkhaṇanti ārammaṇābhimukhaṃ namanasabhāvaṃ tena vinā apavattanato. Ruppanaṃ sītādivirodhipaccayasannipāte visadisuppatti. Ime pana tayotiādinā sabbacittuppādasādhāraṇavaseneva taṃsaṅkhārakkhandhaggahaṇaṃ, tasmā ye yattha asādhāraṇā, tepi atthato gahitāyevāti dasseti.
“取之”意为作为缘。因为,对缘所生法而言,执持那些作为缘的法,即是作缘。“此是集合义中的属格词”,意思是说“在集合的意义上,这是属格词”,因为若离此,关系便不成立。“因此”即由此故。“彼一切”是指大种与所造色的分类,全部共二十七种。“其名”指在四蕴有中的名,应知识亦包含其中。“其色”指在一蕴有中的色。然而,在五蕴有中,识即摄在行与识之中。“其名色”即指此(五蕴有中的名色)。以其力:对俱生者,以俱生缘等方式;对无间者,以无间缘等方式;对其他者,以亲依止缘等方式,应知那样的名对于那样的识,随其所宜而成为缘。显示巴利原文
Upādiyitvāti paccaye katvā. Paccayakaraṇameva hi paccayuppannassa paccayabhūtadhammānaṃ upādiyanaṃ. Samūhasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ etanti ‘‘samūhatthe etaṃ sāmivacana’’nti vuttaṃ tena vinā sambandhassa abhāvato. Tenāti tasmā. Taṃ sabbampīti taṃ bhūtupādāyapabhedaṃ sabbampi sattavīsatividhaṃ. Yassa nāmassāti catuvokārabhave nāmassa. Viññāṇampi tappariyāpannameva veditabbaṃ. Rūpassāti ekavokārabhave rūpassa. Viññāṇaṃ pana pañcavokārabhave saṅkhāraviññāṇameva. Yassa pañcavokārabhave nāmarūpassa. Tassa vasenāti sahajātassa sahajātādivasena, anantarassa anantarādivasena, itarassa upanissayādivasena tassa nāmassa yathārahaṃ tassa tassa viññāṇassa paccayabhāvo veditabbo.
《识分注释》显示巴利原文
Viññāṇavāravaṇṇanā
101 关于把握三界果报的理由,前文已述。在此,“行对其识”:即八种欲界福行,对于十六种欲界果报识;五种色界福行,对于五种色界果报识;十二种非福行,对于七种不善果报识;四种不动行,对于四种无色界果报识。于结生和转起时,它们相应地以业缘和亲依止缘而成为缘。此为略说,广说当如《清净道论》中所说而了知。显示巴利原文
101.Tebhūmakavipākaggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Saṅkhāro yassa viññāṇassāti ettha aṭṭhavidhopi kāmāvacarapuññābhisaṅkhāro soḷasavidhassa kāmāvacaravipākaviññāṇassa, pañcavidhopi rūpāvacarapuññābhisaṅkhāro pañcavidhassa rūpāvacaravipākaviññāṇassa, dvādasavidhopi apuññābhisaṅkhāro sattavidhassa akusalavipākaviññāṇassa, catubbidhopi āneñjābhisaṅkāro catubbidhassa arūpāvacaravipākaviññāṇassa yathārahaṃ paṭisandhipavattīsu kammapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena ca paccayo hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.620) vuttanayena veditabbo.
行分注释。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhāravāravaṇṇanā
102 “具有造作相”指具有思作的自性,亦即策励相。“经由动转之力”即藉由名为身表的动转之力,以此排除了五门思。“经由言语差别之力”即藉由发出言语之力,意思是令语表生起之力。如前所述的二十种,再加九种大善速行思,共为二十九种思。虽说“对善法而言,以亲依止力为缘”,但就某些情况,也应说以所缘力为缘。“以俱生等之力”即是以俱生力、相互力、依止力、相应力、有力、不离去力、因缘力为缘;对于无间心等,则以无间力、等无间力、无间业力、亲依止力、无有力、离去力、习行力等为缘。“亦”字则含摄了亲依止力。显示巴利原文
102.Abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇoti abhisañcetayitasabhāvo, āyūhanalakkhaṇoti attho. Copanavasenāti kāyaviññattisaṅkhātacopanavasena. Tena pañcadvārikacetanā paṭikkhipati. Vacanabhedavasenāti vācānicchāraṇavasena. Vacīviññattisamuṭṭhāpanavasenāti attho. Yathāvuttā vīsati, nava mahaggatakusalacetanā cāti ekūnatiṃsa manosañcetanā. ‘‘Kusalānaṃ upanissayavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ, ekaccānaṃ ārammaṇavasenapīti vattabbaṃ. Sahajātādivasenāti sahajāta-aññamañña-nissaya-sampayutta-atthi-avigatahetuvasena, anantarānaṃ anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanasena paccayo. Api-saddena upanissayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
无明分注释显示巴利原文
Avijjāvāravaṇṇanā
103 “于苦谛中的无明”——为了展开这句略说的义理,便解说“于彼”等语。此处的“彼”指无明。无明虽属应断,但因其具有应遍知的性质,故亦被包含在内。“它的苦谛”是指:作为依止事的苦谛,以及与无明相应之蕴的苦谛,后者是无明的所属。因为这(苦谛)是它的依止缘。“对于它”即是对苦谛。所谓“由障碍通达真实相”:即障碍对有为法不颠倒自性的证悟。由此,说明了它对称为遍知现观的圣道通达所起的障碍作用。“对智慧的生起”:即是对“这是苦,苦有这许多”这种觉知方式之前分智的生起。“在此”即于苦谛之上。“由不施予”:即由于不肯释放。由此,说明它甚至对随觉智也是一种障碍。显示巴利原文
103.‘‘Dukkhasacceaññāṇa’’nti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tanti aññāṇaṃ. Satipi pahātabbatte pariññeyyattavasena antogadhaṃ. Dukkhasaccañcassāti vatthusaṅkhātaṃ sampayuttakhandhasaṅkhātañca dukkhasaccaṃ assa aññāṇassa. Taṃ hissa nissayapaccayo hoti. Tassāti dukkhasaccassa. Yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhanivāraṇenāti saṅkhataaviparītasabhāvapaṭivijjhanassa nivāraṇena. Etenassa pariññābhisamayasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggapaṭivedhassa vibandhakabhāvamāha. Ñāṇappavattiyāti ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkha’’nti anubujjhanākārāya pubbabhāgañāṇappavattiyā. Etthāti dukkhasacce. Appadānenāti avissajjanena. Etenassā anubodhañāṇassapi vibandhakatamāha.
可由三种理由知其不被包含在内。此处,仅依与它相应的蕴作为事;对于集谛中的无明,也应同样理解。“以唯一”一词否定了其余三种理由。即使无明不取灭、道二谛为所缘,又如何能成为包含在它们中的事呢?然而,对于想要了知灭、道二谛者,无明以覆盖它们的方式,并使人在非灭、非道之处而执取为灭、为道,由此而转起,故称“于灭与道中的无明”。因此,才有“由于覆盖”等语,其义如前所说。所谓甚深:即因其自性极为甚深。由于无底、无立足处,无法生起以彼为对象的智慧,故为难见。然而,前二谛由于欺诳的意义:即因其以欺诳性、非真实性的方式现起,故为难见,由此称为甚深,并非就自性而言甚深;正因为如此,以它们为所缘的无明便生起。“于彼”:即于彼前二谛中,由于无常等自性相本来难见,所以无明正以常等颠倒的方式而转起——应如此连接而理解。显示巴利原文
Tīhi kāraṇehi veditabbaṃ antogadhābhāvato. Idha sampayuttakhandhavaseneva vatthuto samudaye aññāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekenevāti itaraṃ kāraṇattayaṃ paṭikkhipati. Yadipi aññāṇaṃ nirodhamagge ārammaṇaṃ na karoti, kuto tadantogadhatabbatthutā, te pana jānitukāmassa tappaṭicchādanavasena anirodhamaggesu nirodhamaggaggāhahetutāvasena ca pavattamānaṃ ‘‘nirodhe paṭipadāyañca aññāṇa’’nti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘paṭicchādanato’’tiādi. Tassattho vuttoyeva. Gambhīrattāti sabhāveneva gambhīrattā. Agādhaapatiṭṭhābhāvena taṃvisayassa ñāṇassa uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā duddasaṃ. Purimaṃpana saccadvayaṃ. Vañcanīyaṭṭhenāti vañcakabhāvena ayāthāvabhāvena upaṭṭhānato duddasattā gambhīraṃ, na sabhāvato, tasmā taṃvisayaṃ aññāṇaṃ uppajjati. Tatthāti tasmiṃ purimasaccadvaye aniccādisabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattā eva niccādivipallāsavasena pavattati aññāṇanti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
现在,为了再以解说的分类方式显示无明在诸谛中转起的情形,而说“再者(apicā)”等语句。其中,“于苦(dukkhe)”是以表示地点的处格来阐明。“由于摄集(saṅgahato)”:因为苦具有应遍知的性质,所以无明与苦应被总摄在一起。由此显示了简别的意义,因为无明确实是在苦中被简别出来,而不是在其他谛中。“由于事(vatthuto)”:指所依处,以处所为义,因为无明是以苦为依止的。“由于所缘(ārammaṇato)”:指所缘境,以境界为义,因为它缘取此对象而转起。“由于作用(kiccato)”:指遍行,以遍及为义,因为它以覆盖的方式遍及该处而转起。对于其余诸谛,也应依同样的方法了知其意义。“由于无差别(avisesato)”:指没有差别,意即不取如上所说在苦等中转起时的行相差别。“由于自性(sabhāvato)”:依自性的相。因为无明的自性就是对四谛都不了知。欲贪(kāmarāga)与有贪(bhavarāga)即是欲漏(kāmāsava)与有漏(bhavāsava),所以才说“以俱”显示巴利原文
Idāni niddesavibhāgenapi avijjāya saccesu pavattivibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dukkheti ettakena bhummaniddesena. Saṅgahatoti pariññeyyatāya dukkhena saṅgahetabbato. Tena niddhāraṇatthaṃ dasseti. Dukkhasmiñhi avijjā niddhārīyati, na aññasmiṃ. Vatthutoti ādhāratthaṃ. Dukkhasannissayā hi avijjā. Ārammaṇatoti visayatthaṃ taṃ ārabbha pavattanato. Kiccatoti byāpanatthaṃ chādanavasena taṃ byāpetvā pavattanato. Iminā nayena sesesupi attho veditabbo. Avisesatoti visesābhāvato, vuttanayena dukkhādīsu pavattiākāravisesaṃ aggahetvāti attho. Sabhāvatoti sarasalakkhaṇato. Catunnampi saccānaṃ ajānanasabhāvā hi avijjā. Kāmarāgabhavarāgā kāmāsavabhavāsavāti āha ‘‘sahajātādivasenā’’ti. Nanu avijjā eva avijjāsavo, so kathaṃ avijjāya paccayoti āha ‘‘pubbuppannā’’tiādi.
无明品注释(Avijjāvāravaṇṇanā)结束。显示巴利原文
Avijjāvāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
漏品注释(Āsavavāravaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
Āsavavāravaṇṇanā
104 在“漏”的部分,“漏”字的含义以及对漏的考察,前面已经说过了。那么,为何还要说这个部分呢?难道缘起的开示不就是以无明等为首的吗?正是针对这一问难,才开始“此部分”等的说明。“在缘起的诸部分中”:指在缘起的十二支分之中。而这些确实是导师对缘起的开示。对此,也是通过显示其缘来成立的。也就是说,这并不像迦毗罗派的根本自性那样是无缘的,而是有因有缘的;这是通过显示无明也有其缘而成立的。“以漏的集起”:由于过去生中漏的集起,而有现在无明的集起;由于现在无明的集起,而有未来漏的集起。如此,漏与无明以缘和缘生的关系前后相续转起。因为找不到最初的端绪,以此为因的轮回也就找不到最初的开端,由此便确立了‘无始’的道理。应如此理解。显示巴利原文
104.Āsavavāre āsava-saddattho āsavavicāro ca heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Kasmā panāyaṃ vāro vutto, nanu avijjādikāva paṭiccasamuppādadesanāti codanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ayaṃ vāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Paṭiccasamuppādapadesūti paṭiccasamuppādakoṭṭhāsesu. Dvādasakoṭṭhāsā hi satthu paṭiccasamuppādadesanā. Tassāpi paccayadassanavasenāti nāyaṃ kāpilānaṃ mūlapakati viya appaccayā, atha kho sappaccayāti avijjāyapi paccayadassanavasena. Āsavasamudayenāti atītabhave āsavānaṃ samudayena etarahi avijjāya samudayo, etarahi avijjāya samudayena anāgate āsavasamudayoti evaṃ āsavāvijjānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannakabhāvena aparāparaṃ pavattamānaṃ ādikoṭiabhāveneva tannimittassa saṃsārassa ādikoṭiabhāvato anamataggatāsiddhi veditabbā.
“三十二处”:指三十二种通达圣谛的因缘,或指三十二种四圣谛的业处。“从此《正见经》中”:由于圣弟子依此而得以被称为‘正见’的那种圣正见,在这部经中被宣说,所以它名为《正见经》;此语即从此《正见经》而来。显示巴利原文
Dvattiṃsaṭhānānīti dvattiṃsa saccappaṭivedhakāraṇāni, dvattiṃsa vā catusaccakammaṭṭhānāni. Imamhā sammādiṭṭhisuttāti yāya ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi nāma hoti, sā ariyā sammādiṭṭhi ettha vuttāti sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ, ito sammādiṭṭhisuttato.
“以四圣谛的方式”:指证得四圣谛的种种因缘。“以阿拉汉果的方式”:指如“他彻底断除贪随眠”等证得阿拉汉果的种种因缘。因此说“以六十四种因由”。显示巴利原文
Catusaccapariyāyehīti catusaccādhigamakāraṇehi. Arahattapariyāyehīti ‘‘so sabbaso rāgānusayaṃ pahāyā’’tiādinā arahattādhigamakāraṇehi. Tenāha ‘‘catusaṭṭhiyā kāraṇehī’’ti.
10. 《念处经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Satipaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
105 “地方的”(jānapadino):指拥有地方的人,或地方的主宰——王族子弟。依族姓,他们称为“库鲁”。若他们的住处只是一个地方,为何用复数?故说“依惯用语”。因为文法学家在这种场合,主张如同理应如此那样保持性、数一致(参见波你尼1.251),此处即属此类习惯用法,正如他处亦说“住于盎伽人中”“住于末罗人中”。然在修饰它的“地方”一词上,若为表族姓之词,则唯用单数。而注释师所用“但”(pana)一词,意在表示特别之义。由此,因所指为多个区域故用复数,借以阐明后文“但是很多……”等特别之处。“听闻”:即顺着彰显曼陀多大王威力的传说,辗转流传而来的故事而听闻。“次第巡行”:指四处巡回游历。“这些地方”:指借由日月天子所表称的四大王天宫。故说“他到了那里”等。“他”:指曼陀多大王。“那”:指四大王天的王权。“取了”:即接受了。然后又询问引导宝。“守门人立于守门处”:因在善法堂的天众集会处及天城四城门处,他们奉命守护,特设于彼处。显示巴利原文
105.Jānapadinoti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.95) janapadavanto, janapadassa vā issarā rājakumārā. Gottavasena kurū nāma. Tesaṃ nivāso yadi eko janapado, kathaṃ bahuvacananti āha ‘‘ruḷhīsaddenā’’ti. Akkharacintakā hi īdisesu ṭhānesu yutte viya saliṅgavacanāni (pāṇini 1.251) icchanti, ayamettha ruḷhī yathā aññatthāpi ‘‘aṅgesu viharati, mallesu viharatī’’ti ca. Tabbisesane pana janapada-sadde jāti-sadde ekavacanameva. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāti pana-saddo visesatthajotano. Tena puthuatthavisayatāya evaṃ taṃ bahuvacananti ‘‘bahuke panā’’tiādinā vakkhamānaṃ visesaṃ dīpeti. Sutvāti mandhātumahārājassa ānubhāvadassanānusārena paramparāgataṃ kathaṃ sutvā. Anusaṃyāyantenāti anuvicarantena. Etesaṃ ṭhānanti candimasūriyamukhena cātumahārājikabhavanamāha. Tenāha ‘‘tattha agamāsī’’tiādi. Soti mandhātumahārājā. Tanti cātumahārājikarajjaṃ. Gahetvāti sampaṭicchitvā. Puna pucchi pariṇāyakaratanaṃ. Dovārikabhūmiyaṃ tiṭṭhanti sudhammāya devasabhāya devapurassa ca catūsu dvāresu ārakkhāya adhikatattā. Dibbarukkhasahassapaṭimaṇḍitanti idaṃ ‘‘cittalatāvana’’ntiādīsupi yojetabbaṃ.
“立于地上”:他说后,便站于靠近地面之处;站立不久,即以彼色身隐没,因为国王的转轮王位已不复存在。“站立了较长的时间”:另一些注释师如此说。天子之身便显现,因为能感得于天界中生起异熟的后后受业,此时已获得机会。由于在部分上成立的殊胜可算作整体的殊胜,故即使仅一处,亦可用复数来称呼。显示巴利原文
Pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāsīti bhassitvā pathaviyā āsanne ṭhāne aṭṭhāsi, ṭhatvā ca nacirasseva antaradhāyi tenattabhāvena rañño cakkavattissariyassa abhāvato. ‘‘Cirataraṃ kālaṃ ṭhatvā’’ti apare. Devabhāvo pāturahosi devaloke pavattivipākadāyino aparāpariyāyavedanīyassa kammassa katokāsattā. Avayave siddho viseso samudāyassa visesako hotīti ekampi raṭṭhaṃ bahuvacanena voharīyati.
诸师依语源学的方法,以字母“Da”解释其义。所谓“杂色”,即是“杂色足”,这是省略了后分,如同将“色有”略说为“色”。那么,他为何被称为杂色足呢?因此说“据说……”等。而“已被调伏”:此处指哪一种调伏?故说“从食人状态中被制止”。这些长老指的是中传诵者,他们所说的是较小的杂色足调伏事。因为杂色足本是女夜叉之子,在他还是幼小、心无怯懦的王子时,菩萨便在那里调伏了他;到了须陀须摩王时期,他成为波罗奈王,通过制止食人状态而被调伏,那称为大杂色足调伏。说了“儿子”之后又说“在这里”,正是为了表明那是他的亲生儿子。显示巴利原文
Da-kārena atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti niruttinayena. Kammāsoti kammāsapādo vuccati uttarapadalopena yathā ‘‘rūpabhavo rūpa’’nti. Kathaṃ pana so kammāsapādoti āha ‘‘tassa kirā’’tiādi. Damitoti ettha kīdisaṃ damanaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘porisādabhāvato paṭisedhito’’ti. Ime pana therāti majjhimabhāṇake vadati, te pana cūḷakammāsadammaṃ sandhāya tathā vadanti. Yakkhiniputto hi kammāsapādo alīnasattukumārakāle bodhisattena tattha damito, sutasomakāle pana bārāṇasirājā porisādabhāvapaṭisedhanena yattha damito, taṃ mahākammāsadammaṃ nāma. Puttoti vatvā atrajoti vacanaṃ orasaputtabhāvadassanatthaṃ.
那些从北俱卢洲来此定居的人,令此地得名“俱卢国”。他们依照在北俱卢洲被守护的规则,同样守护五戒。后来的人们效法他们,这一随顺地方之法无间断地流传,故被称为“俱卢人的常法”;此义应借由《俱卢法本生》(Jā.1.3.76-78)加以阐明。为了说明最初出现杂染之处,而说了“俱卢国居民”等。在世尊没有固定住处、没有任何寺院的地方,仅提及行境村落是缘起讲的常例,正如“在释迦族中住,名为天臂的释迦人聚落”。为显示此义,而说“从无住处”等。显示巴利原文
Yehi āvasitapadeso kururaṭṭhanti nāmaṃ labhi, te uttarakuruto āgatā manussā tattha rakkhitaniyāmeneva pañca sīlāni rakkhiṃsu, tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiyā pacchimā janatāti, so desadhammavasena avicchedato vattamāno kuruvattadhammoti paññāyittha, ayañca attho kurudhammajātakena (jā. 1.3.76-78) dīpetabbo. So aparabhāge yattha paṭhamaṃ saṃkiliṭṭho jāto, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kururaṭṭhavāsīna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yattha bhagavato vasanokāso koci vihāro na hoti, tattha kevalaṃ gocaragāmakittanaṃ nidānakathāya pakati, yathā taṃsakkesu viharati devadahaṃ nāma sakkānaṃ nigamoti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘avasanokāsato’’tiādimāha.
这是对「总说分」的注疏(Uddesavārakathāvaṇṇanā)。显示巴利原文
Uddesavārakathāvaṇṇanā
106 “为何世尊说此经?”这是问不共的缘起;共的缘起因众所周知,故未提及。由此,以“此经的安立”发问,另一位则用“俱卢国住者”等说明,此经的安立是顺应后来根机的。应知这是在显示外缘起。至于内缘起及不共的缘起,则应按《根本法门经》等注释所说的方法去了知。据说,那时俱卢国因当地众生大多具备如理作意,又因往昔所造福德的力量,而拥有适宜的气候等条件。所以说“具备了气候等条件的圆满”。“等”字含摄食物等的圆满。也有一些老师说:“由于过去奉行俱卢正法的习惯力量,如同北俱卢洲一样,该国大多时候本来便气候等条件圆满,而在世尊的时代,那个国家更是气候适宜等格外殊胜。”所谓“身心健全”,即心与身体的健康。“被助益的慧力”,是指得到助益的智慧威力,或是一再累积的智慧光辉。关于“在二十一处”:以身随观有十四处,以受随观有一处,以心随观有一处,以法随观有五处,合为二十一处。“将业处投入阿拉汉果”,就是把四谛的业处以说法的形式归入阿拉汉果,令修行者能证得阿拉汉果。就如同把素馨花、显示巴利原文
106.Kasmā bhagavā imaṃ suttamabhāsīti asādhāraṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati, sādhāraṇaṃ pana pākaṭanti anāmaṭṭhaṃ, tena suttanikkhepo pucchitoti katvā itaro ‘‘kururaṭṭhavāsīna’’ntiādinā aparajjhāsayoyaṃ suttanikkhepoti dasseti. Etena bāhirasamuṭṭhānaṃ vibhāvitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ajjhattikaṃ pana asādhāraṇañca mūlapariyāyasuttādiṭīkāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Kururaṭṭhaṃ kira (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.373) tadā tannivāsīnaṃ sattānaṃ yebhuyyena yonisomanasikāravantatāya pubbe ca katapuññatābalena utuādisampannameva ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘utupaccayādisampannattā’’ti. Ādi-saddena bhojanādisampattiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Keci pana ‘‘pubbe kuruvattadhammānuṭṭhānavāsanāya uttarakuru viya yebhuyyena utuādisampannameva hontaṃ bhagavato kāle sātisayaṃ utusappāyādiyuttaṃ taṃ raṭṭhaṃ ahosī’’ti vadanti. Cittasarīrakallatāyāti cittassa sarīrassa ca arogatāya. Anuggahitapaññābalāti laddhupakārañāṇānubhāvā, anu anu vā āciṇṇapaññātejā. Ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesūti kāyānupassanāvasena cuddasasuṭhānesu, vedanānupassanāvasena ekasmiṃ ṭhāne, tathā cittānupassanāvasena, dhammānupassanāvasena pañcasu ṭhānesūti evaṃ ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ yathā arahattaṃ pāpeti, evaṃ desanāvasena arahatte pakkhipitvā. Suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakasuvaṇṇamañjūsāsu pakkhittāni sumanacampakādinānāpupphāni maṇiputtādisattaratanāni ca yathā bhājanasampattiyā savisesaṃ sobhanti, kiccakarāni ca honti manuññābhāvato, evaṃ sīladassanādisampattiyā bhājanavisesabhūtāya kururaṭṭhavāsiparisāya desitā ca bhagavato ayaṃ desanā bhiyyosomattāya sobhati, kiccakārī ca hotīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yathā hi puriso’’tiādinā. Etthāti kururaṭṭhe.
「从本性」:就是从它的自性来说,意指在宣说这部念处经之前也是如此。「随顺而住」:是指随顺导师的教法而安住。「放任有身」,意思是:不应以无常等如理作意将心系于一处,而乐于沉迷在色等所缘上,以放纵之心而住;应当舍离放逸的生活,成为不放逸者。显示巴利原文
Pakatiyāti sarasato, imissā satipaṭṭhānasuttadesanāya pubbepīti adhippāyo. Anuyuttā viharanti satthu desanānusāratoti adhippāyo. Vissaṭṭhaattabhāvanāti aniccādivasena kismiñci yonisomanasikāre cittaṃ aniyojetvā rūpādiārammaṇe abhirativasena vissaṭṭhacittena bhavituṃ na vaṭṭati, pamādavihāraṃ pahāya appamattena bhavitabbanti adhippāyo.
「一乘道」中的“ayana”一词,是道路的同义词。并非唯有“ayana”一词,还有其他很多表示道路的同义词;为了引出这些词,文中先说“所谓道……”等,然后质问:如果“ayana”是道路的同义词,为何又说“道”呢?针对这一质疑,便说“因此……”等。这里,“一道”就是唯一之道,因为再无其他通往涅槃的道路。但难道不是说,此处的“道”指的是念处吗?而除了念处,不是还有许多其他的道支吗?确实有,但那些在把握念处时也已被把握,因为它们与念处不相离。实际上,智、精进等在详细解说时都已被包含。在总说中只把握“念”,应理解为随顺所化众生根机的缘故。因此说“不是歧路”,这显示此道既非多道,也不是不趋向涅槃之道。“以唯一”:是指无伴侣。无伴有二种:一种是脱离了自身同伴的相伴,称为“身远离”;一种是脱离了渴爱的相伴,称为“心远离”。故说“以身远离、心远离”。世间中最上者也称作“一”,比如“只要他人统归一处”等语,因此“唯一”即是“最上”。如果说从轮回中出离的意义显示巴利原文
Ekāyanoti ettha ayana-saddo maggapariyāyo. Na kevalamayanameva, atha kho aññepi bahū maggapariyāyāti paduddhāraṃ karonto ‘‘maggassa hī’’tiādi vatvā yadi maggapariyāyo ayana-saddo, kasmā puna maggoti vuttanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Tattha ekamaggoti eko eva maggo. Na hi nibbānagāmī maggo añño atthīti. Nanu satipaṭṭhānaṃ idha ‘‘maggo’’ti adhippetaṃ, tadaññe ca bahū maggadhammā atthīti? Saccaṃ atthi, te pana satipaṭṭhānaggahaṇeneva gahitā tadavinābhāvato. Tathā hi ñāṇavīriyādayo niddese gahitā. Uddese pana satiyā eva gahaṇaṃ veneyyajjhāsayavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na dvedhāpathabhūtoti iminā imassa maggassa anekamaggatābhāvaṃ viya anibbānagāmibhāvābhāvañca dasseti. Ekenāti asahāyena. Asahāyatā ca duvidhā attadutiyatābhāvena vā, yā ‘‘vūpakaṭṭhakāyatā’’ti vuccati, taṇhādutiyatābhāvena vā, yā ‘‘pavivittacittatā’’ti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘vūpakaṭṭhena pavivittacittenā’’ti. Seṭṭhopi loke ‘‘eko’’ti vuccati ‘‘yāva pare ekato karosī’’tiādīsūti āha ‘‘ekassāti seṭṭhassā’’ti. Yadi saṃsārato nissaraṇaṭṭho ayanaṭṭho aññesampi upanissayasampannānaṃ sādhāraṇo kathaṃ bhagavatoti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ khoti ettha kho-saddo avadhāraṇe, tasmā imasmiṃ yevāti attho. Desanābhedoyeva heso, yadidaṃ maggoti vā ayanoti vā. Tenāha ‘‘attho paneko’’ti.
「以多门修习方式而转起者」,就是以身为观察对象的随观等为入口,其中又以入出息等为入口,依此修习方式而展开。「一乘道」的意思是通往唯一之处,也就是通往涅槃的意思。因为涅槃没有第二个,是最上等的,所以称为“一”。正如经文所说:“真理只有一个,没有第二个”(《经集》890),“比丘们,在有为法或无为法中,离欲被称为最上”(《增支部》4.34;《如是语》90)。灭尽即是终点,故称为灭尽;见到了生之灭尽终点的人,即是「见生灭尽者」。「利益悲悯者」是指不加区别地,以利益和慈悯对待一切众生的人。「已度」就是已经度越、超脱了。「往昔」是指过去的诸佛,或者过去的时间。显示巴利原文
Nānāmukhabhāvanānayappavattoti kāyānupassanādimukhena tatthāpi ānāpānādimukhena bhāvanānayena pavatto. Ekāyananti ekagāminaṃ, nibbānagāminanti attho. Nibbānañhi adutiyattā seṭṭhattā ca ‘‘eka’’nti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘ekañhi saccaṃ na dutīyamatthī’’ti (su. ni. 890) ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) ca. Khayo eva antoti khayanto , jātiyā khayantaṃ diṭṭhavāti jātikhayantadassī. Avibhāgena sabbepi satte hitena anukampatīti hitānukampī. Atariṃsūti tariṃsu. Pubbeti purimakā buddhā, pubbe vā atītakāle.
对于“tanti”一词:若将“taṃ”释为“他们的话”,或将其视为表达某种动作形态的词,是不合理的。因为作为表示众生之数、仅作数词用的“eka”,并不同时具备动词的用法。此处理应像“偶尔也会上行”等(《增支部》7.72)的用法那样,采用“一度行道”这样的构词来安立文句。像这样解释了各个词句的含义之后,不论依前一种理解还是后一种理解,都不成立,因为在此处所指的道并非仅生起一次。正是为此,才以“为何……”等提出质疑。说“多次也行”,是在遮除前一种理解;说“有多条行道”,则是在遮除后一种理解。显示巴利原文
Tanti taṃ tesaṃ vacanaṃ, taṃ vā kiriyāvuttivācakattaṃ na yujjati. Na hi saṅkheyyappadhānatāya sattavācino eka-saddassa kiriyāvuttivācakatā atthi. ‘‘Sakimpi uddhaṃ gaccheyyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.72) viya ‘‘sakiṃ ayano’’ti iminā byañjanena bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ atthaṃ yojetvāti evaṃ padatthaṃ yojetvā. Ubhayathāpīti purimanayena pacchimanayena ca. Na yujjati idhādhippetamaggassa anekavāraṃ pavattisabbhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Anekavārampi ayatīti purimanayassa, anekañcassa ayanaṃ hotīti pacchimanayassa ca paṭikkhepo.
「在此句中(Imasmiṃ padeti)」:是指在“诸比丘,此为独行道(ekāyano ayaṃ bhikkhave maggo)”这一句里,或是在产生“这究竟是前行道还是出世间道”这一疑惑之处。「杂道(missakamaggo)」:指与世间道相杂的出世间道。阿阇梨长老为了将清净等的非间接因也收录进来,故说为“杂道”;而另一位长老则依间接因作为此处的意指,故说为“前行道(pubbabhāgamaggo)”。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ padeti ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ bhikkhave maggo’’ti imasmiṃ vākye, imasmiṃ vā ‘‘pubbabhāgamaggo lokuttaramaggo’’ti saṃsayaṭṭhāne. Missakamaggoti lokiyena missako lokuttaramaggo. Visuddhiādīnaṃ nippariyāyahetuṃ saṅgaṇhanto ācariyatthero ‘‘missakamaggo’’ti āha, itaro pariyāyahetu idhādhippetoti ‘‘pubbabhāgamaggo’’ti.
「听到声音后(saddaṃ sutvāvā)」:指听到了“尊者,是听法的时候了”这样的报时声之后。「这样举起后(evaṃ ukkhipitvā)」:他们不会想“这样甜美的东西要丢到哪里去呢”便像丢弃甘蔗捆一样扔掉,而是这样举着它行走,不会掉弃。「扰乱了(āluḷeti)」:即扰攘、混乱的意思。这里的“独行道”是指作为前行部分的念处道。至此,在所指向的意义已经成立的基础上,为了加以彰显而指出其所归属的前行道,于是便引用了《无碍解道》中“八支圣道(maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko)”等偈颂,安立于此。显示巴利原文
Saddaṃ sutvāvāti ‘‘kālo, bhante, dhammassavanāyā’’ti kālārocanasaddaṃ sutvā. Evaṃ ukkhipitvāti. Evaṃ ‘‘madhuraṃ imaṃ kuhiṃ chaḍḍemā’’ti achaḍḍentā ucchubhāraṃ viya paggahetvā na vicaranti. Āluḷetīti viluḷito ākulo hotīti attho. Ekāyanamaggo vuccati pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggoti. Ettāvatā idhādhippetatthe siddhe tasseva alaṅkāratthaṃ so pana yassa pubbabhāgamaggo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko’’tiādikā gāthāpi paṭisambhidāmaggatova ānetvā ṭhapitā.
「由趣向涅槃之义」(nibbānagamanaṭṭhena):即凭借它而到达、证得涅槃,故称“趣向涅槃”;其不颠倒的自性即是“义”。因此,“由趣向涅槃之义”意指证得涅槃的方法之义。「由应行道之义」(magganīyaṭṭhena):意为应寻求的道理;或有异读作“应行”(gamanīya),意为应亲近的道理。「以贪等」(rāgādīhi):这是指贪、嗔、痴,因为经文说:“贪是垢,嗔是垢,痴是垢”(《分别论》924)。而说“以贪欲、不平等贪等”(abhijjhāvisamalobhādīhi),则是为总摄一切随烦恼而特别举示的。为了指出“诸众生的清净”(sattānaṃ visuddhiyā)这句话的必然性,故说“因为”(tathā hi)等。虽说“清净”是笼统之语,此处实指心清净;为了表明此点,才说“然而依色垢等”(rūpamalavasena panā)等。为显示这并非仅是注释者的言辞,而是引证之言,故说“因为”(tathā hi)等。显示巴利原文
Nibbānagamanaṭṭhenāti nibbānaṃ gacchati adhigacchati etenāti nibbānagamanaṃ, so eva aviparītasabhāvatāya attho, tena nibbānagamanaṭṭhena, nibbānādhigamupāyatāyāti attho. Magganīyaṭṭhenāti gavesitabbatāya, ‘‘gamanīyaṭṭhenā’’ti vā pāṭho, upagantabbattāti attho. Rāgādīhīti. Iminā rāgadosamohānaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ ‘‘rāgo malaṃ, doso malaṃ, moho mala’’nti (vibha. 924) vacanato. ‘‘Abhijjhāvisamalobhādīhī’’ti pana iminā sabbesampi upakkilesānaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ te visuṃ uddhaṭā. Sattānaṃ visuddhiyāti vuttassa atthassa ekantikataṃ dassento ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādimāha. Kāmaṃ ‘‘visuddhiyā’’ti sāmaññajotanā, cittavisuddhi eva panettha adhippetāti dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpamalavasena panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na kevalaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanameva, atha kho idamettha āhaccabhāsitanti dassento ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādimāha.
然而,当此心清净成就时,能令忧愁等不生起,故经中说“为超脱忧愁与悲泣”(sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā)等。其中,“忧愁”(soko):是因亲属衰败等因缘所生起的内心焦灼、内烧。“悲泣”(paridevo):由于忧愁增上,而以“我儿啊!独子啊!”等方式悲哭哀诉。此处以未来不再生起称为“超脱”,故又说“为断除”(pahānāyā)。为了以实例显示这种超脱的招感性,才说“因为此”(ayaṃ hi)等。显示巴利原文
Sā panāyaṃ cittavisuddhi sijjhamānā yasmā sokādīnaṃ anuppādāya saṃvattati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’tiādi. Tattha socanaṃ ñātibyasanādinimittaṃ cetaso santāpo antonijjhānaṃ soko. Ñātibyasanādinimittameva sokādhikatāya ‘‘kahaṃ, ekaputtaka, kahaṃ, ekaputtakā’’ti paridevavasena lapanaṃ paridevo, āyatiṃ anuppajjanaṃ idha samatikkamoti āha ‘‘pahānāyā’’ti. Taṃ panassa samatikkamāvahataṃ nidassanavasena dassento ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādimāha.
其中,「那先前的应净化」:指对于过去的诸蕴,净化其渴爱的染污。「后后的」:指未来的。「你的」:指你的。「不要有」:即不要成为那样。「执取」:指贪等执取。以此说明了对于未来的诸蕴净化染污。「中间的」:指那两者的中间。「若不取著」:即若不执取。以此说明了现在诸蕴相续中执取的转起。「你将止息而住」:就像这样,如果在过去、未来、现在三时中都净化了染污,由于一切烧燃都已寂灭,你便会成为止息而安住。以此阿拉汉果的极点而圆满此偈。因此说:“闻此偈”等等。显示巴利原文
Tattha yaṃ pubbe taṃ visodhehīti atītesu khandhesu taṇhāsaṃkilesavisodhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Pacchāti parato. Teti tuyhaṃ. Māhūti mā ahu. Kiñcananti rāgādikiñcanaṃ. Etena anāgatesu khandhesu saṃkilesavisodhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Majjheti tadubhayavemajjhe. No ce gahessasīti na upādiyissasi ce. Etena paccuppanne khandhapabandhe upādānappavatti vuttā. Upasanto carissasīti evaṃ addhattayagatasaṃkilesavisodhane sati nibbutasabbapariḷāhatāya upasanto hutvā viharissasīti arahattanikūṭena gāthaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Tenāha ‘‘imaṃ gātha’’ntiādi.
「子」:指亲生儿子,也泛指其他任何儿子。「父」:指生父。「亲属」:指亲族。此处义为:儿子也好,父亲也好,亲属也好,对于被死亡主宰、被死亡征服的人而言,都不能成为免死的庇护,因此于亲属中并无真正的庇护。因为依靠亲属的力量并不能从死亡那里得到防护,所以(世尊)对波吒左罗说“你的两个儿子都已死去”等,不要无意义地悲泣,而应当如实见法,此即意旨。显示巴利原文
Puttāti orasā, aññepi vā ye keci. Pitāti janako. Bandhavāti ñātakā. Ayañhettha attho – puttā vā pitā vā bandhavā vā antakena maccunā adhipannassa abhibhūtassa maraṇato tāṇāya na honti, tasmā natthi ñātīsu tāṇatāti. Na hi ñātīnaṃ vasena maraṇato ārakkhā atthi, tasmā paṭācāre ‘‘ubho puttā kālakatā’’tiādinā (apa. therī 2.2.498) mā niratthakaṃ paridevi, dhammaṃyeva pana yāthāvato passāti adhippāyo.
「于预流果住立」:指在依随顺而转起的最胜法语开示结束时,她住立于具足千理庄严的预流果。然而,她是如何依念处之道而住立预流果的呢?因此说“然而由……”等。实际上,若无四谛业处的教导,声闻弟子是不可能证得圣道的。而“闻此偈已”这句话,是因为她最先听到了为遣除忧愁而说的偈颂才这样说的,对其他偈颂也同理。「修习」:指慧修习,此处正是指此。所以,「因此」:由于对色等作无常等随观也是念处修习,因此……。「他们」:指大臣珊蒂与波吒左罗。显示巴利原文
Sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitāti yathānulomaṃ pavattitāya sāmukkaṃsikāya dhammadesanāya pariyosāne sahassanayapaṭimaṇḍite sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ satipaṭṭhānamaggavasena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsīti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Na hi catusaccakammaṭṭhānakathāya vinā sāvakānaṃ ariyamaggādhigamo atthi. ‘‘Imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā’’ti pana idaṃ sokavinodanavasena pavattitāya gāthāya paṭhamaṃ sutattā vuttaṃ. Esa nayo itaragāthāyapi. Bhāvanāti paññābhāvanā. Sā hi idhādhippetā. Tasmāti yasmā rūpādīnaṃ aniccādito anupassanāpi satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā, tasmā. Tepīti santatimahāmattapaṭācārā.
「派出五百盗贼」:指依次派出了五个盗贼头目,他们各有百名盗贼随从。这些人进入森林寻找长老,逐渐来到长老近处,因此说“他们去到后,围绕着长老坐下”。应当这样连接:长老观察自己的戒,依止极为清净的戒而生起广大欢喜,从而镇伏了因腓骨碎裂等所生的苦受,故说“镇伏苦受而生起欢悦”。「足」:指脚。「我将告知」:指我将示意。「我厌恶」:指我嫌恶。「我羞愧」:指我羞愧。「观照」:指正观。显示巴利原文
Pañcasate coreti satasatacoraparivāre pañca core paṭipāṭiyā pesesi. Te araññaṃ pavisitvā theraṃ pariyesantā anukkamena therassa samīpe samāgacchiṃsu. Tenāha ‘‘te gantvā theraṃ parivāretvā nisīdiṃsū’’ti. Vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjīti sambandho. Therassa hi sīlaṃ paccavekkhato suparisuddhaṃ sīlaṃ nissāya uḷāraṃ pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjamānaṃ ūruṭṭhibhedajanitaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ vikkhambhesi. Pādānīti pāde. Saññapessāmīti saññattiṃ karissāmi. Aḍḍiyāmīti jigucchāmi. Harāyāmīti lajjāmi. Vipassisanti sammasiṃ.
「瞌睡者」指那些陷入瞌睡、进入睡眠的人。「具足行仪者」指圆满了头陀行的修行者。「放逸」是就瞌睡而言。 「心被阻障者」意为增上心受到了障碍。 「于骨架」指在身体上。由于身体是由筋腱相连的骨骸积聚而成,因此这里称之为“骨架”。显示巴利原文
Pacalāyantānanti pacalāyanaṃ niddaṃ upagatānaṃ. Vatasampannoti dhutacaraṇasampanno. Pamādanti pacalāyanaṃ sandhāyāha. Oruddhamānasoti uparuddhaadhicitto. Pañjarasminti sarīre. Sarīrañhi nhārusambandhaaṭṭhisaṅghātatāya idha ‘‘pañjara’’nti vuttaṃ.
由于手持黄色旗帜游行,又擅长搏击技艺,因此被称为「黄角斗士」。 「于三王统」指在般度、朱罗、瞿罗这三王所统辖的地方。角斗士们在锡兰岛获得了恭敬供养,于是来到了铜掌岛。他以《非汝等品》(相应部 3.33-34)中所阐明的“不应执取色等为‘我的’”这一教义,作为调御自心这头大象的铁钩。他以膝着地经行,因为“坐着容易陷入瞌睡”。他宣说自己精勤修行的实效,以此激发梵行同伴的精进心,而作了另一番解说。那段话是谁所说?答曰:“是诸佛中最胜者、一切世间最上者所说。” “非汝等……”等文句,正是显示了它的运作方式。为了表明这即是导致我诸行究竟寂灭的因缘,他举出了“诸行实是无常……”的偈颂,以此昭示:如今,诸行中刹那坏灭的病患已不复存在,我已成就无病的般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Pītavaṇṇāya paṭākāya pariharaṇato mallayuddhacittakatāya ca pītamallo. Tīsu rajjesūti paṇḍucoḷagoḷarajjesu. Mallā sīhaḷadīpe sakkārasammānaṃ labhantīti tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ āgamma. Taṃyeva aṅkusaṃ katvāti ‘‘rūpādayo ‘mamā’ti na gahetabbā’’ti na tumhākavaggena (saṃ. ni. 3.33-34) pakāsitamatthaṃ attano cittamattahatthino aṅkusaṃ katvā. Jaṇṇukehi caṅkamati ‘‘nisinne niddāya avasaro hotī’’ti. Byākaritvāti attano vīriyārambhassa saphalatāpavedanamukhena sabrahmacārīnaṃ ussāhaṃ janento aññaṃ byākaritvā. Bhāsitanti vacanaṃ. Kassa pana tanti āha ‘‘buddhaseṭṭhassa,sabbalokaggavādino’’ti. Na tumhākantiādi tassa pavattiākāradassanaṃ. Tayidaṃ me saṅkhārānaṃ accantavūpasamakāraṇanti dassento ‘‘aniccā vatā’’ti gāthaṃ āhari. Tena idānāhaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇe khaṇe bhaṅgasaṅkhātassa rogassa abhāvena arogo parinibbutoti dasseti.
「他的」指帝释天的。「往生」指投生于天界。他依旧保持原本的状态,因为是以帝释之身往生的。 「苏梵天」是他的名字。他看见天女们投生地狱,从此内心持续生起恐惧,因此说:「此心常恐怖……」等语。其中,「常恐怖」指恒常受惊吓、害怕。「常悚惧」指恒常感到悚然不安。 ‘恐怖’也含有‘悚惧’的意思。 「常悚惧」还指由于恐惧而身体也随着颤动。 「于未生」是对未来的事而言。「于诸难」是对各种苦而言,此处是处格表目的,意为成为未来苦生起的因缘。 「于已起」指已经生起的苦难,应当这样连接理解:那时,是说自己的眷属已产生了痛苦的因缘——这正是他的用意所在。显示巴利原文
Assāti sakkassa. Upapattīti devūpapatti. Punapākatikāva ahosi sakkabhāveneva upapannattā. Subrahmāti evaṃ nāmo. Accharānaṃ nirayūpapattiṃ disvā tato pabhuti satataṃ pavattamānaṃ attano cittutrāsaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘niccaṃ utrastamidaṃ citta’’ntiādi. Tattha utrastanti santastaṃ bhītaṃ. Ubbigganti saṃviggaṃ. Utrastanti vā saṃviggaṃ. Ubbigganti bhayavasena saha kāyena sañcalitaṃ. Anuppannesūti anāgatesu. Kicchesūti dukkhesu. Nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, bhāvīdukkhapavattinimittanti attho. Uppatitesūti uppannesu kicchesūti yojanā, tadā attano parivārassa uppannadukkhanimittanti adhippāyo.
「觉」:意为从觉悟,即从圣道而言。「异此」一词,是相对于所观待之词而用的从格,所以意思是「除觉悟外」。其余诸词也是如此。「依苦行」:指从苦行而言,以此显示作为证道方法的头陀支等严格行持。「依根律仪」:指防护六根,以此显示以念防护为首的一切防护戒,或以摄义的方式显示一切四遍清净戒。「依一切舍离」:指舍弃一切所依、断除一切烦恼。因为烦恼舍离时,业轮与果报轮也随之舍离。「安稳」:指平安、无灾患。显示巴利原文
Bojjhāti bodhito, ariyamaggatoti attho. Aññatrāti ca padaṃ apekkhitvā nissakkavacanaṃ, tasmā bodhiṃ ṭhapetvāti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tapasāti tapokammato. Tena maggādhigamassa upāyabhūtaṃ dhutaṅgasevanādisallekhapaṭipadaṃ dasseti. Indriyasaṃvarāti manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ saṃvaraṇato. Etena satisaṃvarasīsena sabbampi saṃvarasīlaṃ, lakkhaṇahāranayena vā sabbampi catupārisuddhisīlaṃ dasseti. Sabbanissaggāti sabbupadhinissajjanato sabbakilesappahānato. Kilesesu hi nissaṭṭhesu kammavaṭṭaṃ vipākavaṭṭañca nissaṭṭhameva hotīti. Sotthinti khemaṃ anupaddavataṃ.
「ñāyati」:决定地趣向涅槃,或以此证知涅槃,故称为“ñāyo”(圣道),即所谓八支圣道。由于远离了名为渴爱的丛林,故称涅槃。渴爱将蕴与蕴、业与果、或有情与苦连结、缠缚起来,所以称为丛林。此(涅槃)没有丛林,或证得此者不再有丛林,因此是涅槃,即无为界。不依赖其他缘而亲自证得,称为作证,所以说「自所证验」。显示巴利原文
Ñāyati nicchayena kamati nibbānaṃ, taṃ vā ñāyati paṭivijjhīyati etenāti ñāyo, ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘ñāyo vuccati ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti . Taṇhāvānavirahitattāti taṇhāsaṅkhātavānavivittattā. Taṇhā hi khandhehi khandhaṃ, kammunā vā phalaṃ, sattehi vā dukkhaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti vānanti vuccati. Tayidaṃ natthi ettha vānaṃ, na vā etasmiṃ adhigate puggalassa vānanti nibbānaṃ, asaṅkhatā dhātu. Parapaccayena vinā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ sacchikiriyāti āha ‘‘attapaccakkhatāyā’’ti.
难道不是说了「以清净」就是指心清净,所以在「清净」一词中已经包含了超越愁叹等内容吗?那为什么还要重复这些呢?针对这个问难,才说:「于此,虽……」等。「于教法义理善巧者」:指精通四圣谛、缘起等法理的人。「令知各各义」:对于各类应该度化的众生,根据略说、广说等方式,按照他们应被度化的方式,世尊以自己说法时的善巧,使他们各自了知相应的法义。「令各各明了显示」:指不落入单纯的逻辑推理,而是使那些意义清楚明白地显示出来。因为正自觉者并不是只用推理让人知道的说法者。「成就」:指生起、存在的意思。因为还没有超越愁叹的人,根本不会有心清净,只有通过超越愁叹才能成就心清净,所以说:「由超越愁叹而成就。」而凡夫被那些引生忧的苦法所撞击时,愁等就会压倒他;如果完全遍知了那些苦法,愁等就不会生起,因此说:「超越愁叹就是由于忧苦的息灭。」这里的「ñāyassa」(圣道)指最上道(阿拉汉道)和第三道。因为通过证得这两种道,就能渐次息灭忧苦。作证现观与其他现观是同时存在的,它们不可分离,所以像是作证现观的原因那样说:「圣道的证得就是涅槃的作证。」或者指以果智亲自体证而言:「涅槃的作证」。这也应该看作是与格。显示巴利原文
Nanu ‘‘visuddhiyā’’ti cittavisuddhiyā adhippetattā visuddhiggahaṇenevettha sokasamatikkamādayopi gahitā eva honti, te puna kasmā gahitāti anuyogaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sāsanayuttikovideti saccapaṭiccasamuppādādilakkhaṇāyaṃ dhammanītiyaṃ cheke. Taṃ taṃ atthaṃ ñāpetīti ye ye bodhaneyyapuggalā saṅkhepavitthārādivasena yathā yathā bodhetabbā, attano desanāvilāsena bhagavā te te tathā tathā bodhento taṃ tamatthaṃ ñāpeti. Taṃ taṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassentoti atthāpattiṃ agaṇento taṃ taṃ atthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento. Na hi sammāsambuddhā atthāpattiñāpakādisādhanīyavacanāti. Saṃvattatīti jāyati, hotīti attho. Yasmā anatikkantasokaparidevassa na kadāci cittavisuddhi atthi sokaparidevasamatikkamamukheneva cittavisuddhiyā ijjhanato, tasmā āha ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamena hotī’’ti. Yasmā pana domanassapaccayehi dukkhadhammehi puṭṭhaṃ puthujjanaṃ sokādayo abhibhavanti, pariññātesu ca tesu te na honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamo dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamenā’’ti. Ñāyassāti aggamaggassa tatiyamaggassa ca. Tadadhigamena hi yathākkamaṃ dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamo. Sacchikiriyābhisamayasahabhāvīpi itarābhisamayo tadavinābhāvato sacchikiriyābhisamayahetuko viya vutto ‘‘ñāyassādhigamo nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti. Phalañāṇena vā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti. Sampadānavacanañcetaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“称扬言说”即赞誉之辞。这并非仅限于此处,世尊在其他地方也是如此宣说,为显示这一点,故说“正如……”等。其中,“初善”:开首即是善美,或因其开端即善美,故名初善。其余两句,理趣相同。义理圆满,故称“有义”;文句圆满,故称“有文句”。以戒等五法蕴完全圆满,更无任何应增添的过失,故为“完全圆满”;因无随烦恼,再无任何应去除的过失,故为“清净”。由于是最殊胜的行持,所以“我将阐明教法梵行与道梵行”——这是此处的要义,详细内容应依《清净道论》所述的方式来理解。“圣种”:指诸圣者、佛陀等的种姓、传承。称为“最上”(应知为最上),是因为应在一切种姓中被视为最殊胜。“久远”(应知为久远),是因为应在时间上被视为长久。“传承”(应知为传承),是因为应被了知为佛陀等的相续。“旧”指过去的,并非新近。“未混杂”指没有散乱,未曾被剔除。“未曾混杂”指过去从未被圣者们认为“这些有什么用”而剔除。“现在不被混杂”指现在也没有被他们剔除。“未来不被混杂”指未来也不会被他们剔除。“不被显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇabhaṇananti pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Tayidaṃ na idheva, atha kho aññatthāpi satthā akāsiyevāti dassento ‘‘yatheva hī’’tiādimāha. Tatthaādimhi kalyāṇaṃ, ādi vā kalyāṇaṃ etassāti ādikalyāṇaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhapāripūrito upanetabbassa abhāvā ca kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ. Nirupakkilesato apanetabbassa abhāvā ca parisuddhaṃ. Seṭṭhacariyabhāvato sāsana brahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca vo pakāsessāmīti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.147) vuttanayena veditabbo. Ariyavaṃsāti ariyānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ vaṃsā paveṇiyo. Aggaññāti ‘‘aggā’’ti jānitabbā sabbavaṃsehi seṭṭhabhāvato. Rattaññāti ‘‘cirarattā’’ti jānitabbā. Vaṃsaññāti ‘‘buddhādīnaṃ vaṃsā’’ti jānitabbā. Porāṇāti purātanā anadhunātanattā. Asaṃkiṇṇāti avikiṇṇā anapanītā. Asaṃkiṇṇapubbāti ‘‘kiṃ imehī’’ti ariyehi na apanītapubbā. Na saṃkīyantīti idānipi tehi na apanīyanti. Na saṃkīyissantīti anāgatepi tehi na apanīyissanti. Appaṭikuṭṭhā…pe… viññūhīti ye loke viññū samaṇabrāhmaṇā, tehi apaccakkhatā aninditā, agarahitāti attho. Visuddhiyātiādīhīti visuddhiādidīpanehi. Padehīti vākyehi, visuddhiatthatādibhedabhinnehi vā dhammakoṭṭhāsehi.
“灾祸”指不利益的事。“清净”指净化,即舍断杂染。令文句上口称为“领受”;遍学通达称为“熟悉”;将义理安立于心称为“持”;反复读诵称为“诵”。“乾陀罗”指生于乾陀罗地区的人。“能”指有能力、堪能。“非导出之道”指邪道,或是决定邪性、不决定邪性的道。“金钱”亦可有赝金之意;“琉璃”亦可有玻璃珠之意;“珍珠”亦可有竹生珠之意;“珊瑚”亦可有植物嫩枝之意,因此才以“红金色”等词加以简别。显示巴利原文
Upaddaveti anatthe. Visuddhinti visujjhanaṃ saṃkilesappahānaṃ. Vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho. Pariyāpuṇanaṃ paricayo. Atthassa hadaye ṭhapanaṃ dhāraṇaṃ. Parivattanaṃ vācanaṃ. Gandhārakoti gandhāradese uppanno. Pahontīti sakkonti aniyyānamaggāti micchāmaggā, micchattaniyatāniyatamaggāpi vā. Suvaṇṇanti kūṭasuvaṇṇampi vuccati. Paṇīti kācamaṇipi. Muttāti veḷujāpi. Pavāḷanti pallavopi vuccatīti rattajambunadādipadehi te visesitā.
“不由此以下”(Na tato heṭṭhā):此处所取的身等,并无受等的本质,且身、受、心解脱的三地法,被分别执取为颠倒事的不同门类,因此在较下的执取中,由于颠倒是事未得确立,而作此说;又因无第五颠倒是事,故说“不向上”(Na uddhaṃ)。在此,是依所缘的差别而立念处的差别。“三念处”(Tayo satipaṭṭhānā):此为提示“念处”一词的义理列举,并非在解释此经中所说“念处”之义。在“于……等之中”(ādīsu hi)一语里,通过“等”字,囊括了如“触之集起是受之集起,名色之集起是心之集起,作意之集起是法之集起”等经句中,为显明念的境界而被称为念处的那些内容。同样,在《无碍解道》及其他部类的经文中,“等”字也应理解为涵盖其余经文。“念的安立处”(Satiyā paṭṭhāna):指念所应依止之处。若有人在修习布施等时,以色等及遍等作为念的住处,为遮止此义,故说为“胜处、住处”(padhāna显示巴利原文
Na tato heṭṭhāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.5.367; dī. ni. ṭī. 2.373) idhādhippetakāyādīnaṃ vedanādisabhāvattābhāvā, kāyavedanācittavimuttassa tebhūmakadhammassa visuṃ vipallāsavatthantarabhāvena gahitattā ca heṭṭhāgahaṇesu vipallāsavatthūnaṃ aniṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, pañcamassa pana vipallāsavatthuno abhāvā ‘‘na uddha’’nti āha. Ārammaṇavibhāgena hettha satipaṭṭhānavibhāgoti. Tayo satipaṭṭhānāti satipaṭṭhānasaddassa atthuddhāradassanaṃ, na idha pāḷiyaṃ vuttassa satipaṭṭhānasaddassa atthadassananti. Ādīsu hi satigocaroti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘phassasamudayā vedanānaṃ samudayo, nāmarūpasamudayā cittassa samudayo, manasikārasamudayā dhammānaṃ samudayo’’ti satipaṭṭhānāti vuttānaṃ satigocarānaṃ pakāsake suttapadese saṅgaṇhāti. Evaṃ paṭisambhidāpāḷiyampi (paṭi. ma. 3.34) avasesapāḷippadesadassanattho ādi-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Satiyā paṭṭhānanti satiyā patiṭṭhātabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Dānādīni satiyā karontassa rūpādīni kasiṇādīni ca satiyā ṭhānaṃ hontīti taṃnivāraṇatthamāha ‘‘padhānaṃ ṭhāna’’nti. Pa-saddo hi idha ‘‘paṇītā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 14 tikamātikā) viya padhānatthadīpakoti adhippāyo.
「Ariya」(圣):指圣者、一切众生中最殊胜的正自觉者。「Ettha」(于此):即于《六处分别经》(Saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasutta)中。这是以经的一部分来指示整部经,因为在该经中——显示巴利原文
Ariyoti ariyaṃ sabbasattaseṭṭhaṃ sammāsambuddhamāha. Etthāti etasmiṃ saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasutte (ma. ni. 3.311). Suttekadesena hi suttaṃ dasseti. Tattha hi –
“有三念处,为圣者……乃至……可证知。”这话确实被说了,是因何而说的呢?比丘们,于此有大师,是悲悯者、求利益者,出于悲悯而为弟子说法:“这是为了你们的利益,这是为了你们的快乐。”他的弟子们却不倾听,不倾耳,不将心转向于法,反而背离大师的教导而行。比丘们,在此,如来既不感到不欢喜,也不感受不欢喜,并能安住于无漏、有念、正知。比丘们,这是第一念处,为圣者……乃至……可证知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo…pe… marahatīti iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ, kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ. Idha, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṃ upādāya ‘‘idaṃ vo hitāya idaṃ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṃ odahanti, na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, yadariyo…pe… arahati.
再者,比丘们,有大师……乃至……“这是为了你们的快乐”。其中一部分弟子不倾听……乃至……背离而行;另一部分弟子则倾听……乃至……不背离大师的教导而行。比丘们,在此,如来既不感到不欢喜,也不感受不欢喜;既不感到欢喜,也不感受欢喜。他镇伏了不欢喜与欢喜两者,断除了此二者,安住于舍、有念、正知。比丘们,这称为第二念处……乃至……可证知。显示巴利原文
Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, satthā…pe… idaṃ vo sukhāyāti. Tassa ekacce sāvakā na sussūsanti…pe… vattanti. Ekacce sāvakā sussūsanti…pe… na ca vokkamma satthusāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, na ceva attamano hoti, na ca attamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Anattamanatañca attamanatañca tadubhayaṃ abhinivajjetvā upekkhato viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, dutiyaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ…pe… arahati.
再者……乃至……‘为令你们快乐’。他的弟子们倾听……乃至……不背离而行。比丘们,于此,如来既欢喜,也感受欢喜,并安住于无漏、有念、正知。比丘们,这称为第三念处,是圣者……乃至……所应证知的。显示巴利原文
Puna caparaṃ…pe… sukhāyāti. Tassa sāvakā sussūsanti…pe… vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato attamano ceva hoti, attamanatañca paṭisaṃvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno . Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, tatiyaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ…pe… arahatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.311) –
如此,由于对逆与顺皆无漏,且因恒常现起的念而超越此二者,故说为‘念处’。实际上,唯有诸佛才恒常现起念,因为这是不共法,而非独觉佛等所有。‘pa’字表示开始,开始即是转起,故说‘应令转起’之义。以念为因所安立、所应安立的念处,即是念处。又因‘ana’字依多言说,亦可成为业的意义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭighānunayehi anavassutatā, niccaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya tadubhayavītivattatā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttā. Buddhānaṃyeva hi niccaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitā hoti āveṇikadhammabhāvato, na paccekabuddhādīnaṃ. Pa-saddo ārambhaṃ joteti, ārambho ca pavattīti katvā āha ‘‘pavattayitabbatoti attho’’ti. Satiyā karaṇabhūtāya paṭṭhānaṃ paṭṭhapetabbaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Ana-saddo hi bahulavacanena kammatthopi hotīti.
同样,也能得到施事的意义,故说‘安住故为处’。于此,‘pa’字显示殊胜义与进入,故说‘进入后、跃入后而转起’之义。接着,以状态义解释‘念’字与‘处’字,说‘又……’等。由此,在前述的抉择中,‘念’与‘处’被理解为施事的含义。所谓‘忆持义’,即回忆久远所作、久远所说的意义。此中所说‘念即是念处’,这里的‘此’即指该经句中所意指的。显示巴利原文
Tathāssa kattuatthopi labbhatīti ‘‘patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha pa-saddo bhūsatthavisiṭṭhaṃ pakkhandhanaṃ dīpetīti ‘‘okkantitvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho’’ti āha. Puna bhāvatthaṃ sati-saddaṃ paṭṭhāna-saddañca vaṇṇento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tena purimavikappe sati-saddo paṭṭhāna-saddo ca katthuatthoti viññāyati. Saraṇaṭṭhenāti cirakatassa cirabhāsitassa ca anussaraṇaṭṭhena. Idanti yaṃ ‘‘satiyeva satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ, idaṃ idha imasmiṃ suttapadese adhippetaṃ.
“若如此”:倘若念存在,念处即存在。念是一法,既然如此,为何说“念处”为复数?因此答道:“因念众多故”等。若这些念为多,为何又说“道”为单数?如此连结。以“道义”而言:即以导出之义。导出之道法,正是由于此导出性而归于一味,必定趋向涅槃,并为希求解脱者为此目标而趣入,所以引用了前文所说“此亦被说”一语。其中,“这些四念”,即依身随观等而成为四种的这些念。于“后分”:即于圣道的刹那。“成办作用”:在前分中,于身等所缘,以破坏净想等方式各自转起;而在道刹那,则以一次性断除所有四种颠倒的方式,成办舍断的作用,并以之为所缘而趋向涅槃。此处即因成办四种作用,故有复数的解释。如是,念依道义而归于一味,故可说为单数之“道”;又依所缘的差别而有四种性,故可说为“四”。如此,因为念存在。从语脉的连结来看,如“此为唯一之路”等教导,是有连结的,而非没有连结,这是其意趣所在。为了以实例证成所说之义,引用了“摧破魔军”的经句,并运用“如……”等句式将例子连接起来。显示巴利原文
Yadi evanti yadi sati eva satipaṭṭhānaṃ, sati nāma eko dhammo, evaṃ sante kasmā ‘‘satipaṭṭhānā’’ti bahuvacananti āha ‘‘satibahuttā’’tiādi. Yadi bahukā etā satiyo, atha kasmā ‘‘maggo’’ti ekavacananti yojanā. Maggaṭṭhenāti niyyānaṭṭhena. Niyyāniko hi maggadhammo, teneva niyyānikabhāvena ekattupagato ekantato nibbānaṃ gacchati, atthikehi ca tadatthaṃ maggīyatīti attanāva pubbe vuttaṃ paccāharati ‘‘vuttañceta’’nti. Tattha catassopi cetāti kāyānupassanādivasena catubbidhāpi ca etā satiyo. Aparabhāgeti ariyamaggakkhaṇe. Kiccaṃ sādhayamānāti pubbabhāge kāyādīsu ārammaṇesu subhasaññādividhamanena visuṃ visuṃ pavattitvā maggakkhaṇe sakiṃyeva tattha catubbidhassapi vipallāsassa samucchedavasena pahānakiccaṃ sādhayamānā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena nibbānaṃ gacchanti. Catubbidhakiccasādhaneneva hettha bahuvacananiddeso. Evañca satīti maggaṭṭhena ekattaṃ upādāya ‘‘maggo’’ti ekavacanena ārammaṇabhedena catubbidhataṃ upādāya ‘‘cattāro’’ti ca vattabbatāya sativijjamānattā. Vacanānusandhinā ‘‘ekāyano aya’’ntiādikā desanā sānusandhikāva, na ananusandhikāti adhippāyo. Vuttamevatthaṃ nidassanena paṭipādetuṃ ‘‘mārasenappamaddana’’nti suttapadaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.224) ānetvā ‘‘yathā’’tiādinā nidassanaṃ saṃsandeti. Tasmātiādi nigamanaṃ.
特别是,身体与感受是产生乐味之因,为断除对它们的贪爱,便于这些粗细不等的贪爱所依——即身体与感受中,显示不净与苦的本质。这对钝根与利根、被贪爱所驱使的行者而言,是容易修习的,因此这些修法便被称为他们的“清净道”。同样地,对于以“恒常”、“我”为执取对象的邪见,心与法是其特别的成因。在这些心与法中,显示无常、无我的本质。对于那些因贪染、想与触或五盖等的差异而呈现粗细差别的心与法,为断除对它们的邪见,便修习这些观法。这对钝根与利根、被邪见所驱使的行者而言,也是容易做到的,因此这些修法便被称为他们的“清净道”。在此,虽然心与法也能成为贪爱的所依,身体与感受也能成为邪见的所依,但须知:在此四者皆能作为贪爱与邪见所依的情况下,为了特别指出何种对何种为增上缘而作了这样的区分。经中说:“一位利根的止乘者,执取粗的所缘,不滞著于彼,证得禅那出定之后,再执取感受。”又说:“因为他不滞著于粗的所缘。”而对观乘者来说,心倾向于微细的心与法,因此说心随观与法随观,是钝根与利根显示巴利原文
Visesato kāyo ca vedanā ca assādassakāraṇanti tappahānatthaṃ tesu taṇhāvatthūsu oḷārikasukhumesu asubhadukkhabhāvadassanāni mandatikkhapaññehi taṇhācaritehi sukarānīti tāni tesaṃ ‘‘visuddhimaggo’’ti vuttāni tathā ‘‘niccaṃ attā’’ti abhinivesavatthutāya diṭṭhiyā visesakāraṇesu cittadhammesu aniccānattatādassanāni sarāgādivasena saññāphassādivasena nīvaraṇādivasena ca nātippabhedaatippabhedagatesu tesu tappahānatthaṃ mandatikkhapaññānaṃ diṭṭhicaritānaṃ sukarānīti tesaṃ tāni ‘‘visuddhimaggo’’ti vuttāni. Ettha ca yathā cittadhammānampi taṇhāya vatthubhāvo sambhavati, tathā kāyavedanānampi diṭṭhiyāti satipi nesaṃ catunnampi taṇhādiṭṭhiyā vatthubhāve yo yassa sātisayapaccayo, taṃdassanatthaṃ visesaggahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tikkhapaññasamathayāniko oḷārikārammaṇaṃ pariggaṇhanto tattha aṭṭhatvā jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya vedanaṃ pariggaṇhātīti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Oḷārikārammaṇe asaṇṭhahanato’’ti. Vipassanāyānikassa pana sukhume citte dhammesu ca cittaṃ pakkhandatīti cittadhammānupassanānaṃ mandatikkhapaññāvipassanāyānikānaṃ visuddhimaggatā vuttā.
在“为他们断除那些”一句中,“那些”一词与“为了断除”相连属。而后文“为他们于此处”中的“此处”,理趣亦同。五种欲功德特别在身体上觅得,因此身体殊胜地成为欲瀑流的所依;由于执取诸有中的乐相而对有生起乐味,故感受是有瀑流的所依;由于执取相续、密集之相,心中特别会生起“我”的倾向,故心是见瀑流的所依;诸法难以析解,且其纯粹法性的状态不易通达,因而产生痴迷,故法是无明瀑流的所依。因此,为断除这四种瀑流,才宣说了这四者——身、受、心、法。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ tatthāti ettha tattha-saddassa ‘‘pahānattha’’nti etena yojanā. Parato tesaṃ tatthāti etthāpi esevanayo. Pañca kāmaguṇā savisesā kāye labbhantīti visesena kāyo kāmoghassa vatthu, bhavesu sukhaggahaṇavasena bhavassādo hoti bhavoghassa vedanā vatthu, santatighanagahaṇavasena visesato citte attābhiniveso hotīti diṭṭhoghassa cittaṃ vatthu, dhammesu vinibbhogassa dukkarattā dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya duppaṭivijjhattā sammoho hotīti avijjoghassa dhammā vatthu, tasmā tesaṃ pahānatthaṃ cattārova vuttā.
再者,从某一角度来看:正因为身体是欲瀑流的所依,所以也便成为贪欲身系的所依;苦受之中有嗔随眠随增,因此具有苦苦、变易苦、行苦的受,殊胜地成为嗔恚身系的所依;在心中,由于执取为恒常,便会产生“依戒得清净”等邪执,所以心是戒禁取身系的所依;若有情于依名色而存在的缘起真实不能如实观见,便会生起“此是真实”的有见或非有见,因此那些法即是此身系的所依;以耽著乐受的方式,生起不顾他世、执著“无布施”等见,所以受是见取的所依;由于执持相续、密集之相,在贪染等心中生起痴迷,因此心是痴趣的所依;由于不能通达法的自性而生起怖畏,所以法是怖畏趣的所依。此外,此处未说到的那些,也应按照所述道理配属其作为所依的关系。例如,于瀑流中所说的道理,同样适用于轭与漏,因为它们在意义上并无差别。同样地,依于第一个瀑流与第三、第四身系的配属之理,也能配属身、心、法作为其余取所依的关系;依于欲瀑流与嗔恚身系显示巴利原文
Yadaggena ca kāyo kāmoghassa vatthu, tadaggena abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu, dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetīti dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhūtā vedanā visesena byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu, citte niccaggahaṇavasena sassatassa attano sīlena suddhītiādi parāmasanaṃ hotīti sīlabbataparāmāsassa cittaṃ vatthu, nāmarūpaparicchedena bhūtaṃ bhūtato apassantassa bhavavibhavadiṭṭhisaṅkhāto idaṃsaccābhiniveso hotīti tassa dhammā vatthu, sukhavedanāssādavasena paralokanirapekkho ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādikaṃ parāmāsaṃ uppādetīti diṭṭhupādānassa vedanā vatthu santatighanagahaṇavasena sarāgādicitte sammoho hotīti mohāgatiyā cittaṃ vatthu, dhammasabhāvānavabodhena bhayaṃ hotīti bhayāgatiyā dhammā vatthu. Ye panettha avuttā, tesaṃ vuttanayena vatthubhāvo yojetabbo. Tathā hi oghesu vuttanayā eva yogāsavesupi yojanā atthato abhinnattā. Tathā paṭhamoghatatiyacatutthaganthayojanāya vuttanayā eva kāyacittadhammānaṃ itarūpādānavatthutā yojanā, tathā kāmoghabyāpādakāyaganthayojanāya vuttanayā eva kāyavedanānaṃ chandadosāgati vatthutā yojanā vā.
根据“以食集故身集,以触集故受集,以行缘识,以识缘名色”的经说,成为身等之生起原因的段食、触食、意思食、识食,通过对身等的遍知,也就被遍知了。因此说“为了遍知四食”。这是依《指导论》的理趣,也就是经藏注释的方法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āhārasamudayā kāyasamudayo, phassasamudayā vedanāsamudayo, (saṃ. ni. 5.408) saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vacanato kāyādīnaṃ samudayabhūtā kabaḷīkārāhāraphassamanosañcetanāviññāṇāhārā kāyādiparijānanena pariññātā hontīti āha ‘‘catubbidhāhārapariññattha’’nti pakaraṇanayoti nettipakaraṇavasena suttantasaṃvaṇṇanānayo.
所谓“依归向”,是指依靠对身等以及善等诸法的持续忆念。因为具有这种忆念而趣向涅槃,所以称为「念」。在这个含义下,「一性」即唯一自性的涅槃中,汇集、会合,就叫做「归向一味」。正是为了显示这一意义,才说了“正如……”等。或者,成为证入同一涅槃之因的同一性,就是念处的一体性,在其中汇集、达到同分的状态,这也叫「归向一味」。而为了显示这种作为证入同一涅槃之因的同一性,才说了“正如……”等等。应当知道,在第一种解释中,“归向”与“一味汇集”这些词是分开说的;而在第二种解释里,它们和「念」一起,都是作为念处一体性的原因来说的。或者,如果把“归向”理解为“趣向”的意思,那么“趣向”本身就是“汇集”;如果不在“汇集”中解释「念」的词义,那么「念」就只是“持”的意思,因为「念」没有别的词义。前者是「念」之体性的原因,后者是一体性的原因。这样,即便是关于涅槃的汇集,这些词也一并被说成是念处一体性的原因。十四种、九种、十六种、五种——这是根据经典下文所说的入出息等段落而说的。然而,通过它们内部的细分,以及随顺那些细分的进一步开展,在修习中确实可以获得种种不同的方式。应当知道,用“于四方安置货物”的譬喻,是表示身随观等各别念处修习功用的相似之处。显示巴利原文
Saraṇavasenāti kāyādīnaṃ kusalādidhammānañca upadhāraṇavasena. Saranti gacchanti nibbānaṃ etāyāti satīti imasmiṃ atthe ekatte ekasabhāve nibbāne samosaraṇaṃ samāgamo ekattasamosaraṇaṃ. Etadeva hi dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekanibbānapavesahetubhūtā vā samānatā eko satipaṭṭhānassa bhāvo ekattaṃ, tattha samosaraṇaṃ taṃsabhāgatā ekattasamosaraṇaṃ. Ekanibbānapavesahetubhāvaṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Etasmiṃ atthe saraṇekattasamosaraṇāni saheva satipaṭṭhānekabhāvassa kāraṇatthena vuttānīti daṭṭhabbāni, purimasmiṃ visuṃ. Saraṇavasenāti vā ‘‘gamanavasenā’’ti atthe sati tadeva gamanaṃ samosaraṇanti, samosaraṇe vā satisaddatthavasena avuccamāne dhāraṇatāva satīti satisaddatthantarābhāvā purimaṃ satibhāvassa kāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ ekabhāvassāti nibbānasamosaraṇepi sahitāneva tāni satipaṭṭhānekabhāvassa kāraṇāni vuttāni honti. Cuddasavidhena,navavidhena, soḷasavidhena, pañcavidhenāti idaṃ upari pāḷiyaṃ (ma. ni. 1.107) āgatānaṃ ānāpānapabbādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, tesaṃ pana antarabhedavasena tadanugatabhedavasena ca bhāvanāya anekavidhatā labbhatiyeva. Catūsu disāsu uṭṭhānakabhaṇḍasadisatā kāyānupassanāditaṃtaṃsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanānubhāvassa daṭṭhabbā.
根据“诸比丘!应行于自己父亲的领域、自己的境界中”等语,这些法——即身随观等——正是比丘的所行境。于此,因由身随观等行道而成为比丘,故以“比丘于身随观身而住”等说法来显示比丘,并在该比丘身上确立了此义,故说“通过行道显示比丘”。由于他追随大师的行迹,且是全部教法的承受者,因此堪能领受一切种类的教诫。显示巴利原文
‘‘Gocare, bhikkhave, caratha sake pettike visaye’’tiādivacanato (dī. ni. 3.80; saṃ. ni. 5.372) bhikkhugocarā ete dhammā, yadidaṃ kāyānupassanādayo. Tattha yasmā kāyānupassanādipaṭipattiyā bhikkhu hoti, tasmā ‘‘kāyānupassī viharatī’’tiādinā bhikkhuṃ dasseti, bhikkhumhi taṃ niyamatoti āha ‘‘paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanato’’ti. Satthu cariyānuvidhāyakattā sakalasāsanasampaṭiggāhakattā ca sabbappakārāya anusāsaniyā bhājanabhāvo.
“应平等而行”指舍弃身体等的不平等行,以身等平等而行。因贪等烦恼寂灭,故为“寂静者”。因调伏诸根,故为“调御者”。因由四道决定,故为“决定者”。因行持最殊胜行,故为“梵行者”。因放下身杖等,故为“已放下杖者”。他安住于圣位,如此之人,当知即是“婆罗门”、“沙门”、“比丘”,因为他已除却恶法、寂灭恶法、断除烦恼。显示巴利原文
Samaṃ careyyāti kāyādivisamacariyaṃ pahāya kāyādīhi samaṃ careyya. Rāgādivūpasamena santo. Indriyadamena danto. Catumagganiyāmena niyato. Seṭṭhacaritāya brahmacārī. Kāyadaṇḍādioropanena nidhāya daṇḍaṃ. Ariyabhāve ṭhito so evarūpo bāhitapāpasamitapāpabhinnakilesatāhi brāhmaṇo samaṇo bhikkhūti veditabbo.
在“此身及外部名色”等语境中,“身”指五蕴;在“以身领受乐……”等语境中,名身亦称作“身”。为作区别,此处说明“身”指色身。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayañceva kāyo bahiddho ca nāmarūpa’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.373) khandhapañcakaṃ, ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.271, 287; pārā. 11) nāmakāyo kāyoti vuccatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘kāyeti rūpakāye’’ti āha.
「不相混杂」的意思是:即便可能因“受等诸法依于此身、系属于此身”而产生过失,落入“于身中修习受等随观”的错误,这里也意在表明“不相混杂”。再者,由于“身”这个词是以集合体为所依,并且为了在执取整体时显示不净相,所以用单数说“于身”;同样,心虽依所缘等差别而有众多分类,但依“心”这一状态的共通性而总摄为一,因此用单数说“于心”;而受则有乐等不同类别,需各自分别随观,所以用复数说“于诸受”,注释正是据此展开;至于诸法,它们分成五十余类,且以能随观的方式而言也可分成多种,因此也用复数。为遮止执取部分、耽著假名,以及执取核心精要的倾向,将身用支节分解,支节又用头发等分解,头发等再用四大与所造色分解,由此说明“如此则不存在名为‘身’的实体”等。在如殿堂等城市组成部分的集合体中,即便是执取部分的人,也不会对它生起部分之执;但有些人仍会认为‘确实存在一个叫做“城市”的实体’,因而产生假名耽著。由此,在对女人、男人等假名的耽著上,举了城市的譬喻。显示巴利原文
Asammissatoti ‘‘vedanādayopi ettha sitā ettha paṭibaddhā’’ti kāye vedanādianupassanāpasaṅgepi āpanne tato asammissatoti attho. Samūhavisayatāya cassa kāya-saddassa samudāyupādānatāya ca asubhākārassa ‘‘kāye’’ti ekavacanaṃ, tathā ārammaṇādivibhāgena anekabhedabhinnampi cittaṃ cittabhāvasāmaññena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘citte’’ti ekavacanaṃ, vedanā pana sukhādibhedabhinnā visuṃ visuṃ anupassitabbāti dassentena ‘‘vedanāsū’’ti bahuvacanena vuttā, tatheva ca niddeso pavattito, dhammā ca paropaṇṇāsabhedā anupassitabbākārena ca anekabhedā evāti tepi bahuvacanavaseneva vuttā. Avayavīgāha-samaññātidhāvana-sārādānābhinivesanisedhanatthaṃ kāyaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgehi, tāni ca kesādīhi, kesādike ca bhūtupādāyarūpehi vinibbhujjanto ‘‘tathā na kāye’’tiādimāha. Pāsādādinagarāvayavasamūhe avayavīvādinopi avayavīgāhaṃ na karonti, nagaraṃ nāma koci attho atthīti pana kesañci samaññātidhāvanaṃ siyāti itthipurisādisamaññātidhāvane nagaranidassanaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṅgapaccaṅgasamūho, kesalomādisamūho bhūtupādāyasamūho ca yathāvuttasamūhe tabbinimutto kāyopi nāma koci natthi, pageva itthiādayoti āha ‘‘kāyo vā…pe… dissatī’’ti. Koci dhammoti iminā sattajīvādiṃ paṭikkhipati, avayavī pana kāyapaṭikkhepeneva paṭikkhittoti. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ kāyādisaññābhidhānānītiāha ‘‘yathāvutta…pe… karontī’’ti.
「他所见的」指见到女人或男人。可是,眼识难道能见到女人、男人吗?确实不能。然而,世人是依于‘我见女人,我见男人’这种生起的想,才说「他所见的」。另一种解释:他以邪见,即颠倒执取而见,这种所见并非真正的所见,意思是它并不是色处,而是由颠倒构想出来的色。再者,那个由头发等、四大与所造色的集合所构成的‘所见之物’,并不被眼识所认知;或者说,那个‘所见之物’并非此处所说的所见。「他不见所见的真实」意思是:对于那个由头发等、四大与所造色集合而成的色处——即所见,他并不以慧眼如实观见。「不见而系缚」意思是:因为不以慧眼如实观见此有身,便执为‘这是我的,这是我,这是我的我’,从而被烦恼的束缚所系缚。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ passati itthiṃ purisaṃ vā. Nanu cakkhunā itthipurisadassanaṃ natthīti? Saccametaṃ, ‘‘itthiṃ passāmi, purisaṃ passāmī’’ti pana pavattasaññāya vasena ‘‘yaṃ passatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Micchādassanena vā diṭṭhiyā yaṃ passati, na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ rūpāyatanaṃ na hotīti attho viparītaggāhavasena micchāparikappitarūpattā. Atha vā taṃ kesādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ na hoti acakkhuviññāṇaviññeyyattā, diṭṭhaṃ vā taṃ na hoti. Yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passatīti yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ kesādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ paññācakkhunā bhūtato na passatīti attho. Apassaṃ bajjhateti imaṃ attabhāvaṃ yathābhūtaṃ paññācakkhunā apassanto ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me atto’’ti kilesabandhanena bajjhati.
「不见其他法随观者」意思是:并非随观其他本质,也就是不从‘不净’等之外的其他性质来随观的人——这是它的含义。通过“说了什么”等问答,使该含义变得明晰。所谓「地界」,是指头发等各部分中的地界,由于它是众法的集合,所以称为「身」;或者,也可指具有众多分类、遍布全身、以先后次序转起的特相地界本身,从其集合的角度而称为「身」。于「水界」等之中,道理也是如此。显示巴利原文
Naaññadhammānupassīti na aññasabhāvānupassī, asubhādito aññākārānupassī na hotīti attho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hotītiādinā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti. Pathavīkāyanti kesādikoṭṭhāsapathaviṃ dhammasamūhattā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati, lakkhaṇapathavimeva vā anekappabhedaṃ sakalasarīragataṃ pubbāpariyabhāvena ca pavattamānaṃ samūhavasena gahetvā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati. Āpokāyantiādīsupi eseva nayo.
“应如是执取者”,是指被无闻凡夫以“我、我所”——即以自我与属我的状态——所执取的那个。现在,为兼依七种随观的方式说明身随观,便开示“再则……”等。其中,“以无常随观”,是指对此由四因所生之身,随观为“无常”。当他如此观察时,便称为随之随观此身无常之相。对于如是安住的行者,常想丝毫不会生起,故说“不作常想”,他正是如此“断除常想”。这里,“确为随观无常”中的“确为”一词,是含略了所否定内容的表达,为显示所遮遣之义,而说“不作常想”。于此不应怀疑这会否定苦随观等的进行,因为“确为”的作用唯在否定其对立面,而他们(苦随观等)将在后面教示中得到确立。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gahetabbassāti ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti evaṃ attattaniyabhāvena andhabālehi gahetabbassa. Idāni sattannaṃ anupassanākārānampi vasena kāyānupassanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha aniccato anupassatīti catusamuṭṭhānikakāyaṃ ‘‘anicca’’nti anupassati, evaṃ passanto evaṃ cassa aniccākārampi anupassatīti vuccati. Tathābhūtassa cassa niccaggāhassa lesopi na hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘no niccato’’ti tathāhesa ‘‘niccasaññaṃ pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.35) vutto. Ettha ca ‘‘aniccato eva anupassatī’’ti eva-kāro luttaniddiṭṭhoti tena nivattitamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no niccato’’ti vuttaṃ. Na cettha dukkhato anupassanādinivattanamāsaṅkitabbaṃ paṭiyogīnivattanaparattā eva-kārassa, uparidesanāruḷhattā ca tāsaṃ.
“以苦随观”等,其理相同。然而有如是差别:因为无常是苦,故对此身以苦随观;因为苦是无我,故以无我随观。再者,凡是无常、苦、无我者,不应欢喜,不应于彼染着,故说“厌离而不欢喜,离染而不染着”。他如此不染着,便令贪欲灭尽而无生起,意为不令其集起。如此修习者,是舍离而不执取。因为此无常等随观,以暂时镇伏的方式,连同以身作为所依的蕴与诸行,由舍弃烦恼而成为“弃舍之舍离”;又因见到有为的过患,而倾向并跃入相反的涅槃,故称为“既是弃舍舍离,亦是跃入舍离”。因此,成就此随观的比丘,以所说方式舍弃烦恼并跃入涅槃;处于此状态者,既不以再生烦恼的方式执取烦恼,也不以不见过患的方式执取有为所缘。是故说“舍离而不执取”。现在,为显示依这些随观所断除的法,便说:“当他这样以无常随观时,便断除常想”。这里,“常想”是指生起“诸行是常”的颠倒想。这是因为通过断除见颠倒与心颠倒,来宣说断除想颠倒,故文中用“想”一词;或者,应显示巴利原文
Dukkhato anupassatītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – aniccassa dukkhattā tameva kāyaṃ dukkhato anupassati, dukkhassa anattattā anattato anupassati. Yasmā pana yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, taṃ anabhinanditabbaṃ, na tattha rajjitabbaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbindati no nandati,virajjati no rajjatī’’ti. So evaṃ arajjanto rāgaṃ nirodheti no samudeti, samudayaṃ na karotīti attho. Evaṃ paṭipanno ca paṭinissajjati no ādiyati. Ayañhi aniccādianupassanā tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ kāyatannissayakhandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilesānaṃ pariccajanato, saṅkhatadosadassanena tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandanato ‘‘pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cā’’ti vuccati, tasmā tāya samannāgato bhikkhu vuttanayena kilese ca pariccajati, nibbāne ca pakkhandati , tathābhūto ca nibbattanavasena kilese na ādiyati, nāpi adosadassitāvasena saṅkhatārammaṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭinissajjati no ādiyatī’’ti. Idānissa tāhi anupassanāhi yesaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so taṃ aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahatī’’ti. Tattha niccasaññanti ‘‘saṅkhārā niccā’’ti evaṃ pavattaviparītasaññaṃ. Diṭṭhicittavipallāsapahānamukheneva saññāvipallāsappahānanti saññāgahaṇaṃ, saññāsīsena vā tesampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nandinti sappītikataṇhaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayemeva.
“他住”:以此表示具足身随观者的威仪住,故说“他行动”,意为维持威仪路。从作为所缘遍满的角度,说“于三有中”;但从生起的角度,烦恼的依地实为有限。虽然“热忱能断烦恼”在正见等中也存在,但“热忱”一词确实特指精进,故说“这是精进的名词”。或者,在断除对立面时,精进以激励相应法的方式生起,具有殊胜性,因此唯独精进被称为“热忱”,余法则不如此。而“具热忱者”(ātāpī)中的“ī”音,乃是表示称赞或殊胜,故以“具热忱者”显示其具备正勤。正确、全面、自己了知,是为“正知者”:因无混杂地确认,即无见余法的状态,故为“正确”——不颠倒;因以一切行相了知,故为“全面”;因以渐次殊胜的方式生起,故为“自己了知”。若是以慧随观,如何成就念处之性?对此,说:“因为不是……”等。“一切处有益者”:在一切处存在,因为在一切心沉滞或掉举时都应当希求;或者,于沉滞或掉举时,应被修习的一切觉支皆依此而有,故称“一切处有益”。于此,依靠由念所资助的慧,那位以显示巴利原文
Viharatīti iminā kāyānupassanāsamaṅgino iriyāpathavihāro vuttoti āha ‘‘iriyatī’’ti iriyāpathaṃ pavattetīti attho. Ārammaṇakaraṇavasena abhibyāpanato ‘‘tīsu bhavesū’’ti vuttaṃ, uppajjanavasena pana kilesā parittabhūmakā evāti. Yadipi kilesānaṃ pahānaṃ ātāpananti taṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīnampi attheva, ātāpa-saddo pana vīriyeyeva niruḷhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vīriyassetaṃ nāma’’nti. Atha vā paṭipakkhapahāne sampayuttadhammānaṃ abbhussahanavasena pavattamānassa vīriyassa sātisayaṃ tadātāpananti vīriyameva tathā vuccati, na aññe dhammā. Ātāpīti cāyamīkāro pasaṃsāya, atisayassa vā dīpakoti ātāpīgahaṇena sammappadhānasamaṅgitaṃ dasseti. Sammā, samantato, sāmañca pajānanto sampajāno, asammissato vavatthāne aññadhammānupassitābhāvena sammā aviparītaṃ, sabbākārapajānanena samantato, uparūpari visesāvahabhāvena pavattiyā sayaṃ pajānantoti attho. Yadi paññāya anupassati, kathaṃ satipaṭṭhānatāti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Sabbatthikanti sabbattha bhavaṃ sabbattha līne uddhate ca citte icchitabbattā, sabbe vā līne uddhate ca bhāvetabbā bojjhaṅgā atthikā etāyāti sabbatthikā. Satiyā laddhūpakārāya eva paññāya ettha yathāvutte kāye kammaṭṭhāniko bhikkhu kāyānupassī viharati. Antosaṅkhepo anto olīyano, kosajjanti attho. Upāyapariggaheti ettha sīlavisodhanādi gaṇanādi uggahakosallādi ca upāyo, tabbipariyāyato anupāyo veditabbo. Yasmā ca upaṭṭhitassati yathāvuttaupāyaṃ na pariccajati, anupāyañca na upādiyati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘muṭṭhassati…pe… asamatthohotī’’ti. Tenāti upāyānupāyānaṃ pariggahaparivajjanesu apariccāgāpariggahesu ca asamatthabhāvena assa yogino.
因为唯在此处,念才被称为念处,所以与它相应的精进等法,称为「支」,因此说:「显示了它的相应支之后」。这里,「支」一词应当被看作原因的同义词,而且这里通过提及念,应当被看作也包含了定,因为定被包含在定蕴中。或者,因为此教说是以念为首的——确实并非单凭念就能断除烦恼,或证得涅槃,念也不能单独地转起——因此,就像在禅那教示中说「有寻」等词一样,这里「支」一词,应被看作有「组成部分」的意思,以显示相应支。而「所断支」,如同「确实远离了诸欲……」等处一样,是为了显示应被断除的部分。因为在这里,所意指的是世间道,而非出世间道,所以注释在显示属于前行部分的调伏时,说:「或以彼分断除,或以镇伏断除」。「那些法」是指受等诸法。因为在此处,那些法并非所意欲的,所以说:「这是以抽取含义的方式说出的」。显示巴利原文
Yasmā satiyevettha satipaṭṭhānaṃ vuttā, tasmāssa sampayuttā dhammā vīriyādayo aṅganti āha ‘‘sampayogaṅgañcassa dassetvā’’ti. Aṅga-saddo cettha kāraṇapariyāyo daṭṭhabbo, satiggahaṇeneva cettha samādhissati gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ tassā samādhikkhandhe saṅgahitattā. Yasmā vā satisīsenāyaṃ desanā. Na hi kevalāya satiyā kilesappahānaṃ hoti, nibbānādhigamo vā, na ca kevalā sati pavattati, tasmāssa jhānadesanāyaṃ savitakkādivacanassa viya sampayogaṅgadassanatāti aṅga-saddassa avayavapariyāyatā daṭṭhabbā. Pahānaṅganti ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.226; ma. ni. 1.271, 287; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123; pārā. 11) viya pahātabbaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ. Yasmā ettha lokiyamaggo adhippeto, na lokuttaramaggo, tasmā pubbabhāgiyameva vinayaṃ dassento ‘‘tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā’’ti āha. Tesaṃ dhammānanti vedanādidhammānaṃ. Tesañhi tattha anadhippetattā ‘‘atthuddhāranayenetaṃ vutta’’nti vuttaṃ.
在已笼统说出两种盖的断除之后,现在为了显示以逐一方式所说的断除差别,而说:“特别地”。或者,为了显示不说“调伏了诸盖”而说“贪忧”一词的用意,才说“特别地……”等。因为显示断除与修身随观修习直接对立的随喜和忧恼,正是这一说法的目的。“以身成就为根本的……”:是指以色身、力气、青春、健康等身体成就为因相而生起的。与此表述相反,当知“以身之不成就为根本的对立”,也就是以身体的不成就为根本的对立与损害。“以身修习”:即修身随观的修习。在这里,身随观的修习正是被意指为“身修习”。“因此”:即通过说明断除随喜等的那些话。“瑜伽行者的威力……”等,是对所说义的阐明。显示巴利原文
Avisesena dvīhipi nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttanti katvā puna ekekena vuttaṃ pahānavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesenā’’ti āha. Atha vā ‘‘vineyya nīvaraṇānī’’ti avatvā abhijjhādomanassavacanassa payojanaṃ dassento ‘‘visesenā’’tiādimāha. Kāyānupassanābhāvanāya hi ujuvipaccanīkānaṃ anurodhādīnaṃ pahānaṃ dassanaṃ etassa payojananti. Kāyasampattimūlakassāti rūpa-bala-yobbanārogyādi-sarīrasampadā-nimittassa. Vuttavipariyāyato kāyavipattimūlako virodho veditabbo. Kāyabhāvanāyāti kāyānupassanābhāvanāya. Sā hi idha ‘‘kāyabhāvanā’’ti adhippetā. Tenāti anurodhādippahānavacanena. Yogānubhāvo hītiādi vuttassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ.
“以念与正知”:这是通过着重强调地取用“正知”而说的。“一切处有益的业处”指佛随念、慈心修习、死随念和不净观这四种。瑜伽行者所护持的这四种业处,被称为“一切处有益的业处”,因为它们需要藉由强大的正知力量,在毫不间断的状态下持续得到护持;或者,此处是通过“念”来说明“止”,因为念被归在定蕴之中。显示巴利原文
Satisampajaññenāti atisampajaññaggahaṇena. Sabbatthikakammaṭṭhānanti buddhānussati mettā maraṇassati asubhabhāvanā ca. Idañhi catukkaṃ yoginā parihariyamānaṃ ‘‘sabbatthikakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati atisampajaññabalena avicchinnassa tassa pariharitabbattā, satiyā vā samatho vutto tassā samāddhikkhandhena saṅgahitattā.
“因此”:这是指不取字面之义,仅依分别义理而展开的分别论文句;与此相应的“注疏之理路”——为阐明字义而随宜给出的释义理路——其所显之义“如何相符”,应当如此了知:在义理上和意旨上全不相违,而且绝对地相合、一致。显示巴利原文
Tenāti saddatthaṃ anādiyitvā bhāvatthasseva vibhajanavasena pavattena vibhaṅgapāṭhena saha. Aṭṭhakathānayoti saddatthassapi vivaraṇavasena yathārahaṃ vutto atthasaṃvaṇṇanānayo. Yathā saṃsandatīti yathā atthato adhippāyato ca avilomento aññadatthu saṃsandati sameti, evaṃ veditabbo.
“再说受等之词”:此处,于五蕴有中,从依止缘的角度说,心与心所依止于受;而无色法亦系属于色而存在。即使如此可能引发将受也视为身随观等之嫌,但为显示从他们中毫无混杂地加以确定,以及为显示破除密集等义,所以第二次单独提出“受”。由此,并非在受上成为“身随观者”或“心法随观者”,而是确切地成为“受随观者”——通过针对所谓受的对象,只显示受随观的姿态,表明了毫无混杂的确定性。同样,如经中所说:“于任何时,若有乐受,尔时即无苦受或不苦不乐受;或于任何时,若有苦受或不苦不乐受,尔时即无其余之受。”如此不滞留在“受这一现象存在”的共相上,而是将每一种受单独分别显示,从而表明了破除密集与剥离似为稳固的状态。藉由如此显示其仅安住一刹那,也就阐明了无常性,并由无常性表明苦性与无我性。“破除密集等”:此处“等”字亦应理解为包含此义。因为在受上,此人唯是受随观者,非余法随观者。此为何义?譬如愚人面对并非摩尼珠性质的水……显示巴利原文
Vedanādīnaṃpuna vacaneti ettha nissayapaccayabhāvavasena cittadhammānaṃ vedanāsannissitattā pañcavokārabhave arūpadhammānaṃ rūpapaṭibaddhavuttito ca vedanāya kāyādianupassanāpasaṅgepi āpanne tadasammissato vavatthānadassanatthaṃ ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthañca dutiyavedanāgahaṇaṃ. Tena na vedanāyaṃ kāyānupassī, cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho vedanānupassīyevāti vedanāsaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ vedanānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye sukhā vedanā, na tasmiṃ samaye dukkhā adukkhamasukhā vā vedanā. Yasmiṃ vā pana samaye dukkhā adukkhamasukhā vā vedanā, na tasmiṃ samaye itarā vedanā’’ti vedanābhāvasāmaññe aṭṭhatvā taṃ taṃ vedanaṃ vinibbhujitvā dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dhuvabhāvaviveko dassito hoti. Tena tāsaṃ khaṇamattāvaṭṭhānadassanena aniccatāya tato eva dukkhatāya anattatāya ca dassanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hoti. Ghanavinibbhogādīti ādi-saddena ayampi attho veditabbo. Ayañhi vedanāyaṃ vedanānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā nāma bālo amaṇisabhāvepi udakabubbuḷake maṇiākārānupassī hoti, na evamayaṃ ṭhitiramaṇīyepi vedayite, pageva itarasmiṃ manuññākārānupassī, atha kho khaṇabhaṅguratāya avasavattitāya kilesāsucipaggharaṇatāya ca aniccaanattaasubhākārānupassī, vipariṇāmadukkhatāya saṅkhāradukkhatāya ca visesato dukkhānupassīyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ cittadhammesupi yathārahaṃ puna vacane payojanaṃ vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Kevalaṃ panidhā’’tiādinā idha ‘ettakaṃ veditabba’’nti veditabbaparicchedaṃ dasseti. Esa nayoti iminā yathā cittaṃ dhammā ca anupassitabbā, tathā tāni anupassanto ‘‘citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassī’’ti veditabboti imamatthaṃ atidisati.
“凡是把乐见作苦者”:指任何一位比丘以慧眼,将乐受由于变易必然带有的苦性,正观为“苦”。“见作苦、见作箭者”:将苦受正观为“箭”——因为它产生逼迫,如从内部刺戳,且难以拔出。“不苦不乐”:指舍受。“寂静的”:因为不苦不乐受不像苦、乐那样粗重,且依其缘而有止息的特质,故称寂静。“见作无常者”:因有已还无,具生灭、暂时性而遮止恒常见,故正观为“无常”。这位比丘即是“善见的比丘”,意为:他确实完全地、或清晰地正确观察诸受。显示巴利原文
Yosukhaṃ dukkhato addāti yo bhikkhu sukhavedanaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhatāya ‘‘dukkha’’nti paññācakkhunā addakkhi. Dukkhamaddakkhi sallatoti dukkhavedanaṃ pīḷājananato antotudanato dunnīharaṇato ca sallanti addakkhi passi. Adukkhamasukhanti upekkhāvedanaṃ. Santanti sukhadukkhāni viya anoḷārikatāya paccayavasena vūpasantasabhāvatāya ca santaṃ. Aniccatoti hutvā abhāvato udayabbayavantato tāvakālikatoniccapaṭikkhepato ca ‘‘anicca’’nti yo addakkhi. Sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu ekaṃsena paribyattaṃ vā vedanāya sammā passanakoti attho.
「是苦的」:因具有行苦性,所以说它是「苦的」。「所有那一切在苦中」:我说所有那些感受,全都包含在苦之中,归属于苦,因为它们无法超越行苦性。「也从乐与苦等」:这是根据乐的住立与变易、对乐的无知,以及苦的变易与住立、对苦的无知而宣说的。因此,应以这三受皆为乐而随观,也应以这三受皆为苦而随观——这是其含义所在。应当结合种种差别来理解诸行:如所缘有色等的不同;因主导者不同,而有欲等;因俱生法不同,而有智等;因地的不同,而有欲界等;以及善、不善、他们之异熟、唯作等种种差别;「等」字还包含了有行、无行、有依处、无依处等种种差别。「空法之」:是依据《法集论》中「诸法存在」等语句,于空品中所说的空自性之义。「在此虽可」等语句,提出了这样的诘难:‘既然先前已经断除,就不应再说再次断除。’也许还有这样的观点:‘在道心的那一刹那,于一处已断除,便在一切处都已断除,因此不必在各处分别宣说。’其中,对前一种诘难,是以补特伽罗的不同来化解;对后一种诘难,是以心刹那的不同来化解。因为在世间修习中,已于身断除显示巴利原文
Dukkhātipīti saṅkhāradukkhatāya dukkhā itipi. Sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti sabbaṃ taṃ vedayitaṃ dukkhasmiṃ antogadhaṃ pariyāpannaṃ vadāmi saṅkhāradukkhatānativattanato. Sukhadukkhatopi cāti sukhādīnaṃ ṭhitivipariṇāmaññāṇasukhatāya vipariṇāmaṭhitiaññāṇadukkhatāya ca vuttattā tissopi sukhato, tissopi ca dukkhato anupassitabbāti attho. Rūpādi-ārammaṇachandādi-adhipati-ñāṇādi-sahajāta- kāmāvacarādi-bhūminānattabhedānaṃ kusalākusala-taṃvipākakiriyā-nānattādibhedānañca, ādi-saddena saṅkhārikāsaṅkhārikasa-vatthukāvatthukādi-nānattabhedānañca vasenāti yojetabbaṃ. Suññatadhammassāti ‘‘dhammā hontī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 121) suññatavāre āgatasuññatasabhāvassa vasena. ‘‘Kāmañcetthā’’tiādinā pubbe pahīnattā puna pahānaṃ na vattabbanti codanaṃ dasseti, maggacittakkhaṇe vā ekattha pahīnaṃ sabbattha pahīnameva hotīti visuṃ visuṃ na vattabbanti. Tattha purimāya codanāya nānāpuggalaparihāro, pacchimāya nānācittakkhaṇikaparihāro. Lokiyabhāvanāya hi kāye pahīnaṃ na vedanādīsu pahīnaṃ hoti yadipi na pavatteyya, na paṭipakkhabhāvanāya tattha sā abhijjhādomanassassa appavatti hotīti puna tappahānaṃ vattabbamevāti. Ekattha pahīnaṃ sesesupi pahīnaṃ hotīti maggasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ, lokiyabhāvanāya vā sabbattha appavattimattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pañcapi khandhā loko’’ti hi vibhaṅge (vibha. 362, 364, 366, 373) catūsupi ṭhānesu vuttanti.
身随观释义显示巴利原文
Kāyānupassanāvaṇṇanā
安那般那念段落释义显示巴利原文
Ānāpānapabbavaṇṇanā
107 在外部各教法中,也可能出现其中的一部分修法,因此为了统摄一切种类,才说「能生起一切种类身随观者」。由此,依出入息念等段落而有的十四种方式,包含其中的「内」等随观方式,以及《身至念经》(中部3.154)中所说以发等的色、形、遍为所缘的四禅那等方式,乃至世间等种类——所有这些,皆毫无遗漏地全部统摄在内。而且,这些种类「唯于此教法中才有,于外部则无」,所以说「一切种类……是遮止者」。「遮止彼状态者」:即遮止了「其他教法是能生起一切种类身随观者所依之处」这一状态。由此显示,「在此,诸比丘」一语中的「在此」一词,含有「唯在此中」的意义。确实,有些语句哪怕只有一个词,也包含限定的意义,如「食风者」(长部注疏2.374)。因此说「唯有在此是沙门」等。因为,能圆满成就沙门之法者,即是能生起一切种类身随观者。「外道之说」:指其他外道的各种不同学说与宗派。显示巴利原文
107. Bāhirakesupi ito ekadesassa sambhavato sabbappakāraggahaṇaṃ kataṃ ‘‘sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassā’’ti. Tena ye ime ānāpānapabbādivasena āgatā cuddasappakārā, tadantogadhā ca ajjhattādianupassanā pakārā, tathā kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.154) vuttā kesādivaṇṇasaṇṭhānakasiṇārammaṇacatukkajjhānappakārā, lokiyādippakārā ca, te sabbepi anavasesato saṅgaṇhāti. Ime ca pakārā imasmiṃyeva sāsane, na ito bahiddhāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbappakāra…pe… paṭisedhano cā’’ti. Tattha tathābhāvapaṭisedhanoti sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassa puggalassa aññasāsanassa nissayabhāvapaṭisedhano. Etena ‘‘idha, bhikkhave’’ti ettha idha-saddo antogadhaevasaddatthoti dasseti . Santi hi ekapadānipi sāvadhāraṇāni yathā ‘‘vāyubhakkho’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.374). Tenāha ‘‘idheva samaṇo’’tiādi. Paripuṇṇasamaṇakaraṇadhammo hi so, yo sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattako. Parappavādāti paresaṃ aññatitthiyānaṃ nānappakārā vādā titthāyatanāni.
为了表明唯林野等住处才是与修习相应的坐卧具,所以说「因为对于此」等。「伪公牛」:指难以调伏、未达调伏的公牛。「伪母牛」:正如挤奶时,乳汁不能从乳房完全无余地流出一般,它阻碍挤奶。「色所缘等味」:指缘取色声等而生起的乐味。「先前惯习的所缘」:指出家以前,或在无始轮回中已熟习的所缘。显示巴利原文
Araññādikasseva bhāvanānurūpasenāsanataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Duddamo damathaṃ anupagato goṇo kūṭagoṇo. Dohanakāle yathā thanehi anavasesato khīraṃ na paggharati, evaṃ dohapaṭibandhinī kūṭadhenu. Rūpasaddādike paṭicca uppajjanakaassādo rūpārammaṇādiraso. Pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇanti pabbajjāto pubbe, anādimati vā saṃsāre paricitārammaṇaṃ.
「应系缚」:即应系住。「以念」:指依正确记持业处之相而转起的念。「在所缘上」:即于业处所缘之上。「牢固地」:意为稳固,即令其达到强而有力的状态,如同具念者依此得以成就近行定与安止定那般。显示巴利原文
Nibandheyyāti bandheyya. Satiyāti sammadeva kammaṭṭhānassa sallakkhaṇavasena pavattāya satiyā. Ārammaṇeti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe. Daḷhanti thiraṃ, yathā satokārissa upacārappanābhedo samādhi ijjhati, tathā thāmagataṃ katvāti attho.
「殊胜证得与现法乐住之足处」:对于一切佛陀、部分独觉佛及诸佛弟子而言,它是殊胜证得之足处;对于已依其他业处获得殊胜者而言,它则是现法乐住之足处。如同建筑师指导一般,世尊为修行者指示适宜的住处,故而如是宣说。比丘犹如豹子,于林中独处后,以摧破烦恼而达成所愿之目标。「最上果」:这是指沙门果而言。「精进、策励、相应之地」:指修习精进策励之相应、能令成就之地。显示巴利原文
Visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānanti sabbesaṃ buddhānaṃ, ekaccānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ, buddhasāvakānañca visesādhigamassa, aññena kammaṭṭhānena adhigatavisesānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārassa ca padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vatthuvijjācariyo viya bhagavā yogīnaṃ anurūpanivāsaṭṭhānupadisanato. Bhikkhu dīpisadiso araññe ekākī viharitvā paṭipakkhanimmathanena icchitatthasādhanato. Phalamuttamanti sāmaññaphalaṃ sandhāyāha. Parakkamajavayoggabhūminti bhāvanussāhajavassa yoggakaraṇabhūmibhūtaṃ.
「依出入息而修学」:即修习者依出入息修习了知长、短,觉知全身,令粗重身行止息,从而致力于修习;或成为此种状态后,令三学得以转起。「于出入息相」:指在依于出入息而生起的似相上。「把握出入息」:指专注于以色法为门径的观照,即所称的「出入息业处修习者」。「把握禅支」:指专注于以非色法为门径的观照。所言「事」,是因业生之身乃心与心所法的转起之处。「并无众生或补特伽罗」:此指具足清净见,以度疑清净、超越三时之疑惑,即确立:「此唯是法,非无因生,亦非以大自在天等不平等因为因,而唯以无明等为因。」其后,依「凡任何色」等经教,以聚思惟的方式,将无常、苦、无我三相赋予诸法,通过生灭随观等方式增长观智,次第趣入圣道。显示巴利原文
Assāsapassāsānaṃ vasena sikkhatoti assāsapassāsānaṃ dīgharassatāpajānana-sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedana-oḷārikoḷārikapaṭippassambhanavasena bhāvanānuyogaṃ sikkhato, tathābhūto vā hutvā tisso sikkhā pavattayato. Assāsapassāsanimitteti assāsapassāsasannissayena upaṭṭhitapaṭibhāganimitte. Assāsapassāse pariggaṇhāti rūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto, yo ‘‘assāsapassāsakammiko’’ti vutto. Jhānaṅgāni pariggaṇhāti arūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo cittacetasikānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Añño satto vā puggalo vā natthīti visuddhadiṭṭhi ‘‘tayidaṃ dhammamattaṃ na ahetukaṃ, nāpi issarādivisamahetukaṃ, atha kho avijjādīhi eva sahetuka’’nti addhattayepi kaṅkhāvitaraṇena vitiṇṇakaṅkho ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpa’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.361; ma. ni. 2.113; ma. ni. 3.86; a. ni. 4.181; paṭi. ma. 1.48) kalāpasammasanavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā udayabbayānupassanādivasena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento anukkamena maggapaṭipāṭiyā.
“或于他人出入息身”:此段经文乃依循思惟行境而宣说。然而,就止禅而言,于他人出入息身上,安止相的生成并不存在。“此二俱不可得”:是说经中所云的“内、外”,即此两种法合为一所缘的状态,是不可得的。显示巴利原文
Parassa vā assāsapassāsakāyeti idaṃ sammasanacāravasenāyaṃ pāḷi pavattāti katvā vuttaṃ, samathavasena pana parassa assāsapassāsakāye appanānimittuppatti eva natthīti. Idaṃ ubhayaṃ na labbhatīti ‘‘ajjhattaṃ, bahiddhā’’ti ca vuttaṃ idaṃ dhammadvayaghaṭitaṃ ekato ārammaṇabhāvena na labbhati.
“集”,即由此生起,故为集;彼因相即是法,故称“集法”,指出入息生起的因——业生身等。恒常随观于此者,即“集法随观者”。为以譬喻显明此集法,而说“犹如”等。此中,“囊”指皮袋;“风箱管”指吹管;“他们”指业生身等。正如出入息身以果的状态与业生身等相关联,他们业生身等也以因的状态与出入息身相关,故说“他们可称为身中的集法”。“法”之一词,或指本性,如“有生法者”等处所示。因此,于身之缘和合中,随观其具有生起之本性者,即是“集法随观者”。故又说“业生身亦……”等。如此也得以成立“于身”此依处之格义。“灭法随观者”:于此,灭本身虽无因,但若某种因法不存在,彼即不存在;彼之不存在,犹如该灭之无有,故依假说,将业生身等的不存在说为出入息身灭之因。所以又说“犹如皮袋……”等。以上是依第一种解释方式显示义趣。若依第二种解释方式,则义趣不藉假说,可直接理解。正如内与外的随观基于各别所缘事,集法与灭法的随观亦非同一刹那可得。显示巴利原文
Samudeti etasmāti samudayo, so eva kāraṇaṭṭhena dhammoti samudayadhammo, assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattihetukarajakāyādi. Tassa anupassanasīlo samudayadhammānupassī. Taṃ pana samudayadhammaṃ upamāmukhena dassento ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhastanti ruttiṃ. Gaggaranāḷinti ukkāpanāḷiṃ. Teti karajakāyādike. Yathā assāsapassāsakāyo karajakāyādisambandhī phalabhāvena, evaṃ tepi assāsapassāsakāyasambandhino hetubhāvenāti ‘‘samudayadhammā kāyasmi’’nti vattabbataṃ labhantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘samudaya…pe… vuccatī’’ti. Pakativācī vā dhamma-saddo ‘‘jātidhammāna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.131; ma. ni. 3.373; paṭi. ma. 1.33) viyāti kāyassa paccayasamavāye uppajjanapakatikānupassī ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī’’ti vutto. Tenāha – ‘‘karajakāyañcā’’tiādi. Evañca katvā kāyasminti bhummavacanañca samatthitaṃ hoti. Vayadhammānupassīti ettha ahetukattepi vināsassa yesaṃ hetudhammānaṃ abhāve yaṃ na hoti, tadabhāvo tassa abhāvassa hotu viya voharīyatīti upacārato karajakāyādiabhāvo assāsapassāsakāyassa vayakāraṇaṃ vutto. Tenāha ‘‘yathā bhastāyā’’tiādi. Ayaṃ tāvettha paṭhamavikappavasena atthavibhāvanā. Dutiyavikappavasena pana upacārena vināyeva attho veditabbo. Ajjhattabahiddhānupassanā viya bhinnavatthuvisayatāya samudayavayadhammānupassanāpi ekakāle na labbhatīti āha ‘‘kālena samudayaṃ kālena vayaṃ anupassanto’’ti.
“有身”一语中,“唯”字被隐没,故说“唯有身”;为显以遮遣之决定义,而说“非众生”等。其义为:于色等法中,因众生情爱、令他人执著之义,或因具足“有”之功德,而被他人计执为“众生”;又因充满彼众生类,且具死生流转之法,而被计执为“人”;于此处凝结、结生而成胎,故被计执为“女人”;于村落、住处分布而转起,故被计执为“男人”;于此安置我慢,故被计执为“我”;以属于我之物,故被计执为“我所”;以无他故,称为“我”;以属我所有故,称为“我的”;以离上述种类之余者故,称为“任何人”;以属任何人所有故,称为“任何人的”——如此计执者,实际上全无所有,唯有身存在,由此显明身唯是空,无我、无我所。“如是”,即指前所述“唯有身”等方式。“为令智达于极致”:即令身随观念处之智臻于极致。“为令念达于极致”:即令安住于身之念转起至于念之极点。依此所说,“有身”之念先后转起而现前,并于其中令智与念倍复增强,故更说“为令正念正知增长”。显示巴利原文
Atthi kāyoti eva-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti ‘‘kāyova atthī’’ti vatvā avadhāraṇena nivatthitaṃ dassento ‘‘na satto’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yo rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya paresañca sajjāpanaṭṭhena, satvaguṇayogato vā ‘‘satto’’ti parehi parikappito. Tassa sattanikāyassa pūraṇato ca cavanupapajjanadhammatāya galanato ca ‘‘puggalo’’ti. Thīyati saṃhaññati ettha gabbhoti ‘‘itthī’’ti. Puri pure bhāge seti pavattatīti ‘‘puriso’’ti. Āhito ahaṃmāno etthāti ‘‘attā’’ti, attano santakabhāvena ‘‘attaniya’’nti. Paro na hotīti katvā ‘‘aha’’nti, mama santakanti katvā ‘‘mama’’nti. Vuttappakāravinimutto aññoti katvā ‘‘kocī’’ti, tassa santakabhāvena ‘‘kassacī’’ti parikappetabbo koci natthi, kevalaṃ kāyo eva atthīti attattaniyasuññatameva kāyassa vibhāveti. Evanti ‘‘kāyova atthī’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Ñāṇapamāṇatthāyāti kāyānupassanāñāṇaparaṃ pamāṇaṃ pāpanatthāya. Satipamāṇatthāyāti kāyapariggāhikasatipavattaṃ satiparaṃ pamāṇaṃ pāpanatthāya. Imassa hi vuttanayena ‘‘atthi kāyo’’ti aparāparuppattivasena paccupaṭṭhitā sati bhiyyoso mattāya tattha ñāṇassa satiyā ca paribrūhanāya hoti. Tenāha ‘‘satisampajaññānaṃ vaḍḍhatthāyā’’ti.
因此,由于这一修习是对渴爱与见取的正对治,所以说「远离渴爱……远离见……而住」。如是安住之人,于世间不见有任何可执取为「我」或「我所」之物,又能执取什么呢?故说「亦不执取任何」等。关于「如此亦」(evampi):此处的「亦」(pi)字,因前文并无同类的义理,故用来总括尚未说明的意义,因此说「连同上文的意义」。「如是」(evaṃ)则是针对所述情状的反观,作为结语而造,因此说「以此……显示前分的念处」。这里着重的正是前分念处的修习,所以说「此念是苦圣谛」。那念所依存的有身,能令它生起的渴爱——因那种渴爱若无时便不生,故也可说是能令它生起,因此说「那能令它生起的先前渴爱」。「不转起」(appavatti):指不转起的原因,或于此不转起,故称「不转起」。「依四圣谛」(catusaccavasenāti):即依四圣谛为业处。「努力登上」:沿着清净的次第逐步上升,即把修习向上提升。「出离之门」(niyyānamukha):从轮回之苦中解脱的途径。显示巴利原文
Imissā bhāvanāya taṇhādiṭṭhigāhānaṃ ujupaṭipakkhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhā…pe… viharatī’’ti. Tathābhūto ca loke kiñci ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā gahetabbaṃ na passati, kuto gaṇheyya. Tenāha ‘‘na ca kiñcī’’tiādi. Evampīti ettha pi-saddo heṭṭhā niddiṭṭhassa tādisassa atthassa abhāvato avuttasamuccayatthoti dassento ‘‘upari atthaṃ upādāyā’’ti āha. ‘‘Eva’’nti pana niddiṭṭhākārassa paccāmasanaṃ nigamanavasena katanti āha ‘‘iminā pana…pe… dassetī’’ti. Pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānassa idhādhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sati dukkhasacca’’nti. Sā pana sati yasmiṃ attabhāve, tassa samuṭṭhāpikā taṇhā tassāpi samuṭṭhāpikā eva nāma hoti tadabhāve abhāvatoti āha ‘‘tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā’’ti. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ, na pavattati etthāti vā appavatti. Catusaccavasenāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānavasena. Ussakkitvāti visuddhiparamparāya āruhitvā, bhāvanaṃ upari netvāti attho. Niyyānamukhanti vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇūpāyo.
对威仪章的解释显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathapabbavaṇṇanā
108 「依威仪」(iriyāpathavasena):活动称为「威」(iriyā),即动作;但在此处应理解为身体的行为。「威」所行经的路径、活动进行的道路,即是「威仪」(iriyāpatha),指行走等身体姿势。因为众生或以行走、或以站立、或以坐着、或以躺卧,用身体做应做之事。依于这些分类而修,便是以威仪的分类来说的意思。「更复」(puna caparanti):即又另外、更进一步的意思。意谓:除了前面所讲的入出息念业处,我更要讲说其它身随观念处业处,请仔细听。「若行」(gacchanto vā)等,是既适用于仅知‘行走’等,也适用于了知‘行走’等过程中所含殊胜义的通说。在此处,并非仅指了知‘行走’等,而是意在指明‘行走’等过程中所含的殊胜义,故为将其分别显示,才说「在那里,什么」等。「众生可得」(sattūpaladdhi):即不舍、不弃‘有众生存在’的众生执见,因为还执持着‘我行走,我的行走’这样的执着。由此,也就不会断除‘有能做、能受之我’这般转起的颠倒想——「我相」(at显示巴利原文
108.Iriyāpathavasenāti iriyanaṃ iriyā, kiriyā, idha pana kāyikapayogo veditabbo. Iriyānaṃ patho pavattimaggoti iriyāpatho, gamanādisarīrāvatthā. Gacchanto vā hi satto kāyena kattabbakiriyaṃ kareyya ṭhito vā nisinno vā nipanno vāti. Tesaṃ vasena, iriyāpathavibhāgenāti attho. Puna caparanti puna ca aparaṃ, yathāvuttaānāpānakammaṭṭhānato bhiyyopi aññaṃ kāyānupassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ kathemi, suṇāthāti vā adhippāyo. Gacchanto vātiādi gamanādimattajānanassa gamanādigatavisesajānanassa ca sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Tattha gamanādimattajānanaṃ idha nādhippetaṃ, gamanādigatavisesajānanaṃ pana adhippetanti taṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha kāma’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sattūpaladdhinti satto atthīti upaladdhiṃ sattaggāhaṃ na jahati na pariccajati ‘‘ahaṃ gacchāmi, mama gamana’’nti gāhasabbhāvato. Tato eva attasaññaṃ ‘‘atthi attā kārako vedako’’ti evaṃ pavattaṃ viparītasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti nāpaneti apaṭipakkhabhāvato, ananabrūhanato vā. Evaṃ bhūtassa cassa kuto kammaṭṭhānādibhāvoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hotī’’ti. Imassa panātiādisukkapakkhassa vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Tameva hi atthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘idaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ko gacchatīti gamanakiriyāya kattupucchā, sā kattubhāvavisiṭṭhaattapaṭikkhepatthā dhammamattasseva gamanasiddhidassanato. Kassa gamananti akattutāvisiṭṭhaattaggāhapaṭikkhepatthā. Kiṃkāraṇāti pana paṭikkhittakattukāya gamanakiriyāya aviparītakāraṇapucchā ‘‘gamananti attā manasā saṃyujjati, mano indriyehi, indriyāni attehī’’ti evamādigamanakāraṇapaṭikkhepanato. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi.
没有任何众生或人在行走,只有法本身成就了行走,因为离开它根本不存在任何行走者。现在为了显示只有法本身成就行走,才说「由于心造作风界的张动」等。这其中,「心造作风界张动」即心造作也就是风界的张动、悸动,依凭于它。在这里,以‘心造作’这个词来排除不依附于根的风界张动;以‘风界张动’这个词来排除思、语表等不同类别的心造作;将两者合起来,则是为了阐明身表。说了「行走」之后,为了显示在身体运转时,世间是如何生起‘行走’这个说法的,才说「因此」等。「彼」(taṃ):是指依想要行走的心而转起的心。「生起风」:即生起以风界为增盛之色聚,这里的增盛是指能力上的,不是指数量上的。这是针对由行走心生起的俱生色身,作为支撑、持守、移动的缘,以特别的方式运转着的风界,所以说「风生起表」。与意向共同存在的变化就是‘表’,正是基于如上所说的增盛义而用风来表达,并不是因为风界单独就能生起,否则‘表’属于所造色这一点就难以成立了。向前引导而出,就是身体向前方运转,这叫作「进」(abhikkamo)。显示巴利原文
Na koci satto vā puggalo vā gacchati dhammamattasseva gamanasiddhito tabbinimuttassa ca kassaci abhāvato. Idāni dhammamattasseva gamanasiddhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha cittakiriyā ca sā vāyodhātuyā vipphāro vipphandanañcāti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāro, tena. Ettha ca cittakiriyaggahaṇena anindriyabaddhavāyodhātuvipphāraṃ nivatteti, vāyodhātuvipphāraggahaṇena cetanāvacīviññattibhedaṃ cittakiriyaṃ nivatteti, ubhayena pana kāyaviññattiṃ vibhāveti. ‘‘Gacchatī’’ti vatvā yathā pavattamāne kāye ‘‘gacchatī’’ti vohāro hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tanti gantukāmatāvasena pavattacittaṃ. Vāyaṃ janetīti vāyodhātuadhikaṃ rūpakalāpaṃ janeti, adhikatā cettha sāmatthiyato, na pamāṇato. Gamanacittasamuṭṭhitaṃ sahajātarūpakāyassa thambhanasandhāraṇacalanānaṃ paccayabhūtena ākāravisesena pavattamānaṃ vāyodhātuṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vāyo viññattiṃ janetī’’ti. Adhippāyasahabhāvī hi vikāro viññatti, yathāvuttaadhikabhāveneva ca vāyogahaṇaṃ, na vāyodhātuyā eva janakabhāvato, aññathā viññattiyā upādāyarūpabhāvo durupapādo siyā. Purato abhinīhāro puratobhāgena kāyassa pavattanaṃ, yo ‘‘abhikkamo’’ti vuccati.
「此即方法」是依概括的方式略说之后,为了进一步阐明其义,才说出「在这里也是一样」等句子。「从末端开始」:即从最下端开始。「高耸的状态」:就是向上耸立起来的状态。显示巴利原文
‘‘Esevanayo’’ti atidesavasena saṅkhepato vatvā tamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tatrāpi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Koṭito paṭṭhāyāti heṭṭhimakoṭito paṭṭhāya. Ussitabhāvoti ubbiddhabhāvo.
「如是了知者」(evaṃ pajānato):当他如此了知「行、住、坐、卧等仅是由于心造作风界的张动而有」时,为了使他的这种了知成为决定,而进行「就是这样吗」(evaṃ hotī)的思察——这是世间那些不如实了知的人依于邪执,或随顺世俗言语而说的用语。「有吗」(atthi panāti):这是为自我审察而提出的问句。「无」(natthīti):这是确定地遮遣众生的语句。至于「然而,如同……」等,则是以譬喻来阐明此义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃpajānatoti evaṃ cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva gamanādibhāvo hotīti pajānato tassa evaṃ pajānanāya nicchayagamanatthaṃ ‘‘evaṃ hotī’’ti vicāraṇā vuccati loke yathābhūtaṃ ajānantehi micchābhinivesavasena, lokavohāravasena vā. Atthi panāti attano eva vīmaṃsanavasena pucchāvacanaṃ. Natthīti nicchayavasena sattassa paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Yathā panātiādi tassevatthassa upamāya vibhāvanaṃ.
「船依风力」:正如无心的船依靠风力到达他方,如同无心的芦苇箭依靠弓弦之力到达他方,同样地,无心的身体被前面所说的风所击动、被它带走,而到达他方——应知这是譬喻的连结。若有人辩解说:「就像船与箭需要依赖操作的人才能去往别处,身体也是如此。」即便如此,这也正符合我们所希望表达的意义。因为船与箭只是依赖具有和合特征的人才能移动,而非依赖不具有和合特征的分别;身体同样如此,有何过失呢?这反而更能确立唯是法性的立场,而非人我的主张。因此说「犹如依靠线的力量……」等。显示巴利原文
Nāvā mālutavegenāti yathā acetanā nāvā vātavegena desantaraṃ yāti, yathā ca acetano tejanaṃ kaṇḍo jiyāvegena desantaraṃ yāti, tathā acetano kāyo vātāhato yathāvuttavāyunā nīto desantaraṃ yātīti evaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sace pana koci vadeyya ‘‘yathā nāvāya tejanassa ca pellakassa purisassa vasena desantaragamanaṃ, evaṃ kāyassāpī’’ti, hotu, evaṃ icchitovāyamattho. Yathā hi nāvā tejanānaṃ saṃhatalakkhaṇasseva purisassa vasena gamanaṃ, na asaṃhatalakkhaṇassa, evaṃ kāyassāpīti kā no hāni, bhiyyopi dhammamattatāva patiṭṭhaṃ labhati, na purisavādo. Tenāha ‘‘yantaṃ suttavasenā’’tiādi.
其中,「被运用」指如前所说之理,通过行走等动作而被运用。「住」指站立。「在此」即在此世间。「没有因缘」指没有想去的心、由心生起的风界等这些因缘。「住」应住,「行」应行、应去——有谁能如此呢?这是句子的连接。此处的「岂」字表否定,以遮遣无因缘时的住与行,显示一切法的生起皆依因缘。由此不仅彰显了无我性,也显示了无常性与苦性,应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Tattha payuttanti heṭṭhā vuttanayena gamanādikiriyāvasena payojitaṃ. Ṭhātīti tiṭṭhati. Etthāti imasmiṃ loke. Vinā hetupaccayeti gantukāmatācitta-taṃsamuṭṭhāna-vāyodhātu-ādihetupaccayehi vinā. Tiṭṭheti tiṭṭheyya. Vajeti vajeyya gaccheyya ko nāmāti sambandho. Paṭikkhepattho cettha kiṃ-saddoti hetupaccayavirahena ṭhānagamanapaṭikkhepamukhena sabbāyapi dhammappavattiyā paccayādhīnavuttitāvibhāvanena attasuññatā viya aniccadukkhatāpi vibhāvitāti daṭṭhabbā.
「被置定」:指依各种方式,由诸缘所确定、安立的状态。「总括语」:是指总摄四种威仪的说法;因为前面各别解说威仪,这里是将它们合在一起说。或者,前一种方式以威仪为主而说,身于此为次要、随之成就;现在则转为以身为主,威仪为次要、随之成就,由此显示第二种方式。应如此理解两种方式的区别。「住」:即活动、运作。显示巴利原文
Paṇihitoti yathā yathā paccayehi pakārato nihito ṭhapito. Sabbasaṅgāhikavacananti sabbesaṃ catunnampi iriyāpathānaṃ saṅgaṇhanavacanaṃ, pubbe visuṃ visuṃ iriyāpathānaṃ vuttattā idaṃ tesaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā vacananti attho. Purimanayo vā iriyāpathappadhāno vuttoti tattha kāyo appadhāno anunipphādīti idha kāyaṃ padhānaṃ appadhānañca iriyāpathaṃ anunipphādaṃ katvā dassetuṃ dutiyanayo vuttoti evampettha dvinnaṃ nayānaṃ viseso veditabbo. Ṭhitoti pavatto.
把握威仪,也就是对有威仪的身体本身的把握,因为威仪是身体的特殊状态,所以说「以把握威仪而于身随观身而住」。因此,这里纯粹是依色蕴而提出集等。这一方法也适用于其余诸品。「等」字于此应如此看待:包含了如「见生起相者,以渴爱之集、业之集、食之集而见色蕴之生起」这样,将四种食也涵括在内;同样,「以无明灭而色灭」等五种行相也摄在其中。其余部分,与前面所说的理路相同。显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathapariggaṇhanampi iriyāpathavato kāyasseva pariggaṇhanaṃ tassa avatthāvisesabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘iriyāpathapariggahaṇena kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti. Tenevettha rūpakkhandhavaseneva samudayādayo uddhaṭā. Esa nayo sesavāresupi. Ādināti ettha ādi-saddena yathā ‘‘taṇhāsamudayā kammasamudayā āhārasamudayā’’ti nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi rupakkhandhassa udayaṃ passatīti ime cattāro āhārā saṅgayhanti, evaṃ ‘‘avijjānirodhā rūpanirodhā’’tiādayopi pañca ākārā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
「四正知」品的注释。显示巴利原文
Catusampajaññapabbavaṇṇanā
109 依“四正知”而行。“正知者”:指从各方面、以种种方式,或特别地、有差别地了知,故称正知;“正知”即此了知的状态,亦指如是生起的智慧。将四种正知合在一起,便是“四正知”,此处即依此而行。向前移动称为“前进”,故说“前进”是指行走。同样,返回称为“退回”,故说“退回”是指转身返回。而“转身返回”仅指转身的动作;转身之后若再行走,则仍属于行走。将身体向前移动便是“向前带”,即以行走的方式将身体带向前方。显示巴利原文
109.Catusampajaññavasenāti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.284; saṃ. ni. 5.368; dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 2.214) samantato pakārehi, pakaṭṭhaṃ vā savisesaṃ jānātīti sampajāno, sampajānassa bhāvo sampajaññaṃ, tathāpavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Cattāri sampajaññāni samāhaṭāni catusampajaññaṃ, tassa vasena. Abhikkamanaṃ abhikkantanti āha ‘‘abhikkantaṃ vuccati gamana’’nti. Tathā paṭikkamanaṃ paṭikkantanti āha ‘‘paṭikkantaṃ vuccati nivattana’’nti. Nivattananti ca nivattimattaṃ, nivattitvā pana gamanaṃ gamanameva. Abhiharantoti gamanavasena kāyaṃ upanento.
正确地了知便是“正知”。以此正知而行应做之事,这般行事者即“正知而行者”,故称“以正知做一切事务者”。“正知”一词即是“正知”的同义表达,前文已说。所谓“令生起正知”,即在前行等活动中,确实生起不迷乱之心。或者说,此人具有正知者的行为,故为“正知而行者”。“有益的”:指与法上增长这一意义相应运作之事,如前进等行为。对有益的事物了了分明,即是“有益正知”。对于适合自己、能带来利益与帮助的事了了分明,便是“适合正知”;这包括在前进等乞食活动范围内,以及在其他活动中亦始终不舍禅修业处这一行境的正知,称为“行境正知”。在前行等活动中保持不迷乱,这本身就是正知,名为“不迷乱正知”。“经过周密考虑”:即审慎思量之义。显示巴利原文
Sammā pajānanaṃ sampajānaṃ, tena attanā kātabbassa karaṇasīlo sampajānakārīti āha ‘‘sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī’’ti. Sampajānasaddassa sampajaññapariyāyatā pubbe vuttāyeva. Sampajaññaṃ karotevāti abhikkantādīsu asammohaṃ uppādeti eva. Sampajānassa vā kāro etassa atthīti sampajānakārī. Dhammato vaḍḍhisaṅkhātena saha atthena pavattatīti sātthakaṃ, abhikkantādi. Sātthakassa sampajānanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Sappāyassa attano upakārāvahassa hitassa sampajānanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ abhikkamādīsu bhikkhācāragocare, aññatthāpi ca pavattesu avijahite kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte gocare sampajaññaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ. Abhikkamādīsu asammuyhanameva sampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Pariggaṇhitvāti paṭisaṅkhāya.
“对此”:指以有益正知所把握的行为对象。“义”指的是依于法的增长。有人可能心存疑虑:只要是被称为“有益”的行走,就一定适合吗?为消除这样的疑惑,便开始说“先看塔庙”等等。“像彩绘的工艺品一样”:意思是如同那些精心彩绘的雕像,或如以机关妙技制作出的精美雕像。“不如理观察”:指依于世俗无知所起的舍心,而对所缘产生不如理作意。对此,经中有言:“眼看见色之后,生起舍心,那是愚者、痴者、凡夫的舍心”等等。大象等动物的践踏会为生命带来障难;看见不适当的景象等,则会为梵行带来障难。显示巴利原文
Tasminti sātthakasampajaññavasena pariggahitaatthe. Attho nāma dhammato vaḍḍhīti yaṃ sātthakanti adhippetaṃ gamanaṃ, taṃ sappāyamevāti siyā kassaci āsaṅkāti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘cetiyadassanaṃ tāvā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Cittakammarūpakāni viyāti cittakammakatapaṭimāyo viya, yantapayogena vā vicittakammapaṭimāyo viya. Asamapekkhanaṃ gehasitaaññāṇupekkhāvasena ārammaṇassa ayoniso gahaṇaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā uppajjati upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.308). Hatthiādisammaddena jīvitantarāyo, visabhāgarūpadassanādinā brahmacariyantarāyo.
从出家之日起,比丘们所遵循的言谈便是常行的;而不遵循的言谈,即是与此相异的第二种。因此说:“两种言论,过去从未宣说过。”显示巴利原文
Pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya bhikkhūnaṃ anuvattanakathā āciṇṇā, ananuvattanakathā pana tassā dutiyā nāma hotīti āha ‘‘dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā’’ti.
“如此”一词,是回顾前面所说“如果那样”等一切已述的内容,并非指此时正在说“男子于女人不净”等。由于瑜伽行以此为生起之处,修习的所缘即称为业处,因此说“名为业处的行境”。“受持”:为成就受持的善巧,如同为使取相生起那样而受持。“执取”:令业处持续转起,即在托钵返回之前一直精勤于业处。“不放下”:从进食之后,直到前往昼间住处之前,不将业处搁置一旁。显示巴利原文
Evanti ‘‘sace panā’’tiādikaṃ sabbampi vuttākāraṃ paccāmasati, na ‘‘purisassa mātugāmāsubha’’ntiādikaṃ vuccamānaṃ. Yogakammassa pavattiṭṭhānatāya bhāvanāya ārammaṇaṃ kammaṭṭhānanti vuccatīti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocara’’nti. Uggahetvāti yathā uggahanimittaṃ uppajjati, evaṃ uggahakosallassa sampādanavasena uggahetvā. Haratīti kammaṭṭhānaṃ pavatteti, yāva piṇḍapātapaṭikkamā anuyuñjatīti attho. Napaccāharatīti āhārūpabhogato yāva divāṭṭhānupasaṅkamanā kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paṭineti.
Sarīraparikamma(身体护理):指洗脸等对身体的护理。Dve tayo pallaṅke(两三次结跏趺坐):指两次或三次落座,即两三次热坐。因此说“使热气升起”。Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevā(唯以业处为首):即唯以业处为火,将业处置于首位。这里所显示的是(如《中部注》1.109等将说的)“乃至钵也无所知觉”那样的业处,或是显明不放弃如法持守的业处。由于想到“舍利塔较受用塔更为重要”,故依先前寿尽之说而说“礼敬塔庙”。实则,在注疏中(《分别论注》809;《中部注》3.128;《增支部注》1.1.275)说:“若菩提树枝妨碍塔庙,则应移除。”显示巴利原文
Sarīraparikammanti mukhadhovanādisarīrapaṭijagganaṃ. Dve tayo pallaṅketi dve tayo nisajjāvāre, dve tīṇi uṇhāsanāni. Tenāha ‘‘usumaṃ gāhāpento’’ti. Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevāti kammaṭṭhānaggeneva, kammaṭṭhānaṃ padhānaṃ katvā evāti attho. Tena ‘‘pattopi acetano’’tiādinā (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.109) vakkhamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, yathāparihariyamānaṃ vā avijahitvāti dasseti. ‘‘Paribhogacetiyato sarīracetiyaṃ garutara’’nti katvā ‘‘cetiyaṃ vanditvā’’ti pubbakālakiriyāvasena vuttaṃ. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 809; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.128; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.275) ‘‘cetiyaṃ bādhayamānā bodhisākhā haritabbā’’ti vuttā.
Janasaṅgahattha(摄益众人):即本着“若我不说法,谁能为他们说法”的心意,以法摄益众人。Tasmā(因此):因为注疏师们说“法谈是必定要说的”,且不存在脱离业处的法谈,故如此说。Anumodanaṃ katvā(随喜时):此处也当系属“以业处为首”的意思。Sampattaparicchedenevā(仅依所得而限定):不分别“熟悉、不熟悉”等,唯依所得程度而说。Bhayeti(怖畏时):指遭遇盗贼等怖畏之时。显示巴利原文
Janasaṅgahatthanti ‘‘mayi akathente etesaṃ ko kathessatī’’ti dhammānuggahena janasaṅgahatthaṃ. Tasmāti. Yasmā ‘‘dhammakathā nāma kathetabbāyevā’’ti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti, yasmā ca dhammakathā kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi, tasmā. Anumodanaṃ katvāti etthāpi ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasīsenevā’’ti ānetvā sambandho. Sampattaparicchedenevāti ‘‘paricito aparicito’’tiādivibhāgaṃ akatvā sampattakoṭiyāva. Bhayeti paracakkādibhaye.
Kammajatejoti(业生火):指胃火而言。因饥饿疲劳,身体疲惫,无法得定,故不能进入业处轨道。Avasesaṭṭhāne(于剩余处):指粥未被取用之处。Poṅkhānupoṅkha(接二连三):这是表示业处相续不断现前的说法,犹如箭支一支接一支无有间断,此业处亦复如是。显示巴利原文
Kammajatejoti gahaṇiṃ sandhāyāha. Kammaṭṭhānavīthiṃ nārohati khudāparissamena kilantakāyattā samādhānābhāvato. Avasesaṭṭhāneti yāguyā aggahitaṭṭhāne. Poṅkhānupoṅkhanti kammaṭṭhānupaṭṭhānassa avicchedadassanavacanametaṃ, yathā poṅkhānupoṅkhapavattāya sarapaṭipāṭiyā avicchedo, evametassāpīti.
Nikkhittadhuro(舍弃重担):在修习中,因未能圆满履行义务,而破坏了所有戒事。即如经中所说:“于欲未离贪,于身未离贪,于色未离贪,随欲饱食至腹满,耽著卧乐、触乐、睡眠乐,为求生某天众而修梵行。”这便是所说的五种心荒芜与心束缚。Caritvā(行已):即产生之后。显示巴利原文
Nikkhittadhuro bhāvanānuyoge. Vattapaṭipattiyā apūraṇena sabbavatthāni bhinditvā. ‘‘Kāme avītarāgo hoti, kāye avītarāgo, rūpe avītarāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.320; ma. ni. 1.186) evaṃ vutta pañcavidhacetokhilavinibandhacitto. Caritvāti pavattitvā.
“自己爱乐”:就是指希求自己利益与安乐的人,也就是有法欲的人。因为此处所说的“法”即是利益,以法为缘而生起的即是安乐。或者可以这样理解:在智者看来,法本身并无差别,且属于自身所摄,因此法即是“自己”;他们喜爱、希求这个法,故称“自己爱乐”。“优沙巴”:指二十杖的长度。“依彼想”:就是依于那块石头的想,知道“他们已到达了这么多的地方”——这是它的含义。同样的方法(soyeva nayo):即“这位比丘”等、在站立时所说的那一套方法,在坐着时也是同样的方法。即便因为担心后来的人吃不到饭,他也依然增长如理作意。显示巴利原文
Attakāmāti attano hitasukhaṃ icchantā, dhammacchandavantoti attho. Dhammoti hi hitaṃ, tannimittakañca sukhanti. Atha vā viññūnaṃ nibbisesattā attabhāvapariyāpannattā ca attā nāma dhammo, taṃ kāmenti icchantīti attakāmā. Usabhaṃ nāma vīsati yaṭṭhiyo. Tāya saññāyāti tāya pāsāṇasaññāya, ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgatāti jānantāti adhippāyo. Soyeva nayoti ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādiko yo ṭhāne vutto, so eva nisajjāyapi nayo. Pacchato āgacchantānaṃ chinnabhattabhāvabhayenapi yonisomanasikāraṃ paribrūheti.
“我将供养大精进”:意思是“我将尽自己的能力,来供养世尊为我们所行的那六年苦行。”因为只有行道的供养,才是对大师真正的供养,而不是财物的供养。“只是站立与经行”:这是从应当决意的威仪角度而说,并非否定在用餐等时必须要坐着。显示巴利原文
Bahāpadhānaṃ pūjessāmīti amhākaṃ atthāya lokanāthena cha vassāni kataṃ dukkaracariyaṃ evāhaṃ yathāsatti pūjessāmīti. Paṭipattipūjā hi satthupūjā, na āmisapūjā. Ṭhānacaṅkamanamevāti adhiṭṭhātabbairiyāpathavasena vuttaṃ, na bhojanādikālesu avassaṃ kattabbanisajjāya paṭikkhepavasena.
进入街道后,不应东张西望,而应先对各条街道观察清楚,因此说“观察街道后”。为了说明与所谓“以庄严威仪行走”相关的内容,而说了“在那里”等。显示巴利原文
Vīthiṃ otaritvā ito cito ca anoloketvā paṭhamameva vīthiyo sallakkhetabbāti āha ‘‘vīthiyo sallakkhetvā’’ti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuccati ‘‘pāsādikena abhikkantenā’’ti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
若具足亲依止,便能证得辟支菩提——应如此联系上下文。此后一切处皆当如是理解。其中,辟支菩提的亲依止圆满,是指在二阿僧祇又十万劫中,积集与之相应的福德与智慧的资粮;声闻菩提中,上首弟子需一阿僧祇又十万劫,大声闻弟子唯需十万劫,其余之人则是于过去生中,依出离轮回而生的抉择分善法。至于跋希耶·树皮衣者:他因生于外邦、长于外邦,故称跋希耶;因穿着树皮衣,故称树皮衣者。这位尊者显示巴利原文
Paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti, yadi upanissayasampanno hotīti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha ito paresupi. Tattha paccekabodhiyā upanissayasampadā kappānaṃ dve asaṅkhyeyyāni satasahassañca tajjaṃ puññañāṇasambharaṇaṃ, sāvakabodhiyaṃ aggasāvakānaṃ ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ kappasatasahassañca, mahāsāvakānaṃ kappasatasahassameva, itaresaṃ atītāsu jātīsu vivaṭṭasannissayavasena nibbattitaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ kusalaṃ. Bāhiyo dārucīriyoti bahi visaye sañjātasaṃvaḍḍhatāya bāhiyo, dārucīrapariharaṇena dārucīriyoti ca samaññāto. So hi āyasmā –
“因此跋希耶,你应当这样修学:‘在看时只是看,在听时只是听,在觉时只是觉,在知时只是知。’跋希耶,当你在看时只是看、在听时只是听、在觉时只是觉、在知时只是知时,你便不依着于彼。跋希耶,当你不依着于彼时,你便不住于彼。跋希耶,当你不住于彼时,你便不在此世界,不在彼世界,不在两者之间——这就是苦的边际。”(《自说》10)仅凭这简短的开示,他便证得阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tasmā tiha te, bāhiya, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ ‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute… mute… viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissatī’ti. Yato kho te, bāhiya, diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute… mute… viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissati, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tena. Yato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tena, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tattha. Yato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tattha, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, nevidha na huraṃ na ubhayamantarena, esevanto dukkhassā’’ti (udā. 10) – ettakāya desanāya arahattaṃ sacchākāsi.
“那”即指不迷惑。“如是”当知为以下文中所说之方式。“自己前进”:以此来显示盲目的凡夫以执取见而在前进时生起迷惑;“我前进”:则是以执取慢而显示迷惑;而这二者若离渴爱则无从生起,故也同时显示了以执取爱的迷惑。在说了“如此不迷惑者”之后,为揭示由破除密集的分别所产生的那不迷惑,而说“我前进”等语。其中,有风界随行的火界是举起的缘。由于火界具有举起的作用,在举起时,风界便随行于它。因此,为显示在这两种界中,由作用力而更增盛的那一界,其余诸界则较微弱,便说“每一……更强”。又有火界随行的风界是向前移与侧移的缘。由于具有横向作用的风界,在向前移与侧移中,其作用更为殊胜,因此火界便随行于它。为显示在这两种界中,由作用力而更增盛的界,其余诸界则较微弱,显示巴利原文
Tanti asammuyhanaṃ. Evanti idāni vuccamānākārena veditabbaṃ. Attā abhikkamatīti iminā andhaputhujjanassa diṭṭhiggāhavasena abhikkame sammuyhanaṃ dasseti, ahaṃ abhikkamāmīti pana iminā mānaggāhavasena, tadubhayaṃ pana taṇhāya vinā na hotīti taṇhāggāhavasenapi sammuyhanaṃ dassitameva hoti. ‘‘Tathā asammuyhanto’’ti vatvā taṃ asammuyhanaṃ yena ghanavinibbhogena hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yasmā vāyodhātuyā anugatā tejodhātu uddharaṇassa paccayo. Uddharaṇagatikā hi tejodhātūti uddharaṇe vāyodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento ‘‘ekeka…pe… balavatiyo’’ti āha. Yasmā pana tejodhātuyā anugatā vāyodhātu atiharaṇavītiharaṇānaṃ paccayo. Tiriyagatikāya hi vāyodhātuyā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu sātisayo byāpāroti tejodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento ‘‘tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesū’’ti āha. Satipi anugamanānugantabbatāvisese tejodhātu-vāyodhātu-bhāvamattaṃ sandhāya tathā-saddaggahaṇaṃ. Tattha akkantaṭṭhānato pādassa ukkhipanaṃ uddharaṇaṃ, ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā purato haraṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ khāṇuādipariharaṇatthaṃ, patiṭṭhitapādaghaṭṭanapariharaṇatthaṃ vā passena haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇaṃ, yāva patiṭṭhitapādo, tāva āharaṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ, tato paraṃ haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇanti ayaṃ vā etesaṃ viseso.
因为随顺地界的水界是“放下”的缘。由于水界的自性较重,所以在放下时,地界随顺水界。因此,为显示这两界在此处以作用力而更强,其余界则较弱,便说“放下……更强”。其次,因为随顺水界的地界是“安立”的缘。不仅在依止时,在安立时,地界也有殊胜的作用,所以水界随顺地界;同样,在撞击动作中,依靠地界而完成牢固的支撑,这里也是水界随顺地界。因此说“同样在安立与支持中也是如此”。“此处”指在那个前进的动作中,或指如前所述的举起等六个方面。在举起时,即在举起的刹那。色法和名法(非色法):以举起的方式现起的色法,以及促使它们生起的名法,它们不能到达下一步动作,因为它们仅住一刹那。就在生起的地方,就在那里灭去。因为诸法并没有移动到别处的特性。“一节一节”等,是针对举起等方面而言,应知这是就同类相续来说的。因为色法的生灭极其快,比天神们头朝下、脚朝上正对着奔跑时,头顶与脚上绑着的东西相遇的刹那还要快。如同芝麻在炒的时候劈啪作响,可以知道它在破裂,为了显示诸行法也……显示巴利原文
Yasmā pathavīdhātuyā anugatā āpodhātu vossajjanassa paccayo. Garutarasabhāvā hi āpodhātūti vossajjane pathavīdhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā tāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento āha ‘‘vossajjane…pe… balavatiyo’’ti. Yasmā pana āpodhātuyā anugatā pathavīdhātu sannikkhepanassa paccayo, patiṭṭhābhāve viya patiṭṭhāpanepi tassā sātisayakiccattā āpodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tathā ghaṭṭanakiriyāya pathavīdhātuyā vasena sannirumbhanassa sijjhanato tatthāpi pathavīdhātuyā āpodhātuanugatabhāvo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tathā sannikkhepanasannirumbhanesū’’ti. Tatthāti tasmiṃ abhikkamane, tesu vā vuttesu uddharaṇādīsu chasu koṭṭhāsesu. Uddharaṇeti uddharaṇakkhaṇe. Rūpārūpadhammāti uddharaṇākārena pavattā rūpadhammā, taṃsamuṭṭhāpakā arūpadhammā ca atiharaṇaṃ na pāpuṇanti khaṇamattāvaṭṭhānato. Tattha tatthevāti yattha yattha uppannā, tattha tattheva. Na hi dhammānaṃ desantarasaṅkamanaṃ atthi. Pabbaṃ pabbantiādi uddharaṇādikoṭṭhāse sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃ sabhāgasantativasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Atiittaro hi rūpadhammānampi pavattikkhaṇo gamanassādānaṃ devaputtānaṃ heṭṭhupariyena paṭimukhaṃ dhāvantānaṃ sirasi pāde ca baddhadhuradhārāsamāgamatopi sīghataro. Yathā tilānaṃ bhajjiyamānānaṃ paṭapaṭāyanena bhedo lakkhīyati, evaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ uppādenāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭapaṭāyantā’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppannā hi ekantato bhijjantīti.
“与色一起”这句话,是就那些与该心一同灭去的色法而说的,这些色法是在该心之前的第十七个心的生时生起的。不然的话,假如色法和名法是同一刹那,就会与“色是沉重变异、迟迟才灭”等说法(《分别论注》26)相矛盾,也会与“比丘们!我不见有任何其他一法像心这样迅速转变”(《增支部》1.48)等经文相矛盾。因为心与心所有所缘的自性,它们在尽其能力令作为所缘缘境的意义显现时生起;在成就了自性后,随即灭去。而色法是没有所缘的,需要被显现。它们被显现的过程止息,需要经过十六心,因此被认为有十六心刹那的寿命。由于(受想行)三蕴只是以与速疾识的境相合为缘,识则由于与境相合而称为速转;而色法由于以迟钝的大界为缘,称为迟转。如实了知种种界的智,则唯有如来才能拥有。因此,前生缘唯施设给色法,后生缘也唯施设给色法,所以色法与名法同刹那的说法并不合理。因此,应按照所说的道理来理解这里的意义。显示巴利原文
Saddhiṃ rūpenāti idaṃ tassa tassa cittassa nirodhena saddhiṃ nirujjhanakarūpadhammānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, yaṃ tato sattarasamacittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppannaṃ. Aññathā yadi rūpārūpadhammā samānakkhaṇā siyuṃ, ‘‘rūpaṃ garupariṇāmaṃ dandhanirodha’’ntiādivacanehi (vibha. aṭṭha. 26) virodho siyā, tathā ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, yathayidaṃ citta’’nti evamādipāḷiyā (a. ni. 1.48). Cittacetasikā hi sārammaṇasabhāvā yathābalaṃ attano ārammaṇapaccayabhūtamatthaṃ vibhāvento eva uppajjantīti tesaṃ taṃsabhāvanipphattianantaraṃ nirodho, rūpadhammā pana anārammaṇā pakāsetabbā, evaṃ tesaṃ pakāsetabbabhāvanivatti soḷasahi cittehi hotīti taṅkhaṇāyukatā tesaṃ icchitā, lahuviññāṇavisayasaṅgatimattapaccayatāya tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ, visayasaṅgatimattatāya ca viññāṇassa lahuparivattitā, dandhamahābhūtapaccayatāya rūpadhammānaṃ dandhaparivattitā, nānādhātuyā yathābhūtañāṇaṃ kho pana tathāgatasseva, tena ca purejātapaccayo rūpadhammova vutto, pacchājātapaccayo ca tassevāti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ samānakkhaṇatā na yujjateva, tasmā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo.
“一个心生起,另一个心灭去”的意思是:前面生起的心是一个心,当它灭去时,是作为后心的无间等缘而灭去,由此得到缘的另一心便生起。如果问:“那么,它们之间能不能找到一个间隙?”回答是:“不能”,所以说“无间续连”。就像波浪之间没有间隙一样,心的相续流与色的相续流就像河流中的水流一样,持续不断地转起。那些不了解其中差别的人,就会误以为它们是同一个。显示巴利原文
Aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ,aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhatīti yaṃ purimuppannaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ aññaṃ, taṃ pana nirujjhantaṃ aparassa anantarādipaccayabhāveneva nirujjhatīti tato laddhapaccayaṃ aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ. Yadi evaṃ tesaṃ antaro labbheyyāti noti āha ‘‘avīcimanusambandho’’ti, yathā vīci antaro na labbhati, tadevetanti avisesavidu maññanti, evaṃ anu anu sambandho cittasantāno rūpasantāno ca nadīsotova nadiyaṃ udakappavāho viya vattati.
“ālokita”指向前方的看,故解释为“正前方的观察”。因为不论行走、站立或坐下,只要朝向那个方向的看,即名为ālokita。随之,朝向非正方向的看称为vilokita,故说“vilokita是指向隅方的观察”。在扫地、平整地面等事中,可能有向下的看(olokita);在举起、搬运等事中,可能有向上的看(ullokita);在为了避让从后方而来的危险等事中,可能有向后的看(apalokita)。因此说:“借由这一门类,所有这些都被含摄在内。”显示巴利原文
Abhimukhaṃlokitaṃ ālokitanti āha ‘‘puratopekkhana’’nti. Yasmā yaṃdisābhimukho gacchati tiṭṭhati nisīdati vā, tadabhimukhaṃ pekkhanaṃ ālokitaṃ, tasmā tadanugataṃ vidisālokanaṃ vilokitanti āha ‘‘vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhana’’nti. Sammajjanaparibhaṇḍādikaraṇe olokitassa, ullokaharaṇādīsu ullokitassa, pacchato āgacchantaparissayassa parivajjanādīsu apalokitassa siyā sambhavoti āha ‘‘iminā vā mukhena sabbānipi tāni gahitānevā’’ti.
“身证者”是指亲身证得、直接体验的人。这位尊者在修观之时,便生起勇猛心:“我正是因为不守护根门,才在教法中产生不乐等种种过患,我一定要好好克制它!”他具足强大的惭与愧,并由于对此反复修习,在根律仪上达到了最极圆满的地步。正因如此,世尊才将他列为最上,说道:“比丘们!在我的声闻比丘弟子中,守护根门第一者,就是难陀。”显示巴利原文
Kāyasakkhinti kāyena sacchikatavantaṃ, paccakkhakārinanti attho. So hi āyasmā vipassanākāle eva ‘‘yamevāhaṃ indriyesu aguttadvārataṃ nissāya sāsane anabhiratiādivippakāraṃ patto, tameva suṭṭhu niggaṇhissāmī’’ti ussāhajāto balavahirottappo, tattha ca katādhikārattā indriyasaṃvare ukkaṃsapāramippatto, teneva naṃ satthā ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ indriyesu guttadvārānaṃ yadidaṃ nando’’ti (a. ni. 1.235) etadagge ṭhapesi.
在看与望之时,应当了知其中带有目的与适合性。因此,以“不舍离业处,这便属于行境正知”这句话所说的义理作为原因,再行提起。意思是:只应依于自己的业处而看与望,不应在蕴等业处之外,另寻其他方法。而且,“看”等这些名称,实际只是诸法本身活动的差别而已。为了显示如此如实地了知,即是“无痴正知”,所以说了“内部”等。显示巴利原文
Sātthakatā ca sappāyatā ca ālokitavilokitassa veditabbā. Tasmāti ‘‘kammaṭṭhānāvijahanasseva gocarasampajaññabhāvato’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ hetubhāvena paccāmasati. Attano kammaṭṭhānavaseneva ālokanavilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ, khandhādikammaṭṭhānā añño upāyo na gavesitabboti adhippāyo. Ālokitādisamaññāpi yasmā dhammamattasseva pavattiviseso, tasmā tassa yāthāvato jānanaṃ asammohasampajaññanti dassetuṃ ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“于初速行等……无有”这句话,是就五门心路中不会生起“女人、男人”等染着而说的。因为在五门心路中,由于对转向心与确定心的不如理作意,在面对可意的女人形象等所缘时便生起贪爱,面对不可意所缘时则生起嗔恚;只有在意门心路中才会生起“女人、男人”这样的染着。五门速行心是它的根源。或者如前所说,一切有分心等也是如此,这便说明了意门速行心的遍知是以根源为主的。而所谓“外来的”与“暂时的”,则是从五门速行心新起及短暂的性质来说的。当上下各层依次破裂、归于坏灭时,即低处与高处的前后相续地抵达坏灭,这是指该速行心。与之不相应,是语词上的连接。“外来的”,好比客人。“暂时的”,是指以有生灭的时限为其寿命的,称为暂时的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paṭhamajavanepi…pe… na hotī’’ti idaṃ pañcadvāraviññāṇavīthiyaṃ ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti rajjanādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha hi āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanānaṃ ayoniso āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanavasena iṭṭhe itthirūpādimhi lobho, aniṭṭhe ca paṭigho uppajjati, manodvāre pana ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti rajjanādi hoti, tassa pañcadvārajavanaṃ mūlaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ vā sabbaṃ bhavaṅgādi, evaṃ manodvārajavanassa mūlavasena mūlapariññā vuttā. Āgantukatāvakālikatā pana pañcadvārajavanasseva apubbabhāvavasena ittarabhāvavasena ca vuttā. Heṭṭhupariyavasena bhijjitvā patitesūti heṭṭhimassa uparimassa ca aparāparaṃ bhaṅgappattimāha. Tanti javanaṃ. Tassa na yuttanti sambandho. Āgantuko abbhāgato. Udayabbayaparicchinno tāvatako kālo etesanti tāvakālikāni.
这就是无痴正知。就此而言,当依于五蕴而显现出看与望时,离开了这些蕴,并无一个单独的看者、一个单独的望者。“亲依止缘”,这是依经教方式从遮诠的角度说的。“俱生缘”,这仅仅是举出一个例子,因为还可以获得相互缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘等其他诸缘。显示巴利原文
Etaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Tatthāti pañcakkhandhavasena ālokanavilokane paññāyamāne tabbinimutto ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi. Upanissayapaccayoti idaṃ suttantanayena pariyāyato vuttaṃ. Sahajātapaccayoti nidassanamattametaṃ aññamañña-sampayutta-atthiavigatādipaccayānampi labbhanato.
相传,有一种蛇类名为“珠宝蛇”。“摇弄”,是指摇晃、摆动,或作出娇媚的姿态。显示巴利原文
Maṇisappo nāma ekā sappajātīti vadanti. Laḷananti kampananti vadanti, līḷākaraṇaṃ vā laḷanaṃ.
“性本热恼者”,指热恼特别重的人。由邪命所生者,为不合适,因为它会破坏戒律、带来不利。 “衣也是无意识的”等句,是通过显示衣为无心之物,如同“身体亦是无意识的”那样,以此彰显身体为空且无我,这一含义其实已在前面“内部”等处说明,同时这也展现了对于所得一切皆能知足的理由。因此说“所以”等。“被四五个结所击打”,即被四五个结所击打,或是由四五个结打出后,更添了美观。显示巴利原文
Uṇhapakatiko pariḷāhabahulo. Sīlassa vidūsanena ahitāvahattā micchājīvavasena uppannaṃ asappāyaṃ. Cīvarampi acetanantiādinā cīvarassa viya ‘‘kāyopi acetano’’ti kāyassa attasuññatāvibhāvanena ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento itarītarasantosassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Catupañcagaṇṭhikāhatoti āhatacatupañcagaṇṭhiko, catupañcagaṇṭhikāhi vā hatasobho.
所谓“八种义”,即八种特殊的用途。如同承载大地之水,是由承载它的风所维持;同样,已食用的食物,也是借由风界而安住于内腔,因此说“依风界而住”。“过度前送”,指将食物送到嘴边。“过度穿行”,指从那里一直运送到腹部。或者,“过度前送”,指越过口门将食物带入。“过度穿行”,指将食物从腹部向旁边移转。“翻转”,指来回反复地搅动。在此,食物的保持、翻转、粉碎及变干等,是与地界相结合的风界所为,并非单凭风界自身;因此,这些作用也被视为地界的作用。而“保持湿润”,指不被风等过度干燥,从而维持湿润的状态。“火界”,即那名为“消化火”的火界,它消化进入内部的食物。“成为通道”,即成为食物进入等的路径。“转向”,指对于寻求、吞食、已消化或未消化等情形,加以作意与了知。正是这种能逐一了知这些情形的作用,才称得上“正确的精勤”。由于使寻求等得以实现的作用,必然能成就对此对象的了知,因为二者是不相分离的。或者,依于正确的精勤、正确的行道之后,而能转向、作意;因为一切识的运转,都是以作意为先行的,所以才这样说。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhavidhopi atthoti aṭṭhavidhopi payojanaviseso. Pathavīsandhārakajalassa taṃsandhārakavāyunā viya paribhuttassa āhārassa vāyodhātunāva āsaye avaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Atiharatīti yāva mukhā abhiharati. Vītiharatīti tato yāva kucchi, tāva harati. Atiharatīti vā mukhadvāraṃ atikkāmento harati. Vītiharatīti kucchigataṃ passato harati. Parivattetīti aparāparaṃ cāreti. Ettha ca āhārassa dhāraṇaparivattanasaṃcuṇṇanavisosanāni pathavīdhātusahitā eva vāyodhātu karoti, na kevalāti tāni pathavīdhātuyāpi kiccabhāvena vuttāni. Allattañca anupāletīti vāyuādīhi atisosanaṃ yathā na hoti, tathā anupāleti allaādīhi atisosanaṃ yathā na hoti, tathā anupāleti allabhāvaṃ. Tejodhātūti gahaṇīsaṅkhātā tejodhātu. Sā hi anto paviṭṭhaṃ āhāraṃ paripāceti. Añjaso hotīti āhārassa pavesanādīnaṃ maggo hoti. Ābhujatīti pariyesanajjhoharaṇajiṇṇājiṇṇatādiṃ āvajjeti, vijānātīti attho. Taṃtaṃvijānananipphādakoyeva hi payogo ‘‘sammāpayogo’’ti vutto. Yena hi payogena pariyesanādi nipphajjati, so tabbisayavijānanampi nipphādeti nāma tadavinābhāvato. Atha vā sammāpayogaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ anvāya āgamma ābhujati samannāharati. Ābhogapubbako hi sabbopi viññāṇabyāpāroti tathā vuttaṃ.
从“行走”而言,是指为了乞食,朝着作为行境的村落走去。从“寻求”而言,是指在作为行境的村落中,为乞食而巡行。从“受用”而言,是指对食物的食用。从“住处”而言,是指胆汁等所依之处。所谓“住处”,意思是:即使它们共同运转,也因业力而各有牢固的分位,并依照界限彼此不相混杂,在其中停留、安住与转起,因此称为“住处”,即位于胃上方的胆汁等。其中“界限”正是这个词所含的意思。从“贮藏”而言,正如所食之物在此积聚、安住之处,即胃。从“未消化”而言,是指尚未被名为消化火的业生火所消化的状态。从“已消化”而言,是指所食之物已经消化的状态。从“结果”而言,是指由此而产生的果报。从“流溢”而言,是指向各个地方渗出。从“遍涂”而言,是指全面地涂布。此是此处要义的概说,详细内容当取自《清净道论注疏》。显示巴利原文
Gamanatoti bhikkhācāravasena gocaragāmaṃ uddissa gamanato. Pariyesanatoti gocaragāme bhikkhatthaṃ āhiṇḍanato. Paribhogatoti āhārassa paribhuñjanato. Āsayatoti pittādiāsayato. Āsayati ettha ekajjhaṃ pavattamānopi kammabalavatthito hutvā mariyādavasena aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato sayati tiṭṭhati pavattatīti āsayo, āmāsayassa upari tiṭṭhanako pittādiko. Mariyādattho hi ayamākāro. Nidheti yathābhutto āhāro nicito hutvā tiṭṭhati etthāti nidhānaṃ, āmāsayo. Tato nidhānato. Aparipakkatoti gahaṇīsaṅkhātena kammajatejena avipakkato. Paripakkatoti yathābhuttassa āhārassa vipakkabhāvato. Phalatoti nipphattito. Nissandatoti ito cito ca vissandanato. Sammakkhanatoti sabbaso makkhanato. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.294) gahetabbo.
还有其他疾病,如耳痛、痔瘘等。“非处”指不适当的地方,为人或非人所占据,如农田、天祠等。由于已被丢弃,既不是自己的,也不是他人的,而且令人厌离。“从水壶”,即从竹筒等盛水容器。“那个”是指倒掉的水。显示巴利原文
Aññe ca rogā kaṇṇasūlabhagandarādayo. Aṭṭhāneti manussāmanussapariggahite ayutte ṭhāne khettadevāyatanādike. Nissaṭṭhattā neva attano kassaci anissajjitattā jigucchanīyattā ca na parassa. Udakatumbatoti veḷunāḷiādiudakabhājanato. Tanti chaḍḍitaudakaṃ.
“长时威仪”指长时间持续、历时长久的威仪。“中等威仪”指以乞食等为主而转起的威仪。“细碎威仪”指在寺院或其他处所,以这样那样转身等而转起的威仪,这是他们的说法。“‘去’即行走”,因为前面已收录了“前进”“返回”,并说以身向前、向后移动为行走,所以这里只取“行走”之义。显示巴利原文
Addhānairiyāpathā cirappavattikā dīghakālikā iriyāpathā. Majjhimā bhikkhācaraṇādivasena pavattā. Cuṇṇikairiyāpathā vihāre aññatthāpi ito cito ca parivattanādivasena pavattāti vadanti. ‘‘Gateti gamane’’ti pubbe abhikkamapaṭikkamaggahaṇena gamanenapi purato pacchato ca kāyassa atiharaṇaṃ vuttanti idha gamanameva gahitanti keci.
在大西瓦长老的主张中,于每一连续的威仪,通过观察转起的名色法就在该处灭去,而成就“正知而行”。而在这《念处经》中,是以正知与观行的方式出现,因此说:“这正是大西瓦长老所说的‘不迷乱之任’,是此《念处经》所意指的。”而在《沙门果经》中,则能完全证得四种正知,直至开示沙门果的殊胜为止。说到“与念相应者”,是为了显示:正如正知的作用是首要的,念的作用同样如此,并非仅仅为了显示念的存在。因为任何时候,都不生起脱离念的智。这些关于正知的语句,是别别解说的,即逐一加以解释。由此也说明,如同正知是首要的,念也是首要的。显示巴利原文
Yasmā mahāsīvattheravāde anantare anantare iriyāpathe pavattarūpārūpadhammānaṃ tattha tattheva nirodhadassanavasena sampajānakāritā gahitā, idañcettha sampajaññavipassanācāravasena āgataṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tayidaṃ mahāsīvattherena vuttaṃ asammohadhuraṃ imasmiṃ satipaṭṭhānabhutte adhippeta’’nti. Sāmaññaphale (dī. ni. 1.214; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.214; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.214) pana sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati yāvadeva sāmaññaphalavisesadassanaparattā tassā desanāya. Satisampayuttassevāti idaṃ yathā sampajaññakiccassa padhānatā, evaṃ satikiccassāpīti dassanatthaṃ, na satiyā sabbhāvamattadassanatthaṃ. Na hi kadāci satirahitā ñāṇappavatti atthi. Etāni padānīti sampajaññapadāni. Vibhattānevāti visuṃ vibhattāneva. Imināpi sampajaññassa viya satiyāpi padhānataṃyeva vibhāveti.
另一种方法:一位比丘行走时,心怀余念、寻思余事而行;另一位于行住坐卧中不舍弃业处而行。同样地,一位比丘站立、端坐、躺卧时,心怀余念、寻思余事而卧;另一位则不舍弃业处而卧。然而仅凭这些,尚不明显,故以经行来说明。那位比丘进入经行处,站在经行道尽头时,如此把握:“在东端生起的名色诸法,未至西端便在那里灭去;在西端生起的,未至东端便在那里灭去;在经行道中间生起的,未至两端便在那里灭去;经行时生起的名色诸法,未及站立便在那里灭去;站立时生起的,未及端坐便在那里灭去;端坐时生起的,未及躺卧便在那里灭去。”如此把握后,在把握的同时,将心沉入有分;起身时,必定带着业处起身。此比丘即称为于诸威仪中正知者。如是,即使在睡眠中,业处也不会隐没。因此,那位比丘于自己所能经行、站立、端坐之后,躺卧时如此把握而卧:“身是无心的,床是无心的;身不知‘我卧于床’,床不知‘身卧于我’;无心的身卧于无心的床上。”如此把握的同时,将心沉入有分;醒来时,必定带着业处醒来。这可称为于睡眠中正知的人。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – eko bhikkhu gacchanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento gacchati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva gacchati, tathā eko tiṭṭhanto nisīdanto sayanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento sayati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva sayati, etthakena pana na pākaṭaṃ hotīti caṅkamanena dīpenti. Yo hi bhikkhu caṅkamanaṃ otaritvā caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ ṭhito pariggaṇhāti ‘‘pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattā rūpārūpadhammā pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattāpi pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddā, caṅkamanamajjhe pavattā ubho koṭiyo appatvā ettheva niruddhā, caṅkame pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ṭhānaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, ṭhāne pavattā nisajjaṃ, nisajjāya pavattā sayanaṃ appatvā etthevaniruddhā’’ti, evaṃ pariggaṇhanto pariggaṇhantoyeva cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otāreti, uṭṭhahanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva uṭṭhahati, ayaṃ bhikkhu gatādīsu sampajānakārī nāma hoti, evampi sutte kammaṭṭhānaṃ avibhūtaṃ hoti, tasmā yo bhikkhu yāva sakkoti, tāva caṅkamitvā ṭhatvā nisīditvā sayamāno evaṃ pariggahetvā sayati ‘‘kāyo acetano, mañco acetano, kāyo na jānāti ‘‘ahaṃ mañce sayito’ti, mañco na jānāti ‘‘mayi kāyo sayito’’ti, acetano kāyo acetane mañce sayito’’ti, evaṃ pariggaṇhantoyeva cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otāreti, pabujjhanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva pabujjhati, ayaṃ sutte sampajānakārī nāma hotīti.
由身等活动的产生而构成的特性,以及由转向唯作的等起而有速行心——或者,当一切于六门转起的唯作转起存在时,即称为清醒。能如此把握的人,便是在清醒中正知的人。此外,若将一日一夜分为六份,于其中五份保持醒觉,也称为在清醒中正知的人。为解脱而说法的人,舍弃三十二种畜生论后,依止十种论事讲述适宜之论,便是在言语中正知的人。于三十八种所缘中,随顺心的意乐而转起作意的人,或证入第二禅的人,则是在沉默中正知的人。因为第二禅无有语行,故特称为沉默。所谓‘前行等只是色法转起的差别相’,因此说‘应当只推求色蕴的集与灭’。其余内容如前所述。显示巴利原文
Kāyādikiriyānibbattanena tammayattā āvajjanakiriyāsamuṭṭhitattā ca javanaṃ, sabbampi vā chadvārappavattaṃ kiriyāmayapavattaṃ nāma, tasmiṃ sati jāgaritaṃ nāma hotīti pariggaṇhanto jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma. Apica rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā pañca koṭṭhāse jaggantopi jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma hoti. Vimuttāyatanasīsena dhammaṃ desentopi bāttiṃsatiracchānakathaṃ pahāya dasakathāvatthunissitaṃ sappāyakathaṃ kathentopi bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma. Aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittaruciyaṃ manasikāraṃ pavattentopi dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannopi tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāma. Dutiyañhi jhānaṃ vacīsaṅkhāravirahato visesato tuṇhībhāvo nāma. Rūpadhammasseva pavattiākāravisesā abhikkamādayoti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpakkhandhasseva samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
不净作意章的解释显示巴利原文
Paṭikūlamanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
110 「以不净作意」:即由于可厌逆性。所谓「不净」即是不净,凡具有不净自性、不净行相者,以对其作意的方式。因为即使没有表状态的词,状态的意义也能被理解,例如「布的白」。由于在《清净道论》中有说明,因此应依那里及其注释中所说的方法来理解。用布等材料如袋般捆扎而成的覆盖物,称为「包裹」。「明显的行相」:指超越概念施设之后,所现起的不净行相。为显示iti声的行相意义而说「如是」,接着为显示其具体原因,又说「通过摄持头发等」。显示巴利原文
110.Paṭikūlamanasikāravasenāti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.377) jigucchanīyatāya. Paṭikūlameva paṭikūlaṃ yo paṭikūlasabhāvo paṭikūlākāro, tassa manasikaraṇavasena. Antarenapi hi bhāvavācinaṃ saddaṃ bhāvattho viññāyati yathā ‘‘paṭassa sukka’’nti. Yasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.182-183) vuttaṃ, tasmā tattha taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Vatthādīhi pasibbakākārena bandhitvā kataṃ āvaṭanaṃ putoḷi. Vibhūtākāroti paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamitvā asubhabhāvassa upaṭṭhitākāro. Iti-saddassa ākāratthataṃ dassento ‘‘eva’’nti vatvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘kesādipariggahaṇenā’’ti āha.
界作意章的解释显示巴利原文
Dhātumanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
111 “以界作意”:即以地界等四界为所缘而生起的修习作意,也就是四界差别的意思。因为界作意、界业处、四界差别在意义上本质是同一回事。“屠牛者”:为了谋生而杀牛的人。“弟子”:为了工作而住在他近旁的人。“站立”(Ṭhita)这个词,在“站立或……”等语句中,通常是指处于站立等威仪的人,或者排除了行走而住立,用来表示其他威仪状态;但在这里,它是一般性地表示色身的活动行相,所以说“以四种威仪中任何行相而住立,称为随立”。其中,“行相”就是指站立等色身的活动行相。因为站立等作为名为身行的威仪,是身体活动的道路、转起的途径,所以称为“威仪”。“随立”就是随其当下活动的样子。这里所说的“住立”其实含有“安置”的意思,因此说“由随立及随安置故”。或者,“住立”是说明身体与站立威仪的连结;“安置”是说明与其他威仪的连结。又或者,“住立”是说明色法在每一刹那依各自的作用而安住;“安置”是说明由种种缘的作用,以种种方式被安置,这里也应如此理解。“观察”:就是一再地观察,用智慧之眼剖析,而分别地看见每一个部分。显示巴利原文
111.Dhātumanasikāravasenāti pathavīdhātuādikā catasso dhātuyo ārabbha pavattabhāvanāmanasikāravasena, catudhātuvavatthānavasenāti attho. Dhātumanasikāro dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ catudhātuvavatthānanti hi atthato ekaṃ. Goghātakoti jīvikatthāya gunnaṃ ghātako. Antevāsikoti kammakaraṇavasena tassa samīpavāsī. Ṭhita-saddo ‘‘ṭhito vā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.263; a. ni. 5.28) ṭhānasaṅkhātairiyāpathasamaṅgitāya, ṭhā-saddassa vā gativinivattiatthatāya aññattha ṭhapetvā gamanaṃ sesairiyāpathasamaṅgitāya bodhako, idha pana yathā tathā rūpakāyassa pavattiākārabodhako adhippetoti āha ‘‘catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ yena kenaci ākārena ṭhitattā yathāṭhita’’nti. Tattha ākārenāti ṭhānādinā rūpakāyassa pavattiākārena. Ṭhānādayo hi iriyāpathasaṅkhātāya kāyikakiriyāya patho pavattimaggoti ‘‘iriyāpatho’’ti vuccanti. Yathāṭhitanti yathāpavattaṃ. Yathāvuttaṭṭhānamevettha ‘‘paṇidhāna’’nti adhippetanti āha ‘‘yathāṭhitattā ca yathāpaṇihita’’nti. Ṭhitanti vā kāyassa ṭhānasaṅkhātairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. Paṇihitanti tadaññairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. Ṭhitanti vā kāyasaṅkhātānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe sakiccavasena avaṭṭhānaparidīpanaṃ. Paṇihitanti paccayakiccavasena tehi tehi paccayehi pakārato nihitaṃ paṇihitanti evampettha attho veditabbo. Paccavekkhatīti pati pati avekkhati, ñāṇacakkhunā vinibbhujitvā visuṃ visuṃ passati.
接下来,为了通过阐明其状态意义来显示所表达的内容,而说了“如屠牛者”等。其中,“喂养”是指为了让肉长得肥厚,用米糠、饭、棉籽等饲养使其长大。“被杀害后死去”:受到伤害后死亡。“死”:就是刚死的那一刻,因此说“即刻”。“母牛的想”并不会消失,因为那些肢节部分依照原来组合方式而得的“母牛”这一名称,即使在刚死的母牛身上,由于那些组合并未破坏,所以仍然不会消失。剖开、切开、分解——“bīlā”这个词,是把va变成ba、把i变成ī而成的。“bīlaso”:就是一块块地切分。“分解”:从骨架上把肉剥离出来,或者再把剥离的肉分成部分,因此说“肉的想生起”。对于出家人,如果还未掌握业处,也是一样。“密集分解”:就是对相续密集、组合密集、作用密集的拆解与分析。“界分别观察”:指通过密集分解,把地界等每一界都一一分开来观察的人。“有情想”:他们说这是依我见而生起的想;而即使是以世俗言说生起的有情想,那时也自然会消失,因为如实完成了密集分解。这样一来,前面所说的比喻义和所比喻的意义就完全相符了。因此说显示巴利原文
Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ bhāvatthavibhāvanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā goghātakassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha posentassāti maṃsūpacayaparibrūhanāya kuṇḍakabhattakappāsaṭṭhiādīhi saṃvaḍḍhentassa. Vadhitaṃ matanti hiṃsitaṃ hutvā mataṃ. Matanti ca matamattaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tāvadevā’’ti. Gāvīti saññā na antaradhāyati yāni aṅgapaccaṅgāni yathāsanniviṭṭhāni upādāya gāvīsamaññā matamattāyapi gāviyā, tesaṃ taṃsannivesassa avinaṭṭhattā. Vilīyanti bhijjanti vibhujjantīti bīlā bhāgā va-kārassa ba-kāraṃ, i-kārassa ī-kāraṃ katvā. Bīlasoti bīlaṃ bīlaṃ katvā. Vibhajitvāti aṭṭhisaṅghāṭato maṃsaṃ vivecetvā, tato vā vivecitamaṃsaṃ bhāgaso katvā. Tenevāha ‘‘maṃsasaññā pavattatī’’ti. Pabbajitassapi apariggahitakammaṭṭhānassa. Ghanavinibbhoganti santatisamūhakiccaghanānaṃ vinibbhujanaṃ vivecanaṃ. Dhātuso paccavekkhatoti ghanavinibbhogakaraṇena dhātuṃ dhātuṃ pathavīādidhātuṃ visuṃ visuṃ katvā paccavekkhantassa. Sattasaññāti attānudiṭṭhivasena pavattā saññāti vadanti, vohāravasena pavattasattasaññāyapi tadā antaradhānaṃ yuttameva yāthāvato ghanavinibbhogassa sampādanato. Evañhi sati yathāvuttaopammatthena upameyyattho aññadatthu saṃsandati sameti. Tenevāha ‘‘dhātuvaseneva cittaṃ santiṭṭhatī’’ti. Dakkhoti cheko taṃtaṃsamaññāya kusalo, yathājāte sūnasmiṃ naṅguṭṭhakhuravisāṇādivante aṭṭhimaṃsādiavayavasamudāye avibhatte gāvīsamaññā, na vibhatte, vibhatte pana aṭṭiṃmaṃsādiavayavasamaññāti jānanako. Catumahāpatho viya catuiriyāpathoti gāviyā ṭhitacatumahāpatho viya kāyassa pavattimaggabhūto catubbidho iriyāpatho. Yasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.306) vitthāritā, tasmā tattha taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.306) vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
九尸陀林章的解释显示巴利原文
Navasivathikapabbavaṇṇanā
112 对于在尸陀林中被遗弃的膨胀相等、个别生起的谈论,以及它们所指的膨胀相等不净部分,结集者们安立了“尸陀林篇”这个名称。因此说“以尸陀林篇分别”。“从寿命灭尽之上”意思是命尽之后,也就是死亡之后。“已升起的”指膨胀起来的。因为膨胀,所以不断向上肿胀,这就是肿起。与白、红色等交错破裂而混杂的青黑色,或者是先前颜色变异而成的青黑色,青瘀就是青瘀,这里的“ka”音只是无义的语缀,如同“黄色、红色”(《法集论》616)。因为可厌,所以令人憎恶。或者说,为了显示这个“ka”音有可厌的意思,而说“可厌的青瘀”就是青瘀,正如“恶名声流布”(《长部》3.316;《增支部》5.213;《大品》285)。从破裂的地方,被乌鸦、鹭等啄食。“正在流出的脓”:指涌出的脓,到处滴流的脓,这是它的意思。“如此的状态”:就是正在流出脓的状态。显示巴利原文
112. Sivathikāya apaviddhauddhumātakādipaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ odhiso pavattānaṃ kathānaṃ tadabhidheyyānañca uddhumātakādiasubhabhāgānaṃ sivathikapabbānīti saṅgītikārehi gahitasamaññā. Tenāha ‘‘sivathikapabbehi vibhajitu’’nti. Uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānāti jīvitakkhayato upari maraṇato paraṃ. Samuggatenāti uṭṭhitena. Uddhumātattāti uddhaṃ uddhaṃ dhumātattā sūnattā. Setarattehi viparibhinnaṃ vimissitaṃ nīlaṃ vinīlaṃ, purimavaṇṇavipariṇāmabhūtaṃ vā nīlaṃvinīlaṃ, vinīlameva vinīlakanti ka-kārena padavaḍḍhanamāha anatthantarato yathā ‘‘pītakaṃ lohitaka’’nti (dha. sa. 616). Paṭikūlakattāti jigucchanīyattā. Kucchitaṃ vinīlaṃ vinīlakanti kucchanattho vā ayaṃ ka-kāroti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.316; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 285). Paribhinnaṭṭhānehi kākakaṅkādīhi. Vissandamānaṃ pubbanti vissavantaṃ pubbaṃ, tahaṃ tahaṃ paggharantapubbanti attho. Tathābhāvanti vissandamānapubbabhāvaṃ.
「那位比丘」即经中所说「见身体弃于尸陀林」的比丘。他将此身与自身作同类对比。而「此身亦……」等语,正是显示这种对比的方式。「命」指色法命根,但在此处,非色法命根仅随识而存在。「暖」指业生火界。「如是极其污秽的自性」:意为如此极度污秽的自性,并非如命等未消逝时那样轻微。将会变成这样,即会成为那样的状态,故说「将会变成此膨胀等种种差别」。显示巴利原文
So bhikkhūti yo ‘‘passeyya sarīraṃ sivathikāya chaḍḍita’’nti vutto, so bhikkhu. Upasaṃharati sadisataṃ. Ayampi khotiādi upasaṃharaṇākāradassanaṃ . Āyūti rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, arūpajīvitindriyaṃ panettha viññāṇagatikameva. Usmāti kammajatejo. Evaṃpūtikasabhāvoti evaṃ ativiya pūtikasabhāvo, na āyuādīnaṃ avigame viya mattasoti adhippāyo. Ediso bhavissatīti evaṃbhāvīti āha ‘‘evaṃuddhumātādibhedo bhavissatī’’ti.
「撕扯、撕扯」意为拔除、拔除。「与残余的少许肉血相连」:因未被完全吃尽,各处仍连着些许残余的血肉。「其他手骨」:笼统地显示手骨散乱,为表示其彻底散乱,故说「乃至分裂成六十四块等」。「经年以上者」:指已过一年的。因已满一周年,故说「逾年者」。由于古老,坚固性消失而粉碎,此处即称为腐败;为显示此状态如何发生,故说「在露天」等。为阐明第二尸陀林篇等的意义,应依被吃等方式,说「应依被吃等方式来连结」。显示巴利原文
Luñcitvā luñcitvāti uppāṭetvā uppāṭetvā. Sesāvasesamaṃsalohitayuttanti sabbaso akhāditattā tahaṃ tahaṃ sesena appāvasesena maṃsalohitena yuttaṃ. Aññena hatthaṭṭhikanti avisesena hatthaṭṭhikānaṃ vippakiṇṇatā jotitāti anavasesato tesaṃ vippakiṇṇataṃ dassento ‘‘catusaṭṭhibhedampī’’tiādimāha. Terovassikānīti tirovassaṃ gatāni. Tāni pana saṃvaccharaṃ vītivattāni hontīti āha ‘‘atikkantasaṃvaccharānī’’ti. Purāṇatāya ghanabhāvavigamena vicuṇṇatā idha pūtibhāvoti so yathā hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘abbhokāse’’tiādimāha. Khajjamānatādivasena dutiyasivathikapabbādīnaṃ vavatthitatthā vuttaṃ ‘‘khajjamānādīnaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbā’’ti.
「正是这两者」:以决定语将安止业处限定于此,因在其他段落中并无安止业处。正因为有了‘eva’一词,才将限定置于别处。因此,不应认为那两个段落的观业处性质已被否定,因为于彼处亦见无常等。揭示诸行过患的段落,即是墓园省思诸节,故说「因墓园省思是依随观过患而说」。威仪等段落不导向安止,此甚明显,故说「其余十二种」。此处并无意义上需详细解释的内容,易于理解。显示巴利原文
Imānevadveti avadhāraṇena appanākammaṭṭhānaṃ tattha niyameti aññapabbesu tadabhāvato. Yato hi eva-kāro, tato aññattha niyameti, tena pabbadvayassa vipassanākammaṭṭhānatāpi appaṭisiddhāti daṭṭhabbā aniccādidassanato. Saṅkhāresu ādīnavavibhāvanāni sivathikapabbānīti āha ‘‘sivathikānaṃ ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttattā’’ti. Iriyāpathapabbādīnaṃ anappanāvahatā pākaṭā evāti ‘‘sesāni dvādasāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyamevāti.
受随观的注释。显示巴利原文
Vedanānupassanāvaṇṇanā
113 关于“乐受”等,此处,“sukhayati”意为“带来快乐”,故称“乐”,即令相应的心所法与身体获得乐味。或说“suṭṭhu khādati”,意为“很好地嚼碎”或“挖掘”身心的病患,故称为乐。另有一说:因其“容易给予机会”,故称为乐。“vedayati”意为“感受”,即领纳所缘之味,故称为“受”。“vedayamāno”即是正在领纳。关于“欲”等,在解说威仪的部分已作说明。具有正知的受,称为“正知受”。显示巴利原文
113.Sukhaṃ vedananti ettha sukhayatīti sukhā, sampayuttadhamme kāyañca laddhassāde karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khādati, khanati vā kāyikaṃ cetasikañca ābādhanti sukhā. Sukaraṃ okāsadānaṃ etissāti sukhāti apare. Vedayati ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavatīti vedanā. Vedayamānoti anubhavamāno. Kāmantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ iriyāpathapabbe vuttameva. Sampajānassa vediyanaṃ sampajānavediyanaṃ.
“这只是假名而已”一句,表明“正在感受乐受时,说‘我感受乐受’”仅是假名安立。“所缘事”是指色等所缘。诚然,色等所缘作为受生起之处,故被称为“事”。Assāti 的意思是“可能会有”。由于除了诸法之外,并无其他作者,为显示诸法本身就是作者,故说“唯有受在感受”。关于“呻吟”:见到那种强烈感受在受到压制时所产生的过患后,为了给那个感受以宣泄的机会而发出呻吟。“平衡精进”:由于忍受精进过于强烈,便将其减弱,令它与定达到均等,如是平衡精进。“与无碍解俱行”:是指与出世间的无碍解一起。或者当世间无碍解生起时,于彼处具有能力,也依此义说为“与无碍解俱行”。“等首者”即“次第等首者”,意思是在省察速行之后,于紧接着的速行中般涅槃。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vohāramattaṃ hotī’’ti etena ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti idaṃ vohāramattanti dasseti. Vatthuārammaṇāti rūpādiārammaṇā. Rūpādiārammaṇañhi vedanāya pavattiṭṭhānatāya ‘‘vatthū’’ti adhippetaṃ. Assāti bhaveyya. Dhammavinimuttassa aññassa kattu abhāvato dhammasseva kattubhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘vedanāva vedayatī’’ti āha. Nitthunantoti. Balavato vedanāvegassa nirodhane ādīnavaṃ disvā tassa avasaradānavasena nitthunanto. Vīriyasamataṃ yojetvāti adhivāsanavīriyassa adhimattattā tassa hāpanavasena samādhinā samarasatāpādanena vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā. Saha paṭisambhidāhīti lokuttarapaṭisambhidāhi saha. Lokiyānampi vā sati uppattikāle tattha samatthataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘saha paṭisambhidāhī’’ti. Samasīsīti vārasamasīsī hutvā, paccavekkhaṇavārassa anantaravāre parinibbāyīti attho.
正如对乐受那样,对苦受也应如此理解。也就是说,如同以“他感受乐……”等文说明正知感受一般,对苦受亦是同理。其中,“dukkhayati”意为“带来痛苦”,故称“苦”,即压迫、逼恼相应的心所法与身体。或者,“duṭṭhuṃ khādati”意为“恶劣地嚼碎”或“挖掘”身心的安乐,故称为苦。另有一说:因其“难以给予机会”,故称为苦。“非色业处”是指执取非色,意思是依非色法门着手修观。然而,通过色业处,也能囊括着手修止;但此处本意在于着手修观,为显明此义,故说:“执取色,也就是这里所说的‘执取非色’。”当提到“四界差别”时,于此处也应引出“大多”一词来作关联。所谓的“彼两者”,指的便是四界差别中简略与详细的两种方式。依照简略作意的方式,记载于《大念处经》中;依照详细作意的方式,则见于《教诫罗睺罗经》、《界分别经》等处。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca sukhaṃ, evaṃ dukkhanti yathā ‘‘sukhaṃ vedayatī’’tiādinā sampajānavediyanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, evaṃ dukkhampi. Tattha dukkhayatīti dukkhā, sampayuttadhamme kāyañca pīḷeti vibādhatīti attho. Duṭṭhuṃ vā khādati, khanati vā kāyikaṃ cetasikañca sātanti dukkhā. Dukkaraṃ okāsadānaṃ etissāti dukkhāti apare. Arūpakammaṭṭhānanti arūpapariggahaṃ, arūpadhammamukhena vipassanābhinivesanti attho. Rūpakammaṭṭhānena pana samathābhinivesopi saṅgayhati, vipassanābhiniveso pana idhādhippetoti dassento āha. ‘‘Rūpapariggaho arūpapariggahotipi etadeva vuccatī’’ti. Catudhātuvavatthānaṃ kathesīti etthāpi ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tadubhayanti catudhātuvavatthānassa saṅkhepavitthāradvayamāha. Saṅkhepamanasikāravasena mahāsatipaṭṭhāne, vitthāramanasikāravasena rāhulovāda- (ma. ni. 2.115-117) dhātuvibhaṅgādīsu (vibha. 174-175).
藉由“大多”一词,也表明了依其他法门的非色业处论确实存在。为了详细说明这一点,才说“有三种……”等。此处的“投入”(abhinivesa)指进入,意为开始。因为这种分类仅存在于开始阶段,而思择则是在毫无遗漏地执取诸法之后才进行。所说的“执取色业处时”(pariggahite rūpakammaṭṭhāne),是就通过色门而投入观而言。至于通过非色门而投入观,则大多是止行者修习之后所愿求的。他先执取禅支,之后再执取其余诸法。“第一个投向”(paṭhamābhinipāto):一切心所法皆依于心,称为心的作用,因此说触是心的第一个投向。当已生起触,或心与心所的集合体被所缘接触时,便借由与触同时生起的受,在同一刹那感受;然而,触正如灯之于光,是受等的特殊缘,因此被说成似乎在前。这便是所谓的“安立所缘的特相”。关于“触者”(phusanti),是指以触的方式接触所缘。确实,这种非色法虽在某个层面上并不粘着,却如同眼对于色、耳对于声那样,心与所缘仿佛在接触、仿佛在撞击一般。显示巴利原文
Yebhuyyaggahaṇena tadaññadhammavasenapi arūpakammaṭṭhānakathāya atthitā dīpitāti taṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘tividho hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhinivesoti anuppaveso, ārambhoti attho. Ārambhe eva hi ayaṃ vibhāgo, sammasanaṃ pana anavasesatova dhamme pariggahetvā vattati. Pariggahite rūpakammaṭṭhāneti idaṃ rūpamukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, arūpamukhena pana vipassanābhiniveso yebhūyyena samathayānikassa icchitabbo, so ca paṭhamaṃ jhānaṅgāni pariggahetvā tato paraṃ sesadhamme pariggaṇhāti. Paṭhamābhinipātoti sabbe cetasikā cittāyattā cittakiriyabhāvena vuccantīti phasso cittassa paṭhamābhinipāto vutto, uppannaphasso puggalo, cittacetasikarāsi vā ārammaṇena phuṭṭho phassasahajātāya vedanāya taṃsamakālameva vedeti, phasso pana obhāsassa viya padīpo vedanādīnaṃ paccayaviseso hotīti purimakālo viya vuccati, yā tassa ārammaṇābhiniropanalakkhaṇatā vuccati. Phusantoti ārammaṇassa phusanākārena. Ayañhi arūpadhammatā ekadesena anallīyamānopi rūpaṃ viya cakkhu, saddo viya ca sotaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇañca phusanto viya saṅghaṭṭento viya ca pavattati. Tathāhesa ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti vuccati.
“领纳所缘”(ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantī)是指以主宰性、全然遍熟的状态、拥有者的身份,去品尝所缘的味道。因为触等相应诸法对于所缘的运作仅是部分的,仅止于触及而已;而受则以享受可喜之相状等方式运作,故对所缘是全方位地运作。以触及等方式执取所缘,是部分地领纳;以感受的方式执取,则是随心所欲地完全领纳。这些执取方式各自体性即是如此,因此不应如同对待受那样,因触等各自执行其作用,便指责它们也具有拥有者式的领纳。关于“了知”(vijānantī),这是以判别的方式特别地了知。因为识如同有人拿着量器去量可度量的物体,对所缘加以判别并清晰地显现,并不像想那样仅止于认知。正因如此,有时通过识也能显现三相。然而,触等诸法各自变得明显,应理解为依于由特殊缘所成就的先前作意。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantīti issaravatāya visavitāya sāmibhāvena ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavantī. Phassādīnañhi sampayuttadhammānaṃ ārammaṇe ekadeseneva pavatti phusanādimattabhāvato, vedanāya pana iṭṭhākārasambhogādivasena pavattanato ārammaṇe nippadesato pavatti. Phusanādibhāvena hi ārammaṇaggahaṇaṃ ekadesānubhavanaṃ, vedayitābhāvena gahaṇaṃ yathākāmaṃ sabbānubhavanaṃ evasabhāvāneva tāni gahaṇānīti na vedanāya viya phassādīnampi yathāsakaṃ kiccakaraṇena sāmibhāvānubhavanaṃ codetabbaṃ. Vijānantanti paricchindanavasena visesato jānantaṃ. Viññāṇañhi minitabbavatthuṃ nāḷiyā minanto puriso viya ārammaṇaṃ paricchijja vibhāventaṃ pavattati, na saññā viya sañjānanamattaṃ hutvā. Tathā hi anena kadāci lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanāpi hoti. Imesaṃ pana phassādīnaṃ tassa tassa pākaṭabhāvo paccayavisesasiddhassa pubbābhogassa vasena veditabbā.
因此,即使某一法变得明显,但依据“比丘们,应遍知一切”、“比丘们,应自证知一切”等经句,仍应执取一切可资思择的诸法。为了显示此点,而说“于此,对谁……”等。此处,说“即于触等第五”(phassapañcamakeyevā)是一种限定,因为那四个非色蕴皆包含其中,故执取它即执取了它们。因为触等第五的执取法通于一切心生起,且在此通过执取触与思,便含摄了行蕴中的所有诸法,因为思是其中最主要的。正如在经分别的行蕴分别中(《分别论》12),以“眼触所生思”等语,仅对思作了分别;其他诸蕴则依其自性而被执取。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tassa tasseva pākaṭabhāvepi ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.46; paṭi. ma. 1.3) ‘‘sabbañca kho, bhikkhave, abhijāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.26) ca evamādivacanato sabbe sammasanupagā dhammā pariggahetabbāti dassento ‘‘tattha yassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha phassapañcamakeyevāti avadhāraṇaṃ tadantogadhattā taggahaṇeneva gahitattā catunnaṃ arūpakkhandhānaṃ. Phassapañcamakaggahaṇañhi tassa sabbacittuppādasādhāraṇabhāvato, tattha ca phassacetanāggahaṇena sabbasaṅkhārakkhandhadhammasaṅgaho cetanāpadhānattā tesaṃ. Tathā hi suttantabhājanīye saṅkhārakkhandhavibhaṅge (vibha. 12) ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā cetanā’’tiādinā cetanāva vibhattā, itare pana khandhā sarūpeneva gahitā.
“依于事”(vatthuṃ nissitā)中的“事”一词,是指业生身的领域。如何知道呢?答:“依此所说……”等。那么,是在哪里说的呢?在《沙门果经》中。“那”即业生身。“没有脱离五蕴的名色”,这是从主导的角度说的。否则,名法确实也有脱离蕴而存在的。“以无明等为因”,即以无明、爱、取等为因。在说了“随观的次第……而行”之后,为了显示强力观以及他的策励与殊胜证得,接着说“他……”等。显示巴利原文
Vatthuṃ nissitāti ettha vatthu-saddo karajakāyavisayoti kathamidaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘yaṃ sandhāya vutta’’ntiādi. Kattha pana vuttaṃ? Sāmaññaphale. Soti karajakāyo. Pañcakkhandhavinimuttaṃ nāmarūpaṃ natthīti idaṃ adhikāravasena vuttaṃ. Aññathā hi khandhavinimuttampi nāmaṃ atthevāti. Avijjādihetukāti avijjātaṇhupādānādihetukā. Vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā…pe… vicaratīti iminā balavavipassanaṃ vatvā puna tassa ussukkāpanaṃ visesādhigamanañca dassento ‘‘so’’tiādimāha.
“在这里”(idha),指在这第二念处的教导中。由于应当以受随观来解说,世尊便以受来解说。而且,为了显示在前面所说的三种业处投入中,以受投入业处比较容易——因为受的相状显著,所以说“通过触……”等语。“并不明显”这句话,是针对那些从一开始受便更显著现起的人说的。如此一来,所谓“触是明显的”、“识是明显的”这类话便没有冲突了。而“受的生起明显”是就乐受和苦受说的,因为它们的转起是粗显的,其他受并非如此。或者,因为可以通过总摄苦、乐两受来把握,对智者而言其他受的转起也是明显的,所以应当把这里的“诸受”看作不加区分地总括了一切受。“当乐生起时”等语,是在说明乐受的明显性。“在那个时候不感受苦受”是指:在具足乐受的那个时刻,确实不感受苦受,因为过去的苦受已经息灭,未来的苦受还未生起,依次第而论;而当下有苦受是不可能的事,这一点已经说过。受仅能安住于自身的所作。显示巴利原文
Idhāti imissaṃ dutiyasatipaṭṭhānadesanāyaṃ, tassā pana vedanānupassanāvasena kathetabbattā bhagavā vedanāvasena kathesi. Yathāvuttesu ca tīsu kammaṭṭhānābhinivesesu vedanāvasena kammaṭṭhānābhiniveso sukaro vedanānaṃ vibhūtabhāvatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘phassavasena hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na pākaṭaṃ hotīti idaṃ tādise puggale sandhāya vuttaṃ, yesaṃ ādito vedanāva vibhūtatarā hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Evañhi yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘phasso pākaṭo hoti, viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotī’’ti, taṃ avirodhitaṃ hoti. Vedanānaṃ uppattipākaṭatāyāti ca idaṃ sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Tāsañhi pavatti oḷārikā, na itarāya. Tadubhayaggahaṇamukhena vā gahetabbattā itarāyapi pavatti viññūnaṃ pākaṭā evāti ‘‘vedanāna’’nti avisesaggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yadā sukhaṃ uppajjatītiādi sukhavedanāya pākaṭabhāvavibhāvanaṃ. Neva tasmiṃ samaye dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedetīti tasmiṃ sukhavedanāsamaṅgisamaye neva dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti niruddhattā, anuppannattā ca yathākkamaṃ atītānāgatānaṃ , paccuppannāya pana asambhavo vuttoyeva. Sakiccakkhaṇamattāvaṭṭhānato aniccā. Sameccasambhuyya paccayehi katattā saṅkhatā. Vatthārammaṇādipaccayaṃ paṭicca uppannattā paṭiccasamuppannā. Khayavayapalujjananirujjhanapakatitāya khayadhammā…pe… nirodhadhammāti daṭṭhabbā.
由于会被烦恼所接触,五种欲功德称为“味”;因为作为所缘而与味共在,故为“有味的”。因此说“依于五种欲功德之味”。“从此以后”,指引向“有受”等文句,即如于身随观中所说的理趣相同。显示巴利原文
Kilesehi āmasitabbato āmisaṃ nāma pañca kāmaguṇā, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena saha āmisehīti āmisā. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇāmisanissitā’’ti. Ito paranti ‘‘atthi vedanā’’ti evamādipāḷiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayamevā’’ti.
心随观的注释。显示巴利原文
Cittānupassanāvaṇṇanā
114 因为与俱起的贪相应而生起,所以称为「有贪的」(sarāgaṃ)。因此说:‘与贪俱行’(lobhasahagata)。「离贪的」(vītarāgaṃ):在这里,虽然按理应该与‘有贪’(sarāga)这个词相对而有‘离贪’,但因为这里指的是思惟行(sammasana-cāra),所以只取三地的心。因此,在说了‘世间善及无记’(lokiyakusalābyākata)之后,用‘然而这’等语来阐明这个意图。其余的二嗔根和二痴根,也就是四种不善心,因为它们不与贪相应,所以没有「有贪性」(sarāgatā);虽然由于相关的因相,可能会有与贪俱存的状态,但也没有「离贪性」(vītarāgatā)。因此它们脱离了两种极端。所以称为‘既不偏向前面一种,也不偏向后面一种’(neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajantī)。这样的话,会不会变成只了知一部分呢?不会,因为它们属于这两种极端的范畴。在不善根中,与痴同时生起而转,所以称为「俱痴」(samoha)。因此说:‘与疑俱行和与掉举俱行’(vicikicchāsahagatañceva uddhaccasahagatañcā)。因为在这里,确实是与痴同时存在,所以称为「俱痴」(samoha),由此也能确定前一个词的含义。所以说:‘然而,因为……’等等。但是由于极度愚痴,从个体角度来说,因为具有特别多的痴,可以称为「痴悗心」(momūha-citta),因此与疑俱行和与掉举俱行的两种心,特别称为「俱痴」(samoha);而其他不善心并非如此,所以说‘也这样转起’(vaṭṭantiyevā)。因为与惛眠相应,被惛眠跟随、随逐,所以称为「有惛眠随逐」(thinamiddhānupatita)。这就是五种有行不善心,也就是「萎缩心」(saṅkuṭitacitta)。之所以称为萎缩心,是因为它在面对所缘时,以收缩、萎缩的方式生起。由于特殊的缘,与强力的掉举同时生起、混在一起而转,所以称为「与掉举俱行」(uddhaccasahagataṃ)。否则,一切不善心也都与掉举俱行。之所以称为「散开心」(pasaṭacittaṃ),是因为它极度以散乱的方式生起。显示巴利原文
114. Sampayogavasena (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.381) pavattamānena saha rāgenāti sarāgaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘lobhasahagata’’nti. Vītarāganti. Ettha kāmaṃ sarāgapadapaṭiyoginā vītarāgavasena bhavitabbaṃ, sammasanacārassa pana idhādhippetattā tebhūmakasseva gahaṇanti ‘‘lokiyakusalābyākata’’nti vatvā ‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādinā tameva adhippāyaṃ vivarati. Sesāni dve dosamūlāni, dve mohamūlānīti cattāri akusalacittāni. Tesañhi rāgena sampayogābhāvato nattheva sarāgatā, tannimittakatāya pana siyā taṃsahitatālesoti nattheva vītarāgatāpīti dukavinimuttatā evettha labbhatīti āha ‘‘neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajantī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ padesikaṃ pajānanaṃ āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati dukantarapariyāpannattā tesaṃ. Akusalamūlesu saha moheneva vattatīti samohanti āha ‘‘vicikicchāsahagatañceva uddhaccasahagatañcā’’ti. Yasmā cettha saheva mohenāti samohanti purimapadāvadhāraṇampi labbhatiyeva, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Yathā pana atimūḷhatāya pāṭipuggalikanayena savisesaṃ mohavantatāya momūhacittanti vattabbato vicikicchuddhaccasahagatadvayaṃ visesato ‘‘samoha’’nti vuccati, na tathā sesākusalacittānīti ‘‘vaṭṭantiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sampayogavasena thinamiddhena anupatitaṃ anugatanti thinamiddhānupatitaṃ pañcavidhaṃ sasaṅkhārikākusalacittaṃ saṅkuṭitacittaṃ. Saṅkuṭitacittaṃ nāma ārammaṇe saṅkocanavasena pavattanato. Paccayavisesavasena thāmajātena uddhaccena sahagataṃ pavattaṃ saṃsaṭṭhanti uddhaccasahagataṃ, aññathā sabbampi akusalacittaṃ uddhaccasahagatamevāti. Pasaṭacittaṃ nāma sātisayaṃ vikkhepavasena pavattanato.
由于能镇伏烦恼、果报广大且相续长久,故达于广大之状态;或由广大胜欲等所趣入、所行道,故称为「广大」。这是指色界及无色界地之心,因为世间中无有比此更广大者。故称「色无色界」。其对立面为「小」,因此说「非广大」,即欲界心。因与能超越自己的更高法共存,故称「有上」;其对立面为「无上」。应结合此二者来理解。因此说:「有上」指欲界;「无上」指……等。因能镇伏对立之法,依此定而得正安立,故称「定的」。因此说:‘何者是……’等等。‘何者’即指何心。若未像前面所说的那样由定而安立的心,便是「未定的」。故说:‘缺乏两种定’。以彼分解脱而解脱者,为欲界善心;以镇伏解脱而解脱者,为广大心。因此,将此二者合说:‘以彼分解脱与镇伏解脱而解’显示巴利原文
Kilesavikkhambhanasamatthatāya vipulaphalatāya dīghasantānatāya ca mahantabhāvaṃ gataṃ, mahantehi vā uḷāracchandādīhi gataṃ paṭipannanti mahaggataṃ. Taṃ pana rūpārūpabhūmikaṃ tato mahantassa loke abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘rūpārūpāvacara’’nti. Tassa cettha paṭiyogī parittamevāti āha ‘‘amahaggatanti kāmāvacara’’nti. Attānaṃ uttarituṃ samatthehi saha uttarehīti sauttaraṃ, tappaṭipakkhena anuttaraṃ, tadubhayaṃ upādāya veditabbanti āha ‘‘sauttaranti kāmāvacara’’ntiādi. Paṭipakkhavikkhambhanasamatthena samādhinā sammadeva āhitaṃ samāhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yassā’’tiādi. Yassāti yassa cittassa. Yathāvuttena samādhinā na samāhitanti asamāhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayasamādhirahita’’nti. Tadaṅgavimuttiyā vimuttaṃ, kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ. Vikkhambhanavimuttiyā vimuttaṃ, mahaggatanti tadubhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttīhi vimutta’’nti. Yattha tadubhayavimutti natthi, taṃ ubhayavimuttirahitanti gayhamāne lokuttaracittepi siyā āsaṅkāti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘samuccheda…pe… okāsova natthī’’ti āha. Okāsābhāvo ca sammasanacārassa adhippetattā veditabbo. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayamevāti.
法随观的注释显示巴利原文
Dhammānupassanāvaṇṇanā
盖(分)的注释显示巴利原文
Nīvaraṇapabbavaṇṇanā
115 115. 通过显示应断等法的分类,以五种方式解说「法随观」——此义从经文本身即可了知,故为点明此意而说:「以五种方式开示法随观」。若如此,为何唯以盖等来宣说?这是基于所化者的意乐。对于某些所化者,在应断法中,首先应详细解说诸盖,因此世尊便首先为他们宣说了盖随观。同样地,身随观也以止为前行而得到宣说;继而,在应遍知的诸蕴、诸处,应修习的诸觉支,以及以应遍知等分类的诸谛上,更宣说了增上的教导。因此,在这里,修习止也仅是为了服务于观;此念处之教导是以观为核心、以观为主的。为显示其依观而分说之情形,故言「而且」等。其中,应理解为借助蕴、处、苦谛而解说混合摄受。‘想行蕴的摄受’一句,由‘亦’字将全部五取蕴的摄受悉数包含,因为其他诸蕴也都含摄其中。‘黑与白不可能并立’——此于正确了知时并不存在,因显示巴利原文
115. Pahātabbādidhammavibhāgadassanavasena pañcadhā dhammānupassanā niddiṭṭhāti ayamattho pāḷito eva viññāyatīti tamatthaṃ ulliṅgento ‘‘pañcavidhenadhammānupassanaṃ kathetu’’nti vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā nīvaraṇādivaseneva niddiṭṭhanti? Veneyyajjhāsayato. Yesañhi veneyyānaṃ pahātabbadhammesu paṭhamaṃ nīvaraṇāni vibhāgena vattabbāni, tesaṃ vasenettha bhagavatā paṭhamaṃ nīvaraṇesu dhammānupassanā kathitā. Tathā hi kāyānupassanāpi samathapubbaṅgamā desitā, tato pariññeyyesu khandhesu āyatanesu, bhāvetabbesu bojjhaṅgesu pariññeyādivibhāgesu saccesu ca uttarā desanā desitā, tasmā cettha samathabhāvanāpi yāvadeva vipassanatthaṃ icchitā, vipassanāpadhānā vipassanābahulā ca satipaṭṭhānadesanāti tassā vipassanābhinivesavibhāgena desitabhāvaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha khandhāyatanadukkhasaccavasena missakapariggahakathanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saññāsaṅkhārakkhandhapariggahampīti pi-saddena sakalapañcupādānakkhandhapariggahaṃ sampiṇḍeti itaresaṃ tadantogadhattā. ‘‘Kaṇhasukkānaṃ yugandhatā natthī’’ti pajānanakāle abhāvā ‘‘abhiṇhasamudācāravasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathāti yenākārena. So pana ‘‘kāmacchandassa uppādo hotī’’ti vuttattā kāmacchandassa kāraṇākārova, atthato kāraṇamevāti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. Ca-saddo vakkhamānatthasamuccayattho.
此处「在此」(tattha)是指前文所引“以及如同”(yathā cā)等句的段落。「即便是净」(subhampi)即指爱欲(kāmacchanda)。因为爱欲以其执取的方式被称为「净」(subha),又由于它是依那种方式生起的其他爱欲的相(nimitta),所以也称为「净相」(subhanimitta)。「可意的」(iṭṭhaṃ)指可爱的事物,或是以可爱的方式被执取的色等净所缘(subhārammaṇa)。对于所期望的利益安乐反成为不善巧之因的作意,称为不善巧作意(anupāyamanasikāra)。「彼」(taṃ)即指非如理作意(ayonisomanasikāra)。「在此」(tattha)是指在应被成就的与作为所缘的这两种净相(subhanimitta)之中。「食」(āhāro)即指缘(paccaya)。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādinā vuttapade. Subhampīti kāmacchandopi. So hi attano gahaṇākārena ‘‘subha’’nti vuccati, tenākārena pavattanakassa aññassa kāmacchandassa nimittattā ‘‘subhanimitta’’nti ca. Iṭṭhaṃ, iṭṭhākārena vā gayhamānaṃ rūpādi subhārammaṇaṃ. Ākaṅkhitassa hitasukhassa anupāyabhūto manasikāro anupāyamanasikāro. Tanti ayonisomanasikāraṃ. Tatthāti nipphādetabbe ārammaṇabhūte ca duvidhepi subhanimitte. Āhāroti paccayo.
「即便是不净」(asubhampi)亦指不净禅那(asubhajjhāna),这是通过省略后面词语(uttarapadalopa)而说的。当知这种不净禅那是基于十种无识不净(aviññāṇakāsubha)以及头发等身分而生起。因为在《基哩马难达经》(girimānandasutta, 增支部 10.60)中说,于头发等生起的想称为不净想(asubhasaññā)。又,当知此处提及四种非如理作意(ayonisomanasikāra)与如理作意(yonisomanasikāra),是为了毫无遗漏地显示一切情形。在这些作意中,这里重点所指的,是对不净的事物作意为「净」或作意为「不净」的作意;又由于它们与主要作意随顺,其他作意也被包含在内。显示巴利原文
Asubhampīti asubhajjhānampi uttarapadalopena. Taṃ pana dasasu aviññāṇakāsubhesu, kesādīsu ca pavattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kesādīsu hi saññā asubhasaññāti girimānandasutte (a. ni. 10.60) vuttāti. Ettha ca catubbidhassa ayonisomanasikārassa yonisomanasikārassa ca gahaṇaṃ niravasesadassanatthaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesu pana asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti, ‘‘asubha’’nti ca manasikāro idhādhippeto, tadanukūlattā vā itarepīti.
于十一种不净中,学习其可厌之相——也就是依之生起取相的那套方法,称为不净相的取学。致力于能引生近行定与安止定的不净修习,则称为不净修习的致力。据说,对于在饮食上知量的人,由于昏沉睡眠不能征服他、找不到可乘之机,欲贪便被断除。然而,若有人能正确地了知:依于食物的不净想;对食物消化后所成之物的不净性观察;对以此为依止处的不净性观察;对属于胃中物的不净性观察;以及观察身体是依靠食物才能维持——那么,此人便特别地被称作在饮食上知量者,且他的欲贪必定会被断除。不净业处长老就是那位见到牙骨的人。依阿毗达摩的方式,一切贪皆属欲欲盖,故说‘由阿罗汉道(而断除)’。显示巴利原文
Ekādasasu (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.16) asubhesu paṭikūlākārassa uggaṇhanaṃ, yathā vā tattha uggahanimittaṃ uppajjati, tathā paṭipatti asubhanimittassa uggaho. Upacārappanāvahāya asubhabhāvanāya anuyuñjanaṃ asubhabhāvanānuyogo. Bhojane mattaññuno thinamiddhābhibhavābhāvā otāraṃ alabhamāno kāmacchando pahīyatīti vadanti. Bhojananissitaṃ pana āhāre paṭikūlasaññaṃ, tabbipariṇāmassa, tadādhārassa, tassa ca udariyabhūtassa asubhatādassanaṃ, kāyassa āhāraṭṭhitikatādassanañca yo sammadeva jānāti, so visesato bhojane mattaññū nāma, tassa ca kāmacchando pahīyateva. Asubhakammikatissatthero dantaṭṭhidassāvī. Abhidhammapariyāyena (dha. sa. 1159, 1503) sabbopi lobho kāmacchandanīvaraṇanti āha ‘‘arahattamaggenā’’ti.
嗔也是如此,这是把先前生起的嗔作为嗔相,并把它作为之后生起的嗔的原因。‘慈爱’:以遍满利益的方式而湿润、柔和,故称为‘友’;存在于那位友当中,或者这属于友的,就是‘慈’,是在那慈当中。显示巴利原文
Paṭighampi purimuppannaṃ paṭighanimittaṃ parato uppajjanakapaṭighassa kāraṇanti katvā. Mejjati hitapharaṇavasena siniyhatīti mitto, tasmiṃ mitte bhavā, mittassa vā esāti mettā, tassā mettāya.
对于修习慈心者,生起并持续遍满利益于众生,这便是学习慈相。应知,在学习慈时,有“有分别遍满”、“无分别遍满”与“方向遍满”:依自己、亲爱者、中庸者、怨敌等类别而行,为有分别遍满;打破界限之后而行,为无分别遍满;依逐个方向而行,则为方向遍满。或者,依住所、街道、村落等类别而行,是兼具分别与方向的遍满;不特指住所等,只依东方等方向而行,是无分别与方向的遍满。正是考虑到这两种学习方式,才说“有分别、无分别及方向遍满”。学习应理解为直到近行定为止;对已学习的内容反复修习,则是“修习”。其中,无分别遍满的慈,是依“一切有情、一切有息、一切存在、一切个体、一切有身者”这些词句,对每一类都发出“愿他们无怨、无嗔、无恼、安乐自护”四种祝愿,故成二十种。有分别遍满的慈,是依“一切女人、男人、圣者、凡夫、天、人、堕恶道者”等以众生为界别的方式运行,成为七种或二十八种;或依以方向为界的方式,对十方运行,成为十种;又或于每一方向中,再配合众生、女人或男人等,以及无怨显示巴利原文
Mettāyanassa sattesu hitapharaṇassa uppādanaṃ pavattanaṃ mettānimittassa uggaho. Odhisakaanodhisakadisāpharaṇānanti attaatipiyasahāyamajjhattaverīvasena odhisakatā, sīmāsambhede kate anodhisakatā, ekādidisāpharaṇavasena disāpharaṇatā mettāya uggahaṇe veditabbā. Vihāraracchāgāmādivasena vā odhisakadisāpharaṇaṃ, vihārādiuddesarahitaṃ puratthimādidisāvasena anodhisakadisāpharaṇanti evaṃ vā dvidhā uggahaṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘odhisakaanodhisakadisāpharaṇāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Uggaho ca yāva upacārā daṭṭhabbo, uggahitāya āsevanā bhāvanā. Tattha ‘‘sabbe sattā, pāṇā, bhūtā, puggalā, attabhāvapariyāpannā’’ti etesaṃ vasena pañcavidhā, ekekasmiṃ ‘‘averā hontu, abyāpajjā, anīghā, sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū’’ti catudhā pavattito vīsatividhā anodhisakapharaṇā mettā, ‘‘sabbā itthiyo, purisā, ariyā, anariyā, devā, manussā, vinipātikā’’ti sattodhikaraṇavasena pavattā sattavidhā aṭṭhavīsatividhā vā, dasahi disāhi disodhikaraṇavasena pavattā dasavidhā ca, ekekāya vā disāya sattādiitthādiaverādibhedena asītādhikacatusatappabhedā ca odhibhopharaṇā veditabbā.
能令不喜等状态生起的那种不如理作意,即是对于不喜等的不如理作意,并以那个为缘。此处用依处格,是表示这些应被断除的不喜等状态。这一解说方式同样适用于此后诸句。“厌倦”:是指对于偏僻的坐卧处以及殊胜法,生起想要改变、厌离的状态。“身扭动”:是指身体以不正常的方式弯转扭曲。显示巴利原文
Yena ayonisomanasikārena aratiādikāni uppajjanti, so aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikāro, tena. Nipphādetabbe hi idaṃ bhummaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Ukkaṇṭhitā pantasenāsanesu adhikusalesu dhammesu ca uppajjanabhāvariñcanā. Kāyavināmanāti kāyassa virūpenākārena nāmanā.
由于它具有发起善法修习的特性,以及令他们对立面枯竭的特性,因此这种从发勤界等生起的精进,被称为“初发勤精进”。正因为仅仅是初始发勤,尚不足以摧伏懈怠、获得力量,所以说它“因出离懈怠而比懈怠本身更强大”。又由于持续生起、反复修习,能带来步步增上的殊胜,变得极为有力,所以又说它“因一步步迈向更高境地,而比先前更强大”。显示巴利原文
Kusaladhammasampaṭipattiyā paṭṭhapanasabhāvatāya, tappaṭipakkhānaṃ visosanasabhāvatāya ca ārambhadhātuādito pavattavīriyanti āha ‘‘paṭhamārambhavīriya’’nti. Yasmā paṭhamārambhamattassa kosajjavidhamanaṃ thāmagamanañca natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kosajjato nikkhantatāya tato balavatara’’nti. Yasmā pana aparāparuppattiyā laddhāsevanaṃ uparūparivisesaṃ āvahantaṃ ativiya thāmagatameva hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavatara’’nti.
“于过量进食中执取相”,指的是在过量进食上,执取昏沉睡眠的相。意思是,去分别“吃这么多会导致昏沉睡眠,吃这么多则不会”,从而生起对昏沉睡眠之因及非因的执取。“白天的太阳光”,应理解为:即使在夜间,也作意于白天所执取的太阳光相。由于头陀支依于精进而立,所以这里说“也依于头陀支的相应谈话”。显示巴利原文
Atibhojane nimittaggāhoti atibhojane thinamiddhassa nimittaggāho, ‘‘ettake bhutte thinamiddhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, ettake na hotī’’ti thinamiddhassa kāraṇākāraṇaggāho hotīti attho. Divā sūriyālokanti divā gahitanimittaṃ sūriyālokaṃ rattiyaṃ manasikarontassapīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Dhutaṅgānaṃ vīriyanissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhutaṅganissitasappāyakathāyapī’’ti.
悔恨也是如此,它以追悔“已作”与“未作”的方式运作,会带来心的不寂静,因此与掉举特征相同。所以说“不寂静”,即是指那种不寂静的状态,究其本质,即是掉举与悔恨。显示巴利原文
Kukkuccampi katākatānusocanavasena pavattamānaṃ cetaso avūpasamāvahatāya uddhaccena samānalakkhaṇamevāti ‘‘avūpasamo nāma avūpasantākāro, uddhaccakukkuccamevetaṃ atthato’’ti vuttaṃ.
对于一位多闻者,当他从文本与义理上审察经教等内容时,因获得义味等利益,心便不散乱;又因他能依教奉行并作如法忏悔,也不对已做或未做之事生起追悔。因此说:“由多闻……掉举与悔恨得以断除。”应当了知,从多闻能断除掉举与悔恨开始,其后的遍问、持律、知理等也能同样断除。此外,亲近佛陀能带来佛陀所行之事,因它能令心寂静,故称为能断除掉举与悔恨。然而不应只着眼于“佛陀本身”,应知持律师及能消除悔恨的善知识们也同样受到称赞。再者,比丘的散乱大多以悔恨为因,所以此处通过“对适合与不适合之物的遍问”等方式,从律的角度特别指出了遍问等。“在已断除的掉举与悔恨中”这一句,是以处格表示分述。因为悔恨与忧相应,故论中说,在未来,它能通过不来道而彻底不再生起。显示巴利原文
Bahussutassa ganthato atthato ca suttādīni vicārentassa atthavedādipaṭilābhasabbhāvato vikkhepo na hoti, yathāvidhipaṭipattiyā yathānurūpapaṭikārappavattiyā ca katākatānusocanañca na hotīti ‘‘bāhusaccenapi…pe… uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyatī’’ti āha. Yadaggena bāhusaccena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati, tadaggena paripucchakatāvinayapakataññutāhipi taṃ pahīyatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Buddhasevitā ca buddhasīlitaṃ āvahatīti cetaso vūpasamakarattā uddhaccakukkuccapahānakārī vuttā. Buddhattaṃ pana anapekkhitvā vinayadharā kukkuccavinodakā kalyāṇamittā vuttāti daṭṭhabbā. Vikkhepo ca bhikkhuno yebhuyyena kukkuccahetuko hotīti ‘‘kappiyākappiyaparipucchāmahulassā’’tiādinā vinayanayeneva paripucchakatādayo niddiṭṭhā. Pahīne uddhaccakukkucceti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Kukkuccassa domanassasahagatattā anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo vutto.
“疑处”(vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā):第一种解释是,“处”(ṭhānīyā)意指于此持续、转起,故“疑处”即作为疑之因、令疑得以产生的法。第二种解释,“处”即是持续,这些法为处,疑在于此,故称疑处;就实义而言,这其实就是疑本身。因为前先之疑是随后生起之疑的同类因,故对后后的疑来说,它成为一种不共的所依处。显示巴利原文
Tiṭṭhati pavattati etthāti ṭhānīyā, vicikicchāya ṭhānīyā vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā, vicikicchāya kāraṇabhūtā dhammā. Tiṭṭhatīti vā ṭhānīyā, vicikicchā ṭhānīyā etissāti vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā, atthato vicikicchā eva. Sā hi purimuppannā parato uppajjanakavicikicchāya sabhāgahetutāya asādhāraṇaṃ.
“善与不善”(kusalākusalā):以善巧所生之义,称为“善”;与其相反,称为“不善”。凡不善者,皆有过、不应行、低劣;凡善者,皆无过、应行、殊胜。即使是善法,若以低劣的意欲等发起,亦属低劣;若以殊胜的意欲等发起,则属殊胜。“黑”(kaṇhā)即暗黑,令心不光辉;“白”(sukkā)即洁白,令心光辉。或者说,因出生于黑类,故称为黑;因出生于白类,故称为白。这些黑与白本身即“有对碍”。因为黑法恰与白法全然相反,故彼此有对碍;同理,白法相对于黑法也有对碍。再者,所谓“黑白”且“有对碍”,即指黑白相对。犹如乐受对于苦受是有对碍的,苦受对于乐受也是有对碍的。显示巴利原文
Kusalākusalāti kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena kusalā, tappaṭipakkhato akusalā. Ye akusalā, te sāvajjā asevitabbā hīnā ca. Ye kusalā, te anavajjā sevitabbā paṇītā ca. Kusalāpi vā hīnehi chandādīhi āraddhā hīnā, paṇītehi paṇītā. Kaṇhāti kāḷakā, cittassa apabhassarabhāvakaraṇā. Sukkāti odātā, cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇā. Kaṇhābhijātihetuto vā kaṇhā, sukkābhijātihetuto sukkā. Te eva sappaṭibhāgā. Kaṇhā hi ujuvipaccanīkatāya sukkehi sappaṭibhāgā, tathā sukkāpi itarehi. Atha vā kaṇhasukkā ca sappaṭibhāgā ca kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā. Sukhā hi vedanā dukkhāyavedanāya sappaṭibhāgā, dukkhā ca vedanā sukhāya vedanāya sappaṭibhāgāti.
虽然通过多闻与广泛请问,八事所摄的疑也能被断除,但其余的疑,皆以对三宝的疑为根,因此论师说「缘于三宝」。因为如果通达了三宝的功德,“于导师有疑”等这样的疑惑便无从生起。而在律中熟练通达者,则能断除那称为“于修学有疑”的疑,所以又说「亦由于律得熟练自在者」。所谓「以净信可决了为胜解增上者」,是指对于可信之事,凭借那种可投入、称为“能入信”的胜解而内心多所决了的人。应知,“决了”即是胜解的生起。或者说,由于信而倾向、随入,就称为决意、胜解。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ bāhusaccaparipucchakatāhi aṭṭhavatthukāpi vicikicchā pahīyati, tathāpi ratanattayavicikicchāmūlikā sesavicikicchāti katvā āha ‘‘tīṇi ratanāni ārabbhā’’ti. Ratanattayaguṇāvabodhe hi ‘‘satthari kaṅkhatī’’ti (dha. sa. 1008, 1123, 1167, 1241, 1263, 1270; vibha. 915) ādivicikicchāya asambhavoti. Vinaye pakataññutā ‘‘sikkhāya kaṅkhatī’’ti (dha. sa. 1008, 1123, 1167, 1241, 1263, 1270; vibha. 915) vuttāya vicikicchāya pahānaṃ karotīti āha ‘‘vinaye ciṇṇavasībhāvassapī’’ti. Okappanīyasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhabahulassāti saddheyyavatthuno anupavisanasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhena adhimuccanabahulassa . Adhimuccanañca adhimokkhuppādanamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saddhāya vā ninnapoṇatā adhimutti adhimokkho.
「于净相、不净相等中」:此句是说“于净相等中、于不净相等中”,其中的“等”字应当各自分别配合。其中,第一个“等”字摄取了瞋相等,第二个“等”字摄取了慈心解脱等。此处其余应说明的内容,皆依前说方式理解即可。显示巴利原文
Subhanimittaasubhanimittādīsūti ‘‘subhanimittādīsu asubhanimittādīsū’’ti ādi-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha paṭhamena ādi-saddena paṭighanimittādīnaṃ saṅgaho, dutiyena mettācetovimuttiādīnaṃ. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttanayamevāti.
蕴品注疏显示巴利原文
Khandhapabbavaṇṇanā
116 所谓“取蕴”,即由那些取,通过成为所缘等方式而应被执取的诸蕴。“如是色”中的“iti”一词与“idaṃ”(此)同义,依此意趣而说“此色”。如此,即从色的自性无余地全摄了一切色,故说:“这就是全部色,除此之外更无他色。”或者,“iti”是表示方式的不变词,因此“iti rūpaṃ”的意思是:依循四大种及所造色等方式,将色的一切差别类别无余地全摄而显示出来。所谓“以自性”,即从变坏的自性,以及从眼等、颜色等的自性来了知。对于受等,也应以同样方式配合理解。例如:“这是受,这就是全部受,除此之外更无他受;如此,他以自性了知受。”而所谓“以自性”,即从领纳的自性,以及乐等的自性等角度来了知。显示巴利原文
116. Upādānehi ārammaṇakaraṇādivasena upādātabbā vā khandhā upādānakkhandā. Iti rūpanti ettha iti-saddo idaṃ-saddena samānatthoti adhippāyenāha ‘‘idaṃ rūpa’’nti. Tayidaṃ sarūpato anavasesapariyādānaṃ hotīti āha – ‘‘ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito paraṃ rūpaṃ atthī’’ti. Itīti vā pakāratthe nipāto, tasmā ‘‘iti rūpa’’nti iminā bhūtupādādivasena yattako rūpassa bhedo, tena saddhiṃ rūpaṃ anavasesato pariyādiyitvā dasseti. Sabhāvatoti ruppanasabhāvato cakkhādivaṇṇādisabhāvato ca. Vedanādīsupīti ettha ‘‘ayaṃ vedanā, ettakā vedanā, na ito paraṃ vedanā atthīti sabhāvato vedanaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā, sabhāvatoti ca anubhavanasabhāvato sātādisabhāvato cāti evamādinā yojetabbaṃ.
处品的注释显示巴利原文
Āyatanapabbavaṇṇanā
117 在“于六内、六外处”这一句中,“chasū”一词应分别与所修饰的词连接,理解为“于六内处、于六外处”。为何这两组内外处都只说为六个呢?这是为了确定六识身生起的门与所缘。具体而言:属于眼识路过程的识身,唯以眼处为生起之门,唯以色处为所缘;其余识身也是如此——耳识路过程的识身以耳处为生起之门、声处为所缘;鼻识路过程的识身以鼻处为生起之门、香处为所缘;舌识路过程的识身以舌处为生起之门、味处为所缘;身识路过程的识身以身处为生起之门、触处为所缘;第六意识身,则以被称为意处的那部分有分意为生起之门,以不共于前五识的法处为所缘。
“眼”:因能看见,故称为眼;意思是它能品尝色,令色显现清晰。
“耳”:因能听闻,故称为耳。
“鼻”:因能嗅,故称为鼻。
“舌”:味因具有维持生命的征象而被称为生命;而呼召、呼唤那个生命者即是舌。
“身”:因是诸应被呵责、有漏法的来源与生起之处(āyo),故称为身。
“意”:因它能了知、识知所缘,故称为意。显示巴利原文
117.Chasu ajjhattikabāhiresūti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.384) ‘‘chasu ajjhattikesu chasu bāhiresu’’ti ‘‘chasū’’ti padaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Kasmā panetāni ubhayāni chaḷeva vuttāni? Chaviññāṇakāyuppattidvārārammaṇavavatthānato. Cakkhuviññāṇavīthiyā pariyāpannassa hi viññāṇakāyassa cakkhāyatanameva uppattidvāraṃ, rūpāyatanameva ca ārammaṇaṃ, tathā itarāni itaresaṃ, chaṭṭhassa pana bhavaṅgamanasaṅkhāto manāyatanekadeso uppattidvāraṃ, asādhāraṇañca dhammāyatanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ. Cakkhatīti cakkhu, rūpaṃ assādeti vibhāveti cāti attho. Suṇātīti sotaṃ. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ. Jīvitanimittatāya raso jīvitaṃ, taṃ jīvitamavhāyatīti jivhā. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyo uppattidesoti kāyo. Munāti ārammaṇaṃ vijānātīti mano. Rūpayati vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti rūpaṃ. Sappati attano paccayehi harīyati sotaviññeyyabhāvaṃ gamīyatīti saddo. Gandhayati attano vatthuṃ sūcetīti gandho. Rasanti taṃ sattā assādentīti raso. Phusīyatīti phoṭṭhabbaṃ. Attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Sabbāni pana āyānaṃ tananādiatthena āyatanāni. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.510-512) taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.510) ca vuttanayena veditabbo.
在“他亦了知眼”这一句中,此处所说的“眼”是指净色眼,并非扶助眼,也不是天眼等,因此说“眼净色”。此乃针对“此眼是依四大种而生起的净色”而作解说。“ca”字是汇集下文所述之义。所谓“依如实的作用与相”,是指依不颠倒的自身作用与相,即依牵引诸色的作用,以及依能接受色法撞击的净色相。在“以眼和色为缘”等经文中,诸色处是作为一个整体集合起来,才成为眼识生起的缘,而非各别单独为缘;为明此理,故采用“于色”这一复数形式的表达。正是基于此说之趣向,虽然此处也用了“了知色”的复数表达,但在解释时,依据色的共性总括一切色,说“外部的四种所造色等”,此即以单数形式显示其义。所谓“依作用与相”,在此应如此连接:依眼识取境的作用,以及依眼根能接受色撞击的相。显示巴利原文
Cakkhuñcapajānātīti ettha cakkhu nāma pasādacakkhu, na sasambhāracakkhu, nāpi dibbacakkhuādikanti āha ‘‘cakkhupasāda’’nti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ cakkhu catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasādo’’ti (dha. sa. 596-599). Ca-saddo vakkhamānatthasamuccayattho. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasenāti aviparītassa attano rasassa ceva lakkhaṇassa ca vasena, rūpesu āviñchanakiccassa ceva rūpābhighātārahabhūtapasādalakkhaṇassa ca vasenāti attho. ‘‘Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe cā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425-426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; 4.54-55; kathā. 465, 467) samuditāniyeva rūpāyatanāni cakkhuviññāṇuppattihetu, na visuṃ visunti imassa atthassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘rūpe cā’’ti puthuvacanaggahaṇaṃ, tāya eva ca desanāgatiyā kāmaṃ idhāpi ‘‘rūpe ca pajānātī’’ti vuttaṃ, rūpabhāvasāmaññena pana sabbaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘bahiddhā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpañcā’’ti ekavacanavasena attho vutto. Sarasalakkhaṇavasenāti cakkhuviññāṇassa visayabhāvakiccassa ceva cakkhupaṭihananalakkhaṇassa ca vasenāti yojetabbaṃ.
“依两者”的意思是:眼是作为亲依止缘的缘,色是作为所缘增上缘与所缘亲依止缘的缘,缘于此二者。虽然这是对经典的注释,但凡是非权宜之说,皆依阿毗达摩而建立,故此处以阿毗达摩的方式开显诸结,说道:“欲贪……乃至无明结”。其中,“欲贪”:对诸欲的贪染即是欲贪。欲本身即是贪,所以称为欲贪。此欲贪以束缚之义而为“结”。为什么称为结?因为此结若存在于某众生中,便将其连结、系缚于轮回。也就是说,它以苦连结众生;或者将诸有与有等连结起来;或者将业与果报连结、系缚起来。因此,名为结。同样地,嗔结等亦应各依其义而解。而此处所说的“依作用与相”,应如此连接:依其不让众生出离轮回的自身作用,以及依上述所说的束缚之相。显示巴利原文
Ubhayaṃ paṭiccāti cakkhuṃ upanissayapaccayavasena paccayabhūtaṃ, rūpe ārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayavasena paccayabhūte ca paṭicca. Kāmañcāyaṃ suttantasaṃvaṇṇanā , nippariyāyakathā nāma abhidhammasannissitā evāti abhidhammanayeneva saṃyojanāni dassento ‘‘kāmarāga…pe… avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti āha. Tattha kāmesu rāgo, kāmo ca so rāgo cāti kāmarāgo, so eva bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojanaṃ. Ayañhi yassa saṃvijjati, taṃ puggalaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ saṃyojeti bandhati, iti dukkhena sattaṃ, bhavādike vā bhavantarādīhi, kammunā vā vipākaṃ saṃyojeti bandhatīti saṃyojanaṃ. Evaṃ paṭighasaṃyojanādīnampi yathārahaṃ attho vattabbo. Sarasalakkhaṇavasenāti ettha pana sattassa vaṭṭato anissajjanasaṅkhātassa attano kiccassa ceva yathāvuttabandhanasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa ca vasenāti yojetabbaṃ.
为了遮止对有之乐味和见之乐味的执着,特别取说欲的乐味。“受乐者”,是指在其中寻求喜乐的人。“欣喜者”,是指依伴喜的渴爱而欢喜的人。这两个词说明了作为强盛欲贪之缘的欲贪生起状态。这一道理同样适用于其余诸结。“此所缘”,是指如此微细、如此难可分别的所缘。所谓“常、恒”,仅是举例,诸如“执取为‘将会断灭、将会毁灭’”等也应包含在内。“希求有者”,指这样渴望的人:“在如此殊胜的福报有中,我们轻易获得了这可爱的所缘,因此未来也应当有这样的福报有。”连接为:“能这样获得”。“妒嫉者”,指心生嫉妒的人。“使他人悭吝者”,指通过不与共享而行悭吝的人。以上这一切都是依前述的九种结而说。显示巴利原文
Bhavassāda-diṭṭhissāda-nivattanatthaṃ kāmassādaggahaṇaṃ. Assādayatoti abhiramantassa. Abhinandatoti sapppītikataṇhāvasena nandantassa. Padadvayenapi balavato kāmarāgassa paccayabhūtā kāmarāguppatti vuttā. Esa nayo sesesupi. Etaṃ ārammaṇanti etaṃ evaṃsukhumaṃ evaṃdubbibhāgaṃ ārammaṇaṃ. Niccaṃ dhuvanti etaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, ‘‘ucchijjissati vinassissatīti gaṇhato’’ti evamādīnampi saṅgaho icchitabbo. Bhavaṃ patthentassāti ‘‘īdise sampattibhave yasmā amhākaṃ idaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ sulabhaṃ jātaṃ, tasmā āyatimpi sampattibhavo bhaveyyā’’ti bhavaṃ nikāmentassa. Evarūpaṃ sakkā laddhunti yojanā. Usūyatoti usūyaṃ issaṃ uppādayato. Aññassa maccharāyatoti aññena asādhāraṇabhāvakaraṇena macchariyaṃ karoto. Sabbeheva yathāvuttehi navahi saṃyojanehi.
“而那因”,即指辨别净相、嗔相等,以及可意、不可意等色所缘,还有与他们所缘相应的如理作意——这些便是各个结生起的因。“以未断除之义而生起的”,这是针对未被镇伏、未被彻底根除、已得生起基础而现起的烦恼说的。现行的生起状态,已由“现行”一词所涵盖。“以什么因”,指以那称为观与止的修习为因。由于此因,能通过彼分断和镇伏断来断除它们。因为嫉与悭能导致堕入恶趣,所以说它们被初道所断除。如果这样,那么经中所说“由于完全断除三种结,成为入流者”,这句话又怎么理解?那是基于经典说法的角度而说。因为经典的说法是随顺教导的。而这里的注释是依阿毗达摩的方法来解释的,因此没有这个过失。“粗重的”,是指粗大的。因为它会频繁生起、缠缚内心,并且程度猛烈。“与细共存的”,指由于没有上述那种粗重性,而达到了细微、不明显的状态。这里也说明了掉举结的不生起,因为它与上述诸结不相离。为了说明对于耳等诸处,依其自性、作用与相来了知,以及对于以它们为缘的诸结的集等了知,这同样应按照已说过的道理来理解,故而说“同理”。显示巴利原文
Tañca kāraṇanti subhanimittapaṭighanimittādivibhāvaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādirūpārammaṇañceva tajjāyonisomanasikārañcāti tassa tassa saṃyojanassa kāraṇaṃ. Avikkhambhitaasamūhatabhūmiladdhuppannataṃ sandhāya ‘‘appahīnaṭṭhena uppannassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vattamānuppannatā samudācāraggahaṇeneva gahitā. Yena kāraṇenāti yena vipassanāsamathabhāvanāsaṅkhātena kāraṇena. Tañhi tassa tadaṅgavasena ceva vikkhambhanavasena ca pahānakāraṇaṃ. Issāmacchariyānaṃ apāyagamanīyatāya paṭhamamaggavajjhatā vuttā. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.241) suttapadaṃ kathanti? Taṃ suttantapariyāyena vuttaṃ. Yathānulomasāsanañhi suttantadesanā, ayaṃ pana abhidhammanayena saṃvaṇṇanāti nāyaṃ doso. Oḷārikassāti thūlassa, yato abhiṇhasamuppattipariyuṭṭhānatibbatāva hoti. Aṇusahagatassāti vuttappakāraoḷārikābhāvena aṇubhāvaṃ sukhumabhāvaṃ gatassa. Uddhaccasaṃyojanassapettha anuppādo vuttoyeva yathāvuttasaṃyojanehi avinābhāvato. Sotādīnaṃ sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānanā, tappaccayānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ uppādādipajānanā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbāti dassento ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti atidisati.
“于自己的法”,指对于自己相续中内处所摄的法,或者对于自己相续中内外两方面的法。在此情况下,“以取内处”的意思是,通过把握内处这一途径,如此一来,便能毫无遗漏地把握自他相续中所有的处。对于“于他人的法”,也是同样的道理。“关于色处”,指具有十一种半分类的色自性的处。“于色蕴”,应依在蕴中所说的方法引出,即引来连接。“于其余的蕴”,指在受蕴、想蕴、行蕴中。所谓“依所说的方法”,这一指摄揭示了如下差别:在色蕴中,是食的集;在识蕴中,是名色的集;在其余的蕴中,是触的集;而其他方面则是共通的。就像在“蕴品”中一样,在“处品”中,圣典里也没有提及出世间法后而予以否定的情况,因此说“出世间法不应被拿来”。显示巴利原文
Attano vā dhammesūti attano ajjhattikāyatanadhammesu, attano ubhayadhammesu vā. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ajjhattikāyatanapariggahaṇenāti ajjhattikāyatanapariggaṇhanamukhenāti attho, evañca anavasesato saparasantānesu āyatanānaṃ pariggaho siddho hoti. Parassa vā dhammesūti etthāpi eseva nayo. Rūpāyatanassāti aḍḍhekādasapabhedarūpasabhāvassa āyatanassa. Rūpakkhandhe vuttanayena nīharitabbāti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Sesakhandhesūti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhesu. Vuttanayenāti iminā atidesena rūpakkhandhe āhārasamudayāti, viññāṇakkhandhe nāmarūpasamudayāti, sesakkhandhesu phassasamudayāti imaṃ visesaṃ vibhāveti, itaraṃ pana sabbattha samānanti. Khandhapabbe viya āyatanapabbepi lokuttaranivattanaṃ pāḷiyaṃ gahitaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘lokuttaradhammā na gahetabbā’’ti.
觉支品的注释显示巴利原文
Bojjhaṅgapabbavaṇṇanā
118 「觉者」:指从烦恼睡眠中觉醒的有情,或指通达诸圣谛的有情。「于诸支」:指于诸因中,或于诸部分中。从生灭智生起开始,即称为安住于正觉之道,故说「从着手修观者开始,即是瑜伽行者,亦即是正觉」。显示巴利原文
118.Bujjhanakasattassāti kilesaniddāya paṭibujjhanakasattassa, ariyasaccānaṃ vā paṭivijjhanakasattassa. Aṅgesūti kāraṇesu, avayavesu vā. Udayabbayañāṇuppādato paṭṭhāya sambodhipaṭipadāyaṃ ṭhito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘āraddhavipassakato paṭṭhāya yogāvacaroti sambodhī’’ti.
「念觉支的生起因缘」一词的含义,应依「疑的生起因缘」处所解释的方法来理解。此因缘即是如理作意。「于此」是指於念中。此处的处格,应理解为「于所应成就的事物上」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā’’ti padassa attho ‘‘vicikicchaṭṭhānīyā’’ti ettha vuttanayena veditabbo. Tanti yonisomanasikāraṃ. Tatthāti satiyaṃ. Nipphādetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ.
念与正知合称「念正知」。或者,以念为先导,对往来等有意义的行相进行把握的智慧,即是念正知。它能成就一切时处之中具足正念的状态,故能令念觉支生起。犹如断除敌对法、修习随顺法能令未生的善法生起,同样地,回避无正念之人、亲近具足正念之人,并于此反复修习,也能令念觉支生起。因此,以「念正知」等显示此义。显示巴利原文
Sati ca sampajaññañca satisampajaññaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.385; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.5.232; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.418). Atha vā satipadhānaṃ abhikkantādisātthakabhāvapariggaṇhanañāṇaṃ satisampajaññaṃ. Taṃ sabbattha satokāribhāvāvahattā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya hoti. Yathā paccanīkadhammānaṃ pahānaṃ anurūpadhammasevanā ca anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya hoti, evaṃ satirahitapuggalavivajjhanā, satokārīpuggalasevanā, tattha ca yuttapayuttatā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya hotīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘satisampajañña’’ntiādinā.
“对诸法的简择”或“于诸法中的简择”,即是法抉择;此法抉择本身即是觉支,故称法抉择觉支。关于“善法、不善法”等应说明的内容,前文已述。其中,“如理作意的数数修习”是指:为了如实了知善等诸法的自性、味、作用等,以正确通达的方式而生起的与智相应的心念。由于作意不颠倒,故称“如理作意”;因心的倾向,其转向也随之成为同类;它屡屡生起,即是“数数修习”。而“为更多生起”是为了令它们一再地生起;“为广博”是为了变得广大;“为圆满”是为了得到充分的修习。显示巴利原文
Dhammānaṃ, dhammesu vā vicayo dhammavicayo, so eva sambojjhaṅgo, tassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa. ‘‘Kusalākusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāroti kusalādīsu taṃtaṃsabhāvarasalakkhaṇādikassa yāthāvato avabujjhanavasena uppanno ñāṇasampayuttacittuppādo. So hi aviparītamanasikāratāya ‘‘yonisomanasikāro’’ti vutto, tadābhogatāya āvajjanāpi taggatikāva, tassa abhiṇhapavattanaṃ bahulīkāro. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunabhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Pāripūriyāti paribrūhanāya.
“好问性”是指深入探究后提出问题的状态。亲近师长之后,深入通达五部尼柯耶及其注释,对于其中成为关键难点之处,一一询问:“尊者,此为何义?其意云何?”对于如此询问蕴、处等义理者,法抉择觉支便会生起。因此说“于蕴、界……乃至……数数修习”。显示巴利原文
Paripucchakatāti pariyogāhetvā pucchakabhāvo. Ācariye payirupāsitvā pañcapi nikāye saha aṭṭhakathāya pariyogāhetvā yaṃ yaṃ tattha gaṇṭhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ, taṃ taṃ ‘‘idaṃ bhante kathaṃ, imassa ko attho’’ti khandhāyatanādiatthaṃ pucchantassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Tenāha ‘‘khandhadhātu…pe… bahulatā’’ti.
“依处清净行”:这里,身体作为心与心所活动的依止处,以及与身体相关的衣物等,在此称作“诸依处”。为使心愉悦而令这些依处清净,即是依处清净行。因此说“内与外”等。“有过患之染”是指由风等引发的过患染污。“被汗与尘垢所污”即被汗水及名为“泥垢”的身体污垢所染污。句中的“及”字也包含了其他令身体不适的事物。“或坐卧具”:通过“或”字,应知包含了钵等物品。当这些物品不净时,或当它们成为不净的所缘时——为何对于致力于修行者,这些会成为所缘?这是就偶尔生起的心念而说的,因为这类心念会导致心一境性不清净。对于作为所依等缘的心与心所而言,“智亦”:以“亦”字总括。因此,不仅依处不清净,智也会不清净;这表明依处的清净与否会导致依存于它的心与心所清净与否,正如所缘的不清净导致能缘的不清净一样。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvisadakiriyāti ettha cittacetasikānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato sarīraṃ, tappaṭibaddhāni cīvarādīni ca idha ‘‘vatthūnī’’ti adhippetāni. Tāni yathā cittassa sukhāvahāni honti, tathā karaṇaṃ tesaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhattikabāhirāna’’ntiādi. Ussannadosanti vātādiussannadosaṃ. Sedamalamakkhitanti sedena ceva jallikāsaṅkhātena sarīramalena ca makkhitaṃ. Ca-saddena aññampi sarīrassa pīḷāvahaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Senāsanaṃ vāti vā-saddena pattādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Avisade sati, visayabhūte vā. Kathaṃ bhāvanamanuyuttassa tāni visayo? Antarantarā pavattanakacittuppādavasenevaṃ vuttaṃ. Te hi cittuppādā cittekaggatāya aparisuddhabhāvāya saṃvattanti. Cittacetasikesu nissayādipaccayabhūtesu. Ñāṇampīti pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena na kevalaṃ taṃ vatthuyeva, atha kho tasmiṃ aparisuddhe ñāṇampi aparisuddhaṃ hotīti nissayāparisuddhiyā taṃnissitāparisuddhi viya visayassa aparisuddhatāya visayīnaṃ aparisuddhiṃ dasseti.
“令平衡”(samabhāvakaraṇa)是指在作用上无不足、无超出的状态。当因缘和合,在所应信的事物上,胜解的作用变得强烈而敏锐,由于慧不清晰,以及精进等变得迟缓,信根便强了。因此说“其他诸根弱”。所以,是由于信根强而其他根弱。“不让它堕入懈怠,策励相应法,给予资助,这就是策励;策励本身的作用,就是策励的作用。”此句应结合“不能作”来理解。前往所缘后安住,或不舍离,即是“现前”。能对治散乱,或由此而使相应法不散乱,就是“不散乱”。如同眼对于色,由于被强大的信根所征服,便不能履行以如实见境之自相为特征的“见”的作用。对于同时生起的诸法,若要令其各自主宰而同时运转,唯有依靠诸根的一味性才能成就其义,无法以其他方式达成。显示巴利原文
Samabhāvakaraṇanti kiccato anūnādhikabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yathāpaccayaṃ saddheyyavatthusmiṃ adhimokkhakiccassa paṭutarabhāvena paññāya avisadatāya vīriyādīnañca sithilatādinā saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘itarāni mandānī’’ti. Tatoti tasmā saddhindriyassa balavabhāvato itaresañca mandattā. Kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sampayuttadhammānaṃ paggaṇhanaṃ anubalappadānaṃ paggaho, paggahova kiccaṃ paggahakiccaṃ. ‘‘Kātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhānaṃ, anissajjanaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ. Vikkhepapaṭipakkho, yena vā sampayuttā avikkhittā honti, so avikkhepo. Rūpagataṃ viya cakkhunā yena yāthāvato visayasabhāvaṃ passati, taṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti balavatā saddhindriyena abhibhūtattā. Sahajātadhammesu indaṭṭhaṃ kārentānaṃ sahapavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ ekarasatāvaseneva atthasiddhi, na aññathā.
“因此”(tasmā)是以前述道理为因,回过来审视。“彼”(taṃ)指信根。“通过观察法的自相”(dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena),是说对于因过分相信所信对象的殊胜等功德,致使信根过于强大的人,应如其实际,通过审察缘与缘所生等差别,令信根减弱。若依此法性规律,如实地把握法的本然滋味,慧的作用便会特别强盛,此时胜解就不会极为宽广。在作为主导法的信与慧中,信强时慧即弱,慧强时信即弱。所以佛典说“通过观察该法的本然性质……应当使它减弱”。“通过不如彼之作意”(tathā amanasikārena),意思是,不以那种会使修行者信根变强的方式去投入修行。此处,信根变得过强有两种情形:一是由于自身之缘的差别,导致其作用特别突出;二是由于精进等诸根的作用太弱。其中,第一种情形已经说明了减弱的方法。至于第二种情形,则不应依那种使精进等作用变弱、而令信根变强的作意方式,而应依那种能使精进等作用变得敏锐的作意方式。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti vuttamevatthaṃ kāraṇabhāvena paccāmasati. Tanti saddhindriyaṃ. Dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇenāti yassa saddheyyavatthuno uḷāratādiguṇe adhimuccanassa sātisayappavattiyā saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tassa paccayapaccayuppannatādivibhāgato yāthāvato vīmaṃsanena. Evañhi evaṃdhammatānayena sabhāvasarasato pariggayhamāne savipphāro adhimokkho na hoti ‘‘ayaṃ imesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvo’’ti parijānanavasena paññābyāpārassa sātisayattā. Dhuriyadhammesu hi yathā saddhāya balavabhāve paññāya mandabhāvo hoti, evaṃ paññāya balavabhāve saddhāya mandabhāvo hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena…pe… hāpetabba’’nti. Tathāamanasikārenāti yenākārena bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tenākārena bhāvanāya ananuyuñjanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idha duvidhena saddhindriyassa balavabhāvo attano vā paccayavisesavasena kiccuttariyato vīriyādīnaṃ vā mandakiccatāya. Tattha paṭhamavikappe hāpanavidhi dassito, dutiyavikappe pana yathā manasikaroto vīriyādīnaṃ mandakiccatāya saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena, vīriyādīnaṃ paṭukiccabhāvāvahena manasikārena saddhindriyaṃ tehi samarasaṃ karontena hāpetabbaṃ. Iminā nayena sesindriyesupi hāpanavidhi veditabbo.
“瓦迦离长老的事”(Vakkalittheravatthu):这位具寿原本是信胜解者,已积累修行资粮,平日便只求亲见导师的色身而住。导师教诫他说:“瓦迦离,你看见这副腐烂的色身有什么用?瓦迦离,凡是见到法的人,就是见到了我”等等,并为他指定了业处。但他仍不肯精勤用功,被导师遣离后,为了投崖自杀,便爬上了一处断崖。显示巴利原文
Vakkalittheravatthūti so hi āyasmā saddhādhimuttāya katādhikāro satthu rūpakāyadassanapasuto eva hutvā viharanto satthārā ‘‘kiṃ te, vakkali, iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena, yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.87) ovaditvā kammaṭṭhāne niyojitopi taṃ ananuyuñjanto paṇāmito attānaṃ vinipātetuṃ papātaṭṭhānaṃ abhiruhi. Atha naṃ satthā yathānisinnova obhāsagissajjanena atthānaṃ dassetvā –
比丘满怀欢喜,净信佛陀的教法;
他将证得寂静的境界——诸行止息的安乐。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pāmojjabahulo bhikkhu, pasanno buddhasāsane; Adhigacche padaṃ santaṃ, saṅkhārūpasamaṃ sukha’’nti. (dha. pa. 381);
世尊开示了这首偈颂后,对瓦迦离说:“来,瓦迦离!”他便如同被那甘露灌顶一般,欣喜踊跃,开始着手修观。然而,由于信根过强,他未能进入观道。世尊了知这一情况后,为使他的诸根达到平衡,便为他净化业处之后,重新授予了他。他依着导师所授的方法,勤奋修习观,次第行于圣道,证得了阿拉汉果。因此说:“在此,瓦迦离长老的事是一个例证。”显示巴利原文
Gāthaṃ vatvā ‘‘ehivakkalī’’ti āha. So tena amateneva abhisitto haṭṭhatuṭṭho hutvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapesi, saddhāya pana balavabhāvato vipassanāvīthiṃ na otarati. Taṃ ñatvā bhagavā tassa indriyasamattapaṭipādanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā adāsi. So satthārā dinnanayena vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassana’’nti.
「其他作用的区别」指现前作用等各种不同作用的差别。「轻安等」借助“等”字,涵盖了定觉支与舍觉支。「应当让它减弱」:如同信根过强时,可通过观察法的自相使之减弱;若精进根过强,则应修习轻安等觉支来令它减弱,因为轻安属于定的范畴。如此,轻安等觉支在定根过强时,能防止落入懈怠;在精进根过强时,能防止落入掉举,从而恰如其分地使之减弱。因此,论中说“应当通过修习轻安等让它减弱”。「首那长老的事」指身体娇嫩的首那长老的故事。这位具寿从导师跟前领受业处之后,住在清凉林中,他心想:“我的身体如此娇嫩,不可能舒舒服服地就证得究竟安乐。就算让身体疲劳受苦,也应当修行沙门法。”于是他只行站立与经行,专心致志地精勤。纵然脚底磨出水泡,他仍放下身体的感受,强行策励精进。由于过度激发精进,他反而无法证得殊胜的成就。导师来到那里,用调琴的譬喻来教诫他。显示巴利原文
Itarakiccabhedanti upaṭṭhānādikiccavisesaṃ. Passaddhādīti ādi-saddena samādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgānaṃ saṅgaho. Hāpetabbanti yathā saddhindriyassa balavabhāvo dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena hāyati, evaṃ vīriyindriyassa adhimattatā passaddhiādibhāvanāya hāyati samādhipakkhiyattā tassā. Tathāhi sā samādhindriyassa adhimattataṃ kosajjapātato rakkhantī vīriyādibhāvanā viya vīriyindriyassa adhimattataṃ uddhaccapātato rakkhantī ekaṃsato hāpeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabba’’nti. Soṇattherassa vatthūti sukhumālasoṇattherassa vatthu. So hi āyasmā, satthu, santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sītavane viharanto ‘‘mama sarīraṃ sukhumālaṃ, na ca sakkā sukheneva sukhaṃ adhigantuṃ, kāyaṃ kilametvāpi samaṇadhammo kātabbo’’ti ṭhānacaṅkamameva adhiṭṭhāya padhānamanuyuñjanto pādatalesu phoṭesu uṭṭhitesupi vedanaṃ ajjhupekkhitvā daḷhavīriyaṃ karonto accāraddhavīriyatāya visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi. Satthā tattha gantvā vīṇūpamovādena ovaditvā vīriyasamatāyojanavidhiṃ dassento kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā gijjhakūṭaṃ gato. Theropi satthārā dinnanayena vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā bhāvento vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘soṇattherassa vatthu dassetabba’’nti. Sesesupīti satisamādhipaññindriyesupi.
所谓「均等」,是指信与慧彼此不多不少、均衡的状态,定与精进也是如此。正如信与慧各自都是主导法,在作用上它们互不逾越的这种平衡尤其应当希求,因为它们职能均等,安止才能成功;同样地,定与精进分别有导致懈怠和掉举的倾向,两者若能处于均等的状态、相互支持,相应的法就不会落入两个极端,安止才能正确地成就。从「强信者」等语句开始,是以反显的方式证成这个道理。意思是:一个信力强而智慧不明晰的人,就成了「盲信者」,而不是「审察净信者」。他会在不应信之处生信,正如外道弟子那样,会落入「欺诈分」,即「诡诈分」。反之,信弱而慧过度驰骋的人,会被似是而非的道理所蒙蔽,编造出“不必实际施舍财物,仅凭心想便能成就布施福业”之类的说法。其心已被干枯的思辩所撕裂,听不进智慧之教。显示巴利原文
Samatanti saddhāpaññānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anūnānadhikabhāvaṃ, tathā samādhivīriyānaṃ. Yathā hi saddhāpaññānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ dhuriyadhammabhūtānaṃ kiccato aññamaññānātivattanaṃ visesato icchitabbaṃ, yato nesaṃ samadhuratāya appanā sampajjati, evaṃ samādhivīriyānaṃ kosajjuddhaccapakkhikānaṃ samarasatāya sati aññamaññūpatthambhanato sampayuttadhammānaṃ antadvayapātābhāvena sammadeva appanā ijjhatīti. Balavasaddhotiādi vuttassevatthassa byatirekamukhena samatthanaṃ. Tassattho – yo balavatiyā saddhāya samannāgato avisadañāṇo, so mudhāpasanno hoti,na aveccappasanno. Tathā hi so avatthusmiṃ pasīdati seyyathāpi titthiyasāvakā. Kerāṭikapakkhanti sāṭheyyapakkhaṃ bhajati. Saddhāhīnāya paññāya atidhāvanto ‘‘deyyavatthupariccāgena vinā cittuppādamattenapi dānamayaṃ puññaṃ hotī’’tiādīni parikappeti hetupatirūpakehi vañcito, evaṃbhūto ca sukkhatakkaviluttacitto paṇḍitānaṃ vacanaṃ nādiyati, saññattiṃ na gacchati. Tenāha ‘‘bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hotī’’ti. Yathā cettha saddhāpaññānaṃ aññamaññaṃ samabhāvo atthāvaho, anatthāvaho visamabhāvo, evaṃ samādhivīriyānaṃ aññamaññaṃ avikkhepāvaho samabhāvo, itaro vikkhepāvaho cāti. Kosajjaṃ adhibhavati, tena appanaṃ na pāpuṇātīti adhippāyo . Uddhaccaṃ adhibhavatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tadubhayanti saddhāpaññādvayaṃ samādhivīriyadvayañca. Samaṃ kātabbanti samarasaṃ kātabbaṃ.
「定业处者」指修习止业处的人。「这样」是指在信根稍偏强的情况下,这就是它的意思。「信解」的意思是,他不起这样的念头——“仅凭一个‘地、地’的作意,怎么能生起禅那呢?”而是相信:“正自觉者所教导的方法必定会成就”,如此生起信心。「投入」的意思,并非真的进入所缘,而是以胜解的方式认可、跃进。一境性应当强,因为禅那是以定为要的。「二者」指定与慧二者。对于修定业处的人来说,由于定极为显著,慧也同样应显著,因此这里说“亦以等持”,意即要以均等的状态。这里所说的「安止」是指世间的安止,正因如此,论师才用不确定的口吻说“也是有的”。至于出世间的安止,则必须依靠定慧二者的均等才能实现。正如经中所说:“他修习止与观,两者并驾并驱。”如果说信与慧、定与精进特别要求均等,那么念又该如何呢?答曰:然而,念于一切时中皆应强。显示巴利原文
Samādhikammikassāti samathakammaṭṭhānikassa. Evanti evaṃ sante, saddhāya thokaṃ balavabhāve satīti attho. Saddahantoti ‘‘pathavīti manasikāramattena kathaṃ jhānuppattī’’ti acintetvā ‘‘addhā sammāsambuddhena vuttavidhi ijjhissatī’’ti saddahanto saddhaṃ janento. Okappentoti ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā viya adhimuccanavasena avakappento pakkhandanto. Ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati samādhippadhānattā jhānassa. Ubhinnanti samādhipaññānaṃ. Samādhikammikassa samādhino adhimattatāya paññāya adhimattatāpi icchitabbāti āha ‘‘samatāyapī’’ti, samabhāvenapīti attho. Appanāti lokiyaappanā. Tathā hi ‘‘hotiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati. Lokuttarappanā pana tesaṃ samabhāveneva icchitā. Yathāha ‘‘samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (a. ni. 4.17; paṭi. ma. 2.5). Yadi visesato saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānañca samatā icchitā, kathaṃ satīti āha ‘‘sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭatī’’ti. Sabbatthāti līnuddhaccapakkhikesu pañcasu indriyesu. Uddhaccapakkhikekadese gaṇhanto ‘‘saddhāvīriyapaññāna’’nti āha. Aññathā pīti ca gahetabbā siyā. Tathā hi ‘‘kosajjapakkhikena samādhinā’’icceva vuttaṃ, na ‘‘passaddhisamādhiupekkhāhī’’ti. Sāti sati. Sabbesu rājakammesu niyutto sabbakammiko. Tenāti tenā sabbattha icchitabbatthena kāraṇena. Āha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Sabbattha niyuttā sabbatthikā, sabbena vā līnuddhaccapakkhiyena bojjhaṅgena atthetabbā sabbatthiyā, sabbatthiyāva sabbatthikā. Cittanti kusalacittaṃ. Tassa hi sati paṭisaraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya. Tenāha ‘‘ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā’’tiādi.
“对蕴等分别尚未深入的智慧”,是指即使于教理多闻,其慧尚未安立于蕴、处等分别中的人。因为亲近多闻者,能带来闻所成慧。即使是初修观的人,由于他安住在修所成慧当中,也决然可称为有慧者,故说“等慧……补特伽罗亲近”。由于所知法是甚深的,能简别它的慧也被视为甚深,所以说“在甚深的蕴等中运作的深慧”。那个所知必须由此慧所行践,所以是深智行处;或者,那慧在那里依于分别而转起,即是深智行处,对它进行省察便为“深慧之分别观察”。正如念达圆满者即是阿拉汉本身,慧达圆满者同样如此,所以说“以阿拉汉道,修习达至圆满”。于精进等,也是同样的说法。显示巴利原文
Khandhādibhede anogāḷhapaññānanti pariyattibāhusaccavasenapi khandhāyatanādīsu appatiṭṭhitabuddhīnaṃ. Bahussutasevanā hi sutamayañāṇāvahā. Taruṇavipassanāsamaṅgīpi bhāvanāmayañāṇe ṭhitattā ekaṃsato paññavā eva nāma hotīti āha ‘‘samapaññāsa…pe… puggalasevanā’’ti. Ñeyyadhammassa gambhīrabhāvavasena tapparicchedakañāṇassa gambhīrabhāvaggahaṇanti āha ‘‘gambhīresu khandhādīsu pavattāya gambhīrapaññāyā’’ti. Tañhi ñeyyaṃ tādisāya paññāya caritabbato gambhīrañāṇacariyaṃ, tassā vā paññāya tattha pabhedato pavatti gambhīrañāṇacariyā, tassā paccavekkhaṇāti āha ‘‘gambhīrapaññāya pabhedapaccavekkhaṇā’’ti. Yathā sativepullappatto nāma arahā eva, evaṃ so eva paññāvepullappattopīti āha ‘‘arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotī’’ti. Vīriyādīsupi eseva nayo.
“将烧红的铁橛置于手中”等(《中部》3.250,267;《增支部》3.36)所说,对于已生地狱的有情,五种束缚业处通常最先施行,又因在《天使经》等中,此苦最初被说到,故说“从五种束缚业处开始”。“以车乘等时”的“等”字,还含摄其他为人、畜生逼恼之时。“一佛间隔”是就那些在饿鬼中辗转不断受生的有情而言;或者,某些饿鬼亦如某些畜生,有如是长的寿命。正因如此,黑龙王(Kāḷo nāgarājā)曾见过四位佛陀的容貌。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattaṃ ayokhilaṃ hatthe gamentī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.250, 267; a. ni. 3.36) pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇaṃ niraye nibbattasattassa yebhuyyena sabbapaṭhamaṃ karontīti devadūtasuttādīsu tassā ādito vuttattā ca āha ‘‘pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇato paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Sakaṭavāhanādikāleti ādi-saddena tadaññaṃ manussehi tiracchānehi ca vibādhiyamānakālaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ekaṃ buddhantaranti idaṃ aparāparaṃ petesuyeva uppajjanakasattavasena vuttaṃ, ekaccānaṃ vā petānaṃ ekaccatiracchānānaṃ viya tathā dīghāyukabhāvato. Tathā hi kāḷo nāgarājā catunnaṃ buddhānaṃ adhigatarūpadassano.
“如是见功德者”,指能如此见一切出世间与世间殊胜成就唯依精进而得,恒常于精进中见功德之人。“行道”指连同前行的、导向涅槃的圣道修行之路。对比丘而言,为了出离轮回,这是应行、应修之道,故称为行道。“多为强身事者”,指专心以种种方法强健身体之人。“团食”即国土团食。自己如法修行,能令供养资具的施主们获得大果报,以这样的方式对团食、对乞食作回报与恭敬,便名“敬团食”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ānisaṃsadassāvinoti vīriyāyatto eva sabbo lokuttaro lokiyo ca visesādhigamoti evaṃ vīriye ānisaṃsadassanasīlassa. Gamanavīthinti sapubbabhāgaṃ nibbānagāminiṃ ariyamaggapaṭipadaṃ. Sā hi bhikkhuno vaṭṭanissaraṇāya gantabbā paṭipajjitabbā paṭipadāti katvā gamanavīthi nāma. Kāyadaḷhībahuloti yathā tathā kāyassa daḷhīkammapasuto. Piṇḍanti raṭṭhapiṇḍaṃ. Paccayadāyakānaṃ attani kārassa attano sammāpaṭipattiyā mahapphalabhāvassa karaṇena piṇḍassa bhikkhāya paṭipūjanā piṇḍāpacāyanaṃ.
「取出」指从钵袋中取出。「闻彼声已」:长老正站在茅庐门口,凭他的五神通,以天耳通听见了那位优婆夷所说的话。人间成就、天界成就,最终是涅槃成就,这是三种成就。「你能否给予?」:长老在心中独自省思:‘你能否以布施所成的功德与服务所成的功德,借殊胜福田之成就,使我辗转获得人间与天界的成就,最终也能给予我涅槃的成就呢?’「作微笑」:当他如此省察完毕,心想‘我已轻易超越了轮回之苦’,由这生起的欢喜力,便展露了微笑。显示巴利原文
Nīharantoti pattatthavikato nīharanto. Taṃ saddaṃ sutvāti taṃ upāsikāya vacanaṃ paṇṇasāladvāre ṭhitova pañcābhiññatāya dibbasotena sutvā. Manussasampatti dibbasampatti ante nibbānasampattīti tisso sampattiyo. Dātuṃ sakkhissasīti ‘‘tayi katena dānamayena veyyāvaccamayena ca puññakammena khettavisesabhāvūpagamanena aparāparaṃ devamanussasampattiyo ante nibbānasampattiñca dātuṃ sakkhissasī’’ti thero attānaṃ pucchati. Sitaṃ karontovāti ‘‘akiccheneva mayā vaṭṭadukkhaṃ samatikkanta’’nti paccavekkhaṇāvasāne sañjātapāmojjavasena sitaṃ karonto eva.
「邪行者」指因违犯族姓法、家族法等而行为不正当的人。就像一个行为不正当的儿子,由于自身这种不正当的行为,成了宗族传承之外的人,不能分享父亲留下的遗产;同样地,懈怠者由于自身的懈怠,行为不正当,也不能分享应从大师处获得的圣财遗产。只有精进努力的人,才因行为正当而有份获得。因此,「精进觉支生起」一句是与此相联系的。在一切处皆是如此。显示巴利原文
Vippaṭipannanti jātidhammakuladhammādilaṅghanena asammāpaṭipannaṃ. Evaṃ yathā asammāpaṭipanno putto tāya eva asammāpaṭipattiyā kulasantānato bāhiro hutvā pitu santikā dāyajjassa na bhāgī, evaṃ kusītopi teneva kusītabhāvena asammāpaṭipanno satthu santikā laddhabbaariyadhanadāyajjassa na bhāgī. Āraddhavīriyova labhati sammāpaṭipajjanato. Uppajjati vīriyasambojjhaṅgoti yojanā. Evaṃ sabbattha.
「大」指以戒等功德而伟大、广远、不与常人共。而他的这般功德之伟大,震动一万世界,在世间彰明昭著,为了显示这一点,所以说「尊师」等语。显示巴利原文
Mahāti sīlādīhi guṇehi mahanto vipulo anaññasādhāraṇo. Taṃ panassa guṇamahattaṃ dasasahassilokadhātukampanena loke pākaṭanti dassento ‘‘satthuno hī’’tiādimāha.
由于在世尊教法中出家之人,通过出家而成为释迦子,因此为显示佛子的身份,便说“不混杂……”等。显示巴利原文
Yasmā satthusāsane pabbajitassa pabbajjupagamena sakyaputtiyabhāvo sampajāyati, tasmā buddhaputtabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘asambhinnāyā’’tiādimāha.
“懈怠补特伽罗之远离”,是指远离那些懒惰、对修行连名字也不知道、多作强身之事、饱食之后耽着于床座之乐等,以及作畜生论的那些补特伽罗。而依“日夜经行、宴坐”等教导,为展开修行而精进努力、行持坚固的人,常常亲近他们,即是“勤精进补特伽罗之亲近”。因此说“填满腹已”等。然而,在《清净道论》中,并未取“生族伟大之省察”和“同梵行者伟大之省察”这两项,而是取了“了除惛沉睡眠性”和“正勤之省察”这两项。其中,见功德一项因认识到世间出世间的殊胜证得完全依赖精进,故已含摄正勤之省察。了除惛沉睡眠性,也因其随顺精进而被包含在内;对于策励精进的人,了除惛沉睡眠性自然便能成就。于此应知:了除惛沉睡眠、懈怠补特伽罗之远离、勤精进补特伽罗之亲近以及倾向于精进,这四项是以破除对立面、提供资助缘的方式令精进觉支生起;而恶趣省察等,则是以激励的方式令其生起。显示巴利原文
Alasānaṃ bhāvanāya nāmamattampi ajānantānaṃ kāyadaḷhībahulānaṃ yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhādianuyuñjanakānaṃ tiracchānakathikānaṃ puggalānaṃ dūrato vajjanā kusītapuggalaparivajjanā. ‘‘Divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.423; 3.75; saṃ. ni. 4.120; a. ni. 3.16; vibha. 519; mahāni. 161) bhāvanārambhavasena āraddhavīriyānaṃ daḷhaparakkamānaṃ kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamanā āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanā. Tenāha – ‘‘kucchiṃ pūretvā’’tiādi. Visuddhimagge pana jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇā sabrahmacārimahattapaccavekkhaṇāti idaṃ dvayaṃ na gahitaṃ, thinamiddhavinodanatā sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇatāti idaṃ dvayaṃ gahitaṃ. Tattha ānisaṃsadassāvitāya eva sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇā gahitā hoti lokiyalokuttaravisesādhigamassa vīriyāyattatādassanabhāvato. Thinamiddhavinodanaṃ tadadhimuttatāya eva gahitaṃ, vīriyuppādane yuttappayuttassa thinamiddhavinodanaṃ atthasiddhameva. Tattha thinamiddhavinodana-kusītapuggalaparivajjana-āraddhavīriyapuggalasevana-tadadhimuttatā paṭipakkhavidhamanapaccayūpasaṃhāravasena, apāyapaccavekkhaṇādayo samuttejanavasena vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādakā daṭṭhabbā.
因为前生的喜是后生喜的因,所以说“喜即是喜觉支处之法”。而对此喜的屡屡转起,依其多重性而用复数表述;依其如何生起而修习,即是令它生起的作意。显示巴利原文
Purimuppannā pīti parato uppajjanakapītiyā kāraṇabhāvato ‘‘pītiyeva pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā’’ti vuttā, tassā pana bahuso pavattiyā puthuttaṃ upādāya bahuvacananiddeso, yathā sā uppajjati, evaṃ paṭipatti, tassā uppādakamanasikāro.
佛随念以近行定为究竟,故说「乃至近行」。「遍满全身」是指由喜等起的殊胜色法遍满全身。随念法功德者,喜觉支也会生起,遍满全身而达近行。同样,在其余的随念以及能令生净信的经典观察中,也应如此配合理解,因为那些也是解脱处,属于同类。「等至……现行」等,是对寂止随念的说明。因为对于诸行,仅在部分寂止时,智慧也能如同在完全寂止时那样转起,所以这种修习作意能成为镇伏烦恼、带来近行定的力量;具足如此的喜与喜悦,便成为喜觉支生起之因。对于能令生净信的事物,由于缺乏净信的润泽,心如同谷壳般坚硬,这种粗涩性当知是由不恭敬的行为所显现的,故说「由不恭敬行而显示粗涩性」。显示巴利原文
Buddhānussatiyā upacārasamādhiniṭṭhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘yāva upacārā’’ti. Sakalasarīraṃ pharamānoti pītisamuṭṭhānehi paṇītarūpehi sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno. Dhammaguṇe anussarantassapi yāva upacārā sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno pītisambojjhaṅgo uppajjatīti. Evaṃ sesaanussatīsu pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇāyañca yojetabbaṃ tassāpi vimuttāyatanabhāvena taggatikattā. Samāpattiyā…pe… samudācarantīti idañca upasamānussatidassanaṃ. Saṅkhārānañhi sappadesavūpasamepi nippadesavūpasame viya tathā paññāya pavattito bhāvanāmanasikāro kilesavikkhambhanasamattho hutvā upacārasamādhiṃ āvahanto tathārūpapītisomanassasamannāgato pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya hotīti. Pasādanīyesu ṭhānesu pasādasinehābhāvena thusasamahadayatā lūkhatā, sā tattha ādaragāravākaraṇena viññāyatīti āha ‘‘asakkaccakiriyāya saṃsūcitalūkhabhāve’’ti.
以身心的不安止息为相的轻安,即是轻安觉支;这是对轻安觉支的说明。显示巴利原文
Kāyacittadarathavūpasamalakkhaṇā passaddhi eva passaddhisambojjhaṅgo, tassa passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa.
「享用殊胜食物的惯行」是指享用殊胜且适宜的食物之惯行。由「享受适宜气候与威仪之乐」应理解为采取适合的气候与威仪。因为这三种适宜,在受用时能带来身体的堪任,进而带来心的堪任,从而成为两种轻安之因。众生无因承受的乐与苦,是一边;认为由自在天等不平等因所造,是另一边。不趋近此二边,而依各自的业力生起,这便是中道。具足中舍的运用,这状态即是「中舍运用性」。因为这些放弃紧张的身体,成为轻安身体的因,带来两种轻安。由此应知,说明了远离紧张身之人与亲近轻安身之人能成就此轻安。显示巴利原文
Paṇītabhojanasevanatāti paṇītasappāyabhojanasevanatā. Utuiriyāpathasukhaggahaṇena sappāyautuiriyāpathaggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tañhi tividhaṃ sappāyaṃ seviyamānaṃ kāyassa kallatāpādanavasena cittassa kallataṃ āvahantaṃ duvidhāyapi passaddhiyā kāraṇaṃ hoti. Ahetukaṃ sattesu labbhamānaṃ sukhaṃ dukkhanti ayameko anto, issarādivisamahetukanti pana ayaṃ dutiyo, ete ubho ante anupagamma yathāsakaṃ kammunā hotīti ayaṃ majjhimā paṭipatti. Majjhatto payogo yassa hoti majjhattapayogo, tassa bhāvo majjhattapayogatā. Ayañhi pahāya sāraddhakāyataṃ passaddhakāyatāya kāraṇaṃ hontī passaddhidvayaṃ āvahati, eteneva sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanapassaddhakāyapuggalavasenānaṃ tadāvahanatā saṃvaṇṇitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
通过随观已得定时的样态而被辨认出来的先前所起的‘止’,即是‘止相’。由于在种种所缘中流转而具有种种端绪,故称为‘散乱’,即掉举。同样地,它被说成以不安住为味、以迷乱为现起。因为缺乏统一性,所以成为散乱的对立面,名为‘不散乱’,就是定。此本身即是相,正如前文所说。因此说‘以不散乱义,为不散乱相’。显示巴利原文
Yathāsamāhitākārasallakkhaṇavasena gayhamāno purimuppanno samatho eva samathanimittaṃ. Nānārammaṇe paribbhamanena vividhaṃ aggaṃ etassāti byaggo, vikkhepo. Tathā hi so anavaṭṭhānaraso bhantatāpaccupaṭṭhāno ca vutto. Ekaggatābhāvato byaggapaṭipakkhoti abyaggo, samādhi. So eva nimittanti pubbe viya vattabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘avikkhepaṭṭhena ca abyagganimitta’’nti.
‘事清净之行’与‘诸根均等的成就’,已说为能带来慧。它们也能带来定,正因其能带来定,所以也能带来慧,由此故说‘事清净……应知’。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvisadakiriyā indriyasamattapaṭipādanā ca paññāvahā vuttā, samādhānāvahāpi tā honti samādhānāvahabhāveneva paññāvahabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vatthuvisada…pe… veditabbā’’ti.
由于‘作’与‘修习’的善巧密不可分,而‘守护’的善巧又以它们为根本,因此说‘相善巧,即是把握遍相之善巧’。这里的‘遍相’只是举例,应当了知:对于不净相等任何一种能证得禅那的相,其把握的善巧,即是相善巧。显示巴利原文
Karaṇabhāvanākosallānaṃ avinābhāvato, rakkhaṇakosallassa ca tammūlakattā ‘‘nimittakusalatā nāma kasiṇanimittassa uggahaṇakusalatā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Kasiṇanimittassāti ca nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Asubhanimittassādikassapi hi yassa kassaci jhānuppattinimittassa uggahaṇakosallaṃ nimittakusalatā evāti.
“由过于松懈的精进等”中的“等”字,包含了慧的运用微弱与喜悦不足。对于那沉滞之心的“策励”,即是通过发起法择觉支等,将沉滞的心从沉没中提振出来。世尊曾这样说:显示巴利原文
Atisithilavīriyatādīhīti ādi-saddena paññāpayogamandataṃ pamodavekallañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tassa paggahaṇanti tassa līnassa cittassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādisamuṭṭhāpanena layāpattito samuddharaṇaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“诸比丘,当心沉滞时,那时便是修习法择觉支的时机,是修习精进觉支的时机,是修习喜觉支的时机。为什么呢?诸比丘,因为沉滞的心,藉由这些法便能善加策励。诸比丘,譬如有人想点燃一小堆火,他在那里放入干草、干牛粪、干木柴,用口吹风,又不撒上尘土。诸比丘,那人能否点燃那堆小火呢?能的。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya . Taṃ kissa hetu? Līnaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi susamuṭṭhāpayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca gomayāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca kaṭṭhāni pakkhipeyya, mukhavātañca dadeyya, na ca paṃsukena okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletunti? Evaṃ sante’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).
此处应当了知:法择觉支等觉支的修习,是依各自相应的“食”为缘而生起,也就是将它们“策励发起”。紧接着下文便对此作了阐明。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā samuṭṭhāpanāti veditabbaṃ, sā anantaraṃ vibhāvitā eva.
“由过度精进等”:此处的“等”字,还包括了慧根作用强猛之人的过度欢喜与雀跃。“抑制彼”:即针对那颗掉举心,通过策发定觉支等予以对治,从而制止其陷入掉举。世尊亦曾如是说:显示巴利原文
Accāraddhavīriyatādīhīti ādi-saddena paññāpayogabalavataṃ pamoduppilāvanañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tassa niggahaṇanti tassa uddhatacittassa samādhisambojjhaṅgādisamuṭṭhāpanena uddhatāpattito nisedhanaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
“诸比丘,当心有掉举时,那时便是修习轻安觉支的时机,是修习定觉支的时机,是修习舍觉支的时机。何以故?诸比丘,掉举之心,依此诸法便得善止息。诸比丘,譬如有人欲灭大火聚,于彼处投入湿草……复撒以尘土。诸比丘,那人能否熄灭那大火聚呢?”“能,尊者!”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Uddhataṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi suvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni…pe… paṃsukena ca okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetunti? Evaṃ bhante’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).
此处亦应理解为:轻安觉支等诸觉支,各各依于其相应之“食”而修习,即将其策发起来。其中,轻安觉支的修习已经说过,定觉支的修习正在阐明,而另一支(舍觉支)随后即当宣说。显示巴利原文
Etthāpi yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena passaddhisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā samuṭṭhāpanāti veditabbā. Tattha passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanā vuttā eva, samādhisambojjhaṅgassa vuccamānā, itarassa anantaraṃ vakkhati.
“因慧的运用变得微弱”:指慧的功用不明显。正如布施以无贪为主,持戒以无瞋为主,修习则以无痴为主。当慧不够强有力时,修习便不能前后相续地引生殊胜;犹如食物未经妥善调理,不能令修行者的心生起欢喜,修习便以此而变得“无滋味”;同样地,由于未正确依循行道而修,便不能体验到寂止之乐,心也就因此变得“无滋味”。因此说:“慧的运用……变得无滋味”。对治此的方法是激发“悚惧”与激发“净信”。为说明这一点,才说“八种悚惧事”等。其中,生、老、病、死各随其应发生于善趣与恶趣中,由此应知与之不同的恶趣之苦——以五种系缚等、饥渴等、互相恼害等为因。而这一切苦,是就诸有情依托于现有之“有”而执取的苦来说的;于过去、未来二时中,作为轮回根本的苦,则被单独执取。然而,那些依食而活、依劳动成果而活的众生,其与其他人不共的谋生之苦,应知被执取为第八种悚惧事。“这称为在适当时候的激励”:指在应激励时,依前述方法,以悚惧与激发净信而正确地激励;即以引发悚惧为前提,激发净信,令修习之心喜悦满足,这是其义。显示巴利原文
Paññāpayogamandatāyāti paññābyāpārassa appabhāvena. Yathā hi dānaṃ alobhappadhānaṃ, sīlaṃ adosappadhānaṃ, evaṃ bhāvanā amohappadhānā. Tattha yadā paññā na balavatī hoti, tadā bhāvanā pubbenāparaṃ visesāvahā na hoti, anabhisaṅkhato viya āhāro purisassa yogino cittassa abhiruciṃ na janeti, tena taṃ nirassādaṃ hoti, tathā bhāvanāya sammadeva avīthipaṭipattiyā upasamasukhaṃ na vindati, tenāpi cittaṃ nirassādaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpayoga…pe… nirassādaṃ hotī’’ti. Tassa saṃveguppādanaṃ pasāduppādanañca tikicchananti taṃ dassento ‘‘aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūnī’’tiādimāha. Tattha jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni yathārahaṃ sugatiyaṃ duggatiyañca hontīti tadaññameva pañcavidhabandhanādi-khuppipāsādi-aññamaññavibādhanādihetukaṃ apāyadukkhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tayidaṃ sabbaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ paccuppannabhavanissitaṃ gahitanti atīte anāgate ca kāle vaṭṭamūlakadukkhāni visuṃ gahitāni. Ye pana sattā āhārūpajīvino, tattha ca uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino, tesaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ jīvikadukkhaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ saṃvegavatthu gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye sampahaṃsanatāti ayaṃ sampahaṃsitabbasamaye vuttanayena tena saṃvejanavasena ceva pasāduppādanavasena ca sammadeva pahaṃsanā, saṃvegajananapubbakapasāduppādanena bhāvanācittassa tosanāti attho.
“达到了正确的行道”:指离开了昏沉与掉举,依循寂止的行道,正确而无偏差地、如实地达到了修习的行道。在“不昏沉”等词中,由于未过度倾向于懈怠类的法,故为“不昏沉”;由于未过度倾向于掉举类的法,故为“不掉举”;由于慧的运用能力以及证得寂止之乐,故为“不无滋味”;正因如此,心于所缘“平稳地持续运作”,并且“步入了寂止的行道”。其中,由于不昏沉,在策励方面便无需作用;由于不掉举,在抑制方面便无需作用;由于不无滋味,在激励方面便无需作用。由不昏沉与不掉举,心于所缘平稳地持续运作;由不无滋味,心步入了寂止的行道。或者也应这样理解:由于平稳地持续运作,所以是不昏沉、不掉举;由于步入了寂止的行道,所以是不无滋味。“这称为在适当时候的捨置观察”:指在应捨置观察之时,克服了对修习之心进行策励、抑制、激励的作用——即名为“干预”的对立面——而作观察。显示巴利原文
Sammāpaṭipattiṃ āgammāti līnuddhaccavirahena samathavīthipaṭipattiyā ca sammā avisamaṃ sammadeva bhāvanāpaṭipattiṃ āgamma. Alīnantiādīsu kosajjapakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ anadhimattatāya alīnaṃ, uddhaccapakkhiyānaṃ anadhimattatāya anuddhataṃ, paññāpayogasattiyā upasamasukhādhigamena ca anirassādaṃ, tato eva ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthipaṭipannañca. Tattha alīnatāya paggahe, anuddhatatāya niggahe, anirassādatāya sampahaṃsane na byāpāraṃ āpajjati, alīnānuddhatatāhi ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ, anirassādatāya samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ. Samappavattiyā vā alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ, samathavīthipaṭipattiyā anirassādanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye ajjhupekkhanatāti ayaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbasamaye bhāvanācittassa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu byāvaṭatāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipakkhaṃ abhibhuyya pekkhanā vuccati.
由于能镇伏对立面,且能成为观的基础,即使是近行定也能完成令此人得定的任务,因此以同等责任之义说“或近行,或安止”。显示巴利原文
Paṭipakkhavikkhambhanato vipassanāya adhiṭṭhānabhāvūpagamanato ca upacārajjhānampi samādānakiccanipphattiyā puggalassa samāhitabhāvasādhanamevāti tattha samadhurabhāvenāha ‘‘upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā’’ti.
关于“舍觉支相应法”在此应说明的内容,可依前文所述而了知。显示巴利原文
Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammāti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttānusārena veditabbaṃ.
由去除随顺与违逆而成就的中舍性,是舍觉支的因:有彼时舍觉支便成就,无彼时则不成就。而此中舍性依所缘境分为两种,故说“有情中舍性”与“行中舍性”。在修习轻安觉支时,对这两者的违逆已被去除,因此为显示仅去除随顺,而说“有情中舍性”等。正因如此,他说:“远离粘着有情、粘着行之人。”对于舍而言,贪是其特别的对立面。正如所说:“舍是贪行者的清净道”(《清净道论》1.269)。显示巴利原文
Anurodhavirodhavippahānavasena majjhattabhāvo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa kāraṇaṃ tasmiṃ sati sijjhanato, asati ca asijjhanato, so ca majjhattabhāvo visayavasena duvidhoti āha ‘‘sattamajjhattatā saṅkhāramajjhattatā’’ti. Tadubhaye ca virujjhanaṃ passaddhisambojjhaṅgabhāvanāya eva dūrīkatanti anurujjhanasseva pahānavidhiṃ dassentena ‘‘sattamajjhattatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā’’ti. Upekkhāya hi visesato rāgo paṭipakkho. Tathā cāha ‘‘upekkhā rāgabahulassa visuddhimaggo’’ti (visuddhi. 1.269).
“以两种行相”:即“业属己有的随观”与“我空的随观”这两种原因。“唯二”是简别,因二者数量等同。无主即非我所性。若实有自我,则因彼有归属,衣等物即可称为我所;然而那样的自我其实全不存在,这是意旨所在。“不久存”指不能经久、不恒久、短暂,即无常之义。“暂时”是其同义词。显示巴利原文
Dvīhākārehīti kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇaṃ attasuññatāpaccavekkhaṇanti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi. Dvīhevāti avadhāraṇaṃ saṅkhyāsamānatāya. Assāmikabhāvo anattaniyatā. Sati hi attani tassa kiñcanabhāvena cīvaraṃ aññañca kiñci attaniyaṃ nāma siyā, so pana koci natthevāti adhippāyo. Anaddhaniyanti na addhānakkhamaṃ, na ciraṭṭhāyi ittaraṃ aniccanti attho. Tāvakālikanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.
「执为我所」:即作我所之执著,以「我所」之渴爱执取而住。「视为财富」:即视为财富,执为财物。显示巴利原文
Mamāyatīti mamattaṃ karoti, ‘‘mama’’nti taṇhāya pariggayha tiṭṭhati. Dhanāyantāti dhanaṃ drabyaṃ karontā.
此念处之开示,是依前分道而说的,乃指前分觉支而言,故说:「以觉支摄持的念是苦谛。」显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ satipaṭṭhānadesanā pubbabhāgamaggavasena desitāti pubbabhāgiyabojjhaṅge sandhāyāha ‘‘bojjhaṅgapariggāhikā sati dukkhasacca’’nti.
四谛品注释显示巴利原文
Catusaccapabbavaṇṇanā
119 119.「如自性」:指不颠倒的自性、逼迫相;或任何自性即如其自性,故为逼迫、坚硬等自性之义。「能生、能等起」:指能生起转起相之苦,能等起相状之苦。「前渴爱」:指在苦生起之前已存在的渴爱。显示巴利原文
119.Yathāsabhāvatoti aviparītasabhāvato bādhanalakkhaṇato, yo yo vā sabhāvo yathāsabhāvo, tato, ruppanādikakkhaḷādisabhāvatoti attho. Janikaṃ samuṭṭhāpikanti pavattalakkhaṇassa dukkhassa janikaṃ nimittalakkhaṇassa samuṭṭhāpikaṃ. Purimataṇhanti dukkhanibbattito puretarasiddhaṃ taṇhaṃ.
当以苦集的不再转起状态来摄持时,灭也被视为仿佛属于有续所摄,因此说为「自己的四谛」。关于「他者的」,道理也是如此。因此世尊说:「就在这仅一寻长、有想、有心意的身躯中,我施设世间,施设世间集,施设世间灭,施设世间灭的道路。」(相应部1.107)那么,初修业者如何摄持灭谛呢?他通过传闻等成立的行相来摄持,如此,即使是对出世间的觉支进行摄持,也不成相违。所谓「如其可能」(yathāsambhavato),意思是随其可能;这是指除了灭谛之外,其余诸谛应当借助集与灭来观照。显示巴利原文
Sasantatipariyāpannānaṃ dukkhasamudayānaṃ appavattibhāvena pariggayhamāno nirodhopi sasantatipariyāpanno viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘attano vā cattāri saccānī’’ti. Parassa vāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca paññapemi, lokasamudayañca paññapemi, lokanirodhañca paññapemi, lokanirodhagāminipaṭipadañca paññapemī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.107). Kathaṃ pana ādikampiko nirodhasaccāni pariggaṇhātīti? Anussavādisiddhamākāraṃ pariggaṇhāti, evañca katvā lokuttarabojjhaṅge uddissapi pariggaho na virujjhati. Yathāsambhavatoti sambhavānurūpaṃ, ṭhapetvā nirodhasaccaṃ sesasaccavasena samudayavayā veditabbāti attho.
说到「有肉的骨锁」等,七种冢间之所以以骨为业处,其余如膨胀相等则以自性为业处,因此这九种冢间被说为安止业处。所说的「唯二种」,即指「安般念」与「三十二分身」两种。所谓「倾向」(abhinivesa),是指观的倾向,而这种倾向正是对应当思择的诸法的摄持。威仪以及眺望等,仅仅是色法的阶段差别,如同表示动作等,并不能用作思择。由于盖与觉支最初不应被摄持,所以说「在威仪……不会生起」。正如借助头发等名称来摄持取着它们的那类法那样,借助威仪等名称,摄持的是那些阶段性的色法;而通过盖等面向,摄持的则是与它们相应、依止它们的法。这正是大尸婆长老所说「在威仪等当中也会生起倾向」的意图所在。至于「这些到底存在吗?」等话语,则是为了显示对初修业者而言,威仪等的自性并非所应希求,因为若尚未遍知,便谈不上真正的遍知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṃ samaṃsa’’ntiādikā satta sivathikā aṭṭhikakammaṭṭhānatāya itarāsaṃ uddhumātakādīnaṃ sabhāvenevāti navannaṃ sivathikānaṃ appanākammaṭṭhānatā vuttā. Dveyevāti ‘‘ānāpānaṃ, dvattiṃsākāro’’ti imāni dveyeva. Abhinivesoti vipassanābhiniveso, so pana sammasanīyadhamme pariggaho. Iriyāpathā ālokitādayo ca rūpadhammānaṃ avatthāvisesamattatāya na sammasanupagā viññattiādayo viya. Nīvaraṇabojjhaṅgā ādito na pariggahetabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘iriyāpatha…pe… na jāyatī’’ti. Kesādiapadesena tadupādānadhammā viya iriyāpathādiapadesena tadavatthā rūpadhammā pariggayhanti, nīvaraṇādimukhena ca taṃ sampayuttā taṃnissayadhammāti adhippāyena mahāsīvatthero ‘‘iriyāpathādīsupiabhiniveso jāyatī’’ti āha. Atthi nu kho metiādi pana sabhāvato iriyāpathādīnaṃ ādikammikassa anicchitabhāvadassanaṃ. Apariññāpubbikā hi pariññāti.
137 诚然,在开示与简说中,处处都提到了比丘,如「诸比丘,在此处……」等,这是为了显示修习需有比丘身份;然而,为了表明这一教导普遍适用于所有人,所以说「诸比丘,无论何人」,并不只限于比丘。为表达此义,才说「无论何人,比丘或……」。所谓「阿若」(aññā),是指那不被见道所识的境界所限而通达的最上道慧,此慧同时也是果,故为最高果,因此说「阿若就是阿拉汉果」。即使在较短的时间内,也显示了教法的「导出」性质,这正是为了建立这样的关联。显示巴利原文
137. Kāmaṃ ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’tiādinā uddesaniddesesu tattha tattha bhikkhuggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, taṃ paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanatthaṃ, desanā pana sabbasādhāraṇāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yo hi koci, bhikkhave’’icceva vuttaṃ, na bhikkhuyevāti dassento ‘‘yo hi koci, bhikkhu vā’’tiādimāha. Dassanamaggena ñātamariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā jānantī sikhāppattā aggamaggapaññā aññā nāma, tassa phalabhāvato aggaphalampīti āha ‘‘aññāti arahatta’’nti. Appatarepi kāle sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ dassentoti yojanā.
138 「导出者」(niyyātento)即是结论。显示巴利原文
138.Niyyātentoti nigamento.
《根五十篇复注》显示巴利原文
Mūlapaṇṇāsa-ṭīkā
(第二部分)显示巴利原文
(Dutiyo bhāgo)